TranSystems Corporation - LGM Construction

Federal Express Oakland 

Sort Expansion 

PROJECT MANUAL: Sort Building (Package 

“SB”) 

Oakland International Airport 

1 Sally Ride Way 

Oakland, CA 94621 

Federal Express Project No. 8634515 

Federal Express Contract No. 08-0134 

October 17, 2011 

Owner: 

Architect / Engineer: 

3680 Hacks Cross Road 

Building H, 3rd Floor 

Memphis, TN 38125 

505 14th Street, Suite 1000 

Oakland, CA 94612

501070099 Federal Express Oakland Sort Expansion Issued for Bid 10/11 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS 

00010 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 

00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

00300 BID FORM 

EXHIBIT A: CONTRACTOR’S KEY PERSONNEL 

BID EVALUATION 

EXHIBIT C-5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

00320 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

00500 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FORMS 

00550 PORT OF OAKLAND REQUIREMENTS 

00702 GENERAL CONDITIONS 

00711 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01010 SUMMARY 

01015 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

01035 COORDINATION 

01040 SUBMITTALS 

01050 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES 

01052 EXISITING FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 

01063 PERSONNEL BEHAVIOR 

01075 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 

01090 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 

01112 SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 

EXHIBIT A – RAMP SAFETY PROCEDURES 

EXHIBIT B - CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEE LISTING 

EXHIBIT C - FEDEX RAMP PASS REQUEST FORM 

EXHIBIT D - CONSTRUCTION NOTIFICATION 

FEDEX SECURITY VENDOR ID REQUEST FORM 

01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

01172 FEDERAL EXPRESS’ SPECIAL PROCEDURES 

01230 ALTERNATES 

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 

01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

01312 WORK COMPLETION SCHEDULE 

01320 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 

01322 PROGRESS REPORTS 

01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

01550 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN 

01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

01622 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 

EXHIBIT A: CONTRACTOR RECEIVING FORM 

01632 SUBSTITUTIONS 

01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 

01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION 

02113 CONTAMINATED SOILS 

02145 DEWATERING 

02220 SITE DEMOLITION 

02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION 

02230 SITE CLEARING 

02239 CEMENT MODIFICATION OF SOILS 

02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 

02300 EARTHWORK 

02457 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES 

02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 

02512 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 

02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE 

02553 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 

02605 UNDERGROUND UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 



02630 STORM DRAINAGE 

02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 

02763 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 

02764 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 

02821 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 

04816 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 

DIVISION 5 – METALS 

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 

05121 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 

05210 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 

05310 STEEL DECKING 

05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 

05510 METAL STAIRS 

05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 

05530 METAL GRATINGS 

05811 EXPANSION CONTROL 

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 

06105 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 

06170 STRUCTURAL THERMAL BLOCKING 

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOSITURE PROTECTION 

07210 BUILDING INSULATION 

07273 AIR-BARRIERS 



07412 METAL WALL PANELS 

07413 INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 

07540 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 

07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 

07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

07920 JOINT SEALANTS 

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 

08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 

08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 

08390 WATERTIGHT DOORS AND BARRIERS 

08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 

08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 

08620 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 

08710 DOOR HARDWARE 

08800 GLAZING 

08911 FIXED LOUVERS 

08952 TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL SYSTEMS 

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 

09250 GYPSUM BOARD 

09310 CERAMIC TILE 

09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 

09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 

09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 

09681 CARPET TILE 

09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 



DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES 

10101 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 

10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 

10260 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 

10270 ACCESS FLOORING 

10431 SIGNAGE 

10505 METAL LOCKERS 

10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 

10730 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE CANOPIES 

10801 TOILET ACCESSORIES 

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

11132 PROJECTION SCREENS 

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 

12356 CASEWORK 

12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

13010 GENERAL PROVISIONS—LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION 

13100 WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS—LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION PACKAGE 

13125 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 

15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL 

15012 FED-EX FACILITY EPN – NUMBERING STANDARDS 



15040 LEED REQUIREMENTS AND LEED POINTS CHECKLIST 

15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

15250 INSULATION 

15401 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 

15405 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM 

15407 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 

15412 AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE SYSTEM 

15423 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 

15425 PIPING TESTS 

15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 

15550 FIRE PROTECTION 

APPENDIX: MANAGING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT-FM GLOBAL 

15700 HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 

15733 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 

15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION 

15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS—VARIABLE VOLUME 

15900 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 

15990 AIR AND WATER TESTING AND BALANCING 

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 

16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS - ELECTRICAL 

16020 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 

16031 ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 

16032 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 

16041 FACILITY WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 

16042 FACILITY WIRING FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 

16131 FACILITY COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURE 

16132 SECURITY SYSTEM INFRASTRUCTRE 

16160 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

16173 HANGERS AND SUPPORTERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



16175 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

16191 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 

16199 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES 

16320 12KV CONDUCTORS 

16371 12KV – 480-277V SECONDARD DOUBLE-ENDED UNIT SUBSTATION 

16405 WIRING DEVICES 

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 

16420 PANELBOARDS 

16430 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 

16440 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 

16450 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR SYSTEMS 

16460 PACKAGED LIFE SAFETY ENGINE GENERATORS, 480-277V 

16470 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 480-277V 

16501 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 

16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 

16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 

16600 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 



APPENDICES 

APPENDIX A FEDERAL EXPRESS CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FOR FULLY DESIGNED PROJECTS 

APPENDIX B PAVEMENT SECTION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FEDERAL EXPRESS SECURITY 

SCREENING BUILDING PROJECT, OAKLAND INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, PREPARED BY 

KLEINFELDER, DATED JULY 23, 2008 

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FEDERAL EXPRESS OAKLAND NEW SECURITY 

SCREENING BUILDING OAKLAND INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA, 

PREPARED BY KLEINFELDER, DATED JUNE 13, 2008 

ADDENDUM TO GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION, NEW FEDERAL EXPRESS SCREENING 

BUILDING, OAKLAND INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA, PREPARED BY 

KLEINFELDER, DATED APRIL 12, 2011. 

APPENDIX C1 PORT OF OAKLAND- BIDDING UNDER THE PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT 

APPENDIX C2 PORT OF OAKLAND MARITIME AND AVIATION PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT (MAPLA) 

APPENDIX C3 PORT OF OAKLAND MAPLA – EXHIBIT A - SUBSTANCE ABUSE PREVENTION POLICY; 

DRUG TESTING 

APPENDIX D CONTRACTOR SAFETY MANUAL 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 



SECTION 00010 - NOTICE TO BIDDERS 

Sealed bids for the project: Federal Express Oakland Sort Expansion: Sort Building (Package “SB”) will be 

received on behalf of Federal Express Corporation by: 

Michael Baker, Project Manager 

3680 Hacks Cross Road, Building H, 3rd Floor 


Phone: 901-434-8754 

Until 2:00 p.m. Central Daylight Time on November 16, 2011 where 

they will be privately opened. Any bid received 

after the designated time will be returned unopened. 

Copies of the Bid Package may be obtained by going to the following web site: 

http://www.dpibidroom.com/ 

Password: OAKH-02-prebid 

(case sensitive) 

Costs for obtaining Bid Documents shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 

A 20% bid bond, a 100% performance bond and a 100% labor and material payment bond will be required. Federal 

Express Corporation, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 

2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, 

Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to 

such Act, hereby notifies all Bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this 

advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this Notice 

and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. 

All bids shall be sent via Federal Express Priority Overnight delivery to the address listed above. No hand-deliveries 

(including delivery by messenger or courier) will be accepted. 

On the outside of the envelope containing the Bid, affix the Contractor’s name, address, license number and relevant 

information as required by statue of the state of the location of the Work. Also on the Bid Envelope, state the project 

name and project number. 

Federal Express Corporation reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Bids and to waive any technicalities or 

irregularities therein. No Bidder may withdraw its bid for a period of ninety (90) days from the date set for the Bid 

Opening. 

END OF SECTION 00010 

NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00010 - 1


SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

1.00 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION 

A. To be considered responsive, make Bid in accordance with the Bidding Requirements. Failure to 

comply with the Bidding Requirements may result in Bid rejection. 

B. Bidders note that blank forms are bound into the Project Manual as Exhibits to the Sections to 

which they apply. This is done for the information and convenience of bidders. Do not remove 

these forms. 

C. The bid due date and time shall be as indicated on the Notice to Bidders. 

D. Deliver bids in accordance with instructions provided in the Notice to Bidders. 

2.00 ARTICLE 2 - SECURING BIDDING DOCUMENTS 

Copies of the Contract Documents for bidding purposes are available as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 

Bidder acknowledges that all information released to it by Federal Express concerning this Project is 

proprietary information and the sole property of Federal Express. This information shall be used only for 

Bid preparation. 

3.00 ARTICLE 3 - LICENSING 

A. Qualified bidders must be Licensed Contractors in the State of California. The name of the bidder, 

the bidder’s license number, expiration date and license classification applying to the bid shall be 

placed on the outside of the envelope containing the bid. 

B. If the appropriate licensing information is not displayed on the outside of the Bid envelope, the Bid 

may be returned unopened. 

4.00 ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & INSPECTION OF SITE 

A. Before bid submission, Bidder shall carefully examine the Drawings and read the Project Manual. 

B. At the mandatory Pre-Bid meeting, bidder shall visit the site of the proposed Project Work and 

shall acquaint itself with the existing facilities, existing utilities, working conditions and limitations 

under which the Work shall be performed. The Bid shall cover costs of every item necessary to 

perform the Work. 

C. Additional compensation will not be allowed for conditions not known for anticipated by the Bidder 

at the time of Bid submission if the conditions could have been discovered through a thorough 

examination of the Site and existing conditions. Bid submission will be construed as conclusive 

evidence that the Bidder has made such an examination. 

D. Bidder shall protect Federal Express’ personnel and property from injury or loss arising in 

connection with Bidding on this Work. The Bidder shall remedy damage, injury or loss except that 

caused directly or solely by agents or employees of Federal Express. 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 1


E. Bidder shall ensure that Bidder’s employees observe and obey Federal Express’ safety and 

security requirements as set forth in the Contract Documents. 

5.00 - ARTICLE 5 - INTERPRETATION AND CORRECTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Bidder shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer, TranSystems of ambiguities, inconsistencies, 

errors or omissions in the Contract Documents. 

B. Bidders shall submit questions about the Contract Documents in writing. Responses will be issued 

to prime contractor Bidders in the form of written addenda which will become part of the Contract 

Documents. No questions will be accepted within six working days from the Bid opening date. 

Addenda will not be issued less than three working days before the Bid opening date except (if 

necessary) for an Addendum postponing the Bid opening date or withdrawing the request for bids. 

6.00 ARTICLE 6 - SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. If a bidder requests a pre-bid approval of a substitution, data required to make an evaluation must 

be received no later than six working days before the bid opening date. If the substitution is 

acceptable, it will be identified in an addendum to all Bidders. 

7.00 - ARTICLE 7 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE AND SITE TOUR 

A. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 1:00 p.m. on Wednesday, September 7, 2011 at 

Federal Express, 1 Sally Ride Way, Oakland, California. 

B. A pre-bid site tour will be held at the Pre-Bid Conference. 

C. Prospective bidders shall be allowed to bring a maximum of three representatives to the pre-bid 

conference. 

D. All attendees must bring at least one form of government issued photo identification to gain access 

into the facility for the meeting and to gain access to visit the site. 

E. Prospective bidders must respond to TranSystems (Adam Ojeda, aaojeda@transystems.com) on 

or before September 1, 2011 regarding confirmation of attendance at the pre-bid conference. At 

this time, provide the names of all attendees that the firm that each represents. 

8.00 - ARTICLE 8 - BID FORM 

A. Submit Bid on the form provided (Section 00300 - Bid Form), properly executed and with all items 

filled in. Bids shall include all applicable federal, state and local taxes. 

B. Do not change the wording of the Bid Form. 

C. Unauthorized conditions, limitations or provisions attached to the Bid may result in rejection of the 

bid. 

D. Any alterations to Bidder provided content on the Bid Form shall be initialed by the person signing 

the Bid. 



E. No verbal, telephonic or telegraphic Bids or modifications of Bids will be accepted. 

F. Bidder has full responsibility for timely delivery of Bids. 

G. The Bidder agrees that the subcontractors listed on the Bid Form are the subcontractors proposed 

to carry out those parts of the work noted in its Bid and shall not employ any to whom Federal 

Express may reasonably object. 

H. When both words and figures are present describing a numerical value, the words shall govern in 

the event of a conflict. 

9.00 - ARTICLE 9 - BID SECURITY 

A. A Bid Bond in the amount specified in the Notice to Bidders is required and shall be issued by a 

Surety acceptable to Federal Express and licensed to do business in the state of the location of 

the Work.. The bond shall be made payable to Federal Express. 

B. The attorney in fact who executes the Bid Bond on behalf of the Surety shall attach a certified and 

current copy of his power of attorney. 

C. Federal Express has the right to retain the Bid Bond of Bidders to whom an award is being 

considered until: 

1. The Contract has been executed; or 

2. The specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn; or 

3. All Bids have been rejected. 

D. If the Bidder refuses to enter into contract or fails to furnish the required attachments properly 

executed, the amount of the Bid Bond shall be forfeited to Federal Express as liquidated damages, 

not as a penalty. 

10.00 - ARTICLE 10 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 

A. Before the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, Bids may be withdrawn only by written 

request, signed by a person legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. 

B. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted until the time designated for receipt of Bids provided that they 

fully conform to the Bidding Requirements. 

C. Bids may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period 

following the Bid opening. Bidder so agrees in submitting the Bid. 

11.00 - ARTICLE 11 - SUBMISSION OF BIDS 

A. Address Bid to Federal Express and deliver to Federal Express at the location given in the Notice 

to Bidders on or before the date and time set for Bid opening. 



B. Enclose bids in an envelope. Fill in all information on the cover sheet, as required by State 

Bidding Laws. 

C. The sealed bid shall be clearly noted with “BID ENCLOSED” prominently displayed on the outside. 

D. Submit the following documents that make up the Bid: 

1. Proposed construction schedule in the form of a Microsoft Project CPM schedule, in 

accordance with Section 01312 

2. Proposed vendors and subcontractors 

3. Proposed suppliers 

4. Certificates of Insurance 

5. Summary of firm’s qualifications and background on past, similar contracts and five client 

references. 

6. Summary of experience and background of proposed electrical subcontractor on past, 

similar contracts and five client references. 

7. Statement of acceptance of terms of Federal Express Standard Contract 

8. Key personnel to be used on the Project noted on Exhibit A in this section: Federal 

Express reserves the right to reject any person(s) or firm(s) assigned by the Contractor. 

a) Quality Assurance Representative 

b) Contractor’s Project Manager 

c) Contractor’s Superintendent 

d) Contractor’s Safety Representative 

e) General Foreman 

9. Statement regarding DBE status of bidder and of any subcontractors and total dollar 

value of bid for DBE participants, if applicable 

10. Prime contractor’s 2010 audited financial statement 

11. Section 00100 Exhibit A Contractor’s Key Personnel 

12. Section 00300 Bid Form 

13. Section 00300 Exhibit C-5, Schedule of Values 

E. Federal Express reserves the right to reject any person(s) or firm(s) assigned by the Contractor. 

12.00 ARTICLE 12 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 

A. Federal Express’ intent is to award a contract based upon the best responsive Bid submitted by a 

qualified Bidder with full consideration of any alternates. 

B. Federal Express has the right to accept alternates in any order or combination and to determine 

the best responsive Bid on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the alternates accepted. 

C. Federal Express reserves the right to accept any or all Bids and to waive any informalities, 

technicalities or irregularities therein. 

D. If liquidated damages are required and the Bidder takes exception to them, Federal Express may 

reject the Bid. 

E. The Bid Evaluation form included in this Section will be used for bid evaluation. 



13.00 ARTICLE 13 - POST BID INFORMATION 

A. Upon request, Bidder shall furnish proof of competency and evidence satisfactory to Federal 

Express that it and its subcontractors have sufficient means and experience in the type of work 

called for to complete the Work in a satisfactory manner. 

B. Federal Express may conduct a pre-award facility survey and investigation to determine whether 

the Bidder has the qualifications to perform the Work. 

C. After Bid submission but before selection of the successful Bidder, Federal Express may require 

the following information: 

1. Copy of detailed estimate used to prepare Bid. 

2. Welding quality control procedures to be used. 

D. The Bidder may be directed to attend an initial meeting with Federal Express. At this meeting, 

administrative procedures and other matters will be discussed. Agreements reached at this 

meeting shall not be binding unless issued in the form of a written modification to the Contract 

Documents as defined in “The Agreement”. The minutes of this meeting will be distributed to the 

parties in attendance. 

14.00 ARTICLE 14 - EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT 

A. The form of Agreement to be executed by the successful Bidder is included in the Contract 

Documents as Section 00500. 

B. The successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required copies of “The Agreement” to Federal 

Express within five days of receipt of “The Agreement”. The successful Bidder shall not take 

exception to “The Agreement”. 

C. After execution of “The Agreement” by Federal Express, the successful Bidder shall deliver to 

Federal Express the: 

1. Performance Bond 

2. Labor & Material Payment Bond 

3. Insurance certificates (naming Federal Express, TranSystems, Rentenbach Constructors, 

Inc. and the Port of Oakland as additionally insured in exchange for a fully executed copy 

of the Agreement. 

4. Within seven (7) working days, submit to the Construction Manager the Schedule of 

Values. See Exhibit C-5 to the Construction Agreement. 

15.00 ARTICLE 15 - ALTERNATES 

A. Federal Express may evaluate and consider acceptance of cost effective alternates if they meet 

the functional and operational requirements of the Project. 

B. Alternates solicited and unsolicited, shall be prominently labeled as such and submitted in addition 

to and attached to the Base Bid. 



C. Unsolicited Alternates will not be considered unless the Bidder responds to the Base Bid and 

stated Alternates and Allowances. 



SECTION 00100 

EXHIBIT A 

CONTRACTOR’S KEY PERSONNEL 

Project: ______________________________________________________________ 

Project No. ____________________ 

Contractor: ______________________________________________________________ 

Date: ______________________________________________________________ 

(Phone Numbers provided will be used only for emergency contact) 

Project Manager 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

Superintendent 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

General Foreman 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

Safety Representative 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

Quality Assurance Representative 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 

Welding Quality Control Inspector 

Name ___________________________________ 

Phone No. ___________________________________ 




SECTION 00300 - BID FORM 

TO: Federal Express Corporation FedEx Project: Federal Express Oakland Sort Expansion: 


Building H, 3 

Sort Building (Package “SB”), 

rd Floor 


Attention: 

Michael Baker, Project Manager 

Phone: 901-434-8754 

Name of Bidder:____________________________________________ 

Address of Bidder:__________________________________________ 

__________________________________________ 

(Area Code) Phone:_________________________________________ 

Bidder’s Contractor License Number/ State *__________________Expiration Date *_______________ 

Classification Applicable to this Bid * ____________________________________________________ 

Monetary Limit of License * ___________________________________________________________ 

* If applicable. 

Indicate (X) whether a: ___Corporation ___Partnership ___Individual 

State of Incorporation or Formation of Partnership________________________ 

If Bidder is a corporation, state the full names of President and Secretary and their respective titles: If Bidder is a 

partnership, state the full names of all partners: 

______________________ ______________________ 

______________________ ______________________ 

Identify bidder as one of the following: 

___________ (1) Non-Minority and Non-Female Owned Business 

___________ (2) Minority Owned Business 

___________ (3) Female Owned Business 

___________ (4) Minority and Female Owned Business 

___________ (5) Federal Government Entity 

Social Security Number or Federal Tax I.D. Number ___________________ 

(Minority/Female Owned means at least 51% ownership by Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, American 

Orientals, Asian/Pacific Islanders, American Eskimos/Alute, Females or any combination thereof.) 

By submission of this bid the undersigned hereby acknowledges that: 

1) It has received, read and understands the contract Documents and its Bid is made in accordance 

therewith. 

BID FORM 00300 - 1


2) It has visited the site and has familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be 

performed and has correlated its observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

3) Its Bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the Contract 

Documents, without exception. 

BASE BID – FedEx Oakland Sort Expansion: Sort Building (Package “SB”) 

The undersigned hereby agrees to furnish all Construction Requirements to include materials, supplies, equipment, 

tools, facilities, transportation, and to perform labor and services necessary for, required in connection with, and 

properly incidental to the completion of the project described in the Contract Documents. 

PROJECT NO. 8634515 for the total sum of _________________________________________ 

(words) 

__________________________________($____________________________________________ 

(figures) 

which is identified as the total BASE BID and includes all applicable sales and other taxes; of 

which___________________________________________________________________________ 

(words) 

_____________($________________________) is INCLUDED as the cost for the required bonds. 

(figures) 

UNIT PRICES 

If the required quantities of the items listed below are increased or decreased by Change Order, the adjustment unit 

prices set forth on the Bid Form and on the unit price noted below shall apply to such increased or decreased quantities: 

Excavation of Contaminated Materials and Backfill 

Excavation and Backfill of Unsuitable Materials 

($_____________________) 

($_____________________) 

per cu. yd. 

per cu. yd. 

Bidder shall determine before submitting a bid that it has received every Addenda issued, and shall acknowledge 

their receipt below: 

Addendum No. 

Dated 

__________________________ __________________ 

__________________________ __________________ 

__________________________ __________________ 

__________________________ __________________ 

BID FORM 00300 - 2


Complete sets of Contract Documents shall be used in preparing bids. Federal Express assumes no responsibility 

for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents. In addition, Federal 

Express makes copies of the Contract Documents available only to obtain bids on the work and does not confer or 

infer a license or grant them for any other use. 

The undersigned agrees: 

(1) To hold open its bid for 90 days from the date of the bid opening. 

(2) To execute an Agreement (in the form of Section 00500, and without modification) for the Work in 

the amount of the compensation stated in this Bid. 

(3) To provide a Performance Bond, a Labor and Material Payment Bond, and Certificates of 

Insurance, as defined in the Contract Documents with the appropriate certified and current copy of 

power of attorney. 

(4) That if it defaults in executing the Agreement or in furnishing the required bonds, Federal Express 

will sustain liquidated damages in an amount equal to the Bid Bond. 

If the undersigned executes and delivers the Agreement, Bonds, and Certificates, or if the Bid is not accepted within 

90 days after the bid opening date, the Bid Bond will be returned to the undersigned upon request. 

The following is a complete listing of all subcontractors proposed by the Bidder for use on the Work (attach 

additional sheet if necessary): 

Subcontractor Local Impact Discipline Subcontract Contractor 

Name Area? (Y or N) of Work Amount License No. 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

_____________ __________ ____________________ __________________ _________________ 

The undersigned agrees that the Work shall be substantially complete (as defined in the Contract Documents) no 

later than as defined in Section 00500. 

In the event of a conflict between the Total Bid Amount entered on the Schedule of Values (Exhibit C-5) and the 

Base Bid amount entered on the Bid Form, the Bid Form shall govern. 

Federal Express solely reserves the right to make additions to or deductions from the Base Bid amount shown on 

the Bid Form on the basis of the line item prices indicated on the Schedule of Values (Exhibit C-5). 

Additionally, Federal Express solely reserves the right to use the information provided by the Bidder for the purpose 

of bid evaluation and/or the basis of progress payments made to the Bidder in the event of Contract Award issuance 

and acceptance of Contract. 

BID FORM 00300 - 3


The undersigned represents that this bid is made in good faith, without fraud, collusion, or connection of any kind 

with any other bidder for the same work, that it is competing in its own interest and in its own behalf, without 

connection or obligation to any undisclosed person, that no other person has any interest in regard to the place 

where it is to be done, that it has made its own examination and estimates and from them makes this Bid. 

The undersigned hereby warrants that he/she has the authority to sign this bid and legally bind the Bidder to it. 

Name of Bidder: _____________________________________________________ 

By: (Type or Print)______________________________________________________ 

Signature_______________________________________________________________ 

Title______________________________________Date_________________________ 

BID FORM 00300 - 4

6K IP Sort Building & Bridge Bid Evaluation 

Reviewer: Michael Baker Date: 

Rating* 

Category Assessment Guide Max Points Bidder A Bidder B Bidder C Bidder D Bidder E Bidder F 

Fee 

Contract Exceptions 

DBE Participation Goals 

City Of Oakland 

Experience 

Previous FedEx Project 

Experience 

Ability to develop schedule 

per 1320 and met staffing 

requirement to maintain 

schedule. 

Staff Experience 

Financial Stability 

Quality Work 

Max Points: Lowest fee with no scope exceptions; 

90 to 99% Points: Next lowest fee with no scope exceptions; 

80 to 89%Points: Next lowest fee with no scope exceptions; 

70 to 79% Points: Next lowest fee with no scope exceptions; 

60to 69%Points: highest fee with no scope exceptions; 

0% Points: Unacceptable scope exceptions 

76% to Max Points: No exceptions, minor exceptions, or exceptions that are 

acceptable to FedEx; 

26% to 75%Points: Exceptions that require negotiation; 

0% to 25% Points: Exceptions that are unacceptable to FedEx or refuses local 

contract labor requirements 

76% to Max Points: Meets or exceeds goal of 16.9% MBE & 4.5% WBE or 

combined 21.4% DBE; 

26% to 75%Points: 10.7% DBE Participation; 

0% to 25% Points:

FedEx Express 

Oakland Sort Expansion Project 


1 Sally Ride Way, Oakland, CA 94621 

FedEx Project Number: 8634515 CF 20197 

All values should be inclusive of descriptions provided in Contract Documents 

No. 

FedEx 

Expense/Ca 

pital 

Spec 

Item 

1.0: Sort Expansion: Part 1 - Sort Building 

OAK SB_Exhibit C-5_Schedule of Values.xlsx 

Exhibit C-5: Schedule of Values OAK Sort Expansion Project: Package SB - CONTRACTORS TO COMPLETE ALL SHADED CELLS AND SUBMIT AS PART OF BID 

Description 

QTY Unit 

Unit Cost 

Company Name: 

Address: 

10/17/2011 

A B C D E 

F G 

1.01. C Bond LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.02. C Mobilization LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.03. C Temporary and Safety Facilities LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.04. C SWPPP and Erosion Control Facilities LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.05. C Security LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.06. C Street Sweeping LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.07. C Survey, Layout, Field Engineering LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.08. C Utility Identification and potholing LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.09. E Relocate trailers and containers LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.10. E Fence demolition LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.11. E Asphalt Pavement Demolition (including overlay sections) SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.12. E Concrete demolition SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.13. E Storm drain demolition LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.14. E Storm drain structure demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.15. E Raise/lower storm drain structure to grade EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.16. E Underground utility demoliton (water, electrical, gas, sewer, etc) LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.17. E Utility structure demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.18. E Raise/lower utility strucutre EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.19. E Fire hydrant demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.20. E Fire hydrant relocation EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.21. E Light pole demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.22. E Light pole relocation EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.23. E Sign demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.24. E Wood bridge demolition (including stairs) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.25. E Bollard demolition EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.26. E Miscellaneous demolition LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.27. C Excavation (grading limit SFfootprint x 2 feet) CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.28. C Scarify/Compact (all new pavement and building footprint) SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.29. C Fill/Backfill (all backfill of excavated quantity less AB sections) CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.30. C Aggregate base for AC pavement (14.5") CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.31. C Aggregate base for concrete pavement (6") CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.32. C Asphalt pavement (6") SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.33. C Concrete pavement (4") SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.34. C Concrete pads and sidewalk SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.35. C Concrete valley gutter SF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.36. C Retaining wall LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.37. C Bollards EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

Contact: 

Payment Application # 

WORK COMPLETED 

MATERIALS 

TOTAL 

Scheduled Value FROM PREVIOUS 

APPLICATION 

(B+C) 

THIS PERIOD 

PRESENTLY COMPLETED AND 

STORED (NOT IN STORED TO DATE 

B OR C) 

(B+C+D) 

% COMPLETED 

(A/E) 

BALANCE TO 

FINISH (A-E) 

RETAINAGE

FedEx Express 






No. 

FedEx 

Expense/Ca 

pital 

Spec 

Item 


Description 

QTY Unit 

Unit Cost 

Company Name: 

Address: 

Contact: 


10/17/2011 

A B C D E 

F G 


MATERIALS 

TOTAL 


APPLICATION 

(B+C) 

THIS PERIOD 



B OR C) 

(B+C+D) 

% COMPLETED 

(A/E) 

BALANCE TO 

FINISH (A-E) 

RETAINAGE 

1.38. C Metal guard rail LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.39. C K-rail LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.40. C Chain link fence and gates LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.41. C Striping and signage LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.42. C Storm drain structure EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.43. C Storm drain pipe LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.44. C Water pipe (INCLUDING VALVES) LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.45. C Water structures (PIV, meters) EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.46. C Backflow preventers EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.47. C New fire hydrants EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.48. C Natural gas pipe LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.49. C Natural gas meter EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.50. C Natural gas valves EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.51. C Sanitary sewer structures and cleanouts EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.52. C Sanitary sewer pipe LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.53. C Underground electric LF $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.54. C Light poles (including pole bases) EA $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.55. C Electrical equipment LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.56. C Building foundation and piles LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.57. C Building superstructure (including building columns, second floor framing and roof framing) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.58. C Building mezzanine construction LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.59. C Building exterior enclosure (including wall panels, windows, doors, roof and skylights) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.60. C 

1.61. C 

Building first floor tenant improvements (excluding mechanical, plumbing electrical, and fire protection 

systems) 

Building second floor tenant improvements (excluding mechanical, plumbing, electrical, and fire 

protection systems) 

LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.62. C Building complete mechanical system LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.63. C Building complete plumbing system LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.64. C Building complete electrical and telecommunications system LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.65. C Building complete fire protection and fire alarm system (including connection to Inverter Building) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.66. C Building elevators LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.67. C Building stairs, ramps, fences, guards and handrails LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.68. C Building Life Sciences Freezer and Cooler Storage (Rooms 129 and 130) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.69. C Building IP Freezer and Cooler (Rooms 121 and 122) LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.70. C Sort Bridge LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

C Metroplex Modifications for Bridge Tie-in (remove siding/wall, FedEx sign, windows, and restoration) LS 

1.71. C Commissioning LS $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

1.72. C Allowance: Interior fencing as directed by owner of CBP 1 LS $ 50,000.00 $ 50,000.00 $ - $ - $ - $ - 

0% $ 50,000.00 $ 

- 

1.73. C Allowance: Permits and Inspection Fees 1 LS $ 200,000.00 $ 200,000.00 $ - $ - $ - $ - 

0% $ 200,000.00 $ 

- 

1.74. C Allowance: Automatic power factor correction capacitor bank systems 1 LS $ 200,000.00 $ 

200,000.00

FedEx Express 






No. 

FedEx 

Expense/Ca 

pital 

Spec 

Item 


Description 

QTY Unit 

Unit Cost 

Company Name: 

Address: 

Contact: 


1.75. C Allowance: Installation of PELZ bag lifting device and support framing 1 LS $ 100,000.00 $ 100,000.00 

Subtotal (Part 1 - New Security Building and Sally Ride Way Improvements) 

CONTRACT SUM 

Additive Alternates 

ALT C 

ALT C 

Contaminated (Class 2) Soil Removal, Testing, Off-haul, Disposal and Backfill/Compaction of Clean 

Class 3 AB 

Overexcavation/ Soft Subgrade Soil Removal, Off-haul, Disposal and Backfill/Compaction of Clean 

Class 3 AB 

10/17/2011 

A B C D E 

F G 


MATERIALS 

TOTAL 


APPLICATION 

(B+C) 

THIS PERIOD 



B OR C) 

(B+C+D) 

% COMPLETED 

(A/E) 

BALANCE TO 

FINISH (A-E) 

RETAINAGE 

$ 

$ 

550,000.00 

550,000.00 

2800 CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

- 

2800 CY $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - #DIV/0! $ - $ 

-


SECTION 00320 - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. A geotechnical report was prepared by Kleinfelder. The report was entitled: “Geotechnical Investigation, 

Federal express Sort Building, Federal express Terminal, Oakland, California”; dated August 23, 2011. 

B. Geotechnical report information represents only the conditions found during the exploration and does not 

constitute a representation, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are typical of those 

throughout the Project site or any part of the Project site. The information is available to assist the 

Contractor in evaluating the extent and complexity of the Work. Design recommendations which may 

appear in the soil consultant's report are made only for evaluation purposes and are not in any manner a 

part of the Contract Documents or of the Contract between the Contractor and the Owner. 

C. Without cost to the Owner, the Contractor may request permission to make additional soil borings or other 

explorations necessary to further determine the Project site conditions. Coordinate additional exploratory 

work with the Owner so as not to interfere with Owner's use of the Project site. 

D. Upon completion of additional exploratory work, backfill the test holes and pits using removed material. If 

removed material is not sufficient, provide additional compactable material of character similar to the native 

soil. Compact the backfill to same density as adjacent soil. 

E. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any deductions or conclusions made on the basis of information 

contained in the appended report and findings of additional explorations. 

F. All Geotechnical information is provided as an attachment to this specification. 


GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 00320 - 1


SECTION 00500 - CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FORMS 

1.1 AGREEMENT FORMS 

A. The following applicable construction agreement forms are included in this Project Manual: 

1. Federal Express Corporation’s Standard Form Construction Agreement shall be executed for 

this project and is included in Appendix A of this Project Manual 

1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

A. Measurement and payment shall be based on the units listed on the Schedule of Values and shall 

include full compensation for furnishing all materials, all preparation, assembly, and installation of 

these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete each item. 

1.3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 

A. Liquidated Damages shall equate to $14,500 per calendar day for each day that the project is not 

Substantially Complete per the required dates stated in the Contract Documents. 

B. Project Manual Appendix A: Federal Express will add a new article into the “Federal Express 

Corporation Standard Form Construction Agreement for Fully Designed Projects” to detail specific 

language describing Liquidated Damages. 


CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FORMS 00500 - 1


SECTION 00550 – PORT OF OAKLAND REQUIREMENTS 

1.1 PORT OF OAKLAND REQUIREMENTS 

A. Work shall comply with all Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement (MAPLA) 

requirements, including those included in Appendix C of this Project Manual. 

1.1 SUBMITTALS 

A. Prior to starting work, Contractor shall sign a Letter of Assent to MAPLA and furnish to Federal 

Express. 

B. Prior to starting work, Contractor shall have each of its subcontractors, including specialty 

subcontractors, sign a Letter of Assent to MAPLA and furnish copies of each letter to Federal Express. 


CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FORMS 00550 - 1


SECTION 00702 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 

PART 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION 

1.1 DEFINITIONS 

A. “Days” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar days unless otherwise noted. 

B. “Project Manual” shall include the Bidding Requirements, Agreement, Conditions of the Agreement and 

the Specifications. 

C. “Substantial Completion”: as defined in the Agreement shall include submitting a Punch List, Occupancy 

Permits and Approvals of all required agencies. The Substantial Completion Date is identified on the 

Notice to Proceed. 

1.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Federal Express will not be responsible for the Contractor’s installation of equipment, whether the 

equipment is Contractor-supplied or Owner-supplied. 

1.3 TITLE OF WORK 

A. The title of the Work, materials and equipment completed or employed shall be in the name of Federal 

Express. 

1.4 SECTIONS AND OTHER HEADINGS 

A. Sections and other heading contained in the Contract Documents are for reference only and shall 

not affect the interpretation or meaning of the Contract Documents. 

1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIPS 

A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish copies of the Contract Documents to each 

subcontractor it may engage in the performance of the Work. 

1.6 PERMITS 

A. The Contractor shall obtain and provide copies to Federal Express of all permits required to 

perform the Work before beginning the Work. 

B. Federal Express will provide the Contractor with the necessary drawings and other related 

information to file for the required permits upon request. 

PART 2 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SUPERINTENDENCE 

2.1 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT MANAGER 

A. The Contractor shall assign a Project Manager during every aspect of the Work and a full time 

superintendent (and any necessary assistants) throughout the duration of Work at the Site. The 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 00702 - 1


Project Manager shall be authorized by the Contractor to act on its behalf in every matter relating 

to the Work. 

2.2 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE 

A. The Contractor shall assign a Safety Representative to coordinate the safety precautions taken by 

the Contractor in its performance of the Work. 

PART 3 - CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES 

3.1 DEFINITIONS AND APPLICATIONS 

A. “Deficiency” is a condition or characteristic in supplies or services furnished by the Contractor that 

is not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. “Correction” means the 

actions taken by the Contractor that are necessary to eliminate a deficiency. 

B. The rights and remedies of Federal Express will not be affected in any way by any other provisions under 

the Contract Documents concerning the conclusiveness of inspection and acceptance; and are in addition 

to and do not limit, any rights afforded to Federal Express by any other Section of the Contract 

Documents. 

C. This Article applies only to deficiencies discovered during performance of the Work and within one year 

from the date of Final Acceptance except where otherwise noted. 

D. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the correction of deficiencies in property furnished by Federal 

Express unless the Contractor performs or is obligated to perform modifications or other work on such 

property. In that event, the Contractor shall be responsible for correction of deficiencies to the extent of 

such modifications other work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the correction of deficiencies 

caused by Federal Express. 

3.2 NOTICE OF DEFICIENCIES 

A. If Federal Express determines that a deficiency exists, Federal Express or its representative will notify the 

Contractor of the deficiency in writing within seven days of discovery. If the Contractor discovers a 

deficiency, it shall submit to Federal within seven days its recommendations for corrective actions with 

sufficient details to enable Federal Express to determine what corrective actions will be taken. 

B. Within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s recommendation for corrective action, Federal Express 

or its representative will give the Contractor written instructions concerning the corrective action to be 

taken and the time limit allotted for it. 

C. The Contractor shall promptly comply with written directions to correct deficiencies. The Contractor shall 

also prepare and furnish to Federal, data and reports applicable to corrections required (including revising 

and updating other affected data called for under the Contract Documents) with no increase in the 

Contractor’s Fee. Corrections shall be made during such time as not to interfere with Federal’s 

operations. 



3.3 TIME OF PERFORMANCE - CONTRACTOR’S FEE 

A. Federal Express will not be responsible for delays in the scheduled deliveries or extensions of time 

resulting from the Contractor’s obligation to correct deficiencies. There will not be any adjustment 

of the delivery schedule or any extension of time as a result of such corrections unless stated by Federal 

Express in a modification to the Contract Documents. 

B. The Contractor shall recognize that this Article shall not be construed as obligating Federal Express to 

increase the Contractor’s Fee. 

C. If, in Federal Express’ opinion it is expedient not to correct or only to partially correct a deficiency, the 

Contractor shall submit technical and cost proposals within seven days for Federal Express’ acceptance 

or rejection of the affected supplies or services in accordance with the revised requirements. An 

equitable reduction in the Contractor’s Fee may be negotiated and reflected in a Change Order. 

3.4 TRANSPORTATION CHARGES 

A. When replacement or correction of supplies is necessary, the Contractor shall be responsible for 

transportation charges. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the supplies while in transit. 

3.5 FAILURE TO CORRECT DEFICIENCIES 

A. If the Contractor fails or refuses to: 

1. Present a detailed recommendation or 

2. Correct deficiencies or 

3. Prepare and furnish data and reports 

Federal Express will give the Contractor written notice specifying the failure or refusal and setting 

a time period during which it must be remedied. 

B. If the failure or refusal is not remedied within the specified period, Federal Express may, by contract or 

otherwise, obtain detailed recommendations for corrective action and correct, replace and/or obtain the 

supplies or services at the Contractor’s expense. 

C. If the Contractor fails or refuses to furnish timely disposition instruction, Federal Express may dispose of 

non-confirming supplies as defined in the Agreement. 

3.6 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENT REPLACEMENTS 

A. Supplies or services furnished in replacement shall be subject to the provisions of the Contract 

Documents to the same extent as supplies or services initially rendered. 

PART 4 - RIGHTS IN DATA 

4.1 CONFIDENTIALITY OF INFORMATION 

A. Project Manuals, Drawings and other information furnished to the Contractor shall remain the property of 

Federal Express. Copies of such information in written, graphic or other tangible form shall be returned to 



Federal Express upon request. Such information shall be kept confidential by the Contractor and shall be 

used only for bidding purpose or in performance of the Work. 

4.2 INVENTIONS 

A. The contractor agrees to grant to Federal Express, unrestricted and royalty free ownership of inventions, 

discoveries and patents made or developed by the Contractor in connection with the Work. The 

Contractor shall grant to Federal express licenses required to permit Federal Express unrestricted use or 

disposition thereof. These licenses shall include the right to grant sublicenses to other persons, 

corporations, companies or Federal Express’ subsidiaries. 

4.3 TECHNICAL INFORMATION 

A. The Contractor agrees that Federal Express shall have the unrestricted right to use, reproduce and 

disclose nonproprietary information furnished to Federal Express by the Contractor in connection with the 

Work. This shall include all technical information embodied in the equipment furnished to Federal 

Express, reports, drawings, specifications, instructions or sketches prepared by the Contractor. 




SECTION 00711 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

PART 1 - GENERAL 


A. The word “Owner” means Federal Express Corporation. 

B. The word “Engineer”, “Architect” or “Architect/Engineer” shall mean TranSystems, 505 14th Street, Suite 

1000, Oakland, California, 94612. 

C. The word “Contractor” means the successful Bidder to whom the contract is awarded. 

D. The word “Construction Manager” shall mean Rentenbach Constructors, Inc., 1102, Grecade Street, 

Greensboro, NC 27408. 

E. The words “install”, “furnish”, “provide”, or words of like import mean the Contractor shall install, furnish, or 

provide, and similarly the words “approved”, “authorized”, “required”, “satisfactory”, “reviewed”, 

“acceptable”, or words of like import mean approved by, authorized by, required by, satisfactory to, or 

acceptable to the Engineer, unless otherwise expressly stated. 

F. The words “indicated”, “shown”, “detailed” or “scheduled” mean indicated, shown, detailed, or scheduled 

on the contract drawings, unless otherwise expressly stated. 

G. The word “work” means the labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and services to be furnished under the 

contract, and the performing of all duties and obligations required by the contract documents. 

H. The word “submit” means the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, unless otherwise 

expressly stated. 

I. The word “provide” mean the Contractor shall furnish and install, complete and ready for use, unless 

otherwise expressly stated. 

J. The word “selected” means selected by the Engineer, unless otherwise expressly stated. 

1.2 ARCHITECT / ENGINEER’S DESIGN 

A. The Architect / Engineer shall in all cases determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the 

several kinds of finished work and materials which are to be paid for hereunder, and shall decide all 

questions which may arise as to fulfillment of this contract on the part of the Contractor, and the Architect / 

Engineer’s interpretation and determination and decision thereon shall be final and conclusive; such 

determinations and decision, in case any question arises, shall be a condition precedent to the 

Contractor’s right to receive any payment hereunder. The Architect /Engineer shall have the right to 

correct all clerical, mathematical, or minor errors or omissions in the specifications when such corrections 

are necessary for the proper coordination of the contract documents. 

SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 00711 - 1


1.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY 

A. From commencement until completion and final acceptance by the Owner, the work under this Contract 

shall be under the charge and control of the Contractor, and during such period of control by the 

Contractor all risks in connection with the construction of the work and the materials to be used therein 

shall be borne by the Contractor. 

B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and protection of all persons and of all work and 

material connected with this contract until the project is finally accepted by the Owner. The Contractor 

shall use proper precaution to fully protect all persons, his own, work, and the property of the Owner and 

others from injury and damage, and at his own expense he shall be liable for injury to all persons and shall 

make good all damage and injury to property belonging to the Owner and others caused by himself and 

his employees through negligence, carelessness, or any other cause. 

C. The Architect / Engineer and Construction Manager shall not be responsible for the methods and means 

employed by the Contractor in the performance of the Contractor’s work. The Architect /Engineer and 

Construction Manager shall have no responsibility for the safety of the workmen and others who may be 

injured during the course of the Contractor’s work. 

1.4 CARE OF THE WORK 

A. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, the Construction Manager, the Architect/ 

Engineer, their agents, and their employees from all claims, suits, or proceedings of any nature 

whatsoever which may be brought against the Owner, the Construction Manager, the Architect / Engineer, 

their agents, or their employees on account of any injuries to persons or property received from the 

Contractor or his agents or servants. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials delivered and work 

performed until completion and final acceptance of the project. The Contractor shall provide adequate 

barricades and warning signs to properly protect his work and to safeguard the life and property of others. 

1.5 WORKMANSHIP, TOOLS, AND CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 

A. All work shall be performed in a finished and workmanlike manner, and in accordance with the best, 

recognized trade practices. 

B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good operating condition all tools and construction equipment 

necessary for the satisfactory performance of the work. Inadequate, unsuitable, defective, worn out, or 

otherwise unsatisfactory tools and construction equipment shall be removed from the site and replaced 

with satisfactory tools and construction equipment, or the proper repairs shall be made, or the 

unsatisfactory conditions shall be remedied. 

1.6 STANDARD PUBLICATIONS 

A. Wherever in these documents reference is made to standard specifications, standards, codes, or other 

standard publication, such as “ASTM” (American Society for Testing and Materials), “AASHTO” (American 

Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials), “ANSI” (American National Standards 

Institute), “AWWA” (American Waterworks Association), “ACI” (American Concrete Institute), “AISC” 



(American Institute of Steel Construction”, “AWS” (American Welding Society), Federal Specifications, 

“NEC” (National Electric Code), or others, in all cases the latest published editions of such referenced 

standard publications in effect at the time of receipt of bids shall apply. 

1.7 STANDARD EQUIPMENT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Except where special equipment is required, it is the general intent of the Technical Specifications that 

manufacturers’ standard equipment shall be furnished, and minor variations from the Technical 

Specifications to accommodate manufacturers’ standard equipment will be permissible, provided that the 

proposed equipment complies substantially with the Technical Specifications, and that it will accomplish 

the required results, all to the Architect / Engineer’s satisfaction. 

B. In addition to the requirements specified in the Technical Specifications, each item of equipment shall 

have all features and accessories as standard with its manufacturer and/or required for a complete 

operational unit. 

C. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations, as indicated on the 

drawings, and as specified. If the drawings and/or specifications conflict with the manufacturers’ 

recommendations, the Contractor shall report this to the Architect / Engineer for decision before 

proceeding with the work. 

1.8 ACCURACY OF DATE AND INTERFERENCES 

A. All work shall be installed to conform as nearly as possible with the dimensions, elevations, locations, and 

arrangements indicated, with only such minor adjustments as necessary to coordinate the work of the 

various trades and specification divisions and/or sections; to coordinate the work of this contract with that 

of other contracts; to accommodate the actual equipment furnished; to avoid all interferences between the 

various parts of the work; and to accommodate existing conditions which may differ from those indicated. 

Any and all parts of the work installed under this contract which interfere with other parts of the work or 

other contracts, or which deviate from the drawings and specifications without the Architect / Engineer’s 

prior approval shall be altered by the Contractor at his own expense, to clear such interferences, or to 

comply with the drawings and specifications. All interferences or discrepancies which may be discovered 

or anticipated shall be reported promptly to the Architect /Engineer for decision before proceeding with the 

work. The Architect / Engineer shall have the privilege of authorizing minor changes without additional 

cost, provided that such changes are made prior to the commencing of work on the item. 

1.9 SCHEDULING, SUBMITTALS AND REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 

A. Within five days after the effective date of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit to Construction 

Manager, for review and acceptance, a final proposed Critical Path construction schedule indicating the 

starting and completion dates of the various stages of the Work, a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings 

submissions, and a preliminary schedule of values of the Work. Key partial completion and Substantial 

Completion dates shall be identified. 

B. Before Contractor commences Work at the site, Contractor shall deliver to Owner certificates of insurance 

(or other evidence of insurance) requested by Owner which Contractor is required to purchase and 

maintain. 



C. All Submittals and Requests for Information shall be submitted to the Construction Manager in the 

electronic format established by the Construction Manager. 

1.10 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 

A. Work under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, the description given in Section 01010. 

B. The Contractor may not store materials on Federal Express property, unless space is requested 

by Contractor and approved by Federal Express prior to Bid submittal. 

C. Contract Scope: The Work under this contract shall contain no phasing unless otherwise directed. Work 

shall be scheduled in such a way to meet the Construction Completion dates noted in the Contract 

Documents. Exact dates are subject to change only if directed by Federal Express. 

1.11 FEDERAL EXPRESS SORT WINDOWS 

A. Construction work shall assure safety of Federal Express personnel at all times and not impede ongoing 

Federal Express package sorting at anytime. Daily construction operations and hours shall be planned in 

advance and timed so that overhead construction does not take place when personnel must be present 

below. Evening and weekend construction may be required in order to achieve this. Costs for all 

overhead and weekend and other off-hour work shall be included in the submitted Bid. The attached table 

indicates typical Federal Express Sort Windows and may be subject to change. 

SPAN AM DAYSORT WEEKEND PM WCO 

CALENDAR MAIN SORT OPS OPS OPS NIGHTSORT 

DAY START END START END START END START END START END 

Mon 17:00 21:30 22:00 2:15 

Tue 2:30 6:30 8:30 13:30 17:00 21:30 22:00 2:15 

Wed 2:30 6:30 8:30 13:30 17:00 21:30 22:00 2:15 

Thu 2:30 6:30 8:30 13:30 17:00 21:30 22:00 2:15 

Fri 2:30 6:30 8:30 13:30 17:00 21:30 22:00 2:15 

Sat 2:30 6:30 8:30 13:30 18:00 1:00 

Sun 17:00 1:00 

1.12 SECURITY 

A. The work area is mostly in an AIRPORT OPERATIONS AREA (AOA), and falls under the jurisdiction of 

the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). Personnel must either obtain security clearance through the 

Port of Oakland, Federal Express, or must be escorted while in an AOA area by someone with said 

security clearance. 

B. The Contractor must coordinate proper security measures with Federal Express and/or the Port of 

Oakland prior to starting work. If no Contractor personnel have the necessary security clearances, security 



escorts can be hired on an hourly basis as needed and this cost shall be included in the Bid. Refer to 

Section 01112 for more information. 

1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, STORAGE AREAS AND SANITARY FACILITIES 

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain its own job site trailer and sanitary facilities kept within the 

contractor’s construction work area. No additional areas on-site for materials storage, lay down or 

temporary storage will be provided by Federal Express. Contractor shall provide its own off-site storage 

and parking areas if additional space is required and shall include all such costs in the Bid. 

1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Generally, cutting of new construction shall be avoided wherever possible by the proper coordination 

between the various trades, and by the placing of proper sleeves, inserts, bolts, and other items in the 

construction as the work progresses. 

B. However, where subsequent cutting of new construction or cutting of existing construction is required, it 

shall be done in a neat, careful, and approved manner, without unnecessary or extensive damage to the 

construction involved, and only to such an extent that is reasonably necessary for the installation of the 

work. 

C. All patching, repairing, and altering shall be done only by mechanics skilled in the various trades involved, 

using materials and workmanship to match those of the original construction in type and quality. 

D. All existing construction which is disturbed or damaged in any way by the Contractor’s operations shall be 

restored at least to the conditions which existed before work was begun, unless otherwise indicated. 

1.15 COORDINATION WITH CITY AND PORT OF OAKLAND 

A. City of Oakland: The Contractor is responsible for communicating and coordinating with the City of 

Oakland for all electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other necessary construction permits and 

inspections. The Contractor is responsible for following the City of Oakland’s Waste Management 

program. Such coordination may also include the preparation and approval of a site specific SWPPP. See 

section 01050 

B. Port of Oakland: The Port of Oakland is the owner of the FedEx property. Federal Express holds a longterm 

lease. The Port may inspect work under this contract and make recommendations at their discretion. 

The Contractor shall be responsible for various items to be coordinated with Port officials. Such 

coordination may also include the preparation and approval of a site specific SWPPP. See section 01050 

C. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of all communications with the City of Oakland, Port 

of Oakland, PGE and other permitting/approval agencies and provide all written records of documents 

exchanged with such agencies. 



1.16 WEEKLY COORDINATION MEETINGS 

A. The Contractor shall designate a qualified project manager whose sole responsibility is the administration 

of this contract. The Contractor shall dedicate crews and equipment to work solely on this project and 

they shall not be pulled off until work is completed. 

B. The Project Manager shall attend weekly coordination meetings as directed by the Construction Manager. 

If requested by the Construction Manager, subcontractors may also be required to attend weekly 

coordination meetings. The Contractor’s Project Manager or his designated representative shall be 

present any time work is in progress on the project. Failure of subcontractors to attend weekly 

coordination meetings, when their attendance is requested, shall be just cause for removal from the 

Project. 

C. If determined to be required by the Construction Manager, the Contractor and its subcontractors, as 

required, shall attend all additional meetings, pre-installation meetings, coordination meetings, and special 

meetings as required to assure a smooth project execution. Multiple contractors will be working on-site 

concurrently and a close interface between work tasks will be essential. 

1.17 COST OF PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 

A. The Contractor shall include the cost of performance and payment bonds in the Bid Form. 

1.18 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS 

A. Shop drawings and submittals shall be submitted in the manner specified in Section 01040. 

1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Contractor’s red-marked as-built drawings shall be maintained throughout construction and shall be 

available for inspection by the Construction Manager weekly. Upon project completion, deliver to 

Construction Manager record drawings prepared by Contractor of contract drawings. Record drawings 

shall clearly show actual installed locations, depths, and sizes of: 

1. Electrical feeders under pavement or ground and structures, including locations of pull boxes and 

junction boxes. 

2. All utilities and conduits of all descriptions within the building and below ground outside of buildings 

and structures, including locations of cleanouts, manholes, inlets, hydrants, and valves. 

3. Locations and depths of undercut, where applicable. 

Make necessary field measurements of actual installed locations of under pavement and underground 

work as work progresses, and keep accurate records of these field measurements. Show locations by 

dimensions from permanent readily identifiable reference points such as building wall, column, curbs, 

drives, pavement edges and centerlines, etc. Show depths by elevations. 

B. Final payment will not be made until acceptable record drawings have been submitted and accepted as 

complete by the Construction Manager. 



1.20 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 

A. After contract award, the Construction Manager will conduct a pre-construction conference with the 

Owner, the Architect / Engineer and the Contractor. All parties will be notified in advance as to the 

locations, date, and exact time of this conference. In this conference the Contractor shall: 

B. Advise the Owner of all anticipated construction problems and difficulties with Owner’s operations and 

present plans to avoid unnecessary interferences therewith. 

C. Obtain the Owner’s interpretation and clarification, and/or Owner’s decision concerning questionable 

requirements of the drawings, specifications or other contract documents. 

D. Discuss with the Owner any other items pertaining to the work, as desired. 

E. The Construction Manager will furnish to the Contractor and the Owner written minutes of the preconstruction 

conference verifying the interpretations, clarifications, instructions, agreements and other 

information resulting from this conference. 

1.21 CAPACITIES, RATING, SIZES, AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS NOT SPECIFIED 

A. For all items of material and/or equipment, the capacities, ratings, sizes, and other requirements thereof 

not specified shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 

B. Where capacities, rating, sizes, and other requirements for materials and/or equipment may be neither 

specified nor indicated on the Contract drawings, refer each such case to the Architect / Engineer before 

ordering the materials and/or equipment involved or proceeding with the work involved, and the Architect / 

Engineer’s decision shall govern. 

1.22 EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER PROPERTY 

A. Prior to any excavation, the Contractor shall pothole to determine the locations of all existing water, gas, 

sewer, electric, telephone, telegraph, televisions, and other underground utilities and structures. Obtain 

location drawings and other assistance from the various local Utility Departments and other applicable 

agencies, and make other investigations as required to accomplish this. Use vacuum method potholing to 

verify all existing utility location information. 

B. After commencing work, use every precaution to avoid interferences with existing underground and 

surface utilities and structures, and protect them from damage. 

C. Where the locations of existing underground and surface utilities and structures are indicated, these 

locations are generally approximate, and all items which may be encountered during the work are not 

necessarily indicated, and the existence and locations of all items not indicated. 

D. The Contractor shall repair or pay for all damage caused by his operations to all existing utility property, 

public property, and private property, whether it is below ground or above ground, and he shall settle in 

total cost all damage suits which may arise as a result of his operations. 

1.23 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 



A. At Contractor’s expense, provide temporary facilities as required for the project completion, including but 

not limited to: 

1. Temporary construction wiring, including outlets for lighting and power tools for all trades. 

2. Temporary openings in construction to facilitate entrance of equipment 

3. Temporary roadways, stairs, ladders, ramps and hoists, as required. 

4. Other temporary items specified elsewhere, and as indicated. 

B. Prior to final project acceptance, remove all temporary facilities unless otherwise approved. 

1.24 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES AND EXISTING OPERATIONS 

A. Arrange all work to interfere as little as possible with the normal existing operations. Do not interrupt any 

existing utility or other service or existing operation at anytime without Owner’s prior approval. After each 

interruption has been made, make all necessary connections and alterations, and restore services and 

avoid interferences with normal existing operations as quickly as possible. 

B. At no additional cost to Owner, provide all necessary temporary connections and temporary facilities to 

accomplish the required continuity of services and existing operations. 

1.25 SALVAGED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Promptly haul away from the Owner’s premises all materials and equipment which are removed from the 

existing construction and are neither indicated nor required to be reused in the completed project, 

EXCEPT as otherwise specified below. 

B. The Owner may select certain removed existing materials and equipment and retain them for his future 

use. BEFORE removing any existing materials and equipment, determine from the Owner which of these 

materials and equipment (if any) he desires to retain. Remove all Owner-selected materials and 

equipment without unnecessary damage thereto, and safely store them at locations designated by the 

Owner. 

C. All waste or recycle materials shall be removed from the site in accordance with the City of Oakland’s 

Waste Reduction and Recycling Program. Refer to Section 00702 for more information. 

1.26 CONTRACTOR’S MARKUP 

A. Value of work added or omitted, and all changes, shall be fixed by fair adjustment and added to or 

deducted from contract price accordingly. Contractor shall be entitled to compensation only for work 

actually done, and Owner shall not be liable to contractor for damages or loss of anticipated profits 

occasioned by addition, omissions, or other alterations in work. Total percent of overhead and profit 

(OH&P) shall not exceed the following, unless stated otherwise in the final executed construction contract: 

1. Change orders involving Contractor’s work only: 10% total OH&P mark-up. 

2. Change orders involving Subcontractors and Contractor work: The firm(s) doing the work shall be 

entitled to a 10% OH&P mark-up. The Contractor shall be entitled to a 5% OH&P mark-up on the 

Subcontractor’s work. 



3. Change orders involving multiple (two or more) tiers of Subcontractors: The firm(s) doing the work 

shall be entitled to a 10% OH&P mark-up. One 5% OH&P subcontractor mark-up shall be allowed. 

The Contractor shall be entitled to a 5% OH&P mark-up on the Subcontractor’s work. 

SUMMARY 

Contractor Only Single Tier of Two or More Tiers of 

Subcontractor(s) Subcontractor(s) 

Contractor 10% Subcontractor(s) 10% Subcontractor(s) 10% 

Contractor 5% Subcontractor(s) 5% 

Contractor 5% 




SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY 

1.1 GENERAL 

A. Project Identification: Federal Express Oakland Sort Expansion: Sort Building (Package “SB”). 

1. Project Location: 1 Sally Ride Way, Oakland, CA 94621. 

2. Owner: Federal Express Corporation, 3680 Hacks Cross Rd. Bldg H, 3nd Floor Memphis, TN 

38125. 

B. Architect / Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated 08/22/2011 were prepared by 

TranSystems Corporation, 505 14th Street, Suite 1000, Oakland, CA 94612-3741. 

C. The scope of work is described as follows: 

1. Set temporary fences as necessary for construction to be removed from FedEx operations. 

2. Remove asphalt, clear and grub unpaved land, and demolish site features as described in the 

plans. 

3. Modify utilities as indicated, install new utility features. 

4. Excavate, regrade soils, place base materials, and repave most of the site with new asphalt. 

5. Install piles and pour foundation slab for the new building. 

6. Construct new sort building and bridge connecting the new and existing building. 

7. Construct new office space on the second floor of the Metroplex building. 

D. The project will include phased construction that must at all times accommodate on-going Federal 

Express operations. 

F. Cooperate fully with all other separate contractors that will be doing work on the premises so work on 

those contracts may be carried out smoothly without interfering with or delaying work under this 

Contract. 

1.2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

1.3 EXECUTION (Not Used) 


SUMMARY 01010 - 1


SECTION 01015 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 


1.1 GENERAL 

A. The Contract Documents consist of the items listed in Exhibit A of the Construction Agreement. 

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FURNISHED 

A. Copies of Drawings and Project Manual will be made available to Contractor via a web site as described 

in Section 00010 Notice to Bidders. 

1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS USED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

(Note: This Article supplements 2.01 "Definition" of the Construction Agreement) 

A. Wherever in the Contract Documents the words "Federal", "Federal Express", "FedEx", "Owner"," or 

words of like import are used, it shall be understood that Federal Express Corporation is intended. 

B. Wherever in the Contract Documents the words “Project Manager," "Project Engineer," "Architect 

/Engineer," "AE," "Engineer," “Architect” or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that 

TranSystems is intended. 

C. Wherever in the Contract Documents the words “Construction Manager”, “CM” or words of like import are 

used, it shall be understood that Rentenbach Constructors, Inc. is intended. 

D. Wherever in the Contract Documents the words "American Standards Association, "ASA," "United States 

Standards," "USA" or "American National" are used, it shall be understood that "American National 

Standards Institute" is intended. 

E. Where throughout the text of the Contract Documents reference is made to "Contractors," "General 

Contractor," "Installing Contractor," "other Contractors," "another Contractor," "each Contractor," 

"subcontractor," "site Contractor," "this Contractor," and words of like import are used, it shall be 

understood that "Contractor" is intended. Where certain special contractors are required to meet certain 

qualifications, obtain certain permits, or provide certain services particular to a specific skill or license, the 

word "Contractor" prefixed by a specialty designation is intended to mean the specialty "subcontractor," 

e.g., fire protection subcontractor, mechanical or electrical subcontractor. 

F. Where "as directed," "as required," "ordered," "prescribed," "approved," "acceptance," or words of similar 

nature are used, it shall be understood that such words refer to actions to be taken, in writing, by the 

Owner unless otherwise stated. In some instances the Owner may designate its authority to the 

Construction Manager or to the Architect / Engineer. The words "necessary," "suitable," "equal," 

"satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean necessary or equal in the opinion of the Owner. The 

words "of like import," when used in relation to the Contractor, shall mean at the Contractor's expense, 

unless specifically included in the Contract item. 

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 01015 - 1


G. "Work" shall be deemed to consist of all labor and operations, transportation, installation, hoisting, 

materials, tools, equipment, services, inspections, investigations, coordination and supervision required 

and/or reasonably necessary to produce the construction required by the contract documents. 

H. "Furnish" means the design, fabrication, purchase and delivery to the job site or other destination as 

directed by the Owner. 

I. "Install or Installation" means the act of physically placing, applying, setting, erecting, anchoring, securing, 

etc., construction materials, equipment, furnishings, appliances, and similar items specified and furnished 

at the job site. Installation of specified items shall be complete in all respects. 

J. "Provide" means to furnish and install construction material, equipment, etc. as defined above. 

Note: In addition, the following terms have the meaning indicated which are applicable to both the singular and 

plural thereof: 

K. ADDENDA: Written or graphic instructions issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or 

change the bidding documents or the Contract Documents. 

L. AGREEMENT: The written agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be 

performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as 

provided therein. 

M. CHANGE ORDER: A written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner authorizing an addition, 

deletion or revision in the work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued after 

the effective date of the Agreement. 

N. DAY: A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to next midnight. 

O. DRAWINGS: The drawings which show the character and Scope of the Work to be performed and which 

are referred to in the Contract Documents. 

P. SHOP DRAWINGS: All drawings, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared 

by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor to illustrate some 

portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, 

diagrams and other information prepared by a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor and 

submitted by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portions of the Work. 

Q. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: The Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the Owner 

as evidenced by a Certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the 

Contract Documents, so that the Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it was intended. 

1.4 CORRELATION AND INTENT 

A. The Contract Documents are complementary and are intended to include or imply all items required for 

the proper execution and completion of the Work. However, in the case of a design/build project, the 

Contractor is responsible for providing approved construction documents to the extent of acquiring all 

required permits and approvals and complete as-built documents. Any item of work mentioned in the 



specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the 

specifications, shall be provided by the Contractor as if shown or mentioned in both. 

B. Generally, the specifications describe work which cannot be readily indicated on the drawings and 

indicate types, qualities and methods of installation of the various materials and equipment required for 

the Work. It is not intended to mention every item of work in the specifications which can be adequately 

shown on the drawings or to show on the drawings all items of work described or required by the 

specifications even if they are of such nature that they could have been shown thereon. Materials or 

labor for work which are shown on the drawings or are reasonably inferable there from as being 

necessary to produce a finished job shall be provided by the Contractor whether or not the work is 

expressly covered in the specifications. 

C. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of the various parts of the Work so that no part shall be 

left in an unfinished or incomplete condition owing to any disagreement between the various 

subcontractors, or the subcontractors and the Contractor, as to where the work of one begins and ends 

with relation to the work of the other. 

D. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall review other sections of work applicable to their work and 

ascertain requirements in other sections applicable to their own work. Each shall be held responsible for 

coordination and inclusion of the work indicated as if it were in the particular subcontractor's section. The 

Owner shall be advised of any discrepancies or conflicts within seven days before the work commences. 

E. All subcontractors, suppliers, etc., shall be responsible for knowing what information is given on all sheets 

of the plans and specifications concerning his particular work. If an item or piece of work is shown on the 

architectural and not on the mechanical, electrical, or structural drawings, it shall be included in the 

contract. The reverse conditions shall also apply. 

1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMAT 

A. The specifications are separated into titled sections for convenience only and not to dictate or determine 

the trade or craft involved. Such separation shall not operate to make the Owner, Construction Manager 

or the Architect /Engineer an arbiter for the Division of responsibility between subcontractors. 




SECTION 01035 - COORDINATION 


1.1 COORDINATION OF WORK 

A. Contractor’s Project Manager: A Project Manager shall be assigned to this project in conformance 

with the requirements set out in the Construction Agreement. 


1. The Project Manager's role shall be to ensure proper coordination and scheduling of all 

work, he shall be the prime contact and interface point and coordinator for the Contractor, 

all sub-contractors, Owner, Construction Manger and Architect / Engineer personnel with 

respect to all construction activities. This Project Manager or his approved designated 

alternate shall be "on-call" to respond to problems on a 24 hour per day, 7 days per week 

basis for the duration of the project. The position of this Project Manager shall be in 

addition to the normal construction administration such as General Superintendent, 

Assistant Superintendent, General Foreman and other key Contractor personnel. 

2. Prior to the award of a Construction Contract, FedEx will interview the Contractor's 

proposed Job Superintendent and the Contractor’s Project Manager. The purpose of this 

interview will be to verify the qualifications of the proposed team. If any of the above 

does not meet with FedEx's approval, FedEx will require that they be replaced with 

someone acceptable. 

COORDINATION 01035 - 1


SECTION 01040 – SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS 


1.1 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the 

Owner, in duplicate, a schedule listing all items that will be furnished to the Construction Manager for 

review. For example, the schedule shall include, among other things, shop drawings and manufacturer's 

literature, test procedures, test results, certificates of compliance, material samples, and special 

guarantees. 

1. The schedule shall indicate the type of item, contract requirement reference, the Contractor's 

scheduled dates for submitting the above items and projected needs for approval answers and 

procurement dates. In preparing the schedule, adequate time (10 days or more exclusive of time 

for delivery) shall be allowed for review and approval and possible re-submittal. 

2. Also, the scheduling shall be coordinated with the approved construction progress chart. The 

Contractor shall revise and/or update the schedule as directed. Such revised schedules shall be 

made available to the Owner for monitoring. 

1.2 PROCEDURE FOR SUBMITTAL 

A. The Contractor shall submit each shop drawing required by the specifications to the Construction 

Manager who will route it to the Architect / Engineer for review. 

B. Shop drawings or submittals submitted directly from subcontractors or materials suppliers will not be 

accepted. Improperly submitted shop drawings or submittals will be returned unchecked. 

C. Shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor with action and comments annotated. All submittals 

shall be submitted in electronic format, without exception. 

D. See Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data for specific submittals required for O&M Manuals 

and instructions. 

SUBMITTALS 01040 - 1


SUBMITTALS GENERAL 

E. Shop drawings and submittals shall be clearly marked with the project name, dated, and accompanied by 

a letter of transmittal listing all items included in the submittal and referencing the project specification 

page, article numbers, or project drawing applicable to each item. 

Additionally, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to assign a unique submittal number to each shop drawing 

and submittal, beginning with “01”, for documentation purposes. Shop drawings shall be considered the 

same as a submittal. Resubmittals shall not be assigned a new number, but shall be assigned a letter 

extension beginning with “A” (e.g. Submittal 01-A). 

1. Shop drawings and submittals shall be submitted in electronic (PDF) format. Each submittal shall 

be submitted as a single electronic file which will print legibly. Hard copy submittals will not be 

accepted. 

a. These will be marked up and checked accordingly and an electronic set with mark-ups 

and/or shop drawing review form will be returned to the Contractor. 

2. Shop drawings and/or submittals shall include: fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings, 

manufacturers’ catalog sheets and/or descriptive data for materials and equipment, showing 

dimensions, performance characteristics, and capacities; wiring and control diagrams; electrical 

characteristics; and other pertinent information as required to obtain approval of the items 

involved. 

F. Before submission, the Contractor shall check the shop drawings and submittals furnished directly by him, 

and the applicable contractor shall check for all items furnished by the subcontractor as follows: check for 

completeness, coordination, and compliance with the contract documents; check and verify all 

dimensions and field conditions relating to the shop drawings; and certify in writing that these checks 

have been made. 

G. Submit items sufficiently in advance of date required to allow Engineer and Engineer’s Consultants 

reasonable time for review, and resubmission if necessary. 

1. Items submitted without Contractor's review stamp will be returned, without action, for 

resubmission. 

2. Items not submitted in accord with provisions of this section will be returned, without action, for 

resubmission. Submissions on items not acceptable for use by specifications or addenda will be 

returned, without action, rejected. 

H. After the Architect /Engineer has checked the shop drawings and/or submittals, except as otherwise 

specified below, satisfactory shop drawings and/or submittals will be approved and dated. If shop 

drawings and/or submittals are not approved, indications of the required corrections and changes will be 

made. Make such corrections and changes as indicated. Resubmit shop drawings and/or submittals as 

specified above, until approval has been obtained. No corrections or changes indicated on shop 

drawings shall be considered as an extra work order. 



I. Submittals reviewed by the Architect / Engineer will be reviewed subject to the following actions: 

1. An action stating "Approved" indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept and 

that the Contractor at his discretion may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and 

installation. 

2. An action stating "Approved as Corrected" indicates that deviations from the design concept have 

been found and noted and the Contractor at his discretion may proceed with fabrication and/or 

procurements and installation if the corrections indicated by the notes are acceptable to the 

Contractor without an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. 

3. An action stating "Correct, Revise, and Resubmit" indicates the submittal does not appear to 

conform to the design concept or established submittal procedures and the Contractor may not 

proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. A re-submittal is required. 

4. “No Action Taken” indicates the submittal is not required by the Contract Documents and is 

returned without action. 

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA 

A. Submittal of shop drawings and related data shall conform to the requirements of Article 15 "Shop 

Drawings and Samples; Material Testing", of the Construction Agreement and as specified herein. The 

Contractor shall make any corrections required by Engineer. 

1. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the drawings to constitute a change to the 

contract drawings or specifications, notice must be made in writing to the Owner within 7 calendar 

days of receipt of such submittals. The review of the drawings by Engineer shall not be construed 

as a complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction and detailing is 

satisfactory. 

2. Acceptance of the shop drawings will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error 

which may exist as the Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate 

connections, details, and satisfactory construction of all work. The submission by the Contractor 

shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter of a type approved by Engineer. 

B. Any re-submittal of a shop drawing that has been changed or altered in any way shall have all such 

alterations identified by circling (clouding) such alterations in a manner acceptable to Engineer, along with 

appropriate dates affixed thereto. 

1.4 MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND FIXTURE LISTS 

A. Lists of materials, equipment, and fixtures shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the 

requirements specified for shop drawings. The lists shall be supported by sufficient descriptive material, 

such as catalogs, cuts, diagrams, and other data published by the manufacturer, as well as evidence of 

compliance with safety and performance standards, to demonstrate conformance to the specification 

requirements; catalog numbers alone will not be acceptable. 



B. The data shall include the name and address of the nearest service and maintenance organization that 

regularly stocks repair parts. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted. Materials, 

equipment and fixtures will not be acceptable for use at capacity ratings in excess of manufacturer's 

published data. Approval of materials and equipment will be tentative, subject to submission of complete 

shop drawings indicating compliance with the contract documents. 

1.5 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE 

A. Any certificates required for demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with specification 

requirements, including mail certificates, statements of application and extended guarantees, shall be 

executed in quadruplicate and furnished to the Owner at least ten days prior to delivery. 

B. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to review all certificates before submissions are made to the Owner 

to ensure compliance with the contract specification requirements and proper execution of the affidavit 

prior to submission to the Owner. Each certificate shall be signed by an official authorized to certify in 

behalf of the manufacturing company and shall contain the name and address of the Contractor, the 

project name and location, and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the 

certificates apply. 

C. Copies of laboratory test reports submitted with certificates shall contain the name and address of the 

testing laboratory and the date or dates of the tests to which the report applies. 

D. Certification shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from furnishing satisfactory material, if, 

after tests are performed on selected samples, the material is found not to meet the specific 

requirements. 

1.6 REVIEW BY ENGINEER 

A. Checking of shop drawings and submittals by Architect / Engineer will be on the basis of conformity with 

design intent only. Quantities and dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor. 

B. Checking of shop drawings or submittals by Architect / Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of 

responsibility for accuracy for such shop drawings, nor for proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of 

material or work required by the Contract Documents and not indicated on the shop drawings. Shop 

drawings or product data checking shall not be construed as approval of departure from requirements of 

the Contract Documents. 

C. Corrections or changes indicated on Shop Drawings shall not be considered as extra work ordered. If 

Shop Drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice, or other 

reasons, make specific mention of such variations in submittal letter. Do not execute work required by 

Shop Drawings until acceptance is given. 

1.7 SAMPLES 

A. Where samples are needed, submit four samples to the Construction Manager. Identify samples as to: 

manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, specification section or drawing detail reference, color, 

range, texture, finish or other pertinent data. 



B. Submit with transmittal. Include brochures, shop drawings, and installation instructions. Contractor shall 

place review stamp on sample transmittals as indication of his checking and verification of dimensions 

and coordination with interrelated items. 

C. Reviewed samples submitted or constructed constitute criterion for judging completed work. Finish work 

or items not equal to samples will be rejected. 

D. Architect /Engineer may, at his/her option, retain samples for comparison purposes until completion of 

work. Samples will be returned or may be used in the work unless technical section specifically indicates 

otherwise. Remove samples when directed. Pay all costs of furnishing or constructing and removing 

samples. 

1.8 JOB SITE DOCUMENTS 

A. Only accepted shop drawings shall be kept at the job site. 

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. Required field measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor and will be made before shop 

drawings are submitted for review and approval. 

1.10 COLOR SELECTION 

A. Color selection of shop drawing items will be made by Construction Manager when other colors are 

selected. Contractor shall supply materials requiring color selection in a timely manner so that color 

selections can be established. 




SECTION 01050 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES 


1.1 GENERAL 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all temporary facilities and services required to 

complete the work and to comply with OSHA and other applicable regulations. 

1.2 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION 

A. The Contractor shall provide cold weather protection including temporary partitions, temporary 

heat and fuel as required to carry on the work expeditiously during inclement weather; protect all 

work and materials against injury from dampness and cold; and provide suitable working 

conditions for the installation and curing of materials until final acceptance by the Owner. He shall 

refer to requirements detailed in specifications for temperatures to be provided and maintained for 

installation and curing of work under the various trades. 

B. The Contractor shall provide temporary heat consisting of smokeless heating appliances 

satisfactory to the Owner. He shall furnish and pay for all necessary fuel and attendants in any 

trade, and maintain temporary heat at temperatures adequate for the intended purpose. 

C. The Contractor will pay all costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the 

temporary heating and ventilation system. 

1.3 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow 

other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited 

to, Owner's construction forces, Architect/Engineer, testing agencies, and authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction 

operations. 

C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction 

operations. 

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities 

for construction operations. 

1.4 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Construction Manager, Owner, and existing users for time 

when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary 

services. 

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES 01050 - 1


jurisdiction. 

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for 

construction. 

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of 

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, 

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities 

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse 

effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed 

installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient 

condition required and minimize energy consumption. 

F. Fire Sprinkler System Drain Down: All sprinkler drain down shall be drained into a truck and 

tested, as required, for legal off-site disposal. Cost for such drain downs, testing and disposal 

shall be included in the Base Bid. No drainage into on-site storm drain or sanitary sewer will be 

allowed. 

G. Fire Protection: At all times during construction, the Contractor shall provide for temporary, 

functioning fire protection in accordance with all City and FM Global requirements. If required for 

construction of the Metroplex second floor work, temporary sprinklers shall be provided, if needed, 

prior to the completion of the final fire protection system. 

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, 

capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 

1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for 

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 

without operating entire system. 

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. 

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all 

construction personnel. Install telephone line for field office, as required. 

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: 

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in 

each field office. 

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 

a. Police and fire departments. 

b. Ambulance service. 

c. Contractor's home office. 

d. Architect/Engineer's office. 

e. Engineers' offices. 

f. Owner's office. 



1.5 CLEANING 

g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when 

away from field office. 

A. Execute cleaning during progress of the Work, and at completion of the Work. If the Contractor 

fails to keep the project clean, as herein specified, the Owner shall do the cleaning, the cost of 

which shall be charged to the Contractor. 

B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and antipollution 

laws. 

C. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the Site and adjacent properties free from accumulations 

of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations. 

D. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. 

E. Remove waste demolition materials, debris and rubbish from the site daily and dispose of it at 

legal disposal areas away from the site. 

F. Before Contract Closeout all construction tools, scaffolding, equipment and machinery shall be 

removed from the site. 

G. Remove from job daily debris which might contribute to survival or spread of rodents, roaches and 

other household pests. 

1.6 FENCES AND BARRICADES 

A. The Contractor shall construct and maintain temporary signs, walks, railings, fences, barricades 

and bulkheads as required by operations under this contract for safety of the public and for 

protection of the Work and as approved by Federal, State, and Municipal safety laws and building 

codes. Steel cover plates shall be installed over excavations in traffic areas. See drawings for 

additional information. 

B. All temporary signs, walks, barricades, fences, bulkheads, etc., shall be maintained in good 

condition throughout the term of the work, and at completion of the work they shall be removed 

and all work damaged thereby shall be repaired and replaced in good condition. 

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate warning signs and danger lights for the 

protection of the public. Danger lights shall be kept lighted each night from sundown to sunrise. 

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all temporary barricade and safety issues with 

the Port directly. As necessary, special attention shall be paid to the placement of lit low profile 

barricades along the taxiway edge. These shall be in operation and in place at all times for all work 

prior to the completion of any work directly adjacent to an active taxiway. 

E. This project shall include the modification of existing AOA fences which are controlled by the Port 

of Oakland and the Transportation Security Administration (TSA). The contractor shall modify said 

fence boundaries as described in the plans, and shall be responsible for coordinating all such 

modifications with the Port and the TSA. All fence modifications must be approved in writing by the 



Port and TSA. Please allow up to 60 days to receive an approval for any modification. 

F. The construction of the bridge linking the two buildings shall cross over a planned temporary fence 

separating the AOA from the non-AOA area. The Contractor shall coordinate what security 

measures the Port and TSA will require well in advance of the construction of the fence. Such 

security provisions shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor, financially or otherwise. 

1.7 FIRE PROTECTION 

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain fire extinguishers and maintain existing fire 

hydrants if located within the construction limits; maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other 

equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction. Such equipment is to be 

used for fire protection only. 

1.8 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY MATERIALS 

A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. 

B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. 

C. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to original condition. 

D. Dirt and excavated material shall be removed and disposed of to prevent accumulation. 

1.9 SITE ACCESS 

A. Access to any location within the Metroplex or any other location otherwise within the Airport 

Operations Area (AOA) by construction personnel shall be as agreed to by the Owner and Port of 

Oakland. Security requirements shall be maintained as required by the Owner and Port of 

Oakland. 

B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary approaches and exits to any staging areas and obtain 

necessary permits from the local authorities. 

C. In connection therewith, the Contractor shall make provision for temporary drainage and pumping 

as required, as the site must be kept free from standing water at all times. 

1.10 STORAGE AND PARKING 

A. Materials storage and location for typical temporary construction facilities such as trailers, 

equipment parking, and portable toilets shall be allowed only within the construction limits as 

shown on the project drawings, and only if first agreed upon by the Construction Manager and 

Owner who shall have the right to request the relocation of any such facilities if their operations 

stand to be impacted negatively. Such a relocation of equipment and or structures shall come at 

no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. No parking for the Contractor's employees’ personal vehicles is available on the site nor anywhere 

on Federal Express leased property. 

C. The contractor is asked to limit vehicles on site only to those service vehicles and machines that 

are actively being utilized for construction processes. 



1.11 CONTROL OF STORM WATER DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Contractor shall fully comply with all of the conditions and requirements of State Water Resource 

Control Board (“SWRCB”) Order No/99-08-DWQ, NPDES General Permit No. CAS000002, Waste 

Discharge Requirements for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity 

(“Construction General Permit”), as said permit has been or may be amended, modified or 

superseded, subject to the conditions, requirements and qualifications below. 

1. As required by the Construction General Permit, the Contractor will file with the SWRCB a 

notice of intent (“NOI”) to initiate permit coverage, and a Notice of Termination (“NOT”) to 

terminate permit coverage. The NOI will give the Contractor a WDID number which shall be 

pertinent for the SWPPP described below. 

2. Contractor shall prepare, maintain, update and implement a site-specific Storm Water 

Pollution Prevention Plan (“SWPPP”) in compliance with all the requirements and conditions 

of the Construction General Permit and any existing Port Storm Water Ordinance while 

construction is ongoing. The SWPPP shall include a Storm Water Sampling and Analysis 

Plan (“SWSAP”) in full compliance with the Construction General Permit. At least 25 business 

days before commencement of construction activities, the SWPPP shall be submitted to the 

Port for comment and/or approval. Construction shall not commence until the Port has 

approved the SWPPP. Contractor shall keep and maintain an updated copy of the SWPPP at 

the construction site available for inspection during the course of the construction activities. 

Contractor shall deliver revised or updated SWPPPs whenever substantive modifications are 

made, and at least annually by September 15. 

i. As a condition of permit issuance, the contractor shall submit the SWPPP to the City 

of Oakland as soon as practically possible. Contact Jeff Hutcher at (510) 238-2953. 

ii. Construction activities shall not be permitted to commence until the SWPPP is 

approved by the Port of Oakland. Contact Colleen Liang at (510) 627-1198. 

3. Contractor shall undertake all monitoring, sampling and reporting required by the Construction 

General Permit, and applicable to construction activities, and to provide the results of such 

inspections, monitoring, sampling and reporting to Port within three (3) days after the 

completion of such activity, or as otherwise directed by the Port. 

4. Contractor shall provide the Port the general contractor’s certification of compliance in 

accordance with the Construction General Permit at least 15 days prior to the submittal date 

of each annual Port certification of compliance, and at such times as Port may reasonably 

request, while construction is ongoing. 

5. Construction activities shall be considered ongoing until a NOT and post-construction Best 

Management Practices plan (if required) are filed with and approved by the California 

Regional Water Quality Control Board (“RWQCB”) as provided by the Construction General 

Permit. 

6. If the construction site does not comply with these Specifications, Contractor shall, at its cost, 

promptly take all action necessary to bring the construction site into compliance. Upon receipt 

of any enforcement action against the Port for alleged violation of the Construction General 

Permit, whether by a 60-day notice letter from a citizen pursuant to 42 U.S.C. Section 1365(a), 

or by a notice of violation, a notice to comply, cease and desist order, cleanup and abatement 




order or other formal or informal enforcement action from the RWQCB, the Port may, at its 

election, take all action reasonably necessary, for a period up to six months, to bring the 

construction site into compliance with the Construction General Permit and applicable 

Environmental Laws. In this case, Federal Express will deduct payment cost from contracted 

sum. 

7. At completion of construction Contractor shall provide to Federal Express all documents and 

records prepared in association with the Construction General Permit. Such documents shall 

include a copy of each and every report, document required by the Clean Water Act, any 

correspondence received from or transmitted to any governmental agency concerning storm 

water matters and compliance with applicable Environmental Laws, and any notice or claim 

alleging noncompliance with applicable Environmental Laws concerning the Premises. 



SECTION 01052 - EXISTING FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 

PART I - GENERAL 

1.1 INTERFACES 

1.2 TITLE 

A. Interfaces with building and existing facilities are as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor 

shall be responsible for determining and assuring compliance with all interface requirements 

relating to the items to be supplied in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

B. The Contractor shall familiarize itself with existing conditions at the Site and verify the location 

of the facilities, equipment, and/or utilities to be installed. 

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining whatever additional information it may require 

via Site visits. The Contractor shall, by any means (including field measurements) determine 

actual Site conditions. All design adjustments resulting from these studies shall be identified to 

Federal Express in writing. Failure by the Contractor to do so shall not relieve it of the 

responsibility for successfully performing the Work without additional expense to Federal 

Express. 

D. Federal Express assumes no responsibility for representations concerning Site conditions made 

by any of its agents unless such representations are stated in the Contract Documents. 

A. Where existing equipment or property is to be removed as a part of the Work, the title to such 

equipment and property shall remain in the name of Federal Express and the equipment or 

property shall not be taken off Site unless specifically authorized in writing by Federal Express. 

1.3 TESTING 

A. Federal Express will require the Contractor to test any component or assembly that may have 

been affected by work in the area. 

B. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager at least one week before the beginning of 

assembly and testing to enable Construction Manager's representatives to be present. 

C. After testing, Federal Express' existing system shall remain in place and function in the same 

manner and mode as before testing. 


EXISTING FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 01052 - 1


SECTION 01063 - PERSONNEL BEHAVIOR 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. This Section includes Federal Express Corporation's policy for the conduct of Contractors, 

subcontractors, consultant’s and all other personnel in the Contractor’s employ. 

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Contractor/Consultant shall ensure that its personnel observe and adhere to the safety and 

security regulations as set forth in the Contract Documents. 

B. Personnel found in violation of these policies will not be permitted re-entry to the facility. 

1.3 AUTHORIZED AREAS 

A. Personnel shall remain in the designated areas assigned to them. 

B. Personnel shall remain clear of aircraft. There is absolutely no valid excuse for personnel to be 

on or near aircraft. 

1.4 SMOKING 

A. Personnel are not permitted to smoke in Federal Express Corporation's buildings, facilities, or on 

ramps. 

B. Smoking is permitted inside Consultant's/Contractor's on site trailers and fully enclosed shack. 

1.5 ALCOHOL ABUSE 

A. The consumption, possession, distribution, sale, use or transportation of alcohol in vehicles is 

expressly prohibited on the Federal Express Corporation's premises. Such activities will result in 

immediate expulsion from the premises and the notification of the proper local authorities. 

B. Being under the influence of alcohol while on the Federal Express Corporation's premises is 

expressly prohibited and will result in immediate expulsion from the premises. 

1.6 DRUG ABUSE 

A. The possession, consumption, sale, use or transportation of illegal, controlled drugs or 

substances in vehicles is expressly prohibited on the Federal Express Corporation's premises. 

B. Illegal, controlled drugs and substances include, but are not limited to narcotics, depressants, 

stimulants, marijuana, and hallucinogenic drugs. Such activities as listed above will result in 

immediate expulsion from the premises and the notification of the proper local authorities. 

C. Being under the influence of illegal, controlled drugs or substances while on the Federal Express 

Corporation's premises is expressly prohibited and will result in expulsion from the premises and 

the notification of the proper local authorities. 

PERSONNEL BEHAVIOR 01063 - 1


1.7 FIREARMS AND WEAPONS 

A. The possession, carrying, distribution, sale, use or transportation of firearms or weapons in 

vehicles is expressly prohibited on the Federal Express Corporation's premises. This applies, but 

is not limited to teargas dispensers (and similar disabling devices), mace, guns, starting pistols, 

flare pistols and pocket or hunting knives with a blade exceeding three inches in length. Such 

activities as listed above will result in immediate expulsion from the premises and notification of 

the proper local authorities. 

B. Unless specifically authorized by Federal Express Corporation's Managing Director of Security, 

bringing firearms or weapons on Federal Express Corporation's premises is strictly prohibited. 

1.8 MISCELLANEOUS 

A. Although not all inclusive, the following is a list of specific violations that may result in immediate 

expulsion from the premises and/or prosecution. 

1. Disruptive Conduct. 

2. Insubordination. 

3. Deliberate destruction or defacement of Federal Express Corporation's facilities or equipment 

4. Violation of safety or security regulations. 

5. Loss or suspension of any license or other qualification necessary to legally perform work. 

6. Any other act obviously and significantly detrimental to the best interests of the Federal 

Express Corporation. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 


PERSONNEL BEHAVIOR 01063 - 2


SECTION 01075 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 


1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. Work included: 

1. Cooperate with the Construction Manager's selected testing laboratory and all others 

responsible for testing and inspecting the Work. 

2. Provide other testing and inspecting as specified to be furnished by the Contractor in this 

section and/or elsewhere in these specifications. 

B. Related work described elsewhere: 

1. Requirements for testing may be described in various other sections of these 

specifications. 

2. Where no testing requirements are described, but the Construction Manager or Owner 

decide that testing is required, the Owner may direct that such testing be performed under 

current standards for testing. Payment for such testing will be made as described in this 

section. 

3. Quality Requirements Section 01400. 

C. Work not included: 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

1. Selection of testing laboratory: The Construction Manager will select a pre-qualified 

independent testing laboratory. 

2. Payment for initial testing: The Construction Manager will pay for initial services of the 

testing laboratory as further described in this section. 

A. Qualifications of testing laboratory: The testing laboratory will be qualified to the Owner's approval 

in accordance with ASTM E 329. 

B. Codes and standards: Testing, when required, will be in accordance with pertinent codes and 

regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING 

A. Promptly process and distribute copies of test reports and related instructions to ensure necessary 

retesting and replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress of the work. 

1.4 PAYMENT FOR TESTING 

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01075 - 1


A. The Construction Manager will pay for initial testing services, except where the provision of initial 

testing services is indicated as the Contractor's responsibility. 

B. If initial tests indicate non-compliance of an item with Contract documents, the cost of initial tests 

associated with that item's noncompliance will be deducted from the Contract Sum. 

C. Retesting: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, all subsequent 

retesting occasioned by the non-compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency and 

the costs thereof will be deducted from the Contract Sum. 

1.5 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING 

A. Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which 

are made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the 

Contractor, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONVENIENCE TESTING 

A. Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole 

responsibility of the Contractor. 

1.7 INSPECTION BY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S OR OWNER'S PERSONNEL 

A. From time to time, personnel in the employ of the Construction Manager or Owner may inspect the 

work where the work is in progress, but shall have no authority to direct the Contractor or request 

changes in the work except through the Construction Manager. 

1.8 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY 

A. Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the work at all times. Provide 

facilities for such access in order that the laboratory may properly perform its function. 

1.9 TAKING SPECIMENS 

A. Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, will be 

taken by the testing personnel. Sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing 

laboratory. Deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the 

testing laboratory. 

1.10 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING 

A. Establishing the schedule: 

1. By advance discussion with the testing laboratory,, determine the time required for the 

laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings. 

2. Provide required time within the construction schedule. 

3. Revising the schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during 

construction, coordinate such changes of schedule with the testing laboratory as required. 



4. Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the 

established schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to 

incompleteness of the work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be 

back-charged to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the Owner. 

1.11 ALTERNATIVE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 

A. The Construction Manager shall have the right to required alternative inspection procedure other 

than as specified when, in the Construction Manager’s judgment; other inspections are required to 

demonstrate compliance with the Contract requirements. Costs of such alternative inspections will 

be borne by the Owner if products are found to comply; otherwise, costs shall be borne by the 

Contractor. 




SECTION 01090 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment and 

performing all work required for the prevention of environmental pollution during and as the 

result of construction operations under this contract except for those measures set forth in 

other sections of these specifications. For the purpose of this specification, environmental 

pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical or biological elements or agents 

which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of 

importance to human life; affect other species of importance to man, or degrade the utility of 

the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes. The control of environmental 

pollution requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise, solid waste 

management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other 

pollutants. 

1.2 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS 

A. In order to prevent, and to provide for abatement and control of, any environmental pollution 

arising from the construction activities of the Contractor and his subcontractors in the 

performance of this contract, they shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local 

laws, and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement 

specifications. 

1.3 NOTIFICATION 

A. The Owner or Construction Manager will notify the Contractor in writing of any 

noncompliance with the foregoing provisions. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such 

notice, immediately take corrective action. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or 

his authorized representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the 

purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Owner or Construction 

Manager may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective 

action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made 

the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor 

unless it was later determined that the Contractor was in compliance. 

1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS 

A. Compliance with the provisions of this section by subcontractors shall be the responsibility of 

the Contractor. 

1.5 IMPLEMENTATION 

A. Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall: 

1. Submit in writing his proposals for implementing this section for environmental 

pollution control. 

2. Meet with representatives of the Construction Manager to develop mutual 

understanding relative to compliance with this provision and administration of the 

environmental pollution control program. 

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 01090 - 1


1.6 CLEANING SERVICES 

A. The Contractor shall furnish daily cleaning services for his offices, shops, and other facilities 

of his on the project site and perform any required maintenance of such facilities and 

surrounding grounds as deemed necessary by the Construction Manager or Owner during 

the entire life of the contract. Services shall be performed at such time and in such a manner 

to least interfere with the operations. Services shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of 

the Construction Manager and Owner. 

B. The Contractor shall provide daily trash collection and cleanup of the project trailer and 

adjacent outside areas of trash and debris generated from his own work. The Contractor 

shall dispose of all such discarded debris and trash in a manner approved by the 

Construction Manager and deposit such debris in receptacles provided and maintained by 

the Contractor for such disposal. No separate payment will be made for these Contractor 

furnished services, and all costs thereof shall be incidental to the contract. 

1.7 DUST CONTROL 

A. Dust Control will be the responsibility of the Contractor, and will have to conform according to 

airport requirements. Dust control shall be accomplished in several ways depending on the 

nature of the dust accumulation such as via water truck, tarps, or street sweeper. The 

contractor shall be responsible for mitigating dust pollution as necessary and also when 

requested by the Construction Manager at no cost to the Owner. 

1.8 STREET SWEEPING 

A. Related to “DUST CONTROL” above, the contractor shall pay special attention to the 

accumulation of dust outside of the limits of construction both inside the AOA and on Sally 

Ride and Air Cargo Way and inside the Metroplex Building. The Contractor shall provide 

street sweeping services as necessary or as directed by the Construction Manager at no 

additional cost to the Owner. 

1.9 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. During the life of this contract, the Contractor shall maintain all facilities constructed for 

pollution control under this contract as long as the operations creating the particular pollutant 

area being carried out or until the material concerned has become stabilized to the extent 

that pollution is no longer being created. 

1.10 JOB SAFETY PROGRAM 

A. All construction work of this project shall be performed in compliance with the Occupational 

Safety and Health Act of 1970 or with local or state occupational safety and health 

regulations enforced by an agency of the locality or state under a plan approved by the U.S. 

Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 

B. In pursuit of this compliance, within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the 

Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager a proposed Job Safety Program which 

shall be designed to provide a system by which hazards on the project site will be controlled 

to minimize or eliminate occupational injuries or illnesses during performances of the 

Contract. 

C. Proposed Job Safety Program shall state that subcontractors will be required to comply with 

the General Contractor's Job Safety Program and the job safety rules and requirements 




issued under the authority of that program. 



SECTION 01112 - SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the Contractor’s responsibilities to comply with Federal Express’ safety and security 

requirements and with all TSA security requirements. 

1.2 REFERENCES 

A. The latest edition of the following references shall apply: 

1. OSHA “Occupational Safety and Health Administration”, U.S. Department of Labor 


a. 29 CFR Part 1910, “OSHA Standards for General Industry” 

b. 29 CFR Part 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction” 

A. Security Vendor ID Request Form (Exhibit A this Section) 

1. Criminal Checks 

B. Construction Employee Listing (Exhibit B this Section) 

1. Contractor 

2. Sub-contractor on-site 

C. Request for Contractor Vehicular Ramp Pass (Exhibit C this Section) 

D. Construction Notification (Exhibit D this Section) 

1. Contractor 

2. Contractor’s Project Manager 

E. Comply with safety and health standards, regulations and orders issued under state and Federal Express 

status. 

1. Comply with Federal Express’ safety and security requirements and applicable OSHA 

requirements when on Federal Express’ premises. Ensure that employees: 

a. Comply with OSHA work and record keeping requirements in 29 CFR parts 1910 and 1926. 

b. Understand and follow Federal Express’ safety and security requirements as described in 

Appendix D: FedEx Contractor Safety Requirements. 

F. No one within the Contractor’s control shall enter or remain upon the site if, in the Construction Manager’s 

or Federal Express’ opinion, they would create a hazard to aircraft or operations. 

SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01112 - 1


G. No materials shall be brought onto, or remain upon any part of the site, runways, taxiways or aprons, if in 

the Construction Manager’s or Federal Express’ opinion, they would create a hazard. 

H. Enter upon Federal Express’ premises only when authorized by Federal Express or accompanied by a 

representative of Federal Express to escort Contractor employees and equipment to the point of 

operation. 

1. Comply with Federal Express’ requirements for means of ingress, egress and on-site activities as 

applied to personnel, equipment and facilities. 

I. Maintain and preserve a safe and healthy working environment free from risk or potential hazards. Ensure 

that tasks are performed in the safest way possible and that employees wear approved safety equipment. 

1. Employees who operate equipment in an unsafe manner or who fail to observe written or posted 

safety regulations will be subject to expulsion by Federal Express. 

1.4 TRANSPORTATION SECURITY ADMINISTRATION (TSA) REQUIREMENTS 

A. Comply with all Transportation Security Administration (TSA) requirements and process. New 2007 

requirements substantially increased the number of individuals subject to Security Identification Display 

Area (SIDA) requirements with significant fines imposed for non-compliance. 

1. The Federal Express property is included as part of the Oakland Airport SIDA. 

2. All existing Federal Express badged Vendors who do not currently have a SIDA badge and who 

require unescorted access on Federal Express’ property shall undergo a fingerprint-based Criminal 

History Records Check (CHRC) as a government requirement. 

3. Currently unbadged Vendors that will require unescorted access on Federal Express property must 

obtain new Vendor badges. 

4. ChoicePoint, an outside vendor, is assisting Federal Express in fingerprinting all individuals who 

require CHRCs. 

5. Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with obtaining SIDA badging. 

6. All fines for non-compliance with SIDA requirements shall be the sole responsibility of the 

Contractor. 

7. Individuals with Port of Oakland issued security badges may be eligible to enter Federal Express 

areas requiring a SIDA security clearance. Some Port of Oakland security badges allow for access 

to only certain portions of airport property. 

B. Process to Obtain Fingerprint-Based CHRC: 

1. To gain access for fingerprinting, obtain letters (on company letterhead) that informs Federal 

Express Security that you are to be fingerprinted. At fingerprinting two forms of government-issued 

identification (birth certificate, valid U.S. Passport, valid Certificate of U.S. Citizenship, valid 

Certificate of Naturalization, Unexpired foreign passport with I-551 stamp or attached Form I-94 

indicating unexpired employment authorization, or valid California Driver’s License) shall be 



furnished. 

2. One SIDA training class will be provided by Federal Express. It is the responsibility of the 

Contractor to verify that all personnel that will require unescorted access at the site, including all 

subcontractor personnel, attend and complete the 1 to 2 hour training course. 

1.5 PORT OF OAKLAND REQUIREMENTS 

A. The modifications of any AOA fences is strictly regulated by the Port of Oakland and the TSA. It shall be 

required for the TSA to formally approve any such modifications in advance of work proceeding. There are 

two classifications of modifications. Notify the Construction Manager and the Architect / Engineer 120 

days prior to any planned AOA fence relocation: 

1. Less than 60 days: When an existing AOA fence is modified for less than 60 days at the end of 

which the original layout of the fence shall be restored in full. The Contractor shall give an 

informational notification to the TSA of a changed condition to the established fence boundaries. 

No approval is required except from the Port of Oakland Aviation Security Department. 

2. More than 60 days. When an existing AOA fence is modified for more than 60 days at the end of 

which the original layout of the fence may be restored in full or not if the design is intended for a 

permanent change to the boundary. This would be considered a formal Airport Security Program 

amendment, which can take up to 60 days for the TSA to review and process, and requires formal 

approval from the TSA before work can proceed. 

The Port contact(s) shall be the same as outlines in subsection B below. 

B. The Port of Oakland requires the contractor to submit a SECURITY PLAN to them as soon as possible for 

movements in and out of the AOA via secured Port of Oakland gates. Existing FedEx controlled truck 

access gates are not considered to be Port controlled, but the contractor shall inform the Port of Oakland 

of the plan to use such gates. 

This plan must include, but is not limited to the following information: 

1. Approximate construction schedule 

2. Gates that will be utilized 

3. Entity that will be posted at each gate and approximate times for these posts 

4. Vicinity maps and or photos 

5. Sketches adapted from the plans 

For more information, contact the Port of Oakland upon award of contract. The Dontractor shall not be 

permitted to work within the AOA until an approved security plan is on file with the Port of Oakland as well 

as the Construction Manager. For the Port of Oakland, contact the following: 

• Douglas Mansel (510) 563-2889 (office), (510) 715-8997 (cell) 

• Matt Davis 

• Joseph Orcutt 

• James Trickel 

1.6 WORKER IDENTIFICATION PROVIDED BY FEDERAL EXPRESS 



A. FedEx does not guarantee that all Vendors and Contractors will be allowed to obtain SIDA clearance 

badges. Issuance is handled on a case-by-case basis. The Contractor should inquire about obtaining 

clearance as soon as being awarded the project. 

B. Key employees requiring access to the site may be issued a laminated photo identification badge by 

Federal Express (Vendor photo I.D. badge). The badge will display the employee’s name and 

Contractor’s name, and must be presented to Federal Express’ security to gain entry to the Site. 

1. The issued badge will have means of attachment to the employee’s clothing and shall be so worn 

above the waist on the outermost garment and kept visible at all times. 

2. The badges will remain the property of Federal Express and shall be surrendered to Federal 

Express upon request or expiration of the Contract. 

C. For each person required to have a Vendor photo I.D. badge, obtain a criminal check completed for each 

location where the applicant has lived during the previous ten (10) years. Criminal background checks 

cannot be more than ninety (90) days old. Use one of the following agencies. (Note: No others will be 

accepted.) 

1. CHOICEPOINT (800) 749-9556 

2. BLUE LINE INVESTIGATIONS (901) 266-7100 

3. NATIONAL INFORMATION AGENCY (901) 521-6763 

4. CARGO GROUP INC. (800) 645-4556 

a. These firms will conduct criminal background checks at all locations where the person has 

lived for the specified period. 

b. A fee will be charged for each county lived in during the specified period. 

These agencies will need the following information for each applicant: 

a. Full Name 

b. Date of Birth 

c. Social Security Number 

d. Present and past addresses for the time period specified above. 

D. Submit the original of the criminal check results along with a completed Security Vendor ID Request Form. 

Make criminal checks once a year. 

E. Submit a fully completed Construction Employee Listing form (Exhibit B this Section) a minimum of fifteen 

days before beginning work at the Site. Each employee of the Contractor and its sub-contractors engaged 

in the performance of the Work at the Site shall be listed on the form. Attach additional sheets as 

necessary. 

1.6 CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL WITHOUT SECURITY SIDA CLEARANCE 

A. All individuals who require unescorted access to the Port of Oakland SIDA area also known as the “Airport 

Operations Area” (AOA) need to have an appropriate security badge issued either by Federal Express or 

the Port of Oakland (refer to Sections above for more information). With the exception of FedEx’s Parking 

Lot A, Lot B and the Senior Lot, the entirety of the Federal Express facility is an AOA area. Those 



individuals who do not have an appropriate security clearance will need to be escorted while on the 

property by an individual or individuals with an appropriate security clearance. 

B. Eligible escorts: 

1. Four escort options are available for construction personnel without SIDA clearance: 

a. Federal Express employees with Federal Express SIDA clearance badge. 

b. Federal Express vendor with Federal Express issued SIDA clearance badge. 

c. Other construction personnel who have obtained SIDA clearance either through Federal 

Express or the Port of Oakland. Additional escort limitations may be applicable to 

individuals with Port of Oakland clearance. 

d. Escorts supplied by Aviation Safeguards Inc. who provides security staff for the entire 

Federal Express facility. 

C. Additional requirements to gain access to construction site: 

1. Construction personnel shall be allowed to gain access to the AOA either by coming through a 

Federal Express security check-point, or through an approved construction entrance. 

2. FedEx security check point: Unbadged individuals that enter through a FedEx security check-point 

are required to show identification in the form of either a driver’s license, or passport, or DMV 

issued identification card. The individual who will act as the escort for the unbadged individual(s) 

will also be required to show his or her SIDA badge and sign for the unbadged individual(s). FedEx 

security will issue each unbadged individual a vest to be worn at all times while on FedEx property. 

3. Construction entrance: Unbadged individuals who enter through an approved construction 

entrance become the sole responsibility of the General Contractor. The General Contractor is 

required to keep track of every badged and unbadged individual on site at all times, and shall 

provide badged escorts in a manner compliant to rules and regulations set by the TSA. 

See section 1.8 in this section for important information related to accessing AOA gates. 

D. Escort responsibilities: 

1. In general, all escorted individuals must remain in clear view of each designated escort at all times. 

2. TSA regulations limit the number of individuals that an escort is eligible to supervise at any one 

time. The Contractor is responsible for referring to these regulations when determining the number 

of escorts required at all times. 

E. Additional escort restrictions for individuals with Port of Oakland SIDA clearance: 

1. The Port of Oakland limits the number of badged individuals who are permitted to act as escorts. 

These individuals must be individually cleared to act as escorts. When approved, and individual 

with such a clearance will be issued an “ESCORT” sticker which needs to be visible on the 

individuals Port of Oakland SIDA clearance badge. 

F. Escorts provided by Aviation Safeguards Inc: 



1. Escorts procured from Aviation Safeguards Inc. shall be coordinated through Federal Express. 

Contractor shall contact the following FedEx personnel no less than 48 hours prior to when an 

escort is needed: 

a. Stephen Walker: 510-639-3804 (office), 510-639-3825 (cell), stephen.l.walker@fedex.com 

b. Daniel Roldan 

c. Stewart Prophett 

2. Contractor is responsible for determining and specifying the number of escorts needed and for the 

duration that each escort will need to be on duty. 

3. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with hired escorts, including overtime hours. 

1.7 WORKER IDENTIFICATION PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR 

A. In addition to identification supplied by Federal Express, the Contractor shall provide each of its 

employees and sub-contractor’s employees with a Photo I.D. Badge. 

B. Badges must be presented to gain entry to the Site. The Contractor shall provide monitoring to ensure that 

only its authorized personnel bearing badges are admitted to the facility. 

C. When additional security measures are required, Federal Express will present these at the Pre-Bid 

Meeting. 

1.8 ACCESS GATES 

A. Upon receipt of a complete list of sub-contractors (and sub sub-contractors), Federal Express’ 

Representative will notify the Contractor, in writing, of the designated gates(s) to be used by it and its subcontractors. 

Signs may be posted by Federal Express at each gate displaying the names of contractors 

and sub-contractors who use that gate. 

B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain any reserved gate system identified by Federal 

Express and to take immediate action to remedy problems that result in picketing directed at the 

Contractor. 

C. The access gate(s) described above will be the only authorized entry and exit point(s) to Federal Express’ 

facility for Contractor employees. 

D. Access gates leading into a non-AOA portion of the job may be manned by any appropriate and 

responsible person that is an agent of the contractor or associated subcontractors. 

E. Access gates that lead into an AOA portion of the site may only be opened, closed, and manned by the 

following individuals: 

1. Port of Oakland security personnel (ABC Security guard) 

2. FedEx security personnel (Aviation Safeguard guard) 

3. Alameda County Sherriff 



The contractor shall be required to post such a guard at the gate at all times when intermittent or 

occasional entrances/exits are possible. The costs associated with these services shall be included in the 

bid. The contractor is responsible for contacting each security agency to determine pricing on an hourly 

basis to be used for the bid. 

1.9 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE ACCESS TO AIRPORT FACILITIES 

A. The Contractor shall obtain construction vehicle passes for access to the ramp area by submitting a 

completed Request for Vehicle Ramp Passes (Exhibit C this Section). 

1. Vehicle Ramp Passes will be authorized by Federal Express on a need to enter basis. 

a. Apply for passes a minimum of seven days before beginning Work on the Site. 

b. Vehicles without authorized Passes will not be allowed entry to the Site. 

2. Unless otherwise authorized, the Contractor and each subcontractor will be permitted no more than 

one (1) vehicle per trade. Each vehicle shall be: 

a. Owned or hired by the Contractor or its subcontractor(s). 

b. Covered by Contractor’s insurance. 

c. On a pre-approved list. 

d. Identified (marked) in accordance with airport regulations and the requirements of this 

Section, and the requirements of the Port. 

3. Vehicle Ramp Passes will be issued for the duration of the Contractor's insurance certificate and 

will be renewed if required, pending submittal of required documentation. Monitor expiration dates 

and submit documentation in a timely manner. 

4. Vehicle Ramp Passes remain the property of Federal Express and shall be surrendered to Federal 

Express upon request, expiration, or completion of the Work (prior to final payment). 

5. Visibly display Vehicle Ramp Passes on the left dash of the vehicle. Drivers shall stop at the 

construction guard gate for clearance and verification 

a. Accuracy of information on the Vehicle Ramp Pass will be verified by Federal Express’ 

security staff. 

6. Altered Vehicle Ramp Passes will be confiscated and the vehicle will not be allowed entry to 

Federal Express’ property. 

B. Vehicle Identification (Markings) - Passenger type vehicles, including pickup trucks: display the company 

name on each front door of the vehicle. The company name shall be readable at a distance of no less 

than 250 feet. 

1. Specialized equipment such as bulldozers, cranes, etc. will be exempt from this requirement. 

C. Ramp Escort Requirements - Provide a ramp escort for each vehicle that is not marked in accordance with 

the requirements of this section and not driven by a trained individual with worker identification in 

accordance with this section. 



1. The Contractor's field superintendent shall assign individuals responsible for escort services. 

2. The escort driver shall make sole determination of when the escort can be safely made. 

3. Provide priority escorts for trucks delivering concrete, asphalt, and concrete treatment base. 

D. Vehicles shall not be parked inside Federal Express Express’ buildings. Park vehicles only in designated 

areas. 

E. With the exception of construction delivery trucks such as concrete trucks and those delivering 

construction materials, vehicles not having a pass will not be allowed entry to the facility. 

F. Vehicles found to be in violation of ramp safety procedures will be expelled from the premises and not 

allowed re-entry. 

1.10 RAMP SAFETY PROCEDURES 

A. Review all Ramp Safety Procedures to employees with all contractor and subcontractor representatives 

that will be on site. 

1.11 FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE 

A. The intake action of an aircraft jet engine poses minimal threat to personal safety but it presents a serious 

threat to the safety of the engine. A jet engine is extremely susceptible to foreign object damage. A small 

piece of metal, rock, a screw or even a small piece of paper can result in costly damage if inhaled by the 

engine. It can even jeopardize the crew and the aircraft in the event of engine failure. 

B. Each ramp and taxiway in the vicinity of the Site shall be thoroughly inspected daily for foreign objects and 

foreign objects found shall be removed. 

1.12 ON SITE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 

A. On a weekly basis, perform a Site safety inspection, prepare an inspection report and meet with Federal 

Express to discuss the results of the inspection. 

B. Federal Express reserves the right to make periodic safety inspections of the Site, note any discrepancies 

and report them to the Contractor for corrective action. 

C. Accidents involving Contractor's employees resulting in property damage or bodily injury shall be reported 

to Federal Express’ Representative immediately. 

D. In situations where Federal Express' employees may be working in areas below areas in which the 

Contractor's (or its sub-contractor's) employees may be working provide safety procedures as are 

necessary to prevent injuries to anyone in the area. 

E. These safety procedures shall include, but are not limited to, the provision and installation of fireproof 

blankets that will protect such employees from falling sparks, nuts, bolts, tools, welding rods, etc. 

1. Fireproof blankets shall be suspended from above so that floors and work areas below are left 

completely clear. 



F. Identify the locations of Federal Express' Express’ nearest existing emergency facilities (such as first aid 

supplies, emergency eye wash showers and fountains) and provide additional emergency facilities within 

the Site as required by OSHA. 

G. Safety flagging and barricading requirements: 

1. Provide total perimeter safety flagging (triangular carnival flags) and signage for areas of the Site 

where Federal Express’ personnel could be injured due to construction activities, falling materials, 

equipment, debris, hazardous conditions, etc. 

2. Signage shall consist of OSHA approved flexible plastic signs measuring a minimum of 9 by 12 

inches with a center line distance between the signs of not more than 15 feet. The following 

information shall be indicated on each sign: 

"DANGER - OVERHEAD CONSTRUCTION" 

"HARD HAT AREA" 

1.13 ENFORCEMENT OF RULES AND REGULATIONS 

A. Federal Express' security staff will be on duty at all times to assist in the enforcement of safety and 

security regulations but it is solely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure its employees compliance. 

B. Federal Express' security staff will respond upon notification when violations are committed and actions to 

correct these violations will be taken immediately through Federal Express' Representative. 

C. Contractor's employees will be subject to lunch box, tool box and vehicle inspections. 

1.14 RESTRICTED ZONES AT AIRPORT FACILITIES 

A. Federal Express Aviation Administration rules require a clear zone of not less than six (6) feet minimum, 

both inside and outside airport ramp security fencing. Local airport requirements may be greater than this, 

and shall be complied with. Contractor shall assure that this zone is free of its equipment, vehicles, and 

personnel at all times. 

B. Contractor shall not access the aircraft ramp area, gates, taxiways or runways at any time. No access on 

Port of Oakland property will be allowed without prior approval from the Port of Oakland. 

1. Unauthorized entry or crossing of active taxiways or runways shall subject the Contractor to a fine. 

1.15 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATION 

A. All work within 20,000 feet of an active airport is subject to requiring approval for any and all construction 

operations from the FAA in the form of a 7460 application. Approval of such an application may also 

require the contractor to maintain contact at all times with the airport towers. The Contractor shall prepare, 

submit, and obtain an approved 7460. Please discuss with TranSystems before beginning to see if there is 

an existing 7460 in existence that can be utilized for construction work. The Contractor shall contact the 

Port of Oakland and Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to file a 7460 form. The contact person at the 

Port of Oakland is Mr. Doug Mansel at (510) 563-6435. The contact person at the FAA is Mr. Joe 



Rodriguez, 831 Mitten Road, Room 210, Burlingame, CA 94010 at (650) 876-2791, ext. 610. The review 

process for 7460 approvals may take up to 60 days. This form requires the Contractor to establish the 

height and locations of the cranes to be used on this project. No work will start on this project until this 

permit has been submitted and approved. 

B. Cranes used during daylight hours shall have an orange and white checkered flag affixed to the top of the 

boom. Cranes operating at night shall display a red obstruction light on top of the boom. 

C. Crane booms shall not be left erect when not in use or following the end of the workday. 

1.16 VEHICLE PARKING AND OPERATION 

A. Streets within the project area shall be considered dedicated city streets for the purposes of traffic 

enforcement. 

B. Motor vehicles operated on public roads and parking lots of the airport shall be governed by the traffic 

ordinances of the city and applicable state laws, in addition to the Traffic Rules and Regulations of the Air 

Operations Complex. 

C. The driver of any motor vehicle operating within the airport boundary shall comply with the lawful orders, 

signals, and directions of Port and City of Oakland Police Officers and Federal Express’ Security Officers. 


ATTACHMENTS: 

EXHIBIT A: RAMP SAFETY PROCEDURES 

EXHIBIT B: CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEE LISTING 

EXHIBIT C: FEDERAL EXPRESS RAMP PASS REQUEST FORM 

EXHIBIT D: CONSTRUCTION NOTIFICATION 

FEDERAL EXPRESS SECURITY VENDOR ID REQUEST FORM 



EXHIBIT A 

RAMP SAFETY PROCEDURES 

A. Every vehicle operator on Federal Express’ property shall adhere to the following. 

B. General: 

1. Vehicle operators shall possess a valid driver's license. 

2. Only persons possessing a SIDA badge ID and a valid Vehicle Ramp Pass issued by Federal 

Express are authorized to operate motorized vehicles unescorted on the ramp. 

3. Drivers shall be aware that the right of way is not something to be taken. 

4. Vehicles shall be marked with company name on both sides of the front doors. 

5. Vehicles shall have orange and white checkered flag. 

6. Report vehicle accidents and property damage incidents immediately to Federal Express. 

C. Driving on Ramp: 

1. Vehicles shall be driven within the designated drive lanes (solid and dashed white and black lines) 

at all times. 

2. The 18-inch wide yellow lines (in drive lanes) on the ramp represent "hold lines" and shall be 

regarded as STOP. 

3. No vehicle may proceed outside the Federal Express lease line nor onto runways or taxiways. 

4. Federal Express vehicles and aircraft shall have the right-of-way at all times. 

5. Headlights and hazard flashers shall be turned on (day and night) while a vehicle is moving on the 

ramp or elsewhere on Federal Express property. 

D. Ramp speed: 

1. Come to complete stop at blind corners, whether at building corners and doorways or parked 

equipment. Honk horn before proceeding with caution. 

2. The maximum speed limit on the ramp shall be 15 mph. When a vehicle is within 50 feet of aircraft 

or in a congested area, the maximum speed shall be 5 mph. 

3. Driving speeds shall be matched to loads being towed and weather conditions. Slow down when 

towing heavy loads, in high winds or when the ramp surface is wet 

E. Aircraft Interface: 

1. Taxing aircraft and aircraft being towed always have the right of way. Each aircraft that has a 

flashing or rotating beacon on, or its navigation, landing, or taxing lights on, shall be considered as 

a taxing aircraft. At night, if an aircraft is approaching a vehicle head on, stop the vehicle, turn the 

headlights off, but keep the hazard lights flashing. After the aircraft has parked or is otherwise out 

of the way, turn the headlights on and resume tasks. 

2. Never pull in front of an aircraft that is moving. All vehicles must pass to the rear of taxiing aircraft 

at a safe distance. 

3. Vehicles shall not be driven or parked behind aircraft when the aircraft's engines are running. The 

jet blast can overturn vehicles. 



F. Vehicle Clearance: 

1. Drivers shall be clearance conscious. 

2. No vehicle shall be driven within 25 feet of aircraft. No vehicle or equipment shall park or pass 

under any part of an aircraft, especially the wings. 

3. Identify and observe "blind spots" on vehicles. No person shall operate any motorized vehicle 

when vision is restricted for any reason. Drivers shall know where they are and operate the vehicle 

accordingly. Use a guide whenever a vehicle is backed on the ramp. 

G. Parking: 

1. Hazard flashers shall always be turned on when a vehicle is parked on the ramp. 

2. No vehicle shall be parked and left unattended on the ramp without the left rear wheel of the 

vehicle being chocked, the engine turned off and the vehicle in gear or park. Chocks shall be 

placed in front of and behind the vehicle's left rear wheel. 

3. No vehicle shall be parked or left standing in a taxiway or traffic/drive lane or blocking a building 

doorway. If a parking area is indicated on the ramp, vehicles shall be parked within the lines. 

H. Hazards: 

1. Drivers shall be alert for hazards caused by the unsafe acts of others or by unusual conditions. 

2. Drivers shall be alert for signs of fuel or leakage of other liquids, defective lights and accidental 

damage to a vehicle. Such vehicles shall be restricted from airport property until the proper 

corrective measures are taken. Report such items to Federal Express. 

3. Drivers shall ascertain that their vehicle is in good operating condition each time it is driven. Check 

the proper operation of the vehicle's brakes before operating the vehicle on airport property. 

4. No person under the influence of alcohol or narcotic drugs shall operate vehicles or equipment on 

the airport property or the Site. 

5. Riding on trailer hitches, fenders, or any portion of a vehicle not equipped with proper seats is 

prohibited. Standing up in, riding outside of or with arms or legs protruding from the body of a 

moving vehicle is also prohibited. 



SECTION 01112 

EXHIBIT B 

CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEE LISTING 

Project Name/Number______________________________________________________ 

Contractor Name ______________________________________________________ 

Sub Contractor Name ______________________________________________________ 

Contractor’s General Foreman _______________________________________________ 

Federal Express’ Representative ________________________________________________ 

EMPLOYEE NAME SOCIAL SECURITY 

NUMBER 

TYPE OR PRINT LEGIBLY 

DRIVERLS LICENSE 

NUMBER/STATE 



SECTION 01112 

EXHIBIT C 

FEDERAL EXPRESS RAMP PASS REQUEST FORM 

TYPE OF PASS: VENDOR CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE 

NAME OF COMPANY: ___________________________________________________________ 

DRIVER'S NAME:_______________________________ DATE OF TRAINING:_________ 

DRIVER'S LICENSE #____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ____________ 

DRIVER'S NAME: _______________________________ DATE OF TRAINING: __________ 

DRIVER'S LICENSE # ____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ____________ 


DRIVER'S LICENSE#____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ___________ 

DRIVER'S NAME:_______________________________ DATE OF TRAINING:_________ 

DRIVER'S LICENSE #____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ____________ 


DRIVER'S LICENSE # ____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ____________ 


DRIVER'S LICENSE#____________________________ STATE OF ISSUE: ___________ 

FEDERAL EXPRESS SPONSOR/PROJECT ENGINEER NAME: _______________________________________ 

FEDERAL EXPRESS SPONSOR/PROJECT ENGINEER EMPLOYEE # _______________________ 

FEDERAL EXPRESS SPONSOR/PROJECT ENGINEER PHONE # _____________________ 



VEHICLE # 1 VEHICLE # 2 

Driver's Name: ______________________ Driver's Name: ____________________ 

Vehicle Color:_____________________ Vehicle Color: ______________________ 

Vehicle Make:_______________________ Vehicle Make:_______________________ 

Vehicle Model:______________________ Vehicle Model:______________________ 

Vehicle Year:_______________________ Vehicle Year:_______________________ 

Vehicle License#: _____________ ST__ Vehicle License#: _____________ST ____ 















PLEASE ENSURE THAT A CURRENT CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE IS MAILED OR FAXED TO: 

Erica Hazlerig 

Phone: 901-434-9342 

Fax: 901-434-9478 

Email: ehazlerig@fedex.com 

cc: Michael Baker: mjbaker@fedex.com 



SECTION 01112 

EXHIBIT D 

CONSTRUCTION NOTIFICATION 

Date: 

Project Title: 

Project Number: 

Federal Express’ Representative: 

Telephone Number: 

Contractor Distribute to: 

Contractor: Sort System MX: 

Contractor’s Project Manager: HUB Operations: 

Telephone (On-Site): Sort Systems Dev.: 

Emergency: 

Contractor’s Working Hours: to: 

Prop. & Fac.: 

I. Conveyor Work: The following belts will be "locked-out" on ______ (date) 

in order for us to safely work in the area. 

Belt No. Lock No. Belt No. Lock No. 

II. Electrical Work: Indicate the type of work to be done and the equipment affected. 

Substation MCC# Transformer Panel Work/Hours of 

Shut Down 

III. Other Work: Give a brief description of the work to be done. Define the location of the work 

(e.g. Column numbers, elevation, Gate numbers, etc.) and any additional remarks. 

Type of Work 


--> 

--> 

--> 

--> 

INSTRUCTIONS 

• Use only BLACK ink or BLACK type. 

Complete ALL blanks. Use N/A if applicable, giving explanation when necessary. 

Be sure to obtain ALL required signatures (-->). 

For more information, read email bulletin board “ Vendor-ID/Info.” 

For help, call 901 797-7278. 

TO BE COMPLETED BY THE VENDOR APPLICANT 

APPLICANT’S NAME AGE DATE OF BIRTH HEIGHT 

TO BE COMPLETED BY FEDEX REQUESTING MANAGER 

TO BE COMPLETED BY SECURITY 

FEDEX SECURITY VENDOR ID REQUEST 

❏ Original ❏ Renewal 

If Renewal, old ID number_____________ 

ft / in 

PRESENT ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER PRESENT TELEPHONE #(S) 

DRIVER’S LICENSE NUMBER STATE LICENSE ISSUED EMERGENCY CONTACT NAME EMERGENCY CONTACT PHONE NUMBER 

PREVIOUS ADDRESS(ES) FOR LAST 10 YEARS, STARTING WITH MOST RECENT ADDRESS 

1. From _________ To Present Address ____________________________ City _________________ State ____ Zip _______ 

2. From _________ To __________ Address ____________________________ City _________________ State ____ Zip _______ 





NAME OF COMPANY YOU REPRESENT NAME OF COMPANY MANAGER/SUPERVISOR 

COMPANY ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP TELEPHONE NUMBER 

APPLICANT’S COMPANY SUPERVISOR’S SIGNATURE (BLACK INK) DATE 

CRIMINAL STATUS CHECK 

Have you pled guilty to or been convicted of a CRIME in the last TEN (10) years, excluding traffic and parking tickets? ❏ Yes ❏ No 

If Yes, please explain: ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Agencies approved to conduct background checks for vendors: 

Choicepoint 800 749-9556 

Blue Line Investigations 901 266-7100 

National Information Agency 901 521-6763 

Cargo Group Inc. 800 645-4556 

FEDEX STATUS 

WEIGHT 

Vendors who have lived in one county for the past 10 years may 

contact their local law enforcement agency. Examples: 

Shelby County Sheriff’s Department 

DeSoto County Sheriff’s Department 

Cook County Sheriff’s Department 

Have you been a FedEx employee? 

Give previous FedEx job position(s): 

❏ Yes ❏ No If Yes, give previous FedEx employee ID: 

APPLICANT’S SIGNATURE DATE 

NOTE: Vendor IDs expire one (1) year from date issued. For renewal, the Vendor or his/her company must submit the Vendor ID Request Form. Vendor and FedEx 

requesting department are responsible for the actions of the Vendor while Vendor is on FedEx property and for return of expired or terminated card within 

five (5) business days from receipt of new card or termination date. Any lost or stolen Vendor ID must be reported to FedEx Security at 901 797-7278. 

FEDEX COMPANY 

❏ Corporate ❏ Express ❏ Trade Networks ❏ Services 

DATE COMPLETED FORM SENT TO SECURITY REQUESTING DEPARTMENT’S NAME COMAIL ADDRESS 

CONTACT PERSON’S NAME CONTACT PERSON’S EMPLOYEE ID NUMBER CONTACT PERSON’S TELEPHONE NUMBER 

PHYSICAL ADDRESS WHERE VENODR WILL BE WORKING (NOT 3-LTR ID) IS FEDEX RAMP ACCESS REQUIRED? 

❏ Yes ❏ No 

MANAGER’S NAME ID NUMBER TELEPHONE MANAGING DIRECTOR’S NAME ID NUMBER TELEPHONE 

MANAGER’S SIGNATURE DATE MANAGING DIRECTOR’S SIGNATURE DATE 

SECURITY APPROVAL 

❏ Yes ❏ No 

SECURITY’S RECEIPTS AND TRANSMITTALS 

BADGE EXPIRATION DATE SERIAL # (CIS PROVIDES) SECURITY SIGNATURE DATE 

Received Date Transmitted to and Date 

1st _________________________________________ to ____________________________ Date _________________


SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS 

1.1 GENERAL 

A. Sequence of Construction: Work shall be accomplished within the phases and sequences as shown on 

the Drawings. 

B. Use of Premises: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site 

beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for uniterrupted 24-hour, 7 days a week, 52 weeks per year Owner 

occupancy of and use of the site. 

2. Contractor will expedite the work without interruptions and shall be allowed to work 7 days a 

week between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. (or as otherwise approved by Construction 

Manager) with all clean-up completed by this time. The Contractor shall complete project cleanup 

by 3:00 p.m. daily or by the time directed in the Contract Documents. 

3. Due to the location and nature of the work associated with this project, FedEx trucks and trailers, 

and other assorted machinery are subject to come in and out of the site at all times during 

construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintianing this level of access to vehicles 

at all times via Air Cargo Way and Sally Ride Way. Otherwise, the contractor shall coordinate 

alternative site access with the Construction Manager and shall give at least seven (7) days 

notice in the event that site access by Owner operated vehicles will be impacted in any way. 

4. Vehicular traffic in and out of the facility peaks starting at appromately 4:00 p.m. The Contractor 

is permitted to work beyond the 7:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m. work window as needed provided that 

access is not hindered to FedEx personnel or vehicles for the duration of work. 

5. In the event of an emergency that may or will impact FedEx operations requiring less than the 

aforementioned seven days of advanced notice, contact Construction Manager. 

C. Maintain Owner’s Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic Circulation: At all times during construction, Owner’s 

truck and vehicle traffic circulation must remain uninterrupted. During all trenching operations under 

travelled access routes or roadways, provide steel plate covers to assure vehicle and equipment traffic 

access at all times. Provide temporary walkways, barricades and safety provisions to keep Owner’s 

employees, visitors and other contractors on site away from open trenches and safe from construction 

operations. 


WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 1


SECTION 01172 - FEDERAL EXPRESS’ SPECIAL PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. It is essential that the Work not interfere with Federal Express’ normal operations. Each day’s work must 

be completed and the work area cleaned up in such a manner that Federal Express’ operations can 

proceed normally. 

B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for damages to Federal Express’ facility and operations resulting 

from the Contractor’s operating practices. 

C. The Contractor shall thus schedule its operations carefully with generous time allotments that will allow 

contingencies. 

D. Normal services (electricity, water, communications, etc.) shall not be interrupted at any time without prior 

written approval from Federal Express. In general, work requiring interruption of electrical service must be 

performed on a Saturday or Sunday, and at a time acceptable to the Construction Manager. All requests 

for power interruption shall be made to the Construction Manager at a minimum of ten (10) working days 

before the actual date of interruption. 

1.2 WORK SEQUENCE 

A. Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor is responsible for organizing the sequence of construction 

operations in a manner that will maximize operational efficiency and result in the timely completion of the 

Work within the Contract Time. 

B. The Contract Documents include Drawings indicating a limited number of construction precedents based 

on the Owner's requirements for minimizing the impact of construction on the Owner's continuing business 

operations. Include all costs of compliance with Owner's construction sequencing requirements in the 

Contract Sum. 

C. See Section 01312 for a schedule of project milestones that shall be met by the Contractor. 

1.3 FEDERAL EXPRESS’ RIGHT TO OCCUPY 

A. Federal Express may vacate only portions of a facility during construction and move back into these areas 

as soon as possible. Therefore, it may be necessary to construct the Work in Phases to accommodate 

Federal Express’ operations. 

1.4 WORKING HOURS 

A. On site, the Contractor may be required to work at times other than the regular work shift (eight continuous 

hours Monday through Friday). Such irregular work hours (including holidays and weekdays) shall be 

coordinated with the Construction Manager at least five days in advance to allow the necessary 

arrangements to be made. 

FEDERAL EXPRESS’ SPECIAL PROCEDURES 01172 - 1


B. Additional hours may be available on weekends. The Contractor shall avail itself to these hours when: 

1. It is necessary to effect a difficult or involved move-in test, etc. 

2. The Project is behind schedule. 

C. Typical working hours for this Project shall be: 

1. 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. If the Contractor chooses to work hours other than 

these, all associated costs, overtime costs and security guard expenses shall be included in the 

Bid. 

1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out 

smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this 

Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 

B. Concurrent Work: The Owner has awarded, and in other cases will award, separate contracts for other 

construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work 

under this Contract. Work of this Contract includes cooperation with other contractors and coordination of 

the Work of this Contract with the work of other contracts. 


FEDERAL EXPRESS’ SPECIAL PROCEDURES 01172 - 2


SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES 



A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the 

Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to 

accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, 

materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to 

incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 

1.2 PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the 

alternate into Project. 

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items 

incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. 

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the 

status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later 

consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 

A. Alternates are noted on the Bid Form. 


ALTERNATES 01230 - 1


SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract 

modifications. 

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Architect/Engineer may issue Supplemental Instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not 

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Such Supplemental Instructions will be 

issued via the Construction Manager. 

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect /Engineer may issue a detailed description of proposed 

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Such 

Proposal Requests would be issued via the Construction Manager If necessary, the description will include 

supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect / Engineer are for information and pricing only. Do not 

consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within 10 days after receipt of or by the number of days indicated on the proposal request, submit 

a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to 

execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total 

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to 

substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the 

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and 

activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract 

Time. 

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, 

Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. 

Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed 

change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1


2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of 

purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, 

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity 

relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change 

requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 

1.4 ALLOWANCES 

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the 

difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. 

If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product 

imperfections, and similar margins. 

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs 

and other margins claimed. 

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to 

unit-cost allowances. 

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, 

measure, or count. 

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in 

the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, 

installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 10 days of receipt of the Change Order or 

Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 

21 days after such authorization. 

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount 

unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been 

foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced 

materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. Upon Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for 

signature by Owner and Contractor. 

1.6 CONSTRUCTION WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive. Work Change Directives instructs 

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 



1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates 

method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work 

Change Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to 

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 




SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

1.1 GENERAL 

A. This section summarizes payment procedures. Where requirements stated in this Section differ from 

the Federal Express Construction Contract, the Federal Express Construction Contract shall govern. 

B. Schedule of Values: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's 

Construction Schedule. Correlate line items with other required administrative forms and schedules, 

including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 

1. Submit the Schedule of Values, in the form provided in this Project Manual to the Construction 

Manager at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for 

submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 

2. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of Engineer/Architect. 

c. Engineer/Architect’s project number. 

d. Contractor's name and address. 

e. Date of submittal. 

3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following 

for each item listed: 

a. Related Specification Section or Division. 

b. Description of the Work. 

c. Name of subcontractor. 

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 

e. Name of supplier. 

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. 

g. Dollar value. 

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to 

total 100 percent. 

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of 

Applications for Payment. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts. Round 

amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 

5. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may 

include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 

6. Provide separate line items for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, 

and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include 

total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. 

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1


a. Temporary facilities and other items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be 

shown either as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. 

8. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when 

Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 

C. Applications for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the 

Construction Manager and paid for by Owner. 

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and 

final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

2. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement 

between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application 

for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. 

3. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner as form for Applications for 

Payment. 

4. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person 

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete 

applications without action. 

a. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction 

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 

b. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before 

last day of construction period covered by application. 

5. Transmittal: Submit an electronic draft copy of the Payment Application to the Construction 

Manager for review. After receipt of Construction Manager comments or approval, make 

applicable revisions, then submit 1 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for 

Payment to the Construction Manager and 2 copies of signed and notarized original copies of 

each Application to the Ownere by a method ensuring receipt. All copies shall include waivers 

of lien and similar attachments as required. Transmit copies with a transmittal form listing 

attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 

6. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's 

lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract 

and related to the Work covered by the payment. 

a. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for 

retainage, on each item. 

b. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 

c. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit 

waivers. 

d. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of 

mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. 

1) Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every 

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is 

lawfully entitled to a lien. 

e. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to 

Owner. 



7. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or 

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 

a. List of subcontractors. 

b. Schedule of Values. 

c. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

d. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

e. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 

f. Copies of construction permits. 

g. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance 

of the Work. 

h. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 

i. Performance and payment bonds. 

8. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial 

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of 

the Work claimed as substantially complete. 

a. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a 

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 

b. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued 

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 

9. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting 

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 


a. Evidence of completion of Project Closeout requirements. 

b. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof 

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 

c. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 

d. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 

e. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 

f. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 

g. Evidence that claims have been settled. 

h. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of 

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed 

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 



SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination Drawings. 

2. Project Meetings. 

3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 

1.2 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to 

ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations that 

depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation 

of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own 

installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum 

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure 

maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all 

components, including mechanical and electrical. 

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for 

coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Construction Manager and separate contractors if coordination of 

their Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with 

other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly 

progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Pre-installation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

9. Project closeout activities. 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1



A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates 

maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required 

for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination 

Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the 

following information, as applicable: 

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, 

mechanical, and electrical systems. 

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions 

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance 

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer for resolution of such conflicts. Minor 

dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 22 by 34 inches. 

3. Electronic Submittal: Submittal shall all be in electronic format. 

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. 

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of 

date and time of each meeting. 

B. Pre-construction Conference: Contractor and its subcontractors shall attend a preconstruction conference 

before starting construction, at a time established by the Construction Manager 

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives Contractor including it project manager, its superintendent; 

major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All 

participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters 

relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 

a. Tentative construction schedule. 

b. Phasing. 

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

f. Procedures for RFIs. 

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

j. Submittal procedures. 

k. Preparation of Record Documents. 

l. Use of the premises. 



m. Work restrictions. 

n. Owner's occupancy requirements. 

o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 

p. Construction waste management and recycling. 

q. Parking availability. 

r. Office, work, and storage areas. 

s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

t. First aid. 

u. Security. 

v. Progress cleaning. 

w. Working hours. 

C. Pre-installation Conferences: The Contractor and it applicable subcontractors shall attend pre-installation 

conferences at Project site before start of key elements of work and for each additional construction 

activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected 

by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have 

preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. 

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity 

under consideration, including requirements for the following: 

a. The Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related RFIs. 

d. Related Change Orders. 

e. Purchases. 

f. Deliveries. 

g. Submittals. 

h. Review of mockups. 

i. Possible conflicts. 

j. Compatibility problems. 

k. Time schedules. 

l. Weather limitations. 

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

n. Warranty requirements. 

o. Compatibility of materials. 

p. Acceptability of substrates. 

q. Temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Space and access limitations. 

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Installation procedures. 

v. Coordination with other work. 

w. Required performance results. 

x. Protection of adjacent work. 

y. Protection of construction and personnel. 



3. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate 

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and 

reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 

D. Progress Meetings: Attend progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with 

preparation of payment requests. 

1. The Contractor shall attend a weekly construction progress meeting. 

2. Attendees: Contractor’s key staff, subcontractors, suppliers, and other entities concerned with 

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be 

represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and 

authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

3. Agenda and Meeting Notes: Review and provide comment on minutes of previous progress 

meeting within one week of issuance. Lack of comments or approval on such documents within the 

one week period shall be understood to signify concurrence. Review other items of significance 

that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine 

whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to 

Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be 

expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule 

revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed 

within the Contract Time. 

1) Review schedule for next period. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Deliveries. 

5) Off-site fabrication. 

6) Access. 

7) Site utilization. 

8) Temporary facilities and controls. 

9) Work hours. 

10) Hazards and risks. 

11) Progress cleaning. 

12) Quality and work standards. 

13) Status of correction of deficient items. 

14) Field observations. 

15) RFIs. 

16) Status of proposal requests. 

17) Pending changes. 

18) Status of Change Orders. 

19) Pending claims and disputes. 

20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 



c. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress 

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised 

schedule to the Construction Manager. 

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not 

possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be 

returned with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work 

of subcontractors. 

3. Failure to follow the prescribed RFI format as well as failure to promptly file an RFI is the sole 

responsibility of the Contractor. No schedule changes or work extensions will be permitted for such 

delays regardless of whether an RFI is related to a critical path item or not. No compensation will 

be granted in the event that an RFI is filed in a timely manner resulting in lost compensable time for 

the Contractor or its subcontractors. 

4. Submit an electronic copy of each RFI to the Construction Manager in the format determined by 

the Construction Manager. If emailed, the RFI shall come in the form of an attachment either as a 

PDF file or Word document. 

5. The Contractor shall properly number every RFI according to when they are transmitted. It shall 

not be permissible for the Contractor to simply forward an RFI from a Subcontractor with an RFI 

number defined by said Subcontractor. 

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Date. 

3. Name of Contractor. 

4. Name of Engineer. 

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the 

Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 

10. Contractor's signature. 

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop 

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. 

C. RFI Response: Allow 7 working days for Engineer’s response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. 

will be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 



a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. 

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 

e. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals. 

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 

2. RFI response may include a request for additional information, in which case the allocated time for 

response will start again. 

3. If an RFI response results in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, the Contractor 

shall notify the Construction Manager of this in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. 

D. On receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to 

affected parties. 

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log 

weekly. Include the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Name and address of Contractor. 

3. Name and address of Engineer. 

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 

5. RFI description. 

6. Date the RFI was submitted. 

7. Date Engineer's response was received. 

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal 

Request, as appropriate. 




SECTION 01312 - PROGRESS SCHEDULES 


1.01 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 

A. The Contractor shall provide a schedule, (including items through Final Acceptance), covering every 

element of the Work. 

B. The schedule shall include engineering, material acquisition, sub-contracting, fabrication, assembly, 

inspection, shop testing, delivery, installation and on-Site testing. The compilation and submission of 

operating and maintenance data and parts lists shall also be included. 

C. This schedule shall be in the form of a Critical Path Method (CPM) chart. Interrelated events and 

activities shall be shown. The schedule shall be revised by-weekly to reflect current conditions. A 

copy of the schedule shall be submitted to Federal Express for review within thirty (30) days after 

Notice to Proceed. 

1.03 WORK FORCE 

A. The Contractor shall ensure that its commitment to the schedule shall be met by proper size work 

force, extended work hours if necessary and the use of adequate equipment. 

1.04 MILESTONE DATES 

A. Issued for Bid October 17, 2011 

B. Pre-Bid Meeting November 2, 2011 

C. Bids Due November 16, 2011 

D. Award of Contract November 23, 2011 

E. Notice To Proceed/Execution of Contract December 30, 2011 

F. SIDA Training/Fingerprinting Contractor to schedule 

G. Start Construction January 2, 2011 

H. Give Siemens access to new building and bridge for sort system November 1, 2012 

construction (roof weather-tight and concrete floors cured) 

I. Entire sort building shell including bridge (dry in) complete December 31, 2012 

J. Construction Completion – All project elements March 1, 2013 

K. Project Closeout March 29, 2013 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 


PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01312 - 1


SECTION 01320 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Contractor shall plan, schedule and report the Work using the computerized work breakdown 

structure in Gant Chart format of the Critical Path Method in calendar days, unless otherwise 

specifically provided in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall develop the detailed Construction 

Schedule by using Microsoft Project revision 2003 software. 


A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and 

controlling the project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned 

early start and finish times. 

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project 

where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when 

activities can be performed and the critical path of a project. 

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule 

that establishes the minimum overall project duration and contains no float. 

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either FedEx or Contractor, but is a jointly 

owned, expiring project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule 

milestones and the Contract completion date. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Under the Contract, Contractor shall plan, schedule, execute, report and accomplish the Work 

using the computerized work breakdown structure in Gant Chart format of the critical path method 

(CPM), in calendar days, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. I-J 

node format of the critical path method of scheduling is not acceptable for scheduling under the 

Contract. Contractor shall develop the detailed Construction Schedule by using Microsoft Project 

revision 2003 software. 

B. The primary objectives of the requirements of this Section are: 

1. To ensure adequate planning and execution of the Work by Contractor and its 

Subcontractors; 

2. To assist FedEx in evaluating the progress of the Work; 

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01320 - 1


3. To provide for Contractor’s optimum coordination of its forces and its Subcontractors and 

suppliers and Contractor’s optimum coordination of the Work with the work or services 

provided by any Separate Contractors; 

4. To permit the timely prediction or detection of events or occurrences that may affect the 

timely prosecution of the Work; 

5. To provide a mechanism or tool for FedEx’s and Contractor’s use in determining and 

monitoring any actions of Contractor that the Contract requires in order for Contractor to 

achieve the timely completion of the various portions of the Work; and 

6. To establish a cash flow projection that is coordinated with the work schedule. 

C. The detailed Construction Schedule, as defined in Article 3 of the Contract, as supplemented by 

Paragraphs 3.02 and 3.03 below, will represent Contractor's commitment and intended plan for 

completion of the Work in compliance with the Contract. The Construction Schedule must take into 

account all foreseeable activities to be accomplished by any separate contractors, and interface 

dates with utility owners, FedEx's operations and others. The detailed Construction Schedule must 

anticipate all necessary manpower and resources to accomplish the activities within the durations 

set forth in the Construction Schedule. The Contractor will not: 

1. Misrepresent to FedEx its planning, scheduling and coordination of the work; 

2. Utilize schedules different from those provided to FedEx for the direction, execution and 

coordination of the Work; 

3. Utilize schedules that are not feasible or realistic; or 

4. Prepare schedules, updates, revisions or reports that do not accurately reflect the 

Contractor's actual intent or the Contractor's reasonable and actual expectations as to: 

the sequences of activities; labor availability; productivity or efficiency; expected or 

reasonably foreseeable inclement weather conditions; the percentage complete of any 

activity or path of activities; completion of any item of work or activity; projected dates of 

completion; delays, slippage, or problems encountered or expected; and Subcontractor 

requests for time extensions. 

D. Once FedEx approves the detailed Construction Schedule, it will become the Schedule of Record 

for coordinating the Work, scheduling the Work, monitoring the Work, issuing progress payments, 

evaluating time extension requests, and all other objectives listed in Paragraph 3.01.B. This 

approved Construction Schedule will be resident on Contractor’s computer equipment and 

Contractor must save this Schedule of Record as a baseline for purposes of comparison against 

subsequent revisions or proposed revisions of the Construction Schedule. Contractor shall 

perform all computer processing associated with the Construction Schedule and needed in 

connection with updating, reporting and progress payments. Contractor must employ whatever 

means it considers necessary to implement the Construction Schedule and to comply with the 

requirements of this Section. Contractor shall provide updates to FedEx’s Representative with each 

Application for Payment or as FedEx’s Representative requests. Contractor shall provide updates 

in both electronic media and hard copy. 

E. Contractor is responsible for determining the sequence of activities, the time estimates of the 

detailed construction activities and the means, methods, techniques and procedures to be 

employed. Each construction schedule shall represent the Contractor's best judgment of how he 

will prosecute the Work in compliance with the Contract. Contractor shall ensure that each 



construction schedule is current and accurate and is properly and timely monitored, updated and 

revised as Project conditions require. 

F. Contractor shall consult with its Subcontractors and suppliers relating to the preparation of the 

Construction Schedule and subsequent revisions of the Construction Schedule. Contractor shall 

furnish its Subcontractors with copies of the Construction Schedule and each subsequent revision 

and shall continually advise its Subcontractors and suppliers of any updates or revisions to the 

Construction Schedule as the Work progresses. When Contractor submits to FedEx’s 

Representative its proposed Construction Schedule or proposes any updates or revisions to the 

approved Construction Schedule, Contractor will furnish evidence acceptable to FedEx that 

Contractor has consulted with, and has the concurrence of, its Subcontractors and suppliers. 

Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring that all Subcontractors and suppliers comply with the 

requirements of the Construction Schedule as it relates to their respective portions of the Work. 

G. When the work of Separate Contractors must interface or be coordinated with the Work, Contractor 

shall coordinate its activities with the Separate Contractors’ activities and, prior to the submission 

to FedEx of Contractor’s proposed Construction Schedule or any update or revision to the 

approved Construction Schedule, shall obtain the Separate Contractor’s written approval of the 

proposed Construction Schedule or a subsequent update or revision. 

H. Contractor’s reasonable exercise of any rights under this Section will not be grounds for any claim 

by Contractor or any of its Subcontractors of alleged interference, lack of cooperation, delay, 

disruption, negligence or hindrance by FedEx, and Contractor covenants not to sue for any such 

claim. 

I. The detailed Construction Schedule, as FedEx approves it, will represent Contractor's best plan 

and commitment for the Work; FedEx acknowledges, however, that Contractor may have to revise 

the Construction Schedule from time-to-time as progress proceeds. Contractor acknowledges that 

FedEx does not guarantee that: 

1. Contractor may start work activities on the "Early Start" or "Late Start" dates or complete 

work activities on the "Early Finish" or "Late Finish" dates shown in the Construction 

Schedule, as Contractor may update or revise it; 

2. Contractor can proceed at all times in the sequence reflected in the Construction 

Schedule, or that Contractor can rely upon the utilization of only the resources and 

manpower it initially plans for the performance of the Work; or 

3. Contractor will not have to modify the Construction Schedule in order to interface with the 

work of Separate Contractors. 

J. The Construction Schedule must be flexible in order to accommodate and allow for Contractor’s 

coordination with FedEx’s operations and the work of Separate Contractors working on or in the 

vicinity of the Site. Contractor must review its proposed Construction Schedule and each 

subsequent update or revision of the approved Construction Schedule for compatibility with 

FedEx’s operations and the work of Separate Contractors. Contractor must meet with FedEx’s 

Representative and representatives of Separate Contractors to resolve any conflicts between the 

Construction Schedule and FedEx’s operations or the work of Separate Contractors. Contractor 

shall cooperate fully with FedEx and the Separate Contractors to resolve such conflicts and to 

revise the Construction Schedule as reasonably required with no additional costs to FedEx. 



K. In order to maintain the orderly progress of the Work, FedEx may determine, in its sole discretion, 

the priority between the Work and the work of any Separate Contractors or FedEx's operations; 

FedEx’s decision will be final and binding upon Contractor and will not be a cause for extra 

compensation or an extension of time. FedEx may exercise the foregoing discretion only if (1) the 

determination is necessary, in FedEx’s opinion, because of project conditions and (2) Contractor 

and any Separate Contractors cannot otherwise agree upon such priority of schedule for their 

respective work. The foregoing does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to cooperate and 

coordinate with any Separate Contractors working on or in the vicinity of the Site. 

L. The time duration between the date FedEx issues the Notice to Proceed and the Substantial 

Completion Date, as set forth in the Contract and in Section 01100, represents only the major 

items of Work and may include interface times with FedEx’s operations and the work of Separate 

Contractors or others. Completion of the Work by the Substantial Completion Date, as that date 

may be postponed by the occurrence of Excused Delays, as set forth in the Contract, is a contract 

requirement and is of the essence to the Contract and to Contractor’s coordination of the Work. 

Contract duration represents the allowable start and completion date for the Work. Section 01100 

is not intended to be a complete listing of all Work under the Contract or of all interfaces with work 

performed by Separate Contractors, FedEx or others. Contractor shall determine the time 

requirements for all such interfaces and shall be responsible for planning, scheduling and 

coordinating the Work in order to complete it in accordance with the Contract. 

M. If FedEx provides Contractor, at Contractor's request, with any advice relating to the scheduling or 

coordination of the Work or any other matter: 

1. FedEx will not be liable to Contractor for any errors, omissions, negligence or deficiencies 

that may in any way occur because of that advice; 

2. The advice is provided solely as aids in Contractor’s development of a representation of 

Contractor's actual construction plan and schedule in accordance with the requirements of 

the Contract Documents, and FedEx will not be liable to Contractor should Contractor rely 

on such advice or counsel to its detriment; 

3. The advice will not relieve Contractor of any responsibility under Paragraph 3.01.E of this 

Section 01320 for all construction means, methods techniques, sequences and 

procedures and for planning, scheduling and coordinating all portions of the Work; and 

4. Any advice that FedEx provides or the lack or alleged untimeliness of that advice will not 

in any way take the place of or relieve Contractor of full responsibility for compliance with 

all requirements of the Contract, including, without limitation, the obligation to complete 

the Work by the Substantial Completion Date. 

N. FedEx’s approval or acceptance of Contractor's proposed Construction Schedule or any revisions 

or updates to the approved Construction Schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility 

for accomplishing the Work by the Substantial Completion Date. Omissions or errors in the 

approved Construction Schedule or any revisions or updates will not excuse performance that does 

not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. FedEx’s approval in no way makes 

FedEx an insurer of the reliability, accuracy or feasibility of the Construction Schedule or liable for 

time or cost overruns flowing from such omissions or errors. Contractor cannot rely upon FedEx’s 

informal or constructive acquiescence or approval of the Construction Schedule; FedEx’s approval 

of Contractor’s proposed Construction Schedule or any subsequent revision or update of the 

approved Construction Schedule must be in writing. 



O. If Contractor's proposed Construction Schedule or any revision or update of the approved 

Construction Schedule indicates that FedEx or a Separate Contractor is to complete any activity or 

perform certain preceding work by a particular date or within a certain duration, FedEx or the 

Separate Contractor will not be bound to that date or duration unless FedEx expressly and 

specifically agrees in writing to the date or duration. No representative, agent or employee of the 

Project Architect Engineer has any right or authority to agree to any schedule commitment or 

obligation on FedEx’s part, and FedEx must executed all such agreements or commitments in 

writing as provided elsewhere in the Contract. 

P. Contractor is solely responsible for expediting the delivery of all Materials that Contractor 

undertakes to furnish so that Contractor maintains the progress of construction according to the 

currently approved Construction Schedule for the Work. Contractor must notify FedEx in writing 

and in a timely and reasonable manner whenever Contractor determines or anticipates that the 

delivery date of any Material that Contractor undertakes to furnish will be later than the delivery 

date indicated in the approved Construction Schedule or any subsequently approved revision or 

update. 

3.02 DETAILED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. No later than 15 business days after the date FedEx issues the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall 

complete a draft of its proposed Construction Schedule in accordance with the requirements of this 

Paragraph 3.02. 

B. Before becoming entitled to payment of any monthly Application for Payment, Contractor must 

complete the Construction Schedule to FedEx’s satisfaction. 

C. The Construction Schedule will represent Contractor's commitment and intended plan for 

completion of the Work in compliance with the Contract. The Construction Schedule must take into 

account all foreseeable activities to be accomplished by Separate Contractors and interface dates 

with utility owners, FedEx's operations and others. The Construction Schedule must anticipate all 

necessary manpower and resources to accomplish the activities within the durations set forth in the 

Construction Schedule. 

D. As a part of the data Contractor submits to FedEx, Contractor must submit a narrative report that 

indicates Contractor’s anticipated allocation of the following resources and work shifts for each 

activity that Contractor proposes to utilize in connection with the Project: 

1. Labor resources; 

2. Equipment resources; and 

3. Whether Contractor will perform the proposed work on single, double or triple shifts and 

whether Contractor will do the work on a 5-, 6- or 7-day workweek basis. 

4. Production rates. 

This narrative report is for FedEx’s use in determining the reasonableness of Contractor’s 

proposed Construction Schedule. Contractor need not load the actual Construction Schedule with 

labor and equipment resources. 

E. FedEx has the right to require Contractor to modify any portion of the Contractor's proposed 

Construction Schedule or a proposed Recovery Schedule, as described below that FedEx 



reasonably determines to be: 

1. Impracticable; 

2. Based upon erroneous calculations or estimates; 

3. Unreasonable; 

4. Not in conformity with other provisions of the Contract; 

5. Required in order to ensure Contractor’s proper coordination of the work of his 

Subcontractors and with the work or services any Separate Contractors are providing; 

6. Necessary to avoid undue interference with FedEx's operations or those of any utility 

owners or adjoining property owners; 

7. Necessary to ensure completion of the Work as set forth in this Contract; 

8. Required in order for Contractor to comply with the requirements of Paragraph 3.03 or any 

other requirements of the Contract; 

9. Not consistent with Contractor's actual operations. 

Within 14 days after receiving FedEx’s direction to modify the proposed Construction Schedule or a 

proposed Recovery Schedule, Contractor must complete the modification and return the modified 

schedule to FedEx for approval. If Contractor does not make the required changes within the 

allotted time, FedEx may elect to hold and not process Contractor’s monthly Applications for 

Payment. If, on the authority of the foregoing, FedEx holds an Application for Payment beyond the 

second business day of a month, FedEx will process that Application for Payment with the 

following month’s Application for Payment, provided that, in the interim, Contractor delivers the 

required modifications to FedEx. Contractor must bear any costs and impact expense associated 

with modifications to the Construction Schedule or a Recovery Schedule that Contractor must 

make on the authority of this Paragraph 3.03.E, 

F. FedEx reserves the right to require Contractor to furnish such manpower, Materials, facilities and 

equipment, and to work such hours (including additional shifts and overtime operations), as may be 

necessary to ensure completion of the Work or specified portions of the Work by the specific dates 

established in the Contract Documents. If FedEx reasonably determines that the Work, or any 

required portion of the Work, will not be completed by the dates established in the Contract 

Documents, Contractor shall undertake the following actions at no additional cost to FedEx, and 

comply with the requirements set forth in Section 01320, Paragraphs 3.05 and 3.06, in order to 

ensure that it complies with all completion requirements: 

1. Increase the quantity of manpower, materials, trades, crafts, and equipment and facilities 

on the Site; 

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, or any combination 

of the foregoing; and 

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum activity accomplishment. 

3.03 DETAILED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONTENT 

A. The Construction Schedule will consist of a time-scaled, detailed network graphic representation of 

all activities that are part of Contractor's construction plan and an accompanying listing of each 

activity's dependencies and interrelationships. The Construction Schedule submission must 

include, without limitation, the following information: 

1. Project name; 

2. Activities of completed Work ready for use by next trade, FedEx, etc.; 

3. Activities relating to different areas of responsibility, such as subcontracted Work that is 



distinctly separate from that which Contractor is doing directly; 

4. Activities relating to different categories of Work as distinguished by craft or crew 

requirements; 

5. Activities relating to different categories of Work as distinguished by equipment 

requirements; 

6. Activities relating to different categories of Work as distinguished by Materials; 

7. Activities relating to distinct and identifiable subdivisions of Work; 

8. Activities relating to locations of Work within the Project that necessitates different times 

or crews to perform; 

9. Activities relating to outage schedules for existing utility services that will be interrupted 

during the performance of the Work; 

10. Activities relating to acquisition and installation of equipment, materials and supplies that 

FedEx or Separate Contractors will be installing; 

11. Activities relating to material to be stored on site; 

12. Contract times consistent with the requirements of the Contract; 

13. A tabular report listing all predecessor and successor activities for each activity; 

14. A legible time scaled network diagram; 

15. Activity durations not exceeding 14 calendar days for all activities for which Contractor will 

perform actual fieldwork. Material procurement, submittals, concrete curing and other 

similar activities may only exceed 14 calendar days with FedEx’s approval; 

16. An accounting of the number of work days anticipated to be lost because of weather. 

Paragraph 3.03.E below will govern this accounting. 

B. The Construction Schedule submission will contain the following minimum information for each 

activity: 

1. Activity number, description and estimated duration in calendar days; 

2. Anticipated start and finish dates; and 

3. Responsibility for activity. 

C. For all major equipment and Materials to be fabricated or supplied as part of the Work, the 

Construction Schedule must show a sequence of activities including: 

1. Preparation of shop drawings and sample submissions; 

2. A reasonable time for review of shop drawings and samples or such time as specified in 

the Contract; 

3. Shop fabrication, delivery, and storage; 

4. Erection or installation; and 

5. Testing of equipment and materials. 

Additionally, the Construction Schedule must reflect the following information for each submittal 

item: (1) description; and (2) a reference to the applicable paragraph or paragraphs in the 

technical specifications or the contract drawing number that requires the submittal. 

D. The Construction Schedule must include late completion dates for the Work that are no later than 

the Substantial Completion Date established in the Contract. Contractor shall prepare the timescaled 

graphic network based upon the early start dates of activities shown on the graphic. 

E. The Contractor shall anticipate and account for, as a minimum, the potential loss of working days 

equal to the Weather Average, as defined in the Contract, and shall schedule the Work 

accordingly. 



Contractor shall make its own determination as to the likely impact of weather on its operations and 

must include as part of its Construction Schedule submission an accounting of how it determined 

and accounted for the impact of anticipated weather in the proposed Construction Schedule. 

FedEx must continually monitor the effects of weather and, when found justified, grant time 

extensions, if required, as Contractor approaches achieving substantial completion of the Work. 

F. Contractor must state all activity durations in calendar days. 

G. Contractor shall plan its operations and schedule the Work to ensure that the critical path runs 

through on-site construction activities and to ensure that, unless FedEx agrees otherwise in writing, 

off-site procurement activities do not control the critical path of the Construction Schedule. 

H. Once FedEx approves the Construction Schedule, it will become the Schedule of Record for 

coordinating the Work, scheduling the Work, monitoring the Work, evaluating time extension 

requests, and all other objectives listed in Paragraph 3.01.B. The approved Construction Schedule 

will be resident on Contractor’s computer equipment at the Site and Contractor will perform as part 

of the Work all computer processing required for the purpose of reporting the progress of the Work 

and updating the Construction Schedule. Contractor must employ whatever means it considers 

necessary to implement the Construction Schedule and to comply with the requirements of this 

Section. 

I. Contractor must use a computerized scheduling system for the development of the Construction 

Schedule. Contractor must provide to FedEx on computer media, in a form and format acceptable 

to FedEx, a copy of the Construction Schedule, including all required submission information 

resident in or derivable from the computer system, as well as a hard copy of the CPM and logic 

diagram. 

3.04 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE/PROGRESS REPORTS 

A. On or about the dates specified in the Contract, Contractor shall arrange for its Project Manager 

and Superintendent and necessary Subcontractors and suppliers to attend bi-monthly schedule 

meetings with FedEx to review Contractor's report of actual progress. Contractor must prepare 

each such report based upon Contractor’s best judgment and after consultation with the principal 

Subcontractors. Each such report that Contractor prepares must set forth up-to-date and accurate 

progress data. 

B. Each of Contractor’s progress report must show the activities, or portions of activities, completed 

during the reporting period, the actual start and finish dates for those activities, the remaining 

durations or estimated completion dates for activities currently in progress, and quantities of 

Materials installed during the reporting period. 

C. Contractor shall submit a narrative with each progress report, which must include, without 

limitation: a description of problem areas; current and anticipated delaying factors and their impact 

to critical activities; explanations of corrective actions taken or planned; any proposed newly 

planned activities or changes in sequence; and the proposed logic for a Recovery Schedule, if 

required, as further described below. 

Each report must also include: 



1. A narrative describing the actual Work accomplished during the reporting period; 

2. A list of major construction equipment used on the Project during the reporting period; 

3. The total number of men by craft actually engaged in the Work during the reporting 

period, with the total stated separately as to office, supervisory, and field personnel; 

4. A manpower and equipment forecast for the succeeding 30 days, which states the total 

number of men by craft and separately states such total as to office, supervisory and field 

personnel; 

5. A list of Contractor-supplied Materials and equipment, indicating their current availability 

and anticipated job site delivery dates; and 

6. Changes or additions to Contractor's supervisory personnel since the preceding progress 

report. 

D. At each monthly schedule meeting, Contractor must present a total review of the Project, which will 

include, without limitation, the following: 

1. Schedule 

2. Critical items pending 

3. Contract Amendments 

4. Coordination with other Separate Contractors and FedEx 

5. Excessive weather delay report 

E. The submission and approval of progress update information and the receipt of progress reports 

are an integral part and basic element of the processing of Applications for Payment. FedEx may 

withhold progress payments to which Contractor would otherwise be entitled under the terms of the 

Contract until Contractor has fully complied with the requirements of this Section. 

F. The extent to which activities in the activity sequence approved and contained in the Construction 

Schedule are complete at the end of the period covered by an Application for Payment will be a 

factor in the determination of the amount of the progress payment to which Contractor is entitled in 

connection with its submission of that Application for Payment. Activities that Contractor performs 

out of sequence will not form the basis for a progress payment to Contractor unless FedEx 

approved the proposed sequencing revisions and Contractor incorporated those revisions in the 

Construction Schedule in accordance with Paragraph 3.06 below. 

G. If the actions that Contractor takes in accordance with Paragraph 3.02 are not satisfactory, in 

FedEx’s judgment, to ensure Contractor’s timely completion of the Work, FedEx may direct 

Contractor to take without additional cost to FedEx all other actions that may be necessary to 

ensure completion of the Work or designated portions of the Work by the specific dates established 

in the Contract, including, without limitation, a requirement for Contractor or one or more of its 

Subcontractors to provide additional equipment or overtime work. Without regard to whether or not 

FedEx issues such a direction, Contractor will continue to have full responsibility for its 

performance of the Work and for completing the Work or designated portions of the Work within the 

times established in the Contract Documents. 

3.05 RECOVERY SCHEDULE 

A. If, in FedEx’s opinion, an updated Construction Schedule shows at any time during Contractor's 

performance that Contractor is 14 or more days behind schedule for any location or category of 

work, or if Paragraph 3.02.E above requires Contractor to undertake actions, Contractor shall 

prepare a Recovery Schedule within 10 days from the date of request the date of FedEx’s request, 

which Recovery Schedule explains and displays how Contractor intends to reschedule the Work in 



order to regain compliance with the approved Construction Schedule during the immediate 

subsequent pay period. 

B. If FedEx believes that Contractor can recover all of the time during the subsequent pay period, 

Contractor may prepare a Recovery Schedule as set forth below. If, however, FedEx believes 

Contractor will require more than 30 days to recover all of the lost time, Contractor must prepare 

and submit a request for revision to the approved Construction Schedule and comply with all of the 

requirements associated with a Schedule Revision as set forth in Paragraph 3.06 below. 

C. Contractor shall prepare and submit to FedEx a one-month maximum duration Recovery Schedule, 

which incorporates the best available information from Subcontractors and others and which will 

permit a return to the scheduling reflected in the approved Construction Schedule at the earliest 

possible time. Contractor must prepare a Recovery Schedule to the same level of detail as the 

Construction Schedule. Contractor must prepare the Recovery Schedule in coordination with 

Separate Contractors with whom Contractor must coordinate in order to properly complete the 

Work. 

D. Within two days after submission of a Recovery Schedule to FedEx, Contractor and all 

Subcontractors whose work the Recovery Schedule will affect must participate in a conference with 

FedEx to review and evaluate the Recovery Schedule. Each of the participants in that conference 

will give a written commitment to comply with the Recovery Schedule. Within two days after the 

conference, Contractor shall submit for FedEx’s review and approval any revisions to the proposed 

Recovery Schedule upon which the conference participants agreed. Contractor shall use the 

approved Recovery Schedule as its plan for returning to the scheduling reflected in the 


E. Contractor shall confer continuously with FedEx to assess the effectiveness of the Recovery 

Schedule. As a result of these conferences, FedEx will implement the following procedures: 

1. If FedEx determines that Contractor continues behind schedule, FedEx will direct 

Contractor to prepare a Schedule Revision and comply with all of the requirements of a 

Schedule Revision as stated below and the other requirements of the Contract 

Documents; the foregoing will not, however, limit in any way FedEx’s rights and remedies 

as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents; or 

2. If FedEx determines that Contractor has successfully accomplished the objective of the 

Recovery Schedule, FedEx will direct Contractor to return to the use of the approved 


F. If FedEx determines that a Recovery Schedule conference will be most productive if held at a 

manufacturer's plant, Subcontractor's place of business or any other place off-site, Contractor will 

pay for the travel expenses of FedEx’s Representative to attend that conference. 

3.06 SCHEDULE REVISIONS 

A. If Contractor desires, or if the Contract otherwise requires Contractor, to make modifications or 

changes in Contractor’s method of operation or sequencing of the Work or in the durations of the 

activities in the Construction Schedule or a Recovery Schedule, Contractor shall do so in 

accordance with Paragraph 3.02 above. Contractor may only revise the approved Construction 

Schedule or an approved Recovery Schedule as a result of the occurrence of an Excused Delay or 

with FedEx’s written approval as provided in this Paragraph 3.06. 



B. Contractor shall submit to FedEx requests for revisions to the Construction Schedule, together with 

written rationale for revisions and description of logic for rescheduling work and substantiate that 

the Work will be substantially completed within the time the Contract requires. FedEx will approve 

proposed revisions that are acceptable to it in writing and Contractor shall incorporate those 

revisions into the Construction Schedule or an approved Recovery Schedule, as the case may be. 

C. Contractor must accompany requests for revision with evidence (such as written rationale for the 

revisions and descriptions of logic for rescheduling the work) acceptable to FedEx that Contractor's 

Subcontractors are in agreement with the proposed revisions. 

D. If a revision of the Construction Schedule or a Recovery Schedule will affect the work of Separate 

Contractors, Contractor must meet with, and gain the written approval of, those Separate 

Contractors prior to Contractor’s submission of its proposed schedule revisions to FedEx; 

Contractor must cause Separate Contractors to memorialize their approval of a proposed schedule 

revision by signing the revision. If FedEx accepts a revision, it will be binding upon Contractor and 

all Separate Contractors whose work the revision affects. 

3.07 FLOAT TIME 

A. Float or slack time associated with one chain of activities is the amount of time between earliest 

start date and latest start date or between earliest finish date and latest finish date for such 

activities, as calculated as part of the approved Construction Schedule, as revised or updated with 

FedEx’s approval. Float or slack time shown on the approved Construction Schedule is not for the 

exclusive use or benefit of either FedEx or e Contractor and is available for use by either of them 

according to whichever first needs the benefit of the float to facilitate the effective use of available 

resources and to minimize the impact of project problems, Excused Delays or changes in the Work 

that may arise during the performance of the Work. Contractor or FedEx may use float time in 

conjunction with their respective review activities or to resolve project problems. No project 

problem, Contract Amendment or delay that only results in the loss of available float on the 

approved Construction Schedule will form the basis for any modification of the Contract or an 

extension of the Substantial Completion Dates or an adjustment of the compensation payable to 

Contractor. 

Contractor may not arbitrarily use float time shown on the Construction Schedule or a Recovery 

Schedule in a manner that, in FedEx’s opinion, will unnecessarily delay Separate Contractors from 

proceeding with their work or will otherwise be detrimental to FedEx’s interests. 

3.08 CONTRACTOR'S ORGANIZATION 

A. Contractor must maintain as part of its organization, or hire a Subcontractor with, a competent staff 

of sufficient size who are knowledgeable in the use, application and implementation of the work 

breakdown structure in Gant Chart format of the critical path method and who are acceptable to 

FedEx. It will be this staff’s responsibility to prepare input information for the Construction 

Schedule and subsequent revisions and updates, monitor the progress of the Work, provide input 

for updating and revising logic diagrams, when necessary, and otherwise assist Contractor in 

fulfilling its obligations under this Section 01320. 




SECTION 01322 - PROGRESS REPORTS 


1.1 PROGRESS REPORTS 

A. The Contractor shall submit weekly progress reports to the Construction Manager which 

detail the following for each task: 

1. Work Element - Relate to Schedule of Values. 

3. Percent of total job completed this period. 

4. Percent of total job completed – cumulative. 

B. The percentage of the total job completed for each period shall be the addition of the 

individual percentages for each task of the "Percent of total job completed - cumulative." 

C. The first weekly progress report shall be submitted to the Construction Manager within thirty 

days after Notice to Proceed. 

D. Subsequent Progress Reports shall be submitted to the Construction Manager at each 

weekly construction meeting. 




PROGRESS REPORTS 01322 - 1


SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality 

control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. 

These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance 

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by 

Construction Manager, Architect / Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited 

by provisions of this Section. 

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of 

the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will 

comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution 

of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction 

comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the 

Construction Manager. 

C. Pre-construction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before 

products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified 

criteria. 

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency 

qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product 

performance and compliance with industry standards. 

E. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, 

factory, or shop. 

F. Field Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work 

and for completed Work. 

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall 

mean the same as testing agency. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1


H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, 

subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, 

erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be 

performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as 

"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of 

the corresponding generic name. 

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum 

of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements 

indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or 

conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent 

requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for 

a decision before proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum 

provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality 

specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, 

indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. 

Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 


A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their 

capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection 

of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract 

Document requirements. 

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. 



C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit to the Construction Manager copies of 

permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for 

fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance 

with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; 

individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar 

in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction 

with a record of successful in-service performance. 

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those 

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this 

Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to 

produce required units. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in 

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind 

indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, 

or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be 

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy 

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the 

Work. 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and 

capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with 

additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having 

jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program. 

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer 

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are 

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 



1.6 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Quality Control: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 

Construction Manager will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. The Construction Manager will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers 

of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged 

to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that 

failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum 

will be adjusted by Change Order. 

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise 

indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified 

or not. 

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to 

perform these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Construction Manager, unless agreed 

to in writing by Construction Manager. 

2. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or 

inspecting will be performed. 

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written 

report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are 

Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they 

so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report 

results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that 

replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Construction Manager and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Construction Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in 

the Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are 

conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected 

work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control 

service through Contractor. 



5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or 

accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol 

services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in 

advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. 

Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control 

services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to 

accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 

1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Special Tests and Inspections: The Construction Manager will engage a qualified special inspector, when 

required, to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the 

responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities 

having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and 

reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work 

during performance of its services. 

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to 

the Construction Manager with copies to the Architect / Engineer, Contractor and to authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes 

a list of unresolved deficiencies. 

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work 

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. 

C. Insurance Provider: At the discretion of the Construction Manager and or the owner retained insurance 

agency, the contractor shall make any portion of the site available to an insurance agent(s), and shall act 

as his/her security escort if necessary. The insurance agent shall have the authority to inspect work in 

progress, means and methods of construction, as well as materials installed or stored on site. 





3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged 

construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification 

Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams 

that are as invisible as possible. 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for 

quality-control services. 




SECTION 01550 - HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section applies to all work on this project and specifies the development and implementation of a 

Health and Safety Plan (HASP) and Program by the Contractor and all of its subcontractors 

performing work. The HASP shall address all activities performed within the Contract including, but not 

limited to, soil excavation, fall protection, confined space entry (OSHA 1910.146) and lock-out, tag-out 

procedures. 


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the development and implementation of a Health and Safety 

Plan that will adequately protect workers. The Contractor shall develop a detailed HASP using this 

Section and the site inspection as a basis for delineating additional details and requirements as the 

Contractor deems necessary. The HASP must establish in detail the protocols necessary for 

protecting workers, on-site personnel and visitors from potential hazards related to hazardous job 

conditions. 

1. The Contractor shall develop, implement, administer and supervise a site-specific Health and 

Safety Plan and Program in accordance with these specifications. It shall be the responsibility 

of the Contractor to make interpretations and draw conclusions with respect to the conditions at 

the site and their impact on health and safety of project personnel. 

2. The Contractor shall designate an individual as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) who 

shall daily implement and enforce the HASP. The SSHO shall be assigned to the site on a fulltime 

basis and shall report to the Contractor in matters pertaining to site health and safety 

(H&S). The SSHO shall be responsible for preparing and maintaining daily H&S site logs and 

reports. 

1.3 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS 

A. Provide submittals as specified herein and in conformance with Section 01040. 

B. Provide completed copy of the Health and Safety Plan before proceeding with any construction 

activities. 

C. Construction activities shall not begin or continue until the Construction Manager approves the 

Contractor’s submittals listed below: 

1. HASP as required in item B above. 

2. Name and qualifications of the SSHO as specified under Health and Safety Management 

Section of this document. 

3. Copies of any Incident Reporting Logs completed during the project. 

HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN 01550 - 1


1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. The site-specific Health and Safety Plan and all work conducted on-site shall be consistent with the 

requirements of the following references: 

1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards and Regulations contained in 

Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1910 and 1926 (29 CFR 1910 and 1926), including 

amendments as stated in the Federal Register. 

2. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Standard Operating Guidelines, latest 

revision. 

3. All applicable Airport Authority policies and procedures including emergency response 

procedures. 

4. FedEx Contractor Safety Requirements (Appendix D to this Project Manual). 

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR 

A. Minimum precautions noted in this Section shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his/her 

responsibility to implement stricter health and safety precautions as warranted by the work. 

B. All work performed under this contract shall be in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and 1910 

regulations and any other applicable federal, state or local health and safety regulations. 

C. The Contractor's SSHO shall conduct an initial survey to determine the appropriate safety procedures 

and level of worker safety equipment. The Contractor's SSHO shall maintain a continuous hazardous 

materials health and safety monitoring program throughout the performance of the work. It shall be the 

SSHO's responsibility to notify the Construction Manager of any deviations in the health and safety 

monitoring program. 

D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Construction Manager verbally and in writing as 

quickly as possible should any unforeseen safety hazard or condition become evident during the 

performance of the work. In the interim, the Contractor shall take prudent action to establish and 

maintain safe working conditions and to safeguard workers, on-site personnel, visitors, and the 

environment in accordance with the established emergency response procedures detailed in the 

Contractor's HASP. 

1.6 EMPLOYEE TRAINING 

A. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to train its employees. The Contractor shall be responsible for 

ensuring that only personnel having successfully completed the required H&S training are permitted to 

enter designated areas of the site where worker protection is required. 

B. At least one individual (SSHO) as designated by the Contractor, who has current certification (Red 

Cross or equivalent) in basic first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) must be present on the 

site at all times. This individual must also have received training and information regarding OSHA's 



Bloodborne Pathogen Standard including the required use of "universal precautions" and the need for 

HBV vaccinations. 

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the following specific training requirements; 

Hazard Communication/Right-to-Know (OSHA), Respiratory Protection, Emergency Response 

procedures, site orientation, daily toolbox meetings and weekly safety meeting. 

1.7 HAZARD COMMUNICATION 

A. The Contractor must have a project-specific written Hazard Communication Program. This Program 

must be available on-site for review by the Contractor’s employees, the Owner or other affected 

parties. 

B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be provided for jet fuel, and all chemicals on site in the 

Contractor’s Hazard Communication Program. MSDSs for chemicals brought on-site by the Contractor 

shall be maintained at the site and must be made available to its employees, the Owner, and other 

affected parties 

1.8 EMERGENCY PLANNING 

A. The HASP shall include emergency procedures for occurrences such as personal injury, fire, and 

exposure to toxic substances. All personnel on-site shall be instructed initially and weekly via safety 

meetings concerning these safety procedures. 

B. Emergency response procedures shall include employee training, alarm systems, escape routes and 

procedures, critical operations or equipment, rescue and medical duty assignments, designation of 

responsible parties, emergency reporting procedures and methods to account for all employees after 

evacuation. 

C. The Emergency Contact information shall be included in all Contractor HASPs. 

D. In the event that on-site work results in the accidental spill or release of oil or hazardous materials, 

containment to the extent possible will be required by on-site personnel (in proper personal protective 

equipment as designated by the SSHO). Containment should include the use of absorbent pads or 

materials, covering and/or diverting spills from sewers, drains, surface water bodies, etc. For spills 

that cannot be controlled by on-site personnel or are above the reportable quantities, the SSHO or 

designee shall secure the area and immediately notify in the following order: 

1. OAK Fire Department 510.577.4080 or 911 

2. Contractor’s Environmental Consultant 

3. Construction Manager 

1.9 INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURES 

A. All injuries, accidents and illnesses occurring as a result of or during on-site work must be recorded 

and shall be submitted to the Construction Managerwithin five (5) days of the incident. The Contractor 

is responsible for notification to OSHA if necessary. 



1.10 SITE ACCESS AND CONTROL 

A. The Contractor's HASP shall include site access provisions. 

B. The Contractor shall prepare site control procedures to establish work zones on-site, based on the 

proposed work locations and project phasing requirements, and the requirements specified in this 

section. The Contractor shall also develop operational procedures in order to properly implement the 

plan. Prior to initiation of the work, the Contractor shall erect temporary site fencing or barricades to 

physically separate the work zones as specified in the site control procedures. 

1.11 DRUG TESTING 

A. Contractor shall provide pre-employment drug testing and random on-site drug testing. Drug testing 

program shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 199. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 

A. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel, when required by the HASP, with the appropriate 

personal protective equipment (PPE) and clothing and shall ensure that all PPE and clothing is kept 

clean and well maintained. 

B. All health and safety materials and equipment shall conform, at a minimum, to OSHA, NIOSH and 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards and requirements. 

C. Minimum worker protection measures include hard hats, steel-toed work boots, safety glasses, hearing 

protection and standard work clothes (Level D PPE). 


3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND IMPLEMENTATION 

A. The Health and Safety Plan shall be implemented by the Contractor under the direction of its SSHO. It 

is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure compliance with the HASP. Modifications to the 

Contractor’s HASP shall be made after review by the Owner. 

B. Prior to the commencement of on-site activities, a Site Safety Meeting and Orientation will be held to 

review the specific requirements of the HASP. Daily Safety Meetings (Toolbox meetings) and Weekly 

Safety Meetings will be conducted by the SSHO throughout the duration of field activities. 

3.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 

A. The SSHO shall be assigned to the site on a full-time basis and shall report to the Contractor and the 

Construction Manager in matters pertaining to site safety and health. The SSHO shall be responsible 

for preparing and maintaining daily health and safety site logs and reports. 



The qualifications of the SSHO shall include: 

1. A minimum of three (3) years working experience at construction sites; 

2. Working knowledge of State and Federal occupational safety and health regulations. 

3. Specialized training in personal and respiratory equipment program implementation and in the 

proper use of air monitoring instruments, and air sampling methods and procedures; 

4. Current certification in first aid and CPR by a recognized approved organization such as the 

American Red Cross; and 

5. In addition to 40 Hour OSHA training, annual refresher training, and medical monitoring, the 

SSHO shall also be Supervisory (1910.120) trained. 

3.3 LOGS, REPORTS AND RECORD KEEPING 

A. The Contractor shall maintain weekly logs and reports covering the implementation of the HASP. The 

format shall be developed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager 

with copies of all logs and reports on a monthly basis. 

B. Daily Safety Logs shall include at a minimum, the following: 

1. Date; 

2. Area (site specific) inspected; 

3. Employees in a particular area and the work being performed; 

4. Site visitors, name, affiliation and purpose of site visit; 

5. Equipment being utilized by employees; 

6. Protective clothing being worn by employees; 

7. Protective equipment being utilized by Contractor's personnel, visitors, and designated State 

and Federal representatives; 

8. SSHO signature and date. 

C. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for compliance with all Federal laws such as OSHA. 




SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 



A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unless otherwise specified, and the product of a reputable 

manufacturer. Materials and equipment shall conform to applicable specifications and standards, and 

shall comply with size, make, type and quality specified or as specifically approved in writing by the 

Architect / Engineer. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is 

designed or is specified. 

B. The Contractor shall guarantee that each piece of equipment meets the capacity and duty requirements 

hereinafter specified, and the adequate and satisfactory mechanical performance of the equipment 

hereinafter specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 

C. It is understood that the drawings cannot show every specialty or detail; however, furnish and install all 

such specialties and equipment necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the normal 

interpretation of the plans and specifications, good practice, and to the satisfaction of the Architect / 

Engineer. 

1.2 VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 

A. Voluntary alternates are proposals offered by the Contractor for alternate materials, products or systems 

which deviate from the drawings or specifications. 

B. The Contractor may volunteer alternate materials, products or techniques which may reduce construction 

costs or improve the quality of the work or improve the time of completion. Voluntary alternates shall be 

identified on the list provided in the Proposal Form. By presenting voluntary alternates, the Contractor: 

1. Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed alternate and determined 

that in his opinion it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, or if not, has identified the 

differences; 

2. Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the alternate that the Contractor 

would for that specified; 

3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract 

except the Engineer's redesign costs, and waive all claims for additional costs related to the 

alternate which subsequently become apparent; and 

4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted alternate, making such changes as may be required 

for the Work to be complete in all respects. 

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1


1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions are proposals from the Contractor which utilize other than named products which are equal 

or superior in all respects to that specified and provide a warranty at least equal to that specified. 

Substitutions will be permitted only when a product is named and "or equal" is indicated. 

B. Where substitutions are permitted, the Contractor shall waive all claims for additional costs related to the 

substitution and the Contractor will coordinate the installation of the substitution, making such changes as 

may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects with all applicable contractors and 

subcontractors on the project. A formal presentation of all proposed substitutions shall be submitted by 

the Contractor to the Construction Manager and Architect / Engineer for review within 20 calendar days of 

the date of commencement. 

C. Proposed substitutions which, upon evaluation are not approved by the Architect / Engineer shall not be 

permitted. 

1.4 PROHIBITED MATERIALS 

A. All materials shall comply with all applicable safety, health and environmental standards. All products 

containing asbestos are prohibited. Notify the Construction Manager if a specified product contains 

asbestos so that appropriate action can be determined. 


MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2


SECTION 01622 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION 



A. This Section is intended to include Contractor's responsibilities for storage and 

handling of materials and equipment related to the Work. 


A. Contractor receiving Form; Exhibit A, this Section. 

B. Bills of Lading for materials stored on site. 


A. Ensure that materials and equipment related to the Work are transported, handled 

And stored on site in such a manner that no damage shall be done to the materials or equipment, 

the site or anything thereupon. 

1.5 ITEMS FURNISHED BY FEDERAL EXPRESS 

A. When items supplied by Federal Express’ arrive at the site or to the Contractor’s off-site secured 

storage yard, the Contractor shall receive, unload, protect, store, install and test the items. Comply 

with the requirements of Section 01035 

B. Receipt and inspection of items furnished by Federal Express shall be documented 

on Contractor Receiving Form: submit appropriate documentation to Construction Manager within 

24 hours of receipt of goods or equipment. 

1.6 LAYDOWN 

A. If the specified laydown and storage area at the site for the Contractor's temporary storage is not 

large enough for the materials, the Contractor shall make alternate arrangements for storage 

location until time of installation at the Contractor’s cost. 

B. The Contractor shall confine Contractor's equipment, the storage of materials and 

the operation of its employees within limits designated by Federal Express. 

C. Some items and equipment purchased by Federal may be delivered to the site or to Contractor’s 

off-site designated storage facility. The Contractor shall be responsible for unloading and storing 

these items and all associated costs. 

D. Arrange stored items to provide easy access for inspection. 

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Store and handle equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Packages or bundled materials shall be stored in original and undamaged condition with 

manufacturer's seals and labels intact. 

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01622 - 1


C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the materials and for protecting them from 

theft and vandalism. 

D. Equipment utilizing combustible fuel shall be stored in areas designated by Federal Express when 

not in use. 

E. Protect metals from damage, dirt and moisture. 

F. No materials may be stored in any of Federal Express' buildings. 






SECTION 01622 

EXHIBIT A 

CONTRACTOR RECEIVING FORM 

(for materials supplied by Owner) 

Contractor ________________________________________________________ 

Project: ________________________________________________________ 

Project No.: _____________Contract No. _________________________________ 

Date Material Received ________________________________________________ 

Received from: (check one) 

___________Federal Express Warehouse at _______________________________ 

___________Vendor/Supplier ___________________________________________ 

___________Vendor Contract No. (by FEDEX) _____________________________ 

Via ___________________________________________________________ 

(Carrier) 

(Attach all carrier's paperwork to this form) 

___________Other ____________________________________________________ 

Quantity Part Number Description 

____ _________________ 

____ _________________ 

____ _________________ 

____ _________________ 

__ __ _________________ 

I have inspected the items listed above and have found them: (check one) 

undamaged, complete, in good condition ready for installation. 

_ 

in the following condition, (list defects, damage, etc.) 

If damaged call Federal Express' Representative immediately 

________________________________ 

________________________________ 

________________________________ 



Received/Inspected by Date 

Contractor's Project Manager Date 

END OF SECTION 01622 – EXHIBIT A 



SECTION 01632 - SUBSTITUTIONS 


1.1 PROCEDURE 

A. After Notice to Proceed, all requests for substitutions shall be submitted to the Construction 

Manager in writing. Include all supporting technical data, costs, product availability, samples and 

the reason for requesting the substitution. If the substitution is approved, the Construction 

Manager will notify the Contractor in writing. All Construction Manager decisions will be final. 

B. If the Contractor is given written approval to install an equal item of equipment, the Contractor 

shall be responsible for any testing, construction, or dimensional changes which may result from 

this substitution, regardless of the extent of this additional work. 

C. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 

1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all 

respects to that specified. 

2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 

3. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitution into the Work, and make such 

other changes as required to make the Work complete in all respects. 

4. Waives all claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. 




SUBSTITUTIONS 01632 - 1


SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. General installation of products. 

4. Progress cleaning. 

5. Starting and adjusting. 

6. Protection of installed construction. 

7. Correction of the Work. 


A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by licensed land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of 

improvements comply with requirements. 

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous 

materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in 

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the 

kind indicated. 



3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction 

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and 

location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1


B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated 

as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and 

location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, pothole to verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of all 

utilities; and underground electrical services. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving 

Project site. 

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present 

where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance. Record observations. 

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or 

primers. 

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections 

before equipment and fixture installation. 

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with 

the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other 

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate 

fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on 

Drawings. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in 

relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect 

promptly. 

B. General: Engage a licensed land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and 

elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required 

dimensions. 

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil 

placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 



D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. 

Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each 

survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by 

Architect. 

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points 

before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during 

construction operations. 

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, located 

on two Federal Express lease line corners, referenced to data established by survey control points. 

Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 

3.5 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as 

indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease 

of removal for replacement. 

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in 

applications indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain 

conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in 

excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory 

prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are 

made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. 

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely 

in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights 

directed by Architect. 

2. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for 

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral 



anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in 

time for installation. 

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange 

joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered 

hazardous. 

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning 

for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of 

materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 

2. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark 

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper 

execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work 

area, as appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of 

manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If 

specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health 

or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure 

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste 

materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials 

already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or 

deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the 

remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability 

without damaging effects. 



J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, 

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure 

during the construction period. 

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, 

replace with new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace 

damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect fieldassembled 

components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 

Section "Quality Requirements." 

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with 

matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without 

visible evidence of repair. 

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot 

be repaired. 




SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Demolition and removal of existing facilities. 

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to 

be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall 

them where indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise 

indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 


A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: On the CPM schedules and schedule updates provided, 

indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for 

each activity, interruption of utility services. 

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct 

selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as 

practical. 

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 

a. Freight, furnishings and equipment will be removed from the existing office areas to be 

renovated, and buildings to be demolished. 

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1


b. GSE equipment, aircraft, aircraft support/maintenance equipment, and freight handling 

equipment shall be relocated by Federal Express, as coordinated with Contractor, for the 

various phases of construction. 

C. Notify Architect / Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding 

with selective demolition. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. The 

Based Bid shall assume hazardous materials are not encountered. A Unit Price cost has been requested 

as part of the Bid Form for use in the event some on-site soils are found to have contaminants. 

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; 

immediately notify Architect and Owner. 

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage 

during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 




A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective 

demolition required. 

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or 

design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a 

written RFI and sketch. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against 

damage during selective demolition operations. 

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services 

and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with 

selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition 

and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 



3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining 

portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to 

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used 

facilities. 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to 

people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to 

preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, 

and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and 

as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and 

as follows: 

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting 

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or 

small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize 

disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing 

finished surfaces. 

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, 

such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flamecutting 

operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose 

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with all Port of Oakland waste 

management and recycling requirements. 

B. Reuse/ Recycling of Removed Elements: Recycle demolished materials to the maximum extent possible. 

C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 

1. Transport items to storage area directed by Owner. 

2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or 

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally 

dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 



3.6 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition 

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 




SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Warranties. 

3. Final cleaning. 

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, 

complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and 

reasons why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final 

certifications, and similar documents. 

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services 

and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar 

final record information. 

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. 

Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel 

of changeover in security provisions. 

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 

9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction 

tools, and similar elements. 

10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 

11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, 

Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will 

prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either 

on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before 

certificate will be issued. 

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1


1.3 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, 

complete the following: 

1. Submit certified copy of Architect / Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be 

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Engineer. The certified copy of the list 

shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 

3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and 

systems. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, 

Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 

Construction Manager will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor 

of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. A project punch list will be given to the Contractor for work items that should be completed at each key 

project milestone. 

1.5 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Construction Manager for designated portions of 

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. 

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project 

Manual. 

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as 

necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to 

identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, 

including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project 

name, and name of Contractor. 

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Provide all 

Warranty documents in electronic format as well as in hard-copy format. 





3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local 

laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of 

Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 


a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including 

landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign 

substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 

d. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

e. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that 

already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical 

nameplates. 

f. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove 

excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 

g. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace 

burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy 

starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new 

fixtures. 

h. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 



SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment. 


A. Manual: Submit 3 copies of each manual in final form and submit each manual in electronic format at 

least 15 days before final inspection. Construction Manager will return copy with comments within 15 days 

after final inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Construction Manager’s comments. Submit 3 

copies of each corrected manual and submit in electronic format within 15 days of receipt of 

comments. 


2.1 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual 

Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating 

logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown 

instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for 

electric or electronic systems. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1


E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 

2.2 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source 

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and 

service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty 

and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified 

by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, 

and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including 

maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and 

components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment: 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly 

instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance procedures: 

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required 

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with 

standard time allotment. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts 

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of 

maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions 

that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets 

pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component 

incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using 

appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete 

references to information not applicable. 

B. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of 

component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. 

Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of 

completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 






SECTION 02113 – CONTAMINATED SOILS 


1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Work under this section shall be on an as needed basis. Upon discovery of suspect soil contamination, 

the contractor shall notify the Owner. The contractor shall perform soil tests for contamination. If soils 

are found by the Contractor to be suspect above allowable limits, the Contractor shall provide the 

services of a State of California Certified Environmental Consultant to test the suspect soil on site for 

contamination. If soils are found by the State of California Certified Environmental Consultant to be 

above allowable limits as defined by the governing agencies, the Contractor shall notify only the Owner 

in writing and submit the quantity of contaminated soils and separate pricing at that time to remediate 

all contaminated soils per this specification. 

Submitting a price proposal to the Owner for contaminated soils remediation is not intended to mean 

that the Contractor has in any way secured said work and should not proceed with said work until he 

receives written authorization from the Owner. 

The following specifications are intended to be invoked should the Contractor be authorized in writing to 

perform such work. 

B. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for excavation, tracking, handling, 

stockpiling, sampling and analysis, and temporary storage of contaminated soil at the fuel storage 

facility. 

C. This specification lists the minimum requirements for this project. The Contractor shall provide the 

services of a State of California Certified Environmental Consultant to provide a contaminated soil 

excavation and removals plan meeting all the current State codes. The Contractor shall provide an 

independent State of California certified testing laboratory. Submit the laboratory and consultant 

qualifications for approval. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS. 

A. At least three days before the start of the soil removal activities, a written notification shall be sent to the 

Owner. 

B. Test results for all analytical samples shall be submitted. The results shall include all documentation 

provided by the laboratory. At the completion of the demolition phase. The following data must be 

submitted to the Owner: 

1. Volume of contaminated soils excavated; 

2. Location where contaminated soils were excavated (drawings/sketches); and 

3. Location where contaminated soils will be stockpiled and stored temporarily. 

C. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner all pertinent information relating to the soil removal and 

storage. The information shall include the following: 

CONTAMINATED SOILS 02113 - 1


1. General Information 

a. Storage Facility name 

b. Storage Facility address 

c. Name and title of contact person 

d. Telephone number of contact person 

2. The Contractor shall submit a soil disposal plan. 

D. In the event that contaminated soil is excavated and treated, prepare a final submittal to the Owner. 

Include documentation on testing, excavation, backfill, and disposal. 

E. The Contractor shall submit a plan for the treatment and disposal of contaminated water, soils, slurry 

and demolition debris for approval by the Owner prior to removing any soils or debris off site. The plan 

shall detail any analytical testing of soils and other media prior to on-site treatment and/or off-site 

disposal, including any required pre-burn analysis. 


A. All contaminated soil material shall be transported to the designated temporary holding area. The 

Owner's duties do not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his 

employees or agents. Neither the presence of the Owner nor any observation and testing by the Owner 

shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his Work. 

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local 

regulations, laws, codes, and ordinances governing the handling, transportation, and disposal of 

hazardous materials. 


A. Contaminated Soil - Soils or fills determined by analytical results to contain organic vapor responses 

greater than the maximum allowable limits as required by California Environmental Protection Agency 

(Cal/EPA), the Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC) and Oakland Airport Environmental 

Department and as measured by a calibrated organic vapor analyzer (OVA). 

B. Free Product - The presence of oil in the environment as a separate phase having a measured 

thickness equal to or greater than 0.01 feet. 

C. TPH - Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons 

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 02145 – Dewatering 




2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide all employees with personal protective equipment and protective clothing consistent with the 

levels of protection for this Work as indicated in the Contractor's HASP. In addition, verify that any 

Subcontractor(s) comply with the requirements of the Contractor's HASP. 

2.2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) LINING 

A. The high density polyethylene shall be manufactured of new, first-quality product designed and 

manufactured specifically for the intended use and have the following properties: 

2.3 FILL MATERIALS 

1. The material shall be 40 mil HDPE liner below, and 15 mil HDPE cover. 

2. The material shall be U. V. resistant (black in color) and cold crack resistant to minus 40 degrees 

F. 

3. The material shall be manufactured in a minimum 15-ft seamless width. Labels on the rolls shall 

identify the thickness, length, width, and manufacturer's mark number. 

A. The backfill material shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to performing any backfill 

operations. Excavated soils exhibiting an OVA response of less than the maximum allowable limits are 

acceptable for use as backfill material. Notify the Owner as to the source of the backfill material. 

Provide samples as requested by the Owner. 

B. Import clean fill as required. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Perform all contaminated soil excavation work in accordance with the HASP. Contaminated soil 

excavation work shall consist of but is not limited to utility trenches, removal of obstructions, trench 

support systems, pretrenching, mass excavations, and any incidental soil work. 

B. Excavate soil to the limits necessary to remove the contaminated soils are directed by the governing 

authority. 

C. All site health and safety controls shall be fully established and in operation prior to beginning any 

contaminated soil excavation. Site controls shall include but not be limited to work zones properly 

barricaded, decontamination facilities, and all support equipment and supplies including personal 

protective equipment. All site controls shall be reviewed by the Owner in the field. 

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, transportation, and disposal of free product if 

encountered in the excavation. Methods to remove free product shall be governed by the quantity of 

free product. Absorptive pads shall be used for smaller amounts of free product and, if substantial 



quantities are encountered and the Owner approve, a vacuum truck or similar equipment shall be 

utilized for free product removal. 

E. All materials from excavation, trenching, demolition, and dewatering in areas of potential contamination 

and construction debris from areas of potential contamination shall be considered as contaminated, 

unless proven otherwise by the Contractor pursuant to the testing described herein and in Section 

02145 – Dewatering. Testing shall be provided to verify the quantity and type of contamination to 

include hydrocarbons, pollutants and hazardous substances. The most conservative results shall 

dictate the method and degree of treatment, in accordance with any and all State and/or County 

regulations. 

3.2 TESTING 

A. Supply all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals as required to provide all soil and groundwater 

sample collection and analysis and associated reporting to environmental agencies in accordance with 

applicable state regulation. All sampling collection and sample submission must be conducted in 

accordance with the Contractor’s Cal/EPA or DTSC-approved Comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan 

(CQAP). If the Contractor does not possess the referenced CQAP, the Contractor must subcontract 

sample collection tasks to an entity approved by the Owner. 

B. State of California Hazardous Waste and Department of Toxic Substances Control procedures shall be 

used in the soil and groundwater sample collection analysis and reporting. 

The Contractor’s Plan, which shall include detailed procedures outlining any environmental issue 

pertaining to the scope of work shall be submitted to the Owner no later than three (3) weeks before 

Contractor mobilization for trenching or excavation. As a minimum, the Contractor’s Plan shall include 

the following: 

1. SOIL MONITORING DURING EXCAVATION 

a. The following sampling procedures shall apply during excavation for any suspect 

contaminated areas of the project. Soil in the suspect areas shall be monitored 

continuously for excess soil contamination from petroleum pollutants using a flame 

ionization detector or photoionization detector instrument for measuring volatile organic 

vapors in accordance with applicable regulations. 

b. Excessively contaminated soils shall be managed in accordance with the Cal/EPA 

Regulations and Guidelines. 

2. PRE-AND POST-BURN SAMPLING 

a. Soils to be removed for off-site treatment/disposal shall be tested prior to being removed 

from the construction site in accordance with Cal/EPA and DTSC guidelines. Analytical 

results are to be submitted to the Owner and the proposed treatment facility prior to 

shipment. EPA methods 8010, 8020, 9073 and RCRA metals are applicable for any 

contaminated soil deemed “Virgin”; EPA methods 8010, 9020, 8080, 9056, 9073, and 

RCRA metals are applicable for any contaminated soil deemed “Non-Virgin”. 

3.3 EXCAVATION OF CONTAMINATED MATERIAL 



A. Work and decontamination procedures in areas containing contaminated material shall be performed in 

accordance with standard engineering practices. 

B. Employ methods necessary to isolate contaminated soils from non-contaminated soils, including 

trenching. 

C. The excavation may include removing additional soils found to contain residual contamination as 

directed by the Owner based on post excavation sampling and analyses described in Paragraph 3.6 of 

this Section. 

D. Separate excavated contaminated soil based on the determination that the contaminated soil could be 

from more than one source and by degrees of contamination (i.e., visually contaminated) or as directed 

by the Owner. 

E. Depending on conditions, “confined space entry” procedures in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.146 may 

be required in the excavation. Explosion-proof blowers and exhaust fans shall be provided as 

necessary to ventilate the excavation to prevent worker exposure. All work conducted under “confined 

space entry” conditions shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan. 

The Contractor will also be required to obtain and post a confined space entry permit, if conditions 

require such entry. 

F. Keep excavated portion of the work reasonably free of water at all times, and until all work and backfill 

is completed. 

G. Shore and brace excavations where necessary to prevent cave-ins in accordance with all safety 

regulations. 

H. Conduct all soil screening and testing required by state regulations regarding excavation of 

contaminated soil. 

I. The excavation work shall be performed, protected, and supported as required for safety in the manner 

set forth in the operation rules, order, and regulations prescribed by the Occupational safety and Health 

Act (OSHA). More specifically, all excavation and trenching operations will be completed in accordance 

with 29 CFR 1926.651-652 standards and personnel working around or in the excavation shall wear 

approved head protection (e.g. hard hats and protective clothing/equipment). 

J. All ignition sources and gasoline-driven equipment shall be removed from areas where flammable 

vapors have been measured. 

K. All existing monitor wells in the areas of construction are not to be disturbed. 

3.4 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL 

A. Temporarily stock-pile excavated contaminated soil at the designated holding area. 

B. When stockpiling, excavated materials shall be placed on a base lined with 40 mil. (or higher gauge) 

polyethylene and be completely and securely covered with 15 mil. (or higher gauge) polyethylene. 



1. The stockpiles of excavated soil shall be tracked to provide complete data necessary to locate 

any stockpile within the site. All Work necessary to coordinate stockpiling from placement to 

disposal shall be included. Provide Owner with duplicate copies of all documentation at the time 

of stockpiling. 

2. The polyethylene shall be bermed around the edges to prevent any infiltration of storm water or 

exfiltration of leachate. The berm height shall be a minimum of 12-in. 

3. The polyethylene shall be adequately secured to prevent damage or loss by wind or other 

weather elements. 

C. Stockpiles shall be securely barricaded and clearly labeled. 

D. Soils shall be suitably dewatered prior to their leaving the site, to prevent free water from developing 

during transport to the disposal facility. 

3.5 SOIL TRACKING, STOCKPILE SAMPLING, AND ANALYSIS 

A. Provide to the Owner, on a daily basis, copies of field records documenting the location of stockpiled 

material, and stockpile identification data. 

B. Track all contaminated soils from excavation to the storage site. Take samples in such a manner as 

not to cause any cross-contamination. All sampling equipment shall be decontaminated between each 

collection of a sample from each stockpile. 

C. Samples shall be analyzed for the constituents required by the disposal facility. A certified laboratory 

certified shall perform these analyses. 

D. Submit a copy of all analyses to the Owner within two days of receipt of the laboratory report. A review 

period of one week should be anticipated for Owner's review of analytical data. 

3.6 CONFIRMATORY SOIL TESTING AND EXCAVATION 

A. Contaminated soil excavation shall also include additional soils, based on post excavation confirmatory 

sampling and analysis. 

B. Prior to the start of the excavation work, the Contractor will submit to the Owner drawings showing preexcavation 

sample locations. Pre-excavation sampling will be conducted within the proposed 

excavation area as described below: 

1. Collect grab samples for OVA analysis from the proposed excavated material at a rate equal to 

the smaller of one sample per 10 linear feet of trench or one sample per 160 cubic feet (six 

cubic yards). If the OVA results of a sample exceeding the maximum allowable limit, collect 

additional samples in the same vicinity of the original sample to delineate the extent of soil that 

exhibits OVA results exceeding the maximum allowable limits and requires removal. 

2. In all cases of pre-excavation sampling, length 10 feet or more than six cubic yards will require 

an additional sample. Samples shall be evenly spaced as the excavation configuration allows. 



3. Areas with staining or other indications of potential contamination may require additional 

sampling/characterization. Collect and analyze additional samples in these areas as described 

in 3.5, A.,1. every 10 linear feet or 6 cubic yards of material excavated along the trench. 

C. Analyze grab samples collected for OVA analyses for headspace screening according to State 

Environmental Codes using a field-calibrated OVA, equipped with a flame ionizing detector (FID). 

D. Collect soil samples for Virgin Preburn, with a two-day turnaround time. Virgin Preburn analyses 

include volatile organic hydrocarbons (VOC), total recoverable petroleum hydrocarbons, and total 

analyses for arsenic, cadmium, chromium, and lead. The Contractor shall report all results of sample 

analyses to the Owner within 24 hours of receiving them. 

3.7 TRANSPORT OF CONTAMINATED MATERIAL 

A. The Contractor shall not be permitted to transport contaminated materials off -site until all 

documentation has been received, reviewed, and accepted by Owner. 

B. Transport contaminated materials from the site to the airport fuel facility in accordance with all United 

States Department of Transportation (DOT), USEPA, State regulations and other regulations of all 

affected states. 

C. All wastes shall be disposed of at a Cal/EPA or DTSC approved licensed and certified waste 

treatment/disposal facility, licensed in all states affected by transport. No on-site treatment of 

contaminated materials will be authorized. 

D. Provide to the Owner copies of all weight slips, both tare and gross, for every load weighed and 

disposed of at the accepted disposal facility. The slips shall be tracked by the original manifest 

document number that was assigned by the Owner at the site. The Owner shall only make progress 

payments upon receipt of these weight slips. 

E. The Contractor shall furnish Certificates of Materials Recycling from the Treatment/Disposal facility for 

all contaminated materials. Quantities shall be monitored by the Owner and the contractor at the site. 

All certificates shall account for the entire quantity of materials generated at the site. Contractor must 

also provide manifests, bills of lading, and all certificates of receipt and/or handling of waste materials 

removed from the site. 

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that free-liquid does not develop during transport. “Wet 

soils” shall not be loaded for transport. The Contractor shall be responsible to property dispose of any 

free liquids that may result during transportation. 

PART 4 - METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 

4.1 Measurement for Contaminated Soil payment shall be the number of cubic yards of contaminated soil listed in 

the Bid Form. Any additional contaminated soil removed from the project location that is deemed to be 

contaminated by approved testing methods shall be measured separately. Measurement shall also include 

but not be limited to any incidental items for removal and disposal of contaminated soil, such as transportation 

of soils, stockpiling, venting, cover, etc. in accordance with the plans, Technical Specifications, and Contract 

Documents. 

PART 5 - BASIS OF PAYMENT 



5.1 Payment for the quantities measured as described in Part 4 – Method of Measurement above shall be made at 

the Contract Unit Price Bid per cubic yard for Contaminated Soils, which prices and payments shall be full 

compensation for furnishing all materials and incidentals necessary under this Section. No payment for 

contaminated soils in excess of the amounts listed in the Bid Form shall be made without prior written approval 

from the Owner to perform said work. 




SECTION 02145 – DEWATERING 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section specifies requirements for groundwater generated during construction related dewatering 

as part of the project. Also covered are procedures to be followed by the Contractor for the handling 

of groundwater prior to discharge. 

B. This specification lists the minimum requirements for this project. The Contractor shall provide an 

independent State of California certified testing laboratory. Submit the laboratory and consultant 

qualifications for approval. Any laboratory completing chemical analysis on any media shall possess a 

Comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan (CQAP). The contractor must provide proof of compliance. 

C. This Section specifies work that shall be performed by Federal and State of California approved 

methods. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to implement his work in full compliance with Federal, 

Local and State of California regulations. 

D. At least three days before the start of dewatering activities, a written notification shall be sent to the 

Owner. 

E. Activities for which the Contractor shall be responsible and which are covered by this Section include: 

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 

1. Collecting groundwater from the construction dewatering systems to assure conformance with 

Federal, State and Local regulations. The Contractor will obtain all necessary permits. 

2. Providing an air stripper, a settling/equalization tank (i.e., sedimentation tank) carbon filters and 

mobile storage tanks (i.e., vacuum trucks). The mobile storage tanks shall be utilized for the 

transfer of contaminated groundwater to an approved storage facility. 

3. Groundwater samples will be collected from the settling/equalization tanks to assess whether 

treatment of the groundwater is necessary prior to discharge to the storm water system and 

determine NPDES discharge criteria compliance. 

4. If test results indicate that groundwater collected during dewatering activities must be treated, 

the Contractor will be required to transport the contaminated groundwater in the mobile storage 

tank to the storage facility. 

5 Results of sampling will be forwarded to the Port of Oakland for approval to dispose of water 

into the Port’s storm drain system. 

A. The Contractor is responsible for Quality Control and will perform field chemical quantitative analysis 

using portable gas chromatograph instrumentation for evaluation of groundwater from dewatering 

activities and/or visual inspection. The Owner will direct the General Contractor to: 

1. Discharge groundwater into the storm sewer system if the quality of the groundwater meets the 

NPDES Permit requirements, subject to approval by the Port of Oakland or; 

Dewatering 02145 - 1



2. Transport the groundwater in the mobile storage tank for the transfer of the groundwater to the 

storage facility. 

A. The Contractor shall submit a complete dewatering plan to include, but not limited to: 

1. Prior to the initiation of site work, the Contractor shall certify that all personnel assigned for the 

purpose of performing project tasks in accordance with the provisions of the HASP and have 

received appropriate safety training in compliance with 29 CFR 1910.120. Documentation of all 

such training shall be submitted for review before any on-site personnel will be allowed in an 

area where worker protection is required by the Contractor's HASP. 

2. The air stripper, settling/equalization tank, carbon filters, well points, pumps, piping, hoses, 

sheeting, shoring and bracing and all equipment and materials required for the dewatering. 

B. In the event of contaminated soil refer to Section 02113 – Contaminated Soils. 

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for adhering to regulations, Specifications, and recognized 

standard practices related to the management of contaminated groundwater. The Owner shall not be 

responsible at any time for the Contractor’s violation of pertinent Local, State or Federal regulations or 

endangerment of laborers, passers-by or any others. 

B. Dewatering operations shall comply with the requirements of appropriate regulatory agencies. Permits 

to initiate dewatering activities must be obtained by the Contractor through the appropriate water 

management district. 

C. Minimum precautions noted in this Section shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for 

implementing stricter health and safety precautions should they be warranted by the Work. 

D. The Contractor shall become familiar with the geotechnical report provided as an attachment to this 

project manual as groundwater was encountered in subsurface cores taken from the ground. The 

contractor should reasonably expect to encounter groundwater in excavations. 

1.5 OVERVIEW OF MANAGEMENT OF GROUNDWATER FROM DEWATERING 

A. The concentration and nature of contamination may vary depending on location and/or depth of 

dewatering. 

B. Groundwater from dewatering shall be pumped directly from the excavation by the Contractor to a 

settling/equalization tank. 

C. The purpose of the settling/equalization tanks is to settle out construction related and other sediment in 

the treatment system influent stream. The Contractor will sample sediment material upon removal 

from the tank by the Contractor and identify disposal options. 

1.6 SAMPLING PROTOCOL 



A. Field screening (jar head space analysis) will be performed by the Contractor on groundwater samples 

collected from dewatering activities at a minimum frequency of daily and will involve: 

1. Visual and olfactory inspection. The presence of a hydrocarbon (fuel) sheen will trigger the 

requirement to treat the groundwater at the treatment facility. 

2. Headspace analysis for total VOCs with a portable photoionization detector. Detection of VOCs 

in headspace at a concentration exceeding 10 ppmv above background is the threshold for the 

requirement to treat groundwater in the storage facility. 

3. Gas chromatographic analysis via modified EPA Method 3800. Detected concentrations 

exceeding regulatory limits will be the thresholds for groundwater treatment. Gas 

chromatographic analyses will be conducted by the Contractor utilizing an on-site gas 

chromatograph (GC). 

B. If any of the above criterion are exceeded, the Contractor will transport the water off site for disposal. If 

none of the criterion are exceeded, the Contractor can discharge the groundwater from the 

sedimentation tank(s) to the storm water discharge system, with the approval of the Port of Oakland. 

1. Laboratory chemical analyses of settling/equalization tank samples collected will be in 

accordance with the latest versions of the following: 

a. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) - USEPA Method 8260. 

b. Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds (SVOCs) - USEPA Method 8270. 

c. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH) - USEPA Modified Method 418.1. 

d. Dissolved RCRA(8) Metals plus Beryllium, Copper, Nickel, and Zinc. 

e. pH - ASTM Method D 516-88. 

f. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) - Standard Method - SM-2540D. 

g. Toxicity Testing Requirements – State of California 

C. Samples will be collected by the Contractor from influent and effluent sampling ports built into the 

equalization/settling tank. 

1.7 DECONTAMINATION OF EQUIPMENT 

A. Tools and equipment which are to be taken and reused off-site shall be decontaminated. This 

requirement shall apply to all tools, treatment process equipment, and sampling equipment. 


Not used. 


3.1 MOBILE HOLDING TANK 

A. The contractor shall have on site Mobile Holding Tank(s) for transporting contaminated groundwater 

pumped from excavations to storage facility. The tank(s) shall be a minimum of 5,000 gallon capacity 

and be complete with a PTO driven pump, hoses, sump, fuel and driver. 



3.2 DEWATERING 

A. Control grading around excavations to prevent surface water from flowing into excavation areas. 

B. Drain or pump as required to continually maintain all excavations and trenches free of water or mud 

from any source, and discharge to approved drains, channels or mobile storage tanks. Commence 

when water first appears and continue until Work is complete to the extent that no damage will result 

from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes. 

C. Use pumps of adequate capacity to ensure rapid drainage of area. 

D. Remove subgrade materials rendered unsuitable by excessive wetting and replace with approved 

backfill material. 

E. Cap fuel pipe immediately to keep water from accessing the fuel pipe. 

F. When dewatering is required to complete the scope of work and potentially contaminated groundwater 

may be drawn into the dewatering system, the Contractor must provide on-site groundwater 

remediation services. 

G. The Contractor shall provide an Air Stripper Unit capable of treating the maximum calculated volume of 

groundwater drawn into the well-point/sock dewatering system. This includes the initial “surge” 

volume and the status column produced after drawdown has occurred. The air stripper will be linked 

to the discharge time of the dewatering system. 

PART 4 - PAYMENT 

1. The Contractor must obtain the necessary discharge permit for dewatering operations. 

2. Influent and effluent samples for laboratory analysis will be collected and analyzed at a certified 

laboratory during the course of dewatering. The Permit will outline the frequency, required 

laboratory test methods, and California Environmental Protection Agency and the Department 

of Toxic Substances Control Reporting Requirements. 

3. A portable gas chromatograph (GC) is an acceptable tool in analyzing the influent and effluent 

samples; however, for all sampling events associated with groundwater treatment during 

dewatering, a representative of a firm operating under a current CQAP must complete all 

relevant sampling activities. 

4. Contractor assumes all responsibility and liability, and agrees to absorb all costs associated 

with any addition assessment and/or remediation tasks which are the direct or indirect result of 

contaminant transfer from the Air Stripper/Dewatering System to surface water bodies, and/or 

soils, and/or drainage systems present in proximity to or at a distance from the project site. The 

Contractor must take precautions to avoid contaminant transfer from the work site to any other 

on-site or off-site location. 

4.1 All dewatering shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid and considered as incidental to the bid item where 

dewatering is expected. 




SECTION 02220 - SITE DEMOLITION 



A. Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of facilities, safety of adjacent facilities, dust control, and 

runoff control. 

B. Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal charges. 

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

D. Do not close or obstruct public or private roadways, operational traffic corridors, sidewalks, or fire hydrants without 

appropriate permits or written authorization. 

E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 

F. Comply with the City of Oakland regulations by preparing and enacting a Waste Reduction and Recycling Plan 

(WRRP). For more information, reference http://oaklandrecycles.com/page. 


A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions that 

will remain after demolition. Submit record as part of closeout submittals. 


A. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of structures to be demolished. 

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as reasonably practical. 

C. Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents or specified by the Owner, items of salvageable value to Contractor 

shall be removed from site. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted and shall not interfere 

with other work specified. 



A. Fill material shall be Engineered Fill materials as specified in Section 02300. 



A. Provide, erect, and maintain erosion control devices, temporary barriers, and security devices at locations indicated 

on Construction Drawings. 

SITE DEMOLITION 02220 - 1


B. Protect existing facilities, appurtenances, and structures, which are not to be demolished. Repair damage to existing 

items to remain caused by demolition operations. 

C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as necessary. 

D. Mark location of utilities. Protect and maintain in safe and operable condition utilities that are to remain. Prevent 

interruption of existing utility service to occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities 

having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing 

authorities and Owner. 

E. Notify and obtain written permission from Owner or the Port of work that may affect their facilities, utility outages, or 

other disruptions a minimum of 1 week prior to any proposed shut-downs. Obtain written permission from adjacent 

property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon, or limit access to their property. Coordinate 

notice with Owner. 

3.2 GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or pavements to remain. 

B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction. 

Do not resume operations until directed by authority. 

C. Conduct operations with minimum of interference to public or private access. Maintain ingress and egress at all 

times. 

D. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. 

E. Comply with Port and other governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 

F. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent 

areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 

3.3 DEMOLITION 

A. Demolish site improvements designated to be removed as shown on the Drawings. Site improvements shall include 

but not be limited to pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures, utilities, signage, landscaping and 

similar facilities. 

B. Disconnect and cap or remove utilities to be abandoned as shown on the Drawings. 

C. Break up concrete slabs-on-grade that are 2 feet or more below proposed top of subgrade to permit drainage. 

Remove all facilities and below grade construction within 2 feet below top of proposed subgrade. 

3.4 FILLING VOIDS 

A. Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition or removal of underground facilities using 

Engineered Fill materials as described in Section 02300- Earthwork 

B. Areas to be filled shall be free of standing water, frost, frozen or unsuitable material, trash, and debris prior to fill 

placement. 



C. Grade surface to match adjacent grades and to provide flow of surface drainage after fill placement and compaction. 


A. Comply with the City of Oakland regulations by preparing and enacting a Waste Reduction and Recycling Plan 

(WRRP). For more information, reference http://oaklandrecycles.com/page. 

B. Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Leave areas of work in 

clean condition. 

C. No burning of any material, debris, or trash on-site or off-site will be allowed except when allowed by appropriate 

governing authority and Owner. If allowed as stated above, burning shall be performed in manner prescribed by 

governing authority. Attend burning materials until fires have burned out and have been completely extinguished. 

D. Transport materials removed from demolished structures with appropriate vehicles and dispose off-site to areas 

that are approved for disposal by governing authorities and appropriate property owners. 

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

A. Measurement and payment shall be based on the units listed on the Bid Form and shall include full compensation 

for furnishing all materials, all preparation, assembly, and installation of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, 

tools, and incidentals necessary to complete each item. 

END OF SECTION 



SECTION 02221 - BUILDING DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements. 

2. Abandoning in place and removing below-grade construction. 

3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place site utilities. 

4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner. 


A. Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of facilities, safety of adjacent facilities, dust 

control, and runoff control. 

B. Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal 

charges. 

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

D. Do not close or obstruct public or private roadways, operational traffic corridors, sidewalks, or fire hydrants 

without appropriate permits or written authorization. 

E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 

F. Comply with the City of Oakland regulations by preparing and enacting a Waste Reduction and Recycling 

Plan (WRRP). For more information, reference http://oaklandrecycles.com/page. 


A. Demolish: Completely remove and legally dispose of off-site. 

B. Recycle: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 

C. Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to 

Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their 

contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be 

uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 

BUILDING DEMOLITION 02221 - 1


1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. 

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including drawings, that indicates the 

measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control 

and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 

1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain. 

C. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 

2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 

3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services. 

D. Building Demolition Plans: Drawings indicating the following: 

1. Locations of temporary protection and means of egress for adjacent occupied buildings. 

E. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of 

demolition. 

F. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, 

including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by building demolition operations. 

Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before the Work begins. 

G. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to 

accept hazardous wastes. 

H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering 

refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed 

according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was 

recovered. 


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning 

demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 

D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 

Section "Project Management and Coordination." 




A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. 

B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so 

operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. 

1. Provide not less than seven (7) days notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent 

occupied buildings. 

2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent 

buildings. 

a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent 

buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 

b. Observe the emergency contacts as noted in section 01140-1.1-A-3 in the event of any 

emergency situation which would allow less than seven days notice of an operational 

impact. 

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as 

practical. 

2. Before building demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 

a. Furniture and equipment. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; 

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a 

separate contract. 

E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 


A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations. 




A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. 

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not 

guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. 



C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. 

D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might 

result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures 

during building demolition operations. 


A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition. 

B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and 

structures to be demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, 

then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that 

maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 

3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 610 mm below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining 

portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Existing Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and 

sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been 

completed and verified in writing. 

D. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to 

preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. 

E. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner. 

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

3.3 PROTECTION 

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities 

during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. 

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition 

operations. 

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized 

in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and 

authorities having jurisdiction. 



a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is 

required during changeover. 

C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered 

passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as indicated. Comply with 

requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 

3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage 

to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and 

from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 

5. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that 

are exposed to building demolition operations. 

D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or 

other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 

3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish indicated existing buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods required 

to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable firesuppression 

devices during flame-cutting operations. 

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame cutting operations. 

3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 

4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose 

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to 

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used 

facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities 

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around 

closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing 

environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction 

or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 

C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 

3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS 

A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. 

Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on 

the next lower level. 



B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey 

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground 

impact and dust generation. 

C. Salvage: Items to be salvaged are indicated on Drawings. 

D. Below-Grade Construction: Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction. Cut belowgrade 

construction flush with grade. 

E. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within 

footprint of new construction and extending 1.5 m outside footprint indicated for new construction. 

Abandon below-grade construction outside this area. 

1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, 

completely. 

F. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction. 

1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, 

completely. 

G. Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures where indicated on the 

drawings. Cut utilities flush with grade. 

H. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 1.5 m outside 

footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area. 

1. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in 

Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 

I. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. 

3.6 SITE RESTORATION 

A. Below-Grade Areas: Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new construction. 

B. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition 

operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Division 2 Section 

"Earthwork." 

C. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from 

irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 

3.7 REPAIRS 

A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 




A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste 

Management" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste. 

B. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved 

landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 

C. Do not burn demolished materials. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition 

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. 




SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 

2. Removing existing vegetation where indicated on the drawings. 

3. Removal and replacement of existing landscaping sprinkler systems. 

4. Clearing and grubbing. 

5. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 

6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 

7. Disconnecting and capping or sealing site utilities. 

8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP 

A. Except for stripped topsoil that Contractor elects to re-use at topsoil on side slopes, or other materials 

indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be 

removed from Project site. 


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used 

facilities during site-clearing operations. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without 

permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises 

where indicated. 

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. 

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures 

are in place. 

SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1



2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section 

"Earthwork." 

1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available onsite. 



A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. 

B. Locate Federal Express lease line boundaries and limits of new improvement in order to identify 

vegetation to remain. Do not remove any vegetation unless required to do so to accommodate new 

construction. 

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of 

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements 

of authorities having jurisdiction, and in accordance with erosion control Drawings. 

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until 

permanent vegetation has been established. 

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 

D. Remove all filter fabric and similar sediment control devices from new and old storm drain inlets, 

manholes, and other like structures at the completion of all work. 

3.3 UTILITIES 

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted 

under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according 

to requirements indicated: 



1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 

C. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. 

3.4 EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE 

A. The contractor shall maintain all existing electrical service to the Metroplex at all times. The Contractor 

shall coordinate all service cutovers in full with FedEx, the Engineer, and the Port of Oakland. 

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 

A. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further 

excavation or earthwork is indicated. 

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each 

layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING 

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. 

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying 

subsoil or other waste materials. 

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and 

shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

3.7 EXISTING VEGETATION 

A. The Contractor shall remove all existing planted grass, shrubs and bushes, and trees where indicated on 

the plans. 

B. The Contractor shall replace vegetation where indicated on the plans. 

C. In all aspects of vegetation removal, the contractor shall be responsible for verifying existing operations of 

the existing irrigation systems serving these vegetated areas. Removal of vegetated areas shall also 

include the removal, and modification of these systems. These modifications shall include, but not be 

limited to the installation of new water pipes, electrical conduits, and sprinkler heads to maintain services 

to vegetated areas not being removed. The service to vegetated areas to remain shall be restored as soon 

as possible, the Engineer and Owner shall reserve the right to request periodic watering of these areas to 

remain if they believe areas have not been adequately watered for too long a duration of time. 

3.8 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new 

construction. 



3.9 DISPOSAL 

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste 

materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials. 

Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. 

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

A. Measurement and payment shall be based on the units listed on the Bid Form and shall include full 

compensation for furnishing all materials, all preparation, assembly, and installation of these 

materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete each item. 




SECTION 02239 - CEMENT MODIFICATION OF SOILS 


1.1 Compliance with Caltrans Standard Specifications: All materials and procedures shall comply with the 

latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications for Cement Treated Bases. 

1.2 Cement Factor: Owner will procure services to conduct laboratory testing prior to construction to verify 

properties for cement stabilization and to allow optimization of the amount of cement used to treat soil. 

The percentage of cement is expected to be between 4% and 8%. The exact cement content shall be that 

at which the mix develops a 7-day compressive strength of at least 650 psi. 

1.3 Testing/Test Reports: Testing and test method will be as outlined in ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. 

1.4 Plant, Equipment, Machines and Tools: Plant, equipment, machines and tools used in the work shall be 

subject to approval by Owner and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The 

equipment shall be adequate and shall have the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting 

grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as set forth herein. 

A. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project 

and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to the beginning of the construction operation and shall 

be maintained in good working order. 

B. Cement shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before 

distribution on the sub grade. 

C. Cement furnished in trucks shall have the net weight of the cement certified. 

D. Slurry trucks may or may not have re-circulation system, and be equipped with dispersion plates or 

suitable means for distribution. 

E. Spreader bars for distributing dry cement shall be as close to the ground as practical, but in no case shall 

they be greater than 18 inches above the ground. Spreader bars shall be clean and in good working order 

so as to produce a consistent and even distribution of cement of the sub grade. 

1.5 Weather Limitations: Cement shall not be applied when the atmospheric temperature is less than 40 

degrees F or in windy conditions. No cement shall be applied to soils that are frozen or contain frost. If the 

temperature falls below 35 degrees F, completed cement-treated areas shall be protected against 

detrimental effects of freezing. Any areas of completed cement modified soil that are damaged by 

freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions shall be brought to a satisfactory condition in conformance 

with this specification without additional cost to the Owner. 

1.6 Submittal: Submit Laboratory test data and proposed plan, mix, process and equipment for cement 

stabilization to Geotechnical Engineer and to Owner prior to construction. 


CEMENT MODIFICATION OF SOILS 02239-1


2.1 Portland Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I. The Contractor shall use bulk cement. 

All apparatus for handling, weighing and spreading the cement shall be approved by the Geotechnical 

Engineer. 

2.2 Soil Material to be Stabilized: The material to be stabilized shall consist of placed aggregate base. 

2.3 Water: Water shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, alkali, organic matter, 

and other substances deleterious to the hardening of soil-cement. 


3.1 Compliance with Caltrans Standard Specifications: All materials and procedures shall comply with the 

latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications for Cement Treated Bases. 

3.2 Sampling and Testing: 

A. General Requirements: No testing shall be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and approved. 

Tests shall be performed in sufficient numbers and as specified to ensure that materials and compaction 

meet specified requirements. Copies of the test results shall be furnished to the Owner within 24 hours of 

completion of tests. 

B. Test Results: Results shall verify that materials comply with the specification. When deficiencies are 

found, the initial analysis shall be repeated and the material already placed shall be re-tested to determine 

the extent of unacceptable material. All in-place unacceptable material shall be replaced or repaired to 

conform to the contract requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 

C. Initial Sampling and Testing: 

1. Laboratory Density: Moisture-density tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM T134 or 

ASTM D558; however the apparatus and procedures outlined in ASTM D1557 shall be used to 

compact the soil-cement mixture. 

2. Unconfined Compression Testing: Unconfined compression tests shall be conducted in 

accordance with ASTM D 1633. Three tests shall be conducted for each mix design tested. 

Samples shall be cured at a constant moisture content and temperature for 7 days. 

3.3 Execution, General Requirements: It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a 

completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement mixture, free from loose or segregated 

areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface 

suitable for placing subsequent courses. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the 

sequence of his work; to use the proper amount of cement; to maintain the work and rework the courses 

as necessary to meet the above requirements; and to meet lines and grades as shown on the plans. 

Contractor shall use equipment that ensures that the material is cut uniformly to the proper depth and that 

will plane the grade to a smooth surface over the entire width of cut. The equipment shall be such that a 

visible indication is given at all times that the machine is cutting to the proper depth. 

3.4 Preparation of Area to be Cement-Stabilized: Grade the area to the lines and cross sections indicated by 

the Drawings. Clean area of debris. Inspect for adequate compaction and for adequacy to withstand, 

without displacement, the compaction specified for the soil-cement mixture. Make soft or yielding areas 

stable before beginning cement modified soil process. Dispose of debris and removed unsatisfactory 



soils, legally, off-site. Subgrade below base shall meet the approval of the Engineer prior to placing 

stabilized base course. 

3.5 Application of Portland Cement Treatment to Base: 

A. Spread dry cement at the prescribed rate determined by the initial testing. 

B. Water the cement to reduce dusting. 

C. Mix the cement into the soil using a rotary mixer, disc or other approved methods. If possible, make 

passes at various angles across the site to facilitate breaking up large clods. 

D. Process the base to the required depth using an approved rotary mixer until the required gradation is 

achieved. 

E. If necessary, continue adding water during the mixing process to reduce dusting, and to ease in 

pulverization and to obtain optimum moisture. 

F. Compact the cement modified soil to the specified density and moisture with sheepsfoot, pneumatic or 

other approved compaction equipment. 

G. Blade the cement treated soil to finished grade within the specified tolerances. 

H. Seal the surface by rolling with a pneumatic roller. 

3.6 Application: Spread cement only on that area where the mixing and compaction can be completed during 

the same working day in a timely operation. The application and mixing of cement with the sub grade 

material shall be accomplished by the method of “Dry Placing” described below: 

A. Dry Placing: The cement shall be spread at the rates directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The cement 

shall be distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the blowing of cement to a 

minimum. Cement shall not be applied when wind conditions, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, 

are such that blowing cement becomes hazardous to traffic, adjacent property owners or to the Owner’s 

operation. A motor grader shall not be used to spread cement. 

3.7 Mixing: The mixing procedure shall be the same for “Dry Placing” to a 4% minimum cement to soils mix or 

at the percentage determined to be necessary through testing. The material and cement shall be 

thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment and the mixing shall continue 

until, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and cement 

is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. Materials shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of 

the cement application and brought to the proper moisture content. The material shall be kept moist as 

directed by the Geotechncial Engineer. If the cement-modified soil mixture contains clods, they shall be 

reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying, pulverizing or similar means so that 

when all non-slaking aggregates retained on the No. 4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the soil 

material without cement mixed throughout shall meet the following requirements when tested dry by 

laboratory sieves: 

A. Minimum passing 2” sieve: 100% 

B. Minimum passing #4 sieve: 60% 

3.8 Compaction 



A. Begin compaction of the cement treated soil immediately after mixing. Aerate or add water as necessary 

to provide the optimum moisture. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until the entire depth of 

mixture is uniformly compacted. Compact in 4 to 8 inch looses lifts. Compact to not less that 98% 

compaction at within 2.0% of optimum moisture percentage. Sprinkler, if necessary. Compact the full 

depth of cement treated soil to the extent necessary (per ASTM D 558) to remain firm and stable under 

construction equipment. After each section is completed, tests will be made. If the material fails to meet 

density requirements, rework as necessary until requirements are met. Maintain the shape of the course 

by blading throughout the entire operation. Maintain smooth surfaces in conformity with the typical section 

included in the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. If the material due to any reason loses 

its required stability, density or finish before the next course is place or before the work is accepted, 

recompact and refinish a the sole expense of the Contractor. 

B. Layer Thickness: Comply with requirements of Caltrans Standard Specifications. 

C. Finishing: Comply with requirements of Caltrans Standard Specifications. 

3.9 Testing: Compact area test samples per ASTM D558. Perform in-place density tests per ASTM D 1556 

and ASTM D 2167 at a rate of one per 7000 s.f. 

3.10 Finished Grading: For the final course of cement-modified sub grade, compact bringing to the required 

lines and grades. Finish the completed section by rolling, as directed, with a pneumatic tire of other 

suitable roller sufficiently light to prevent hair cracking. Comply with surface tolerances of Caltrans 

Standard Specifications. 

3.11 Curing: Protect the finished surface against rapid drying for 7 days. A 6-inch base course lift could be 

used to prevent rapid drying of the finished surface. Moisten initially and keep moist throughout the curing 

period. 



compensation for furnishing all materials, all preparation, assembly, and installation of these 

materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete each item. 




SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 


1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Section 01320 “Schedules and Reports” for recording preexisting conditions and excavation 

support and protection system progress. 

2. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. 

3. Section 02240 "Dewatering" for dewatering system for excavations. 

4. Section 01112 “Safety and Security Requirements” and Section 01550 “Health and Safety Plan” for 

general safety provisions. 

5. Section 02300 “Earthwork” for additional excavation requirements. 

6. Section 02530 “Sanitary Sewerage”, Section 02553 “Natural Gas Distribution”, Section 02510 

“Water Distribution” and Section 02630 “Storm Drainage” for utility specific requirements. 

C. Comply with all local safety requirements as well as applicable requirements from Cal OSHA. 

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of 

supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and 

construction loads. 

1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 

3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, 

and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 

4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. 

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system. 

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 1


B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

B. Other Informational Submittals: 

1. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site 

improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, 

or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins. 

2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, 

electrical, or mechanical conditions. 


a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. 

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system including, 

but not limited to, the following: 

a. Geotechnical report. 

b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. 

c. Proposed excavations. 

d. Proposed equipment. 

e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system. 

f. Working area location and stability. 

g. Coordination with waterproofing. 

h. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system. 


A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others 

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility 

according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five business days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission. 

B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for 

information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent 

interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. 

Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 



1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation 

support and protection. 

2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. 

C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing 

buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as 

benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, 

maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original 

elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if 

cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. 

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. 

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous 

interlocks. 

1. Corners: Site-fabricated mechanical interlock or roll-formed corner shape with continuous 

interlock. 

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. 

E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application. 

F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) , deformed. 

G. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M. 

H. Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M. 



A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, 

lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support 

and protection system operations. 

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. 



B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, 

walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without 

permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed 

or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and 

finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded. 

D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as 

excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure 

that excavation support and protection systems remain stable. 

E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection 

systems. 

3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING 

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to 

depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed 

allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more 

than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. 

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to 

install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. 

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles. 

3.3 SHEET PILING 

A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous 

barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in 

writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches (1500 

mm). Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a 

horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform 

elevation at top of excavation. 

3.4 TIEBACKS 

A. Tiebacks: Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and 

replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 

1. Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of 

excavation support and protection system. 

2. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral soil and 

hydrostatic pressures. 



3.5 BRACING 

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If 

necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless 

otherwise approved by Architect. 

2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 

3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent 

construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 

3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS 

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to 

support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing 

underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches (1200 mm) 

below overlaying construction and abandon remainder. 

2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 02300 

"Earthwork." 

3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing 

excavation support and protection systems. 

B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. 




SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK 



A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 

B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and concrete paving and layer placed 

between subgrade and foundation slab. 

C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. 

D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. 

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 

G. Structures: Foundations, slabs, curbs, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or 

below the ground surface. 

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation. 

I. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables. 


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless 

permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services 

according to requirements indicated. 


2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from 

excavations or from designated area of existing soil stockpile. 

B. Refer to the geotechnical report for more information related to earthwork materials if interpretations or 

more information is needed. 

C. Engineered Fill: Granular material, free of contaminants, free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in 

any dimension and shall contain no more than 15% material larger than 2.5 inches. Material shall not 

contain debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter, with at least 90% 

EARTHWORK 02300 - 1


passing the 1-inch sieve. Material shall have Plasticity Index less than 15; Liquid Limit less than 30%; 

5% to 40% passing the #200 sieve; and minimum R-value of 27. 

D. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soils not meeting the requirements of Engineered Fill. 

E. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. 

F. Pavement Base Materials: refer to sections 02512, and 03300. 

G. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural 

or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 

percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 

H. Detectable Warning Tape: Polyethylene film warning tape encasing a metallic core, minimum 6 inches 

wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. 

I. Geotextile Fabric: Mirafi 500x or approved equivalent. 

J. Reuse of Asphalt Grindings as Fill: Existing asphalt concrete pavement may not be ground up and 

used as fill. Remove grindings from site and deliver to an independent asphalt recycler. 

K. Drain Rock Gravel: Granular material, free of contaminants, material shall not contain debris, waste, 

frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter, gravel to comply with Caltrans Standard 

Specifications for Aggregate Bases (Section 26). 

L. Aggregate Base: Comply with the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specification, Section 26. Use 

Class 2 Aggregate Base materials which shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious 

substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to 

form a firm, stable base. 

1. Compaction: No less than 95% relative compaction. Comply with more stringent criteria as shown 

in the Caltrans Specification or the project drawings. 


3.1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

A. The Contractor shall become familiar with all recommended soil modifications procedures as stated in 

the Geotechnical Report. 

B. Where recommendations differ from this Specification, the Contractor shall adhere to the 

recommendations outlined in the report. 


A. Protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral 

movement, undermining, or frost, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 

EARTHWORK 02300 - 2


B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing 

water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, paved areas and adjacent undisturbed 

areas. 

C. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared 

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 

D. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 

E. Strip vegetated areas prior to grading. Remove all organic matter including root systems to a minimum 

depth of 3”. Dispose of all stripped material legally, off-site. 

F. Pavement Subgrade Preparation: Soil subgrade under pavements, tethers and other structures shall 

be firm and non-yielding. Replace all soft or loose areas with properly compacted Engineered Fill. 

G. Protect subgrade from drying caused by weather, traffic or other causes. 

3.3 EXCAVATION 

A. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions 

encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, 

replace with satisfactory soil materials. 

B. Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to elevations and dimensions. Extend excavations for 

placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for 

inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 

Subgrade preparation shall extend a minimum of 2 feet laterally beyond the back of curb or edge of 

pavement. Site grading should extend a minimum of 5 feet laterally outside the proposed building. 

C. Excavate utility trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and invert elevations of uniform widths to 

provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from 

trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit. 

1. Excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation, 6 inches deeper in rock, 4 inches deeper 

elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 

D. Proof roll subgrades, before filling or placing aggregate courses, with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment 

to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. If 

weak or yielding soils or soils with an R-value of less than 15 are encountered, excavate and remove 

them to a depth of 6 inches, and replace with aggregate base. 

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or 

construction activities. 

F. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of 

concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill 

may be used when approved by Owner. 

EARTHWORK 02300 - 3


1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 

G. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials, without intermixing, in shaped, graded, 

drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations and away 

from designated wetlands areas. 

H. Dewatering: Comply with section 02145. 

3.4 BACKFILLS AND FILLS 

A. Utility Trench Backfill: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support for 

pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. 

1. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles 

larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Place and compact final 

backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 

12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 

B. Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations. Subgrades to receive fill shall be 

firm and non-yielding. 

C. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to 

within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 

1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds 

optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 

D. Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material 

compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material 

compacted by hand-operated tampers 

E. Depth of Compaction below Asphalt Concrete Pavement Section: Subgrade soil below asphalt 

pavement and below aggregate base shall be compacted to 98% of required maximum dry density per 

ASTM D 1557 for the full 24” below bottom of aggregate base layer. 

F. Compaction below Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (PCC) Sections: Subgrade soil below PCC 

pavement and below cement treated base course shall be as follows: Top 6” of subgrade shall be 

compacted to 98% per ASTM D 1557. The 18” below that shall be compacted to 95% per ASTM D 

1557. 

G. Compaction below foundation slab: Subgrade soil below foundation slab and below the aggregate base 

course shall be as follows: top 12” of subgrade shall be compacted to 98% per ASTM D1557. 

H. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with 

compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Grade areas to 

within plus or minus 1/2 inch. 

I. Aggregate Base Courses: Place aggregate base course material in lifts of not greater than 8” in 

uncompacted thickness. Compact aggregate base to required grades, lines, cross sections, and 

thickness to not less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. For the 

base course under the foundation slab, the finished surface tolerance shall be +0”/-3/4”. 

EARTHWORK 02300 - 4


J. Side Slopes: Embankment side slopes shall not exceed 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. 

3.5 WET CONDITIONS/WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATION: 

A. Where wet or yielding subgrade conditions are encountered, those conditions shall be corrected 

through excavation and replacement or through cement or lime-treating. 

1. Excavation and Replacement: Overexcavate soft, yielding area to limits directed by Engineer. 

Place geotextile fabric and backfill the area with a more select material such as Class 2 aggregate 

base meeting Caltrans specifications. 

2. Cement or Lime-Treating: Selection of the appropriate additive and amount of additive required 

shall be determined at the time of construction and may vary based on conditions noted. 

Contractor shall submit to Engineer the proposed additive, as well as mixing, proportioning, 

compaction and procedural method for Engineer’s review prior to subgrade stabilization activities. 

Mixing of additive into soil shall be by mechanical means. For bidding purposes, assume 5 percent 

cement additive (by weight) and treatment to a depth of 12 inches. The unit price provided shall 

include all materials, labor and equipment required to spread, and mechanically mix the additive 

into the soil and compacting to the required compaction levels. 

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform 

field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 

B. Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with 

subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. 

C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction 

specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and 

retest until specified compaction is obtained. 

3.7 CEMENT TREATED BASE 

A. Refer to Section 02239, Cement Modification of Soil. 

3.8 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL 

A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces 

become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction. 

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with 

additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 

EARTHWORK 02300 - 5


D. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and 

debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 

3.9 EROSION CONTROL 

A. Erosion and sediment control measures shall be effective for construction during the rainy season 

(October 15 through April 15). Provide and maintain erosion control measures in accordance with the 

latest version of Association of Bay Area Governments (ABAG) “Erosion and Sediment Control 

Handbook”. 

B. After the underground storm drain system is installed, catch basins shall be installed as soon practical 

and protected with grate inlet protection consisting of gravel and CMU blocks; hay bales or silt fence. 

C. All mud or sediment that is tracked onto adjacent property, Federal Express property outside the 

immediate work area or onto adjacent paved areas shall be removed the same day. 

D. All erosion control measures shall be maintained until disturbed areas are stabilized by paving. 

E. Maintain silt fence around the work area and around the relocated dirt stockpile. The silt fence around 

the dirt stockpile shall be left in place after the completion of all other work. 

F. Inspect and repair all erosion control facilities at the end of each working day during the rainy season, 

or during other periods of wet weather. 

G. Fueling and maintenance of vehicles shall be done off site. 

H. Protect the adjacent wetlands area adjacent to the site free from sediments, stormwater runoff and 

contaminants. Keep all equipment and personnel clear of this area. 


4.1 GENERAL 


compensation for furnishing all materials, all preparation, assembly, and installation of these materials, 

and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete each item. 


EARTHWORK 02300 - 6


SECTION 02457 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes solid, precast prestressed concrete piles. 

1.3 UNIT PRICES 

A. The Contract Sum: Base the Contract Sum on number and dimensions of piles indicated from tip to cutoff, 

plus not less than 12 inches (305 mm) of overlength for cutting piles at cutoff elevations. 

B. Work of this Section is affected as follows: 

1. Additional payment for pile lengths in excess of that indicated, and credit for pile lengths less than 

that indicated, will be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract, based on net addition or 

deduction to total pile length as determined by Architect measured to nearest 12 inches (305 mm) . 

a. Additional payment for splices required to extend pile lengths in excess of that indicated will 

be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract. 

2. Additional payment for number of piles in excess of that indicated, and credit for number of piles 

less than that indicated, will be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract. 

3. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for furnishing, driving, cutting 

off, capping, and disposing of cutoffs. 

4. Test piles that become part of permanent foundation system will be considered as an integral part 

of the Work. 

5. No payment will be made for rejected piles, including piles driven out of tolerance, defective piles, 

or piles damaged during handling or driving. 


A. Structural Performance: Piles shall withstand transportation, erection, and driving stresses and design 

loads within limits indicated and under conditions existing at Project site. 

1. Design Loads: 170 ton. 

B. Delegated Design: Design piles, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional 

engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES 02457 - 1



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For concrete piles. Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional 

engineer detailing fabrication and lifting devices necessary for handling and driving piles. 

1. Indicate pile dimensions, cross sections, locations, and sizes. Show details of pile splices and 

shoes. 

2. Indicate types of reinforcement, including prestressing strand, and detail fabricating, bending, and 

placing. 

3. Indicate layout and dimensions, and identify each pile. Indicate welded connections by AWS 

standard symbols. Detail cast-in hardware. 

4. Indicate transportation, storage, and lifting points. 

5. Include arrangement of static pile reaction frame, test and anchor piles, equipment, and 

instrumentation. Submit structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional 

engineer responsible for their preparation. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For concrete piles indicated to comply with performance requirements and 

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer 

responsible for their preparation. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer manufacturer and testing agency. 

B. Welding certificates. 

C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. 

D. Material Certificates: For steel reinforcements prestressing strand and concrete admixtures, from 

manufacturer. 

E. Material Test Reports: For concrete materials. 

F. Pile-Driving Equipment Data: Include type, make, and rated energy range; weight of striking part of 

hammer; weight of drive cap; and, type, size, and properties of hammer cushion. 

G. Static Pile Test Reports: Submit within three days of completing each test. 

H. Pile-Driving Records: Submit within three days of driving each pile. 

I. Field quality-control reports. 

J. Preconstruction Photographs: Photographs or video of existing conditions of adjacent construction. 

Submit before the Work begins. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer complying with the following: 



1. Engineering Responsibility: Assumes engineering responsibility to comply with requirements in 

"Performance Requirements" Article by engaging a qualified professional engineer to prepare 

design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for piles. 

2. PCI Plant Certification Program: Participates in PCI's Plant Certification Program and is 

designated a PCI-Certified Plant for B2 and C2 product group and category, or better. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for 

installation of units required for this Project. 

1. Installer's responsibility includes engaging a qualified professional engineer to prepare pile-driving 

records. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and 

ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

D. Design Practices: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the recommendations in PCI Committee Report: 

"Recommended Practice for Design, Manufacture and Installation of Prestressed Concrete Piling." 

E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control 

recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for piles, comply with applicable requirements in PCI MNL- 

116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." 

F. Comply with requirements in ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." 

G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 

2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." 

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver piles to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Handle 

and store piles at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, or other physical damage, and so 

markings are visible. 

B. Lift and support piles only at designated lifting or supporting points as shown on Shop Drawings. 


A. Protect structures, underground utilities, and other construction from damage caused by pile driving. 

B. Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is included elsewhere in 

the Project Manual for information only. 

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Inventory and record the condition of adjacent structures, underground 

utilities, and other construction. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as 

damage caused by pile driving. Comply with Division 1 Section 01322 "Photographic Documentation." 




2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 

2.2 MOLD MATERIALS 

A. Molds: Provide molds of metal, plastic, wood, or another material that is nonreactive with concrete and 

will produce required finish surfaces. 

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) ; deformed. 

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M. 

C. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn. 

D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M. 

2.4 PRESTRESSING TENDONS 

A. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 or 270 (Grade 1725 or 1860) ; uncoated, sevenwire, 

low-relaxation strand. 

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. General: Limit water-soluble chloride ions in concrete to the maximum percentage by mass of 

cementitious material permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) , but not more than 0.06 percent. 

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, of same type, brand, and source. 

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 

2. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. 

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL-116, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates 

complying with Class 4S. Provide aggregates from single source. 

1. Nominal Maximum Size of Aggregate: 1 inch (25 mm)3/4 inch (19 mm) . 

D. Water: Potable, free of deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete, 

and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL-116. 

E. Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures. 

1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 



2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

3. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

4. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

5. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 

6. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

7. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 

8. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

2.6 PILE ACCESSORIES 

A. Pile Shoes: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, minimum, carbon-steel plate fabricated to match shape of pile tip. 

B. Pile Splices: Manufactured from carbon-steel plates or castings and capable of developing strength of 

continuous pile at splice location. 

2.7 CONCRETE MIXES 

A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required. 

1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to not exceed, in total, 25 percent of portland cement by weight. 

B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified personnel at 

precast manufacturing plant at precast manufacturer's option. 

C. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with 

materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 6000 psi (41.4 MPa. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.40. 

D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point 

of placement having an air content of 2.5 to 4.5 percent. 

2.8 FABRICATION 

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to 

concrete placement, temperature changes, and for pretensioning and detensioning operations. Maintain 

molds to provide completed piles of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances 

specified in PCI MNL-116 and PCI MNL-135. 

1. Unless molds are stripped before detensioning, design molds so stresses are not induced in piles 

due to deformation of concrete under prestress or movement during detensioning. 

2. Chamfer edges and corners of square piles. 

B. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, 

placing, and supporting reinforcement. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other 

materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 



1. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by molds, 

construction, or concrete placement. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, 

bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. 

2. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, 

space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing 

concrete. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 

C. Prestress tendons for piles by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL- 

116. 

D. Pile Shoes: Accurately position and secure pile shoes at pile tips so as to not affect pile alignment during 

driving. Weld pile shoes to longitudinal reinforcements. 

E. Pile Splices: Accurately position and secure pile-splice segments requiring embedding in tips of piles. 

F. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL-116 and requirements in this Section. After initial concrete batching, 

no additional water may be added. 

G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in piles. 

Comply with requirements in PCI MNL-116 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 

1. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or 

damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with 

PCI MNL-116. 

2. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement. 

3. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement. 

H. Identify pickup points of piles with permanent markings corresponding with markings indicated on Shop 

Drawings. Imprint casting date on each pile. 

I. Cure concrete according to requirements in PCI MNL-116 by moisture retention without heat or by 

accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. 

J. Delay detensioning piles until concrete has attained at least 70 percent of its compressive strength as 

established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as concrete. 

1. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid 

dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses. 

2. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat-cutting 

tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading. 

K. Where ends of strands will not be enclosed or covered, cut flush and cover with a high-strength mortar 

bonded to unit with an epoxy-resin bonding agent. 

L. Fabricate precast prestressed concrete piles straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and 

corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL-116 and PCI MNL-135 product 

tolerances. 

M. Finish: Fabricate concrete piles with normal plant-run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish 

to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and 



minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural 

defects are not permitted. 

N. Finish unformed surfaces by trowel unless otherwise indicated. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper 

level with straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish. 

O. Pile-Length Markings: Mark each pile with horizontal lines at 12-inch (305-mm) intervals; label the 

distance from pile tip at 60-inch (1.52-m) intervals. Maintain markings on piles until driven. 

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate pile manufacturer's quality-control and 

testing methods. 

1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment, 

concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing agency and provide 

samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for additional testing and 

evaluation. 

B. Testing: Test and inspect piles according to PCI MNL-116. 

C. Strength of piles will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with requirements. 

D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of piles may be deficient or may not comply with PCI MNL-116 

requirements, Owner will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled 

from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M. 

1. A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from piles of suspect strength, from 

locations directed by Architect. 

2. Cores shall be tested, following immersion in water, in a wet condition per ACI 301 if piles will be 

wet under service conditions. 

3. Cores shall be tested in an air-dry condition per ACI 301 if piles will be dry under service 

conditions. 

4. Strength of concrete for each series of three cores shall be considered satisfactory if average 

compressive strength is at least 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength and no core 

compressive strength is less than 75 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength. 

5. Test results shall be reported in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to 

Architect, Contractor, and pile manufacturer. Test reports shall include the following: 

a. Project identification name and number. 

b. Date when tests were performed. 

c. Name of precast concrete manufacturer. 

d. Name of concrete testing agency. 

e. Identification letter, name, and type of pile represented by core tests; design compressive 

strength; type of break; compressive strength at break, corrected for length-diameter ratio; 

and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed. 

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and piles comply with requirements, solidly fill core holes with 

patching mortar and finish to match adjacent pile surfaces. 



F. Piles will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 



A. Site Conditions: Do not start pile-driving operations until earthwork fills have been completed or 

excavations have reached an elevation of 6 to 12 inches (152 to 305 mm) above bottom of footing or pile 

cap. 

3.2 DRIVING EQUIPMENT 

A. Pile Hammer: Air-, steam-, hydraulic-, or diesel-powered type capable of consistently delivering adequate 

peak-force duration and magnitude to develop the ultimate capacity required for type and size of pile 

driven and character of subsurface material anticipated. 

1. Use pile hammer capable of adjustment to deliver reduced impact to maintain tensile stress within 

70 percent of yield strength of pile reinforcement. 

B. Hammer Cushions and Driving Caps: Between hammer and top of pile, provide hammer cushion and 

steel driving cap as recommended by hammer manufacturer and as required to drive pile without damage. 

C. Leads: Use fixed, semifixed, or hanging-type pile-driver leads that will hold full length of pile firmly in 

position and in axial alignment with hammer. 

3.3 STATIC PILE TESTS 

A. General: Static pile tests will be used to verify driving criteria and pile lengths and to confirm allowable 

load of piles. 

1. Furnish test piles 10 feet longer than production piles. 

2. Determination of actual length of piles will be based on results of static pile tests. 

B. Pile Tests: Arrange and perform the following pile tests: 

1. Axial Compressive Static Load Test: ASTM D 1143. 

2. Axial Tension Static Load Test: ASTM D 3689. 

3. Lateral Load Test: ASTM D 3966. 

C. Equip each test pile with two telltale rods, according to ASTM D 1143, for measuring deformation during 

load test. 

D. Provide pile reaction frame, anchor piles, equipment, and instrumentation with sufficient reaction capacity 

to perform tests. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of performing tests. On completion of 

testing, remove testing structure, anchor piles, equipment, and instrumentation. 

1. Allow a minimum of sevendays to elapse after driving test piles before starting pile testing. 

2. Number of Test Piles: As indicated. 



E. Driving Test Piles: Drive test piles at locations indicated to the minimum penetration or driving resistance 

indicated. Use test piles identical to those required for Project and drive with appropriate pile-driving 

equipment operating at rated driving energy to be used in driving permanent piles. 

1. Pile Design Load: As indicated. 

F. Approval Criteria: Allowable load shall be the load acting on the test pile when the lesser of the following 

criteria are met, divided by a factor of safety of [2] : 

1. Net settlement, after deducting rebound, of not more than 0.01 inch/ton (0.25 mm/907 kg) of test 

load. 

2. Total settlement exceeds the pile elastic compression by 0.15 inch (4 mm) , plus 1.0 percent of the 

tip diagonal dimension. 

3. A plunging failure or sharp break in the load settlement curve. 

G. Test Pile-Driving Records: Prepare driving records for each test pile, compiled and attested to by a 

qualified professional engineer. Include same data as required for driving records of permanent piles. 

H. Test piles that comply with requirements, including location tolerances, may be used on Project. 

3.4 DRIVING PILES 

A. General: Continuously drive piles to elevations or penetration resistance indicated or established by static 

load testing of piles. Establish and maintain axial alignment of leads and piles before and during driving. 

B. Predrilling: Provide pre-excavated holes where indicated, to depths indicated. Drill holes with a diameter 

less than the largest cross-section dimension of pile. 

1. Firmly seat pile in predrilled hole by driving with reduced energy before starting final driving. 

C. Heaved Piles: Redrive heaved piles to tip elevation at least as deep as original tip elevation with a driving 

resistance at least as great as original driving resistance. 

D. Pile Splices: Splice piles during installation and align pile segments concentrically. 

E. Driving Tolerances: Drive piles without exceeding the following tolerances, measured at pile heads: 

1. Location: 4 inches (102 mm) from location indicated after initial driving, and 6 inches (152 mm) 

after pile driving is completed. 

2. Plumb: Maintain 1 inch (25 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m) from vertical, or a maximum of 4 inches (102 

mm) , measured when pile is aboveground in leads. 

3. Batter Angle: Maximum 1 inch (25 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m) from required angle, measured when pile 

is aboveground in leads. 

F. Withdraw damaged or defective piles and piles that exceed driving tolerances and install new piles within 

driving tolerances. 

1. Fill holes left by withdrawn piles using cohesionless soil material such as gravel, broken stone, and 

gravel-sand mixtures. Place and compact in lifts not exceeding 72 inches (1.83 m) . 

2. Fill holes left by withdrawn piles as directed by Architect. 



G. Abandon and cut off rejected piles as directed by Architect. Leave rejected piles in place and install new 

piles in locations as directed by Architect. 

H. Cutting Off: Cut off tops of driven piles square with pile axis and at elevations indicated. 

I. Buildups: Construct buildups to elevations indicated of cast-in-place reinforced concrete with compressive 

strength not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days. 

J. Pile-Driving Records: Maintain accurate driving records for each pile, compiled and attested to by a 

qualified professional engineer. Include the following data: 

1. Project name and number. 

2. Name of Contractor. 

3. Type of pile and date of casting. 

4. Pile location in pile group and designation of pile group. 

5. Sequence of driving in pile group. 

6. Pile dimensions. 

7. Ground elevation. 

8. Elevation of tips after driving. 

9. Final tip and cutoff elevations of piles after driving pile group. 

10. Records of redriving. 

11. Elevation of splices. 

12. Type, make, model, and rated energy of hammer. 

13. Weight and stroke of hammer. 

14. Type of pile-driving cap used. 

15. Cushion material and thickness. 

16. Actual stroke and blow rate of hammer. 

17. Pile-driving start and finish times, and total driving time. 

18. Time, pile-tip elevation, and reason for interruptions. 

19. Number of blows for every 12 inches (305 mm) of penetration, and number of blows per 1 inch (25 

mm) for the last 6 inches (152 mm) of driving. 

20. Pile deviations from location and plumb. 

21. Preboring, jetting, or special procedures used. 

22. Unusual occurrences during pile driving. 


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 

1. Pile foundations. 

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

C. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Dynamic Pile Testing: High-strain dynamic monitoring shall be performed and reported according 

to ASTM D 4945 during initial driving and during restriking on 3 percent of piles. 

2. Low-strain integrity measurement shall be performed and reported for each pile. 



3.6 DISPOSAL 

A. Remove withdrawn piles and cutoff sections of piles from site and legally dispose of them off Owner's 

property. 




SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water 

service and fire-service mains. 

B. EBMUD furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation. 


A. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 




A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn 

to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations. 

B. Field quality-control test reports. 

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with requirements of EBMUD. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 

2. Comply with standards of EBMUD for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, 

testing, and disinfection. 

WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1


3. Comply with standards of EBMUD for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, 

hose threads, installation, and testing. 

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, 

by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 

D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. 

E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main 

products. 

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and 

hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. 

G. NSF Compliance: 

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. 

2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water. 


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 

2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. 

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 

2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point 

temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is 

necessary. 

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves 

to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling 

to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of 

floor when storing inside. 

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. 

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 




A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner 

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written permission. 


A. Coordinate connection to water main with EBMUD. 


2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS 

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper. 

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, 

solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, 

solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 

C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to 

match piping. 

D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-tometal 

seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 

2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless 

grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or 

AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel 

bolts. 

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless 

grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or 

AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 



2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 

C. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends. 

1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances: 

a. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or 

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. 

b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe 

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. 

D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 

2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. PE, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C906, DR No. 7.3, 9, or 9.3; with PE compound number required to give 

pressure rating not less than 160 psig. 

1. PE, AWWA Fittings: AWWA C906, socket- or butt-fusion type, with DR number matching pipe and 

PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig. 

B. PE, Fire-Service Pipe: ASTM F 714, AWWA C906, or equivalent for PE water pipe; FMG approved, with 

minimum thickness equivalent to FMG Class 150. 

1. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe 

dimensions and class. 

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS 

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. 

2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to 

and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 

1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, 

gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. 

a. Standard: AWWA C219. 

b. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 

d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. 

e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

C. Flexible Connectors: 



1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressuretype, 

solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. 

2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with 

ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose. 

D. Dielectric Fittings: 

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating 

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 

2. Dielectric Flanges: 

a. Description: 

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 

2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 

3) Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint 

copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 


4. Dielectric Nipples: 

2.6 GATE VALVES 

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig 

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. 


A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66 

2) Electroplated steel nipple. Complying with ASTM F 1545. 

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 

4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 

1. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: 

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, 

resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 



3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 

4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 

2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: 

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, 

resilient seats, and bronze stem. 

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 


3) End Connections: Flanged. 

1. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: 

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, 

and inside screw. 

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 



2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: 

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material. 

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 



2.7 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: 

1. Comply with EBMUD requirements. 

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. 

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. 

b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with 

flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe 

material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. 

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face 

flange mating tapping-sleeve flange. 

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable 

extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section 

with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter. 



1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest 

buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut. 

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension 

rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. 

2.8 CHECK VALVES 

A. UL/FMG, Check Valves: 

1. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating; rubber-face checks, unless otherwise 

indicated; and ends matching piping. 

a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. 

b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 

2.9 CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES 

A. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800 and EBMUD requirements. Include saddle and 

valve compatible with tapping machine. 

1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve. 

2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet 

matching service piping material. 

B. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 and EBMUD requirements. Include bronze body, ground-key 

plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material. 

C. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include 

cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering 

"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches 

in diameter. 

1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried 

valve, and slotted end matching curb valve. 

2.10 WATER METERS 

A. Water meters will be furnished by EBMUD. 

2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 

1. Refer to EBMUD pre-approved list of backflow preventers for selection of an appropriate unit. 

2. Standard: AWWA C511. 

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 



4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 

5. Size: as indicated. 

6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or 

that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 

7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 

8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 

9. Accessories: 

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate 

type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. 

B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 


2. Standard: AWWA C510. 

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 


5. Size: As indicated. 

6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or 

that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 

7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 


9. Accessories: Ball valves with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate 

valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 

C. Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Fire-Protection Backflow Preventer Assemblies: 


2. Standards: ASSE 1047 and UL listed or FMG approved. 




6. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved 

7. End Connections: Flanged. 

8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through = flow. 


a. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. 

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. 

c. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure 

backflow preventer. 

D. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers: 


2. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL listed or FMG approved. 






6. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved. 

7. End Connections: Flanged. 



a. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. 

b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure 

backflow preventer. 

E. Backflow Preventer Test Kits: 

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure 

instructions. 

2.12 WATER METER BOXES 

A. Comply with EBMUD requirements. 

B. Description: Cast-iron body and double cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" 

in top cover; and with separate inner cover; air space between covers; and slotted, open-bottom base 

section of length to fit over service piping. 

C. Description: Polymer-concrete body and cover with lettering "WATER" in cover; and with slotted, openbottom 

base section of length to fit over service piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 

15,000 lb minimum over 10 by 10 inches square. Comply with EBMUD requirements. 

2.13 FIRE HYDRANTS 

A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: 


2. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, 

drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compressiontype 

valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure. 

a. Standards: UL 246, FMG approved. 

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum 

c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. 

Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. 

d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Per EBMUD requirements. . 

e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or 

counterclockwise or as required by EBMUD. 

f. Exterior Finish: Alkyd-gloss enamel paint color to match existing hydrants. 

B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: 




2. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, NPS 6 threaded or 

flanged inlet, and base section with NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. 

a. Standards: UL 246 and FMG approved. 

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. 

c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. 

Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. 

d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Per EBMUD requirements.. 

e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valves by turning operating nut to left or 

counterclockwise or as required by EBMUD 

f. Exterior Finish: Alkyd-gloss enamel paint color to match existing hydrants. 

2.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Fire Department Connections: 

1. Description: Freestanding, with cast-bronze body, thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and 

matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, 

gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 

18-inch- high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. 

2.15 ALARM DEVICES 

a. Standard: UL 405. 

b. Connections: As indicated in sprinkler plans.. 

c. Inlet Alignment: Square. 

d. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated. 

e. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR." 

A. Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and 

equipment. 

B. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig working pressure; designed for 

horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single-pole, double-throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm 

and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable 

retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed. 

C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open 

position. 

D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Refer to Section 02300 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 



3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS 

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. 

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may 

be used, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. 

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, 

on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. 

E. Underground water-service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be any of the following: 

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K or ASTM B 88, Type L ; [wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; 

and brazed joints. 

2. PE, ASTM pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat-fusion joints. 

F. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be any of the following: 

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K or ASTM B 88, Type L; 

wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; 


2. PE, AWWA pipe; PE, AWWA fittings; and heat-fusion joints. 

G. Water Meter Box Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 shall be same as underground water-service 

piping. 

H. Aboveground Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be the following: 

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K or ASTM B 88, Type L; 

wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; 


I. Aboveground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be the following: 

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; 


2. Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron, grooved-end appurtenances; and grooved joints. 

J. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be any of the following: 

1. PE, Class 150, fire-service pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat-fusion joints. 

K. Aboveground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductileiron-pipe 

appurtenances; and grooved joints. 

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation. Use 

threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for 

installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, 

for NPS 2 and smaller installation. 



B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following 

requirements apply: 

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient -seated gate 

valves with valve box. 

2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, nonrising-stem 

gate valves with indicator post. 

3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground: 

a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising stem. 

b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem, resilient seated or 

UL/FMG, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem. 

c. Check Valves: UL/FMG, swing type. 

4. Detector Check Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to detect 

unauthorized use of water. 

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with EBMUD for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. 

B. Water-Main Connection: If completed by Contractor, tap water main according to requirements of EBMUD 

and of size and in location indicated. 

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following and per EBMUD 

requirements: 

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 

2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 

3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping 

machine and connect water-service piping. 

4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem pointing 

up and with valve box. 

D. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following and per EBMUD 

requirements: 

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement 

required by utility company standards. 

2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for 

corporation valves. 

3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole 

in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping. 

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 

5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. 

6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box. 

E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation. 

1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 



2. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 

F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 

1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 

G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. 

H. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches , with top at least 12 inches below level of 

maximum frost penetration, and according to the following: 

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches cover over top. 

I. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at 

outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. 

Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to 

building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed. 

J. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use 

restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. 

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. See Section 02080 "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. 

B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 

1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure 

recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. 

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 

3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 

4. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end, ductileiron-piping 

couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

5. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

6. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 

a. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 > and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples. 

b. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or nipples. 

c. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 

3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION 

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrainedjoint 

types that may be used include the following: 

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 



2. Locking mechanical joints. 

3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 

4. Bolted flanged joints. 

5. Heat-fused joints. 

6. Pipe clamps and tie rods. 

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include 

anchorages for the following piping systems: 

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 

2. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. 

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous 

anchorage devices. 

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with 

stem pointing up and with valve box. 

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. 

C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with 

stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. 

D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. 

E. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with 

service box. 

3.8 DETECTOR-CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install in vault or aboveground. 

B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and 

check valve downstream from meter. 

C. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 

3.9 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS 

A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to EBMUD’s written instructions. 



3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION 

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install 

according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding. 

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. 

D. Support NPS 2-1/2 and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete 

piers. 

3.11 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION 

A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface. 

B. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches above surface. 

3.12 CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION 

A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891. 

3.13 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or 

thrust blocks, and support in upright position. 

B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage. 

C. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. 

D. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24. 

3.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION 

A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains. 

B. Install protective pipe bollards on at least two sides of each fire department connection. Pipe bollards are 

specified in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications." 

3.15 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with 

valve box do not require supervision. 

B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 



1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, 

to OS&Y gate-valve yoke. 

2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with 

toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post. 

C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows: 

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. 

2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. 

D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch. 

E. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane 

matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe. 

F. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are specified in 

Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 13853 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm 

System." 

3.16 CONNECTIONS 

A. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve or service 

clamp and corporation valve as required by EBMUD. 

B. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water piping. 


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have 

hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. 

Use only potable water. 

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test 

pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more 

hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with 

new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits. 

C. Prepare reports of testing activities. 

3.18 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground waterdistribution 

piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are 

specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." 

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main 

electrical meter panel. 



3.19 CLEANING 

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, 

extended, or repaired before use. 

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by EBMUD or, if method is not prescribed by 

authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: 

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of 

chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. 

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution 

containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. 

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water 

coming from system. 

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure 

if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. 

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 




SECTION 02512 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Asphalt pavement and materials shall comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications, latest edition. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and 

performance properties. 

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for 

the Work. 

C. Material certificates. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be registered with and approved by authorities and State 

of California Department of Transportation. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) for 

asphalt paving work. 

C. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless 

more stringent requirements are indicated. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the 

following conditions are not met: 

1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 

2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 

3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. 

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum 

ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, 

and not exceeding 95 deg F. 

HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING – PARKING LOT 02512 - 1



2.1 AGGREGATES 

A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, 

crushed blast-furnace slag. 

B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, properly 

cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 

C. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS 

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 64-22. 

B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, 

diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or 

wettable powder form. 

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT- 

P-115, Type I or II or AASHTO M 248, Type N. 

1. Color: Yellow for striping and pavement markings. Blue and white for handicap striping, as 

indicated. 

C. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high 

by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and 

holes for anchoring to substrate. 

2.4 MIXES 

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length. 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction[; 

designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- 

Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements: 

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is 

located. 



2.5 AGGREGATE BASE 

A. Aggregate Base: See section 02300. 


3.1 COLD MILLING 

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. 

Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 

1. Where required, mill to a depth of 2 inches. 

3.2 INTERFACE WITH EXISTING PAVEMENT 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: At interface of new and existing pavement, saw cut edge of existing 

pavement and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate extending 12 inches into 

adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove 

excavated material. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. 

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a 

rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 

C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with 

adjacent surface. 

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Proof-roll sub base using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require 

further compaction. 

B. Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate 

surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge 

or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. 

C. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written 

application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before 

applying paving materials at all locations where vegetation was removed to accommodate new paved 

areas. 

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove 

spillages and clean affected surfaces. 



3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING 

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by 

hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course 

to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 

1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 

2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in 

asphalt-paving mat. 

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are 

required. 

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove 

excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; 

use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 

3.5 COMPACTION 

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive 

displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas 

inaccessible to rollers. 

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. 

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. 

Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. 

Correct lay down and rolling operations to comply with requirements. 

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt 

is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been 

uniformly compacted to the following density: 

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to 

ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. 

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. 

E. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. 

F. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 

3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 



B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following 

tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved 

areas: 

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum 

allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 

3.7 PAVEMENT MARKING 

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. 

B. Allow paving to age for 14 days before starting pavement marking. 

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with 

uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film 

thickness of 15 mils. 

1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 

3.8 WHEEL STOPS 

A. Provide wheel stops for all Parking Lot spaces immediately adjacent to perimeter fence. Securely attach 

wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to 

one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel 

beneath top of wheel stop. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field 

tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that 

it does not comply with specified requirements. 

3.10 DISPOSAL 

A. Recycle removed materials to the extent possible. For non-recyclable materials, remove excavated 

materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 




SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Pipe and fittings. 

2. Nonpressure and pressure couplings. 

3. Cleanouts. 

4. Manholes. 


A. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench 

and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, 

piping, and proximate structures. 

B. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles to horizontal scale of not less than 1 

inch equals 50 feet and to vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. 

Indicate manholes and 

piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer. 

D. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 

SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 1



A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by 

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission. 


2.1 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE 

A. Pipe: ASTM F 894, Class 63, size 18 inch through 120 inch. ASTM F 714, size 4 inch through 48 inch. 

The polyethylene shall be certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D 3350, 

cell Class 334433C. The pipe stiffness shall be greater than or equal to 1170/D for cohesionless material 

trench backfills. 

B. Fittings: ASTM F 894. 

C. Joints: Rubber gasket joints shall conform to ASTM C 443. 

2.2 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 

B. CISPI-Trademark, Shielded Couplings: 

1. Description: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel 

bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 

2.3 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosionresistant-metal 

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

B. Sleeve Materials: 

1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 

2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being 

joined. 

C. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: 

1. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer 

shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 



D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: 

1. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for 

spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 

E. Nonpressure-Type, Rigid Couplings: 

1. Description: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling, molded 

from ASTM C 1440, TPE material; with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening 

mechanism on each end. 

2.4 PRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Tubular-Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners. 

B. Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure piping. 

Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating and ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. 

C. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

D. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 

E. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

2.5 CLEANOUTS 

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: 

1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, 

secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection 

and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Medium Duty, Heavy Duty and Extra-Heavy Duty. 

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and 

fittings. 

2.6 MANHOLES 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: 

1. Description: ASTM C 478, 

precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for 

sealant joints. 

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise required by EBMUD. 

3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as 

required to prevent flotation. 

4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and 

base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor, unless otherwise 

required by EBMUD. 

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated, unless otherwise 

required by EBMUD. 



6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type with top of cone of size that matches grade rings unless 

otherwise required by EBMUD. 

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, 

bitumen or butyl rubber. 

8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, 

cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe 

connection. 

9. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel 

reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 

one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 

12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less 

than 60 inches. Verify steps are in conformance with EBMUD requirements. 

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings, with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter 

matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and 

cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter matching 

manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to 

indicated elevation and slope. 

B. Manhole Frames and Covers: 

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser, with 4-inch- minimum-width flange and 26inch- 

diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording 

equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER," unless otherwise required by EBMUD. 

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise required by EBMUD. 

C. Manhole-Cover Inserts: 

1. Description; Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame and cover and 

designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing. 

2. Type: Solid. 

2.7 CONCRETE 

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, 

and the following: 

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type as specified in Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 

4. Water: Potable. 

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel. 

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 

4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches 

in manholes. 

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides 

to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 



a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. 

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. 

a. Slope: 8 percent. 

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum 

water/cementitious materials ratio. 




3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." 


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and 

arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into 

account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation 

is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of 

invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according 

to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections 

unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and 

fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process 

of microtunneling. 

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use 

corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-placeconcrete 

supports or anchors. 

3. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. 

4. Install HDPE Piping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 

5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and 

Fittings Handbook." 



G. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab 

or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end 

of day and when work stops. 

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Join HDPE Piping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 

2. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and 

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. 

3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible or rigid couplings. 

B. Pipe couplings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below 

unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use nonpressure flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping 


a. Shielded flexible or rigid couplings for pipes of same or slightly different OD. 

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with different OD. 

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between 

smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. 

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. 

C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. 

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 

inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Install manhole-cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover. 

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318. 

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION 

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe 

fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to 

cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 

1. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot traffic, or paved 

foot-traffic areas. 



2. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 

3. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads. 

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set 

with tops 1 inch surrounding grade. 

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface. 


A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in 

Section 15405 "Soil and Waste System." 

B. Connect force-main piping to building's sanitary force mains specified in Section 15405 "Soil and Waste 

System." Terminate piping where indicated. 

C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of 

existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap 

with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of 

existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 

inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 

3. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap 

connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 


A. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for underground utility identification devices. 

Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground 

manholes. 

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground manholes. 


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect 

after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 

2. Defects requiring correction include the following: 

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 

b. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 

c. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 

d. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 



3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within 

allowances specified. 

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. 

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for 

leaks and defects. 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 

2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance 

notice. 

4. Submit separate report for each test. 

5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction and the following: 

a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water, and 

maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes. 

b. Close openings in system and fill with water. 

c. Purge air and refill with water. 

d. Disconnect water supply. 

e. Test and inspect joints for leaks. 

6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI- 

B-6, and the following: 

a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. 

b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924. 

7. Test sanitary sewer in accordance with EBMUD and City of Oakland requirements. 

8. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969. 

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances 

specified. 

3.10 CLEANING 

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. 




SECTION 02553 - NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes piping, valves, and service regulators for natural gas distribution outside the 

building. 


A. Gas Main: Utility’s natural gas piping. 

B. Gas Distribution: Piping from gas main to individual service-meter assemblies. 

C. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet from service-meter assembly. 

D. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to natural gas utilization 

devices inside the building. 


A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: 

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Service Meters: 10 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. PE pipe and fittings. 

2. Valves. 

3. Service regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 

B. Shop Drawings: For natural gas service piping and service meter assembly. Include plans, elevations, 

sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas and with authorities having jurisdiction for 

natural gas systems. 

B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1 or NFPA 54for materials, installation, testing, inspection, and purging. 


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utilitylocating 

service for area where Project is located. 

NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 - 1


PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B; Schedule 40, black. 

1. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads complying with 

ASME B1.20.1. 

2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass-to-iron seat; ground 

joint. 

B. Components, Tapes, Gaskets, and Bolts and Nuts: Suitable for natural gas and as recommended by 

piping manufacturer. 

2.2 VALVES 

A. Valves, General: Manual operation, suitable for natural gas service, and with 100-psig minimum 

working-pressure rating. 

B. Threaded Valves, NPS 1and 

Smaller: Include listing by agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Non-lubricated, Tapered Plug Valves: Brass or cast-iron body, with brass tapered plug; lever operation; 

and complying with ASME B16.33, MSS SP-78, UL 842. Include lever and locking device. 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Essex Brass. 

b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 

c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 

d. Mueller Company. 

D. Lubricated, Tapered Plug Valves: Cast-iron body, with lubricated, brass tapered plug; lever operation; 

and complying with ASME B16.33, MSS SP-78, UL 842. Include lever and locking device. 


a. Mueller Company. 

b. National Meter. 

c. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 

E. Lubricated Plug Valves: Cast-iron body, with lubricated, tapered, or cylindrical plug; lever operation; and 

complying with ASME B16.38, MSS SP-78, UL 842/. Include locking device. 


a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. 

b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 

c. Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div. 

d. R & M Energy Systems; Flow Control Div. 

e. Walworth Company (The). 

F. PE Valves: Made for gas distribution, with nut or flat head for key operation; and complying with 

ASME B16.40, UL 842. 


a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp. 

b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 

c. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 



d. Perfection Corporation; Gas Products Div. 

G. Earthquake Valves: ASCE 25, mechanical-operation and automatic-shutoff type with operating-pressure 

rating at least as great as system pressure. 

1. Pipe Connections: 

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. 

2.3 SPECIALTIES 


a. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. 

b. Quake Defense, Inc.; Emergency Fail-Safe Systems. 

c. Safe T Quake. 

d. Seismic Safety Products, Inc. 

e. US Quake Koso Canada, Inc. 

A. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron, two-section box. Include top section with cover with “GAS” lettering, bottom 

section with base to fit over valve and barrel 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of 

length required for depth of bury. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve 

nut or flat head and with stem of length required to operate valve. 

B. Service Regulators: Natural gas service regulator complying with ANSI B109.4 or DIR 006.3-listed for 

service regulators. 

1. Construction: Single-stage, steel-jacketed, corrosion-resistant diaphragm type. Include 

2. 

atmospheric vent and elevation compensator. 

Pipe Connections: Threaded. 


a. American Meter Co. 

b. Fisher Controls International. 

c. Invensys Energy Metering. 

d. National Meter. 

e. Schlumberger Limited. 

C. Concrete Bases: Precast concrete made of 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength reinforced 

concrete; at least 4 inches thick and 4 inches larger in each dimension than supported item, unless 

otherwise indicated. 



A. Refer to Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 

B. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or piping section. 

C. Inspect natural gas piping according to fuel gas code to determine that natural gas utilization devices are 

turned off in piping section affected. 

D. Comply with fuel gas code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 



3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS 

A. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system 

pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Aboveground Piping: Steel pipe, malleable-iron fittings, and threaded joints. 

C. Underground Piping: PE pipe, PE fittings, and heat-fusion joints. 

D. Underground-to-Aboveground Piping Connections: Service-line riser. 

E. PE-to-Steel Piping Connections: Transition fitting. 

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. Drawings indicate types of shutoff valves to be used. If specific types are not indicated, the following 

requirements apply: 

1. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping gas mains. 

2. Underground: Use PE valves. 

3. Aboveground, NPS 2 and Smaller: Lubricated tapered plug valves. 


A. The Contractor shall coordinate as necessary with PG&E. 

B. PG&E must perform the hot tap to the natural gas line. The Contractor shall be responsible for 

coordinating this work. 

C. Install underground, PE, natural gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774. 

D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter 

outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where 

condensate would be subject to freezing. 

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use 

nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as 

connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. 

E. Terminate service-regulator horizontal vents or horizontal vent piping with reducing-elbow fittings with 

large end as outlet. Install fitting outlet turned down with corrosion-resistant insect screen in outlet. 

F. Install PE shutoff valves on branch connections to existing underground, natural gas distribution piping. 

Install valves with valve boxes. 

G. Install metal shutoff valves on aboveground, natural gas distribution piping. 

H. Install earthquake valves aboveground, outside building, and according to listing applications. 

I. Connect gas distribution piping to natural gas source and extend to service-meter assemblies and points 

indicated. Connect to building’s natural gas piping if it is installed; otherwise, terminate piping with caps, 

plugs, or flanges, as required for piping material. Refer to Division 15 Section “Fuel Gas Piping” for 

natural gas piping inside the building. 



J. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded 

pipe connection. 

K. Do not use natural gas distribution piping as grounding electrode. 

L. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs 

on or near each service regulator, service meter, and earthquake valve. 

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of 

operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and 

improper operations. 

M. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape over 

natural gas distribution piping during backfilling of trenches for piping. 


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas distribution according to requirements of fuel gas code and utility. 

B. Repair leaks and defective valves and specialties and retest system until no leaks exist. 

C. Report results in writing. 

D. Verify correct pressure settings for service regulators. 




SECTION 02605 – UNDERGROUND UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 



A. This section includes information and requirements for the identification and marking of underground 

utilities. These utilities include but are not limited to: electric wires, telecommunications, grounding 

systems, cathodic protection systems, and pipes for gas, water, steam, condensate, chilled water, hot 

water, condenser water, glycol, fuel oil, jet fuel, storm drains, sewers, irrigation and water. 


2.1 UTILITY MARKER 

A. The utility marker shall be flat survey marker made of brass, three inches in diameter and 1/8 inch thick. It 

shall be a Lietz model 8134-08 or approved equal. 

B. Contractor shall submit a list of the markers with Marker No., location, and ID to the Engineer for approval 

before engraving markers. 

2.2 GROUT 

A. Grout shall be non-shrink equal to Embeco or Sikagrout. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. This Part is intended to provide information for certain of Owner’s project construction requirements. The 

Contractor shall review this Part and incorporate applicable information into the Construction Bid 

Documents. 

B. When conducting underground work, if existing underground utilities that have not been previously marked 

are located, the Contractor shall provide utility markers as required in this Section. The Contractor shall 

also include these utilities on the Record Drawings. 

C. When working at a location with underground utility markers, any markers that are removed or covered up 

shall be replaced. New markers shall be installed per the requirements of this Section. 

3.2 UNDERGROUND UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 

UNDERGROUND UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 02605 - 1


A. Install six inch wide underground warning tape located one foot above buried utilities that identifies the 

utility. 

B. Concrete encasements around high voltage underground electric wires shall contain a red dye in the 

concrete. 

C. Provide record drawings of utilities in accordance with Section 00711. Each drawing shall bear the seal of 

a Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor registered in the State of California. As a minimum, the drawing shall 

include the following information: 

1. A chart with the following information on each marker: 

a. Marker number. 

b. Grid coordinates. 

c. Service (i.e. gas, water…) 

d. Pipe/wire size. 

e. Type of pipe installed (i.e. Schedule 40 steel with coating) 

f. Depth of burial. 

2. A scaled drawing of the utilities with the survey grid on the drawing. The depth of the utilities shall 

be provided on the drawings at a maximum of 100-foot intervals, changes in direction and when 

pipes pass under surface obstacles. 

3. Reference marks or locations. 

3.3 UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKERS 

A. Provide permanent markers for new underground utilities at the following locations, as a minimum: 

1. Within two feet of each side of obstacles or walls. 

2. Changes in direction. 

3. Within two feet of each connecting pipes at branch line connections. 

4. Spaced maximum 300 feet along straight runs. 

5. Within two feet of the beginning/end of pipe. 

B. Markers shall contain information in accordance with details 9 and 10 on sheet CS503. 

C. Install markers in accordance with details 7 and 8 on CS503. 

D. Coordinates of utility markers shall be determined by a field survey. The survey shall be accurate within 

1/10,000 of a mile and shall be referenced to the California State Plane coordinates. 

E. Submit one (1) copy of the survey traverses used to determine coordinates of the markers. 




4.1 GENERAL 







SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Pipe and fittings. 

2. Nonpressure transition couplings. 

3. Pressure pipe couplings. 

4. Cleanouts. 

5. Drains. 

6. Manholes. 

7. Catch basins. 

8. Stormwater inlets. 



B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 

2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, covers, 

and grates. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench 

and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between 

manholes, piping, and proximate structures. 

B. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1 

inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and piping. 

Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer. 


STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 1



A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary 

service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission. 


2.1 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10: 

AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth 

waterway for coupling joints. 

1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that 

mates with tube and fittings. 

B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60: 

AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway 

for coupling joints. 

1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that 

mates with pipe and fittings. 

2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76. 

1. Bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets 

2. Class III, Wall B. 

2.3 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosionresistant-metal 

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 



B. Sleeve Materials: 

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 

2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 

3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being 

joined. 

C. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: 

1. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer 

shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: 

1. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for 

spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 

2.4 PRESSURE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Description: AWWA C219, tubular-sleeve coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt 

fasteners. 

B. Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure piping. 

Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating and ends sized to fit adjoining pipes. 

C. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

D. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 

E. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

2.5 CLEANOUTS 

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: 

1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, 

secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection 

and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Medium Duty, Heavy Duty and Extra-Heavy Duty. 

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and 

fittings. 

2.6 MANHOLES 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: 

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for 


2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise required by the City of Oakland. 



3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as 

required to prevent flotation. 


base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Refer to City of 

Oakland standards for differing requirements. 

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated unless 

otherwise required by City of Oakland 

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 



8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, 

cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe 

connection. 

9. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel 

reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 


12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less 

than 60 inches. Verify that steps are in conformance with City of Oakland standards. 

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter 

matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to 

indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole 

frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation 

and slope. 

2.7 CONCRETE 

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R , and the following: 

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type as specified in Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE. 

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 


B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 



C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 

4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches 

in manholes. 

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides 

to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 

a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. 

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. 

a. Slope: 8 percent. 



D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum 

water/cementitious materials ratio. 



2.8 CATCH BASINS 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: 

1. Description: ASTM C 478, 

precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for 



base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 



5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching 

catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 

6. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness. 

7. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel 

reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 


12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less 

than 60 inches. 

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, 

resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base 

section. 

B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. 

Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings. 

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated. 

2.9 STORMWATER INLETS 

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to City of Oakland 

standards. 

B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to City of Oakland standards. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." 




A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and 

arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into 

account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation 

is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of 

invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according 

to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections 

unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and 

fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process 

of microtunneling. 

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 

2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use 

corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place 

concrete supports or anchors. 

3. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. 

4. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321. 

5. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe 

Installation Manual." 

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 

2. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for 

rubber-gasketed joints. 

3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings. 

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION 

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe 

fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. 

Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 

1. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot traffic and paved 

foot-traffic areas. 

2. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 

3. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads. 



B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set 

with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade. 

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface. 

3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. 

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. 

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 

inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated. 

3.6 CATCH BASIN AND STORMWATER INLET INSTALLATION 

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. 

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318. 


A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of 

existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch 

overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20.Remove section of 

existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 

inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground 

manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 

3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing 

through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise 

indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches 

of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection 

to undisturbed ground. 

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless 


b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping 

materials. 



4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while 

making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 

B. Pipe couplings, with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below 


1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer 

piping unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. 

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. 

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between 

smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints. 


A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green 

warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures. 

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect 

after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 

2. Defects requiring correction include the following: 

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size 

not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. 

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within 

allowances specified. 

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. 

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for 

leaks and defects. 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 

2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance 

notice. 

4. Submit separate report for each test. 



5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: 

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. 

c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924. 

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances 

specified. 

3.11 CLEANING 

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. 




SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) pavement requirements. In general all new cement 

concrete pavement shall comply with section 40 of the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. 


A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. 

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. Mix design shall show the proportions and actual flexural 

strength obtained from the concrete. Mix design shall include complete list of materials including type, 

brand, source and amount of cement, admixtures, and copies of test reports. 

C. Material certificates. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 

requirements for production facilities and equipment. 

B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

C. Testing Laboratory: The testing laboratory used to develop the design mix and to perform the tests 

required by this specification shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077. A certification that the 

laboratory meets these requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer. 



A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, 

deformed. 

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening steel 

reinforcement. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. 

2.2 AGGREGATE BASE 

A. Aggregate Base: See section 02300. 

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1



A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali. Set retarding admixture shall be added in hot 

weather, if required. Air entraining admixture shall be added at the mixer. If for any reason, cement 

becomes partially set or contains lumps of caked cement, if shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from 

discarded or used bags shall not be used. 

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, with the exception of loss of ignition, where the maximum should be less 

than 6%. The weight of the fly ash in the mix shall note exceed 15% of the total added weight of 

the fly ask and Portland Cement as per the following formula: fly ash (fly ash and cement less than 

or equal to 15%. 

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, from a single source. Percentage of wear shall be nor more than 40 

when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 for aggregate less than 1-1/2” and ASTM C535 for 

aggregates less than ¾”. Gradation shall be a blend of the two sizes listed in Table 1: 

TABLE 1. GRADATION FOR COARSE AGGREGATE 

Sieve Designations Percentage of Weight Passing Sieves 

inches 1-1/2” – ¾” ¾” – No. 4 

2-1/2” -- -- 

2” 100 -- 

1-1/2” 90-100 -- 

1” 25-55 100 

¾” 0-15 90-100 

½” -- -- 

3/8” 0-5 20-55 

No. 4 -- 0-10 

No. 8 -- 0-5 

D. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, from a single source. Gradation shall meet the requirements of Table 2. 

E. Water: ASTM C 94. 

TABLE 2. GRADATION FOR FINE AGGREGATE 

Sieve Designations Percentage of Weight Passing Sieves 

inches 

3/8” 100 

No. 4 95-100 

No. 8 80-100 

No. 16 50-85 

No. 30 25-60 

No. 50 10-30 

No. 100 2-10 

F. Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by 

mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures, as follows: 



1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to the mixer in the amount necessary to produce the 

specified air content. The air-entrainment agent and the water reducer admixture shall be 

compatible. Add air-entraining admixture in such a manner that will ensure uniform distribution of 

the agent throughout the batch. The air content of freshly mixed air-entrained concrete shall be 

based upon trial mixes with the materials to be used in the work adjusted to produce concrete of 

the required plasticity and workability. The percentage of air entrainment in the mix shall be in 

accordance with Table 3 plus or minus 1-1/2 percentage points. Air content shall be determined by 

testing in accordance with ASTM C 231 for gravel and stone coarse aggregate. 

TABLE 3. ENTRAINED AIR TOLERANCES 

Coarse Aggregate Size Air Content Percent by Volume 

1-1/2” 5% (±1%) 

2. Chemical Admixtures: Water-reducing, set-retarding and set-accelerating admixtures meeting the 

requirements of ASTM C 494. Water reducing and set-controlling admixtures shall be added to the 

mix in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in the amount necessary to comply with 

the specification requirements. Tests shall be conducted on trial mixes, during the mix design, in 

accordance with ASTM C 494. 

G. Curing Materials: 

1. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 

2. White polyethylene film for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C171. 

3. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, 

Class B. 

4. Waterproof paper for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C171. 

I. Premolded Joint Filler: 

1. Expansion and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or 

ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 

2. Contraction Joints: Resin-impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of 

ASTM D1752. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and 

width required for the joint. When the use of more than one piece is authorized by the Engineer for 

a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely and held accurately to shape by stapling or 

other positive fastening means. 

J. Joint Sealer: 

1. Refer to section 02764 “PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS”. 

2.4 CONCRETE MIXES AND MIXING 

A. Proportions: Proportioning requirements shall be for a flexural strength of 700 psi. Flexural strength shall 

be specified at 28 days using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in 

accordance with ASTM C78. For slip-form construction, a high degree of uniformity in the plastic concrete 

is required. Caution should be exercised in establishing the air-entrainment percentage, as excessive air 

entrainment will aggravate edge slumping and insufficient air entrainment will result in poor concrete 



durability. Some edge slump of the wet concrete behind the side form on the paving machine will occur, 

even with low slump concrete. This may continue, though very slowly, until initial set has taken place. 

B. Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes at a central plant, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and 

ACI 301, with the following properties: 

2.5 FORMS 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 6000 psi 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.53 by weight. 

3. Slump Limit: 1 to 2 inches for side-form concrete; ½” to 1-1/2” for vibrated slip-form concrete. . 

4. Air Content: 4.5 to 7.5 percent. 

5. Minimum cementitious material: 564 pounds per cubic yard. Cementitious material shall be 

defined as fly ash plus Portland Cement. 

A. Forms: Use straight side forms made of steel, having a thickness of not less than 7/32 inch and not less 

than 10 feet in length. Wood forms are not permitted. Forms shall have a depth equal to the prescribed 

edge thickness of the concrete without horizontal joint, and a base width equal to the depth of the forms. 

Flexible or curved forms of proper radius shall be used for curves of 100-foot radius or less. Flexible or 

curved forms shall be of a design acceptable to the Engineer. Forms shall be provided with adequate 

devices for secure settings so that when in place they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, 

the impact and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment. Flange braces shall extend outward 

on the base not less than two-thirds the height of the form. Forms with battered top surfaces and bent, 

twisted, or broken forms shall be removed from the work. Repaired forms shall not be used until inspected 

and approved. Built-up forms shall not be used. The top face of the form shall not vary from a true plane 

more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, and the upstanding leg shall not vary more than ¼ inch. The forms shall 

contain provisions for locking the ends of abutting sections together tightly for secure setting. 



A. Surface Preparation: Proof-roll prepared subbase, and remove loose material from surface. 

1. Condition of Underlying Course, Slip-Form Construction: After the base course has been placed 

and compacted to the required density, the areas which will support the paving machine and the 

area to be paved shall be trimmed to the proper elevation and profile. The grade of the base on 

which the concrete pavement is to be placed shall be controlled automatically by steel guide wires 

erected and maintained by the Contractor. If the density of the base is disturbed by the trimming 

operations, it shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer. If damage occurs on a stabilized 

base, it shall be corrected full depth by the Contractor or the damaged areas filled with concrete 

integral with the pavement as approved by the Engineer. The grading operations should be 

delayed as long as possible and immediately precede paving insofar as practical, particularly if the 

base course is subjected to haul traffic. If traffic is allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade 

shall be checked and corrected immediately before the placement of concrete. The prepared grade 

shall be well moistened with water, without saturating, immediately ahead of concrete placement to 

prevent rapid loss of moisture from concrete. In cold weather the underlying base shall be 

protected so that it will be entirely free of frost when concrete is placed. The concrete shall not be 

placed until the base has cured for seven days. 



2. Conditioning of Underlying Course, Side-Form Construction: The prepared grade shall be well 

moistened with water, without saturating, immediately ahead of concrete placement to prevent 

rapid loss of moisture from the concrete. Ruts or depressions in the base caused by hauling or 

usage of other equipment shall be filled as they develop with suitable material (not with concrete or 

concrete aggregates) and thoroughly compacted by rolling. If damage occurs to a stabilized base, 

it shall be corrected full depth by the Contractor, or the damaged areas filled with concrete integral 

with the pavement as approved by the Engineer. A multiple-pin template weighing not less than 

1,000 pounds per 20 feet or other approved template shall be provided and operated on the forms 

immediately in advance of the placing of the concrete. The template shall be provided and 

operated on the forms immediately in advance of the placing of the concrete. The template shall be 

propelled only by hand and not attached to a tractor or other power unit. Templates shall be 

adjustable so that they may be set and maintained at the correct contour of the underlying course. 

The adjustment and operation of the template shall be such as will provide an accurate retest of 

the grade before placing the concrete thereon. All excess material shall be removed. Low areas 

may be filled and compacted to a condition similar to that of the surrounding grade, or filled with 

concrete integral with the pavement. In cold weather, the underlying base shall be protected so that 

it will be entirely free from frost when the concrete is placed. The Contractor shall not place 

concrete until the base has cured for seven days. The use of chemicals to eliminate frost in the 

underlying material will not be permitted. The template shall be maintained in accurate adjustment, 

at all times by the Contractor, and should be checked daily. The work described under the 

foregoing paragraphs does not constitute a regular sub grading operation, but rather a final 

accurate check of the underlying course. 

B. Forms: Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to 

required lines, grades, and elevations. 

1. All forms shall be fully supported on the base material including any bracing or kickers. Forms shall 

be set sufficiently in advance of the concrete placement to ensure continuous paving operation. 

After the forms have been set to correct grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped, either 

mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside edges of the base of the forms. Forms 

shall be staked into place with not less than 3 pins for each 10-foot section. A pin shall be placed at 

each side of every joint. 

2. Form sections shall be tightly locked and shall be free from play or movement in any direction. The 

forms shall not deviate from true line by more than ¼ inch at any joint. Forms shall be so set that 

they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the 

consolidating and finishing equipment. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of 

concrete. 

3. The alignment and grade elevations of the forms required for any one day’s production shall be 

checked and corrections made by the Contractor before placing any concrete that day. When any 

form has been disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the form shall be reset and 

rechecked. 

C. Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Set 

wire ties with ends directed into concrete. 

D. Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, contraction, and expansion joints as indicated. 

3.2 CONCRETE MIXING AND PLACEMENT 



A. Limitations of Mixing: 

1. No concrete shall be mixed, placed, or finished when the natural light is insufficient, unless an 

adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated. 

2. Mixing and concreting operations shall be discontinued when a descending air temperature in the 

shade and away from artificial that reaches 40 F and shall not be resumed until an ascending air 

temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat reaches 35 F. 

3. During periods of warm weather when the maximum daily air temperature exceeds 85 F, the 

following precautions should be taken. The forms and/or the underlying material shall be sprinkled 

with water immediately before placing the concrete. The concrete shall be placed at the coolest 

temperature practicable, and in no case shall the temperature of the concrete when placed exceed 

90 F. The aggregates and/or mixing water shall be cooled as necessary to maintain the concrete 

temperature at or not more than the specified maximum. 

B. Side-Form Method: 

1. For the side-form method, the concrete shall be deposited on the moistened grade to require as 

little re-handling as possible. Unless truck agitators, or non-agitating hauling equipment are 

equipped with means for discharge of concrete without segregation of the materials, the concrete 

shall be unloaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically spread on the grade to 

prevent segregation of the materials. Placing shall be continuous between transverse joints without 

the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreading shall be done with shovels – not 

rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes 

coated with earth or foreign substances. 

2. When concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane of pavement and when 

mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane of pavement, the concrete shall be 

at least 7 days old and at a flexural strength approved by the Engineer. If only finishing equipment 

is carried on the existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may be permitted after 3 days, if approved 

by the Engineer. 

3. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along faces of all forms and along the full 

length and on both sides of all joint assemblies by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. 

Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. 

In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than 15 seconds in any one location, nor shall the 

vibrators be used to move the concrete. 

4. Concrete shall be deposited as near to expansion and contraction joints as possible without 

disturbing them but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket or hopper onto a joint assembly 

unless the hopper is well centered on the joint assembly. 

5. Should any concrete materials fall on or be worked into the surface of a completed slab, they shall 

be removed immediately by approved methods. 

C. Slip-Form Method: 

1. For the slip-form method, the concrete shall be placed with an approved crawler-mounted, slipform 

paver designed to spread, consolidate, and shape the freshly placed concrete in one 

complete pass of the machine so that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary to provide a 

dense and homogeneous pavement in conformance with requirements of the plans and 

specifications. The concrete should be placed directly on top of the joint assemblies to prevent 

them from moving when the paver moves over them. Side forms and finishing screeds shall be 

adjustable to the extent required to produce the specified pavement edge and surface tolerance. 

The side forms shall be of dimensions, shape, and strength to support the concrete laterally for a 



sufficient length of time so that no appreciable edge slumping will occur. Final finishing shall be 

accomplished while the concrete is still in the plastic state. 

2. It is the intent of the specification to produce a high quality, dense, long lasting, and smooth 

pavement suitable for the high speed operations of roughness-sensitive heavy jet aircraft. This 

requires that all joints, and particularly all longitudinal joints, meet the specified tolerance 

throughout their length. The Engineer will designate the paving lanes in an apron, taxiway, or the 

outer runway paving lanes to be used for the initial paving operations. In the event that slumping or 

sloughing occurs behind the paver or if there are any other structural or surface defects which, in 

the opinion of the Engineer, cannot be corrected within permissible tolerances, the Engineer may 

halt having operations until proper adjustment of the equipment or procedures have been made. In 

the event that satisfactory procedures and pavement are not achieved after more than 1,000 linear 

feet of single lane paving, the Contractor shall complete the balance of the work with the use of 

standard metal forms and the formed method of placing and curing. 

D. Strike-Off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement: Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be 

struck off to conform to the cross section shown on the plans and to an elevation such that when the 

concrete is properly consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at the elevation 

shown on the plans. All steel joints and in “R” reinforced slabs shall be mounted on chairs at the proper 

elevations and the chairs shall be firmly fixed to the base course well in advance of the paving operations. 

Reinforcing steel, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil, or other organic matter that may 

adversely affect or reduce bond. Reinforcing steel with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both will be 

considered satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions, weight, and tensile properties of a hand-wire 

brushed test specimen are not less than the applicable ASTM specification requirements. 

E. Joints: 

1. General: 

a. Longitudinal and Transverse Joints: Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be constructed 

as indicated on the plans and in accordance with these requirements. All joints shall be 

constructed true to line with their faces perpendicular to the surface of the pavement. Joints 

shall not vary more than ½ inch from a true line or from their designated position. The 

vertical surface of the pavement adjacent to all expansion joints shall be finished to a true 

plane and edged to a radius of ¼ inch or as shown on the plans. The surface across the 

joints shall be tested with a 10-foot straightedge as the joints are finished and any 

irregularities in excess of ¼ inch shall be corrected before the concrete has hardened. 

Transverse joints shall be at right angles to the centerline of the pavement and shall extend 

the full width of the slab. The transverse joints in succeeding lanes shall be placed in line 

with similar joints in the first lane. All joints shall be so prepared, finished, or cut to provide a 

groove of the width and depth shown on the plans. Concrete edge slump shall not exceed 

¼”. 

b. Tie Bars: Tie bars shall consist of deformed bars installed principally in longitudinal joints 

as shown on the plans. Tie bars shall be placed at right angles to the centerline of the 

concrete slab and shall be spaced at intervals of 30 inches, unless otherwise specified. 

They shall be held in position parallel to the pavement surface and midway between the 

surfaces of the slab. These bars shall not be painted, greased or enclosed in sleeves. 

c. Dowel Bars: Dowel bars or other load-transfer units of an approved type shall be placed 

across transverse or other joints in the manner as specified on the plans. They shall be of 

the dimensions and spacings as shown and held rigidly in the middle of the slab depth in 

the proper horizontal and vertical alignment by an approved assembly device to be left 



2. Installation: 

permanently in place. The “chair” portion of the assembly shall be sloped at the thickened 

edges and shall be delivered pre-manufactured with a slope designed to keep the dowel 

bars at a uniform depth from the top of the slab. The dowel or load-transfer and joint 

devices shall be rigid enough to permit complete assembly as a unit ready to be lifted and 

placed into position. A metal, or other type, dowel expansion cap or sleeve shall be 

furnished for each dowel bar used with expansion joints. These caps shall be substantial 

enough to prevent collapse and shall be placed on the ends of the dowels as shown on the 

plans. The caps or sleeves shall fit the dowel bar tightly and the closed end shall be 

watertight. The portion of each dowel painted with rust preventive paint, as required in this 

specification, shall be thoroughly coated with asphalt MC-70, or an approved lubricant, to 

prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the dowel. If free-sliding plastic-coated 

or steel dowels are used, a lubrication bond breaker shall be used except when approved 

pullout tests indicate it is not necessary. 

a. The top of an assembled joint device shall be set at the proper distance below the 

pavement surface and the elevation shall be checked. Such devices shall be set to the 

required position and line and shall be securely held in place by stakes or other means 

during the pouring and finishing of the concrete. The premolded joint material shall be 

placed and held in a vertical position; if constructed in sections, there shall be no offsets 

between adjacent units. Dowel bars shall be checked for exact position and alignment as 

soon as the joint device is staked in place, and the device shall be tested to determine 

whether it is firmly supported. The maximum permissible tolerance on dowel bar alignment 

in each plane, horizontal and vertical, shall not exceed 2 percent or ¼ inch (6mm) per foot 

of a dowel bar. The most effective way to obtain proper alignment is with well-fabricated 

dowel baskets and dowel assemblies. 

b. All joints in concrete pavements shall be sawed and beveled; the joints shall be cut as 

shown on the plans. Equipment shall be as described in this specification. The circular 

cutter shall be capable of cutting a groove in a straight line and shall produce a slot at least 

1/8 inch wide and to the depth shown on the plans. When shown on the plans or required 

by the specifications, the top portion of the slot or groove shall be widened by means of a 

second shallower cut to provide adequate space for joint sealers. When shown on the plans 

or required by the specifications, the top portion of the joint shall be beveled by a third cut. 

Sawing of the joints shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to 

permit cutting without chipping, spalling, or tearing. Sawing shall be carried on both during 

the day and night as required. The joints shall be sawed at the required spacing 

consecutively in sequence of the concrete placement, unless otherwise approved by the 

Engineer. 

3. Longitudinal Joints: 

a. Construction: Longitudinal construction joints necessary for lane construction shall be 

formed against suitable side forms (made of steel) without keyways, as indicated in the 

plans. When the concrete is placed using slip-form pavers, dowels or tie bars shall be as 

shown on the drawings. Where butt-type joints with dowels are designated, the dowels for 

this type shall be painted and greased. The edges of the joint shall be finished with a 

grooving tool or edging tool. Construction joints shall be sawed to provide a groove at the 

top conforming to the details and dimensions indicated on the plans. Provisions shall be 

made for the installation of tie bars as noted on the plans. Dowels or tie bars shall be 

installed in a manner that does not damage the concrete. Dowels or tie bars shall be 



installed by drilling concrete and shall be epoxy anchored in an approved manner. Submit 

epoxy to Engineer for review. 

b. Contraction on Weakened-Plane Type: The longitudinal groove sawed in the top of the slab 

shall be installed where indicated on the drawings. It shall be sawed with approved 

equipment in the hardened concrete to the dimensions required. The sawed groove shall be 

straight and have uniform width and depth. The groove shall be clean cut so that spalling 

will be avoided at intersection with transverse joints, dowels and tie bars shall be installed 

across these joints where indicated on the plans. 

c. Expansion: Longitudinal expansion joints shall be installed as indicated on the plans. The 

premolded filler, of the thickness as shown on the plans, shall extend for the full depth and 

width of the slab at the joint, except for space for sealant at the top of the slab. The filler 

shall be securely staked or fastened into position perpendicular to the proposed finished 

surface. After the concrete has been placed and struck off, all concrete shall be cleaned 

from the top of the joint material. Before the pavement is opened to traffic, this space shall 

be swept clean and filled with specified joint sealing material. The edges of the joint shall be 

finished and tooled while the concrete is still plastic. 

4. Transverse Joints: 

a. Expansion: Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at the locations and spacing as 

shown on the plans. The joints shall be installed at right angles to the centerline and 

perpendicular to the surface of the pavement. The joints shall be installed and finished to 

ensure complete separation of the slabs. Expansion joints shall be of a premolded type 

conforming to these specifications and with the plans and shall be the full width of the 

pavement strip. 

All concrete shall be cleaned from the top of the joint material. Before the pavement is 

opened to traffic, this space shall be swept clean and filled with approved joint sealing 

material. 

All devices used for the installation of expansion joints shall be approved by the Engineer. 

They shall be easily removable without disturbing the concrete and held in proper 

transverse and vertical alignment. Immediately after forms are removed, any concrete 

bridging the joint space at the ends shall be removed for the full width and depth of the joint. 

When specified, expansion joints shall be equipped with dowels of the dimensions and at 

the spacing and location indicated on the plans. The dowels shall be firmly supported in 

place and accurately aligned parallel to the subgrade and the centerline of the pavement by 

means of a dowel assembly, which will remain in the pavement and will ensure that the 

dowels are not displaced during construction. 

b. Contraction: Transverse contraction joints shall be installed at the locations and spacing as 

shown on the plans. These joints will be installed by sawing a groove into the concrete 

surface after the concrete has hardened in the same manner as specified in this 

specification. Dowel bar assemblies shall be installed, when required, as shown on the 

plans. 

c. Construction: Transverse construction joints shall be installed at the end of each day’s 

placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when concrete placement is 

interrupted for more than 30 minutes or it appears that the concrete will obtain its initial set 

before fresh concrete arrives. When the installation of the joint can be planned in advance, 

it shall be located at a contraction or expansion joint. The joint shall not be allowed within 8 

feet (240 cm) of a regular spaced transverse joint. If the pouring of the concrete has been 



stopped, causing a joint to fall within this limit, it shall not be installed; the fresh placed 

concrete shall be removed back to the 8-foot (240 cm) limit. 

F. Final Strike-Off, Consolidation and Finishing: 

1. Sequence: The sequence of operations shall be the strike-off and consolidation, floating and 

removal of laitance, straight edging, and final surface finish. The addition of superficial water to the 

surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations generally will not be permitted. If the 

application of water to the surface is permitted, it shall be applied as a fog spray by means of 

approved spray equipment. 

2. Finishing at Joints: The concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted or firmly placed without 

voids or segregation against the joint material; it shall be firmly placed without voids or segregation 

under and around all load-transfer devices, joint assembly units, and other features designed to 

extend into the pavement. Concrete adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated as required in 

this specification. After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints, the 

finishing machine shall be operated in a manner to avoid damage of misalignment of joints. If 

uninterrupted operations of the finishing machine, to, over, and beyond the joints, cause 

segregation of concrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall be 

stopped when the screed is approximately 8 inches from the joint. Segregated concrete shall be 

removed from the front of and off the joint, the screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the 

joint, and the forward motion of the finishing machine shall be resumed. Thereafter, the finishing 

machine may be run over the joint without lifting the screed, provided there is no segregated 

concrete immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of the joint. 

3. Machine Finishing: The concrete shall be spread as soon as it is placed, and it shall be struck off 

and screeded by an approved finishing machine. The machine shall go over each area as many 

times and at such intervals as necessary to give the proper consolidation and to leave a surface of 

uniform texture. Excessive operation over a given area shall be avoided. When side forms are 

used, the tops of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine, and 

the travel of the machine on the forms shall be maintained true without lift, wobbling, or other 

variation tending to affect the precision finish. During the first pas of the finishing machine, a 

uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the front screed for its entire length. When 

in operation, the screed shall be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse 

shearing motion, always moving in the direction in which the work is progressing, and so 

manipulated that neither end is raised from the side forms during the striking-off process. If 

necessary, this shall be repeated until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross 

section, and free from porous areas. 

4. Hand Finishing: Hand finishing methods will not be permitted, except under the following 

conditions: in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand methods may be used to 

finish the concrete already deposited on the grade; in the areas of narrow widths or of irregular 

dimensions where operation of mechanical equipment is impractical. Concrete, as soon as placed, 

shall be struck off and screeded. An approved portable screed shall be used. A second screed 

shall be provided for striking off the bottom layer of concrete when reinforcement is used. 

The screed for the surface shall be at least 2 feet longer than the maximum width of the slab to be 

struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and shall be 

constructed either of metal or of other suitable material covered with metal. Consolidation shall be 

attained by the use of a suitable vibrator. 

5. Floating: After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, 

trued, and consolidated by means of a longitudinal float, using one of the following methods: 



a. Hand Method: The hand-operated longitudinal float shall not be less than 12 feet in length 

and 6 inches in width, properly stiffened to prevent flexibility and warping. The longitudinal 

float, operated from foot bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching 

the concrete, shall be worked with a sawing motion, while held in a floating position parallel 

to the pavement centerline and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the 

other. Forward movement along the centerline of the pavement shall be in successive 

advances of not more than one-half the length of the float. Any excess water or soupy 

material shall be wasted over the pavement edge on each pass. 

b. Mechanical Method: The Contractor may use a machine composed of a cutting and 

smoothing float(s), suspended from and guided by a rigid frame. The frame shall be carried 

by four or more visible wheels riding on, and constantly in contact with, the side forms or 

pavement subgrade. If necessary, long-handled floats having blades not less than 5 feet 

(150 cm) in length and 6 inches (150 mm) in width may be used to smooth and fill in opentextured 

areas in the pavement. Long-handled floats shall not be used to float the entire 

surface of the pavement in lieu of mechanical methods. When strike-off and consolidation 

are done by hand and the crown of the pavement will not permit the use of the longitudinal 

float, the surface shall be floated transversely by means of a long-handled float. Care shall 

be taken not to work the crown out of the pavement during operation. After floating, any 

excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface of the pavement by a 

straightedge 10 feet (3 m) or more in length. Successive drags shall be lapped one-half the 

length of the blade. 

6. Straightedge Testing and Surface Correction: After the pavement has been struck off and 

consolidated and while the concrete is still plastic, it shall be tested for trueness with a 16-foot 

straightedge. For this purpose the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 16-foot 

straightedge swung from handles 3 feet (90 cm) longer than one-half the width of the slab. The 

straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface in successive positions parallel to the 

centerline and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other, as necessary. 

Advancing shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straightedge. 

Any excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface of the pavement. Any 

depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and 

refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Special attention shall be given to assure 

that the surface corrections shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from 

observable departures from the straightedge and until the slab conforms to the required grade and 

cross section. The use of long-handled wood floats shall be confined to a minimum; they may be 

used only in emergencies and in areas not accessible to finishing equipment. 

G. Evaporation Retarder: Apply to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss 

approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's 

written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float 

finishing. 

H. Pavement Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in ACI 330.1. 

3.3 FINISHES/SURFACE TEST 

A. Broom Finish: If the pavement surface texture is to be a type of broom finish, it shall be applied when the 

water sheen has practically disappeared. The equipment shall operate transversely across the pavement 

surface, providing corrugations that are uniform in appearance and approximately 1/16 of an inch (2 mm) 



in depth. It is important that the texturing equipment not tear or unduly roughen the pavement surface 

during the operation. Any imperfections resulting from the texturing operation shall be corrected. 

B. Surface Test: As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface shall be tested 

with a 16-foot straightedge or other specified device. Areas in a slab showing high spots of more than ¼ 

inch but not exceeding ½ inch in 16 feet shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved 

grinding machine to an elevation that will fall within the tolerance of ¼ inch or less. Where the departure 

from correct cross section exceeds ½ inch, the pavement shall be removed and replaced at the expense 

of the Contractor when so directed by the Engineer. 

3.4 CURING 

Any area of section so removed shall not be less than 10 feet in length nor less than the full width of the 

lane involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any remaining portion 

of the slab adjacent to the joints that is less than 10 feet in length shall also be removed and replaced. 

A. Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and marring of the concrete will not occur, 

the entire surface of the newly place concrete shall be cured in accordance with one of the methods 

below. In all cases in which curing requires the use of water, the curing shall have prior right to all water 

supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor may elect to 

use, or lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other requirements, shall be cause for 

immediate suspension of concreting operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than ½ 

hour during the curing period. The following are alternate approved methods for curing concrete 

pavements. 

1. Impervious Membrane Method: The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with 

white pigmented curing compound immediately after the finishing of the surface and before the set 

of the concrete has taken place. The curing compound shall not be applied during rainfall. Curing 

compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayers under pressure at the rate of 1 gallon to not 

more than 150 square feet. The spraying equipment shall be of the fully atomizing type equipped 

with a tank agitator. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with 

the pigment uniformly dispersed throughout the vehicle. During application the compound shall be 

stirred continuously by effective mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shapes and 

concrete surfaces exposed by the removal of forms will be permitted. Curing compound shall not 

be applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed, but approved means shall be used to ensure 

proper curing for 72 hours. The curing compound shall be of such character that the film will 

harden within 30 minutes after application. Should the film become damaged from any cause within 

the required curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired immediately with additional 

compound. Upon removal of side forms, the sides of the exposed slabs shall be protected 

immediately to provide a curing treatment equal to that of the surface. 

2. Polyethylene Films: The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with 

polyethylene sheeting. The units shall be lapped at least 18 inches. The sheeting shall be placed 

and weighted to cause it to remain in contact with the surface covered. The sheeting shall have 

dimensions that will extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the 

pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the sheeting shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after 

the concrete has been placed. 

3. Waterproof Paper: The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with 

waterproofed paper. The units shall be lapped at least 18 inches. The paper shall be placed and 

weighted to cause it tom remain in contact with the surface covered. The paper shall have 

dimensions that will extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the 



slab. The surface of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted prior to placing of the paper. Unless 

otherwise specified, the paper shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has 

been placed. 

4. White Burlap-Polyethylene Sheets: The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with the 

sheeting. The sheeting used shall be such length (or width) that it will extend at least twice the 

thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. The sheeting shall be placed so that the 

entire surface and both edges of the slab are completely covered. The sheeting shall be placed 

and weighted to remain in contact with the surface covered, and the covering shall be maintained 

fully wetted an in position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. 

B. When concrete is being placed and the air temperature may be expected to drop below 40 F, a sufficient 

supply of thermal blankets shall be provided along the work. Any time the temperature may be expected to 

reach the freezing point during the day or night, the blankets so provided shall be spread over all 

pavement less than 3 days old to prevent freezing of the concrete. The period of time such protection shall 

be maintained shall not be less than 3 days. A minimum of 3 days is required when high, early strength 

concrete is used. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and strength of the concrete placed 

during cold weather, and any concrete injured by frost action shall be removed and replaced at the 

Contractor’s expense. 

3.5 REMOVING FORMS 

A. Unless otherwise specified, forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until it has set for at 

least 12 hours, except where auxiliary forms are used temporarily in widened areas. Forms shall be 

removed carefully to avoid damage to the pavement. After the forms have been removed, the sides of the 

slab shall be cured as outlined in one of the methods indicated in this specification. Major honeycombed 

areas shall be considered as defective work and shall be removed and replaced. Any area or section so 

removed shall not be less than 10 feet in length nor less than the full width of the lane involved. When it is 

necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any remaining portion of the slab adjacent to the 

joints that is less than 10 feet in length shall also be removed and replaced. 

3.6 SEALING JOINTS: 

A. The joints in the pavement shall be sealed in accordance with this specification prior to opening to traffic of 

any nature including construction traffic. 

3.7 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT 

A. The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public traffic and traffic 

caused by the Contractor’s employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to direct traffic and the 

erection and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges, or crossovers, etc. The plans or 

special provisions will indicate the location and type of device or facility required to protect the work and 

provide adequately for traffic. Any damage to the pavement occurring prior to final acceptance shall be 

repaired or the pavement replaced at the Contractor’s expense. In order that the concrete be properly 

protected against the effects of rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be 

required to have available at all times materials for the protection of edges and surfaces of the 

unhardened concrete. Such protective materials shall consist of rolled polyethylene sheeting at 4 mils (0.1 

mm) thick of sufficient length and width to cover the plastic concrete slab and any edges. The sheeting 

may be mounted on either the paver or a separate movable bridge from which it can be unrolled without 



dragging over the plastic concrete surface. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop 

and all available personnel shall begin covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective 

covering. 

3.8 OPENING TO TRAFFIC 

A. The pavement will not be opened to traffic until test specimens molded and cured in accordance with 

ASTM C 31 have attained a flexural strength of 550 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance 

with ASTM C 78 and as indicated on the Drawings. Prior to opening to traffic, the pavement shall be 

cleaned. 

3.9 SURFACE TOLERANCES 

A. Extreme care must be exercised in all phases of the operation to assure the pavement will pass the 

specified tolerances. The following tolerances are applicable: 

1. Lateral deviation from established alignment of the pavement edge shall not exceed plus or minus 

0.10 foot in any lane. 

2. Vertical deviation from established grade shall not exceed plus or minus 0.04 foot at any point. 

3. Surface smoothness deviations shall not exceed ¼ inch from a 16-foot straightedge placed in any 

direction, including placement along and spanning any pavement joint or edge. 

3.10 ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING 

A. Testing will be on a lot basis, which will be 500 CY of concrete placed or one half days work, whichever is 

less. Concrete samples shall be furnished by the Contractor for each lot and shall be taken in the field to 

determine the consistency, air content, and strength of concrete. Flexural test beams shall be made for 

each lot. Each group of test beams shall be molded from the same batch of concrete and shall consist of 

six test beams molded from the same batch of concrete to provide two flexural strength tests at each test 

age and two beams to be held in reserve. Each set of beams shall be identified as to date of placement, 

time of day, mix and ambient temperature, batch number, slump, until weight and air content. The 

specimen shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 31. However, at the start of paving operations and 

when the aggregate source, aggregate characteristics, or mix design is changed, additional groups of test 

beams may be required until the Engineer is satisfied that the concrete mixture being used complies with 

the strength requirements of these specifications. Test ages will be 7 days and 28 days. 

The flexural strength of the concrete for each lot shall be tested and shall meet the following requirements: 

(1) the average of two strength tests for each lot, test at the end of 28 days, shall have an average flexural 

strength equal to or greater than the specified flexural strength; (2) none of the beams tested at the end of 

28 days shall have a flexural strength less than 700 psi. Specimens that are obviously defective shall not 

be considered in the determination of the strength. When it appears that the test specimens will fail to 

conform to the requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order changes in concrete 

sufficient to increase the strength to meet the established requirements. When a satisfactory relationship 

between 7-day and 28-day strengths has been established and approved, the 7-day test results may be 

used as an indication of the 28-day strengths. However, the 7-day test results will not replace the results 

of the 28-day tests if the 28-day results fall below the requirements. All acceptance testing will be 

performed by the Owner’s laboratory, which will have full authority for determining compliance with the 

specified flexural strength shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 



3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK 

A. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to acceptance of the work. 

1. Random Cracks: Concrete slabs containing random cracks from any cause shall be removed and 

replaced at Contractor’s expense. 

2. Tolerances Deficiencies: Concrete pavement that does not meet the specified tolerances for edge 

slump, horizontal or vertical alignment, or surface smoothness shall be removed and replaced as 

directed by the Engineer. 

3. Damaged Joints: Concrete joints which are damaged by wrecking forms, mis-sawing, improper 

finishing techniques, construction traffic or other causes shall be repaired as directed by the 

Engineer. If in the Engineer’s opinion conditions warrant, defective concrete shall be removed and 

replaced as directed at Contractor’s expense. 

4. Deficient Strength: Concrete pavement which does not meet the required flexural strength as 

determined in this specification shall be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense. No 

adjustment will be made for pavement deficient in flexural strength. 

5. Concrete pavement not meeting the specified slump and air entrapment requirements installed 

without authorization by the Engineer is subject to removal and replacement at Contractor’s 

expense. 


4.1 GENERAL 







SECTION 02763 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 02512 "Hot Mix Asphalt" for painting on asphalt. 

2. Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for painting interior concrete surfaces other than pavement. 

C. Comply with Section 84 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, latest edition. 

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 


1. Review methods and procedures related to marking pavement including, but not limited to, the 

following: 


a. Pavement aging period before application of pavement markings. 

b. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of traffic during 

installation period. 

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements per 

Caltrans. 

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard 

specifications do not apply to this Section. 

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02763 - 1


1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum 

ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for alkyd materials and 55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for 

water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) . 


2.1 PAVEMENT- MARKING PAINT 

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with 

AASHTO M 248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. 

1. Color: yellow for stripping and pavement markings; blue and white for handicap striping as 

indicated. 

B. VOC Content: Pavement markings used on building interior shall have a VOC content of 150 g/L or less. 



A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to 


B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING 

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. 

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking. 

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with 

uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film 

thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm) . 

1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to 

pavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application 

beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil. 

2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L). 



3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures 

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 




SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. All materials and methods shall comply with the following specifications based on pavement type: 

1. Caltrans Standard Specifications, May 2006 edition, section 40. 

B. Where conflicts exist between this spec and those reference sections above, the above sections shall 

govern. 

C. This Section includes cold-applied pavement joint sealants in the following locations. 

1. Portland cement concrete pavement expansion, contraction and construction joints. 

2. Joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 

B. Product certificates. 

C. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports. 

D. Product/Workmanship Joint Sealant Warranty 


A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to 

determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, 

optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product specified or approved equal. 

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one 

another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by 

sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

1. Primers: Product recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer for adhesion of sealant 

to joint substrates indicated, as determined from sealant compatibility and adhesion tests and 

prior experience. 

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1


B. Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and 

other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field 

experience and laboratory testing. 

1. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density 

required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 

2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 5893, Type SL, single-component, 

low-modulus, neutral-curing, self-leveling silicone sealant. 

1. Product: 

a. Dow Corning; 890-SL. 



A. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or recommended in writing by joint sealant 

manufacturer, based on sealant compatibility and adhesion tests and prior experience. Confine primers 

to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not spill primers or allow them to migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Sealant Installation: Comply with applicable recommendations in ASTM C 1193. 

D. Install backer materials to support sealants during application and at position required to produce 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 

3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and 

replace them with dry materials. 

E. Install sealants at same time backer materials are installed. 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths optimize sealant movement capability. 

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, 

tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to 

ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 



G. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and 

with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints 

occur. 

H. The Contractor shall furnish a separate extended full warranty covering the liquid silicone and 

installation (labor) performance for a period of five (5) years becoming effective the date the certificate 

of substantial completion (for the entire project) is issued. The extended warranties shall be issued 

jointly by the subcontractor responsible for the joint sealant work (if different from the Prime Contractor 

on this project) and the particular sealant manufacturer. The Extended Warranty shall include the 

specific wording identified below. The cost of these extended warranties shall be considered incidental 

to the cost of the concrete pavement. The extended warranty shall be submitted to the Owner prior to 

the Owner submitting payment of the final (project closeout) pay request to the Contractor. Failure to 

obtain and furnish the extended full warranty will result in the Owner withholding final payment until such 

warranties are submitted to the Owner. 

1. The pavement joint sealants shall continuously provide a watertight, resilient, and durable (no 

cracking, blistering, bubbling, or loss of bond to pavement joint walls) seal capable of 

maintaining these properties under repeated traffic and various weather conditions. The 

following list of criteria shall constitute the definition of joint sealant material and installation 

defects and/or failures over the life of any warranty period. 

2. Failure/Defect: 

a. Failure to prevent water from infiltrating pavement joint. 

b. Failure to prevent the intrusion of incompressibles into the joint. 

c. Failure to maintain bond, or in the case of compressible sealants, suitable contact, with 

sidewalls of the pavement. 

d. Material that cracks, splits, bubbles, or blisters. 

e. Material that fails to remain resilient and capable of rejecting incompressibles at all 

pavement temperatures. 

f. Material that is picked up by, or spread on adjacent horizontal pavement surfaces by, 

tires, rubber tired vehicular traffic, or the action of a power vacuum rotary brush pavement 

cleaning equipment, after the specified cure period. 

g. Material that remains or otherwise becomes tacky and allows the adherence of dust, dirt, 

small stones, or other similar contaminants. 

3. All pavement joint sealants exhibiting one or more of these characteristics shall be deemed 

unsatisfactory and therefore shall not be in conformance with any warranty performance 

requirements. Any pavement panel joint exhibiting any one or more of the failure/defect 

characteristics listed shall be replaced under warranty when the aggregate quantity of those 

defects occur over 8% or more of the panel joint length. The Owner will inspect the joints at 

least annually to record conditions. Should the aggregate length of defective joint reach 8% of 

its panel length warranty repairs/replacement will be required within 45 days or as soon 

thereafter as weather conditions permit. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary 

emergency repairs to prevent water intrusion and/or further significant deterioration without 

invalidating the warranty. Pavement joints exhibiting these characteristics shall be removed and 

replaced in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. 

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 



4.1 GENERAL 







SECTION 02821 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. There are two types of fences and gates to consider on site: 

1. AOA compliant: Per FAA Advisory Circular requirements for height, strength, and potential barbed 

wire. Refer to the following AC sections: 

a. F-162 

2. Non-AOA compliant: Any fence not approved by the FAA and the TSA. 

B. For fences shown on the plans to be AOA compliant, FAA AC F-162 shall govern over conflicts with 

information in this specification section. 

C. This Section includes the following: 

1. Chain-Link Fences: Industrial. 

2. Gates: Swing. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of 

components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage, attachment, bracing, and 

other required installation and operational clearances. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, 


B. UL Standard: Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325. 

C. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for 

automatic gate operators serving as a required means of access. 


2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC 

A. General: Height indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements 

indicated below: 

CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821 - 1


1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic-coated wire with a diameter of 

a. Mesh Size: 2 inches. 

b. Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II. 

2. Selvage: Twisted top and knuckled bottom. 

2.2 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING 

0.192. 

A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the 

following: 

1. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40. 

2. Fence Height: As shown on Drawings. 

3. Strength Requirement: Heavy industrial according to ASTM F 1043. 

4. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post: According to ASTM F 1184. 

5. Coating for Steel Framing: 

a. Metallic coating. 

2.3 TENSION WIRE 

A. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at top and bottom of fence fabric. 

B. Location: Extended along top of barbed wire arms and top of fence fabric for supporting barbed wire. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter, 

marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 and 

ASTM A 824. 

1. Metallic Coating: Type III, Zn-5-Al-MM alloy. 

2.4 INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES 

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single or double swing gate types. 

1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM F 1043 for 

materials and protective coatings. 

B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and 

weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following: 

1. Gate Fabric Height: 2 inches less than adjacent fence height. 

2. Leaf Width: As indicated. 

3. Frame Members: 

a. Tubular Steel: 1.90 inches round. 

C. Frame Corner Construction: 

1. Welded with corner fittings and 5/16-inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or 

wider]. 



D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above top of 

chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches or as required to attach barbed wire assemblies. 

E. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and keepers 

for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Insert hardware items and accessories. Fabricate latches with 

integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate. 

2.5 FITTINGS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626. 

B. Finish: 

1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. 

2. Aluminum: Mill finish. 

2.6 BARBED WIRE 

A. Zinc-Coated Steel Barbed Wire: Comply with ASTM A 121; 2-point round barbs spaced not more than 4 

inches o.c. 

2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

A. Materials: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, 

and potable water. 

1. Concrete Mixes: Normal-weight concrete with not less than 3000-psi compressive strength (28 

days), 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum size aggregate. 



A. General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. 

B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, 

undisturbed soil. 

C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 

1. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for 

consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. 

D. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at 

changes in horizontal or vertical alignment. 

E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c. 

CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821 - 3 

zinc.


F. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567. Install braces at end and gate 

posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 

G. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. 

H. Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts. 

I. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch between finish grade and 

surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. 

J. Tie Wires: Attach wire per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and 

clothing. 

K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric 

side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 

L. Barbed Wire: Uniformly spaced , angled toward security side of fence. Pull wire taut and install securely to 

extension arms and secure to end post or terminal arms. 

3.2 GATE INSTALLATION 

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening 

without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed 

means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and 

lubricate where necessary. 








SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 




Division 1 Sections of these specifications, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, 

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 

B. Curing and sealing compounds for interior and exterior concrete surfaces. 

C. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 



1. Submit manufacturer’s product data, including surface preparation and application instructions for 

curing and sealing compounds. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 

C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement. Material test reports. 

D. Curing and Sealing Compound Manufacturer’s Qualifications. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that 

complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 

B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete”, Sections 1 through 5. 

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1



A. Delivery, store and handle concrete curing and sealing compounds per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, 

with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. 

2. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep 

containers sealed until ready for use. 

3. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Do not apply curing and sealing compound when concrete surface or air temperatures are below 40 

degrees F (4 degrees C). 

B. Do not apply curing and sealing compound when material temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees 

C). 


2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth 

concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide 

lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 


A. Reinforcing Bars: Per ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) , deformed. 

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Per ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into 

flat sheets. 

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, 

plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, 

throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: Per ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 



B. Coarse Aggregate 

1. Requirements of ASTM C33 shall apply except where more rigid requirements are included herein. 

2. Aggregate shall be normal weight clean, crushed stone. 

3. Aggregate size is as follows: 

a. 1-1/2” top size: For footings and slabs on grade 

b. ¾” top size: For composite metal deck floor slabs 

4. Combined aggregate grading shall be well graded from top size to No. 100 sieve as follows: 

a. For course aggregate, gradations shall be 8-18% retained on each sieve below the top size 

and above the No. 100 sieve size. 

b. Ideal range for No. 30 and No. 50 sieve is 8-15% retained on each. 

c. For top size, 0-4% shall be retained. 

5. For all concrete exposed to view, the following additional requirements shall apply: 

C. Fine Aggregate 

a. Limitation of deleterious substances: 

1) Soft particles shall not exceed 2.5%. 

2) Saturated-surface-dry materials floating on liquid with specific gravity of 2.0 shall not 

exceed 0.5%. 

b. Acceptability of aggregates shall be proven by laboratory tests conducted by an approved 

testing laboratory on samples taken in accordance with ASTM D75. 

1. Requirements of ASTM C33 shall apply except where more rigid requirements are included herein. 

2. Natural sand shall be clean, uncoated grains. 

3. Gradation shall be within requirements of ASTM C33, Paragraph 5 – a sieve analysis of the 

aggregate shall accompany the mix design when it is submitted to Engineer for approval. 

4. For all concrete exposed to view, the following additional requirement shall apply: 

a. Deleterious substances in saturated-surface-dry material, coarser than #50 sieve, which will 

float on a liquid having a specific gravity of 2.0 shall be limited to .25%. 

D. Verify aggregate by laboratory test conducted and certified by a laboratory acceptable to the Engineer on 

samples taken in accordance with ASTM D75. 

E. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4a. 

F. Water: Per ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 

G. Air-Entraining Admixture: Per ASTM C 260. 

nominal maximum aggregate size. 



H. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other 

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened 

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: Per ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: Per ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Per ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: Per ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Per ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: Per ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: Per ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or 

pressure-sensitive tape. 

2.5 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh 

concrete. 

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: PNA’s Hydracure, Reef’s Transguard 4000 or McTech Group’s UltraCure. 

C. Water: Potable. 

D. Clear, Solvent-Borne Curing and Sealing Compound. 

1. Exposed interior concrete slabs in sort areas, freight areas, warehousing areas as well as 

mechanical, electrical and equipment rooms: Acrylic curing, sealing, hardening, and dust proofing 

membrane complying with ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class C. 

a. Product: Super Rez-Seal as manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company unless 


1) VOC Content: 681 g/L. 

2) USDA approved. 

3) Ultraviolet resistant. 

4) Blush resistant. 

2. Exposed interior concrete slabs in Vehicle Maintenance areas and Electrical Infrastructure 

Buildings: A solution of 100% active ingredient chemicals which penetrate concrete to seal, 

densify, dustproof and harden to resist water and oil penetration, and contamination. 

a. Product: SEAL HARD as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. unless 


1) Type: Alkali Siliconate 

2) Flash Point: None 

3) Specific Gravity: 1.155 



4) VOC: 0 gm/L. 

5) Solids minimum: 30% 

E. Clear, Waterborne Curing and Sealing Compound: 

1. Exposed interior concrete slabs in Restrooms, Locker rooms, Janitor’s Closets and Kennels: 

Solvent free, two component, moisture insensitive, ultra low viscosity epoxy penetrating sealer 

complying with ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 

a. Product: Dural ® 335 as manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: Ceramar by W.R. Meadows or Ethafoam by Dow Chemical. 

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory 

trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

B. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 

2. Slump Limit: [ 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) . 

3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 

C. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 

2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft. as determined by ASTM C 567. 

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch 

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum 

aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch 

5. Air Content: 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum 

aggregate size 3/8 inch or less. 

6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M [and 

ASTM C 1116], and furnish batch ticket information. 



1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery 

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C) , reduce 

mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 


3.1 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, 

and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. 

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and 

position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is 

attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, 

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and 


1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

3.5 JOINTS 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing 

concrete. 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations 

indicated or as approved by Architect. 




A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is 

complete and that required inspections have been performed. 

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete 

will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section 

cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid 

segregation. 

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. 

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and 

defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formedsurface 

irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly 

and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins 

and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and 

rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not 

apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent 

to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 

Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless 


3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing 

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Steel Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or 

power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and 



uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through 

applied coatings or floor coverings. 

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, 

ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating 

system. 

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, 

freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on 

the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 

Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy 

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing 

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull 

floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 

1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing 

concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 

mm) , and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less 

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material 

and waterproof tape. 

2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous 

operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas 

subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later 

and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace 

concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. 

*** END OF SECTION 03300*** 



SECTION 04816 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concrete masonry units. 

2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 

3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 

4. Mortar and grout. 

5. Steel reinforcing bars. 

6. Masonry joint reinforcement. 

7. Ties and anchors. 

8. Embedded flashing. 

9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 

10. Masonry-cell insulation. 


1. 

2. Section 07190 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to concrete unit masonry 

assemblies. 

3. Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing 

manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 


A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). 

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 


A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive 

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04816 - 1


1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified 

requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for 

compressive strength. 

2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for 


3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for 


4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 

5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314. 



B. LEED Submittals: 

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with 

requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material 

manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement 

indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. 

C. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with 

ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: 

1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 

2. Pre-faced CMUs. 

3. Colored mortar. 

4. Weep holes/vents. 

E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 

1. Exposed CMUs. 

2. Pre-faced CMUs. 

3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 

4. Accessories embedded in masonry. 




A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, 

manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other 

information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source 

of aggregates. 

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval 

of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the 

attention of Architect and approved in writing. 

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 

1. Masonry units. 

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 

b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing 

average net-area compressive strength of units. 

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

5. Reinforcing bars. 

6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of 

ingredients. 

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according 

to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and 

ASTM C 91 for air content. 

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with 

compressive strength requirement. 

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar 

type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and 

resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment 

to be used to comply with requirements. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. 

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a 

uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single 

manufacturer for each product required. 



C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for 

exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or 

producer for each aggregate. 

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the 

Contract Documents. 


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, 

cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install 

until they are dry. 

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use 

cementitious materials that have become damp. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination 

avoided. 

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. 

Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry 

location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. 

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof 

sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in 

progress. 

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches 

down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days 

after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or 

painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on 

ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral 

finishes, from mortar droppings. 

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing 

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. 

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 

Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing 



conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and 

higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing 

cleaning. 

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain 

chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such 

defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance 

ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or 

by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from 

aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, 

within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of 

adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and 

other special conditions. 

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce 

flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to 

ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent 

manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water 

or leaks on the back of test specimen. 

D. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 

2150 psi . 

2. Density Classification: Medium weight. 

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 



4. Exposed Faces: Provide natural gray color Precision-faced units unless otherwise indicated.. 

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS 

A. General: Provide one of the following: 

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with 

reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and 

installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted, harvested, or 

recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. 

Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other 

ingredients. 

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 

F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. Retain first paragraph below for colored cement or for pigments added at 

Project site. 

G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar 

mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in 

masonry mortar. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated 

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. 

b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. 

c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. 

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed 

stone. 

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 

sieve. 

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required 

mortar color. 

I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 



J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with 

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of 

composition indicated. 

K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, 

containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 

L. Water: Potable. 

2.5 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 . 

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS 

A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 

hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class C; of dimensions indicated. 

B. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed 

when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as 

determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing 

agency. 

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 

or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M) , Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) 

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) . 

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS 

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" in 

accordance with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 

12 feet (3.7 m) . Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 

3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch 

(76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 

a. 

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-Way Flashing 

(Sawtooth). 

2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. 

3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing. 



4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive 

counterflashing. 

5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending 

flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 

6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending 

metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to 

form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 

7. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of 

same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall with hemmed 

inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of 

metal so that completed seam will shed water. 

8. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 

1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 

9. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 

out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) 

and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 

10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyesterreinforced 

ethylene interpolymer alloy. 

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1) DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing. 

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Flex-Flash. 

3) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System. 

4) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Total Flash. 

b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

c. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a 

0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of adhesive. 

d. Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 

mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. 

Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt coating is held back 

approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from edge. 

1) Color: Gray. 

e. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming 

materials produced by flashing manufacturer. 

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 

3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing 

with a drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge. 

4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing. 



D. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web 

covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent UV 

degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into mortar bed 

joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into the cell to prevent 

clogging with mortar. 



a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Blok-Flash. 

E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7, Section "Sheet Metal Flashing 

and Trim." 

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by 

stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 

2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 

3. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and 

use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 

F. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or 

products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to 

substrates. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 

35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC. 

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with 

ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral 

stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 

asphalt felt). 

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells 

and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip 

galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 

1. 

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated 


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. 

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. 

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. 

d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. 



2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, waterrepellent 

agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, 

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure 

quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to 

Project site. 

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, ProportionProperty Specification. Provide the 

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients 

to produce color required. 

1. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: 

a. Pre-faced CMUs. 

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply 

with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day 

compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and 

other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to 

performance of work. 

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations 

of piping connections. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. 

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, 

complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. 

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit 

adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow 

units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where 

possible, cut edges concealed. 

3.3 TOLERANCES 

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or 

minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch 

(12 mm) . 

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 

inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. 

B. Lines and Levels: 

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 

feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level 

by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 

mm) maximum. 

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 

m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and 

control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 


5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 

inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 


C. Joints: 

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), 

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm) . 

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 

inch (3 mm) . 

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) 

or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch 

(3 mm). 



3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and 

for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-halfsize 

units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; 

do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course 

below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before 

laying fresh masonry. 

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly 

with masonry around built-in items. 

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay CMUs as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings 

where cells are not grouted. 

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness 


C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) 


3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not 

allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition 

movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill 

resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 

3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head 

joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete 

for application of sealant. 



3.7 LINTELS 

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size 

units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting 

lintels. 

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 

3.8 FLASHING 

A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of 

water in wall, and where indicated. 

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture 

flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar 

and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, 

sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads 

and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to 

form end dams. 

3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 

mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant 

complying with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 

4. Install metal [drip edges] [and] [sealant stops] with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking 

hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with 

requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 

5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 

inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 

6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible 

flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal 

flashing termination. 

7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. 

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells 

and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that 

they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. 

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into 

masonry. 

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced 

masonry elements during construction. 



1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. 

Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms 

to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to 

carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to 

resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, 

including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm) . 


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and 

prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and 

inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's 

expense. 

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, 

and locations of reinforcement. 

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. 

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. 

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. 

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive 

strength. 

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to 

ASTM C 780. 

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for 

mortar air content and compressive strength. 

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 

I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 



3.11 PARGING 

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness 

of 3/4 inch (19 mm) . Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to 

subsequent coat. 

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 

inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm) . Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. 

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that 

do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to 

eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with 

mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform 

appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and 

smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or 

chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison 

purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of 

masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with 

liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing 

surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of 

stain on exposed surfaces. 

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. 

At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated 

sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. 

Fill material is specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." 

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 



C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described 

above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 




SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Structural steel. 

2. Grout. 


1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and 

administrative requirements. 

2. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for 

architecturally exposed structural steel. 

3. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 

4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not 

defined as structural steel. 

5. Section 055300 "Metal Gratings." 

6. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation 

and priming requirements. 

7. Section 13125 "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel. 


A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard 

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 

1. Retain first paragraph below if retaining procedures for welder certification in "Quality Assurance" 

Article. 

C. Welding certificates. 

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1


D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that 

shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 

E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 

F. Product Test Reports: For the following: 

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 

2. Direct-tension indicators. 

3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 

4. Shear stud connectors. 

5. Shop primers. 

6. Nonshrink grout. 

G. Source quality-control reports. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program 

and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and 

is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. 

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P2 or SSPC- 

QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." 

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall 

pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and 

FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. 

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 

1. AISC 303. 

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 

3. AISC 360. 

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground 

and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and 

packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 



1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to 

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes 

repackaging and seals containers. 

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 

fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 


A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and 

coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with 

one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without 

delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for 

installation. 


2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS 

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. 

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 . 

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. 

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 , Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; 

ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 , Type 1, hardened carbon-steel 

washers; all with plain finish. 

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: 

ASTM F 959, Type 325, 

compressible-washer type with plain finish. 

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head 

assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and 

hardened carbon-steel washers. 



1. Finish: Plain. 

C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon 

steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. 

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight. 

2.3 PRIMER 

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 

3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 


A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions 

from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

B. Primer: Comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting. 

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. 

2.4 GROUT 

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, 

noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute 

working time. 


A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to 

AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 

3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until 

structural steel has been erected. 

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 

5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming 

operations. 

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. 

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. 



E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to [SSPC-SP 3, 

"Power Tool Cleaning." 

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use 

automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and 


G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing 

to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in 

completed wall framing. 

H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass 

through steel framing members. 

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge 

holes by burning. 

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel 

surfaces. 

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural 

Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure 

specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without 

exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 

2.7 SHOP PRIMING 

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a 

depth of 2 inches . 

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 

3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 

5. Galvanized surfaces. 

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or 

flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 



C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written 

instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use 

priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests 

and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or 

produced to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract 

Documents. 

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and 

inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's 

option: 

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks 

or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 

E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to 

requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 

1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree 

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 

2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors 

already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 



A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of 

anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 




A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel 

secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to 

design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are 

in place unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place 

concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 

3.3 ERECTION 

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and 

AISC 360. 

B. Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and 

roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not 

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with 

grout. 

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish 

exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel 

Buildings and Bridges." 

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently 

fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact 

with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and 

alignment. 

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature 

when structure is completed and in service. 

E. Splice members only where indicated. 

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. 

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged 

to admit bolts. 

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use 

automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and 




3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints 

Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure 

specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, 

and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 


exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill 

material. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field 

welds and high-strength bolted connections. 

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification 

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. 

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements 

in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or 

welding repairs to any shear connector. 

2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already 

tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract 

Documents. 



3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to 

comply with ASTM A 780. 

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing 

and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up 

shop-painted surfaces. 

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" 

Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 




SECTION 05121 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel framing. 

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS framing. 


1. Division 5, Section "Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements applicable to AESS. 

2. Division 5, Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structuralsteel 

frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 

3. Division 5, Section "Metal Stairs." 

4. Division 9, Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements. 


A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural 

steel" or "AESS" in the Contract Documents. 

B. Category 1 AESS: AESS that is within 96 inches (2400 mm) vertically and 36 inches (900 mm) 

horizontally of a walking surface and is visible to a person standing on that walking surface. 

C. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 20 feet (6 m) vertically and horizontally of a walking surface and is 

visible to a person standing on that walking surface. 

D. Category 3 AESS: AESS that does not meet the definition of Category 1 or Category 2. 


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel may be used 

for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements below are met for AESS. 

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 

2. Include embedment drawings. 

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show 

size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental 

fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.[ Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds. 

ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05121 - 1


4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify 

pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Indicate orientation of bolt heads. 

5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used. 

6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements. 

B. Qualification Data: For qualified [Installer] [fabricator]. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and 

is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. 

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program 

and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. 



A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to 

permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using 

pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from 

corrosion and deterioration. 

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to 

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 


A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions 

by field measurements before fabrication. 



coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with 

one another. 


2.1 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 

A. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round-head 

assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and 

hardened carbon-steel washers. 




B. Corrosion-Resisting (Weathering Steel), Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: 

ASTM F 1852, Type 3, round-head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, 

heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 

2.2 PRIMER 

A. Primer: Comply with Division 9, Section "Interior Painting" and shall be from the same manufacturer as 

finish paint or certified by the manufacturer of the finish paint as compatible with their paint products used. 

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer. 

C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with 

MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. 

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. 

F. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26. 


A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at concealed 

locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection. 

B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following: 

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, 

rust, scale, and roughness. 

2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of Category 1 AESS to remove burrs and provide 

smooth surfaces and edges. 

3. Fabricate Category 1 AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names 

and stamped or raised identification. 

4. Fabricate Category 1 and Category 2 AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum 

extent possible. 

5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and 

shop priming. 

6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits 

full removal after erection. 

7. Fabricate Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated 

AESS. 

8. Fabricate Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is 

not designated AESS. 

9. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) closure plates for 

Category 1 AESS. 

C. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in fabrication 

shop. 



1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible from a 

distance of 20 feet (6 m) under any lighting conditions. 

2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm) . 

D. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) with a tolerance of 1/32 

inch (0.8 mm) for Category 1 AESS. 

E. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal 

surfaces. 

F. Cleaning Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain 

unpainted according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass 

through steel framing members. 

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge 

holes by burning. 

2. Base plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel 

surfaces. 

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 

2.4 SHOP CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural 

Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, 

welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply 

with the following: 


exceeding specified tolerances. 

2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to allowable 

tolerances. 

3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where 

Category 1 AESS is exposed to weather. 

4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where Category 1 AESS is welded. 

5. Grind butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus 0 

inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus 0 mm) for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS. 

6. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus 0 

inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus 0 mm) for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS. Do not grind unless 

required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable 

work. 

7. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and 




8. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of Category 1 and Category 2 

AESS occurs, grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent 

material. 

9. Make fillet welds for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS oversize and grind to uniform profile with 

smooth face and transition. 

10. Make fillet welds for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS of uniform size and profile with exposed 

face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work. 

2.5 GALVANIZING 

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 

2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as 

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 

3. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 


A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a 

depth of 2 inches (50 mm) . 

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 

3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 

B. Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill 

scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and 

standards: 

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

2. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 

3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil, 

flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. 

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written 

instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 

mm) . Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change 

color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 





A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of 

anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments 

showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. 

B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting. 



A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb, 

and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. 

Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place 


1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they will 

be concealed from view in the completed Work. 

2. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place 

concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 

3.3 ERECTION 

A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. 

1. Erect Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS. 

2. Erect Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not 

designated AESS. 

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections 

within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints 

Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 

2. Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent possible in same 

direction for similar connections. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections" 

Article. 



1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and 


2. Remove erection bolts in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS, fill holes, and grind smooth. 

3. Fill weld access holes in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS and grind smooth. 


A. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect. 


A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are 

exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to 


C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with 

SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9, Section "Interior Painting." 




SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. K-series steel joists. 

2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 

3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 

4. LH- and DLH-series long-span steel joists. 

5. CJ-series composite steel joists. 

6. Joist girders. 

7. Joist accessories. 


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 

3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors. 


A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for 

Steel Joists and Joist Girders." 

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, 

unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. 


1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating 

percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement 

indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For primers, documentation indicating that products 

comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' 

STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1


C. Shop Drawings: 

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using 

Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 

2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and 

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 

3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 


A. Qualification Data: For [manufacturer] [professional engineer]. 

B. Welding certificates. 

C. Manufacturer certificates. 

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. 

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional 

engineer responsible for its preparation. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with 

applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications[."][" and "Standard 

Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel 

Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of Standard Practice."] 

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing 

special joists to comply with performance requirements. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications[."][" and "Standard 

Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel 

Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of Standard Practice."] 

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 

1.8 SEQUENCING 

A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into [cast-in-place concrete] [and] [masonry] construction. 





A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads 

indicated. 

1. Use [ASD; data are given at service-load level] [LRFD; data are given at factored-load level]. 

2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the 

following: 

a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of [1/360] [1/240] of the span. 

b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of [1/360] [1/240] of the span. 

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content not less than [25] [50] [60] percent. 

2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS 

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel 

Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung 

ends, and parallel top chord. 

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. 

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K- 

Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. 

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. 

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where 

indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." 

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, 

complying with SJI's "Specifications." 

F. Do not camber joists. 

G. Camber joists [according to SJI's "Specifications."] [as indicated] . 

H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope 

exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) . 

2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS 

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and 

Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord 

members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements [as follows:] [as indicated.] 



1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists. 

2. End Arrangement: Square. 

3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel, and Pitched 1/4 inch per 12 inches 

two ways. 

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. 

C. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications.". 

D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope 

exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) . 

2.4 PRIMERS 

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 



B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance 

requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 

C. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 

"Interior Painting." 

2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES 

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, 

and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish 

additional erection bridging if required for stability. 

B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications". Furnish 

additional erection bridging if required for stability. 

C. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection 

bridging if required for stability. 

D. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and 

thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint. 

E. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications." 

F. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough 

strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface 


G. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6) , 

carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel 

washers. 

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. 



H. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel 

structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 

(ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 

1. Finish: Plain . 

I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 

J. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to 

complete joist assembly. 

2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING 

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and 

accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry 

paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick. 

D. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and 




A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance 

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 



A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. 

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction 

according to SJI's "Specifications[,"][" and "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" 

in "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of 

Standard Practice,"] joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 

2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 

3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are 

stabilized during construction. 

4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are 

applied. 



C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and 

procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, 

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts. 

E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research 

Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 

Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. 

F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor 

ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field 

welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection 

reports. 

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following 

procedures, as applicable: 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. 

c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. 

d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. 

C. Visually inspect bolted connections. 

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with 

specified requirements. 

E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to 

ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust 

spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and 

accessories. 

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning 

according to SSPC-SP 3. 

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces. 



C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and 


D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer 

which ensures that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial 

Completion. 




SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Composite floor deck. 


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill 

over steel deck. 

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 

3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. 


1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck 

openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 


A. Welding certificates. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. 

C. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1


B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding 

Code - Sheet Steel." 


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering 

and ventilate to avoid condensation. 



A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's 

"North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 

2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company. 

2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 

3. CMC Joist & Deck. 

4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group. 

5. Cordeck. 

6. DACS, Inc. 

7. Epic Metals Corporation. 

8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 

9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 

10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group. 

11. Roof Deck, Inc. 

12. Verco Manufacturing Co. 

13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking 

side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI 

Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 , G90 (Z275) zinc 

coating. 

2. Profile Depth: 3 inches. 

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch. 

4. Span Condition: Triple span or more, where possible. 



2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements 

indicated. 

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbonsteel 

fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. 

C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. 

D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material and finish as deck; of profile 

indicated or required for application. 

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, of same material and finish as deck. 

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and 

thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factory-punched hole 

of 3/8-inch minimum diameter. 

H. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick. For drains, cut holes in the field. 

I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, with 3-inch- wide flanges and level 

recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field. 

J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 

percent zinc dust by weight. 



A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance. 



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI 

Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. 

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. 



D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and 

bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap 

interlocks. 

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels. 

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. 

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or 

adjacent to deck. 

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of 

deck, and support of other work. 

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and 

quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and 

install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION 

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter 

indicated and as follows: 

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal. 

2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between 

supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches , and as follows: 

1. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds. 

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 3”, with end joints as 

follows: 

1. End Joints: Lapped. 

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure 

according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according 

to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. 

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 



D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected 

work with specified requirements. 


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with 

galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 

2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 

3. Ceiling joist framing. 


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within 

limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater 

than the following: 

a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under 

a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa) . 


b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 

c. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and l/360 for total loads of 

the span. 

A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; 

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis 

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

C. Welding certificates. 

D. Qualification data. 

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1


E. Product test reports. 

F. Research/evaluation reports. 


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet 

complies with requirements. 

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet 

Steel." 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that 

of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of 

Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General 

Provisions." 

E. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two 

Family Dwellings." 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating 

weight as follows: 

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 

2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90) . 

2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING 

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with 

stiffened flanges. 

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with 

straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. 

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING 

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with 




B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with 

unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. 

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and 

downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 

D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested 

inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 

2.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING 

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with 


B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, 

unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES 

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, 

metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; 

and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class C. 

D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without 

failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a 

qualified independent testing agency. 

E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from 

corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design 

load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill 

screws. 

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. 

B. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. 



C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 



A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of 

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting 

concrete or masonry construction. 

B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation 

wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 


A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General 

Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections 

securely fastened. 

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to 

those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire 

integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. 

E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame 

both sides of joints. 

F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, 

such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of 

framing work. 

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched 

openings. 

H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum 

allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. 

Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing 

materials. 



3.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION 

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely 

anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 

1. Anchor Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm) . 

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the 

end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 

Space studs as follows: 

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped 

surfaces and similar configurations. 

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be 

aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to 

transfer loads. 

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as 

indicated. 

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. 

Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, 

complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop 

Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs 

with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. 

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, 

equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written 

recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from 

item supported. 

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches (1220 mm) . Fasten at each stud intersection. 

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs 

with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches 

(150 mm) deep. 

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and studtrack 

solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and 

secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 



J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top 

and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to 

structure. 

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip 

angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION 

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting 

structure as indicated. 

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped 

surfaces and similar requirements. 

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while 

providing lateral support. 

1. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 

2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure. 

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 

inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, 

continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wallframing 

system. 

3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION 

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting 

structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. 

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and 

reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) . 

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip 

angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. 

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: 

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated. 



D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another 

combination of connected joists if indicated. 

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over 

interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. 

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as 

follows: 

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. 

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, 

continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joistframing 

assembly. 


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests 

and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. 

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 



A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed coldformed 

metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, 

which ensures that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial 

Completion. 




SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 

2. Metal ladders. 

3. Miscellaneous steel trim. 

4. Metal bollards. 

5. Metal tubular handrails. 

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 

1. Loose steel lintels. 

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be 

cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 

professional engineer, licensed in the State of California, using performance requirements and design 

criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and 

stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. 



1. Paint products. 

2. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show 

anchorage and accessory items. 

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements 

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer 



2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) . 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) 

nominal thickness. 

F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M. 

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , Alloy 6063-T6. 

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. 

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 

D. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). 

E. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded 

semired brass). 

F. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 



2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zincplated 

fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M) , 

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. 

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 

3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 

4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. 

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; 

galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. 

Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 


or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M) , Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) 

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with 

MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 

3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head 

bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as 

needed for fastening to inserts. 


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section “Painting”. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible 

with paints specified to be used over it. 

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and 

exterior applications. 

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, airentrained, 

concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) . 

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that 

maintain structural value of joined pieces. 



B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or 

rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance 

of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds 

where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 

Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel 

strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the 

Work. 

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. 

Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 

2.8 FABRICATION, METAL LADDERS 

A. General 

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Applications / Scope: 

1. Elevator Pits: Provide Standard Duty Channel Rail Fixed Access Ladder, as indicated on the 

drawings. 

2. Low Parapet Access Ladder: Provide Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Roof-over 

Rail Extension as indicated on the drawings. 

3. Upper Roof Access Ladder: Provide Tubular Rail Ship’s Ladder with Platform and Return as 

indicated on the Drawings. 

C. Aluminum Ladders: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

a. ACL Industries, Inc. 

b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products. 

c. Halliday Products. 

d. O'Keeffe's Inc. 



e. Precision Ladders, LLC. 

f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc. 

g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. 

2. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) 

deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 

4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) ) deep and not less than 1/8 

inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 

5. Finishes: 

a. Mill finish. As extruded. 

b. Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Architectural Class I, 

clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker. 

6. Ship Ladders: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32mm) high, 4-1/8 inch (105 mm) deep and 2 feet (610 

mm) wide; tread spacing shall be 1 foot (305 mm) on center. Handrails shall be aluminum pipe, not 

less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with hemispheric end caps. 

7. Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3 feet 6 inches (1067 mm) above the 

landing and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails. 

8. Landing Platform: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater diameter, tubular aluminum guardrails and 

decks of serrated aluminum treads. 

9. Security Doors: Formed 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Security panels shall extend on 

both sides, perpendicular to the door face, to within 2 inches (51 mm) of the wall. Security door 

shall be furnished with continuous aluminum piano hinge and heavy duty forged steel locking 

hasps. 

10. Ship Ladder Seismic Bottom Support: Manufacturer’s standard; two isolation bearings per stringer. 

11. Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off. 

12. Rail and Harness Fall Arrest System: Supplied where specified as alternate to safety cage and 

landing platforms, in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.27; permanently mounted to ladder 

rungs and complete with necessary components. 

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with 

continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices 

where possible. 

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other 

work. 

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 

D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 

E. Paint in accordance with Division 9 Section “Interior Painting”. 



2.10 METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate where indicated. 

B. Where indicated on drawings, fabricate bollards with ½”-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting 

to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts. 

C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to 

bottom of sleeve. 

D. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 

E. Paint in accordance with comply with Division 9 Section “Interior Painting”. 

2.11 METAL TUBULAR HANDRAILS 

A. Fabricate handrails from 1 1/2" diameter steel tube to comply with requirements indicated for design, 

dimensions, spacing, details, finish, and anchorage as indicated on Drawings, but not less than that 

required to support structural loads as required by California Building Code. 

B. Assemble handrails in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. 

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for 

reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed 

surfaces. 

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 

F. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for 

this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 




3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows 

after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

H. Form changes in direction with flush bends. 

1. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross 

section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise 

deforming exposed surfaces of components. 



I. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

J. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns 

unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. 

K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and 

anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant 

fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent 

bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

L. Handrail Finishes: 

1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

2. Shop paint all handrails and brackets. 

3. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 

protective covering before shipping. 

4. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in 

the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable 

if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize 

contrast. 

5. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 

6. Color: Paint handrails and brackets color PNT-3 as defined in the Finish Key on Drawings. 

2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations 

for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron 

hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in 

concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial 

Blast Cleaning." 

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: 

Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 





A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal 

fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and 

surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be 

left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or 

abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or 

screwed field connections. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications 

are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or 

similar construction. 

3.2 INSTALLATION, METAL LADDERS 

A. Install metal ladders in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

3.3 INSTALLATION, METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing 

cap. 

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts, where indicated. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) 

bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water, where indicated. 

3.4 INSTALLATION, BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond 

to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 



B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been 

positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off 

flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 

3.5 INSTALLATION, METAL TUBULAR HANDRAILS 

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails. Set railings accurately in location, 

alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after 

fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further 

cutting or fitting. 

2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of 

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m) . 

C. Adjust handrails before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing 

handrails and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 

E. Anchor handrail ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and connected to railing 

ends using nonwelded connections. 

F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1- 

1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as 

indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 

1. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into steel backing between studs. 

Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 

2. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel 

reinforcements. 

3. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through 

concealed steel reinforcements. 

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. 

Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- 

PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to 





SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Preassembled steel stairs with precast concrete ] treads. 

2. Industrial-type stairs with steel grating treads. 

3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 

4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs and on guards attached to metal 

stairs. 


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m) . 

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm) . 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads 

specified above. 

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) , 

whichever is less. 

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1


a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 

sq. m) . 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. 


A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 

1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 

2. Precast concrete treads. 

3. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads. 

4. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes. 

5. Abrasive nosings. 

6. Metal floor plate treads. 

7. Paint products. 

8. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. 

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 

1. Precast concrete treads. 

2. Grating treads. 

3. Abrasive nosings. 

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements 



F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

G. Welding certificates. 

H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that 


I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, for stairs and railings. 

1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 




A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal 

Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated. 

1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 

2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 


D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 



coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible 

with one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions 

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral 

anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for 

installation. 

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required 

stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 



A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For 

components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, 

rolled trade names, or blemishes. 


A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content not less than 25 percent. 

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 



C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513. 



a. IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. 

b. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT. 

D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or 

ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. 

E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) . 

F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or 

structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170) , unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 

H. Expanded-Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated). 

1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13. 

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , Alloy 6063-T6. 

B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 

C. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). 

D. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded 

semired brass). 

E. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 

2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS 

A. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a 

combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit 

openings or conditions. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. ACL Industries, Inc. 

b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 

c. Amstep Products. 

d. Armstrong Products, Inc. 

e. Balco Inc. 



f. Granite State Casting Co. 

g. Wooster Products Inc. 

2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above aluminum 

extrusion. 

3. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs. 

4. Nosings: Two-piece units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with subchannel for casting into concrete. 

B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with 

manufacturer. 

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. 

D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 

2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 

(ASTM F 1941M) , Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. 

Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); 

with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) ; and, where indicated, flat washers. 

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) ; 

and, where indicated, flat washers. 

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop 

primed with zinc-rich primer. 

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M) . 

E. Lag Screws: 

ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M) . 

F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M) . 

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M) . 

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load 

equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when 

installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 




A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 



B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 



C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9, Section "Interior Painting." 

D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying 

with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. 

E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 



2.7 PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS 

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 

psi (35 MPa) and a total air content of not less than 4 percent or more than 6 percent. 

B. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by 0.062-inch- (1.6mm-) 

diameter wire; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire 

size. 


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,[ railings,] clips, brackets, 

bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting 

structure. 

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as 

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated 

installation. 



surfaces. 

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise 

impairing work. 

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 







4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish 

Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter. 

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where 

possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts 

unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where 

water may accumulate. 

2.9 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS 

A. Stair Framing: 

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. 

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 

2. Construct platforms of steel [plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as 

needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. 

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 

4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support 

landings from floor construction above or below, unless otherwise indicated. Locate hanger rods 

and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistancerated 

stair enclosure. 

B. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; 

fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch (32-by-5-mm) 

bearing bars at 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 

2. Surface: Serrated. 

3. Finish: Painted. 

4. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or steel plate 

carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. 

5. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toeplates at opensided 

edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing. 

2.10 STAIR RAILINGS 

A. Comply with applicable requirements in division 5, Section "Pipe and Tube Railings ." 

1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings. 

2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 



B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, 

details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not 

less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 

1. Rails and Posts: As indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Intermediate Rails Infill: As indicated on the Drawings. 

C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to 

provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at 

fittings. 

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good 

quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter. 

D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 

1. As detailed. 

E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each 

repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without 

buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 

F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns 


H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous 

fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and 

other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and 

sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. 

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to 

transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish 

thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of 

substrate. 

2.11 FINISHES 



B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. 

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum 

requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure 

conditions of installed products: 



1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes 

and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, 

"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 




A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 

securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry 

inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set 

units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free 

of rack. 

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless 


D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or 

similar construction. 

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be 

left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or 

abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or 

screwed field connections. 

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. 

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete." 

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. 

H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. 

3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond 

to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. 

B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and 

aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of 

bearing plate before packing with grout. 



1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 

3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS 

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at 

spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure 

posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 

2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and 

anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. 

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt 

anchorage. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished 

wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural 

loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag 

bolts. 

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 

3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel 

reinforcements. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- 

PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint are specified in Division 9, Section "Interior Painting." 

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to 





SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 


1. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 


B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design 

working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 

2. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile 

strength divided by 1.95. 

3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and 

stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 

sq. m) . 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1


D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes 

acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of 

components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces. 

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other 

materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 



1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 

2. Railing brackets. 

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 


C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and 

balusters. 

2. Fittings and brackets. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements 



E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

F. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished 


G. Welding certificates. 

H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that 


I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 


C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 




2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 

3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal 

fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 

1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 




B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for 

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, 

that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings 

temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 





1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: 


a. Pisor Industries, Inc. 

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, 

rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported 

rails unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 STEEL AND IRON 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content not less than 25 percent. 



B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). 

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another 

grade and weight are required by structural loads. 

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. 

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide the following: 

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 

(ASTM F 1941M) , Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners 

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. 

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class 

required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction 

indicated[ and capable of withstanding design loads]. 

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other 

work, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other 

work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings 

indicated. 

3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, 

without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times 

the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, 

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 


2. Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 

(ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) . 


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 



B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 



C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. 

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible 


E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9, Section “Painting." 

F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying 

with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 


G. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 

H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Water based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134. 

I. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 9, Section “Painting." 

J. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat. 

K. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

L. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 



M. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement 

formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting 

compound. 

1. Water-Resistant Product: where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from 

water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is 

recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 


A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes 

and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. 

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. 

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for 

reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 



surfaces. 



D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes 

where water may accumulate. 

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for 

this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 




3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows 

after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

5. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is 

manufacturer's standard splicing method. 

I. Form changes in direction as follows: 

1. As detailed. 

J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section 

of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed 

surfaces of components. 

K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns 


M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and 

anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant 

fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent 

bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. 

Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage 

devices with supporting structure. 

O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside 

dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate 

forming bottom closure. 



P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close 

fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of 

post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at 

locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. 

Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided 

floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL 



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if 

they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are 

not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range 

of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 


A. Galvanized Railings: 

1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 

2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 

3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 

4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 

5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as 

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous 

components. 

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, 

dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. 

D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and 

sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. 

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE 

No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. 

Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and 



Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be 

embedded in concrete or masonry. 

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9, Section “Painting" unless zincrich 

primer is are indicated. 

2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. 



A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that 

locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and 

mark locations if not already done. 


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, 

alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after 

fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further 

cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m) . 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of 

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m) . 

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, 

masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing 

railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS 

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply 

with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop 

or in the field. 

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to 

accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond 

joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of 

post. 



3.4 ANCHORING POSTS 

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted 

into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and 

placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Form holes not less than 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean 

holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, 

nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. 

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, 

connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 

1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 

2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces. 

3. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 

E. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS 

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. 

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. 


A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with 

SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 


C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint are specified in Division 9, Section "Painting. 

D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to 



A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings 

approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. 






SECTION 05530 – METAL GRATINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Metal bar gratings. 

2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. 


1. Division 5, Sections "Structural Steel" and “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” for structuralsteel 

framing system components. 

2. Division 5, Section "Metal Stairs" for grating treads and landings of steel-framed stairs. 

3. Division 5, Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings. 



1. Metal bar gratings. 

2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished 


D. Welding certificates. 

E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that 



A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual" and 

NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual." 

METAL GRATINGS 05530 - 1


B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 





A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by 

field measurements before fabrication. 





B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, 

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and 

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 




B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or 

ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. 

C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) . 

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) 

coating. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zincplated 

fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M) , 

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property 

Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 



C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where 

indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, 

Alloy Group 1 (A1) . 


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that is welded. 

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9, Section "Interior Painting." 

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible 


D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 


surfaces. 

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support 

indicated loads. 

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 

D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS 

A. Welded Steel Grating: 

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c. 

2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1 inch (25 mm) . 

3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) . 

4. Crossbar Spacing: 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. 

5. Traffic Surface: Plain. 

6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 g/sq. m) 

of coated surface. 

B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each 

section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by 

manufacturer for attaching to supports. 

1. Provide no fewer than four weld lugs for each grating section composed of rectangular bearing 

bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced less than 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c., with 

each lug shop welded to three or more bearing bars. Interrupt intermediate bearing bars as 

necessary for fasteners securing grating to supports. 



C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal 

without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and 

material as bearing bars. 

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 

2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS 

A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded 

construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld 

connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 

2.7 STEEL FINISHES 



B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. 

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron 

hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 

D. Shop prime gratings, frames and supports not indicated to be galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 9, Section "Interior Painting". 

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial 

Blast Cleaning." 

F. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: 

Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 



A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 

securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, 

through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set 

units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free 

of rack. 



C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of 

shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been 

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

D. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. 

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 





3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS 

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that 

apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring 

details. 

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not 

indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. 

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, 

fasten by bolting as indicated above. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- 

PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 


B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint are specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting." 

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to 





SECTION 05811 - EXPANSION CONTROL 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Floor expansion joint covers. 

2. Exterior wall expansion control systems. 

3. Roof expansion joint covers. 


A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, 

splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams and a tabular schedule of 

expansion control systems. 

B. Samples: For each exposed expansion control system and for each color and texture specified. 

1.4 RELATED WORK 

A. Related work which is specified elsewhere. 

1. Division 3, Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete. 

2. Division 5, Sections “Structural Steel” and “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.” 

3. Division 5, Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing.” 

4. Division 9, Section “Gypsum Board.” 


2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. 

Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered 

corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials. 

EXPANSION CONTROL 05811 - 1


2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, crossconnections, 

and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall expansion control systems with roof expansion 

control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are 

specified elsewhere. 


A. Seismic Performance: Expansion control systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when 

subjected to the seismic forces specified]." 

2. Component Importance Factor is 1.0. 

2.3 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or a 

comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries. 

2. Balco, Inc. 

3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 

4. JointMaster/InPro Corporation. 

5. Michael Rizza Company, LLC. 

6. MM Systems Corporation. 

7. Nystrom, Inc. 

8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Floor-to-Floor : 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco, Inc; EX Surface Mounted Series or HDEW Extra Wide Series. 

2. Design Criteria: 

a. Nominal Joint Width: 4-inches and 8-inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

b. Movement Capability: 100 percent. 

c. Type of Movement: As indicated on Drawings. 

d. Load Capacity: 

3. Type: Cover plate. 

1) Uniform Load: 150 lb/sq. ft. (732 kg/sq. m) . 

2) Concentrated Load: 2,000 lb (907 kg) . 

3) Maximum Deflection: 0.5 inch (13 mm) . 

a. Cover-Plate Design: Serrated or Abrasive filled. 



1) Cover-Plate Recess Depth: As required to accommodate adjacent flooring and 

performance criteria specified. 

b. Metal: Aluminum. 

1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 


2.4 EXTERIOR WALL AND ROOF EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or a 


1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries. 

2. Balco, Inc. 

3. Chase Construction Products; Division of Chase Corporation. 

4. Construction Specialties, Inc. 

5. D. S. Brown Company (The). 

6. EMSEAL Corporation. 

7. Erie Metal Specialties, Inc. 

8. JointMaster/InPro Corporation. 

9. LymTal International, Inc. 

10. Michael Rizza Company, LLC. 

11. MM Systems Corporation. 


13. RJ Watson, Inc. 

14. Schul International Company, Inc. 

15. Tremco Incorporated. 

16. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business. 

17. Williams Products, Inc. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Wall-to-Wall: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco, Inc.; Exterior Wall Joint Covers – Flexible Inserts (FC Series). 


a. Nominal Joint Width: 4-inches and 8-inches, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 



3. Type: Flat seal. 

a. Metal: Aluminum. 

b. Seal Material: Santoprene. 




D. Roof-to-Wall: 

c. Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard pantographic wind-load support 

mechanism with stainless-steel fasteners. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco, Inc.; Aluminum Wall and Roof Covers (9W Series). 


a. Nominal Joint Width: 4-inches and 8-inches, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 



3. Type: Cover plate. 


a. Metal: Aluminum. 

1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 

A. Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous, waterproof 

membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary cover. Equip moisture 

barrier with drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture to exterior-wall expansion control system. 

2.6 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) , 

Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 

1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact 

with cementitious materials. 

B. Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in 

metal frames. 

C. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed elastomeric extrusions having an internal baffle system 

and designed to function under compression. 

D. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression. 

E. Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a prepackaged aggregate blend, 

specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates. 

F. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination to meet performance criteria for required fireresistance 

rating. 

G. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material. 

H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 



I. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, and other accessories as indicated or 

required for complete installations. 

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Mill finish. 

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s standard colors and color 

densities. 



A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control 

systems. 

C. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control 

systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems. 

1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured 

from established lines and levels. 

2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient 

temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect 

proper expansion control system installation and performance. 

3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of 

frames. 

4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkageresistant 

grout. 

5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 

a. Shimming is not permitted. 

6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) from 

each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's 

written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 



1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 

2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld fieldspliced 

joints as recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressuresensitive 

tape as recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 

E. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices. 

F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion control system materials and 

associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 

1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout 

length of joint, including transitions and field splices. 

G. Moisture Barrier: Provide at all exterior joints and where indicated on Drawings. Provide drainage fittings 

where indicated on Drawings. 


A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. 

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. 




SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 

2. Plywood backing panels. 


A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal 

(114 mm actual) in least dimension. 

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 

2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 

3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and 

dimensions and include construction and application details. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of 

preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by 

treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of 

treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after 

exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency 

according to ASTM D 5664. 

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated 

materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant 

treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically 

performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the 

material tested. 


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber 

from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around 

stacks and under coverings. 


2.1 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not 

in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, 

and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or 

chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that 

do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is 

warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 

C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in 

connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 

2. Wood blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or 

concrete walls. 

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl spaces 

or unexcavated areas. 

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements 

in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response 

characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a 

qualified testing agency. 



B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 

25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive 

combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending 

more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardanttreated 

lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering 

according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested 

according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not 

indicated. 

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and 

design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. 

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not 

bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 

F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Concealed blocking. 

2. Plywood backing panels. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any 

species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its 

attachment and purpose. 

C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate 

knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, 

not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of 

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various 

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 



2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this 

article for material and manufacture. 

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in 

area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 

E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: [ASTM C 1002] [ASTM C 954], length as recommended by screw 

manufacturer for material being fastened. 

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M) . 

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with 

ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to 

sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry 

assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per 

ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy 

Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4) . 



A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry 

to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate blocking, and similar supports to 

comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing 

panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency 

exposed to view. 

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty 

items, and trim. 

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing 

or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 

inches (406 mm) o.c. 



D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as 

follows: 

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches 

(2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close 

furred spaces. 

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line 

of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in 

framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members 

and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness. 

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit 

concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 

feet (6 m) o.c. 

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening 

other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or 

pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. 

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the 

following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 

3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate 

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 

H. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate 

members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight 

connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not 

countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, 

inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution 

by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough 

carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to 

comply with EPA-registered label. 




SECTION 06170 – STRUCTURAL THERMAL BLOCKING 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. Thermal blocking for installation under structural steel columns in 0°C freezer and +2°C to 

8°C cooler. 


A. Submit, prior to fabrication, detailed dimensioned shop drawings. 

B. Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300. 

1.3 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 

A. Materials shall be stored in a dry enclosed space prior to installation. 


A. 13010 – General Provision – Low Temperature Insulation 

B. 13100 – Walk-In Cooler and Freezer – Low Temperature Insulation 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Thermal Blocking - Blocks shall be constructed of high-density rigid cellular polyurethane with a 

minimum density of 35 lbs. per cu. ft. and a minimum compressive strength of 1500 psi at 2% 

deflection with an “R” value of 1.73/inch thickness of block. Blocks shall be R-9335 polyurethane 

as manufactured by General Plastics Manufacturing Company, Tacoma, WA or STYROFOAM 

Brand LT-1500 Column-Bearing Blocks as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company. 


A. Thermal blocking shall be fabricated of polyurethane in accordance with necessary sizes. 

Blocks shall be smooth to insure uniform bearing contact with steel level and base plates. 

B. Anchor bolt holes shall be shop drilled. 

STRUCTURAL THERMAL BLOCKING 06170-1




A. Prior to setting thermal blocking, seal anchor bolt to level plate with heavy bead of butyl 

caulk. Thermal blocking shall be installed under column base plates in accordance with 

the drawings. Level plates shall be clean of dirt particles. Blocks shall not bear on surface 

projections greater than 1/8” high. Properly protect blocks from damage during 

construction. Broken blocks shall not be used. 


STRUCTURAL THERMAL BLOCKING 06170-2


SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 

3. Shop finishing of woodwork. 


A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, 

attachment devices, and other components. 

C. Samples: 

1. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. 

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality 

Standards." 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates for woodwork, including 

installation. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is 

complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy 

levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea 

formaldehyde. 

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 

5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing 

no urea formaldehyde. 

B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, 

melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by 

woodwork quality standard. 

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance 

requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A. 

Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 

Kiln-dry material after treatment. 

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed 

together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 

25 or less per ASTM E 84. 

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, 

synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flamespread 

index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, 

except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." 

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, 

and as follows: 

1. Semi-concealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. 



D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 

E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. 

F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. 

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated 

steel ball-bearing slides. 

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches 

(600 mm) wide. 

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches 

(600 mm) wide. 

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for 

BHMA finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Bronze: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; as selected by Architect from 

manufacturer’s full range. 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 

percent moisture content. 


A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where 

necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. 

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and 

burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame 

2. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm) . 

3. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows: 

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. 

b. Post-formed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 

c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 

d. Edges: Grade VGS. 



4. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative 

laminate, Grade VGS. 

5. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 

6. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 

7. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on Drawings. 

8. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments 

and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 

C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on Drawings. 

3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces 

4. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue or exterior-grade plywood. 



A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 

Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of 

packing and back-priming. 

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication 

of type of woodwork involved. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 

mm) . Shim as required with concealed shims. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing 

nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching 

final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. 

Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 

mm) o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into 

underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 

Section "Joint Sealants." 




SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concealed building insulation. 

2. Exposed building insulation. 

3. Sound attenuation insulation. 

4. See Division 07 “Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing” for board insulation requirements. 




A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance characteristic specified for 

each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with 

the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 

for surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product 

selection: 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Manufacturers: 

BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1


1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 

5. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); 

consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, 

respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 

C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), 

Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a 

vapor barrier), faced with polypropylene-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. 

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or 

roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 

1. 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.9 K 

x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) . 

2. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F 

(3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) . 

3. 9-1/2 inches (241 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F 

(5.2 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) . 

2.3 AIR BARRIERS 

A. For Vapor-retarding and Vapor-permeable air-barriers, see Division 7, Section “Air Barriers”. 



A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. 

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to 

ice, rain, and snow. 

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around 

obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of 

piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's 

standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness 

indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 



3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical 

anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure 

in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover 

miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 

B. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, 

metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders 

with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints 

with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 

C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as 

recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with 

vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with 

vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 




SECTION 07273 - AIR-BARRIERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes vapor-retarding and vapor-permeable air-barriers. 

1. Vapor-retarding air-barriers at interior finishes at exterior walls. 

2. Vapor-retarding air-barriers at interior finishes at roof level. 

3. Vapor-permeable air-barriers at exterior skin of exterior walls and roof insulation. 



B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies. 

1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing, penetrations, inside and outside 

corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 

C. Product certificates. 

D. Product test reports. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by 

manufacturer. 

B. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled 

with manufacturer’s name, product, date of manufacture and directions for storage. Store materials in their 

original undamaged packages in a clean, dry protected location off of the ground and protected from 

exposure to direct sunlight. Re-package any unused material at the end of each day for future use as per 

manufacturer specifications. 

C. Single Source: Obtain air barrier materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing 

the product. 

AIR-BARRIERS 07273 - 1




A. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and 

complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 




A. General: Air barrier at exterior side of exterior walls shall be capable of performing as a continuous vaporpermeable 

air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental 

condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate 

movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, 

penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding 

specified limits. 

B. General: Air barrier at interior side of exterior walls and underside of roof shall be capable of performing 

as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier flashed to discharge incidental condensation or water 

penetration. Air-Barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of 

sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and 

transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. 

C. Air-Barrier shall conform to the requirements of the FedEx Facility Criteria Documents Manual, dated May 

2010 Element C30, PART 1 PERFORMANCE. 

1. Administrative Offices: 

a. Interior Wall Finishes at Exterior Walls: Maximum vapor-permeance of 1 perm when tested 

in accordance with ASTM E 95. 

b. Ceiling Finishes at Roof Level: Maximum vapor-permeance of 1 perm when tested in 

accordance with ASTM E 95. 

2.3 VAPOR-RETARDING, AIR-BARRIERS 

A. Provide Vapor-Retarding Air-Barriers as indicated on Drawings, Vapor-Retarding, Air-Barrier: Reinforced- 

Polyethylene membrane. 

1. Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either 

nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum 

permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. Products: 

a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. 

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. 

c. Sto Corp.; VaporSeal in two-component assembly. 



3. Physical and Performance Properties: 

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure 

difference; ASTM E 2178. 

b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm; 

ASTM E 96/E 96M. 

c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 140 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. 

2.4 VAPOR-PERMEABLE, AIR-BARRIERS 

A. Provide Vapor-Permeable Air-Barriers as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Vapor-Permeable, Air-Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane. 



a. Prosoco, Inc.; R-Guard MVP in two-component, System II assembly. 

b. Protective Coatings Technology, Inc.; Poly-Wall Airloc Flex VP. 

c. Sto Corp.; Emerald Coator Gold Coat in two-component assembly. 

2. Physical and Performance Properties: 

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. (0.02 L/s x 

sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. 

b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 5.7 perms; 

ASTM E 96/E 96M. 

c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. 

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier 

assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material. 

B. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade. 

C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for 

sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 


3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other 

construction. 

B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and 

other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane. 

C. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. 



D. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to 

form a smooth transition from one plane to another. 


A. General: Install air-barrier coating and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written 

instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to 

ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 

2. Install air-barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches 

(75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered 

by air-barrier coating material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 

1. Retain subparagraph below if using glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing. 

2. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve 

required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete 

below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtainwall 

systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in 

exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. 

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination mastic. 

E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and 

doors. Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each 

substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch 

of full contact. 

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous 

penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant. 

G. Seal air-barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. 

H. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal 

counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. 

I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten 

fishmouths and blisters. Extend patches 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 

J. Air-Barrier Coating Material: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier coating to substrates according to the 

following thickness. Apply an increased thickness of air-barrier coating in full contact around protrusions 

such as masonry ties. 

1. Vapor-Retarding, Air-Barrier Coating: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by 

manufacturer to meet performance requirements, applied in one or more equal coats. 

2. Vapor-Permeable, Air-Barrier Coating: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by 

manufacturer to meet performance requirements, applied in one or more equal coats. 



3. Apply additional coats as needed to achieve void- and pinhole-free surface. 

K. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. 

L. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and 

reapply air-barrier components. 



B. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 

1. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage 

according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. 

2. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage according to 

ASTM E 783. 

3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier adhesion of 30 

lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof. 

C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where 

inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above. 

D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according 

to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by 

manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air 

barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the 

overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier 

manufacturer. 

F. Remove masking materials after installation. 




SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. Provide metal wall panel types indicated in 

locations indicated. 


A. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of California, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to 

ASTM E 1592: 

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: 

a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. , acting inward or outward. 

2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal 

deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, 

joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; 

and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work. 


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional 


METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 1


E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and wallmounted 

items. 

F. Product test reports. 

G. Maintenance data. 

H. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 

components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 METAL WALL PANEL DESIGNATION 

A. Provide metal wall panels as indicated on the drawings using the following panel type designations: 

1. Metal Wall Panel A: See Division 7, Section “Insulated-Core Metal Wall Panels”. 

2. Metal Wall Panel B: See Division 7, Section “Insulated-Core Metal Wall Panels”. 

3. Metal Wall Panel C: Specified herein. 

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS 

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and 

prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; 

structural quality. OR 



2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, 

Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275) ; structural quality. 

3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 

4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 

5. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. 

B. Panel Sealants: 

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant 

tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 

2.3 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION 

A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and 

other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads 

matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, 

PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 

2.5 CONCEALED-FASTENER, METAL WALL PANELS 

A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting 

side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed 

fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight 

installation. 

B. Metal Wall Panel C: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metal panels model 

number U-12 as manufactured by Morin, A Kingspan Group Company, 10707 Commerce Way, 

Fontana, CA 92337, (877) 368-3266 or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. AEP-Span. 

b. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). 

c. Berridge Manufacturing Company. 

d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. 

e. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. 

2. Panels: 24 gage, 50,000 psi aluminum zinc-alloy coated steel sheet. 




a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A792, Class AZ50 coating designation, 

Grade 40, 

structural quality. 

b. Profile: Corrugated. 

c. Surface: Manufacturer’s standard Smooth finish. 

d. Fluropolymer Coating Finish: Fluropon Classic II, a Mica Fluoropolymer paint multi-coat 

system. 

e. Color: Silversmith, SM #439RZ1541M as manufactured by Kingspan. 

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly 

including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, 

closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material 

recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closedcell 

laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, 

flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to 

match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure 

weathertight construction. 

2.7 FLASHING AND TRIM 

A. Provide factory-finished flashing and trim as metal panels as indicated in Division 7, Section “Sheet Metal 

Flashing and Trim” and by same manufacturer as metal panels. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, 

by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance 

requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional 

and structural requirements. 

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with 

joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. 

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. 

D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a 

tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel 

assembly. 

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's 

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics 

of item indicated. 





A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel 

support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 

3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at 

location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Lap sheets per manufacturer’s requirements. Apply panels and associated items for neat and 

weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal 

wall panels. 

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools 

to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer 

tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding 

equipment, vents, and accessories. 

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on 

side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; 

and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. 

7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and 

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. 

3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide 

for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, 

corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where 

possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will 

be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, 

unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall 



panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in 

a clean condition during construction. 

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and 

sealant. 




SECTION 07413 – INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. All steel faced, factory foamed polyisocyanurate insulated panels for walls as indicated on 

Drawings. 

2. Accessories as necessary to install the panels as specified. 

3. Sealants as required between metal panel components and between panels and adjoining 

construction except panel abutments to windows, doors and specialty items. 

4. All metal flashing and trim required for installation of pre-formed composite panels where noted on 

drawings. 

B. Metal wall panels 


A. Shop Drawings 

1. Furnish drawings showing panel layout, finishes, corners, custom geometry’s, locations of 

openings etc. Provide detailed drawings of joints, anchorage system, sealants, edge conditions, 

closures and other details as may be required for a weather tight installation. Distinguish between 

factory and field assembled work. No panels shall be fabricated until shop drawings have been 

approved by the architect. 

B. Panel Analysis: Provide panel calculations to indicate compliance with maximum deflection of L/180 for 

the indicated wall design loads. The design load / deflection criteria and fastening pattern shall be verified 

from witnessed / audited tests using the “Chamber Method” in accordance with ASTM E72. Include 

effects of thermal differential between the exterior and interior panel facings. 

C. Panel Sample 

1. Submit full width panel sections of 12 inches long showing joints, insulation, profiles and finishes 

for architect’s approval. 

D. Quality Assurance Submittals 

INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 07413 - 1


1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with 

requirements. 

2. Manufacturer Erection Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions 

including proper material storage, material handling, installation sequence, panel location(s), and 

attachment methods, details and required trim and accessories. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the 

production of fire resistive insulated metal wall panels. Manufacturer shall demonstrate past experience 

with examples of projects of similar type and exposure. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be authorized by the manufacturer and the work shall be supervised 

by a person having successfully completed a manufacturer training seminar regarding proper installation 

of the specified product. 

1.5 PANEL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 

A. Use only polyurethane or polyisocyanurate panels produced by the continuous in-line method for optimum 

uniformity and quality. Laminated or styrene core panels will not be accepted. Provide metal wall panels 

that conform to the following standards: 

1. Structural: The design load / deflection criteria and fastening patterns in accordance with ASTM 

E72. 

a. The deflection criteria shall be L/180 for walls. 

2. Air Infiltration: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.001cfm/sq. ft. of wall area at a pressure differential 

of 20psf in accordance with ASTM E283. 

3. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration through the panel joints at a pressure 

differential of 20psf in accordance with ASTM E331. 

4. Methods of Test for Exterior Walls in accordance with AAMA 501-94 

5. Thermal Resistance: 

a. Panels shall provide nominal thermal resistance of R=7.5 per inch of thickness in 

accordance with ASTM C518. 

b. Panels shall provide nominal thermal resistance of R=7.2 per inch of thickness in 

accordance with ASTM C1363. 

6. Fatigue: The panel shall withstand at least 2 million alternate cycles of L/180 deflection without 

any evidence of delamination, foam core cracking or permanent deformation. 

a. Positive wind pressure and negative wind pressure (suction) are continually bending 

interior and exterior composite panels. 

7. Freeze / Heat Cycling: Panels shall exhibit no delamination, surface blisters, permanent bowing or 

deformation when subjected to cyclic temperature extremes of -20°F (-29°C) to +180°F (+82°C) 

temperatures for twenty one (21), eight-hour cycles. 

8. Adhesion: Panel adhesion in accordance with ASTM D1623. 



9. Humidity: Panels shall exhibit no delamination or metal interface corrosion when subjected to 

+140°F (+60°C) temperature and 100% relative humidity for a total of 1200 hours (50 days). 

10. Autoclave: Panels shall exhibit no delamination or shrinkage/melting of the foam core from the 

metal skins after being subjected in an autoclave to a pressure of 2psig (13.8kPa) at a 

temperature of +218°F (+103°C) for a period of 2 1/2 hours. 

11. Acoustics: Panels meet sound transmission STC-25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E90. 

12. Panel Fire Resistance Properties: Panels shall be Factory Mutual (FM) listed products as tested in 

accordance with FM Approval Standard 4411 – Insulated Wall Constructions. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Limited Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace items that fail in 

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. The items covered by the warranty include 

structural performance including bond integrity, deflection and buckling. 

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion, or 2 years and 3 months 

from the date of shipment from manufacturer’s plant, whichever occurs first. 

B. Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that 

evidence deterioration of fluoropolymer finish, including flaking or peeling from approved primed metal 

substrate, chalk in excess of 8 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214, Method A, and /or color 

fading in excess of 5 ∆E Hunter units on panels when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. 

1. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion, or 20 years and 3 

months from the date of shipment from manufacturer’s plant, whichever occurs first. 


A. Deliver panel materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging 

with identification labels intact. 

B. Store wall panel materials on dry, level, firm, and clean surface. Stack no more than two bundles high. 

Elevate one end of bundle to allow moisture run-off, cover and ventilate to allow air to circulate and 

moisture to escape. 

C. Mineral fiber core shall be protected from moist air, rain and UV during construction. Stored panels must 

be wrapped in plastic or tarpaulins. Protect exposed mineral fiber from rain or water with plastic sheet 

during installation. 


2.1 METAL WALL PANEL DESIGNATION 

A. Provide metal wall panels as indicated on the drawings using the following panel type designations: 

1. Metal Wall Panel A: Specified herein. 

2. Metal Wall Panel B: Specified herein. 



3. Metal Wall Panel C: See Division 7, Section “Metal Wall Panels”. 

2.2 MANUFACTURER 

A. Basis-of–Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulated-core metal wall 

panels by Kingspan Insulated Panels Ltd. 

2.3 WALL PANELS 

A. Provide factory fabricated panels nominally 2 inches thick as indicated on the drawings and herein. 

Panels shall consist of roll formed steel face and liner sheets chemically fused to a foamed in place rigid 

polyisocyanurate expanded foam core. Panels shall be single piece construction full height or may be 

stacked in multiple courses for most temperature applications (vertical and horizontal). 

B. The steel facing sheets at the longitudinal edges of the panel shall have roll formed male and female 

interlocking geometry fully supported by the foamed in place insulation core. The insulation core shall be 

molded in a tongue and groove profiles shape to allow positive insulation to insulation contact in panels. 

C. Metal Wall Panels A and B: 

1. “MINI MICRO-RIB” style panel, Model No. KS42 as manufactured by Kingspan Insulated Panels, 

Ltd, with hidden joint fastener, designed for exterior wall applications. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

a. Standard Modular Coverage: 42 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Panel Thickness: 2”, unless otherwise indicated. 

c. Exterior Panel Profile: “MINI MICRO-RIB” 24 gauge, smooth. 

d. Interior Panel Profile: “SHADOWLINE” 26gauge, smooth. 

e. Vertical Reveals: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 

f. Application: Vertical. 

A. Facing and liner sheets shall be steel with Smooth texture. Steel shall be: 

1. Tension leveled and conforming to ASTM A653 grade 33 (A) structural quality hot dipped 

galvanized coating to ASTM A924 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coating 

Galvanized with G-90 designation, or 

2. Tension leveled conforming to ASTM A792/A792M-06a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 

% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process AZ50 / AZM150 GALVALUME® (55% 

aluminum, 45% zinc). 

3. Exterior profile: “MINI MICRO-RIB” profile shall have a roll-formed design of 1/16 inch deep 

accordion flute striated profile repeating on 5/16 inch centers across the panel width and running 

the longitudinal direction of the panel. The panel faces shall be embossed. 

4. Interior profile: “SHADOWLINE” profile shall have a low profile repeating on 3 inch centers and 

running the longitudinal direction of the panel. Low profiles shall be not more than 1/16 inch deep x 

3/4 inch wide. The exposed panel face shall be embossed. 



B. Fasteners and Clips: Applied from the exterior and concealed in the panel side joint, connecting both 

metal faces to the supporting steel structure. Fasteners used shall be #14 x length determined by panel 

manufacturer for the application and identified in the shop drawings. Use Hex-head type “B” self-tapping 

or self-drilling fasteners with steel and neoprene washer. Use 12 gauge stainless steel clips supplied by 

panel manufacturer. 

1. Supplementary fastening, when required, shall be made with Tek fasteners into the interior panel 

face with reinforcing bars or with Fab-Lok fasteners spaced to meet code requirements and 

anticipated loads. 

C. Sealant shall be applied on the warm side of the female end at panel joint and shall be non-curing 

synthetic butyl sealant. 

D. Core material used in the panel shall be foamed in place multi-component isocyanurate polymeric resin 

insulation having the following typical physical properties. 

E. Foam Core Property Table: 

Property Results Test Method 

a. Closed cell 95% ASTM D2856 

b. Density 

2.2 – 2.8pcf 

(35.3 – 44.9kg/m3) 

ASTM D1622 

c. 

Compressive Stress (Parallel to Rise) 

Compressive Stress (Perpendicular to Rise) 

42psi (289.5kPa) 

24psi (165.4kPa) 

ASTM D1621 

d. Shear Stress 17.5psi (120.6kPa) ASTM C273 

e. Tensile Stress 40psi (275.7kPa) ASTM D1623 

f. 

Oven Aging at 200°F (93°C) for 1 day 

Oven Aging at 200°F (93°C) for 7 days 

+1% vol. change 

+3% vol. change 

ASTM D2126 

g. 

Low Temperature Aging at -20°F (-29°C) for 1 day 

Low Temperature Aging at -20°F (-29°C) for 7 days 

0% vol. change 

0% vol. change 

ASTM D2126 

2.5 FLASHING AND TRIM 

A. Provide factory-finished flashing and trim as indicated in Division 7, Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and 

Trim” and by same manufacturer as metal panels. 

2.6 FINISHES 

1. The exterior and interior faces of panels and flashings shall receive factory applied coatings. 

2. Interior Facing: Silicone Modified Polyester. 

a. A 1.0mil total coating made up of 0.2mil primer and 0.8mil top coat. 

b. Epoxy Primer: A 0.2mil primer only finish for concealed areas. 

B. Exterior Facing: Fluoropolymer 

1. Metal Wall Panel A: Standard Fluoropolymer paint system, a 1.0mil total coating made up of 0.2mil 

primer and 0.8mil 70% Kynar 500 color top coat. 



2. Metal Wall Panel B: Fluropon Classic II, a Mica Fluoropolymer paint multi-coat system. 

2.7 COLORS 

A. The exterior and interior faces of panels and flashings shall receive factory applied colors: 

1. Interior Facing: 

a. Sandstone SM, #433R396 as manufactured by Kingspan. 

2. Exterior Facing: 


3.1 INSPECTION 

a. Metal Wall Panel A: Regal White SM #431R444 as manufactured by Kingspan. 

b. Metal Wall Panel B: Silversmith SM #439RZ1541M as manufactured by Kingspan. 

A. Examine alignment of structural steel to ensure conformance to the tolerance requirements of CSA 

Standard S16.1 and/or AISC Code section 7.13 prior to panel installation and do not proceed until all 

observed defects are corrected by the contractor. 


A. Install composite panels, clips, fasteners, joint fillers, trims, flashings and related sealants in accordance 

with approved shop drawings. Comply with panel manufacturers’ general instructions and 

recommendations for installation and as applicable for project conditions to ensure low temperature 

and/or weatherproof performance of composite panel system. 

B. Consult panel manufacturer for location, type, and frequency of fasteners. 

C. Adjacent panels shall be mechanically interlocked at their vertical edges with the roll-formed tongue and 

groove profile. 

D. Flashing and trim shall be installed true and in proper alignment. Sealant, foam and membrane shall be 

installed where indicated without skips and voids to ensure weather tightness and integrity of the vapor 

barrier. 

3.3 HANDLING AND STORAGE 

A. The panels shall be handled and stored in accordance with good construction practice to prevent 

permanent distortion and mechanical damage. 



3.4 DAMAGED MATERIALS 

A. Repair or replace damaged materials to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or owner. The cost of 

repairing or replacing damaged material will be charged to the responsible party. 

3.5 CLEANING AND CARE 

A. After completing panel installation, strip interior protective film if so instructed by Architect and/or owner. 

Panel surface shall be free of deleterious material including dirt. 

B. Wipe finished surfaces of filings caused by drilling or cutting to prevent any discoloration or rust stains 

resulting from the installation process. 




SECTION 07540 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system in locations indicated as Single-ply Roofing in the 

Drawings. 

2. Vapor retarder. 

3. Roof insulation. 

4. Walkway pads or rolls. 


1. Division 5, Section “Expansion Control” for proprietary manufactured roof expansion-joint 

assemblies. 

2. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 

3. Division 7, Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 

4. Division 7, Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, 

and counterflashings. 

5. Division 7, Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 

6. Division 15, Section "Soil and Waste System" for roof drains. 


A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin. 

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing 

Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift 

pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective 

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base 

flashings shall remain watertight. 

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07540 - 1


B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of 

service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing 

and field experience. 

A. Roof System: The roof shall be designed and installed using FM Approved materials, accessories and 

components as identified in a select FM Approved Roof Assembly Number obtained from RoofNav 

(www.roofnav.com) and in accordance with the FM Approvals and FM Global Property Loss Prevention 

Data Sheets: 1-28, Wind Design, 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components, 1-49, 

Roof Perimeter Flashing, 1-52, Field Uplift Tests, and 1-54 Roof Loads for New Construction using FM 

Approved products. 

1. Obtain the FM Approved Roof Assembly Number from RoofNav (www.roofnav.com) and submit 

product data sheets, drawings, details, and Application for Acceptance of Roof System (FM Global 

Form 2688) to Architect-Engineer for FM Global review and acceptance before installation. 

2. Provide the roof materials (manufacturers, model and size for insulation boards, vapor barriers, 

adhesives, membranes and any other component of the system), roofing system specifications, 

fastening specifications (including the manufacturer’s name, model, and the proposed fastening 

density) and a completed Application for Acceptance of Roofing System FM Global Form 2688). 

3. Corner Uplift Pressure: 171 lbf/sq. ft. (8.2 kPa/sq. m) and in accordance with FM Global Loss 

Prevention Data Sheets 1-49, Roof Perimeter Flashing, for Class 1-90 roof system. 

4. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 113 lbf/sq. ft. (5.4 kPa/sq. m) and in accordance with FM Global Loss 

Prevention Data Sheets 1-49, Roof Perimeter Flashing, for Class 1-90 roof system. 

5. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure:


2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 

3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and fastening 

spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing. 

4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 

2. Roof insulation. 

3. Walkway pads or rolls. 

4. Metal termination bars. 

5. Battens. 

6. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 

7. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. 

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with 

requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and 

witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. 

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES. 

H. Field quality-control reports. 

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 

J. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for membrane 

roofing system identical to that used for this Project. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing 

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special 

warranty. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, [fasteners, air barriers, both vaporpermeable 

and vapor-retarding as applicable for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as 

membrane roofing. 

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as 

determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall 

be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 



E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies identical to those 

of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products 

with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

F. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project 

site. 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency 

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and 

installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and 

roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, 

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, 

and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 

G. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency 

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and 

installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and 

roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, 

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including 

flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, 

and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with 

manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency 

markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 



B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within 

the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct 

sunlight. 

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, 

soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written 

instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of 

deck. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions 

permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty 

requirements. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which 

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover 

boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system. 

2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, 

signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing 

system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate 

boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 



2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, 

uniform, flexible fabric backed TPO sheet. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TPO membrane 

roofing system “ReflexEON” manufactured by Firestone Building Products Company, or 


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 



b. Custom Seal Roofing. 

c. GAF Materials Corporation. 

d. GenFlex Roofing Systems. 

e. Johns Manville. 

f. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. 

g. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics. 

h. Versico Incorporated. 

2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm) , nominal. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for 

intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the 

following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA 

Method 24): 

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 

e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 

h. Non-membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 

i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the 

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard 

Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale 

Environmental Chambers." 

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 

mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based. 

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. 

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, 

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. 

F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, 

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched. 



G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer. 

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, 

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and 

other accessories. 

2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS 

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm) 

thick. 

1. 

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. 

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck. 

2.4 VAPOR RETARDER 

A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 

0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) . 

1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing 

joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vapor-retarder 

application. 

2.5 ROOF INSULATION 

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, 

selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that 

produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation. 

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer 

on both major surfaces. 

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches 

(1:48) unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for 

sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 



2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use 

and compatibility with membrane roofing. 

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, 

and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

C. Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended modified asphalt, 

asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another 

insulation layer. 

D. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, low-rise, one- 

or multi-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another 

insulation layer. 

E. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray-applied, low-rise, 

two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation 

layer. 

F. Cover Board: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, by same manufacturer as the roof membrane. 

G. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and 

resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for 

application. 

2.7 WALKWAYS 

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway rolls, 

approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following 

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof 

drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations 

and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in 

Section 053100 "Steel Decking." 

4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has 

passed. 

5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by 

plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 



6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck 

have been removed. 



A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation 

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating 

onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is 

forecast. 

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering 

completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and 

discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 

D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Section 053100 "Steel Decking," according to 

acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions, immediately before installation of overlying 

construction and to remain dry. 

3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD 

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end 

joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM 

Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm 

Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, 

and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' written instructions. 

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION 

A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive 

vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm) , 

respectively. 

1. Continuously seal side and end laps with adhesive. 

B. Laminate Sheet: Install laminate-sheet vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, 

side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm) , respectively. 

Bond vapor retarder to substrate as follows: 

1. Apply adhesive at rate recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. Seal laps with adhesive. 

2. Apply ribbons of hot roofing asphalt at spacing, temperature, and rate recommended by vaporretarder 

manufacturer. Seal laps with hot roofing asphalt. 



C. Built-up Vapor Retarder: Install two glass-fiber felt plies lapping each felt 19 inches (483 mm) over 

preceding felt. Embed each felt in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. Glaze-coat completed surface 

with hot roofing asphalt. Apply hot roofing asphalt within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous 

temperature. 

D. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement 

into membrane roofing system. 

3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation 

or left exposed at the end of the workday. 

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof 

insulation. 

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 

2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered 

from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install 

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install 

composite board insulation for top layer. 

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not 

restrict flow of water. 

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered 

between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with 

insulation. 

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and 

allow primer to dry. 

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 

25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 

3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and 

maintaining insulation in place. 

4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing 

and maintaining insulation in place. 

H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical 

fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm 

Resistance Classification. 



2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 

I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of 

insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified 

board-type roof insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified 

Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 

3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within 

plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 

4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly 

pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, 

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

J. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units over substrate. 

K. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered 

between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 

Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 

1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified 

Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 

L. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath membrane roofing. 

3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system 


B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical 

personnel. 

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions 

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by 

manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of 

membrane roofing. 

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and 

perimeter of roofing. 

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane 

roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam 

installation. 



1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of 

sheet membrane. 

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. 

H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place 

with clamping ring. 

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially 

dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. 

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end 

laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 

3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere 

walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's 

written instructions. 



B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing 

installation on completion. 

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that 

they do not comply with specified requirements. 

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or 

additional work with specified requirements. 

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When 

remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, 

describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 



B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; 

repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures 

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 

3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY 

A. WHEREAS of , herein called 

the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 

1. Owner: . 

2. Address: . 

3. Building Name/Type: OAK Sort Building Expansion. 

4. Address: 1 Sally Ride Way, Oakland, CA 94612. 

5. Area of Work: . 

6. Acceptance Date: . 

7. Warranty Period: . 

8. Expiration Date: . 

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a 

subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for 

designated Warranty Period, 

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, 

that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs 

to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are 

necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. 

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and 

to building contents, caused by: 

a. Lightning; 

b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph (m/sec) ; 

c. Fire; 

d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, 

deterioration, and decomposition; 

e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment 

supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; 

f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and 

g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, 

other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until 

such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been 

paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 



3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for 

consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of 

work. 

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, 

including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other 

work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said 

alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner 

engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void 

unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing 

reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby 

reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not 

originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use 

or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date 

of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or 

deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to 

examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not 

operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner 

in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer 

of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract 

Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract 

with Owner's General Contractor. 

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of , . 

1. Authorized Signature: . 

2. Name: . 

3. Title: . 




SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 

2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, 

expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 

1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, 

including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint 

covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 

D. Maintenance data. 

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" 

unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 

B. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to 

dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1


1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish 

or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes 

within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a 

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and 

prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural 

quality. 

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 

percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 

b. Color: Provide trim in standard factory-applied colors and finishes. Exposed to View Trim 

colors shall match adjacent metal panels except as indicated herein. 

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS 

1) Wall Base: “Silversmith” by Kingspan, unless otherwise indicated. 

2) Parapet Cap: “Silversmith” by Kingspan, unless otherwise indicated. 

3) “Continuous Head and Sill Trim at Window Ribbon: “Silversmith” by Kingspan, 

unless otherwise indicated.” 

4) Trim Adjacent to Two Metal Panel Colors: “Silversmith” by Kingspan, unless 


5) All Other Trim: Match adjacent metal panel. 

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. 

B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, 

sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation 



and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and 

other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary 

sheet metal or manufactured item. 

C. Solder: 

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. 

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factoryapplied 

coating. 

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being 

fastened. 

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal 

gutter width. 

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to 

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. 

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead 

or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. 

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with 

release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 

1/8 inch thick. 

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and 

use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene 

plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. 

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by 

aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. 

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

2.4 REGLETS 

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate 

reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded 

corners and junctions. 

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. 

2. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating. 




A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's 

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other 

characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true 

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed 

on faces exposed to view. 

B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of 

intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from 

compatible, noncorrosive metal. 

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and 

solder. 

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant 

unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary 

for strength. 

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with 

epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 


3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to 

shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches. 

B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle 

fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with 

temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for 

installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not 

less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. 

Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 




A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with 

provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not 

rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective 

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal 

flashing and trim system. 

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams 

with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify 

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs 

over fasteners. 

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks. 

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against 

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as 

recommended by SMACNA. 

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will 

contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install 

a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement 

joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where 

lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints 

of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by 

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. 

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets 

to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, 

except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show 

in completed Work. 

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 

2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill 

joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless 

steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. 

Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 

4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. 



G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 

3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to 

SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of 

wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to 

extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. 

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. 

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed 

unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 




SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Roof curbs. 

B. For Roof Access Ladders see Division 5, Section “Metal Ladders.” 


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. 

C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type of roof 

accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. 


A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication 

of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers 

listed in other Part 2 articles. 

2.2 METAL MATERIALS 

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting. 

ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1



2.4 ROOF CURBS 

A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live 

and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. 

Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal cant and integral formed 

mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings 

of equipment to be supported. 


a. Colony Custom Curbs. 

b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. 

c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. 

d. Curbs Plus Inc. 

e. Custom Curb, Inc. 

f. LM Curbs. 

g. Loren Cook Company. 

h. Metallic Products Corporation. 

i. Pate Company (The). 

j. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 

k. Roof Products, Inc. 

l. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. 

m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 

n. Uni-Curb, Inc. 

o. Vent Products Company, Inc. 

2. Load Requirements: As indicated on drawings. 

3. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 

4. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 

5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 

6. Factory insulate curbs with 1-1/2-inch-thick, 

glass-fiber board insulation. 

7. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing 

height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 

inches, 


8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or 

cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 



A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof 

accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, 

sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof 

accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. 



B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. 

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against 

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, 

ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on 

cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, 

or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory 

manufacturers for waterproof performance. 

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, 

excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. 

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. 




SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM). 





B. Product certificates. 

C. Evaluation reports. 



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing 

manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according 

to specified requirements. 



A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fireresistance 

design and manufacturer's written instructions. Provide materials as defined in the UL Design 

Number indicated on the Drawings. 

B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119, ASTM E 119 or UL 263 

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 1


1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. 

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the 

following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 

3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 

4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing 

and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the 

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental 

Chambers." 

E. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 

A. SFRM : Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated 

fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance 

and application . 



a. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; AD 

Southwest Fireproofing Type 5GP. 

b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK-6 Series. 

c. Isolatek International; Cafco Blaze-Shield II. 

d. Pyrok, Inc.; Pyrok-HD and Pyrok-MD. 

e. Schundler Company (The); Classic 5 LD. 

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities 


3. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field 

testing according to ASTM E 736. 

4. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) as specified in the approved fire-resistance 

design, according to ASTM E 605. 

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements 

of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm) . 

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 

7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 10 or less 

according to ASTM E 84. 

8. Compressive Strength: Minimum 300 lbf/sq. in. (2068 kPa) according to ASTM E 761. 

9. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 

10. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 

11. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760. 

12. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours according to 

ASTM E 859. 



13. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation to result 

in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10 according to ASTM D 3274 when tested 

according to ASTM D 3273. 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are 

approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for 

use in fire-resistance designs indicated. 

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer. 

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer 

D. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing 

manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance 

design. 


A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. 

B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition 

to receive fireproofing. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as 

specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, and other 

materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. 

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, 

and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions 

of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, 

complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer. 



D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and 

tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. 


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special 

inspections: 

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10. 

B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 

2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate 

insufficient thickness, and retest. 

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIRING 

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove 

material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove 

evidence of soiling. 

B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. 

C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's 

recommended trowel-applied product. 




SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENETRATION 

FIRESTOPPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of 

qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's 

illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications 

marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an 

engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance 

with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, for penetration firestopping. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, 

"Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified 

Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, 

and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of 

successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to 

install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its 

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07841 - 1


penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself 

confer qualification on buyer. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities 


2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration 

Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and 

inspecting agency. 

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the 

following: 


1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 

3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." 

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures 

are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because 

of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of 

ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is 

installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration 

firestopping. 

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; 

confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 





1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 



2. Grace Construction Products. 

3. Hilti, Inc. 

4. Johns Manville. 

5. Nelson Firestop Products. 

6. NUCO Inc. 

7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 

8. RectorSeal Corporation. 

9. Specified Technologies Inc. 

10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

12. USG Corporation. 

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to 

requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance 

rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, 

with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per 

ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls. 

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

C. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according 

to UL 1479. 

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 

less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

E. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits 

for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

F. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the 

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for 

the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental 

Chambers." 

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill 

materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration 

firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping 

indicated. 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 



a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent 

leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 


A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and 

consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to 

one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. 

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to 

moisture. 

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent 

material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded 

to galvanized-steel sheet. 

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic 

fibers, or silicone compounds. 

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one 

side. 

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and 

lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, 

homogeneous mortar. 

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a 

combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where 

exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily 

removed. 

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in 

place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade 

indicated below: 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, 

and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping 

limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 



2.4 MIXING 

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping 

manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of 

mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or 

procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for 

application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening 

configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply 

with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that 

could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of 

developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from 

cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's 

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and 

migration onto exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces 

that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or 

damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as 

possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 


A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and 

published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their 

application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve 

fire ratings indicated. 



1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials 

and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. 

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items 

as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating 

items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, 

uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 


A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to 

surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to 

remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with 

adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the 

following information on labels: 

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of 

Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, 

repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are 

issued and installations comply with requirements. 


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning 

materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage 

materials in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration 

firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such 

protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated 



penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified 

requirements. 

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE 

A. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's 

"Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops." 

B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items: 

1. FM Global-Approved Systems: Design No. 204. 

a. F-Rating: 1 hour. 

b. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 

c. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 

C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 





D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: 





E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables: 





F. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables: 





G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes: 







H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: 





I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 





J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants: 








SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 





B. Products and Installers of those products shall be subject to the following FM Global Approval Standards. 

1. FM 4990 – Approval Standard For Firestopping. 

2. FM 4991 – Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Silicone joint sealants. 

2. Urethane joint sealants. 

3. Latex joint sealants. 

4. Preformed joint sealants. 

5. Acoustical joint sealants. 

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint 

substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in 

Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. 

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 

3. Joint-sealant formulation. 

4. Joint-sealant color. 


E. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports. 

JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1


F. Field-adhesion test reports. 

G. Warranties. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 


1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 

joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within 



B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer 

agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other 

requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied 

joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, 

class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 


a. BASF Building Systems. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation. 

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. 

d. May National Associates, Inc. 

e. Pecora Corporation. 

f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. 

g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 

h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. 

i. Tremco Incorporated. 



2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 

3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 

4. Class: 25. 

5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T). 

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 



b. Bostik, Inc. 

c. Lymtal, International, Inc. 

d. May National Associates, Inc. 

e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. 

f. Pecora Corporation. 

g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. 

h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 

i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. 

j. Tremco Incorporated. 

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 

3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 

4. Class: 25. 

5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T). 

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 



b. Bostik, Inc. 

c. May National Associates, Inc. 

d. Pecora Corporation. 

e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 

f. Tremco Incorporated. 

2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam 

sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a 

nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint 

widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective 

wrapping. 




a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. 

b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. 

c. Sandell Manufacturing Co. 

d. Schul International, Inc. 

e. Willseal USA, LLC. 

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying 

with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and 

openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to 

ASTM E 90. 


a. Pecora Corporation. 

b. USG Corporation. 

2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size 

and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to 

joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and 

sealant backing materials. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent 

to joints. 



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with 

joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, 

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated 

by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with jointsealant 

manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow 

spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining 

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning 

methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing 

joint seal. 


A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as 

applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to 

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum 

sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace 

them with dry materials. 

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and 

backs of joints. 

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are 

installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum 

sealant movement capability. 

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, 

tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads 

of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with 

sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor 

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written 




G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and 

with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which 

joints occur. 


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: 

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint 

substrate. 

b. Perform 1 test for each 1,000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per 

elevation. 

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull 

Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or 

noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that 

fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed 

applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Exterior Joints: 

Typical Joint Type Sealant Type 

Expansion Joints S1, S3, S6 

General Joints in Vertical Surfaces S1, S4 

General Joints in Horizontal Surfaces S2 

Joints Exposed to Fuel Spillage S10 

Glazing S7 

Metal Roof and Wall Panels S1, S3, S7 

B. Interior Joints: 

Typical Joint Type Sealant Type 

General Joints in Vertical Surfaces C1 

Joints in Horizontal Surfaces S2, S5 

Joints Exposed to Fuel Spillage S10 

Acoustical Sealant C2 

Moist Area (e.g., Restroom and Kitchen) S9 

Control Joint Subjected to Wheel Traffic S11 

C. Reference Specifications: 

Ref. # ASTM Spec Fed. Spec. Product Description 

S-1 C-920-79 TT-S-227(e) - Two-component, non-sag, polyurethane or 




Type M 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-2 C-920-79 

Type M 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-3 C-920-79 

Type S 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-4 C-920-79 

Type S 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-5 C-920-79 

Type S 

Class 25 

Grade P 

Use 0 

S-6 C-920-79 

Type S 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-7 C-920-79 

Type S 

Class 25 

Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-8 

(Not Used) 

S-9 C-920-79 

Type M 

Class 25 

Class A 

Type II 

TT-S-227(e) 

Class A 

Type I 

TT-S-230(c) 

Class A 

Type II 

TT-S-230(c) 

Class A 

Type II 

TT-S-230(c) 

Class A 

Type I 

TT-S-1543(a) 

Class A 

TT-S-1543(a) 

Class A 

TT-S-1543(a) 

Class A 

polysulfide sealant 

- Shore A hardness of 20-40 

- Joint movement range of +40%-25% 

- Two-component, self-leveling, 

polyurethane or polysulfide sealant 


- Joint movement range of ±-25% 

- Low-modulus, one-component, non-sag, 




- Minimum elongation of 700% 

- One-component, non-sag, polyurethane or 

polysulfide sealant 



- One-component, self-leveling, 




- Low-modulus, one-component, non-sag, 

neutral cure, silicone sealant 


- Joint movement range of +100% to -50% 

- Joint size may be as little as two times joint 

movement 

- Minimum elongation of 1200% 

- One-component, neutral cure, non-sag, 

silicone sealant 



- One-component, non-sag, mildewresistant 

silicone sealant 





Grade NS 

Use 0 

S-10 C-920-79 

Type M/S 

Class 25 

Grade P/NS 

Use 0 

S-11 Sikadur 51 or 

equal 

SS-S-200(d) 

Type H 

- One- or two-component, coal-tarextended, 

fuel-resistant polyurethane 

sealant 


N/A - Two-component, self-leveling, solvent-free, 

moisture-insensitive fuel-resistant, flexible 

epoxy resin 

- Bond strength to concrete; 800 psi for 2day 

dry cure 


C-1. C-834-76 N/A - One-component acrylic latex caulking, 

minimum 75% recovery per ASTM C 736- 

82 

- Maximum joint movement of ±7.5% 

C-2. N/A TT-S-1657 - One-component, butyl rubber caulking 

- Maximum joint movement of ±5% 




SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 


a. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames: 

b. Interior hollow metal doors and frames: 

c. Interior hollow metal frames to receive wood doors: 

d. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: 


B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for 

hardware, and other details. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details 

and openings as those on Drawings. 


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral 

pressure as possible according to NFPA 252. 

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have 

a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 

minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 

B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. 

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 

2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 

3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 

6. Firedoor Corporation. 

7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 

9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 

10. Mesker Door Inc. 

11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 

12. Security Metal Products Corp. 

13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

14. Windsor Republic Doors. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 

metallic coating. 

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 

phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or 

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 

40Z 

coating designation; mill 

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, 

as measured according to 

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I. 

H. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film 

thickness per coat.


2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

1. Design: Flush panel. 

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, 

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. 

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings 

indicated. 

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when 

tested according to ASTM C 1363. 

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Square edge. 

4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels 

of same material as face sheets. 

5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 

for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 16 gauge. 

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is 

indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 

for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 18 gauge. 

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches. 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 



4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch 

thick. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less 

than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 

2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS 

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow 

metal work. 

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS 

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as door face sheet. 

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless 


C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as frames. 

2.8 LOUVERS 

A. Provide sight-proof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or 

baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame. 


A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. 

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel. 


A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. 



B. Hollow Metal Doors: 

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges 

of doors against water penetration. 

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at 

each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and 

invisible. 

2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated 

from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless 


4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per 

anchor. 

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. 

Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 

4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or 

fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 

5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metalstud 

partitions. 

b. Fire-rated Doors and Frames shall be anchored with the number, size and type of anchors 

per the door and frame manufacturer requirements and in accordance with the UL or FM 

Global assembly identified by the manufacturer. 

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. 

d. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. 

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. 

b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. 

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware 

according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section 

"Door Hardware." 

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door 

hardware. 

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series 

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 



4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 

electrical Sections. 

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of 

stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal 

work. 

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is 

capable of being removed independently. 

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and 

frames. 

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of 

installation indicated. 

2.11 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. 



A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors 

are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth 

and undamaged. 

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field 

splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make 

splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. 

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly 

set and secured. 

f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as 

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing 

antifreezing agents. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure 

with post-installed expansion anchors. 



a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled 

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 

4. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors 

through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and 

invisible on exposed faces. 

5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural 

supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural 

support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting 

construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and 

plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, 

measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from 

jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, 

measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to 

plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, 

measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel 

lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, 

measured at jambs at floor. 

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim 

as necessary. 

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: 

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. 

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal 


1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 

9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. 

Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including 

hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat 

and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 






SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces. 

2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; 

construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other 

pertinent data. 

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 


A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork 

Quality Standards." 

1. Section 1300, custom grade. 

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing 

agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible 

according to NFPA 252. 

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1





1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 

2. Ampco, Inc. 

3. Buell Door Company Inc. 

4. Chappell Door Co. 

5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 

6. Eggers Industries. 

7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

8. Haley Brothers, Inc. 

9. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 

10. Ipik Door Company. 

11. Lambton Doors. 

12. Marlite. 

13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 

14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 

15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 

16. Poncraft Door Company. 

17. Vancouver Door Company. 

18. VT Industries Inc. 

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL 

A. Particleboard-Core Doors: 

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 

2. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of 

particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. 

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection 

rating indicated. 

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. 

Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without 

formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with 

specified requirements for exposed edges. 

C. Mineral-Core Doors Used for Fire-Protection-Rating: 

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard 

and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in 

doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 



3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screwholding 

capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH 

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Grade: Custom. 

2. Faces: Hardboard or MDF. 

3. Core: Either glued or nonglued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 

4. Construction: Five plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES 

A. Metal Louvers: 

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish. 

2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-M12C22A31. 

3. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with black, Class II, color anodic finish, AA- 

M12C22A32/A34. 


A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced 

quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable 

requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 


A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section 

"Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer. 



2.7 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including 

fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted 

on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to 

receive opaque finish. 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the 

referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and 

rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. 

Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from 

bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where 

threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless 


a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 




SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 



1. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. 


1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. 

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. 

D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, 

latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 


2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 



1. Access Panel Solutions. 

2. Acudor Products, Inc. 

3. Alfab, Inc. 

4. Babcock-Davis. 

5. Cendrex Inc. 

6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 

7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1


8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 

9. Karp Associates, Inc. 

10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

11. Maxam Metal Products Limited. 

12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. 

13. MIFAB, Inc. 

14. Milcor Inc. 


16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges as indicated on the Drawings: 

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width 

exposed flange, proportional to door size. 

2. Locations: Wall. 

3. Door Size: As indicated on the Drawings. 

4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 

16 gage. 

a. Finish: Factory prime. 

5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 

6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 

7. Hardware: Latch. 

D. Hardware: 

1. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by hex-head wrench with interior release. 

2.2 MATERIALS 


B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or 

ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 

C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet 

substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. 

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 

or A60 metallic coating. 

E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish. 

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks 

and stretch lines or blend into finish. 

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 



H. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. 

I. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for 

type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005- 

H15; with minimum sheet thickness according to ANSI H35.2. 

J. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. 

K. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or 

ASTM F 2329. 


A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. 

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with 

smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller 

marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment 

devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 

1. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 

2. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of anchors. 

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 

2.4 FINISHES 





C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in 

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and 

are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 

D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal 

primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 





A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. 

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 




SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Service doors. 

B. Related Section: 

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, 

the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according 

to SEI/ASCE 7 and shall be FM Approved. 

1. Wind Loads: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of uniform pressure (velocity 

pressure) acting inward and outward wind loads wind loads determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 

2. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in 

manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, 

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components, from 

manufacturer. 

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1


E. Maintenance Data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both 

installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 


2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand 

wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise 

indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for 

performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 

1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying 

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according 

to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. 

B. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch 

thick; fabricated from metal to match curtain slats and finish. 

C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish 

as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow 

curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide 

removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain. 

2.2 HOOD 

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening 

head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for 

stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb 

mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to 

prevent sagging. 

2.3 LOCKING DEVICES 

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, 

located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. 

B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam 

plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 



1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying 

system. 

2. Keys: Provide three for each cylinder. 

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power 

supply when door is locked. 

2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES 

A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door 

for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated. There shall be no exposed insulation on either 

side of door when completed. 

2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM 

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustabletension, 

steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel 

connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite 

bearings for rotating members. 

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS 

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door 

manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired 

motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, 

control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 

2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with 

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc. 

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of 

cycles per hour indicated for each door. 

C. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" 


1. Electrical Characteristics: 

a. Phase: 3-phase. 

b. Volts: 480 V. 

c. Hertz: 60. 

2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure 

indicated. 



3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and 

operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) 

and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s) , without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 

4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: 

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency 

manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf 

(111 N) . 

E. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for 

automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while 

disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from 

floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency 

operator is engaged. 

F. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and 

without affecting emergency manual operation. 

2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY 

A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 


a. ACME Rolling Doors. 

b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. 

c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. 

d. Cookson Company. 

e. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 

f. Dynamic Closures Corp. 

g. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. 

h. Mahon Door Corporation. 

i. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 

j. Metro Door. 

k. Overhead Door Corporation. 

l. QMI Security Solutions. 

m. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. 

n. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 

o. Windsor Door. 

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000. 

C. Curtain R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.792 K x sq. m/W) unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. 

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) to 3-1/4-inch (83-mm) center-to-center height. 

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 



F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats 

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 

1. Shape: Round. 

2. Mounting: Face of wall. 

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside with thumb turn, 

and outside with cylinder. 

I. Electric Door Operator: 

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 

2. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid. 

3. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 

J. Door Finish: 

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color “French Grey” # GLC487 as manufactured by 

Glidden Paints. 



A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, 

inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as 

specified. 

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80. 

C. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105. 

D. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or 

distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide 

weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 

3.2 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, 

operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. 




SECTION 08390 – WATERTIGHT DOORS AND BARRIERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Pedestrian Flood Door with frame and hardware. 

a. Exterior Pedestrian Doors at the Substation Room. 

2. Removable Plank Flood Barrier System 

a. Locations as indicated for Overhead Coiling Doors at the Substation Room. 

1.3 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design watertight doors and planks to perform under hydrostatic loads (and hydrodynamic or other loads 

as specified) to control short-term load pressures indicated. All water pressure loads and operating loads 

are transferred to the building structure. 

B. Standard loading: Standard Flood Doors and Planks are designed for hydrostatic loading, and have no 

additional allowances included for hydrodynamic loads, wave loads or debris impact loads. 

C. Special loading: Design Flood Doors for hydrodynamic loads, wave loads, debris impact loads, or other 

uniform loads as indicated. 

D. Design Safety Factor for all watertight door Flood Door and Flood Plank Models of a minimum 2:1. Based 

on material ultimate yield strengths. 

E. Design Safety Factor for Anchors, minimum of 4:1 for cast-in-place concrete, or minimum of 6:1 for 

concrete masonry unit construction. 

F. FM Global Approval: Watertight Doors, Plank Systems and assemblies must be pre-approved by FM 

Global, designed and installed per FM Approval Class Number 2510 for Flood Abatement Equipment. 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of product indicated including: 

WATERTIGHT DOORS AND BARRIERS 08390 - 1


1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 

3. Installation instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including 

anchorage, hardware, seals at adjacent materials and finishes. Include dimensional plans, applicable 

material specifications, elevations and sections detailing mounting and connections, and load diagrams. 

C. Calculations: Submit calculations approved by a qualified California licensed engineer, to verify the flood 

doors and plank systems have the ability to withstand the design loading. 

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

E. Closeout Submittals: Provide Operation and Maintenance data to include plank installation and removal 

instructions, methods for maintaining and storing installed products, precautions against cleaning 

materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer must demonstrate a minimum of five years successful 

experience in design and manufacture of similar flood related closures. Upon request, provide supporting 

evidence including list of installations, descriptions, name and method of contact. 

B. Welder Qualifications: Welders Certified in accordance with American Welding Society Procedures: AWS- 

1-GMAW-S, WPS No. B2.004.90 for applicable material used in production of specified product. 


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging container with identification labels intact until ready 

for installation. 

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. 

C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. If outdoor storage is required, block 

materials to store at an incline, to prevent pooling of any moisture and promote runoff. Tarp materials in a 

tent-like arrangement, elevated above the product with open sides to allow airflow. Store all other 

hardware in a dry controlled environment. 

D. Use caution when unloading and handling product to avoid bending, denting, crushing, or other damage to 

the product. 

E. When using forklifts, use forks of proper length to fully support product being moved. Consult shop 

drawings or consult with factory for proper lift points. 


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by 

manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside 

manufacturer's absolute limits. 




A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: PS DOORS, which is located at: 1150 S. 48th Street, Grand Forks, ND 58201; 

Toll Free Tel: 800-284-0623; Tel: 701-746-4519; Fax: 701-746-8340; Email: 4info@psdoors.com; Web: 

www.flooddoors.com 

B. Substitutions: Shall not be permitted without prior verification of the products and assembly of FM Global 

Approval as defined in article “DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS”. 

C. Obtain all watertight flood doors and flood plank assemblies from single manufacturer. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Watertight Doors: Provide the following doors: 

1. Hinged Pedestrian Flood Door: Optional ADA Threshold PS Doors Model PD-520. 

2. Removable Plank Flood Barrier System: PS DOORS Model FP-530. 

B. Pedestrian Flood Doors: 

1. Sealing Requirements: Flood Door and gasket design shall provide an effective barrier against 

short-term high water situations, to the protection level indicated on Drawings. 

2. Operation: Provide with latching operable from one side only (typical). 

3. Mounting/Load Transfer: Anchor to existing structure. Flood Door designed for specified 

hydrostatic pressure (and other loads as specified) and will transfer loads to adjacent structure. 

4. Frames to be anchored utilizing mechanical, chemical or other anchor types as designed. 

Manufacturer to include all anchors, water-stop, and sealants, as designed. 

5. Loading Direction Selection: 

a. Standard: Positive Pressure Loading: (Direction of loading against flood door so as to 

further compress gaskets against flood door frame-"seating"). 

6. Provide rectangular door opening with square corners to facilitate easy passage. 

7. Provide compression gasket which requires no inflation. 

C. Removable Plank Flood Barrier System: 

1. Sealing Requirements: Flood Plank and gasket design shall provide an effective plank against 

short-term high water situations, to the protection level indicated on Drawings. 

2. Operation: Provide with latching operable from one side only (typical). 

3. Mounting/Load Transfer: Anchor to existing structure. Flood Plank designed for specified 

hydrostatic pressure (and other loads as specified) and will transfer loads to adjacent structure. 



4. Frames to be cast-in-place or anchored utilizing mechanical, chemical or other anchor types as 

designed. Manufacturer to include all anchors, water-stop, and sealants, as designed. 

5. Loading Direction Selection: 

a. Standard: Positive Pressure Loading: (Direction of loading against flood plank so as to 

further compress gaskets against flood plank frame-"seating"). 

b. Optional: Reverse Pressure Loading: (Direction of loading against flood plank so as to 

force the flood plank away from the flood plank frame-"unseating"). 

6. Provide rectangular door opening with square corners to facilitate easy passage. 

7. Provide compression gasket which requires no inflation. 

2.3 MATERIALS, PEDESTRIAN FLOOD DOOR 

A. Flood Door: 

1. Steel: Structural or formed steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36; tubing conforming to ASTM A 

500 Grade B, ASTM A 513; bars conforming to ASTM A 36, M1020; of appropriate size and 

strength with welded construction. 

B. Panel Sheeting: Flood Door to be sheeted with steel sheeting or plate, Commercial Quality-Low Carbon 

ASTM-A-569, ASTM-A-366, ASTM-A-36 welded in place. 

C. Gaskets to be factory mounted to flood door assembly. Gaskets to be compressible rubber type, typically 

EPDM unless otherwise noted, and to be field replaceable. 

D. Frame to include jamb, head, and sill members for field locating and installation on structure. Jamb 

members to be designed and fabricated with appropriate material as required for the loading. 

1. Steel: Structural or formed steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36 of appropriate size and strength 

with welded construction. 

E. Threshold: Aluminum: 6061 alloy ASTM B 209. 

F. Frame Mounting Hardware: Provide anchors, sealant, and water stop, as required. 

G. Operating Hardware: Provide hardware sized for the size and weight of the flood door and loads. 

Hardware to be factory located on jambs and door panels, as practical. All loads are transferred to 

building structure. Latching hardware to be as indicated on Drawings. Flood door panel to be factory 

prepared for applicable latching devices. 

H. Steel Shop Finish: Apply in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and instructions. 

1. Primer: One shop coat of manufacturer's standard shop primer (S-W Kemflash Primer E61-R-26). 

2. Finish: Two shop coats of Standard Industrial Enamel (S-W Industrial and Marine Coatings B54 

Series) 

I. Labeling. Each watertight door and frame will be individually identified for matched installation. 

J. Instruction Placard: Provide pictorial and written operation instruction placards on flood door. 



2.4 MATERIALS, REMOVABLE PLANK FLOOD BARRIER SYSTEM 

A. Flood Plank: Aluminum Alloy. 

B. Gaskets to be factory mounted to flood plank assembly. Gaskets to be compressible rubber type, typically 

EPDM unless otherwise noted, and to be field replaceable. 

C. Frame to include jamb and sill members for field locating and installation on structure. Jamb members to 

be designed and fabricated with appropriate material as required for the loading. 

1. Aluminum of appropriate size and strength with welded or mechanical fastened construction. 

D. Threshold: Aluminum. 

E. Frame Mounting Hardware: Provide anchors, sealant, and water stop, as required. 

F. Operating Hardware: Provide hardware sized for the size and weight of the flood plank and loads. 

Hardware to be factory located on jambs and plank panels, as practical. All loads are transferred to 

building structure. Latching hardware to be as indicated on Drawings. Flood plank panel to be factory 

prepared for applicable latching devices. 

G. Aluminum products to be mill finish, welds are ground smooth, not polished, and are factory acid washed, 

neutralized and rinsed. 

H. Labeling. Each watertight plank and frame will be individually identified for matched installation. 

I. Instruction Placard: Provide pictorial and written operation instruction placards on flood plank. 


A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 

C. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of 

same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 



A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 

preparation before proceeding. 




A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for 

the substrate under the project conditions. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installations instructions, approved shop drawings, shipping, 

handling, and storage instructions, and product carton instructions for installation. 

B. Frames shall be installed level, square, plumb, and rigid. 

C. Sealants, water-stop, and grouting to be applied per product application directions and in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Field Grouting to be completed by appropriate personnel, and in accordance with product application 

directions and manufacturer's instructions. 

E. Tolerances: All dimensional requirements must be in accordance with manufacturer's installation 

instructions and shop drawings. 

F. Field Testing: 

1. Perform visual dry test for gasket alignment, continuity contact and pre-compression. 

2. Construct temporary water barrier and test installed flood barrier. 


A. Manufacturers representative to verify that installation of assembly and that the perimeter conditions are in 

conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Products to be operated and field verified including the sealing surfaces to assure that they maintain 

contact at the correct sealing points. 

C. Verify that latching assemblies operate freely and correctly. 

D. Verify all anchorage is in accordance with manufacture's installation instructions and applicable data 

sheets. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Repair or replace damaged installed products or components. 

B. Clean all sealing surfaces. 

C. Touch up damaged finish. 




A. Protect installed products until completion of project. 

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior storefront framing. 

2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors. 


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance 

requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, 

installation, or other defects in construction: 

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift 

and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

3. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural 

movements to glazing. 

d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. 

e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 

f. Failure of operating units. 

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified California licensed professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

1. Wind Loads: Entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of uniform pressure (velocity 

pressure) acting inward and outward wind loads wind loads determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 

2. Seismic Performance: Entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 

C. Deflection of Framing Members: 

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1


1. Depending on Project conditions, more stringent deflection criteria may be required than are 

specified in two subparagraphs below; see "Seismic Loads" Article in the Evaluations. First option 

in first subparagraph is based on the 2003 IBC recommendations for framing members supporting 

glass. Second option is based on AAMA TIR-A11 recommendations. 

2. First option in subparagraph below is based on typical deflection criteria for glass. Second option 

is based on GANA's "Glazing Manual." 

3. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is 

smaller. 

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as 

follows: 

1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, 

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent 

deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 

2. Test Durations: 10 seconds. 

E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and 

framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum 

static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. 

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water 

penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum 

static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 

lbf/sq. ft. 



B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in 

the system to the exterior. 


D. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing 

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified California 

licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


G. Field quality-control reports. 



H. Maintenance data. 

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for 

installation of units required for this Project. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. 

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based 

on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated 

for this Project. 

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' 

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, 

arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one 

another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to 

verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service 

performance. 

E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation 

Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.6 WARRANTY 


components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 

components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 







1. Arcadia, Inc. 

2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 

3. CMI Architectural. 

4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 

5. EFCO Corporation. 

6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 

7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc. 

8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 

9. TRACO. 

10. Tubelite. 

11. United States Aluminum. 

12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 

13. YKK AP America Inc. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC- 

PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface 

preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to 

applicable SSPC standard. 

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required 

and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 

3. Glazing Plane: Front. 

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, 

nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding 

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 



1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and 

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 

D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing 

compatible with adjacent materials. 

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint 

type. 

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS 

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile 

and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS 

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extrudedaluminum 

tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets 

that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or 

ground plane. 

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 

2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware” unless otherwise indicated 

herein. 

B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame 

schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products 

complying with BHMA standard referenced. 

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and 

interface with other building control systems indicated. 

3. Opening-Force Requirements: 



a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the 

door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width. 

b. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch. 

C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. 

D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge 

pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 

2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

3. Quantities: 

a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide 3 hinges per leaf. 

b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide 4 hinges per leaf. 

E. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, 

fabricated to full height of door and frame. 

F. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 

G. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 

H. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 

I. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and 

include notation to be furnished by Owner. 

J. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum 

framing. 

K. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. 

L. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum. 

1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on 

testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used. 

M. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required 

by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to meet field conditions 

and requirements for opening force. 

N. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. 

O. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 



P. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, 

with integral rubber bumper. 

Q. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 

R. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on 

mounting strip. 

S. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 

T. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum 

height of 1/2 inch. 


A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except 

containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 


A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. 

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. 

Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following 

characteristics: 

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating 

within the system to exterior. 

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain 

required glazing edge clearances. 

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel 

glazing or metal panels. 

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent 

possible. 

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. 

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for 

installing entrance door hardware. 

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent 

possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. 



H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop 

Drawings. 


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils 

(0.04 mm), medium gloss. 

1. Security Building Color: “French Grey” color # GLN47 as manufactured by Glidden Paints. 

2. Metroplex Tenant Improvements Color: Match Existing. 



A. General: 

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Do not install damaged components. 

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic 

deterioration. 

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Metal Protection: 

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact 

surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as 

recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact 

surfaces with bituminous paint. 

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and 

moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or 

rack. 

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 



2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware 

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners 

to greatest extent possible. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and 

inspections. 

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed 

systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows. Do not proceed with installation of the 

next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 

1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect 

shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. 

a. Test Area: Each individual Entrance system. 

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified 

requirements. 

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 


E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.3 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS 

A. Provide and Install Entrance Door Hardware Sets in accordance with Division 8, Section “Door Hardware” 

and as indicated on the Drawings and Schedules. 




SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes fixed aluminum-framed Windows. 

1. Interior and Exterior Windows. 


A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, 

based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of 

minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following 

loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass 

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed 

indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2- 

Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 

a. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph. 

b. Importance Factor: 1.0. 

c. Exposure Category: D. 

2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 

1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, 

whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing 

performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural 

computations. 

C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windborne 

debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those 

specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506 and 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements 

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing 

buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, 

and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to 

both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1


1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, 

operational clearances, and installation details 

C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 

D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

E. Field quality-control test reports. 


G. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. 

B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's 

"Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic 

effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.6 WARRANTY 


aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Failure to meet performance requirements. 

b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or 

condensation. 

c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 

d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. 

e. Failure of insulating glass. 

2. Warranty Period: 

a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 





c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


1. All Seasons Windows & Doors; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc. 

2. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing. 

3. Custom Window Company. 

4. DeSCo Windows. 

5. EFCO Corporation. 

6. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc. 

7. Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc. 

8. Gerkin Windows and Doors. 

9. Graham Architectural Products Corp. 

10. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company. 

11. Mannix; a division of Interstate Window Corp. 

12. Peerless Products Inc. 

13. Thermal Windows, Inc. 

14. TRACO. 

15. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 

16. Winco Window Company. 

17. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc. 

18. YKK AP America Inc. 

2.2 WINDOW 

A. Window Type: Fixed. 

B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 

1. Performance Class: C-40. 

C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance 

according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 50. 

D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 

15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 

1. U-Factor: 

0.60 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. 

E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum 

of 0.40, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. 



2.3 GLAZING 

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing 

requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. 

B. Glass complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated in Division 8 Section 

"Glazing." 


A. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 

B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. 

C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. 

D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. 

E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for 

support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for 

movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide 

mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. 

F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions 

indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and 

weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide 

subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. 

G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing 

system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 


A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. 

1. Location: Interior Windows. 

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic or polyester enamel primer/topcoat system 

complying with AAMA 2604 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm) , medium 

gloss. 

1. Exterior Window Color: “French Grey” color # GLN47 as manufactured by Glidden Paints. 

2. Interior Window Color: Clear Anodized, unless otherwise indicated. 





A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, 

hardware, accessories, and other components. 

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, 

anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent 

construction. 

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. 

D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating 

within windows to the exterior. 

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points 

of contact with other materials. 

F. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points 

and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving 

parts. 

G. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and 

finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

H. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written 

recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 

I. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during 

construction period. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test 

reports. 

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work 

complies with or deviates from requirements. 

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 

1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be 

performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method A, by applying same test pressures required to 

determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" 

Article. 

2. Testing Extent: Three windows as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and 

inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately after installation. 

3. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502. 



C. Remove and replace non-complying aluminum window and retest as specified above. 

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 





SECTION 08620 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Self-flashing unit skylights with integral curbs. 




A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight. 

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and 

profiles, and finishes for unit skylights. 

B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other 

adjoining work. 

C. Aluminum Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each 

unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size. 

D. Glazing Samples: For each color and finish of glazing indicated, 12 inches (300 mm) square and of same 

thickness indicated for the final Work. 

E. Product Schedule: For unit skylights. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. 

G. Product Test Reports: For each type and size of unit skylight, for tests performed within the last four years 

by a qualified testing agency. Test results based on testing of smaller unit skylights than specified will not 

be accepted. 

UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08620 - 1


H. FM Global Approval: Certification of approval for each type of unit skylight. Unit skylights are part of the 

required FM Approved roof system. 

I. Field quality-control reports. 

J. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 

K. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed 

performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by 

labels, test reports, and calculations. 

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units 

required for this Project. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in 

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Uncontrolled water leakage. 

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 

c. Yellowing of acrylic glazing. 

d. Breakage of polycarbonate glazing. 

e. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal. 

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Product: Provide Signature Series Fixed Industrial Skylight and Safety Guard as manufactured by 

Sunoptics unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum 

standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated. 

1. Performance Class and Grade: Class CW-PG 50. 



2. Certification: AAMA-, WDMA-, or CSA-certified unit skylights with label attached to each. 

B. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum U-factor of 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (1.71 W/sq. m x K) . 

C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum SHGC of 0.51. 

D. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide unit skylights that pass enhanced-protection testing 

requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens 

shall be no smaller in width and length than unit skylights indicated for use on Project and shall be 

installed in same manner as unit skylights indicated for use on Project. 

1. Small-Missile Test: For unit skylights located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 

2. Large-Missile Test: For all unit skylights regardless of height above grade. 

2.3 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 

A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing 

retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements 

indicated. 

B. Unit Shape and Size: As indicated. 

C. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, extruded monolithic sheets, UV resistant, burglar-resistance 

rated according to UL 972, and with average impact strength of 12 to 16 ft-lb/in. (640 to 854 J/m) of width 

when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod). 

1. Single-Glazing Profile: Dome, 25 percent rise. 

a. Thickness: Not less than thickness required to exceed performance requirements. 

b. Color: High White. 

2. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated 

when tested according to ASTM D 1929. 

3. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Smoke-developed index of 450 or less when tested according 

to ASTM E 84, and smoke density of 75 or less when tested according to ASTM D 2843 

4. Burning Characteristics: Tested according to ASTM D 635. Class CC1, burning extent of 1 inch 

(25 mm) or less for nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use. 

D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. 

E. Integral Curb: Extruded-aluminum, self-flashing type. 

1. Extruded-Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , alloy and temper to suit structural and 

finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52. 

2. Height: 12 inches (300 mm unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Construction: Double wall. 

4. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid type. 

a. Exposed Insulation: Cover face of insulation exposed to interior of building with aluminum 

liner. 



F. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to 

collect and drain condensation to the exterior. 

G. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior metal framing. 


A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal 

as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. 

1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide 

nonremovable fastener heads. 

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per 

coat. 


A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 



A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the 

Work. 



A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, 

roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly 

and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. 

B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing 

unit skylights. 

C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion. 

D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates. 



E. Where aluminum surfaces of unit skylights will contact another metal or corrosive substrates, such as 

preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other 

approved permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer. 



B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before 

installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2. 

C. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight. 

D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 


F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged 

metal coatings and finishes. 

B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during 

construction period. 

D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. 

E. Unit Skylight Operating System: Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust and 

maintain unit skylight operating system. 




SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Commercial door hardware. 

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 



B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams. 


D. Product certificates. 

E. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and 

assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the 


b. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and 

frame. 

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include 

description and function of each lockset and exit device. 

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including 

name and manufacturer. 

4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence 

of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying 

instructions for locks. 

DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1



A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified 

Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with 

Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an 

Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door 

hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 

C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door 

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are 

listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing 

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on 

testing according to NFPA 252. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established 

at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill. 

E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying 

schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 


A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory 

prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate 

provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: 

a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 




2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door 

hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door 

Hardware Sets" Article. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying 

with BHMA standard referenced. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each 

type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by 

using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and 

requirements for description, quality, and function. 

2.2 HINGES, GENERAL 

A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood 

doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. 

B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

2. Interior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 

3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. 

C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, 

prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors 

with locks. 

D. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 

2.3 HINGES 

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 

2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 

3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 

4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors, wood 

screws for wood doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. 

C. Manufacturers: 

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 



2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 

3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

4. Hager Companies (HAG). 

5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 

6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 

7. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 

8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL 

A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or 

twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N) . 

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more 

than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for 

operation. 

C. Lock Trim: Provide lock trim compatible with Best Access Systems interchangeable cores to be supplied 

and installed by Owner. 

1. Levers: Falcon T Series Quantum-Gala QG. 

2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 

D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors. 

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) , unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch bolt or lock bolt, with curved lip 

extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. 

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the 

following: 

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. 

B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Series 4000. 


a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 

b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 

c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 

e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL). 

f. Marks USA (MKS). 

g. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED). 

h. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). 

i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 



2.6 DOOR BOLTS 

j. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 

k. Security Door Controls (SDC). 

l. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WEI). 

m. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). 

A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors. 

B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 

C. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3; designed for mortising into door edge. 


2.7 EXIT DEVICES 

a. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

b. Door Controls International (DCI). 

c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

d. Hager Companies (HAG). 

e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

f. Trimco (TBM). 

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3. 

B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or 

twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N) . 

C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more 

than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for 

operation. 

D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 

E. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors. 

F. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to requirements, provide a fully mortised lock Exit Device with Night 

Latch Lever, Model No. 9975 as manufactured by Von Duprin or equivalent from one of the manufacturers 

below. 


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 

b. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 

c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 

e. Detex Corporation (DTX). 

f. Door Controls International (DCI). 

g. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 

h. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 



2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS 

i. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 

j. Monarch Exit Devices & Door Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (MON). 

k. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 

l. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. (RCI). 

m. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). 

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. 

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or 

nickel silver, and complying with the following: 

1. Number of Pins: Six. 

C. Permanent Cores: Permanent cores and keys will be Owner Furnished and Owner installed, unless 


D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 

2.9 KEYING 

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys 

without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 

2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores and are 

compatible with permanent cores by Best Access Systems. Provide 10 construction master keys. 

A. Keying System: Permanent Keying System shall be Owner Furnished, Owner Installed unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key as provided by Owner. 

2.10 OPERATING TRIM 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6. 

B. Materials: Fabricate from bronze, unless otherwise indicated. 


1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 

3. Forms + Surfaces (FS). 


5. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 

6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

8. Trimco (TBM). 



2.11 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS 

A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or selflatching 

bolts are used. 

2.12 CLOSERS 

1. Material: Polished bronze, with strike plate. 

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 

1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 

2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 

3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more 

than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required 

width. 

C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with 

fire alarm system. 

D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match 

door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of 

door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide 

factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 

F. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side 

of door, unless otherwise indicated. 


a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 

c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 

d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 

e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). 

g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 

h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). 

G. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4. 


a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 

b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). 



d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 

e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

H. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. 

2.13 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS 

A. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width 

on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. 

B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following 

material: 

1. Material: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) 


thick bronze. 

a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. (AFP). 

b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

d. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 

e. Hager Companies (HAG). 

f. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 

g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation (IPC). 

h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

i. Pawling Corporation (PAW). 

j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

k. Trimco (TBM). 

2.14 STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not 

mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, 

provide overhead holders. 

B. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 


1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 

2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

4. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 

6. Door Controls International (DCI). 

7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 

8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 

9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 




11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 

12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 

13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 

15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

18. Trimco (TBM). 

2.15 DOOR GASKETING 


B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound 

gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior 

applications and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 

C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing 

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, 

based on testing according to UL 1784. 

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. 

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for 

sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. 

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily 

replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 

G. Manufacturers: 


2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD). 

3. National Guard Products (NGP). 

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

5. Reese Enterprises (RE). 

6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 

7. Zero International (ZRO). 

2.16 THRESHOLDS 




B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds 

not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 

D. Manufacturers: 


2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD). 

3. National Guard Products (NGP). 

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

5. Reese Enterprises (RE). 

6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 

7. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 

8. Zero International (ZRO). 


A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using 

manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality 

equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish 

manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. 

B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application 

intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished 

heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications. 

C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. 



A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surfaceapplied 

door hardware according to ANSI A250.6. 

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. 

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated 

or required to comply with governing regulations. 

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for 

Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for 

Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 

3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush 

Doors." 



D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and 

fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in 

another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing 

work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been 

completed on substrates involved. 

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with 

requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

F. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper 

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust 

door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply 

with referenced accessibility requirements. 

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an 

open position of 30 degrees. 

2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so 

that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 

inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 

3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 

Door Hardware Set No. 01 Non-CBP Exterior Storefront Entrance Door (Pair) 

Manufacturer No./ ANSI / 

Item 

Description 

BHMA No. Grade Finish 

Hinges: 6 pair Full Mortise, Nonremovable Pins, BHMA A5111 1 Manufacture’s 

41/2”x4 1/2" 

standard 

Lockset Concealed Vertical Rod Touch Bar 

Panic per Storefront manufacturer 

BHMA A156.3 1 Match Storefront 

Operating Trim Storefront Manufacture’s standard 1 Match Storefront 

Closer Storefront Manufacture’s standard 1 Match Storefront 

Weather Stripping Head and Jamb Type, Two Piece BHMA R0Y104 Manufacture’s 

Interlocking, 

standard 

Sill Sweep Storefront Manufacture’s standard 1 Manufacture’s 

standard 

Door Stop Floor Dome Type BHMA L02141 1 Black Anodized 

Threshold Saddle type with thermal barrier BHMA J32190 1 Match Storefront 

Door Hardware Set No. 02 Non-CBP and CBP Exterior Exit / Egress Door 


Item 

Description 


Hinges: 3 pair Full Mortise, Nonremovable Pins, 

41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A5111 1 Dull Stainless Steel 

Lockset Fully Mortised Lock, Exit Device Von Duprin, 9975 1 Dark Bronze 

Operating Trim Lever – Night Latch 9975L-NL 1 Dark Bronze 

Closing Devices Parallel Arm Mounting Type BHMA C02021 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Rain Drip Applied to Frame Header Face BHMA R0Y936 Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Weather Stripping Head and Jamb Type, 

Two Piece Interlocking 

BHMA R0Y104 

Sill Sweep Door Shoe Type with Drip Cap BHMA R0Y536 

Threshold Saddle type with thermal barrier BHMA J32190 1 

Door Hardware Set No. 03 Non-CBP and CBP Exterior Equipment Room / Non-Exit-Egress Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A5111 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Store Room 

Lock with Interchangeable Core 

Falcon - T581 F86-1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Operating Trim Lever Falcon, QG 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Closer Parallel Arm Mounting Type BHMA C02021 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Rain Drip Applied to Frame Header Face BHMA R0Y936 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Weather Stripping Head and Jamb Type, Two Piece 

Interlocking, 

BHMA R0Y104 

Sill Sweep Door Shoe Type with Drip Cap BHMA R0Y536 

Threshold Saddle type with thermal barrier BHMA J32190 1 

Door Hardware Set No. 04 Interior Sort/Freight Area, Mechanical/Electrical/Communications 

Equipment Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 





Door Stop Floor Dome Type BHMA L02161 1 Dark Bronze 

Threshold Fluted Offset Saddle Type, OR BHMA J32180, 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Fluted Saddle Type 

BHMA J32130 

Edge Seal Smoke Rated Gasket (provide at BHMA R0G014 

Systems required fire rated locations) 

Door Hardware Set No. 05 Non-CBP and CBP Break Room and Conference Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Classroom 


Falcon – T561 F84-1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

(Provide Fully Mortised Lock, Exit 

Device where noted on Door Schedule) 

Von Duprin, 9975 1 Dark Bronze 







Door Hardware Set No. 06 Non-CBP Office Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Office Lock 

with Interchangeable Core 







Door Hardware Set No. 06A CBP Crew Processing, Supervisor’s Office, Canine Unit Office, Canine 

Washroom, Fraudulent Document Inspection, and Public/Broker Secure Reception Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 









Provide low-voltage door buzzer system at CBP Public/Broker Secure Reception, consisting of 120 volt/24 

volt transformer, pushbutton with face plate and indicating light (illuminated when door release is activate, 

for hearing impaired), door release pushbutton (desktop model or flush-in-wall type with faceplate). System 

must coordinate with electric door strike specifications. All wiring and components above ceiling shall 

be plenum-rated. A proximity card reader system or other access control system compatible with CBP 

standards must be provided from public areas into controlled staff areas. 



Door Hardware Set No. 07 Non-CBP Open Office Entry Door 


Item Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Entry/Office 








Door Hardware Set No. 07A CBP General Office/Workstations Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 







Access Control Card Reader/Keypad Ingress from 

Processing Floor or Other Unsecured 

Area. 



Door Hardware Set No. 08 Non-CBP Interior Fire-Rated Entry / Office Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Entry/Office 






Edge Seal 

Systems 

Smoke Rated Gasket BHMA R0G014 



Door Hardware Set No. 09 Non-CBP and CBP Interior Fire-Rated Exit / Egress Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Fully Mortised Lock, Exit Device Von Duprin, 9975 1 Dark Bronze 

Operating Trim Lever – Night Latch 9975L-NL 1 Dark Bronze 



Edge Seal 

Systems 

Smoke Rated Gasket BHMA R0G014 

Door Hardware Set No. 10 Not Used 

Door Hardware Set No. 11 Non-CBP and CBP Multi-User Restroom / Locker Room 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Classroom 


Falcon – T561 F84-1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Operating Trim Lever 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Kick Plate 10” High, Beveled Edges, Push 

Side 

BHMA J102 Oil Rubbed Bronze 





Door Hardware Set No. 12 Non-CBP Janitor’s Closet Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 






Kick Plate 10” High, Beveled Edges, Push 

Side 

BHMA J102 Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Door Hardware Set No. 13 CBP Interview Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" (180 degree swing in 

direction of egress) 

BHMA A1112 1 







Door Hardware Set No. 14 CBP Search/Dry Hold Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Tamperproof 

High Security Dead Lock with 1” 

Bolt Throw Keyed on Both Sides 

BHMA E01511 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Operating Trim Door Pull & Push Plate 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Threshold Fluted Offset Saddle Type, OR BHMA J32180, 1 Dark Bronze 

Fluted Saddle Type (Tamperproof) BHMA J32130 

Key Search/Dry Hold Room and Wet Hold Room alike. 



Door Hardware Set No. 15 CBP Wet Hold Room Door 


Item 

Description 




direction of egress) 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Tamperproof 

High Security Dead Lock with 1” 

Bolt Throw Keyed on Both Sides 

BHMA E01511 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 

Operating Trim Door Pull & Push Plate 1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Threshold Fluted Offset Saddle Type, OR BHMA J32180, 1 Dark Bronze 

Fluted Saddle Type (Tamperproof) BHMA J32130 

Key Search/Dry Hold Room and Wet Hold Room alike. 

Door Hardware Set No. 16 CBP Agricultural Laboratory and Disposal Room Door 


Item 

Description 




direction of egress, where shown) 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Series 4000, Bored, Storeroom 

Lock with Interchangeable Core, 

Electric Strike for Deadbolt Lock 

Device 

F98-1 Oil Rubbed Bronze 






Door Hardware Set No. 17 CBP General Storage and Temporary Seized Property Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 








Door Hardware Set No. 18 CBP LAN/Telco Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset Tamperproof Hardware with Medeco 

Maxum High Security Deadlock, 

or Equal (no master key) 

Oil Rubbed Bronze 



Access Control Card Reader Keypad Ingress, Push 

Button Egress (locate push buttons 

at door) 

Door Hardware Set No. 19 CBP Weapons Storage Room, Secure Hard and Soft Narcotics Training 

Aid Storage Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 

Lockset T-Deadlock with Interchangeable 

Lockset, Electric Strike for Deadbolt 

Lock Device 






at door) 

Door Hardware Set No. 20 CBP Pseudo-Narcotics and Canine Agricultural Training Aid Storage 

Room Door 


Item 

Description 



41/2”x4 1/2" 

BHMA A1112 1 









at door) 



Door Hardware Set No. 21 CBP Wire Mesh Partition, Cargo Holding and Detention Area Door 

Item 

Description 

Hinges Wire Mesh Partition Manufacturer’s 

Standard for High Security Application 

Lockset Wire Mesh Partition Manufacturer’s 

Standard High Security Lockset 

with ADA Lever Handle with Vandal 

Proof Guard 


Button Egress 


Manufacturer No./ 

BHMA No. 

ANSI / 

Grade Finish 



SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other 

Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 

1. Windows. 

2. Doors. 

3. Storefront framing. 

4. Glazed entrances. 

5. Interior borrowed lites. 


A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in 

referenced glazing publications. 

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads 

(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective 

manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; 

deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to State of 

California 2010 Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 

1. Design Wind Pressures: 

a. As indicated on Drawings. 

b. As applicable to Project according to FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, 

Wind Design, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 

c. As applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated 

on Drawings. 

GLAZING 08800 - 1


2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist 

design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within 

individual glass lites. 

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes 

acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 

1. Tinted glass. 

2. Coated glass. 

3. Fire-resistive glazing products. 

4. Insulating glass. 

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. 

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same 

designations indicated on Drawings. 

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design 

criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for 

their preparation. 

F. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e 

coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. 

G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. 

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. 

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within 

previous 36-month period. 

I. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified 

insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer. 

GLAZING 08800 - 2


B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified 

under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the 

NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. 

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain clear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass and insulating 

glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. 

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each 

product and installation method. 

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and 

organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for 

glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for 

Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 

H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with 

certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which 

glass complies. 

I. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification 

label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's 

name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing 

passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) , 

and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. 

J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one 

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and 

glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to 

avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature 

conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel 

substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

GLAZING 08800 - 3


1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside 

limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) . 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty 

period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not 

attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminatedglass 

manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty 

period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not 

attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's 

written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through 

glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulatingglass 

manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty 

period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not 

attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's 

written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior 

surfaces of glass. 



2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as 

needed to comply with requirements indicated. 

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0mm. 

2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. 

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or 

Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where 

heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float 

glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is 

indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic-protection testing 

requirements when tested according to CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II. Test specimens shall be no 

GLAZING 08800 - 4


smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same 

manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 

2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as 

indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and 

for each lite. 

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 

computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K) . 

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to 

NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. 

b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. 

c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. 

d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Clear Float Glass. 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; 

of kind and condition indicated. 

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to 

bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 

C. Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, 

and complying with other requirements specified. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

a. PPG Industries, Inc., Solarcool Caribia. 

2. Kind: Kind CV (coated vision glass), except that Kind CO (coated overhead glass) may be used 

where the lower edge of the glass is more than 6 feet (1.8 m) above the adjacent floor level or 

cannot be approached closer than 10 feet (3.0 m) . 

3. Coating Color: Silver. 

4. Glass: Tinted float. 

5. Tint Color: Green. 

GLAZING 08800 - 5


6. Visible Light Transmittance: 21 percent minimum. 

7. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 19 percent maximum. 

2.3 INSULATING GLASS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

followingavailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are 

not limited to, the following: 

1. Glasswerks LA, Inc. 

2. PPG Industries, Inc. 

3. Viracon, Inc. 

4. Vitro America. 

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a 

dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements 

specified. 

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. 

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article. 

2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING 

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door 

assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. 

B. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch (5-mm) nominal thickness; faced on one 

surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II 

materials. 

1. 

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : 

a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite NT. 

b. Safti First; SuperLite C/SP. 

c. Schott North America, Inc.; Filmed Pyran Platinum. 

d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-F. 

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, fire-protection-rated tempered glass, 

complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 

1. 

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; PyroEdge-20. 

b. Safti First; SuperLite20. 

c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SSG Pyroswiss. 

GLAZING 08800 - 6


2.5 GLAZING GASKETS 

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain 

watertight seal, made from one of the following: 

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, 

or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and 

hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense 

compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing 

stops on opposite side of glazing. 

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded 

corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. 

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: 

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other 

materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing 

channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing 

sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 

g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

4. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product 

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of 

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 

Class 100/50, Use NT. 

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that 

listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fireprotection 

ratings indicated. 

2.7 GLAZING TAPES 

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; 

nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as 

GLAZING 08800 - 7


recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with 

ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both 

surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead 

of liquid sealant. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, 

requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a 

proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to 

maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to 

control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and 

labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating 

indicated. 

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face 

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product 

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight 

chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. 

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 

2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 

GLAZING 08800 - 8


1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 

2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 

2.11 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type GL-2: Reflective-coated, laminated vision glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass 

with inner ply Class 1 (clear). 

1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm. 

2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) . 

3. Coating Location: Second or Third surface. 


2.12 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type GL-3: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass. 

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) . 

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 

3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 

4. Interspace Content: Air. 

5. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 

6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 24 percent minimum. 

8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.48 maximum. 

9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.50 maximum. 

10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum. 


2.13 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES 

A. Glass Type GL-4: 20-minute fire-rated safety glazing without hose-stream test; monolithic ceramic 

glazing. 


B. Glass Type GL-5: 45-minute fire-rated safety glazing; film-faced ceramic glazing. 


C. Glass Type GL-6: 60-minute fire-rated safety glazing; film-faced ceramic glazing. 


GLAZING 08800 - 9




A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at 

corners. 

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 



A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove 

coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that 

exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in 

the completed work. 

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL 

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing 

materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing 

publications. 

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide 

necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with 

reasonable tolerances. 

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project 

site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other 

imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction 

testing. 

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, 

unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable 

for heel bead. 

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 

GLAZING 08800 - 10


1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install 

correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes 

are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with 

system performance requirements. 

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant 

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing 

channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced 

glazing publications. 

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on 

opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to 

movement. 

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket 

manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant 

recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

3.4 TAPE GLAZING 

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or 

protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make 

them fit opening. 

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal 

framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints 

in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. 

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense 

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket 

applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 

GLAZING 08800 - 11


3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) 

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with 

allowance for stretch during installation. 

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints 

miter cut and bonded together at corners. 

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly 

against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in 

place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of 

openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in 

glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly 

against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying 

pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without 

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket 

manufacturer. 

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and 

glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel 

and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in 

position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant 

to glass and channel surfaces. 

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING 

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal 

and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to 

framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and 

clean surfaces. 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, 

despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances 

immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

GLAZING 08800 - 12


C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent 

intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or 

stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural 

causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date 

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in 

writing by glass manufacturer. 


GLAZING 08800 - 13


SECTION 08911 - FIXED LOUVERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 


A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section 

unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). 

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical). 

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in 

jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. 

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as 

determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models 

with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. 

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 

2. Show mullion profiles and locations. 

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 

FIXED LOUVERS 08911 - 1


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismic performance 

requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible 

for their preparation. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L 

by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each 

type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. 

F. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 

3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of 

same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 

professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and 

stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver 

components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to 

fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa) , acting 

inward or outward. 

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade shall pass 

enhanced-protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested 

according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than louvers indicated 

for use on Project. 



D. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of 

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 

E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by 

testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to 

AMCA 500-L. 

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material 

surfaces. 

G. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for 

fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS 

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver as indicated on Drawings: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 


a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company. 

b. Air Flow Company, Inc. 

c. Airolite Company, LLC (The). 

d. All-Lite Architectural Products. 

e. American Warming and Ventilating; a Mestek company. 

f. Architectural Louvers; Harray, LLC. 

g. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 

h. Carnes Company, Inc. 

i. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 

j. Construction Specialties, Inc. 

k. Dowco Products Group; Safe Air of Illinois. 

l. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

m. Industrial Louvers, Inc. 

n. Louvers & Dampers; a division of Mestek, Inc. 

o. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. 

p. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 

q. Nystrom, Inc. 

r. Pottorff. 

s. Reliable Products, Inc. 

t. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 

u. United Enertech. 

v. Vent Products Co., Inc. 

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm) . 

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 

inch (2.03 mm) for frames. 



4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 

5. Louver Performance Ratings: 

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- 

(1220-mm-) high louver. 

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s) . 

c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg (37-Pa) static pressure drop at 1000-fpm 

(5.1-m/s) free-area exhaust or intake velocity. 

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS 

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 

2. Screening Type: Insect screening. 

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced 

a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 

Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 

3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. 

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 

1. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm) wire. 

2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS 

A. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver. 

1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness. 

2. Galvanized-steel sheet for galvanized-steel louvers, not less than 0.052-inch (1.32-mm) nominal 

thickness. 

3. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. 

4. Attach blank-off panels with sheet metal screws. 

2.6 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) , Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, 

or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 



1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. 

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from 

stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads 

imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to 

ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for 

shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate 

units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice 

plates. 

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless 

horizontal mullions are indicated. 

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated. 

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill,]to 

produce uniform appearance. 

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for 

fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by 

manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 

1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth 

as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide 

interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. 

2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with 

semirecessed mullions at corners. 

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. 

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless 

otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members 

necessary. 




A. Finish louvers after assembly. 

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and 

containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply 

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of 

anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such 

items to Project site. 


A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where 

required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. 

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. 

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. 

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or 

dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by 

separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. 

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where 

weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied 

during louver installation. 




A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and 

soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. 

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to 

finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. 

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. 

If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace 

with new units. 

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is 

compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. 




SECTION 08952 - TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL SYSTEM 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes translucent fiberglass sandwich panel system for walls consisting of 2-3/4" thick flat, 

prefabricated single units, (including factory installation). 


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance 

requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, 

installation, or other defects in construction: 

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift 

and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

3. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural 

movements to glazing. 

d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. 

e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 

f. Failure of operating units. 

B. Delegated Design: Design translucent wall system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified California licensed professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

1. Wind Loads: Wall system shall withstand the effects of uniform pressure (velocity pressure) acting 

inward and outward wind loads determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 

2. Seismic Performance: Wall System shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to SEI/ASCE 7. 

C. Deflection of entire system shall not exceed L/45, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Air/Water Infiltration: For Water Penetration, curtainwall system shall be tested per procedures of ASTM 

E-331, and shall show no water entry at WTP=10.00 psf, @ 5.00gph/ft. squared. Test shall be performed 

TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL SYSTEM 08952 - 1


before and after uniform loads are applied. For Air Leakage, system shall be tested per procedures of 

ASTM E-283, and shall show results of no more than 0.01 cfm/ft. squared @ 1.56 psf (25 mph) and 0.01 

cfm/ft, squared @ 6.24 psf (50mph). 


A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings and color samples of face sheets and finishes. 

B. Samples: Submit product sample showing thickness, face sheets, colors and insulation 14” x 28”. 

C. Test Reports: To be furnished by systems manufacturer in accordance with Division 1, Submittals. The 

manufacturer shall submit certified test reports by an independent testing organization for each type and 

class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance requirements of this 

specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if by current manufacturer and 

indicative of products used on this project. Test reports required are: 

1. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (ASTM E-84 by UL 723) 

2. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635) 

3. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244) 

4. Impact Strength (UL 972) 

5. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037) 

6. Shear Bond Strength (ASTM D-1002) after 5 different aging conditions 

7. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72) 

8. Insulation "U" Factor (by NFRC 100; ASTM C-236; E-1423 and C-1199) 

9. NFRC Certification - Optional 

10. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) 

11. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E-108) 

12. Class A Roof System UL Listed (UL-790) - Optional 

13. Class I Fire Approval (FM 488l) - Optional 

D. Proof of regular, independent quality control monitoring under a nationally recognized building code 

review and listing program shall be submitted. 

E. Complete energy and structural calculations and all above data must be submitted with any request to be 

included as an approved product to bid this section. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Erection shall be by an installer which has been in the business of erecting and 

installing specified materials for at least five (5) consecutive years, and can show evidence of satisfactory 

completion of projects of similar size, scope and type. 

B. Shop drawings to be prepared and stamped by a California licensed engineer. 

C. System manufacturer must be listed by a recognized building code authority, including the International 

Conference of Building Officials, which requires quality control inspections, and fire, structural and water 

infiltration testing by an approved agency for sandwich panel systems. 



D. Quality control inspections; and required testing conducted at least once each year, shall include 

manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance 

with "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels" as regulated by the ICC-ES or equivalent. 

E. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the 

manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show 

evidence of these materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and 

type within such a period. At least three (3) projects shall have been in successful use for 10 years or 

longer. 

F. Performance Requirement: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of 

the complete panel system. 

G. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensions and profile to structural translucent panel system. 

Specifications indicate performance required. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in system installation areas and indicate if dimensions on shop 

drawings are actual or guaranteed dimensions. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: Any warranties specified in this section shall not alter or change Owners rights and 

provisions received under other contract documents, and shall be in addition to those documents. 

B. Special Warranty: System manufacturer shall provide written agreement to repair or replace all defective 

panel and system craftsmanship for a period of one (1) year, starting at date of delivery. Installer shall 

provide one (1) year warranty against leakage starting from date of installation completion. 

1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING 

A. Store panels on long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover to prevent 

damage. 

1. Follow manufacturer's storage and handling instructions. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by 

Kalwall Corporation – (800) 258-9777 approved equal complying with design intent and all performance 

and material requirements. 



2.2 MATERIALS - TRANSLUCENT FACE SHEETS - PANEL FABRICATION 

A. Translucent fiberglass faces shall be manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins by 

insulated system fabricator specially for architectural use. Thermoplastic (e.g., polycarbonate, acrylic) 

faces are not acceptable. 

B. FLAMMABILITY: The interior face sheet shall be UL listed and have a flamespread rating no greater than 

50 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723. Burn extent by 

ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1". Faces shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or 

flame, or become detached when subjected to 300°F for 25 minutes. 

C. WEATHERABILITY: The full thickness of the exterior face shall not change color more than 3.0 Hunter or 

CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after five (5) years outdoor weather at 5° facing South, determined 

by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure 

maximum, long-term color stability. 

D. Exterior face shall have a permanent glass veil erosion barrier integrally embedded to provide maximum 

long-term resistance to fiber exposure. Sacrificial plastic surface films, coatings or veils not acceptable. 

E. Exterior face sheet shall be smooth, .070" thick. Interior face sheet shall be .045" thick. Faces shall not 

vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color. 

F. Colors: Colors shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. 

1. Exterior Face: “Crystal” 

2. Interior Face: “Crystal” 

G. Panel system shall be 2-3/4" thick, made of two sheets of translucent fiberglass, bonded by heat and 

pressure to either an aluminum or composite grid core specifically for architectural use. 

H. THERMAL INSULATION: Panels shall have a NFRC laboratory tested "U" factor of 0.53 per ASTM C- 

236, E-1423 and C-1199. System shall be NFRC certified. 

I. LIGHT & SOLAR TRANSMISSION: Light transmission and shading coefficient shall be in accordance 

with ASTM E-972. 

1. Light Transmission: 50% 

2. Shading Coefficient: 0.7 

J. GRID CORE: 

1. Grid pattern shall be nominal 12” x 24" shoji and symmetrical about the horizontal centerline for 

each flat panel. 

2. The thermally broken (aluminum) l-beam grid core shall be 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 with provisions for 

mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 

7/16". The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- .002". Thermal 

break shall be 1” wide minimum. 

3. Panels shall withstand 1200°F fire for minimum (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming. 

4. Thermally broken panels shall give minimum CRF (Condensation Resistance Factor) of 80 by 

AAMA 1503 measured on the grid line. 



K. ADHESIVE: 

1. The laminate adhesive shall be heat and pressure resin-type engineered for structural sandwich 

panel use, with minimum 25 years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by 

the International Conference of Building Officials "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel 

Adhesive". 

2. Minimum strength shall be 750 PSI tensile strength by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six 

(6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037. 

3. Shear strength by ASTM D-1002 minimum after exposures to five (5) separate aging conditions: 

a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73°F: 540 PSI 

b. 182°F: 100 PSI 

c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI 

d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182°F: 250 PSI 

e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI 

L. IMPACT RESISTANCE: 

1. The exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand-held pencil and repel an 

impact equal to 70 (230) ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter, 5 lb. 

Free-falling object per UL 972. 

M. Translucent structural sandwich panel shall be a true sandwich panel of flat fiberglass sheets bonded to a 

grid core of mechanically interlocking I-beams and shall be laminated under a controlled process of heat 

and pressure, and deflect no more than 1.9" at 30 psf in 10' by ASTM E-72. 

N. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the l-beam and have a neat, sharp 

edge. In order to insure bonding strength, white spots at intersections of muntins and mullions shall not 

exceed 4 for each 40 sq. ft. of panel, nor shall they be more than 3/36" in width 

O. Panels and aluminum perimeter frame shall be pre-assembled where practical and sealed at the factory. 

Panels should be shipped to the job site in rugged shipping units, ready for erection. 

P. PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM, BATTENS AND ALUMINUM FINISHES: 

1. Closure system shall be extruded 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 aluminum clamp-tite screw type. Curved 

closure system may be roll formed. (Thermal break system optional for walls.) 

2. Aluminum closures to be supplied with 300 series stainless steel screws (excluding final fasteners 

to building) and shall be factory sealed to the panels. Aluminum battens and cap plates shall be 

field installed. 

3. All exposed aluminum to be (mill) (architectural corrosion resistant finish which meets the 

performance requirements of AAMA 2604, color to be selected from manufacturer's standards). 

4. Flexible sealing tape shall be manufacturer's standard pre-applied to serrated edges of closure 

system at factory under controlled conditions. 





A. Do not install systems until conditions adversely affecting installation and performance have been 

corrected. 


A. The general contractor shall prepare openings including isolating dissimilar materials from aluminum 

system which may cause damage by electrolysis, and shall provide temporary enclosures if required. 


A. The installer shall erect translucent panel system in strict accordance with approved shop drawings as 

supplied by manufacturer, including fastening and sealing. All surfaces shall be cleaned before sealants 

are applied. 

B. Secure non-moveable joints and accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 

C. If required, insure weep holes are correctly installed. 

D. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, inspect translucent panel installation and 

make any adjustments necessary to ensure proper installation and weather-tight conditions. 

E. All staging and lifts required for the complete panel system installation and field measuring shall be 

provided by and maintained by the general contractor. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean panel system, both sides, after installation according to manufacturer's recommendations. 




SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 

2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing 

steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated 

according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel 

framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to 

ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 


2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, 

or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1


B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire 

hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by 

construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. 

a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms or Postinstalled, 

expansion anchor. 

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant 

materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of 

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by 

testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. 

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter. 

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings. 

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 

mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 

1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

G. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and 

cross-furring members that interlock. 


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. 

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-CDrywall Furring System. 

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 

1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep 

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized 

to friction fit inside runner. 

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 



1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) . 

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7mm-) 

wide flanges. 


2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, 

galvanized steel. 

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) . 


F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound 

transmission. 

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7mm-) 

wide flanges. 


2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel 

thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) . 

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) 

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 

H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment 

flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) , and depth required 

to fit insulation thickness indicated. 


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other 

properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration 

without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 



1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing 

installation. 

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure 

to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum 

that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. 

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal 

forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that 

interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, 

install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent 

devices. 

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within 

performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 

4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend 

through forms. 

5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. 

D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. 

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet 

vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit 

into wall track. 

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 

3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel 

members that will receive finishes. 

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, 

install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports 

or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended 

ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 



1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce 

joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner 

track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) 

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead 

structure. 

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door 

openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing 

required above door heads. 

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly 

indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid 

structure. 

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated 

assembly indicated. 

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 

C. Direct Furring: 

1. Screw to wood framing. 

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or 

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

D. Z-Furring Members: 

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place 

with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete 

stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches 

(600 mm) o.c. 

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending 

beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of 

attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) 

from corner and cut insulation to fit. 

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 

mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 




SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 




A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent 

testing agency. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those 

tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an 

independent testing agency. 


2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum 

board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 


a. American Gypsum Co. 

b. BPB America Inc. 

c. G-P Gypsum. 

d. Lafarge North America Inc. 

e. National Gypsum Company. 

f. PABCO Gypsum. 

GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1


B. Type X: 

g. Temple. 

h. USG Corporation. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) . 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

C. Special Type X: Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X, and complying with requirements 

of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 

1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 


D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 



E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) , Type X. 


2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 



a. American Gypsum Co. 

b. BPB America Inc. 

c. G-P Gypsum. 

d. Lafarge North America Inc. 

e. National Gypsum Company. 

f. PABCO Gypsum. 

g. Temple. 

h. USG Corporation. 

3. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) , Type X. 

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced 

galvanized steel sheet. 

2. Shapes: 



a. Cornerbead. 

b. Bullnose bead. 

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 

f. Expansion (control) joint. 

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with 

other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use 

setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim 

flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, 

sandable topping compound. 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's 

written recommendations. 

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to 

continuous substrate. 

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 

0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by 

combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 



E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 

2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES 

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. 

B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flamespread 

and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated 



a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Regency Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene. 

b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray. 

c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT. 

3. Texture: Medium. 

C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 


a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite. 

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). 

2. Texture: Light spatter. 


3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except 

floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with 

edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces 

with acoustical sealant. 

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 



1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 

3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4inch 

(6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 

B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface 

except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform 

plane across panel surfaces. 

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for 

panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by 

Architect for visual effect. 

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener 

heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 

Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 

3. Level 3: Surfaces indicated to be taped and floated but not to receive a paint or other finish.. 

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, indicated to receive light texture finishes, 

wall coverings, or flat or satin paint, and all other surfaces not otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Division 9 Section “Painting”. 

5. Level 5: Surfaces indicated to receive gloss and semi-gloss paints or special coatings 



a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Division 9 Section “Painting”. 

3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces 

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. 

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform 

texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. 

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by 

covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, 

texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage 

according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 


A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and 

other causes during remainder of the construction period. 

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, 

sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface 

contamination and discoloration. 




SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic tile. 

2. Tile backing panels. 

3. Metal edge strips. 



B. Samples: 

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 

2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color 

and finish required. 

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for 

each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 


2.1 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, 

compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor and wall tiles 

manufactured by Daltile or comparable product by one of the following: 

CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1


1. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. 

2. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. 

3. Crossville, Inc. 

4. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc. 

5. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 

6. Florim USA. 

7. GranitiFiandre; c/o Trans Ceramica, Ltd. 

8. Interceramic. 

9. Laufen. 

10. Lone Star Ceramics Company. 

11. Grupo Porcelanite. 

12. Portobello America, Inc. 

13. Seneca Tiles, Inc. 

14. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

C. Tile Type CFT-1: Unpolished Floor Tile. 

1. Composition: Porcelain. 

2. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches and 16 by 16 inches as indicated in the Drawings. 


4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges. 

5. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations as indicated in the Drawings. 

6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

D. Tile Type CWT-1 and CWT-2: Glazed wall tile. 

1. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation on the Drawings. 

a. CWT-1: Field Tile Color and Pattern. 

b. CWT-2: Accent Tile Color and Pattern. 

2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm) . 

3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm) . 

4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 

5. Finish: Bright, clear glaze. 

6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

7. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 

8. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard 

white silicone rubber. 

9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and 

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from 

manufacturer's standard shapes: 

a. Base: Coved, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm) . 

b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm) . 

c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining 

flat tile. 

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces 

designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 



2.2 THRESHOLDS 

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor 

finishes. 

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above 

adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 

1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. 

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. 


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. 

b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 

c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 

d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 


B. Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288. 


a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. 

b. James Hardie; Hardiebacker 500. 


2.4 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. 

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. 

c. Bostik, Inc. 

d. C-Cure. 

e. Custom Building Products. 

f. Jamo Inc. 

g. Laticrete International, Inc. 

h. MAPEI Corporation. 

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 

2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 



2.5 GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10. 


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. 

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. 

c. Bostik, Inc. 

d. C-Cure. 

e. Custom Building Products. 

f. Jamo Inc. 

g. Laticrete International, Inc. 

h. MAPEI Corporation. 

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation 

provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. 

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change 

color or appearance of grout. 




a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. 

b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. 

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. 

d. Custom Building Products; Grout and TileSealer. 

e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer. 

f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. 

g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. 

h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. 

i. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of 

installed tile. 



1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with 

tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, 

or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations 

indicated. 


A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesivesor thin-set 

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material 

manufacturer. 

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that 

complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. 

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before 

installing. 

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from 

staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective 

coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 


A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile 

installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of 

Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and 

apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation 

standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: 

a. Exterior tile floors. 

b. Tile floors in wet areas. 

c. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) 

d. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

or larger. 

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering 

without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and 

corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible 

surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. 

Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers 

overlap tile. 

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields 

in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that 

are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 



1. Floor Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) . 

2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) . 

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, 

and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and 

tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants." 

G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, 

set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 

H. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that 

finishes flush with top of tile. 

I. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to 

ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland 

cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 

J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce 

waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 

K. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to 

produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 

3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 

1. Tile Installation F112: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete; TCA F112. 

a. Tile Type: CFT-1 

b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 

c. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout. 

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 

1. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCA W243. 


a. Tile Type: CWT-1 and CWT-2. 

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 

c. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout. 



SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings. 



B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical tile ceiling installation with hanger 

attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items. Show size and location of initial access 

modules. 



E. Research/evaluation reports. 

F. Maintenance data. 


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited 

laboratory. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those 

of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A 

materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. 

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 1


C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 

2. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings." 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal 

to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 


2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL 

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," 

unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 

1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes 

or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load 

equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 

or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, 

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching 

hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times 

that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a 

qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc 

coating, soft temper. 

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, 

"Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm) 

diameter wire. 

E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. 

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard 

moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet 

metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 



2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 

B. Color: White 

a. Second Look II: Product 1761, Fine-Fissured, Angled Tegular, Scored where indicated on 

Drawings. 

C. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard thicknesses. 

D. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL, 15/16” Exposed Tee System. 

B. Direct-Hung Suspension System: Intermediate-duty structural classification. 

C. Access: Upward, with each access unit identified by manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers. 



A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written 

instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite 

edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders. 

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation 

or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset 

resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of 

ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of 

hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger 

wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger 

wires. 

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete 

slabs. 

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. 

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where 

necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more 



than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling 

suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m) . Miter corners accurately and 

connect securely. 

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove 

and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place 

splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of 

material. 




SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 



B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 

C. Maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. 

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. 

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1



2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE 

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product by Armstrong World Industries, 

Inc, as indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Congoleum Corporation. 

2. Mannington Mills, Inc. 

3. Tarkett, Inc. 

4. Vinylasa Tile, Distributed by American Tile Inc. 

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile. 

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) . 

E. Size: 

12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm) . 

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended 

hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions 

indicated. 

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient 

products. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that 

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do 

not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates pass testing. 



4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates pass testing. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and 

remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 

48 hours in advance of installation. 

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. 

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at 

opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less 

than one-half tile at perimeter. 

1. Lay tiles square with room axis. 

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as 

manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern). 

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including 

built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. 

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center 

of door openings. 

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by 

repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking 

device. 

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a 

completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive 

spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. 

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying 

liquid floor polish. 

1. Apply two coat(s). 



C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 

12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient 

products. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Resilient Base: 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

a. Roppe Corporation, USA, Number 150 ”Dark Gray” Rubber Base. 

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 

1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1


2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 

3. Style: Cove (base with toe) for carpet flooring applications and Straight (flat or toeless) for resilient 

or concrete flooring applications 

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). 

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 

H. Finish: Satin. 

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended 

hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate 

conditions indicated. 

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread 

manufacturer. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient 

products. 

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that 

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do 

not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and 

remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be 

installed. 



1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 

48 hours in advance of installation. 

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other 

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent 

pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact 

with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. 

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before 

applying liquid floor polish. 

1. Revise subparagraph below to suit products selected. 

2. Apply two coat(s). 

C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes modular, tufted textured loop carpet tile. 



B. Samples: For each color and texture required. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 

C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 



A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board 

or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, 

"Ventilation." 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when 

occupied for its intended use. 

CARPET TILE 09681 - 1


C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with 

adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install 

carpet tiles before installing these items. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge 

raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and 

delamination. 



A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that 

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not 

less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 


2.1 CARPET TILE 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

1. InterfaceFLOR LLC. 

a. Product Name: Cubic / Dimension GlasBac Tile 

b. Style Number: 13801 

c. Color Number: 6392. 

d. Pattern: Alternating 90-degree / checkerboard. 

B. Yarn System: Post-Consumer Content Type 6 Nylon. 

C. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials 

D. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. 

E. Size: 19.69 inches x 19.69 inches (50 cm x 50 cm). 

F. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 

G. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 



H. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 

1. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus Certified. 

2. Sustainable Carpet Assessment: NSF-140 Gold 

3. Radiant Panel: ASTM E 648, Class 1 

4. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 

5. Lightfastness: AATCC 16 – E 

6. Static: AATCC – 134, less than 3.0 KV 

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation 

provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and 

subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is 

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 



A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. 

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 

C. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, 

alcoves, and similar openings. 

D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 




SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior 

substrates: 

1. Steel. 

2. Wood. 

3. Gypsum board. 



B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required. 

C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in 

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 


A. MPI Standards: 

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 


2.1 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and 

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, 

based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of 

topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1


B. Colors: As indicated in Finish Key on Drawings. 

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS 

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 

B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45. 

C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems 

indicated. 

2.4 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 

B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 

C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. 

D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 

E. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. 

F. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80. 

G. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. 

2.5 WOOD PRIMERS 

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 

2.6 LATEX PAINTS 

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). 

B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2). 

C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 

D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). 



E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 

F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 

G. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2). 

H. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3). 

I. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4). 

J. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5). 

K. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 

2.7 ALKYD PAINTS 

A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1). 

B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3). 

C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 

D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6). 

2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS 

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5). 

2.9 ALUMINUM PAINT 

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1. 

2.10 FLOOR COATINGS 

A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104. 

1. See Division 3, Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for concrete sealers at exposed concrete floors. 

B. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for 

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Wood: 15 percent. 

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and 

primers. 

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting 

Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and 

incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to 

produce paint systems indicated. 

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller 

tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 

D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Mechanical Work: 

a. Uninsulated metal piping. 

b. Uninsulated plastic piping. 

c. Pipe hangers and supports. 

d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and 

outlets. 

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other 

paintable jacket material. 

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 

2. Electrical Work: 

a. Switchgear. 

b. Panelboards. 

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 

E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other 

trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 



F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted 

surfaces. 

3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Substrates, Pedestrian Safety Area Striping: 

1. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A. 

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Interior latex low sheen. 

2. See Division 3, Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for specified sealers. Provide paint products 

recommended by sealer manufacturer. 

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 

1. Clear Sealer System: As specified in Division 3, Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”. 

C. Steel Substrates: 

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. 

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss). 

D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. 


a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Interior latex (satin). 



SECTION 10101 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Markerboards. 

2. Tackboards. 



B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments 

to other work. 

1. Show locations of panel joints. 

2. Include sections of typical trim members. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 

agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. 

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for 

installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project. 

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by 

a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10101 - 1


1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within 




a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. 

b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 

2.1 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES 

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of 

three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch- (0.53-mm-) thick, 

porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. 

1. 

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 


a. AARCO Products, Inc. 

b. ADP Lemco, Inc. 

c. Aywon. 

d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. 

e. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 

f. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 

g. Egan Visual Inc. 

h. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. 

i. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. 

j. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. 

k. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. 

l. Tri-Best Visual Display Products. 

2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's standard 

moisture-barrier backing. 

3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 

2.2 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES 



1. A-1 Visual Systems. 

2. AARCO Products, Inc. 

3. ADP Lemco, Inc. 

4. Aywon. 

5. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. 

6. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 



7. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 

8. Egan Visual Inc. 

9. EverProducts by Glenroy Inc. 

10. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. 

11. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. 

12. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. 

13. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. 

14. Tri-Best Visual Display Products. 

B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, plastic-impregnated cork sheet factory 

laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick particleboard backing. 

2.3 MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES 

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded 

aluminum; standard size and shape. 

1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard. 

B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. 

1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. 


A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet 

to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. 

B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display 

boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories 

indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with 

minimum number of joints,[balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. 

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting sections of 

markerboards. 

3. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, 

provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from 

manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated. 

D. Modular Visual Display Boards: Fabricated with integral panel clips attached to core material. 

E. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. 

Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units 

at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 




A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 

2.6 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE 

1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. 

a. Color: White. 

2. Corners: Square. 

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

5. Mounting: Wall. 

6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

7. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard with clear anodic finish. 


a. Chalktray: Box type. 

B. Tackboard : Factory assembled. 

1. Tack Surface: Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 

2. Corners: Square. 

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

5. Mounting: Wall. 

6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

7. Edges: Concealed by trim. 



a. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard style, with clear anodic finish. 

A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, 

defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces 

and wall surfaces. 

B. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep 

perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, 

anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. 

C. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and 

accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 



1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with 

minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. 

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting sections of 

markerboards. 

D. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual 

display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure both top and bottom of 

boards to walls. 

1. Field-Applied Aluminum Trim: Attach trim over edges of visual display boards and conceal 

grounds and clips. Attach trim to boards with fasteners at not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

a. Attach chalktrays to boards with fasteners at not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 

E. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label 

to visual display surface in each room. Cover and protect visual display surfaces. 




SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 


E. Maintenance data. 


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or 

another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify 

products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation 

Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments 

designated as accessible. 

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for 

smoothness. 

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G) . 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed. 

B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. 

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-lb (20.4-kg) density, that complies with the testing and 

product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing 

of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

D. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of 

the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic 

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

2.2 STEEL UNITS 



1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 

2. All American Metal Corp. 

3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 

4. Ampco, Inc. 

5. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 

6. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 

7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 

8. Global Steel Products Corp. 

9. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 

10. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 

11. Metpar Corp. 

12. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 

13. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 

14. Shanahan's Limited. 

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor anchored. 

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, flat panel. 

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core 

material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured 

by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-sightline system. Exposed 

surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core 

material, or other imperfections. 



1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft 

paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) for doors and panels 

and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters. 

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on 

units. 

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations 

where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. 

E. Urinal-Screen Construction: 

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. 

2. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full-height 

flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick. 

3. Wedge-Shaped, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panels, V-shaped, fabricated for concealed 

wall attachment, and maximum 6 inches (152 mm) wide at wall and minimum 1 inch (25 mm) wide 

at protruding end. 

F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Electrolytically coated or hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with nominal basemetal 

(uncoated) thicknesses standard with manufacturer. 

G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to 

match hardware. 

H. Brackets (Fittings): 

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; chrome-plated brass. 

I. Steel-Sheet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish, with one color in each room. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 


A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and 

accessories. 

1. Material: Chrome-plated brass. 

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open 

at any angle up to 90 degrees. 

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access 

and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with 

regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent 

in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory 

requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as 

accessible. 



B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile 

and in manufacturer's standard finish. 

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chromeplated 

steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. 

Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip 

galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 


A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling 

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal 

supports and leveling mechanism. 

B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with 

leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to 

conceal anchorage. 

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors 

for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32inch- 

(813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. 



A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and 

plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels 

and walls. 

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at 

midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in 

masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written 

instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 

degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully 

closed position. 




SECTION 10260 – IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Wall guards. 

2. Corner guards. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-response 

characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant 

wall protection unit. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include 

sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed 

and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated. 

1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated 

below. 

1. Wall and Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end 

caps, and field splices. 

E. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer. 

F. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material. 

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 

H. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals. 

IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10260 - 1


1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition 

of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using 

cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance. 

I. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for 

storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Wall-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, 

color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot- (2.4-m-) long units. 

2. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, 

color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than twelve, 4-foot- (1.2-m-) long units. 

J. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run 

as installed units. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall 

protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 014000 "Quality 

Requirements." 

D. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project. 

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's 

approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for 

review. 

E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surfaceburning 

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 

by UL or another qualified testing agency. 

F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. 


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside wellventilated 

area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the 

period plastic materials are stored. 

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 

3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains 

a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) . 

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 



b. Store wall-guard covers in a horizontal position. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is 

enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining 

temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the 

remainder of the construction period. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 


a. Structural failures. 

b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or 

acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded material, thickness as indicated. 

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to 

ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543 or ASTM D 1308. 

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 



B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum 

impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test 

Method A. 

C. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in 

(ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5. 

ASTM B 221 

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other 

fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 



E. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and that complies 

with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard 

Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale 

Environmental Chambers." 

2.2 WALL GUARDS 

A. Rub Rail as indicated on Drawings: Assembly consisting of continuous snap-on cover installed over 

concealed, continuous retainer. 

1. Product: Provide Acrovyn FR-270 bumper rail as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. 

2. Cover: Extruded flexible PVC, minimum 0.078-inch (2.0-mm) wall thickness; as follows: 

a. Profile: Half-round profile, nominal 1-1/8 inches high by 1-1/8 inches deep (30 mm high by 

30 mm deep) . 

b. Color and Texture: Pearl Grey. 

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 

4. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field 

adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover. 

5. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware. 

6. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall. 

2.3 CORNER GUARDS 

A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards as indicated on Drawings: Fabricated from PVC plastic, 

acrylic-modified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges; fabricated with 90- or 135degree 

turn to match wall condition. 

1. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain 

one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product 

Requirements." 

2. Product: Provide Acrovyn VA Series Corner Guards as manufactured by Construction Specialties, 

Inc. 

3. Wing Size: Nominal 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (65 by 65 mm). 

4. Mounting: Adhesive. 

5. Color and Texture: Pearl Grey. 


A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, 

dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. 

B. Preform curved semi-rigid, impact-resistant sheet wall covering in factory for radius and sheet thickness as 

follows: 

1. Sheet Thickness of 0.060 Inch (1.5 mm): 36-inch (914-mm) radius. 



C. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only 

as necessary for shipping and handling. 

D. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of 

wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to 

produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 

E. Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns. 



A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other 

solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 

1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify compatibility 

with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 



A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system 

components. 

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 


A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do 

not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished 

Work. 

1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on 

Drawings or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 

a. Rub Rails: 47 inches above finished floor to top of rub rail. 

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete 

installation. 

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. 



b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum 

retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches 

(305 mm) . 

c. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams. 

B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a 

complete installation. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, 

ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. 

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 




SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Contractor Installation of Owner Supplied Signs. 

a. Panel signs. 

b. Illuminated panel signs. 


A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's 

"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural 

Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 


A. FedEx Signage and Graphics Standards: Signs shall be installed in accordance with the FedEx Signage 

Standards. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

2. Comply with applicable provisions of the 2010 California Building Code. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, 


1.5 COORDINATION WITH OWNER AND OWNER’S SIGNAGE STANDARDS 

A. Contractor shall coordinate directly with Owner and Owner’s Sign Fabricator as directed by Owner. Obtain 

a complete inventory of signs required to be installed by Contractor as early as is practical. 

B. Obtain from Owner, a copy of the FedEx Signage Standards for coordination of sign types, sizes, 

mounting height, mounting condition, and other pertinent information pertaining to the installation of signs. 

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

SIGNAGE 10431 - 1


1. Review inventory of Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed Signs. 

2. Review and finalize construction schedule, verify availability of signs, materials and accessories to 

be furnished by Owner, accessories to be furnished by Contractor / Installer and facilities needed 

to make progress and avoid delays. 


2.1 OWNER FURNISHED SIGNS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Owner will supply signs, fastening devices and accessories as indicated on Drawings and herein. Sign 

types consist of: 

1. Interior Identifying Devices (Room Signs) as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Interior Panel Signs as indicated and as directed by Owner. 

3. Illuminated Panel Signs as indicated and as directed by Owner. 

2.2 PANEL SIGNS 

A. Interior Panel Signs as indicated and as directed by Owner: 

1. Polycarbonate Interior Identifying Devices as defined in the FedEx Criteria Documents Manual, 

Sections C1031 through C1033. and other standard FedEx signage. 

2. Miscellaneous Polycarbonate Interior Communication Devices as required by FedEx, OSHA and 

other regulatory agencies. 

B. Exterior Panel Signs as indicated and as directed by Owner. 

C. Illuminated Signs as indicated and as directed by Owner. 

D. Tactile and Braille Signs. 


A. Anchors and Inserts: As provided by Owner or Owner’s Signage Fabricator. 



A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying 

with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other 

defects in appearance. 

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where 

not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to 

SIGNAGE 10431 - 2


allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing 

within swing of door. 

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent 

requirements apply. 

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinylcovered 

or rough surfaces. 

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 

3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) 

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes 

as directed by Owner. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to 

substrate. 

thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with 

predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are 

not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to 

substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 

5. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal 

mounting materials. 


SIGNAGE 10431 - 3


SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Standard metal lockers. 

2. Locker benches. 



B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work. 

C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 


E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, 

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with 

Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and 

Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 


1.4 WARRANTY 


components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed 

applications. 

B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , alloy and temper recommended by aluminum 

producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 

C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled. 

D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

E. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock 

washers for nuts on moving parts. 

F. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 

1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior 

walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance. 

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Penco Products, Inc.; 

Vanguard Lockers or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Art Metal Products. 

2. ASI Storage Solutions Inc. 

3. DeBourgh Mfg. Co. 

4. General Storage Systems Ltd. 

5. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 

6. List Industries Inc. 

7. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC. 

8. Republic Storage Systems Company. 

9. Shanahan's Manufacturing Limited. 

10. Tennsco Corp. 

B. Locker Arrangement: As indicated on Drawings. 

C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. 

D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from 

unperforated 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped 

and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. 

Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. 



F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into 

channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 

1. Doors less than 12 inches (305 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominalthickness 

steel sheet. 

2. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches (381 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21mm) 

nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

3. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more 

than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors. 

4. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) 

nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 

5. Door Style: Louvered vents. 

G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per 

hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 

degrees. 

1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches (51 mm) high. 

Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42 inches (1067 mm) high. 

H. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in combination 

locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant. 

1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch hooks; fabricated from 

0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; 

with resilient silencer on each latch hook. 

2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and moving 

components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that 

allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging 

lock or latching mechanism. 

I. Door Handle and Latch for Box Lockers: Stainless-steel strike plate with integral pull; with steel padlock 

loop that projects through metal locker door. 

J. Combination Padlocks: Provided by Owner. 

K. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall hooks. 

2. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks. 

3. Coat Rods: For each compartment of single-tier metal lockers. 

L. Accessories: 

1. Legs: 6 inches (152 mm) high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated from 

0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker. 

M. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 

1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



2.3 LOCKER BENCHES 

A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches (445 mm) . 

B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges. 

1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick (241 mm wide by 32 mm thick) . 

2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of clear 

lacquer on top and sides. 

C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top 

and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows: 

1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard 

pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish; 

anchored with exposed fasteners. 


a. Color: Match metal lockers. 

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or 

distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation. 

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and 

common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal 

locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly. 

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for nominal 

assembly at Project site. 

D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor. 

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches (1219 

mm) above the floor. 

E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 

F. Coat Rods: Fabricated from 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter steel; chrome finished. 

G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with 

numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high. 

H. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter 

fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 



1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends. 

2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer's 

standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for 

application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 

B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's 

standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written 

instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 



A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 

inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing 

plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. 

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top of lockers and to floor. 

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door 

faces or face frames. 

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to 

form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 

3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. 

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. 

4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 

5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. 

6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 

D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more 

than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and 

anchor bases to floor. 




SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 



B. Maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for 

fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated 

are accommodated. 

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 

(smooth or polished). 

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET 

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 


FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 1


a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Cosmic Series. 

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series. 

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. 

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 

1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding 

wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 

F. Door Material: Steel sheet. 

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. 

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. 

2. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted white on unexposed side. 

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim 

style, and door material and style indicated. 

J. Accessories: 

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire 

protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with 

plated or baked-enamel finish. 

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door 

handle. 

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, 

and location. Locate as directed by Architect. 

K. Finishes: 

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 

2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 

3) Lettering Color: Red. 

4) Orientation: Vertical. 

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: 

a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another 

finish. 

b. Interior of cabinet and door. 




A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware 

to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth. 



A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be 

installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights 


C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 

D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 

E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices 

operate properly. 

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair 

by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 



B. Operation and maintenance data. 

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire 

Extinguishers." 

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency 


C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire 

extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 1



2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket 

indicated. 


a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar 

coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. 

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 5 lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based 

dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or 

structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black 

baked-enamel finish. 


a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and 

location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter 

decals applied to mounting surface. 



a. Orientation: Vertical. 

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. 



B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements 

of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 




SECTION 10605 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Heavy-duty wire mesh partitions. 

2. Wire mesh ceilings. 

3. Wire mesh storage lockers. 

4. Wire mesh stairway partitions. 

5. Wire mesh equipment barriers. 


1. Division 2, Section "Chain-Link Fences and Gates" for chain-link fencing. 

2. Division 3, Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for building anchors into concrete construction for wire 

mesh partitions. 

3. Division 5, Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railing systems requiring wire mesh railing insert 

panels. 

4. Division 9, Section "Interior Painting" for field painting wire mesh items. 


A. As defined in ASTM E 2016: 

1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with 

wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections. 

2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 


A. Delegated Design: Design wire mesh units, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 


B. Structural Performance: Wire mesh units shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the appropriate 

seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7: 

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 

Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat 

loss. 

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 1


1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material 

surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, 

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items. 


1. Include clearances required for operation of gates. 

C. Setting Drawings: For anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with 

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 

E. Samples for Verification: 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) panel constructed of specified frame members 

and wire mesh. Show method of finishing members at intersections. 

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh units indicated to comply with performance requirements and 

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer 


G. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

H. Welding certificates. 

I. Maintenance Data: For wire mesh unit hardware to include in maintenance manuals. 

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for 

storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Door Locks: Equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 5 

locks. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing wire mesh items and providing 

professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wire mesh items, including Shop Drawings, 

based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to 

those indicated for this Project. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single manufacturer. 





2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 


A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts 

wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. 

B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition 

door hardware delivered to Project site. 

1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions 

with each item or package. 

C. Deliver keys to Owner at the Project Site. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field 

measurements before fabrication. 



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works, Inc. 

2. American Woven Wire Corporation. 

3. California Wire Products Corporation. 

4. Central Wire and Iron. 

5. Donaldson, R. J., Inc. 

6. Folding Guard Corporation. 

7. G-S Company (The). 

8. Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 

9. Jesco Industries, Inc. 

10. Kenco Wire and Iron Products Inc. 

11. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 

12. King Wire Partitions, Inc. 

13. Lakeside Wire and Iron Company. 

14. Miller Wire Works, Inc. 

15. Newark Wire Works Inc. 

16. Standard Wire & Steel Works. 

17. Wire Crafters, LLC. 



2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) . 

B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is indicated or required by structural 

loads. 

E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed structural-steel tubing. 

F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc 

(galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation. 

G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 

H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of 

safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing 

agency. 

1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 

service condition (mild). 

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and 

ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) , for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 

316, for anchors. 

3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four 

times the loads imposed. 

4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load 

equal to six times the loads imposed. 

I. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated and 

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials; with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of 

type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by wire 

mesh construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and 

inspecting agency. 

J. Seismic Bracing: Angles with legs not less than 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) wide, formed from 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) 

thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; with bolted connections and 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolts. 

K. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9, Section "Interior Painting." 

L. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, complying 

with MPI#79. 


M. Zinc-Rich Primer: Compatible with topcoat, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29. 

N. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with 

SSPC-Paint 20. 



2.3 HEAVY-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 

A. Mesh: Wire Crafters Style 840 or CBP approved equal material. 

B. Vertical and Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-0.097-inch (38-by-19-by-2.5-mm) cold-rolled, Cshaped 

steel channels; with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches (450 

mm) o.c. along center of framing. 

C. Vertical and Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-1/4-inch (38-by-19-by-6-mm) cold-rolled steel 

channels; with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 

along center of framing. Provide vertical panel stiffeners in shapes and sizes as recommended by 

manufacturers. 

D. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 cold-rolled steel channels, not less than 1 by 1/2 by 1/8 inch (25 by 13 by 3 

mm), bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh or1-1/2-by-3/4-by-1/8-inch (38-by-19-by-3-mm) cold-rolled 

steel channels with wire woven through. 

E. Top Capping Bars: 

3-inch-by-4.1-lb (76-mm-by-1.9-kg) hot-rolled steel channels. 

F. Posts for 90-Degree Corners: 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (50-by-50-by-3-mm) steel angles with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm- 

) diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with floor anchor clips. 

G. Posts for Other-Than-90-Degree Corners: Manufacturer's standard steel 2-inch- (50-mm) OD pipe or 

tubing with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing. 

H. Adjustable Corner Posts: 2, manufacturer's standard steel pipe or tubing posts connected by steel hinges 

at 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. attached to posts; with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt 

holes in vertical framing. 

I. Line Posts: 3-inch-by-4.1-lb (76-mm-by-1.9-kg) or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-0.1265-inch (89-by-32-by-3.2-mm) 

steel channels; with 5-by-18-by-1/4-inch (125-by-450-by-6-mm) steel base plates punched for attachment 

to floor. 

J. Three- and Four-Way Intersection Posts: 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) tubular steel, with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm- 

) diameter bolt holes aligned for bolting to adjacent panels. 

K. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical 

framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment. 

L. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/2-by-3/4-by- 

1/8-inch (38-by-19-by-3-mm) steel channels or C-channels, banded with 1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-3-mm) 

flat steel bar cover plates on 4 sides, and with 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick angle strike bar and cover on strike 

jamb. 

1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch (89-by-89-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, 

riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 

2. Padlock Lug: Mortised into door framing and enclosed with steel cover. 

3. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with cylinder specified in Division 8, Section "Door Hardware"; 

operated by key outside and lever or panic hardware as indicated inside. 

4. Inactive Leaf Hardware: Cane bolt at bottom and chain bolt at top. 

M. Accessories: 



1. Sheet Metal Base: Not less than 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet. 

2. Adjustable Filler Panels: Not less than 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; 

capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to 300 mm) . 

3. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch (25 mm) of 

adjustment. 

N. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Hot-dip galvanized and shop primed for field painting unless otherwise 

indicated. 


2.4 WIRE MESH CEILINGS 

A. Mesh, Framing, and Stiffeners: Fabricated from same mesh and framing as wire mesh partition panels. 

B. Perimeter Partition Supports: 1-1/2-by-1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-38-by-3-mm) steel angle, with 1/4-inch- 

(6-mm-) diameter bolt holes aligned for bolting to top of wire mesh partitions and to sides of wire mesh 

ceiling panels. 

C. Wall Supports: 1-1/2-by-1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-38-by-3-mm) steel angle punched for attachment to wall 

and wire mesh ceiling panels. 

D. Intermediate Supports: Steel I-beam, as recommended by manufacturer. 

E. Intermediate Support Posts: 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (50-by-50-by-3-mm) steel pipe or tubing. 

F. Finishes: Match adjacent wire mesh partitions. 

2.5 WIRE MESH CANINE KENNELS 

A. Unit Sizes: 

1. Width: As indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 

3. Height: 72 inches unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Mesh: 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) 

diamond mesh. 

C. Wall Panels: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angle framing on top, bottom, and back 

sides, and 3-by-1/8-inch (76-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel flat bar framing on front side; with wire mesh 

welded to framing. 

1. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles or 3/4-by- 

1/4-inch (19-by-6-mm) hot-rolled steel flat bars. 

D. Backs: 

E. Tops: None. 

0.027-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet. 



F. Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as wall panels, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8inch 

(32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles on 4 sides; with wire mesh welded to framing. Include door strike 

and padlock hasp. 

1. Horizontal Stiffeners for Single-Tier Doors: 3/4-by-1/4-inch (19-by-6-mm) steel flat bars. 

2. Hinges: Full-surface type, 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (64-by-64-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, 

riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 

G. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 

2.6 WIRE MESH STAIRWAY PARTITIONS 

A. Heavy-Duty Stairway Partitions: 

1. Diamond Mesh: 0.192-inch- (4.9-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 2-inch 

(50-mm) diamond pattern and securely clinched to frames. 

2. Vertical and Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-0.0966-inch (38-by-19-by-2.5-mm) coldrolled, 

C-shaped steel channels; with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 

18 inches (450 mm) o.c. along center of framing. 

3. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-1/8-inch (38-by-19-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel 

channels with wire woven through, or two 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) cold-rolled 

steel channels bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh. 

B. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/2-by-3/4-by- 

1/8-inch (38-by-19-by-3-mm) steel channels, banded with 1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-3-mm) flat steel bar 

cover plates on 4 sides, and with 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb. 

1. Hinges: Full-surface spring type, 3-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch (89-by-89-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; 

bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 

2. Exit Device: As specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware." 

3. Tamper Shield: Fabricated from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; 15 inches 

(381 mm) high by width of door. 

C. Door Jamb Framing: 

2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (50-by-50-by-3-mm) steel pipe or tubing. 

D. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical 

framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment. 

E. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch (25 mm) of adjustment. 

F. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Hot-dip galvanized and shop primed for field painting unless otherwise 

indicated. 



A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use largersized 

components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete 

installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes. 



1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 

2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and finish sand. 

B. Heavy-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, 

and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 

1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 

2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. 

a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel height and 

as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical 

framing. 

b. Fabricate three- and four-way intersections using intersection posts Fabricate partition and 

door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. 

3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. 

4. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. 

a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, fabricated 

from same mesh and framing as partition panels. 

5. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install 

hardware. 

C. Wire Mesh Ceilings: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items 

indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 

1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 

2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. 

a. Provide stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel span and as 

recommended by wire mesh ceiling manufacturer. Weld stiffeners to framing. 

D. Wire Mesh Stairway Partitions: Provide door jamb framing on each side of doors. Attach tamper shields 

centered behind exit devices. 

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 






A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron components. 

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 



3. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean wire mesh components of 

grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. 

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum 

requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure 

conditions of installed metal fabrications: 

1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized 

finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with 

SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for 

shop painting. 


D. Shop Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard one-coat, 

shop-coat finish suitable for use intended. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for 

applying and curing. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and 

other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. 

C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other 

solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION 

A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 

12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through anchor clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as 

required to achieve level and plumb installation. 

1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if 

indicated on Shop Drawings. 

B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 

12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition 

posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. 





C. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as 

follows: 


bolts. 

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 

3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate 

with carpentry work to locate backing members. 

4. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing 

between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 

5. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed 

reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 

D. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter "U" bolts spaced not 

more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c. 

E. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 

1. On each side of sliding door openings. 

2. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between every other panel. 

3. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between each panel. 

F. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer 

and as required for stability, extending and fastening members to supporting structure. 

G. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run, provide adjustable filler 

panels to fill openings. 

H. Install doors complete with door hardware. 

I. Install service windows complete with window hardware. 

J. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors where indicated. 

K. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 

3.3 WIRE MESH CEILINGS ERECTION 

A. Anchor wall support angle to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. and as follows: 


bolts. 

2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing 

between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 

3. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed 

reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 

B. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to wall support angles with bolts at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 



C. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to wire mesh partitions with slotted angles bolted to sides of ceiling panels 

and to top of partitions at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 

D. Attach wire mesh ceiling panels to intermediate supports as recommended by manufacturer. 

E. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer 


3.4 WIRE MESH STAIRWAY PARTITIONS ERECTION 

A. Anchor wire mesh stairway partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, postinstalled expansion 

anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each post. Adjust wire mesh partition 

posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. 



B. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer 


C. Install doors complete with door hardware. 




SECTION 10730 – ALUMINUM ENTRANCE CANOPIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Design, fabrication, and installation of welded extruded aluminum canopy systems. 

B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under this Section: Column sleeves (styrofoam blockouts) or anchor 

bolts (if required) 


A. Division 7, Section “Metal Wall Panels.” 

B. Division 7, Section “Insulated-Core Metal Wall Panels.” 

C. Division 13, Section “Metal Building Systems.” 


A. The Aluminum Association (AA): 

1. The Aluminum Design Manual 2000, Specifications & Guidelines for Aluminum Structures. 

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 

1. AAMA 2603, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for 

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 

1. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

2. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, 

Profiles, and Tubes. 

3. ASTM C 150, Specification for Portland Cement. 

ALUMINUM ENTRANCE CANOPIES 10730 - 1


4. ASTM C 404, Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 

E. American Welding Society (AWS): 

1. ANSI/AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 


A. Design Requirements: 

1. Design, fabricate and install canopies as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 

2. Design Canopies in accordance with The Aluminum Design Manual 2000. 

3. Comply with the wind requirements of California Building Code - 2010. 

4. Provide an all welded extruded aluminum system complete with internal drainage. Non-welded 

systems are not acceptable. 

5. Provide expansion joints to accommodate temperature changes of 120 degrees F. Provide 

expansion joints with no metal to metal contact. 

6. Manufacturer’s design shall be actively and directly coordinated with Pre-Engineered Metal 

Building System Manufacturer to ensure adequate structural systems are provided to 

accommodate attachment of canopy system to the metal building system. 

B. Performance Requirements: 

1. Grout: Compressive strength of 2000 psi, minimum. 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product information, specifications, and installation instructions for canopy 

components and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plan dimensions, elevations, sections and details. 

C. Samples: 

1. Selection: Manufacturer’s full range of colors for the finishes selected. 

2. Verification: 6-inch-square samples of each finish selected on the substrate specified. 

D. Design Data: Design calculations bearing the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the 

state of California. Design calculations shall state that the canopy system design complies with the wind 

load requirements of ASCE 7and stability criteria of the California Building Code – 2010 edition, and all 

other governing criteria. 

E. Certifications: 

1. Manufacturer’s certification of installer. 

2. Manufacturer’s certification that structural members provided by metal building manufacturer’s 

design as depicted in their shop drawings are adequate for canopy fastening. 




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least ten years experience in the design, fabrication, and erection of 

extruded aluminum entrance canopies and / or aluminum walkway cover systems. 

B. Installer Qualifications: At least five years experience in the erection of extruded aluminum entrance 

canopies and / or aluminum walkway cover systems manufactured by the selected manufacturer. 

PART 2 - PRODUCT 

1. Installer must be certified by the manufacturer and documentation of such proof shall be submitted 

prior to the start of the Work. 


A. The design is based on products fabricated by: Mapes Architectural Canopies, Inc., 7748 N. 56th Street, 

Lincoln, NE 68514, 888-273-1132, fax 877-455-6572, www.mapescanopies.com. 

1. Comparable products by the following manufacturers also will be acceptable: 

a. Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc., 1477 Rosedale Drive, Hiram, GA 30141, 770-439-2120, 

fax 770-439-2122. 

b. Dittmer Architectural Aluminum, 1006 Shepard Road, Winter Springs, FL 32708, 407-699- 

1755, 800-822-1755, fax 407-695-4430, www.dittdeck.com 

2. Substitutions: Comparable products of other manufacturers will be considered under standard 

substitution procedures. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Members: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063 alloy, T6 temper. 

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or 300 series stainless steel. 

C. Protective Coating for Aluminum Columns Embedded in Concrete: Clear acrylic. 

D. Grout: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 

2. Sand: ASTM C 404. 


E. Gaskets: Dry seal santoprene pressure type. 

F. Aluminum Flashing: ASTM B 209, Type 3003 H14, 0.040 inch, minimum. 



2.3 MIXES 

A. Grout: 1 part portland cement to 3 parts sand, add water to produce a pouring consistency. 


A. General: 

1. Shop Assembly: Assemble components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field 

assembly. 

2. Welding: In accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.2. 

3. Bent Construction: Factory weld beams to columns with neatly mitered corners to form one-piece 

rigid bents. Make welds smooth and uniform using an inert gas shielded arc. Perform suitable 

edge preparation to assure 100% penetration. Grind welds only where interfering with adjoining 

structure to allow for flush connection. Field welding is not permitted. Rigid mechanical joints may 

be used only if fully welded bents cannot be shipped on local, state, or federal highways without a 

special permit from the department of transportation. 

4. Deck Construction: Fabricate from extruded modules that interlock in a self-flashing manner. 

Positively fasten interlocking joints at 8 inches on center creating a monolithic structural unit 

capable of developing the full strength of the sections. The fastenings must have minimum shear 

strength of 350 pounds each. Assemble deck with sufficient camber to offset dead load deflection. 

B. Columns: Provide radius-cornered tubular extrusions with cutout and internal diverter for drainage where 

indicated. 

C. Beams: Provide open-top tubular extrusion, top edges thickened for strength and designed to receive 

deck members in self-flashing manner. Provide structural ties in tops of all beams. 

D. Deck: Extruded self-flashing sections interlocking into a composite unit. Provide welded plate closures at 

deck ends. 

E. Fascia: Manufacturer’s standard shape or a composite of manufacturer’s standard shapes to achieve the 

shape and appearance as indicated on the Drawings. Provide fascia splices where continuous runs of 

fascia are jointed. Locate splices to be in line with bents and fasten in place on hidden or non-vertical 

surfaces. 

F. Arches: For barrel vault protective covers, provide sharp-cornered tubular extrusions. 

G. Factory Finishing: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the AAMA for 

designating aluminum finishes. 

1. High performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with 

inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; 

Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal 

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s written instructions. 

a. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard two-coat, thermocured 

system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat 

containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with 

AAMA 2604. 





b. Color: Regal White as manufactured by Kingspan, to match Insulated-Core Metal Wall 

Panels. 

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that all concrete, masonry, and roofing work in the vicinity is complete 

and cleaned. 

3.2 ERECTION 

A. Erect canopies true to line, level, and plumb. Protect aluminum columns embedded in concrete with clear 

acrylic. Fill downspout columns with grout to the discharge level to prevent standing water. Install weep 

holes at top of concrete in non-draining columns to remove condensation. 

B. Provide hairline miters and fitted joints. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Clean all protective cover components promptly after installation. 


A. Protect materials during and after installation. 




SECTION 10801 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 

2. Custodial accessories. 

B. Accessories: 

1. Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser - TTP 

2. Surface Mounted Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser - PTD 

3. Surface Mounted Liquid-Soap Dispenser - SD 

4. Surface Mounted Seat-Cover Dispenser – SCD 

5. Surface Mounted Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit – SND 

6. Grab Bar – GB 

7. Sanitary-Napkin/Tampon Vendor – SNTV 

8. Mirror Unit – MU 

9. Coat Hook – CH 

10. Utility Shelf – US 

11. Mop and Broom Holder – MBH 

12. Free-standing Waste Receptacle - WR 

13. Odor Control Dispenser - OCD 



B. Product Schedule: 

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 

2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. 

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1



2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the 

following: 

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 

2. American Specialties, Inc. 

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

4. Bradley Corporation. 

5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 

B. Waste Receptacle - WR: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Brute Trash Can with Lid (RUB263200GY and RUB263100GY), gray, 

22-inch diameter, seamless polyethylene construction, NSF/USDA certified. 

C. Grab Bar - GB: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Model B-26806. 

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) . 

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. 

D. Sanitary-Napkin/Tampon Vendor - SNTV: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: RMC25166500, Medium/Large, 17 pads, 26 tampons, White. 

E. Surface Mounted Seat-Cover Dispenser – SCD: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: RMC25132000, Half-fold, White Plastic. 

F. Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser - TTP: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Jumbo Twin Jumbo Roll Bathroom Tissue Dispenser, Translucent. 

G. Surface Mounted Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser - PTD: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: EnMotion Touchless Paper Towel Dispenser, 14.65”x9.75”x16.6, 

Translucent Smoke. 

H. Surface Mounted Liquid-Soap Dispenser - SD: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Premium Touch Free Foam Soap Dispenser, CEB74450. 



I. Odor Control Dispenser - OCD: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Technical Concepts TCELL Odor Control Dispenser, White. 

J. Mirror Unit - MU: 


2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel. 

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. 

a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to 

hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a 

special tool to remove. 

4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 

K. Coat Hook - CH: 


2. Description: Single-prong unit. 

3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 

2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the 

following: 

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 

2. American Specialties, Inc. 

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

4. Bradley Corporation. 

5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 

B. Utility Shelf - US: 


2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and supported by 

two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 

3. Size: 24 inches (609 mm) long by 5 inches (125 mm) deep. 

4. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish 

(satin). 

C. Mop and Broom Holder - MBH: 


2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, and holders. 

3. Length: 34 inches (865 mm). 



4. Hooks: Four. 

5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 

6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 



a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to 

substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly 

anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Install Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, 

using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer unless 

otherwise directed by Owner. Install in locations indicated. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in 

locations and at heights indicated. 




SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Electrically operated projection screens and controls. 



B. Shop Drawings: For projection screens. Show layouts and types of projection screens. Include the 

following: 

1. For electrically operated projection screens and controls: 


a. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 

b. Location of wiring connections. 

c. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. 

d. Anchorage details. 

e. Wiring diagrams. 

2.1 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, 

and other components necessary for a complete installation. 

1. Controls: Remote, three-position control switch. 

2. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic 

thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. 

3. End-Mounted Motor: Instant-reversing, gear-drive motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, 

automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches, and positive-stop action to prevent 

coasting. 

PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1


4. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided polyester, on 

each side of screen connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen flat horizontally. In lieu of 

tab tensioning, screens may be constructed from vinyl-coated screen cloth that contains horizontal 

stiffening monofilaments to resist edge curling. 

B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens without Ceiling Closure: Motor-in-roller or end-mounted motor 

units with bottom of case entirely or partially open under screen compartment. 



a. Motor in Roller: 

1) BEI Audio-Visual Products; Alpine XL. 

2) Da-Lite Screen Company; Professional Electrol. 

3) Draper Inc.; Paragon. 

4) Stewart Filmscreen Corporation; Model A-B. 

b. End-Mounted Motor: 

1) Da-Lite Screen Company; Senior Electrol. 

2) Draper Inc.; Access/Series V. 

3) Stewart Filmscreen Corporation; Model C. 

2. Provide screen case constructed to be installed with underside flush with ceiling. 

2.2 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL 

A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain not less than 0.9, and gain not less than 0.8 at an angle of 50 

degrees from the axis of the screen surface. 



a. BEI Audio-Visual Products; Matte White. 

b. Bretford, Inc.; Matte White. 

c. Da-Lite Screen Company; Matte White. 

d. Draper Inc.; Fiberglass Matte White. 

B. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams. 

C. Edge Treatment: Without black masking borders. 

D. Size of Viewing Surface: 70 by 70 inches (1778 by 1778 mm unless otherwise indicated. 




3.1 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN INSTALLATION 

A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction 

indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating 

screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 

1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum 

board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum 

cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables 

except in unfinished spaces. 

2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other 

operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 




SECTION 12356 - CASEWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes break room and laboratory cabinets. 


A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. 



1. Cabinets. 

2. Cabinet hardware. 


1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating 

percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement 

indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 

2. Certificates for Credit MR 6 or Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products 

specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification and chain-of-custody 

requirements. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation 

indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, 

finishes, filler panels, and hardware. 

D. Samples: For cabinet finishes. 


A. Product Certificates: For casework. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited 

certification body. 

CASEWORK 12356 - 1


B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification 

body. 


2.1 CABINETS 

A. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1. 

1. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a 

semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 

B. Regional Materials: Cabinets shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from 

materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles 

(800 km) of Project site. 

C. Regional Materials: Cabinets shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 

D. Certified Wood: Cabinets shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD- 

01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for 

Chain of Custody Certification." 

E. Face Style: Flush overlay. 

F. Cabinet Style: Face frame. 

G. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, plastic-laminate-faced particleboard, with PVC 

edgebanding. 

H. Face Frames: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic laminate on exposed and semiexposed 

surfaces. 

I. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate or stainless steel, as indicated on drawings. 

2.2 CABINET MATERIALS 

A. General: 

1. Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do not use products that contain urea 

formaldehyde. 

2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 

3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 

4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1; made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 

5. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2; made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 

6. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD; made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 

7. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. 

CASEWORK 12356 - 2


B. Exposed Materials: 

1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with 

NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 

a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full 

range. 

2. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 1 mm thick. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range. 

3. Stainless Steel: 

a. Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304 or 316 alloy. 

b. Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, AISI No. 4 Brushed Finish. 

C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with 

NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 


range. 

2. Vinyl-Faced Particleboard: MDF with vinyl film adhesively bonded to particleboard. 


range. 

D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects 

affecting strength or utility; particleboard; MDF; or hardboard. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and 

finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

B. Pulls: Wire pulls. 

C. Hinges: Concealed butt hinges. 

D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when 

drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 

or Type B05091. 

CASEWORK 12356 - 3




A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where 

cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and 

moldings in finish to match cabinet face. 

B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit the openings, are aligned, and are uniformly 

spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. 

C. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m) . 

D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 

mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through the metal backing or metal framing 

behind the wall finish. 


A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly 

without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 


CASEWORK 12356 - 4


SECTION 12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. 



E. Maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by 

UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify 

materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 

B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. 


2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hunter Douglas; Celebrity or 

a comparable product by one of the following: 

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 1


1. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company. 

2. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. 

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with 

crowned profile. 

1. Width: 1 inch (25 mm) . 

2. Finish: One color. 

a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 

b. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the reflection of solar energy 

on the outside-facing slat surface. 

3. Perforated Slats: Openness factor of 6 to 7 percent. 

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating 

mechanisms on three sides and end plugs. 

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends. 

E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 

1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch (25 mm) or Less: Braided string. 

F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. 

G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing over rotation, 

and linkage rod. 

H. Lift Operation: Manual. 

I. Mounting: Wall mounting. 

J. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. 

K. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard. 

L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: White. 

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION 

A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 

B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows: 

1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch 

(13 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in 

which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), 

less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. 



2. Blind Units Installed outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between 

blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations 

between openings. 

C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail and 

operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. 

D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to 

blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and 

supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. 

E. Color-Coated Finish: 

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish. 

F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or 

coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's 

written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to 

interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow 

clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. 

B. Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of opening if slats are 

tilted open. 

C. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction 

throughout entire operational range. 

D. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 




SECTION 13010 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

The Requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 shall apply to this 

Section except as herein modified. 

It is the intent of this Specification to have all the work specified in Division 13 and Section 06170 be 

performed under the responsibility of a single low-temperature specialty Contractor. Contractors 

submitting quotations for the work of Division 13 must be pre-qualified and approved by the Engineer prior 

to submission of quotations. 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. Work required under this Division includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment and 

supervision necessary for installation of all low temperature insulation work required on 

this project as detailed on the drawings and as herein specified, or as required by good 

installation practice to make a complete and operational system. 

B. The drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed but do not necessarily 

show all sealant locations, flashing seals, connections, etc. as may be required to meet 

actual conditions. Contractors invited to submit proposals for this Division are considered 

to be specialists with specific knowledge and experience in low temperature building work. 

Inadvertent omissions or ambiguities in the plans and/or specifications shall be brought to 

the Engineer's attention prior to bid time. Additional monies will not be authorized for 

changes in the work if the changes are due to inadvertent omissions or ambiguities which 

should have been recognized by the specialty Contractor during his bid preparations by 

virtue of his expertise. 


1.3 CODES 

A. This work shall generally consist of, but shall not be limited to, the furnishing, installing and 

connecting of the systems or items delineated in the following Sections: 

1. Section 13010 - General Provisions - Low Temperature Insulation 

2. Section 13060 - Low Temperature Insulation Work 

3. Section 13100 - Walk-In Coolers and Freezers 

4. Section 06170 – Structural Thermal Blocking 

GENERAL PROVISIONS - LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION 13010-1


A. All work covered by this Specification shall be installed to comply with the applicable local 

and state building codes, Department of Labor and Industry, the Owner's insuring agency 

requirements, and public utilities having jurisdiction. 

1.4 CLEANING, PROTECTION, ADJUSTING AND OPERATING 

A. At the completion of the work immediately preceding final inspection, all parts of the 

installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All panels shall be cleaned to remove all exposed 

adhesives, sealants, grease and fingerprints. 

B. Any discoloration or damage to any part of the systems or building, its finish, or furnishings 

shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 

C. Material which has become marred or dented during installation shall be repaired, 

repainted, or replaced at no additional cost. 

D. The Contractor shall protect his work from damage. Damaged material shall be repaired 

or replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. 

E. After placing the systems in operation, the Contractor shall demonstrate their performance 

to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner. Evidence of frost or condensation shall 

be the indication of improper vapor seal. All vapor leaks shall be corrected to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner. 


A. Prior to application of the work of this Division, the Contractor shall arrange a pre-low 

temperature construction meeting to be attended by the Engineer, the Owner's 

Representative, the Contractor, roofing and sheet metal subcontractors, low temperature 

insulation subcontractor and, if requested by the Engineer, factory representatives of the 

manufacturer of the roofing, roof insulation and low temperature panels to review and 

confirm the conditions and methods of application. 

B. All components, including fasteners, furring, hangers, clips, closures and similar items 

required for the complete installation shall be the product of one manufacturer or products 

recommended and/or accepted by the approved insulated panel manufacturer. 

C. The Division 13 Contractor shall guarantee, in writing to the Owner, a perfect vapor barrier 

continuity for a period of two years after acceptance. 

This warranty is separate from the 

specific product warranties required by the Division 13 subsections and does not change 

or relieve the Contractor of these obligations. Any frost or dripping water in a refrigerated 

space is evidence that the required vapor barrier continuity does not exist and must be 

repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS 



A. The Owner will secure and pay for the primary construction permit only. It shall be the 

responsibility of this Contractor to secure and pay for all remaining permits, inspections, 

licenses and other service fees and charges. 

1.7 SUBMITTALS, SAMPLES AND CERTIFICATIONS 

A. Refer to Section 01300. 

B. No materials, equipment, or apparatus shall be purchased, delivered to the site, or 

installed until submittals have been approved by the Engineer. 

C. The Contractor shall provide a list of all submittal items required for this project which shall 

include the following information: item of submittal, manufacturer, date submittals are to 

be forwarded for approval, estimated shipment after approval. The following items shall 

also be included: date of submittal approved, date of submittal rejected, date of 

resubmittal approved, date ordered, confirm shipment; this information shall be entered 

during the project. This list shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review prior to the 

Contractor's first application for payment. A copy shall be updated and forwarded to the 

Engineer at the time of each progress payment until all information is completed. 

D. This list shall include, but it shall not be limited to the following: 

1. Insurance company full scale corner test approval on insulated panels 

2. Insulation manufacturing data listing: aged thermal conductivity, moisture 

resistance and compressive strength, flame spread, fuel contribution and smoke 

developed 

3. Cold storage doors and operators 

1.8 SUBSTITUTION AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 

A. Refer to Section 01600. 

B. Substitutions are proposals from the Contractor which utilize other than named products 

which are equal or superior in all respects to that specified and provide a warranty at least 

equal to that specified. Substitutions will be permitted only when a product is named and 

"or equal" is indicated. 

C. Where substitutions are permitted, the Contractor shall waive all claims for additional costs 

related to the substitution (other than Engineer's additional costs) and will coordinate the 

installation of the substitution, making such changes as may be required for the work to be 

complete in all respects. A formal presentation of all proposed substitutions shall be 

submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for review within 20 calendar days of the date 

of commencement. 



D. Proposed substitutions which, upon evaluation by the Engineer, are not approved by the 

Engineer shall not be permitted. 

1.9 PENETRATION OPENINGS IN THERMAL INSULATION SYSTEMS 

A. Penetration openings will be required by other Divisions in the thermal insulation systems 

installed by this Division. 

B. It is the responsibility of the specific Section within the Division requiring a penetration to: 

1) locate and cut all such openings, 2) furnish and install all materials required to complete 

the penetration with the exception of the materials to fill the void left in the thermal 

insulation system and the materials for resealing the penetration, and 3) coordinate and 

review all penetrations and procedures with this Division. 

C. It is the responsibility of this Division to furnish and install all materials to fill the void in the 

thermal insulation system installed by this Division and to properly reseal and re-establish 

the watertight or vapor barrier continuity of the thermal insulation system. 


A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standards referred to herein 

shall be a requirement of these specifications and shall be considered as binding as 

though herein reproduced in full. Unless otherwise stated, the reference standard shall be 

the current standard as of the date of issuance of these specifications. Reference may be 

made to standards either by full name or by abbreviation. The reference standards shall 

include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1.11 WORKMANSHIP 

1. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 

2. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials 

3. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

4. FM - Factory Mutual 

A. All work shall be installed in a first-class, neat and workmanlike manner only by mechanics 

skilled in the particular trade and licensed as may be required. 


A. The Contractor shall keep two sets of Contract Documents; i.e., drawings (including the 

Owner insuring agency approved drawings), specifications, addenda, modifications, and 

submittals at the site in good order, and annotated daily to show all changes made during 

the construction process. At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor shall verify the 



accuracy of these record drawings and he shall deliver one set to the Owner and one set 

to the Engineer. 

1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance by the Owner, the Subcontractor 

shall provide four complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals which shall 

include a detailed description of all equipment furnished by the Subcontractor. Operating 

and maintenance manuals shall be in printed form, clearly marked with appropriate 

equipment identification, and shall include normal operating and maintenance procedures, 

manufacturers' instruction books, make, model number and complete parts lists of all 

equipment and controls, approved drawings, and name, address, and telephone number 

of local servicing agencies. Manuals shall be in loose leaf form and bound in a heavy 

binder. An approval copy of the Manual shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval, 

and upon approval, the remaining copies shall be forwarded to the General 

Contractor/Owner. 

1.14 ELECTRICAL WORK 

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install motors and/or disconnect switches (with fusing as 

required by N.E.C.) for all equipment furnished under these specifications. All motors 

supplied under this Contract shall be inherently protected. This Contractor will perform all 

power and control wiring to a single point of connection outside of the “walk-in” boxes 

where the electrical contractor will provide power connection to tag building electrical 

system. 

1.15 PAINTING 

A. After all work is complete, the Contractor shall repaint or touch up all panels, trim and 

equipment supplied under this Contract which has become marred during shipment or due 

to the work of this or any other Contractor. Touch up paint shall be furnished by or shall 

be approved by the manufacturer of the item being repainted or touched-up to assure 

compatibility. 

1.16 SITE INSPECTION 

A. The Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with the locations and conditions 

affecting his work. No allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of site 

conditions. 

1.17 INITIAL PULLDOWN (TEMPERATURE REDUCTION) 

A. The facility temperature reduction (pulldown) to operating temperature shall be performed 

and controlled by the refrigeration contractor in accordance with the schedule detailed by 

the Contractor approved by the Engineer. The Division 13 Contractor shall have low 

temperature insulation work complete, and all cold storage doors installed and operable 



for the temperature pulldown, and shall have supervision present during the pulldown to 

monitor the insulation envelope's performance during this critical period, and to take 

actions as necessary to prevent damage to the envelope due to the pull-down process. 

B. Any presence of frost at junctures, connection joints and intersections shall constitute 

unacceptable work and shall be corrected before final acceptance. 




SECTION 13100 – WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS – LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION PACKAGE 


The Requirements of Section 13010 shall apply to this Section except as herein modified. 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. Work required under this Section shall include the furnishing of all walk-in cooler and 

freezer work, as detailed on the drawings and as specified herein. Work shall include, but 

not be limited to, the following: 

1. Room 121, IP Freezer, 0°C Freezer 

2. Room 122, IP Cooler, 2°C to 8°C Cooler 

3. Room 129, Life Sciences Freezer Storage, 0°C Freezer 

4. Room 130, Life Sciences Cooler Storage, 2°C to 8°C Cooler 

B. Self-contained walk-in cooler and freezer boxes. 


A. Section 06170 – Structural Thermal Blocking 

B. Division 16 – Electrical Power Wiring 


A. Provide walk-in as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, 

accessories, mounting and installation components. 

B. UL Labels – Where available, provide UL labels on prime electrical components and 

where required by local code officials. Provide UL “recognized marking” on other items 

with electrical components, signifying listing by UL, where available. 

C. Fabricator/Installer: Where indicated units of equipment require custom fabrication, 

provide units fabricated by shops which are skilled and with a minimum of five years of 

experience in similar work. Where units cannot be fully shop fabricated, fabrication shop 

shall complete fabrication work at project site. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. For walk-in boxes with self-contained refrigeration systems, provide manufacturer’s 5-year 

protection plan covering motor compressors. 

WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZER 13100-1


B. Insulated panels shall be warranted free from delamination for a period of 1 year whether 

or not the cause of delamination is from: 

1. Temperature caused compressive buckling 

2. Defective manufacture 

3. Damage in handling during erection. 

C. The Division 13 Contractor shall guarantee, in writing to the Owner, a perfect vapor barrier 

continuity for a period of two years after acceptance. 

This warranty is separate from the 

specific product warranties required by the Division 13 subsections and does not change 

or relieve the Contractor of these obligations. Any frost or dripping water in a refrigerated 

space is evidence that the required vapor barrier continuity does not exist and must be 

repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 


A. Contractor shall provide submittals to the Engineer for review in accordance with the 

requirements established within Division 1, detailed shop and assembly drawings on which 

all components are index marked. Shop drawings shall include all applicable details and 

situations to be encountered on this project. Under no circumstances shall fabrication of 

walk-in boxes commence prior to the complete approval of submitted shop drawings. 

Each 

drawing shall be approved by the manufacturer of the primary material utilized and by the 

Contractor, and such approvals shall be explicitly noted on each drawing. 

1.6 SAMPLES 

A. Contractor shall submit samples of all materials that are properly submitted substitutions 

for those materials listed in the specification. 

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Shipping, storage and handling of all insulation materials and their accessories shall be in 

strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions regarding both covering, unloading 

and storing in clean, dry areas. 

B. System components that are damaged in shipment or during storage, handling and 

erection will be rejected and must be replaced at no cost to the Owner. If damaged 

product is installed, all removal and replacement, including work of other trades will be 

included at no cost to the Owner. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 



A. Furnish cooler and freezer boxes, including self-contained refrigeration system. See 

drawings for approximate sizes. Use manufacturer’s matching size or next larger standard 

size. 

B. Insulation Panel Enclosure: 

1. Panels shall be prefabricated, insulated sections. They shall consist of interior 

and exterior metal pans precisely formed with metal dies and checked with 

gauges for uniformity. The metal panels shall be placed in steel molds with liquid 

urethane injected into the mold to form rigid insulation. “Foamed-in-place” must 

bind tenaciously to interior and exterior metal pans to form a rigid, strong wall. 

Panels shall be made without internal wood or metal structure members, with 

100% of each panel, exclusive of metal pans, being urethane insulation. A 

flexible vinyl gasket shall be fitted on the interior and exterior of each panel along 

every tongue edge to provide gasketing at each joint. Floor panels shall be 

fastened together with threaded post-tension system. Rods shall be contained in 

seamless weld tubes, foamed-in-place and held securely by steel fins. 

2. Insulation shall be 4” thick, RIM (reaction injection molded) injected urethane, 

expanded with R141b, no CFC’s used. In-place density of 2.25 lb./cu. ft. 95% 

closed cell, with low k factor, and shall meet ASTM E-84 (UL723, FM4411). 

3. Flame spread limited to 25 or lower, smoke generation limited to 450 or lower. 

C. Wall and Ceiling Finishes: 

D. Floors: 

E. Doors: 

1. Exposed Exterior: 24 ga. white G90 galvanized 

2. Interior Walls: 24 ga. white G90 galvanized 

3. Interior Ceiling: 24 ga. white G90 galvanized 

1. Floors shall be pour-in-place concrete over heating system, vapor barrier and 

insulation, all provided by this contractor. Freezer slabs will be depressed to 

accept “roller bed flooring system” by others. 

1. Man doors, sizes as shown on drawings 

a. Provide flush-mounted, infitting doors hinged as per plan. Doors shall be 

constructed in a similar fashion as other panels. Each door shall contain 

a full perimeter 11-gauge welded steel frame to ensure structural stability. 

Doors shall seal to section via neoprene plastic gasket with magnetic 

core. Gaskets shall seal three sides while a flexible sill weep gasket shall 

seal bottom of door. Gaskets shall be replaceable without the use of tools 



F. Sliding Doors 

and NSF approved. Each door shall contain the following standard 

hardware. Door shall be mounted with a minimum of two chrome plated 

strap hinges. Hinges shall be self-closing cam-action type. Each door 

shall contain a prewired incandescent light, 100-watt with protective 

globe. Light shall be prewired to exterior switch with pilot light, mounted 

in flush stainless steel cover. Provide motion sensor switch (freezer 

rated) to activate interior lighting. Will override external switch. All 

electrical devices mounted in door shall be prewired to UL registered 

harness. 

b. Door shall include the following accessories: 

1) Hydraulic, positive action armature type door closer. Closer shall 

be UL listed. 

2) Digital thermometer, 115/1 phase/60 with range of –40°F to 

+120°F, factory prewired to door harness. (All thermometers to 

be mounted on exterior of unit) 

3) View ports (12” x 15”), triple pane, hermetically sealed. View 

ports in freezer shall be heated. 

4) Kick plates, 12” high (exterior) of 20-gauge stainless steel. 

Visible fasteners shall not be acceptable). 

5) Jamb guards, 12” high (exterior) of 20-gauge stainless steel. 

6) Heated jambs in all unit designated as freezers. 

7) Padlock with interior hardware that always allows exiting from the 

interior of the enclosure. 

1. Power Operated Single Horizontal Slide - Cooler 

a. Door panels to be insulated with foam-in-place polyurethane insulation. 

b. Door leaf to be equipped with electrical safety edge effective full height 

and full travel of door. Door shall be instantly reversing upon actuation of 

safety edge to fully open position. Provisions shall be made such that 

when the door is in the fully open position due to activation of the safety 

edge only, the door will not close by time-delay, but will stay in fully open 

position and close by pull cord operation only. 

c. Doors shall be provided with adjustable, oil resistant, perimeter gasket at 

sides and head of frame, and along sensitive edge. Door leaves shall 

have sweep type sill gasket. Gasket shall be suitable for temperatures 

and service involved. 

d. Door operation shall utilize a two-speed electric operator. Electric motor 

shall be 1/2 HP minimum, 240/480 volt, 3 phase, drip-proof, and totally 



enclosed. Automatic controls shall be complete with step-down 

transformers so that only 480 volt circuit is required for the door operator. 

All power controls and limit switch shall be installed in water and dust-tight 

NEMA 4 enclosures. All connections shall be water-proof. Door leaves 

shall open at approximately 22 inches per second, and close at 

approximately 16 inches per second. 

e. Doors shall be supplied with pull-cord switches and plastic pull cords. 

Door shall be also furnished with adjustable time-delay closing device with 

floor trip-wire safety device. Floor trip wire and signal generator to be 

furnished by Others. 

f. Doors shall be provided with a pushbutton operated partial opening for 

pedestrian use. A separate adjustable time-delay closing device shall be 

provided for this operation. 

g. It is the intent of this specification that the door operation to perform the 

following functions: 

1) Pull cord opens door. 

2) Time delay closes door. 

3) Time delay starts when door reaches open position. 

4) Pull cord resets time delay after time period starts. 

5) Pull cord reverses door while closing. 

6) Floor loop prevents door from closing. 

7) Time delay is reset periodically while floor loop is activated. 

8) Floor loop does not open door from closed position. 

9) Door will reverse if floor loop is activated while closing. 

10) Safety edge will reverse door and hold open until manually closed 

by pull cord and wait for time delay. 

11) Except for 10 above, pull cord will not close door. 

12) Pedestrian button opens door partially. Door closes by time delay 

after opening. 

2. Power Operated Single Horizontal Slide - Freezer 



a. Door panels to be insulated with foam-in-place polyurethane insulation. 

b. Top, sides and bottom of door leaf shall be provided with electric 

resistance heater to prevent condensation and frosting. Heater unit shall 

be assembled using UL approved components and shall be assembled at 

the factory so that only connection to 120 volt circuit is required during 

installation. 

c. Door leaf to be equipped with electrical safety edge effective full width 

and full travel of door. Door shall be instantly reversing upon actuation of 

safety edge to fully open position. Provisions shall be made such that 

when the door is in the fully open position due to activation of the safety 

edge only, the door will not close by time-delay, but will stay in fully open 

position and close by pull cord operation only. 

d. Doors shall be provided with adjustable, oil resistant perimeter gasket at 

sides and head of frame, and along sensitive edge. Door leaves shall 

have sweep type sill gasket. Gasket shall be suitable for temperatures 

and service involved. 

e. Door operation shall utilize a two-speed electric operator. Electric motor 

shall be 1/2 HP minimum, 240/480 volt, 3 phase, drip-proof, and totally 

enclosed. Automatic controls shall be complete with step-down 

transformers so that only 480 volt circuit is required for the door operator. 

All power controls and limit switch shall be installed in water and dust-tight 

NEMA 4 enclosures. All connections shall be water-proof. Door leaves 

shall open at approximately 22 inches per second and close at 

approximately 16 inches per second. 

f. Doors shall be supplied with pull-cord switches and plastic pull cords. 

Door shall be also furnished with adjustable time-delay closing device with 

floor trip-wire safety device. Floor trip wire and signal generator to be 

furnished by Others. 

g. Doors shall be provided with a pushbutton operated partial opening for 

pedestrian use. A separate adjustable time-delay closing device shall be 

provided for this operation. 

h. It is the intent of this specification that the door operation to perform the 

following functions: 

1) Pull cord opens door. 

2) Time delay closes door. 



G. Bumpers: 

3) Time delay starts when door reaches open position. 

4) Pull cord resets time delay after time period starts. 

5) Pull cord reverses door while closing. 

6) Floor loop prevents door from closing. 

7) Time delay is reset periodically while floor loop is activated. 

8) Floor loop does not open door from closed position. 

9) Door will reverse if floor loop is activated while closing. 

10) Safety edge will reverse door and hold open until manually closed 

by pull cord and wait for time delay. 

11) Except for 10 above, pull cord will not close door. 

12) Pedestrian button opens door partially. Door closes by time delay 

after opening. 

1. Provide 1 row bumper, 18” AFF, on interior. Bumper comprised of extruded 

aluminum channel, gray vinyl inset and one-piece end caps. 

H. Lighting: 

1. Furnish fluorescent (4’-8’). Provide fluorescent lights with low temperature 

ballasts light fixtures. Mount fixtures on ceiling panels. Lights shall be controlled 

by press switch with pilot light mounted on exterior of the wall panels adjacent to 

the door. E.C. shall install all the fixtures and seal all conduit to prevent moisture 

from collecting in the fixtures. 

I. Pressure Relief Port: 

1. A heated relief port is to be provided in all compartments operating at 0°F or 

below to equalize the difference of pressure on the exterior of the walk-in and 

pressure on the interior caused by sudden temperature changes due to opening 

of doors, loading product and the defrost of coils. The relief port shall be provided 

in a side panel located away from the direct air stream flowing from the evaporator 

coils. It must be designed so that air can move into the walk-in or out of it. 

J. NSF/USDA: 



K. UL: 

1. All items shall be NSF labeled and listed. All items shall be acceptable to USDA. 

1. All of the electrical components of the walk-in shall be UL labeled and listed. 

L. Installation Instructions: 

1. A complete set of instructions covering both assembly of the walk-in and 

installation of the refrigeration equipment shall be supplied. 

M. Refrigeration Equipment: 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 


1. Item 1A: Condensing Units – Provide air/full hermetic condensing units as 

scheduled. Units shall include motor compressor, condenser, receiver, and 

electrical control panel, all factory assembled, wired and piped. Units shall be 

mounted in indoor racks for mounting on top of walk-in box. 

2. Item 1B: Blower Coils – Cooler, Freezer, Unit cooler coil for cooler compartments 

shall be wired for 120 volt, single phase, and equipped with fan blade guards in 

accordance with the local or state codes. Freezer wired for 208 volt, single phase, 

and equipped with fan blade guards in accordance with the local or state codes 

and electric defrost. Motor shall have built-in motor overload protector. 

3. Walk-in boxes, including self-contained refrigeration equipment, and all 

accessories as required. Shall be as manufactured by Bally Refrigeration Boxes, 

Inc. (888-323-0597) 

A. Contactor shall deliver all equipment to site and erect. Connect compressor to respective 

coils. Suction and liquid lines run together wrapped with Armaflex to within 3 ft. of 

applicable condensing unit. All liquid lines shall be equipped with recommended driers. 

B. This contractor shall run on, adjust and provide one (1) year’s free service. 

C. This Contractor shall furnish and install any electric wiring necessary to coils and 

compressor. This Contractor shall furnish and install seal-off fixtures in conduit above 

walk-in for each light fixture to prevent moisture from collecting in fixture. 

D. Electrical Contractor provides one (1) point of electrical connection for all four (4) walk-I 

boxes. 



E. Installation of drain lines from evaporative coils, properly insulated, shall be included in 

this contact. 

F. Sleeves for refrigeration lines, drain lines and electrical lines shall be of extruded vinyl, 

E.C. shall furnish and install seal-off fixtures in conduit for each light fixture to prevent 

moisture from collecting in fixture. Coil supports to be provided in reinforced ceiling panels 

to hang cooling coils. Mounting nuts and bolts which extend through the ceiling of walk-in 

shall be of stainless steel. 

G. Condensate and drain lines shall be extended nearest existing floor drain. All lines shall 

be hard copper, using sweat fittings for all bends and turns. Lines for freezer coils shall be 

wrapped with a thermostatically controlled heater tape or factory installed integral heater. 

Cover drain liens with insulation required. 

3.2 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS 

A. General: Delay start-up of free-standing freezer/cooler until services lines have been 

tested, balanced and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar considerations. 

B. Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly and 

that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace equipment that s found 

to be defective in its operating, including units which are below capacity or operating with 

excessive noise or vibration. 

C. Instruct owner’s operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures for 

each item of operation equipment. 

D. Final cleaning: After testing and start-up and before the time of substantial completion, 

clean and sanitize equipment and heave in condition ready for use. 




SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hydraulic passenger and freight elevators. 


1. Division 1, Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for 

construction purposes. 

2. Division 2, Section "Earthwork" for excavating well hole to accommodate cylinder assembly. 

3. Division 3, Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in 

concrete. 

4. Division 5, Section "Structural Steel" for the following: 

a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening 

guide-rail brackets. 

b. Divider beams. 

c. Hoist beams. 

d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame. 

e. Division 5, Section "Metal Fabrications" for Pit ladders. 

5. Division 16, Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm and Detection System" for smoke detectors in 

elevator lobbies and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms and for interface to elevator 

controllers. 

6. Division 15, Section "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. 

7. Division 16, Section "Facility Communications Infrastructure" for communications provisions from 

the facility communications systems to the elevators. 

8. For power connections, see the Division 16 plans. 


A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section. 

B. Freight Elevator (FR-ELV): A freight elevator unless indicated otherwise. 

C. Passenger Elevator (PA-ELV): A commercial passenger elevator. 

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1



A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar 

information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and 

signal systems. 


1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, 

machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, 

and locations of equipment. 

2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station and standby power operation control panel. 

3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and 

maximum and average power demands. 

C. Samples: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3-inch- (75-mm-) 

square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from 

manufacturer. 

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and 

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their 

installation requirements. 

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine 

room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including standby power 

generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. 

G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance 

manuals. 

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include 

diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance 

personnel. 

I. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having 

jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 

J. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in 

the form of a standard five-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is 

concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal 

options. 



K. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner 

with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance 

Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and 

approved by manufacturer. 


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. 

Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. 


A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items 

that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator 

equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for 

installation. 

B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. 

C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders; 

sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and 

switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that 

fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive 

malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging 

of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or 

vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 

2. Warranty Period: Ten year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ThyssenKrupp Elevator; 

Hydraulic Passsenger and Service Elevators or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. American Crescent Elevator Mfg., Corp. 



2. Fujitec America, Inc. 

3. KONE Inc. 

4. Minnesota Elevator, Inc. 

5. Mowrey Elevator Co. 

6. Otis Elevator Co. 

7. Schindler Elevator Corp. 

8. Schumacher Elevator Co. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer. 

1. Major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies, 

controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured 

by single manufacturer. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. 

C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements for seismic risk Zone 2 or 

greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

1. For Passenger Elevators the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without 

separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully 

operational after the seismic event." 

2. For Freight Elevators the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without 

separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.” 

3. Affected peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is greater than or equal to 0.20 

(seismic risk Zones 3 and 4). 

4. Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

5. Provide seismic switch required by ASCE/SEI 7. 

6. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration short period (Sds) for Project is I1.0. 

7. Project's Seismic Design Category: D. 

8. Passenger Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 

9. Freight Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 

2.3 ELEVATORS 

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, 

manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as 

required for complete system. 

B. Elevator Description: 

1. Group Number: Sort Building - Group 1. 

2. Elevator Number(s): PA-ELV. 



3. Emergency Elevator Number(s): PA-ELV. 

4. Freight Elevator Number(s): FR-ELV. 

5. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, telescoping, dual cylinder. 

6. Rated Load: 3500 lb (1589 kg) . 

7. Freight Loading Class for Freight Elevators: Class C1. 

8. Rated Speed: 

a. PA-ELV: 175 fpm (0.89 m/s) . 

b. FR-ELV: 125 fpm (0.64 m/s) . 

9. Operation System: Single automatic. 

10. Auxiliary Operations: 

a. Standby power operation, PA-ELV only. 

b. Standby-powered lowering, PA-ELV only. 

11. Car Enclosures: 

a. Inside Width: As indicated on the Drawings. 

b. Inside Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 

c. Inside Height: 

1) PA-ELV: 100 inches (2540 mm). to underside of ceiling. 

2) FR-ELV: 112 inches (2845 mm) to underside of ceiling. 

d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door 

frames. 

e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish . 

f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: 

1) PA-ELV: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

2) FR-ELV: Textured stainless steel.. 

g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. 

j. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) roundsatin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides and rear of 

car. 

l. Bumper rail at Freight Eleveator: Provide a 2 x 8 hardwood bumper centered at 10-inches 

above the finish floor at sides and back of car. 

m. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring (specified in Division 9, Section "Resilient 

Flooring"). 

12. Hoistway Entrances: 

a. Provide Hoistway Entrances with smoke guard and fire door features as indicated herein 

and on the Drawings. 

1) PA-ELV: Provide Swing-Type Fire Door on fusible link at Mezzanine Floor and 

Second Floor as indicated. 

2) FR-ELV: Provide overhead coiling smoke guard system at all doors. 



b. Width: 

1) PA-ELV: 42 inches (1067 mm) 

2) FR-ELV: As indicated on the Drawings. 

c. Height: 

d. Type: 

1) PA-ELV: 84 inches (2134 mm). 

2) FR-ELV: 144 inches (3658 mm). 

1) PA-ELV: Horizontal sliding, Single-speed center opening. 

2) FR-ELV: Vertical sliding, Single-speed center opening. 

e. Frames Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

f. Frames at FR-ELV: Primed steel. 

g. Doors PA-ELV: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.Doors FR-ELV: Textured stainless steel. 

h. Sills: Stainless Steel, dull satin. 

13. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

14. Additional Requirements: 

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made 

from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 

2.4 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 

A. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full 

load and with minimum pulsations. 

1. Pump shall be shall be tank-top-mounted type with fan-cooled, squirrel-cage induction motor, and 

shall be mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts and enclosed in prime-painted steel 

enclosure lined with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 

2. Motor shall have wye-delta or solid-state starting. 

3. Motor shall have variable-voltage, variable-frequency control. 

B. Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in 

blowout-proof housing at pump unit. 

C. Piping: Size, type, and weight of piping as recommended by elevator manufacturer, with flexible 

connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 

1. Cylinder units shall be connected with dielectric couplings. 

2. Casing for Underground Piping: Schedule 40 PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, joined with 

PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. 

D. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fire-resistant fluid with additives as needed to prevent 

oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects. 



E. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, 

anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives and approved by elevator manufacturer for use 

with elevator equipment. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil 

Division, Inc. 

F. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide 

rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another 

Section. 

G. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, of sufficient 

size to provide not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance from cylinder and extending above pit floor. 

Casing shall have means of monitoring effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

H. Corrosion-Protective Filler: A nontoxic, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the space between 

hydraulic cylinder and protective casing. Filler shall be electrically nonconductive, displace or absorb 

water, and gel or solidify at temperatures below 60 deg F (16 deg C) . 



a. Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.; No-Ox-Id Liquid Elevator Casing Filler E-800. 

b. Union-Gard, a division of Dome Services L.L.C.; Union-Gard 160. 

I. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 

J. Guides: Roller guides; polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides; or sliding guides with guide-rail 

lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. 

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of 

operation indicated. 

B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational 

features for elevators where indicated: 

1. Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a 

designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby 

power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at 

main lobby. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease. 

2. Single-Car Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, if car is at a floor, it 

remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to a 

preselected floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is below the preselected floor, it is 

lowered to the next lower floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. 

3. Single-Car Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, car is lowered to the 

lowest floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. 

4. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car-control station removes car from group operation and 

allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in 



independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response to door close 

button. 

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES 

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, 

infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause 

doors to stop and reopen. 

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through 

activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced 

kinetic energy. 

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES 

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with removable car 

roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by 

ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 

1. Subfloor: Exterior, C-C Plugged grade plywood, not less than 7/8-inch (22.2-mm) nominal 

thickness. 

2. Floor Finish: Specified in Division 9, Section “Resilient Flooring” 

3. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel 

sheet. 

4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 

5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 

6. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by 

laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors 

using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 

7. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 

8. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 

9. Stainless Steel Ceiling: Flush panels, with four low-voltage downlights in each panel. Align ceiling 

panel joints with joints between wall panels. 

10. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES 

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway 

entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall 

accommodate hoistway wall construction. 

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced 

head sections. 



B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and 

be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 

based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 

1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1 hour with 30-minute temperature rise of 450 deg F (250 deg C) . 

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 

1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied 

enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2. Primed-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied, 

rust-resistant primer for field painting. 

3. Steel Subframes: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet, with factory-applied enamel finish or 

rust-resistant primer. Fabricate to receive applied finish as indicated. 

4. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 

5. Bronze Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet, with enamel finish, and with formedbronze 

sheet laminated to steel frames using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without 

telegraphing or oil-canning. 

6. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3 inches 

(76 mm) high, on both inside surfaces of hoistway door frames. 

7. Primed-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 

Provide with factory-applied, rust-resistant primer for field painting. 

8. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by 

laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors 

using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 

9. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 

10. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 

11. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been 

fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements withLEDs. 

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in return 

panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control station or 

mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Swing-Return Car-Control Stations: Provide car-control stations mounted on rear of hinged return panel 

adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and indicator lights projecting through return 

panel but substantially flush with face of return panel. 

1. Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control station or 

mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 



D. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which 

dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is 

contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power 

supply. 

E. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and 

required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified 

in Division 16, Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm and Detection System" 

F. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or 

above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping 

at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control 

station. 

G. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 

1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 

2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating applicable direction of travel. 

3. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service 

specified in Division 16, Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm and Detection System." Possibly 

insert a provision for either an "In Use" signal or a digital display of car position for single elevators. 

H. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide one of 


1. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated 

elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing. 

I. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of 

travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 

1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars. 

J. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated, digital-display-type position indicators, located above each 

hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting and with body of unit 

recessed in wall. 

1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators. 

K. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, 

where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply 

has failed. 

L. Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position indicators for 

each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal that indicates when 

elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level with doors open. Provide 

standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position 

indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. 

M. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and 

graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of 



service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless 


2.10 FINISH MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway 

entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. 

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. 

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. 

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. 

E. Textured Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 with embossed texture rolled into 

exposed surface. 

F. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 

G. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. 

H. Bronze Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal). 

I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , Alloy 6063. 



A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and examine 

supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 



A. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections 

are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, 

and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS workmanship and welding operator qualification 

standards. 

B. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize 

vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system. 

C. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Install underground piping in casing. 



D. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. 

E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for 

accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is 

operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. 

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm) , up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. 

G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic 

grout. 

H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group 

or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor. 


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either 

temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by 

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. 

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to 

be performed on elevators. 


A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to freight elevator. Comply with the 

following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to 

protect finishes from damage. 

2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 

3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 

4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect 

elevator and elevator equipment. 

5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 

6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, 

repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as 

necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies 

same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 

7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. 

Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish 

entire unit, or provide new units as required. 




A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). 

B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial 

Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation 

systems and devices are functioning properly. 

3.6 MAINTENANCE 

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 

months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive 

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting 

as required for proper elevator operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized 

replacement parts and supplies. 

1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. 

2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of two hours 

or less. 

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time of two 

hours or less. 




SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 shall apply 

to this Section, except as herein modified. 

B. This Division describes the Mechanical Work required for this project. The work shall be as 

detailed on the Drawings and as herein specified, and as required by good installation practice to 

make a complete and operational system. 

C. This work shall generally consist of, but shall not be limited to, the furnishing, installing and 

connecting of the systems or items delineated in the following Sections and Division 1: 

Section 15010 General Provisions – Mechanical 

Section 15012 Fed-Ex Facility EPN (Equipment Numbering) Numbering Standards 

Section 15040 LEED Requirements and LEED Points Checklist 

Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 

Section 15250 Insulation 

Section 15401 Domestic Water System 

Section 15405 Soil and Waste System 

Section 15407 Natural Gas System 

Section 15412 Air Conditioning Condensate System 

Section 15423 Pipe and Valve Identification 

Section 15425 Piping Tests 

Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 

Section 15550 Fire Protection 

Section 15733 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 

Section 15734 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units (15 tons and under) 

Section 15800 Air Distribution 

Section 15840 Air Terminal Units – Variable Volume 

Section 15900 Direct Digital Control System 

Section 15990 Air Testing and Balancing 

D. Place equipment in initial operation, make required adjustments and balancing, make initial tests 

to ensure compliance with Specifications and their intent, obtain approval in writing from governing 

bodies having jurisdiction over this work to ensure compliance with all laws and ordinances in 

effect. 

E. The Drawings and Specifications are generally indicative of the work to be installed but do not 

necessarily show every item or detail required for proper operation and service. No extras will be 

allowed for items such as but not limited to offsets, fittings, supports, valves, thermometers and 

gauges, etc. which are required for proper operation and maintenance, but which may not be 

shown. 

GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL 15010-1



A. In the absence of more detailed instruction elsewhere, recommended recognized industry or 

association standards referred to herein shall be a requirement of these Specifications and shall 

be considered as binding as though herein reproduced in full. Unless otherwise stated, the 

reference standard shall be the current standard as of the date of issuance of these Specifications. 

Reference may be made to standards either by full name or by abbreviation. The reference 

standards shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 

ACI American Concrete Institute 

AGA American Gas Association 

AIA American Institute of Architects 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 

ANSI American National Standards Institute 

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 

ASA American Standards Association 

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 

AWSC American Welding Society Code 

AWWA American Waterworks Association 

BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 

FM Factory Mutual 

I-B-R Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers 

JIC Joint Industry Council 

NEC National Electric Code 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 

UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

USDA United States Department of Agriculture 

1.3 INDEX OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS AND SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The following is a list of Products specified within this Section. Provide submittals to the Engineer 

for review in accordance with requirements established within Section 01300 for only those 

Products indicated. 

SPECIFIED PRODUCTS SUBMITTAL REQUIRED 

As-Built Drawings YES 

Operating and Maintenance Manuals YES 

Instructions NO 

Electrical Work NO 



1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. Work covered by this Specification shall be installed to comply with U.L., the 2007 California 

Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, Energy Conservation, and Fuel Gas Codes with amendments; 

N.E.C.; NFPA Standards; OSHA; and all other applicable state and local codes, ordinances, 

restrictions; state and local fire department requirements; the Owner's insuring agency 

requirements; and public utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Gas piping, gas burning equipment and installation thereof shall conform to the recommendations 

of the American Gas Association and the local utility. 

C. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of ASME and listing 

of U.L. 

D. In addition to these Specifications, installation of all materials and equipment shall be performed in 

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 

E. Work and material required for installation of the work required under this Division shall be new, 

first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Engineer. 

F. Reference to the Codes and Standards listed shall constitute the minimum acceptable 

requirements. Nothing in the Specifications shall be construed to permit deviation from the 

requirements of the governing code. Where requirements of the Drawings and Specification 

exceed those of the code listed, the Contractor shall follow the Drawings and Specifications. 


A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to secure and pay for permits, inspections, licenses 

and other service fees and charges for meters and associated devices, and charges for 

connection to outside services as required by Authorities for work under this Division. 

B. No piping work or equipment shall be concealed until they have been tested and inspected in the 

presence of the municipal inspector and the Owner's Representative. A record of inspections by 

municipal inspector shall be furnished to the Engineer by this Contractor. Certificates shall be in 

triplicate, shall be delivered to the Engineer and become the property of the Owner. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. In addition to the warranty against defects contained in the General Conditions, warrant that: 

1. Each product supplied shall meet the capacity, duty requirements and standards of 

performance stated in the Contract Documents. 

2. Unconditionally warrant equipment and work for a period of one year from date of 

substantial completion. Substantial completion shall be defined as all systems, products 

and equipment installed and operating, control system operating system automatically, 

and all aspects of the system operational. Should any defects develop within that period, 

required repairs or replacements, including labor and material, shall be made without 

charge to the Owner. 



1.7 JOB CONDITIONS 

3. Fluids (including refrigerants) lost during the warranty period shall be replaced without 

charge to the Owner. 

A. Prior to bidding, make a detailed field inspection and become familiarized with the locations and 

conditions affecting the work. Take field measurements, carefully inspect existing structure and 

piping to determine exact field conditions, points of tie-ins, access to work, and possible 

interference between existing work and the new work. Include in the bid items that are necessary 

to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 

1.8 COMPLETENESS OF BIDS 

A. Include items that are necessary to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and described 

herein. 

B. Bidders are also expected to confer with the Owner’s Representative, prior to bidding, if there are 

any items shown on the plans or described herein that are not clearly understood. No allowance 

will be made by the Owner or Engineer for lack of information on the part of the Contractor after 

the bid is submitted and the Contract signed. 

C. Interpretations, corrections, and changes of the contract documents will be made by Addendum or 

otherwise in writing. Interpretations, corrections, and changes made in any other manner will not 

be binding and shall not be considered. 

1.9 SUBSTITUTION AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 

A. The Drawings and Specifications were developed using the products of one manufacturer as the 

BASIS OF DESIGN and for detailing. In the product description, this manufacturer is the FIRST 

name listed. Other acceptable manufacturers having similar products may then be listed as 

substitutions. 

B. The products described in the Specifications are intended to establish the standard of quality that 

the Engineer has determined as necessary for this project. Only products of the manufacturers 

listed may be provided, except as indicated in Section 01600, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. 

Contractor shall assume responsibility for and include in bid all additional costs caused by 

installation and dimensional changes that result from use of products other than those that served 

as the BASIS OF DESIGN. This includes all changes to pumps, motors, wiring, controls, piping, 

structural revisions, and coordination with other trades. All products shall meet space limitations. 

1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cut and patch penetrations required by this Specification. Patching shall match adjoining surface 

in both material and quality. Patching shall be done only by craftsmen skilled in the respective 

trade. This includes patching of blacktopped areas. Sealing of all roof penetrations shall be under 

another Contract or Division. Concrete slab shall be cut and patched under Division 3. Cutting of 

concrete or masonry walls shall be core drilled to prevent spalling. All procedures shall be 

carefully coordinated with Owner's Representative. 



1.11 PENETRATIONS IN FIRE WALLS 

A. Cut and patch penetrations in firewalls created by work as required to maintain the rating of the 

firewall. Penetrations shall be completed in strict accordance to UL standards. 

1.12 ROOF PENETRATIONS 

A. Coordinate the installation of penetrations and services through the roof with the trades involved. 

The work under this Section shall include location and cutting of openings in the roof deck, 

installation of materials provided under this Division, and the coordination and communication 

required to provide adequate clearances and sealing of the openings. Wood blocking installation, 

sealing and flashing of the service penetrations are specified and installed under other Divisions. 

B. Completed areas of roofing shall not be cut or penetrated unless they can be sealed and 

completely flashed immediately after installation. 

C. Installation of seals and flashing shall be completed only by Contractors authorized by the roofing 

system manufacturer to perform work on the roofing system. 

1.13 WALL PENETRATIONS 

A. Penetration openings in walls shall be required by this Division. It is the responsibility of the 

specific Section requiring a penetration opening to locate and cut all such openings. All 

penetration openings shall have true, square walls and edges. 

B. The Contractor cutting the penetration opening shall have the total responsibility for the insulating 

and proper re-sealing and re-establishment of the watertight continuity of the penetration opening. 

C. Penetrations shall be as herein specified or as otherwise detailed on the Drawings. 

1.14 COORDINATION AMONG TRADES 

A. Coordinate work with that of other trades so that all work may be installed to ensure concealment 

within the space provided in the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, 

ducts, equipment, and architectural or structural features will be avoided. In case interferences or 

conflicts develop, the Engineer shall decide which work is to be relocated, regardless of which is 

first installed. This work shall be relocated without additional expense to the Owner. 

1.15 CONFLICTS WITH EXISTING PRODUCTS 

A. Completion of work required under this Division shall require locating products 

(equipment/materials) within the existing facility. It is to be understood that all conflicts and 

obstructions have not been completely delineated on the Drawings. Relocate such conflicting/ 

obstructing products as required for completion of installation of work under this Division whether 

shown on the Drawing or not as required for good installation practices. Product relocation shall 

be in accordance to applicable code requirements and governing authorities and subject to the 

approval of the Engineer. 



1.16 WORKMANSHIP 

A. Work shall be installed only by mechanics skilled in the particular trade and licensed as may be 

required. 

1.17 EXISTING UTILITIES AND SERVICES 

A. Connect to existing utilities and services as indicated on the Drawings. Utilities and services have 

been located as accurately as possible; however, the exact location is not guaranteed. Prior to 

bidding, Contractor must inspect job site conditions and determine locations as required. 

Variations from locations indicated on the Drawings will not be basis for additional compensation. 

1.18 CARE AND PROTECTION OF ROOF SYSTEM 

A. The Sort Building roofing system is susceptible to damage caused by excessive heat, petroleum 

based oil contact and sharp objects. This system must be positively protected from sparks, 

flames, oils and mechanical abuse. Protect the roof system from damage during the course of this 

work that occurs on the roof surface. 

1.19 STANDARDIZATION 

A. All similar items of equipment shall be of the same manufacturer. 

1.20 PRODUCT DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE 

A. Shipping, handling, and storage of products shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's 

recommendations regarding covering, unloading and storage in clean, dry areas. 

B. Items damaged in shipment or during handling, storage or erection will be rejected and must be 

replaced at no additional compensation to the Contractor. 


2.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. Maintain two sets of Contract Documents; i.e., Drawings (including the Owner insuring agency 

approved Drawings), Specifications, addenda, modifications, and submittals at the site in good 

order, and annotated daily to show all changes made during the construction process. These 

Drawings shall be made available for review by the Engineer upon his request. At the conclusion 

of the project, verify the accuracy of these Drawings and stamp each Drawing "AS-BUILT" with a 

stamp indicating the Contractor's name, date, and signature of a principal of the company. Deliver 

one set to the Owner and one set to the Engineer. 

B. All uncovered, charted or not charted utilities shall be exactly located on the Record Drawings by 

dimensions from a column or suitable building wall. Verify all inverts. Deviations greater than 1/4 

inch shall be recorded. 




A. Provide four complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals that shall include a detailed 

description of each system, as well as all products furnished by the Contractor. All material 

contained within the operating and maintenance manuals shall be in typewritten or printed form, 

clearly indexed with appropriate system or equipment identification. 

B. The Manuals shall contain, but not be limited to, the following: 

1. Table of Contents 

I. Introduction - Explanation of the Manual and its use. Name, address and 

phone number of the Contractor and subcontractors. 

II. System (Name for applicable technical Section system) 

2. System Operation 

Description of systems 

Normal functional and sequential description 

Start-up procedures 

Shut-down procedures 

Seasonal operation and adjustment 

Reset, adjustment, and balancing procedures 

3. Maintenance 

Cleaning and replacement - items and procedures 

Lubrication 

Charging and filling 

Draining and purging 

System troubleshooting 

Instrument checking and calibration 

Recommended list of spare parts 

Schedule maintenance chart 

4. Listing of Equipment and Manufacturer 

Manufacturer's Data 

Equipment identification and plan mark 

Model number and serial number of equipment 

Performance data including horsepower, volts, phase and capacities. 

Description, literature, equipment Drawings, illustrations, certified charts and technical 

data. 

Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction books including troubleshooting 

charts. 

Point to point wiring diagrams of the total electrical system including field wiring and 

factory wiring of prewired equipment 

Parts list 

Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of recommended local repair service 

companies 

Guarantee 



5. Submittals 

6. Certifications 

Tests and balance reports 

Approvals and acceptance certifications 

Complete set of approval Drawings 

Complete set of calculations 

III. Section II shall be repeated for each technical Section and system provided. 

C. Manuals shall be in loose-leaf form and bound in a heavy binder with tabbed sectional dividers. 

One final copy shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. This copy shall be retained by the 

Engineer. The remaining three operating manuals shall be delivered to the Owner prior to any 

equipment or systems being placed or left in operation and the instructions given to the Owner's 

personnel. 

2.3 INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Prior to acceptance, upon completion of work and tests and at a time as approved by the 

Engineer, the Contractor, and factory trained representatives of the equipment manufacturers shall 

fully instruct the Owner's personnel so that they are completely familiar with operation and 

maintenance of all equipment. 

B. During this instruction period, the Owner's personnel shall be thoroughly versed in the operation 

and maintenance of the mechanical systems. Emergency and safety procedures shall be 

emphasized. Operation of each piece of equipment shall be demonstrated. Conduct a "thumbthrough" 

explanation of the operation and maintenance manuals. No equipment or systems shall 

be placed and left in operation prior to reception of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and 

the Owner's personnel receiving operating instructions. 

C. On completion of the instruction period, provide written verification to the Engineer as to when the 

instructions were given, the Owner's personnel who attended the instructions, from whom the 

instructions were given, description of instructions given, and that the Owner's personnel are in 

receipt of the maintenance manuals. This information shall be forwarded for inclusion within the 

operating and maintenance manuals. 

D. The Engineer shall be present during these instructions should he so desire. 

2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK 

A. Furnish and install motors and disconnect switches as hereinafter specified for all equipment 

furnished under this Division. All motors supplied under this Contract shall be inherently protected. 

The Division 16 Contractor shall perform all power wiring, unless otherwise specified. 




3.1 CLEANING, PROTECTION, ADJUSTING, AND OPERATING 

A. At the completion of the work immediately preceding final inspection, the installation shall be 

thoroughly cleaned and polished. Strainers shall be removed and cleaned. 

B. Discoloration and damage to parts of the systems and building, its finish and furnishings, due to 

the Contractor's work, shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 

C. Equipment that has become marred during shipping or installation shall be repainted or touched 

up. 

D. Protect work from damage by keeping piping secured and otherwise protected from damage. 

Damaged material and equipment shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor without 

additional cost to the Owner. 

E. The Contractor is responsible for the start-up of equipment and systems and for the proper setting 

or adjustments of controls and equipment that the Contractor furnished and/or installed. The 

settings and adjustments shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, 

information contained on the Drawings, or in the Specifications, or to the Owner's requirements. 

F. After placing the systems in operation, demonstrate their performance to the satisfaction of the 

Engineer and/or Owner. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS START-UP 

A. The start-up of products installed under this Division shall be by a factory trained representative of 

the product manufacturer who shall inspect, test, adjust, and start the product. Additionally, the 

Factory Trained Representative shall inspect the installation and all utilities, connections, pipe and 

duct arrangements and charges serving the unit and shall verify their suitability. The factory 

representative shall supervise the Contractor on all required modifications. A copy of this 

deficiency report shall be forwarded to the Engineer. The Contractor shall complete all 

modifications as required by the factory representative prior to final start-up. On completion of the 

above, the factory representative shall supervise the start-up and place the units in operation. The 

factory representative shall inspect and delineate all installation deficiencies and shall prepare a 

formal report of the suitability of the connected services and of the start up for each product. A 

copy of this report shall be forwarded to the Engineer. A second copy shall be placed in the 

Operating and Maintenance Manual. 

B. A factory-trained representative shall perform the above procedure for the following items: 

OAKH-ECR-MA012 





3.3 LOCATING PRODUCTS 

A. Products shall be located so that the units are accessible and that working space is 

available for all necessary repairs, servicing and replacements. 




SECTION 15012 – FED-EX FACILITY EPN (EQUIPMENT PIECE NUMBER) NUMBERING STANDARDS 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 shall apply 

to this Section, except as herein modified. 

B. This section describes the Fed-Ex numbering and labeling system to be used throughout the 

project. 


Attachment: Fed Ex EPN numbering guidelines 

FED-EX FACILITY EPN (EQUIPMENT PIECE NUMBER) NUMBERING STANDARDS 15012-1




















SECTION 15040 – LEED REQUIREMENTS AND LEED POINTS CHECKLIST 


The requirements of Section 15010 shall apply to this section, except as herein modified. 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. The Owner is pursuing a LEED qualified facility. This LEED-NC 2009 project checklist delineates 

the LEED points that are to be obtained for this project. This checklist will be made available to 

the contractor. This contractor shall include meeting the following delineated LEED points relative 

to Division 15 scope of work for this project. The contractor shall take the lead role (become the 

point champion) and participate in securing the respective Division 15 LEED points and provide all 

work necessary to meet the identified LED points for plumbing, mechanical, or the commissioning 

agent, where he is identified as the point champion. 



3.1 LEED – NC 2009 Project Checklist 


LEED REQUIREMENTS AND LEED PIONTS CHECKLIST 15040-1


SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of Section 15010 shall apply to this Section except as herein modified. 

B. This Section describes the installation of piping, pipe fittings, valves, piping specialties, supporting 

devices, and other basic materials. 


A. Provide excavation and backfill in accordance with the requirements of Division 2. 

B. Provide utility trenching, backfilling and compacting in accordance with the requirements of 

Division 2. 

C. Provide pumping and shoring in accordance with the requirements of Division 2. 

D. Provide concrete in accordance with the requirements of Division 3. 

E. Site utility piping is specified in Division 2. 


A. Refer to Specification Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL, paragraph 

“CODES AND STANDARDS”. 

B. The requirements of the applicable Sections of ANSI B31, "Pressure Piping," shall be considered 

as minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems except 

where more specific or stringent requirements are specified or shown on the Drawings. 

C. Prior to starting piping installation work, the following shall be completed: 

1. Set a reference datum, in the form of a surveyor's benchmark, for installation of all 

material and equipment requiring grading and for elevation locations. The elevation of 

such benchmark shall be set by the Contractor and checked by the Owner's 

Representative. The exact location of the datum shall be as established by the Owner's 

Representative. The Engineer shall be informed in writing by the Contractor of the 

location and elevation of this datum. 

2. Verify the existing inverts of all piping connections. Should there be any discrepancy 

between the Drawings and actual field conditions, the Contractor shall immediately notify 

the Owner's Representative in writing. 

D. This requirement may be eliminated if and only if such a usable datum for building construction is 

provided by Others and the Contractor receives written permission by the Engineer. 

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1







Pipe NO 

Valves NO 

Strainers NO 

Branch Connections NO 

Pressure Gauge NO 

Thermometer NO 

Pipe Hangers and Supports NO 

Beam Clamps and Attachments NO 

Sleeves NO 

Escutcheon Plates NO 

Dielectric Unions NO 

Access Panels NO 

Fire-Resistive Silicone Foam and Sealant NO 

Treated Wood Blocking NO 

Sealants NO 

Painting NO 

Nameplates NO 

Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement NO 

Equipment Pads NO 

Miscellaneous Steel NO 

Motors NO 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE 

A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS 




2.1 PIPE SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Piping shall be as delineated. Applications shall be as outlined in subsequent sections of these 

Specifications. 

Pipe Specification No. 1 

DESIGN PRESSURE - 240 psig 

MAXIMUM DESIGN TEMPERATURE - 200 deg F 

PIPE - Type L hard drawn seamless copper ASTM B88. 

JOINTS - Soldered using 95-5 lead-free solder or equal. 

SOLDER CONTAINING LEAD SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. 

FITTINGS - Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22; or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18. 


DESIGN PRESSURE - Gravity 


PIPE and FITTINGS - Service weight cast iron soil pipe, and fittings; tar coated inside and outside. 

ASTM A74. 

JOINTS - Above and below ground joints shall be neoprene compression gasket, Tyler Tyseal or 

equal. Above ground concealed joints may be no hub. 




PIPE - Type DWV hard temper seamless copper type ASTM B306. 

JOINTS - Soldered using 95-5 lead-free solder. 


FITTINGS - Cast bronze solder joint drainage, ANSI B16.23; or wrought copper solder joint 

drainage, ANSI B16.29. 



PIPE - Schedule 40 galvanized steel ASTM A53 or A106, Grade A or B. 

JOINTS - Threaded 

FITTINGS - 4 inch and smaller - Standard weight galvanized cast iron screwed drainage type; 

ANSI B16.12, ASTM A126. 


DESIGN PRESSURE – Gravity 

PIPE – Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic D.W.V.; ASTM D2665, ASTM D1785. 

JOINTS – Solvent cemented; ASTM D2564. 

FITTINGS – Schedule 40 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic D.W.V.; ASTM D2466. 

NOTE: PVC PIPING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED WITHIN AIR PLENUMS. 



2.2 VALVES 




PIPE - Schedule 40 black steel ASTM A53 or A106, Grade A or B. 

2 INCH AND SMALLER: 

JOINTS - Threaded or socket welded, or butt-welded 

FITTINGS - Threaded: 150 psig W.S.P., 300 psig W.O.G. black malleable iron; ANSI B16.3, 

ASTM A197. Socket Welded: 3000 psig forged steel; ANSI B16.11. 

2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER: 

JOINTS - Butt-welded and flanged. 

FITTINGS - Butt-welded standard weight seamless steel ANSI B16.9, ASTM A234. 150 psig 

forged steel flange; ANSI B16.5, ASTM A181. 



MAXIMUM DESIGN TEMPERATURE - 200 deg F PIPE - Type K hard drawn seamless copper; 

ASTM B88. 

JOINTS - Soldered using 95/5 lead-free solder or equal. 


FITTINGS - Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18. 

A. Valves shall conform to the Specifications for the services listed. Valves shall be of single 

manufacturer if possible. Packings, gaskets, discs, seats, diaphragms, joint compounds, and 

lubricants, shall conform to recommendations of the valve manufacturer for the service intended. 

Application of these valves shall be as outlined in subsequent sections of these Specifications. 

B. Provide 1 operating wrench for every 10 valves (minimum of 2) not equipped with hand wheels or 

levers. 

2.3 GATE VALVE: 

GA-1 

SIZE - 2 inch and smaller. 

PRESSURE - 125 psig W.S.P., 200 psig W.O.G. 

CONNECTION - Threaded. 

MATERIAL - Bronze. 

MISCELLANEOUS - Rising stem, solid wedge disc, union bonnet. 

MFR. & MODEL NO. - Stockham B-105, Lunkenheimer 3127, Crane 428-UB, Jenkins 47-U. 

SIZE - 2-1/2 to 12 inch. 

GA-2 


CONNECTION - Flanged. 

MATERIAL - Iron. 

MISCELLANEOUS - Bronze trimmed, solid wedge gate, OS&Y. 

MFR. & MODEL NO. - Nibco F-617-0, Jenkins 651-C, Lunkenheimer 1430, Crane 465 1/2. 



GLOBE VALVE: 

GL-1 





MISCELLANEOUS - Union bonnet, renewable disc. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Nibco T-235, Jenkins 546-P, Crane 14-1/2 P, Lunkenheimer LQ-600. 

GL-2 

SIZE - 2-1/2 inch to 10 inch. 




MISCELLANEOUS - Bronze trim, yoke bonnet, OS&Y. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Nibco F-718-B, Jenkins 613, Crane 351. 

2.4 BALL VALVE: 

BA-1 





MISCELLANEOUS - Teflon seats, bronze ball, conventional port, 2-piece body. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Nibco T-580, Crane 9301, Stockham S-214. 

2.5 PLUG VALVE: 

PL-1 


PRESSURE - 200 psig W.O.G. 


MATERIAL - Semi-steel. 

MISCELLANEOUS - Round port, full pipe area. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Resun D-450, or equal. 

SIZE - 2-1/2 inch and larger. 

PL-2 

PRESSURE - 200 psig W.O.G. 


MATERIAL - Semi-steel. 

MISCELLANEOUS - Round port, full pipe area. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Resun D-451, or equal. 



2.6 CHECK VALVE: 

CK-1 





MISCELLANEOUS - Horizontal swing check, renewable seat and disc, threaded cap. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Stockham B-319, Nibco T-413, Crane 37, Lunkenheimer 2144. 

CK-2 





MISCELLANEOUS - Horizontal swing check, renewable seat and disc, bronze trim, bolted cap. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Nibco F-918-B, Jenkins 624-C, Crane 373, Lunkenheimer 1790. 

2.7 STRAINERS 

A. Strainers shall conform to the Specifications for the services listed. Strainers shall be of a single 

manufacturer if possible. Application of these strainers shall be as outlined in subsequent sections 

of these Specifications. 

B. Provide pipe nipple with globe valve (GL-1) or ball valve (BA-1) for blowing down of strainer 

screen. 

C. Pipeline strainers shall be Y-pattern type (unless otherwise noted) having monel screens with 

perforations as follows: 

Sizes 2 inch and under - 20 mesh 

Sizes 2-1/2 inch to 3 inch - 3/64 inch 

Sizes 4 inch and larger - 1/8 inch mesh 

Strainer mesh for steam line strainers shall be 60/100 


ST-1 

PRESSURE - 125 psig W.S.P., 200 psig C.W.P. 



MISCELLANEOUS - Y-type. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Warren Webster Series 78, Crane 988-1/2, Metraflex Style S, Armstrong, 

Mueller Steam Specialties. 



ST-2 





MISCELLANEOUS - Y-type. 

MFR. AND MODEL - Warren Webster Series 78, Crane 989-1/2, Metraflex Style M-1, Armstrong, 

Mueller Steam Specialties. 

2.8 BRANCH CONNECTIONS 

A. Branch connections shall be made with standard fittings of the type required for the service unless 

otherwise specified or detailed. 

2.9 PRESSURE GAUGES 

A. Pressure gauges shall have a range as required for specific application, normal operation in 

middle 2/3 of scale, not less than 4-1/2 inch dia. propylene liquid filled, cast aluminum case, 1 

percent accuracy and provided with gauge cock and pressure snubber. When connected to 

pumps for measurements of heads, gauges shall be calibrated in psig and feet water. Pressure 

gauges shall be liquid filled and provided with snubbers. 

B. Provide acrylic plastic window. 

C. Gauge shall be Trerice 450 Series or similar by Weksler or U.S. Gauge. 

2.10 THERMOMETER 

A. Thermometer shall be of the separable well, adjustable angle type with vertical scale, clear acrylic 

plastic window, red reading mercury tube, 9 inch cast aluminum case with polished stainless steel 

front, and white face with black scale markings. Brass stem 3/4 inch N.P.T., 3-1/2 inches long. 

Install thermometers in separate socket filled with non-solidifying heat conductive paste. 

Thermometers for ducts shall be of the same general design, but equipped with flange for duct 

insertion. 

Cold Water: 0 - 100 deg F Range. 

Hot Water: 30 - 240 deg F Range. 

B. Thermometer shall be Trerice type A-405 or similar by Taylor, Weksler, or U.S. Gauge. 

2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Provide and install pipe hangers and supports. 

B. Chain, perforated and flat steel strip hangers shall not be acceptable. Clevis type hangers shall be 

used with sway bracing provided to minimize vibration. 



C. Hangers provided for insulated lines shall be sized for the outside diameter of the applied 

insulation. Provide temporary wooden blocks, properly sized for the insulation thickness, which 

will accurately center the pipe in the hanger and enable the insulation to be applied without 

disturbing hanger settings. 

D. Black steel hangers and supports shall be protected from corrosion by painting with suitable 

coating. 

E. Hangers - Insulated Piping - Hangers used with insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate 

the pipe and insulation, and shall have a support shield, as specified in SECTION 15250 - 

INSULATION, to prevent the hanger from compressing the insulation. Hanger shall be clevis type 

with rod and double nuts and washers. Hangers shall be black, Anvil Figure 260, or similar by B- 

Line or Michigan Hanger. 

F. Hangers - Bare Ferrous Piping - Hangers for bare ferrous pipe shall be the clevis type with rod and 

double nuts and washers. Hanger shall be black, Anvil Figure 260, or similar by B-Line or 

Michigan Hanger. 

G. Hangers - Bare Copper Piping - Hangers for bare copper pipe shall be clevis type with rod and 

double nuts and washers, and shall be copper plated. Hanger shall be Anvil Figure CT-65 or 

similar by B-Line or Michigan Hanger. 

H. Vertical piping shall be supported and laterally braced in intervals not exceeding 15 feet. Support 

vertical piping with clamp installed below coupling or hub. Clamp assembly shall be black, Anvil 

Figure 138 R (Non-Insulated Ferrous Pipe, 3/8 - 3 inch), black, Anvil Figure 261 (Insulated or Non- 

Insulated Ferrous Pipe, 3/4 - 20 inch), copper plated Anvil Figure CT-122 R (Copper Tubing, 1/2 - 

2 inch), copper plated Anvil Figure CT-121 (Copper Tubing, 1/2 -4 inch), or similar by B-Line. 

2.12 BEAM CLAMPS AND ATTACHMENTS 

A. Beam clamps for pipe sizes 3 inch and smaller - Clamps for attachment to I-beam or steel joists 

shall be malleable iron C-clamps with hardened steel cup point set screw, locknut and retaining 

clip (I-beam clamp). Clamp shall be Grinnell Figure 86 (I-beam clamp), Figure 93 or 94 (steel joist) 

or similar by Michigan Hanger. 

B. Beam clamps for pipe sizes 4 inch and larger - Clamps for attachment to I-beam or steel joists 

shall be malleable iron jaw steel tie rod, nuts and washer. Clamp shall be Grinnell Figure 228, 

229, or 292. 

C. Fastening devices for material other than steel beams or joists shall be of equal quality and 

construction. 

D. Provide alternate means of attachment for tube steel building construction. 

2.13 SLEEVES 

A. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe with welded anchor lugs. 

2.14 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 

A. Galvanized escutcheons or plates shall be securely fastened around pipes that are exposed where 

they pass through wall, ceilings, or floors. 



2.15 DIELECTRIC UNIONS 

A. Isolate connections of dissimilar metals and above grade piping from below slab or grade piping 

with insulating dielectric connections. Dielectric connections shall also be furnished for joining 

similar metals in order to isolate cathodically protected pipelines from adjoining pipe sections. 

Such joints, including dielectric material, shall be rated to withstand the temperature, pressure and 

other characteristics of the service for which it is to be used, including the testing pressure. 

B. Screwed joints shall be made with insulating unions as manufactured by EPCO, or similar by 

Stockham. 

C. Flanged joints shall be made with insulating gaskets, as manufactured by Duriron Co. ("task time" 

insulating gaskets) and bolt sleeves and washers by E.I.DuPont de Nemours & Co. ("Teflon"), or 

equal. 

2.16 ACCESS PANELS 

A. Provide access panels of sufficient size to allow for the adjustment, repair, or replacement of all 

equipment, such as valves, balancing valves, control valves, air vents, strainers, traps, expansion 

joints, and shock absorbers. Minimum size shall be 12 inch x 12 inch. Access panels shall be 

installed at all locations where equipment is concealed. Panel finish shall match the finish of the 

adjoining surface. 

B. Provide spanner head cam latch with 2 wrenches per 10 panels. 

C. Access panels in plaster surfaces shall be Style K, panels in masonry walls shall be Style M each 

as manufactured by Inryco- Milcor, or similar by Krueger Manufacturing Co. 

2.17 FIRE-RESISTIVE SILICONE FOAM AND SEALANT 

A. Fire-resistive silicone foam shall be a FM and UL approved two-part, field mixed, expanding 

silicone foam that will cure at room temperature to a flexible fire resistive foam. Foam material 

shall be Dow Corning 2001 as manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, Michigan. 

B. Sealant for use with fire-resistant foam shall be Dow Corning 2000 sealant also manufactured by 

Dow Corning Corporation. 



2.18 TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 

A. Treated wood blocking shall be Southern Pine, kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% 

(after treatment), and shall be pressure impregnated with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) at the 

rate of .40 lbs/C.F. Process shall be Wolmanized (CCA) as manufactured by The Koppers 

Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA, or equal. Preservatives shall meet AWPA Standard P-5 and 

Federal Standard TT-W-550. The treating process and results thereof shall meet Federal Spec. 

TT-W-571, AWPA Commodity Standards as applicable, and American Wood Preservers Bureau 

Standard LP-22. 

2.19 SEALANTS 

A. Sealants shall be General Electric Construction 1200 Sealant, or equal. 

2.20 PAINTING 

A. After work is complete, the Contractor shall repaint or touch-up equipment supplied under this 

Contract that has become marred during shipment or due to the work of this or any other 

Contractor. Touch-up paint shall match original. 

2.21 NAMEPLATES 

A. Equipment installed under this Contract shall have a permanently attached nameplate 

(identification tag) affixed to the equipment. The tag shall be constructed of metal with indented 

lettering and attached to the equipment via sheet metal screws or of engraved laminated phenolic 

consisting of two outer layers of white phenolic and an inner layer of black engraved to the inner 

layer and epoxy cemented to the equipment. Pressure sensitive labels shall not be approved. 

The nameplate shall contain the following minimum applicable information: unit identification tag 

number, manufacturer, manufacturer's model number, voltage, phase, horsepower, and capacity. 

2.22 CONCRETE AND CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 

A. Provide concrete and concrete reinforcement as specified in Division 3. 

2.23 EQUIPMENT PADS 

A. Provide equipment pads for floor-mounted equipment provided under this Division. Pads shall be 

4" high, 2" longer, and 2" wider than the supported equipment. Pads shall be constructed of castin-place 

concrete with 6 x 6 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcing. Edges shall be chamfered unless 

otherwise noted. Equipment pads shall be level. 

2.24 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL 

A. Provide miscellaneous steel shown on the Drawings or required for proper support of equipment or 

materials. 

2.25 MOTORS 

A. Motors 1 HP and up shall have a 1.15 service factor. Motors under 1 HP shall have a 1.25 service 

factor. 120V motors 1/6 HP and smaller shall be inherently protected. Minimum motor efficiency, 




3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION 

unless otherwise superceded by a more stringent local code requirement, shall be in accordance 

with the Federal Energy Policy Act (EPAct) as follows: 

Open Enclosed 

HP Motors Motors 

1.0 82.5 82.5 

1.5 84.0 84.0 

2.0 84.0 84.0 

3.0 86.5 87.5 

5.0 87.5 87.5 

7.5 88.5 89.5 

10.0 89.5 89.5 

15.0 91.0 91.0 

20.0 91.0 91.0 

25.0 91.7 92.4 

30.0 92.4 92.4 

40.0 93.0 93.0 

50.0 93.0 93.0 

60.0 93.6 93.6 

75.0 94.1 94.1 

100.0 94.1 94.5 

150.0 94.5 95.0 

200.0 95.0 95.0 

A. Carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing work. 

B. Pipe, fitting, valves, equipment and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in 

workmanship prior to installation. Items found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be 

rejected and removed from the jobsite. Pipe, fittings, valves and equipment shall have factoryapplied 

markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for identification to determine their 

conformance with specified requirements. 

C. Changes in size and direction shall be made only with fittings. Long radius elbows shall be used 

where possible to reduce pressure drops unless otherwise specified. Pipe bends shall not be 

used. 

D. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducer or increaser fittings to provide smooth transition. 

E. Sort Building: Completion of work under this Division shall require shutdown of existing systems 

or portions of existing systems. After installation of new work is completed, this Contractor shall 

restore service and put equipment (new and existing) into service and operation. 

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install supply piping, including shut-off valves and strainers, to coils, 

pumps and other equipment at line size with reduction in size being made only at inlet to 

equipment, control valve, or pump. Install supply piping from outlet of control valves at full size of 



connection to equipment served. Install piping, check valves, strainers, and shut-off valves in 

equipment outlet or return lines beyond dirt pockets the size of the equipment connection. 

G. Install bell and spigot pipe, such that spigot ends point in direction of flow. 

H. Branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either 90 or 45-degree angle above the 

horizontal plane for gas, steam, or airlines, and from the bottom, or 45-degree angle below the 

horizontal plan for liquids. Top branch take-offs for liquids shall be allowed for non-circulating 

liquids (potable water) and for recirculating liquids if branch contains air vents. 

I. Where galvanizing has been burned off due to welding, clean surfaces and paint with one coat of 

rust inhibiting metal primer, and when dry, one coat of zinc rich paint. 

J. Installed pipe shall be new and shall be straight, true, and free from defects. Pipe shall be reamed 

out full size before erection. Remove all scale prior to assembly. Pipe and tubing shall be cut 

accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without 

springing or forcing. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating, even temporarily, undue 

loads, forces or strains on valves, equipment or building elements with piping connections or 

piping supports. 

K. Piping shall be installed with sufficient flexibility to adequately provide for expansion and 

contraction due to temperature fluctuation inherent in its operation. 

L. Care shall be taken to insure that bracing and supports will not restrain expansion and contraction 

nor set up excessive stresses at joints and at equipment. 

M. Provide flanged connections or unions at each piece of equipment so it can be easily removed for 

service without disturbing the piping system. 

N. Unless noted otherwise, exposed vertical piping shall be installed perfectly plumb. 

O. No more than 3/16 inch additional metal shall be deposited on a weld. Wherever leaks manifest 

themselves in welded piping, the weld metal shall be ground out to parent metal and the joint 

rewelded with no more than 3/16 inch excess metal deposited. After welding, piping shall be 

tested as elsewhere specified. 

P. No piping shall be run concealed in walls or partitions, nor underground nor under the floor, except 

as shown. Where pipe passes through building structure, pipe joints shall not be concealed, but 

located where they may be readily inspected. 

Q. Pipes to be insulated shall be run as shown and as required with sufficient clearance to permit 

application of insulation. 

R. Burrs on the pipe due to cutting or other causes shall be completely removed by reaming prior to 

erection. 

S. Solder joints shall be made with soft solder filling the entire void between the tube and fitting, and 

filling the solder hole in the valves and fittings. Flux shall be used to insure that an intimate bond 

of solder appears. Solder containing lead shall not be permitted. 



T. Screw joints shall be made with uniform tapered threads properly cut with sharp clean dies. Screw 

joints shall be made with a thread compound suitable for the fluid involved. Threads of fittings 

shall not be coated with compound. 

U. Flanged joints shall be used only where necessary for normal maintenance and where required to 

match valves and equipment. Flanges shall be faced true and made up perfectly square and tight. 

V. Welded joints shall be made only by welders thoroughly experienced in welding on pressure piping 

systems and licensed as required by the Owner's insuring company and all other governing 

authorities. Welded joints, if made without backing rings, shall be made in such a manner that the 

inside of the pipe is free of welding slag, scales and drippings. Contractor shall have welds 

inspected by the inspector for the insurance company, or the governing authority and accepted by 

them. Costs involved for such inspections shall be a part of this Contract. 

W. Surface for welding shall be cleaned and free from paint, oil, rust, and other foreign matter. 

Surfaces to be welded shall be aligned as accurately as is practical within existing commercial 

tolerances. 

X. Gaskets, packing and thread compounds shall be suitable for the fluid for which they are used. 

Y. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching straight runs to form full sized tees, or any similar 

construction shall not be used. Welding small lines into large ones shall not be permitted. 

Z. Adequate vents and drains shall be provided as required for proper operation. 

AA. Piping shall be run as shown and detailed on the plans, care being taken to avoid interference with 

other piping, conduit or other obstruction. Except where specifically shown otherwise on the 

Drawings, piping shall run straight, true and parallel to wall and ceilings with a minimum of offsets. 

Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible. 

BB. To avoid loss of time, damage to equipment, and start-up difficulties, each section of pipe, fitting 

and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned and positively free of all foreign matter before erection. 

CC. Open ends of mains shall be plugged or capped at all times except when actual work is being 

performed on that area. Lines shall not be left open where foreign matter might accidentally enter 

pipe. 

DD. Solder joints shall be made with soft solder filling the entire void between the tube and fitting, and 

filling the solder hole in the valves and fittings. Flux shall be used to insure that an intimate bond 

of solder appears. Solder containing lead shall not be permitted. 

EE. Where permanent strainers are not shown, temporary strainers may be required for use during the 

start-up period. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary strainers as required to protect 

equipment from sediment and debris during initial start-up. No equipment shall be damaged 

during the warranty period by debris transported through the piping system. Strainers shall be free 

of dirt and debris at the time of Owner occupancy. 

3.2 PIPE SLOPE 

A. Soil and waste sanitary, piping shall pitch according to inverts shown on the Drawings. Where no 

inverts are indicated, drainage lines shall pitch a minimum of 1/4" per foot in the direction of flow. 



B. Piping not specifically mentioned above shall be graded not less than 1/4" in 10 feet. 

C. Piping shall be set to within 1/4" of the inverts as shown on the Drawings. 

D. Inverts noted on the Drawings shall be field verified by the Contractor and marked accordingly on 

the "As-built" Drawings. 

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Requirements of the applicable sections of ANSI B31 "Pressure Piping" shall be considered as 

minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems. Provide 

seismic restraints as required. 

B. Piping and piping connected equipment, including valves, strainers and other specialties and 

accessories, shall be supported directly from the facility structure and in a manner that will not 

result in excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging, or vibration in the piping or in the building 

structure either during erection, cleaning, testing, or normal operation of the systems. Piping shall 

not be so restrained as to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or anchors, or to prevent 

proper movement due to expansion and contraction. Piping shall be supported at equipment and 

valves such that they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping. 

Piping shall not introduce strains and distortion to the connected equipment. 

C. Hangers and supports shall be installed complete, including locknuts, clamps, rods, bolts, 

couplings, swivels, inserts, and required accessory items. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have 

adequate means of vertical adjustment for proper alignment of pipe, and shall be provided with 

locknuts. Hangers, anchors, and fittings shall be of materials compatible with that of the pipe in 

order to prevent corrosion. Hangers and supports in direct contact with copper tubing shall be 

copper plated or plastic coated. 

D. Coordinate the location and method of support of the piping system with that of installation under 

other bid packages and sections of the Specification. 

E. Support piping in such a manner as to impose no eccentric loading on building structural 

members. Attachment at building structural members shall be made only at panel points. Support 

piping running horizontally and parallel with bar joists by trapeze type hangers attached to top 

chord of bar joists. Support piping running horizontally through or under bar joists and 

perpendicular to bar joists from top chord of bar joists. 

F. The loading of hangers and supports shall in no case exceed the manufacturer's recommended 

maximum load. 

G. Pipe hangers and supports shall be spaced as shown on the following schedule: 

Maximum Hanger Spacing 

Copper 

Size Steel Pipe Steel Pipe Tube 

(water) (steam/air) (water) 

1/2" 7ft 7ft 5ft 

3/4" 7ft 7ft 5ft 

1" 7ft 7ft 6ft 

1-1/4" 7ft 7ft 7ft 



1-1/2" 9ft 9ft 8ft 

2" 10ft 10ft 8ft 

2-1/2" 11ft 10ft 9ft 

3" 12ft 10ft 10ft 

4" 13ft 10ft 10ft 

6" 13ft 10ft 10ft 

8" 13ft 10ft 10ft 

10" 13ft 10ft 10ft 

12" 13ft 10ft 10ft 

The minimum rod diameters shall be as scheduled below: 

Nominal Size (inch) 

Minimum Rod Diameter 

3 and smaller 3/8 

4 - 6 1/2 

8 5/8 

10 3/4 

12 7/8 

Rod Diameter (inch) 

H. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to valves and strainers, at 

equipment connections, heavy fittings and accessories. Maximum hanger spacing for cast iron 

soil pipe shall be 10 feet for 10 foot lengths of pipe. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each 

joint in cast iron soil pipe and grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. Unless otherwise 

indicated on the Drawings, support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings, 

or lugs welded to the pipe. 

I. Hanger spacing shall be reduced so as not to exceed the maximum recommended loading by the 

hanger or pipe manufacturer. 

3.4 VALVES AND STRAINERS 

A. If space permits, install valves with stems horizontal in a uniform direction or extended vertically 

upward unless shown otherwise. Valves shall be installed in accessible locations for operation as 

well as for repair or replacement. 

3.5 BEDDING AND PIPE LAYING 

A. Pipes shall be laid true to the lines and grades established by the Engineer, called for on the 

Drawings, and properly bedded. Slope shall be in accordance with the inverts shown on the 

Drawings. Should grade adjustments appear necessary due to field conditions, notify the 

Engineer and await the Engineer's direction before proceeding with the work. Piping that has its 

alignment or grade disturbed after laying shall be taken up, re-laid and re-jointed. The interior of 

pipes shall be kept clean of foreign matter during laying operations. Under no circumstances shall 

pipe be laid in water. Pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or the weather is unsuitable in 

the opinion of the Owner's Representative. Every precaution shall be taken to obtain water-tight 

construction. Pipe joints and other appurtenances shall be made in such a manner as to minimize 

infiltration. 



B. Extreme care shall be taken in pipe laying to provide proper support for the full length of the barrel 

of the pipe. Bedding shall be provided by mechanical excavation carried to a point 6 inches below 

invert grade, and the trench bottom carefully backfilled with gravel so that when the pipe is laid to 

the proper invert grade, the backfill will provide circumferential support for the bottom one-half of 

the barrel of the pipe. 

C. Pipe shall be inspected and both ends cleaned before being lowered into the trench. Unless 

otherwise specified, the pipe shall be laid at constant slope from manhole to manhole. Care shall 

be taken to lay the pipe to true lines and grades. Care must be taken to fit the joints together 

properly so that the centers of the pipes shall be in one and the same straight line and so as to 

give an opening of even thickness all around between spigot and socket. 

D. Whenever pipe is to be laid where rock is excavated, the rock shall be removed as specified. The 

bottom of the ditch will then be raised to proper grade by backfilling with 3/4 inch crushed stone 

(compacted). 

E. Embedment materials shall be Class I material as listed under USCA Soil Classification System 

(FHA Bulletin No. 373 or ASTM D2487). 

3.6 SLEEVES 

A. Provide sleeves for pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs, grade beams, and 

foundations. 

B. Layout, size, and locate sleeves such that they be set and installed prior to pouring concrete, or 

when masonry is being constructed. In the event sleeves must be placed after floor, wall partition, 

or foundation has been constructed, submit in writing to and obtain approval from the Engineer on 

location, quantity, and proposed method of core drilling and installing. Cost of core drilling and 

installation shall be under this Contract. Core drilled openings above grade, in solid concrete need 

not be sleeved, but must be clean and neat without cracking or spalling. 

C. Horizontal sleeves through walls, grade beams, foundations, and partitions shall be flush with 

finished wall faces. Vertical sleeves through floors shall extend 2 inches above finished floor and 

be flush on ceiling or under side. 

D. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is a minimum of 2 inches larger than O.D. of bare pipe for 

uninsulated lines and 2 inches larger than O.D. of insulation and jacket for insulated lines. Center 

pipes in sleeves. Sleeves in pits or below grade shall be painted or coated with one coat of coal 

tar pitch paint or equivalent. 

E. On lines passing through floors, slabs, walls, grade beams, or foundations at or below grade and 

in pits, the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve shall be 

packed with oakum to within l inch of both sides and the remaining space filled with asphaltic 

mastic. On lines passing through walls and floors above grade, the annular space between 

outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve shall be packed tight with approved insulation to 

within l inch of both sides of the sleeve and the remaining space filled with sealant. 

3.7 PIPE JOINTS 

A. Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints - Mechanical coupling connections shall mechanically 

engage, lock and seal the grooved pipe ends in a positive couple. Each coupling shall consist of 



malleable iron housing clamps, steel bolts, and nuts, and sealing gasket designed, such that 

internal pressure tends to increase the tightness of the seal. The entire installation, including pipe 

grooving, shall be accomplished in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Final 

tightening of bolts shall be with a torque wrench to insure equal tension in bolts. Couplings shall 

be suitable for involved space temperatures and shall be as manufactured by the Victaulic 

Company, or equal. 

B. Push-On Joints, Soil Pipe - Joint shall be one-piece double seal compression type gasket made 

specifically for joining cast iron soil pipe. The gasket shall be neoprene material, permitting joint to 

flex as much as 5 degrees without loss of seal. Gasket shall be extra heavy weight class, 

conforming to ASTM Specification C-564. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's 

published instructions. Gaskets shall be as manufactured by Tyler Pipe & Foundry Company, or 

equal. 

C. Solder Joints - Make up joints with 95% tin and 5% antimony (95-5) lead-free solder conforming to 

ASTM B32 "Solder Metal" Grade 95TA. Cut copper tubing so ends are square and remove burrs 

inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove oxide, dirt, 

and grease just prior to soldering. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, over surfaces to be joined. 

Heat joints uniformly to proper soldering temperature so solder will flow to mated surfaces. Wipe 

excess solder, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting. Flux shall be non-acid type. Remove 

composition discs from solder end valves during soldering. 

D. Welded Joints - The welding of pipe joints, both as to procedures and qualification of welders, shall 

be in accordance with Section IX, ASME, "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," unless mandatory 

local codes take precedence. Ends of pipe and fittings to be joined by butt-welding shall be 

beveled, cleaned to bare metal and internal diameters aligned before tack welding. Backing rings 

shall be used for butt weld joints 3 inch pipe size and over, and all sizes where operating pressure 

is 200 psig and above or temperature is 400 F and above. Backing rings shall be of a material 

compatible with pipe material being welded. 

E. Threaded Joints - Pipe screw threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1, "Pipe Threads." Ream pipe 

ends and remove all burrs and chips formed in cutting and threading. Protect plated pipe and 

brass valve bodies from wrench marks when making up joint. Apply thread lubricant to male 

threads only. 

F. Flanged Joints - Steel pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5, "Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged 

Fittings." Cast iron pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, "Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged 

Fittings." Steel flanges shall be raised face except when bolted to flat cast iron flange. Bolting for 

services up to 500 deg F shall be ASTM A307 Grade B with square head bolts and heavy 

hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1, "Square and Hex Bolts," and B18.2.2, "Square and 

Hex Nuts." Set flange bolts beyond finger tightness with an indicating torque wrench to insure 

equal tension in bolts. Tighten bolts such that those 180 degrees apart or directly opposite are 

torqued in sequence. 

G. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall conform to requirements for "Group 1 Gaskets" in ANSI B16.5. 

Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be 3/32 inch thick. 

H. Solvent Cement Joints - Socket joints in CPVC, PVC and ABS pipe shall be made using a code 

required and manufacturer's recommended solvent cement suitable for respective pipe (CPVC, 

PVC, ABS, Schedule 40, Schedule 80) and conforming to ASTM 2564. Follow manufacturer's 



instructions regarding handling and cementing procedures. Wipe off excess cement fillet around 

socket. Do not move pipe while cement is setting. 

3.8 FIRE-RESISTIVE SILICONE FOAM AND SEALANT 

A. Fire-resistive silicone foam shall be dispensed into the areas as required by these Specifications 

or shown on the Drawings. Areas to receive foam shall be free of liquid water, oil and loose 

particles and dust. 

B. Mix foam components carefully in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Inject mixture into 

properly prepared and dammed voids. Allow 24 hours for cure time. Remove damming materials 

and seal remaining voids and exterior surface with specified sealant. 

3.9 SEALANT 

A. Surface to receive sealant must be structurally sound, dry, clean, free of dirt, moisture, loose 

particles, oil, grease, asphalt, tar, paint, wax, rust, waterproofing, curing and parting compounds 

and membrane materials. Care shall be taken to avoid coating or smearing the exposed exterior 

surfaces. Protective coatings shall be removed with solvent and chemical residue or film removed. 

B. The sealing compound shall be applied using an approved type of caulking gun, with nozzles of 

the sizes required. Excess material shall be neatly removed. Application shall be made in 

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prime all surfaces before installation of 

sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Tool joint to assure correct bead configuration, neat joint, and maximum adhesion to the sides of 

the joint. 

D. The surface of materials adjacent to sealant operations shall be cleaned of smears of compound 

and other soiling due to the sealant application. Fresh compound that has accidentally been 

smeared on the insulated panels shall be scraped off immediately and rubbed clean. 

3.10 FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS 

A. The space between the outside diameter of the pipe penetrating a firewall and the inside diameter 

of metal sleeve shall be filled with proper damming material to provide correct depth of fireresistive 

silicone foam. Remove damming materials and seal remaining voids and the exterior 

surface with specified sealant. 

B. Penetrations shall maintain the UL rating of the wall and strictly follow the UL required installation 

Standards and material. 

C. Follow UL and manufacturer's instructions. 

3.11 GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS 

A. Gauges and thermometers shall be located such that they can be easily read from floor level or 

operating platform. 

3.12 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FINISHES 



A. Protect existing adjacent surfaces during the installation of piping and equipment. Contractor shall 

assume responsibility and bear all expenses for repair of all damages. 

3.13 PAINTING 

A. Surface to be painted shall be properly prepared. This includes the removal of mud, dirt, concrete 

and mortar, rust, inadequately adhered paint, grease and oil. Utilize mechanical tools, power 

tools, cleaning agents or other techniques to prepare for painting. Minimum cleaning standards 

are scheduled for paint systems using the Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation 

Specifications. 

B. Scrape, rub, or sandpaper surfaces before or between coats where good practice dictates. 

Surfaces shall be dusted just prior to painting and necessary steps taken to remove loose dirt and 

prevent dust in the area during the painting and drying period. Do not proceed with the painting of 

any surface when weather conditions or progress of other trades is not suitable to permit first-class 

work. 

C. Use drop cloths, masking and special care to see that surfaces not to receive painting are 

protected against scarring from scaffold, paint spattering, or over-spraying. Surfaces so marked or 

spattered shall be refinished. Injured, marked, stained and damaged portions shall be touched up 

after all mechanics are through, and all work left in perfect condition at completion. Paint splatters 

on finished surfaces shall be removed and the original finish restored. Particular care is required 

to protect insulated wall panels and light fixtures. Paint or paint splattering or spray of any nature 

is unacceptable on sprinkler heads. Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for 

replacement of sprinkler heads so damaged. 

3.14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

A. Provide excavation and backfill as specified in Division 2. 

3.15 PUMPING AND SHORING 

A. Provide pumping and shoring as specified in Division 2. 

B. Shoring shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with OSHA. 




SECTION 15250 - INSULATION 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the Mechanical Systems Insulation. The specific application of these 

materials shall be as outlined in subsequent sections of these Specifications. 









Insulation Specification No. 1 Flexible Elastomer - Pipe YES 

Insulation Specification No. 2 Fiberglass - Pipe YES 

Insulation Specification No. 9 Fiberglass Duct Wrap YES 

Insulation Specification No. 10 Flexible Elastomer-Sheet YES 

EPDM Sheet Jacket NO 

PVC Sheet Jacket NO 

PVC Tape NO 

Insulation Protection Saddles and Shields NO 

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE 

A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Insulation shall conform to the applicable insulation Specifications listed below. Refer to the 

various individual sections of this Specification for specific material application. 

INSULATION 15250-1


B. Insulation and adhesive materials shall have a flame spread rating of not greater than 25, and a 

smoke developed rating of not greater than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 or UL- 

723 unless noted otherwise. 

2.2 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMER - PIPE 

A. Flexible elastomer pipe insulation shall be a closed cell foamed elastomer having a density range 

of 3.0 – 6.0 lbs. per cu.ft., shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-In/Hr-Sq Ft - Deg F or 

better at 75 deg F mean temperature, and shall have a permeability of not greater than 0.08 

perm-inches. 

B. Insulation shall be AP/Armaflex SSPipe Insulation as manufactured by Armacell. 

C. Fittings, valves, and flanges shall be insulated using field fabricated fitting covers. The material 

used shall be identical to the adjacent pipe insulation as specified. 

D. Adhesive for adhering all joints in flexible elastomer pipe insulation shall be rubber based contact 

adhesive, Armacell 520 or 520 BLV. 

2.3 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 2 FIBERGLASS - PIPE 

A. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be one-piece factory molded pipe insulation having a density of not 

less than 3.5 lbs. per cu.ft., and having a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.23 BTU-In/Hr- 

Sq Ft - Deg F at 75 Deg F mean temperature. Pipe insulation shall have a factory applied foil and 

kraft paper fire retardant, vapor barrier jacket, having a maximum permeance to water vapor of 

0.02 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 Procedure A, and a minimum Beach 

puncture resistance of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM D781. Jacket shall have factory 

applied self-sealing adhesive lap. 

B. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL II as manufactured by Owens-Corning 

Fiberglass Corporation, or similar by Johns Manville or Knauf. 

C. Fittings, valves and flanges shall be insulated using premolded PVC fitting covers. PVC covers 

shall be one piece, factory molded, vapor and moisture resistant and shall be Zeston as 

manufactured by Johns Manville, or similar by Certain-Teed or Speed Line Manufacturing Co. 

Factory furnished fiberglass inserts shall be utilized. 

2.4 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 9 FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP 

A. Ducts shall be externally insulated with commercial grade faced duct wrap insulation consisting of 

inorganic blankets of glass fibers factory-laminated to a foil reinforced kraft (FRK) vapor barrier 

facing. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity of .25 BTU-In/Hr-Sq Ft-Deg F at 75 Deg mean 

temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C-518, a density of 1.5 lbs/cu ft, and shall 

have no accelerating affect on corrosion of aluminum or steel. 

B. Insulation shall be All Service faced duct wrap type 150 as manufactured by Owens-Corning 

Fiberglas Corporation, or similar by Johns Manville, or Certain-Teed. 

2.5 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 10 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMER - SHEET 

INSULATION 15250-2


A. Flexible elastomer sheet insulation shall be a closed cell foamed elastomer having a density range 

of 3.0 – 6.0 lbs. per cu.ft., shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-In/Hr-Sq Ft-Deg F at 75 

Deg F mean temperature, and shall have a permeability of not greater than 0.08 perm-inches. 

B. Insulation shall be AP/Armaflex Sheet and Roll Insulation as manufactured by Armacell. 

C. Adhesive for adhering flexible elastomer to sheet metal (outside duct only), and for adhering all 

seams and joints shall be rubber based contact adhesive, Armacell 520 or 520 BLV. 

2.6 PVC SHEET JACKET 

A. All insulation where specified or otherwise shown on the Drawings shall have a jacket of PVC 

sheet material. Jacket material shall be 30 mil thick, have a permeability to water vapor of not 

greater than .012 perm-in., and be non-toxic, odorless, and resistant to corrosion and exposure. 

B. Color of PVC jacket shall be white. 

C. Jacket shall be as manufactured by Ceel-Co, or similar by Johns Manville - Zeston, Certain-Teed 

or Speed Line Manufacturing Co. 

2.7 PVC TAPE 

A. PVC tape shall be a 10 mil minimum thickness polyvinyl chloride pressure sensitive tape, 2" in 

width, as manufactured by Speed Line, or similar by Proto. 

2.8 INSULATION PROTECTION SADDLES AND SHIELDS 

A. Insulation protection saddles and shields shall be provided and installed by the Contractor at all 

pipe hangers and supports for insulated lines. 

B. All insulation protection shields shall be rolled with a true radius to suit the insulation O.D. Prime 

galvanized sheet metal shall be used for all shields. The shields shall be sized to wrap the 

insulation in an arc between 120 Deg and 180 Deg. The shields shall be anchored to the pipe 

insulation with no less than two bands per shield. Bands shall be stainless steel, aluminum, or 

galvanized steel matching insulation jackets where applicable. 

C. The schedule for the shields shall be as follows: 

Pipe Size Shield Gauge 

Shield Length 

(Inches) (Inches) 

2 and smaller 16 8 

2-1/2 and 3 14 10 

4 14 12 

5 and 6 12 14 

8, 10, and 12 12 16 

D. Pipe insulation saddles shall be fabricated from calcium silicate or high density pre-compressed 

fiberglass pipe insulation. Calcium silicate saddles shall not be used on cold water piping systems. 

Saddles may be polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene where similar materials are specified for 

adjoining pipe insulation. Saddle shall be minimally 1/2 section of pipe insulation placed in pipe 

INSULATION 15250-3


support. Saddle thickness shall be identical to adjacent pipe insulation and shall be furnished with 

jacketing material identical with jacket of adjacent pipe insulation. Saddle jacketing shall be 

adhered to adjacent pipe insulation jacketing utilizing adhesive compatible with overall insulation 

system maintaining complete vapor barrier integrity where so required. Saddle shall project 4 

inches beyond each edge of specified sheet metal shield. 

E. Pipe insulation saddles for services insulated with flexible elastomeric pipe insulation shall be 

made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendation of 1" diameter wooden 

plugs cemented in place and sealed. The wooden plugs shall be in pairs set at 45 angles from the 

vertical within the saddle on 3" centers with a minimum of 6 plugs per saddle. 



A. Surfaces to receive insulation shall be free of rust, scale or dust, and be clean and dry. 

B. Insulation shall be applied with tightly butted joints, free of voids and gaps. All fasteners and 

bands shall be neatly aligned and overall appearance of work shall be subject to Engineer's 

approval. 

3.2 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMER - PIPE 

A. Insulation shall be slipped onto the pipe without slitting wherever possible. All slits and end joints 

shall be completely sealed using the specified contact adhesive to provide a perfect vapor seal. 

Contact adhesive shall be applied to both surfaces to be joined and shall be dry to light touch 

before joining surfaces to assure proper seal and adhesion. 

B. Fitting, valve, and flange insulation shall be field mitered from the same material and thickness as 

adjacent pipe insulation and shall be applied to the fitting using the specified contact adhesive for 

flexible elastomer material. Valves may be insulated with sheet insulation secured with contact 

adhesive. 

3.3 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 2 FIBERGLASS - PIPE 

A. One piece fiberglass pipe insulation shall be snapped on the pipe and butted tightly to the adjacent 

piece of insulation. The self-sealing lap shall be neatly and snugly secured using a sealing tool to 

thoroughly rub the pressure sensitive self-sealing lap joints. Care must be exercised to make 

certain that the jacket surfaces to be sealed are dry and free from dust. End butt joints between 

sections of insulation shall be sealed similarly with pressure sensitive butt strips. Self-sealing lap 

shall only be applied when the ambient temperature is between 35 Deg F and 110 Deg F. 

B. Pre-molded PVC fittings shall be applied by first selecting the proper size insulation insert and 

neatly applying it to the fitting. Ends shall be tucked in and the edges adjacent to the pipe 

covering shall be tufted and tucked in, completely filling the void and insulating the fitting. The 

PVC cover shall then be applied. For heated service, the cover may be stapled, or taped in place. 

For cold or chilled water service, the PVC cover shall be taped in place with the specified tape to 

completely vapor seal the insulation. Staples and tacks shall not be permitted. 

3.4 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 9 FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP 

INSULATION 15250-4


A. Install duct wrap insulation with facing outside so that tape flap overlaps insulation and facing at 

other end of piece of duct wrap. Tightly butt ends and edges. Care shall be taken to not 

excessively compress duct corners. Seams shall be stapled 6 inches on center with outward 

clinching staples, then sealed with pressure-sensitive tape to match facing. 

B. Where rectangular ducts are 24 inches wide or greater, additionally secure insulation to the bottom 

of the duct with mechanical fasteners, such as pins and speed clip washers, spaced 18 inches on 

center. 

C. Seal all tears, punctures, and other penetrations of the duct wrap insulation facing with tape or 

mastic to provide a vapor-tight system. 

3.5 INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 10 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMER - SHEET 

A. Apply sheet insulation as required to conform to contour. Adhere insulation with full adhesive 

coverage on both the insulation and surface. Butt edges tightly with adjacent sheets. Seal butt 

edges with adhesive. 

3.6 PVC SHEET JACKET 

A. Jacket shall be secured in place by using the manufacturer's recommended welding adhesive to 

adhere all longitudinal and end laps and seams to give a 100 percent moisture-proof covering. 

INSULATION 15250-5


3.7 PIPE PENETRATIONS 


INSULATION SCHEDULE 

USE INSULATION MIN. THICKNESS 

SPEC. NO. (INCHES) 

Section 15401 - Domestic Water 

Cold Water - above ground No. 1 or No.2 1” 

Cold Water - underground Not insulated --- 

Hot Water – above ground (Non-recirculating) 

(up to1-1/4 inches) No. 1 or No. 2 1” 

(1-1/2 inches and larger) No. 1 or No. 2 1” 

Section 15800 - Air Distribution 

NOTES: 

Interior Ductwork (Concealed) No.9 2” 

Interior Ductwork (Exposed) No. 10 1” 

Provide EPDM jacket for exterior ductwork. 

Provide PVC jacket for interior ductwork (exposed) and interior pipework (exposed). 

Insulation thickness based on minimum "R" value of 4 sq ft-hr-deg F/btu-in. 

Increase insulation thickness by 1/2 inch for all ductwork exposed to ambient conditions. 


INSULATION 15250-6


SECTION 15401 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of Section 15010 shall apply to this Section, except as herein modified. 

B. This Section describes the installation of the Domestic Water System. 

C. Hot and cold water shall be distributed to fixtures and equipment. Where shown, mains shall be 

valved and capped for extension by Owner. 

D. Domestic water supply shall be extended from the water main to within 5 feet of the Sort Building 

under Division 2. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to connect and extend water 

service into the Sort Building and connect to all fixtures within the building requiring water service. 


A. Water meter, if required, shall be furnished by the local utility company, installed under this section 

scope of work in accordance to local water company requirements. 









Thermal Expansion Tank 

(Domestic Hot Water System) 

NO 

Gas Water Heater (Tank Type) YES 

Hose Bibb NO 

Shock Absorber NO 

Trap Primer Valve NO 

Trap Primer Distribution Unit NO 

Backflow Preventer YES 



DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 15401-1



2.1 PIPE 

2.2 VALVES 

A. Material for the Domestic Water piping shall be as follows. Products shall be as specified in 

Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

Pipe Use Pipe Specification No. 

Cold water - above grade No. 1 

Cold water – below grade No. 13 

Hot water - above ground No. 1 

Trap primer piping (from trap primer to floor drain) No. 13 

A. Valves for use in the Domestic Water System shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and 

shall be of the following types unless specifically noted otherwise. Products shall be as specified 

in Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

Gate Globe Check 

Valve Valve Valve Strainer 

GA-1 GL-1 CK-1 ST-1 

GA-2 GL-2 CK-2 ST-2 

B. Ball valve BA-1 may be used in lieu of gate valve or globe valve at Contractor's option. 

2.3 INSULATION 

A. Refer to Section 15250, INSULATION (INSULATION SCHEDULE) for insulation requirements. 

2.4 THERMAL EXPANSION TANK (Domestic Hot Water System) 

A. The thermal expansion tank shall consist of a welded steel pressure vessel, separated into two 

sections by a heavy-duty Butyl diaphragm. The water reservoir side shall be polypropylene lined 

which shall be permanently sealed from the air side. Unit shall be NSF tested and approved. 

Adjust air side pressure to match water system static pressure per manufacturer’s 


B. The thermal expansion tank shall be ASME rated and have capacities as scheduled on the 

Drawings. Unit shall be SERIES ST-C as manufactured by Amtrol or similar by State. 



2.5 GAS WATER HEATER 

A. Water heater shall consist of a glass lined steel tank encased within an insulated steel outer jacket 

with power direct vent, fully condensing, 96% thermal efficiency, suitable for PVC vent and 

combustion air inlet pipe. Finish shall be baked enamel. Tank shall be rated for 150 psig working 

pressure. Provide AGA approved gas train complete with all controls pre-wired and pre-piped to 

the unit including a 100 percent safety shutoff in case of malfunction or ignition failure. Anode 

rods, ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, tank drain, valve magnesium anode rod, 

and cold water dip tube. Performance shall meet current ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Provide 5 year 

warranty. 

B. Water heaters shall have capacities as scheduled on Drawings. 

C. Water heater shall be by A.O. Smith or Rheem. 

2.6 SHOCK ABSORBER 

A. Shock absorber(s) shall be permanently sealed bellows or piston type. Install in the water piping 

at locations shown on the Drawings and where required to provide a shock-free system. Shock 

absorbers shall be sized in accordance with PDI WH-201 and shall conform to ASSE 1010. 

B. Shock absorber shall be Josam 75000 Series or similar by Wade, Zurn, Smith, or Amtrol. 

2.7 TRAP PRIMER VALVE 

A. Provide brass trap primer valve with O-ring seals. Pressure Range: 35 to 75 psig. Valve shall 

automatically operate upon a 5 to 10 psig pressure drop in cold water line. 

B. Trap primer valve shall be PR-500 by Precision Plumbing Products or equal. 

2.8 TRAP PRIMER DISTRIBUTION UNIT 

A. Provide distribution unit to meter water from trap primer valve to up to 4 drain traps. 

B. Distribution unit shall be DU-2 through 4 by Precision Plumbing Products or equal. 

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTER 

A. Backflow preventer(s) shall be a complete FDA approved assembly consisting of strainer, epoxy 

coated, inlet and outlet valve, and approved devices to prevent backflow. Backflow preventer shall be 

reduced pressure principle type. Provide air gap and test kit. 

B. Backflow preventer shall be Watts Series 909 reduced pressure principle backflow preventer, or similar 

by Cla-Val Company. 

C. Air gap & test kit shall be Watts Regulator Co. 909 AG and No. TK-9 respectively, or similar by Cla-Val 

Company. 




3.1 GENERAL 

A. Connections to fixtures and equipment shall be according to manufacturer's recommendations. 

Piping run shall be made in a manner to insure easy and even flow, eliminate air pockets, and 

permit drainage and venting. Provide a minimum 6" separation between hot and cold water piping. 

B. Outlets shall be furnished with vacuum breakers. 

C. Mains and principle branches shall be valved for isolation and shall have drain valves at low points 

to allow complete system drainage. 

D. Rough-in and make final connections to equipment as indicated on Drawings. Verify locations for 

roughing-in with the equipment supplier prior to beginning work. 

E. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

3.2 TESTING 

A. Piping shall be tested in accordance with Specification Section 15425, PIPING TESTS. 

3.3 DISINFECTION 

A. Disinfect the Domestic Water System in accordance with local code, state health department, and 

utility company requirements. Where a method is not prescribed, use the following method. 

B. The piping system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at 

the points of outlet. 

C. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts 

per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 

24 hours; or 

D. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 

parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. 

E. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until the 

chlorine is purged from the system. 

F. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that contamination 

remains present in the system. 

G. Provide report to Engineer that water piping was disinfected. Provide copy of documentation in 

each O & M Manual. 

3.4 THERMAL EXPANSION TANK (Domestic Hot Water System) 

A. Adjust air side pressure to match water system static pressure per manufacturer’s 




3.5 WATER HEATER 

A. Pressure/temperature relief valve shall be piped to 6" above finished floor. Provide concrete 

equipment pad for floor mounted water heater. Refer to Section 15050. Water heater installation 

shall comply with codes and regulations and be accepted by the Governing Authorities. 

3.6 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 

A. Provide pipe verification markers and valve identification tags in accordance with Section 15423 

“Pipe and Valve Identification”. 

3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER 

A. Install where shown on the Drawings and as required by Code. Installation shall be in accordance with 

manufacturer’s recommendations. Relief valve vent shall be piped through an air gap to discharge to 

drain. 




SECTION 15405 - SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the installation of the Soil and Waste System. This Contractor shall 

provide transitions and connections to pipework provided under other Divisions. 

C. The soil and waste system for this project shall include sanitary systems as shown on the 

Drawings. 

D. The soil and waste system shall be extended to within 5 feet of the Sort Building under Division 2. 

It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to connect and extend the soil and waste pipe into 

the Sort Building and connect to fixtures within the building requiring service. 


A. Provide utility trenching, backfilling, and compacting in accordance with the requirements of 

Division 2. 




B. Local inspector shall approve work as the project progresses. 






Floor Drain / Floor Sink YES 

Cleanouts NO 



SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM 15405-1



2.1 PIPE 

A. Materials for Soil and Waste piping shall be as follows. Products shall be as specified in Section 

15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 


2.3 VALVES 

Pipe 

Pipe Use Spec. No. 

Sanitary Waste - above ground No. 4 

(1-1/2" and smaller) 

Sanitary Waste - above ground No. 3 

(2" and larger) 

Sanitary Waste - underground No. 3 or No. 7 

(all sizes) 

Exposed Sanitary Waste Vent No. 5 

above ground (all sizes) 

Concealed Sanitary Waste Vent - No. 4, or No. 5 

above ground (1-1/2" and smaller) 

Concealed Sanitary Waste Vent - No. 3 or No. 5 

above ground (2" and larger) 

Sanitary Waste Vent - under- No. 3 or No. 7 

ground (2" and larger) 

A. Soil and waste piping shall not be insulated. 

A. Valves shall not be installed on soil and waste piping. 

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS 

A. Type 1 

Description: Coated cast iron with double drainage flange, non-puncturing flashing clamp collar, 

weepholes, bottom outlet, inside caulk connection, round top, and removable deep sediment 

bucket with integral drainage rim so designed that grate cannot be set in place unless bucket is in 

position. 

Grate: Heavy duty ductile iron grate suitable for fork truck traffic. 

Trap: Deep seal “P” trap. 



B. Type 2 

C. Type 3 

2.5 CLEANOUTS 

Floor drain shall be Watts FD-340-Y-SET. 

Description: Coated cast iron floor drain body with double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom 

outlet, inside caulk connection, 1/2” trap primer tap and adjustable strainer. 

Strainer: Polished nickel bronze. 

Trap: Deep seal "P" trap. 

Floor drain shall be Josam Series 30000-A, or similar by Wade, Smith or Watts. 

Description: Coated cast iron floor drain body with double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom 

outlet, inside caulk connection, 1/2” trap primer tap and adjustable strainer. 

Strainer: Polished nickel bronze with secured grate, vandal-proof screws. 

Trap: Deep seal "P" trap. 

Floor drain shall be Josam Series 30000-PD, or similar by Wade, Smith or Watts. 

A. General - Cleanouts inside the building shall be gas-tight. Where cleanouts are on buried or 

concealed lines, they shall extend flush to the finished floor or grade. Provide "T" handle for 

removal of cleanout plugs. 

B. Floor Cleanouts for Office Areas (Finished Spaces) - Cleanouts shall consist of "Y" fittings full size 

of the pipe to 4" in diameter and not less than 4" for larger sizes. Recessed plug shall be bronze 

with countersunk rectangular slot. Cover shall be secured nickel bronze. Provide "T" handle for 

recessed plug and carpet cleanout marker for carpeted areas. Cleanout to be Josam Series 

57000, or similar by Wade, Smith, Zurn, or Watts. 

C. Floor Cleanouts for All Other Areas – Cleanouts shall consist of “Y” fittings full size of pipe to 4” in 

diameter and not less than 4” for larger sizes. Recessed plug shall be bronze with rectangular 

countersunk slot. Cover shall be secured extra heavy duty ductile iron suitable for fork truck traffic. 

Provide “T” handle for recessed plug. Cleanout shall be Josam Series 56060, or similar by Wade, 

Smith, Zurn, or Watts. 

D. Wall Cleanouts - Cleanouts shall consist of "Y" fittings full size of pipe to 4" in diameter and not 

less than 4" for larger sizes. Plug shall be bronze with rectangular countersunk slot. Provide "T" 

handle for recessed plug. Provide cover with nail anchors. Frame and cover shall be nickel 

bronze. Cover shall be Josam Series 58640, or similar by Wade, Smith, Zurn, or Watts. 

2.6 MANHOLES 

A. Manholes shall be in accordance to EBMUD (East Bay Municipal Utility District) Requirements. 





A. Drainage lines shall be properly vented, graded, and trapped to conform to local and state 

requirements. 

B. Each fixture shall be vented and trapped. Each vent shall be extended through the roof. Where 

one vertical vent line connects to another, an inverted "Y" fitting shall be used. 

C. Floor drain elevation shall be set to a tolerance of +0", -1/8". 

D. Horizontal soil and waste lines within the building shall be graded 1/4" per foot unless otherwise 

noted on the Drawings. Horizontal soil and waste lines outside the building shall be graded in 

accordance with the inverts shown on the Drawings. 

D. Changes in direction shall be made with "Y" fittings, combination "Y" and eighth bends or one 

eighth bends. Offsets in soil and waste pipes shall not be permitted when they can be avoided. 

Offsets shall be made with 45 degree bends or similar fittings. 

E. Cleanouts shall be provided in Soil and Waste piping where shown on the Drawings at the ends of 

all mains, at intersection of branches with mains, at the base of vertical stacks, at intermediate 

points of long runs so as not to exceed 40 feet between cleanouts, and at other points required by 

applicable codes so that all piping is accessible throughout. 

F. Rough-in and make final connections to all equipment as noted in the Drawings. Verify all 

locations for roughing-in with the equipment supplier prior to beginning work. 

G. Products shall be protected after installation until construction is completed and accepted by the 

Owner. When ready for use, the Contractor shall remove all protection and place the equipment in 

operation. 

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for products until acceptance by the Owner. 

I. All products shall be installed square, in line and level to give a workmanlike and uniform 

appearance. 

J. The Plumbing Contractor shall be present during all concrete pours where floor drains, cleanouts, 

and other items requiring elevation alignment occurs. The Plumbing Contractor shall adjust the 

finish elevation of these items at this time. 

K. Exposed vertical piping shall be installed perfectly plumb. 

L. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

3.2 TESTING 

A. Piping shall be tested in accordance with Specification Section 15425, PIPING TESTS. 









SECTION 15407 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the installation of the Natural Gas System. 

C. Sort Building: Natural gas shall be extended from the gas main to and including the meter by the 

Gas Utility Company. This Contractor shall extend the piping from the meter to the building and 

connect to all equipment requiring gas service. 

D. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to furnish and install the concrete pad, chain link 

fence with gate and lock, and all other materials for placement of the meter as required by the 

local gas utility company. 









Gas Pressure Regulator NO 



NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 15407-1



2.1 PIPE 

2.2 VALVES 

A. Materials for the natural gas piping shall be as follows. Products shall be as specified in Section 

15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

Pipe Use 

Pipe Specification No. 

Natural gas - above ground (interior) No. 8 with welded joints 

Natural gas - above ground (exterior) No. 8 with welded joints 

Natural gas - pipe sleeve No. 8 

Natural gas - pressure regulator vent No. 8 

A. Valves for use in the natural gas piping system shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and 

shall be of the following types unless specifically noted otherwise: 

Shutoff 

PL-1 

PL-2 


A. The gas piping shall not be insulated. 

2.4 GAS PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATOR 

A. Regulators shall be spring loaded, general purpose, and self-operating. Provide internal relief type 

diaphragm assembly and vent valve. Valve body, orifice size and pressure rating shall be suitable 

for the connected equipment. 

B. Gas regulators shall be Fisher Type S202, or equal. 



A. Extend gas piping to all equipment requiring gas. Pipe, fittings, equipment, and connections shall 

be provided with suitable branch take-offs, dirt legs, drips, cocks, and supports. 

B. Work shall be installed and tested in accordance with the recommendations of the NFPA, AGA, 

manufacturer's recommendations, and local gas utility company. 

C. All welding of gas piping shall be by certified welders as required. 

D. Furnish and install gas regulator(s) as shown on the Drawings and where required for installation 

of gas fired equipment to reduce line pressure to unit operating pressure. 



E. Interior gas pressure reducing regulators shall include vent piping that shall terminate outside the 

building. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, local codes, local gas utility 

company requirements, and the Owner's insurance company requirements. 

F. In addition to shut-off valves and pressure regulators as shown on the Drawings, provide gas 

shut-off valves and pressure regulators on all equipment if not provided as an integral part of the 

equipment, and at the gas meter. 

G. Gas piping, specialties, and equipment shall be tested and inspected in the presence of the 

inspector of the utility company and the Owner's Representative prior to concealing or covering. 

H. Above ground exterior piping and meter (where permitted by the utility company) shall be painted. 

Color to be selected by the Owner. 

I. Turns in underground piping shall have thrust restraint in accordance with utility company 

requirements. 

J. Completion of work under this Section shall require shutdown of existing natural gas piping 

systems (or portions of such system) where existing equipment with standing pilots may be 

installed. After work required under this Section is completed, gas service shall be restored, and 

this Contractor shall inspect and re-light all such gas pilots serving existing and new equipment as 

applicable. 

K. Gas piping installed in building walls shall be sleeved its entire length. The inside diameter shall 

be a minimum of 1" larger than the outside diameter of the encased gas pipe. The ends of the 

sleeve shall remain open and terminate in the adjacent spaces. 

L. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

3.2 TESTING 

A. Piping shall be tested in accordance with Specification Section 15425, Piping Tests. 







SECTION 15412 - AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE SYSTEM 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the installation of the Air Conditioning Condensate System. 

C. Provide air conditioning condensate piping and connect to equipment requiring condensate 

drainage. Extend piping to indirect waste connection installed in accordance with code 

requirements. 









Pipe (refer to 15050) NO 

Insulation (refer to 15250) NO 




2.1 PIPE 

A. Materials for air conditioning condensate piping shall be as follows. Products shall be as specified 

in Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

Pipe Use Pipe Specification No. 

Air Conditioning Condensate No. 4 

(and other HVAC Equipment 

Condensate Drainage) 

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE SYSTEM 15412-1






A. Horizontal air conditioning condensate piping shall be graded at 1/4" per foot and as otherwise 

indicated on the Drawings. 

B. Change in direction shall be made "Y" fittings, combination "Y" and eighth bends, or one eighth 

bends. Offsets shall be made with 45-degree bends, or similar fittings. 

C. Cleanouts shall be provided where shown on the Drawings, at the end of mains, at the intersection 

of piping, at the base of vertical stacks, at locations not exceeding 40 feet between cleanouts, and 

at other points required by applicable codes. 

D. Install running traps at unit connections per unit manufacturer's requirements. 

E. Condensate pipe shall discharge into indirect waste connections in accordance with code 

requirements. 

F. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

3.2 TESTING 

A. Air conditioning condensate piping shall be tested in accordance with Specification Section 15425, 

PIPING TESTS. 


A. Provide pipe verification markers and valve identification tags in accordance with Section 15423, 

“PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION”. 


AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE SYSTEM 15412-2


SECTION 15423 - PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the installation of the Pipe and Valve Identification System. 









Pipe Identification Markers NO 

Valve Identification Tags NO 

Valve Chart NO 


A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL 


2.1 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS 

A. Pipe identification markers shall be semi-rigid plastic type (not pressure sensitive). Direction of 

flow arrows shall be included on each marker. Color coded background, color legend in relation to 

background color, legend letter size, and marker length shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1 

and OSHA requirements. 

B. Markers shall be Seton Setmark Type SNA for markers 5” in dia. and smaller, type STR for 

markers larger than 5”, or similar by Marking Services, Inc. 

PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15423-1


2.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS 

A. Valve identification tags shall be 19 gauge 1-1/2” diameter polished brass tags with distinguishing 

numbers and letters. Each tag shall designate the appropriate service with ¼” stamped black filled 

letters and the appropriate valve number with ½” stamped black filled numbers. 

B. Proposed service designation abbreviations and valve numbers shall be integrated into the 

existing facility designation system and forwarded to the Owner for review. 

C. Valve identification tags shall be Style 250-BL as manufactured by Seton or similar by Marking 

Services Inc. 


3.1 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS 

A. Piping installed under this Division, including pipe installed above ceilings, shall be identified as to 

service and flow direction. 

B. Pipe identification markers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Markers shall be located as follows: 

Adjacent to each valve and fittings. 

At each branch and riser takeoff. 

At each pipe penetration through wall, floor or ceiling. 

At each pipe penetration to underground. 

At 25 foot (minimum) intervals on all piping. 

3.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS 

A. Valves installed under this Division shall be identified with tags indicating service and valve 

number. Valve identification tags shall be securely fastened to all valves by means of brass “S” 

hooks. Cold/hot water valves and fire alarm devices located above a ceiling shall be noted with 

plastic laminate label with blue circle sticker dot on ceiling grid below valve. Note service or 

device on label. 

3.3 VALVE CHARTS 

A. Charts of valves shall be furnished by the Contractor. These charts shall include service 

designation, valve identification number, locations, and purpose. Where it is necessary to operate 

more than one valve in order to control a section of the piping, this fact and the identification 

number(s) of the other valve(s) shall be noted on the chart. Typewritten copies of valve charts 

shall be located in each operating manual. In addition, provide typewritten valve chart mounted in 

frame with clear acrylic glazing. Secure to wall at location as directed by Owner. 

B. Identifying numbers for valves shall be marked on the as-built Drawings. 


PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15423-2


SECTION 15425 - PIPING TESTS 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the Piping Tests. 


A. Fire protection piping is tested under Section 15550. 









Domestic Water YES 

Gravity Soil and Waste YES 

Natural Gas YES 

Air Conditioning Condensate YES 




2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide gauges, pumps, valves, temporary strainers, plugs, caps and other equipment necessary 

for protection of the systems and for the complete testing of each system. 

B. Flush all pipes immediately after testing. 

PIPING TESTS 15425-1



3.1 GENERAL 

A. Instrumentation used for testing shall have been calibrated within the last six-month prior to 

beginning work in this Section. 

B. Inform the Owner's Representative in writing a minimum of five days prior to requested test. 

C. Prior to testing, piping shall be inspected over its entire length and all obstructions removed. 

D. Tests of concealed piping must be made before the piping is concealed. Pipes shall be proven 

tight in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner. 

E. Install strainers as may be required to properly protect equipment from sediment or debris in the 

transported media that could damage equipment. Where permanent strainers are not shown, 

temporary strainers shall be required for use during the start-up period. 

F. Devices connected to the system which cannot assume test pressures shall be disconnected and 

protected from damage, individually tested and reconnected. 

G. Provide a written report of tests. Forward the report to the Engineer and Owner within one week 

after completion of the test. The report shall include the signature of the witnessing authorized 

representative of the Owner acknowledging the test. Should portions of a piping system be 

individually tested, prepare one final test report consolidating all piping section reports into one 

final test report stating all piping was successfully tested. Test reports of partial system testing will 

not be accepted. This report shall be completed by the Contractor and forwarded to the Engineer. 

This final report shall state that all piping was successfully tested. A copy of the final test report(s) 

and certificates shall be included within the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The test report 

form shall be as appended and typed on the Contractor's letterhead. 

H. Additional tests may be specified in other sections. The tests specified in other sections shall be 

performed in addition to tests performed under this Section. 

I. Perform testing as required by applicable state and local codes, governing bodies, and the 

Owner's insuring company over and above the requirements of this Specification. 

J. Provisions shall be made so that every item may be thoroughly inspected and, in no case, shall 

any part of construction be obscured. 

K. Do not apply test pressures to "live" or "hot" valves. In the event such testing is necessary, install 

temporary block ahead of the valve. The final test of the connection shall be by examination of 

work under the service pressure. 

L. Parts of the system under test shall be under constant supervision with authority to bleed off 

excessive pressure that may develop. No test shall remain on work unless continuously attended. 

M. Fluids shall circulate and flow freely without noise, vibration, or hammer on either hand or 

automatic control, with no evidence of leaks, trapping, or binding. 

N. Leaks shall be repaired immediately and the tests repeated until the systems are proven tight. 



O. Caulking of joints will not be permitted. 

P. For leaks in welded connections, the weld shall be ground out to parent metal and rewelded. 

3.2 PIPE TESTS 

A. Domestic Water 

Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig for a minimum of four hours with no drop in 

pressure. While the system is under pressure, visually inspect joints and connections for leaks. 

Leaks shall be repaired and the system shall be retested until test requirements are met. After the 

test, flush lines with potable water and clean lines of sediment and debris. Upon successful 

completion and approval of the tests, Domestic Water systems shall be disinfected before 

connecting permanently to the source of potable water. Disinfect lines with chlorine in accordance 

with 15401, State Health Department, and water company requirements. 

B. Gravity Soil and Waste 

Piping (including sanitary and vents) shall be inspected over the entire length for obstructions. 

Necessary openings shall be plugged and the system hydrostatically tested to the level of the 

highest vent above the roof to a maximum of 20 psig. The system shall hold water for a minimum 

of one hour with no drop in level. Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be 

conducted in the same manner and to the pressure of the highest level above the roof as 

described for the entire system. A pump may be used to supply the required pressure. 

C. Natural Gas 

Piping shall be pneumatically tested under 125 psig pressure for a minimum of four hours with no 

drop in pressure. Components not rated for test pressure shall be disconnected during the test. 

Pipe connections to these components shall be plugged or capped during the test. While the 

system is under pressure, joints and connections shall be visually examined and tested with a 

soap solution. Upon successful completion and approval of the test, clean lines of sediment and 

debris with compressed air. Reconnect disconnected components. Test reconnected joints with a 

soap solution at normal operating pressure. 

D. Air Conditioning Condensate 


Piping shall be inspected over the entire length for obstruction. The system shall be pneumatically 

tested at 50 psig for a minimum of four hours with no drop in pressure. While the system is under 

pressure, joints and connections shall be tested with a soap solution. Upon successful completion 

and approval of the test, clean lines of sediment and debris with compressed air. 


Date: 

TranSystems 

220 St.Charles Way, Suite 150 

York, PA 17402 

Attention: Mechanical Engineering Department 

RE: Piping Tests for Fed Ex – Oakland – Sort Building 

Project No.: P501070099 

Dear Sir: 

The following piping test has been completed in strict accordance to the specifications, documented below and 

witnessed by the Owner's representative. 

Requested Testing Date: 

Date Written Request Received by Owner's Representative (Minimum 5 workdays prior to test date): 

Pipework to be Tested: 

Description: ______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

Initial Test: Retest: Pneumatic: 

Hydraulic: Initial Pressure: Duration of Test: 

Final Pressure: Test Approved: Test Not Approved: 

Comments: 

Test Witnessed by: Test Conducted by: 

Contractor: 

The original copy shall be forwarded to the Engineer. The Contractor shall distribute copies to the Owner's 

Representative. 



SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the installation of the Plumbing Fixtures and Trim. 









Water Closet YES 

Lavatory YES 

Service Sink YES 

Stainless Steel Sink YES 

Electric Water Cooler YES 


A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Fixtures shall be of one manufacturer insofar as possible, and of first quality. Wall hung vitreous 

china fixture backings shall be drilled for mounting carriers as specified. 

B. Fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted. 

C. Earthenware shall be unmarked, true and level and shall be warranted not to scale, craze, or 

discolor. 

D. Exposed metal parts including faucets, waste fittings, waste plugs, strainers, flush valves, traps, 

wastes, supplies, nipples, and escutcheons - for all fixtures shall be brass, chromium plated, 

unless otherwise noted. 

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15450-1


E. Each hot and cold water connection to fixtures and equipment shall be provided with a stop valve 


2.2 FIXTURES 

A. 

B. 

C. 

Water Closet, Flush Valve, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ001) 

1. American Standard 2257.103 Water Saver Afwall EL 1.6, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Bowl: Vitreous china siphon jet action, wall hung, 1-1/2” top spud, elongated bowl. 

3. Valve: Sloan Royal Number 111 Flushometer or equal, with 1” screwdriver angle stop, 

vacuum breaker, and flush connection, 1.6 gallon flush. 

4. Seat: Heavy-duty commercial grade, white elongated rim, open front, check hinges, and 

stainless steel bolts. Church 9500C, or similar by Olsonite. 

5. Carrier: Concealed closet chair carrier with 4” ABS adjustable extension outlet 

connection. Josam 12000 Series, or similar by Wade, Smith, Zurn or Watts. 

Handicapped Water Closet, Flush Valve, Wall Hung, (OAKH-EE1-BZ001, OAKH-EC1-BZ002) 

1. American Standard 2257.103 Afwal EL 1.6, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Bowl: Vitreous china siphon jet action, wall hung, 1-1/2" top spud, elongated bowl. 

3. Valve: Optima Royal Model 111-ES-S sensor operated Flushometer or equal, with 

infrared sensor, manual over-ride button, integral solenoid operator, chrome plated wall 

cover plate, 120/24 VAC hardware transformer, 1" screwdriver angle stop, vacuum 

breaker flush connection, and 1.6 gallon flush. 

4. Seat: Heavy duty commercial grade, white elongated rim, open front, check hinges, and 

stainless steel bolts. Church 9500C, or similar by Olsonite. 

5. Carrier: Concealed closet chair carrier with 4" ABS adjustable extension outlet 

connection. Josam 12000 Series, or similar by Wade, Smith, Zurn, or watts. 

6. Mounting Height: Mount fixture such that the top of the seat is 17 to 19 inches above 

finish floor. 

Handicapped Water Closet – Flush tank, Floor Mounted (OAKH-ED1-BZ001) 

1. American Standard 2386.500 Elongated Cadet 3 barrier free design 1.6/PA, or similar by 

Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Bowl: Vitreous china, elongated siphon jet action bowl and close coupled flushometer 

tank with water saving trim, and bolt caps. Provide pressure assisted, chrome plated trip 

lever, chrome plated supply pipe, valve and escutcheon plate, 1.6 gallon flush. 



D. 

E. 

F. 

3. Seat: Heavy duty commercial grade, white, elongated rim, closed front seat with cover, 

check hinges, and stainless steel bolts, Church 38355, or similar by Olsonite. 

Urinal, Flush Valve, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ003) 

1. American Standard 6501.010 Washbrook 1.0, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Urinal: Vitreous china washout, ¾” top spud with two wall hangers and 2” threaded outlet 

connection. 

3. Valve: Sloan No. 186-1 flush valve, or equal, with ¾” screwdriver angle stop, vacuum 

breaker, and flush connection. 

4. Carrier: Floor anchored, concealed support type carrier. Josam 17000 Series, or similar 

by Wade, Smith, Zurn, or Watts. 

Handicapped Urinal, Flush Valve, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ004) 

1. American Standard 6501.010 Washbrook 1.0, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Urinal: Vitreous china washout, ¾” top spud with two wall hangers and 2” threaded outlet 

connection. 

3. Valve: Sloan Model 186-1 Royal flushometer, or equal, flush valve with ¾” screwdriver 

angle stop, vacuum breaker, and flush connection. 

4. Carrier: Floor anchored, concealed support type carrier. Josam 17000 Series, or similar 

by Wade, Smith, Zurn or Watts. 

5. Mounting Height: Mount fixture such that elongated rim is 17” (maximum) above finished 

floor. 

Lavatory, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ005) 

1. American Standard 0355.012 Lucerne, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Lavatory: Vitreous china lavatory, front overflow, 4” faucet centers, self-draining deck 

area, contour back, side splash shields, and soap depression. 

3. Carrier: Floor anchored concealed arm support type carrier. Josam 17000 Series, or 

similar by Wade, Smith, Zurn or Watts. 

4. Trim: American Standard 2175.20 Reliant, centerset faucet, or equal, 4” centers, with 

pop-up drain, aerator, 1-1/4” railpiece, .5 GPM flow restrictor. 

5. Supplies: Supply shall have loose key angle stop valve, escutcheon and flexible riser; all 

chromium plated. 

6. Trap: 1-1/4” adjustable “P” trap with cleanout. 

7. Size: 20” x 18”. 



G. 

H. 

I. 

Handicapped Lavatory, Wall Hung, (OAKH-EE1-BZ002, OAKH-ED1-BZ002, OAKH-EC1-BZ006) 

1. American Standard 9141.011, Wheelchair Patients Wall Hung Lavatory, or similar by 

Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Lavatory: Vitreous china, front overflow, concealed arm support, faucet holes 4" on 

centers. 

3. Carrier: Floor anchored concealed arm support type carrier. Josam 17000 Series, or 

similar by Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Watts. 

4. Trim: American Standard 7400.172H Heritage centerset faucet, or equal, with aerator, 4 

inch centers, .5 GPM flow restrictors, lavatory grid drain, and 1-1/4" tailpiece. 

5. Supplies: Supplies shall have loose key angle stop valves, escutcheons and flexible 

risers: all chrome plated. 

6. Trap: 1-1/4" adjustable "P" trap with cleanout and escutcheon; all chromium plated. 

7. Size: 20" x 27" 

8. Note: Insulate water and waste pipe beneath lavatory. 

Service Sink, Corner Type, (OAKH-EE1-BZ003, OAKH-ED1-BZ03, OAKH-EC1-BZ007) 

1. American Standard 7741.000 Florwell corner service sink, or similar by Ceco, Kohler or 

Eljer. 

2. Sink: Enameled cast iron corner type, with rim guard. 

3. Trim: American Standard 8344.112 faucet, or similar by T&S B-0665-BSTR, with top 

brace, stops in shank, vacuum breaker, bucket hook, and rough chrome finish. 

4. Drain: American Standard 7721.038, or equal, with strainer and socket for 3" outlet. 

5. Size: 28" x 28" x 13” H. 

Stainless Steel Sink Single Bowl, Countertop (OAKH-EC1-BZ008) 

1. Elkay Model GE CR-2521 Celebrity, countertop sink. 

2. Sink: Single bowl, 20 gauge type 302 stainless steel, self rimming, soft satin finish, flush 

fittings deck, sound dampening undercoating, polished bowl edges, 3 faucet holes. 

3. Trim: Elkay LK2442 sink faucet, or equal, swivel aerator, #99 cup strainer drain. 

4. Supplies: Loose key angle stop valve, escutcheon and flexible risers; all chrome plated. 

5. Trap: 1-1/2” adjustable “P” trap with cleanout, chrome plated. 



J. 

K. 

L. 

M. 

N. 

6. Size: 25” x 21-1/4” x 5-3/8” deep. 

Stainless Steel Sink, Double Bowl, Countertop, (OAKH-EE1-BZ004, OAKH-EC1-BZ009) 

1. Elkay Model GE CR-3321 Celebrity, countertop sink. 

2. Sink: Double bowl, 20 gauge type 304 stainless steel self-rimming, soft satin finish, flush 

fittings deck, sound dampening, polished bowl edges, 3 faucet holes. 

3. Trim: Elkay LK2442 faucet without spray, swivel aerator, or equal, with 2 LK99 cup 

strainer drains. 

4. Supplies: Loose key angle stop valve, escutcheon and flexible risers; all chrome plated. 

5. Trap: 1-1/2" adjustable "P" traps with cleanouts, chrome plated. 

6. Size: 33" x 21-1/4" x 5-3/8" deep. 

Stainless Steel Sink, Single Bowl, Free-Standing (OAKH-EC1-BZ010) 

1. Elkay Model WNSF-8124, stainless steel sink. 

2. Sink: Free-standing, 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, NSF 

approved, drilled for fittings as hereinafter specified. Unit shall have all heliarc welded 

construction and satin finish, and stainless steel legs with adjustable feet. 

3. Trim: Elkay LK940GN08T4H faucet or equal. 

4. Trap: 2” adjustable “P” trap with cleanout. 

5. Size 24” x 24” x 14”. 

Shower (OAKH-EC1-BZ011) 

1. Fittings: American Standard 2000.501 Ceramix pressure balancing valve with hot limit 

safety stop, chrome plated lever control handle, 2.5 GPM flow restrictor, and adjustable 

spray shower head. 

Handicapped Shower (OAKH-EC1-BZ012) 

1. Fittings: American Standard 2000.500 Ceramix pressure balancing valve with hot limit 

safety stop, chrome plated lever control handle, 2.5GPM flow restrictor, 1663.500 “jet” 

personal shower with ½ inch NPT male supply with built-in fixed wall bracket and 59 inch 

long hose, polished chrome. 

Electric Water Cooler – Wall Hung (OAKH0-EC1-BZ013) 

1. Halsey W. Taylor HAC-8FS-Q, or similar by Oasis or Elkay. 

2. Unit: Barrier-free wall mounted type with stainless steel top, bubbler, push bars, 

automatic stream height control, cooling coil, air-cooled condenser, hermetically sealed 



O. 

P. 

motor-compressor 5-year warranty, temperature control, flexible cord with 3-pronged 

grounded plug, and 1-1/4” “P” trap with cleanout. 

3. Capacity: 8 gallons per hour of 50 F water with room temperature of 90 F and inlet water 

temperature of 80 F. 

4. Refrigerant: R-134A. 

5. Size: 22” high, 18” wide, and 18-1/2” deep. 

6. Mounting Height: Mount 40” from basin to floor. 

7. Compressor: 1/5 HP, 120/1/60. 

8. Support: Provide wall brackets. 

9. Cabinet Finish: Finish selected by the Owner. 

Handicapped Electric Water Cooler, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ014) 

1. Halsey W. Taylor HAC-8FS-Q, or similar by Oasis or Elkay. 

2. Unit: Barrier-free wall mounted type with stainless steel top, bubbler, push bars, 


motor-compressor 5-year warranty, temperature control, flexible cord with 3-pronged 

grounded plug, and 1-1/4” “P” trap with cleanout. 



4. Refrigerant: R-134A. 

5. Size: 22” high, 18” wide, and 18-1/2” deep. 

6. Mounting Height: Mount 32-5/8” from finished floor to basin rim. 

7. Compressor: 1/5 HP, 120/1/60. 

8. Support: Provide wall brackets. 

9. Cabinet Finish: Finish selected by the Owner. 

Lavatory – Toilet Combination (OAKH-EC1-BZ016) 

1. Acorn Penal-Ware 1437 RO Series (Lav-Toilet Comby) 1437-RO-3-DMB-EVSP2-ULF 

(1.6 GPF) - EVSPFV. 

2. Bowl: 14 gauge 304 stainless steel blowout jet type with elongated bowl manufactured by 

ANSI 112.19.2M. Requirements, 1.6 GPF. 

3. Lavatory: 14 gauge 304 stainless steel oval bowl. 14-3/4” x 9-1/2” x 5” deep. 



Q. 

R. 

S. 

4. Flush Valve: Electronic valve system with Piezo pushbutton operated, remotely located 

up to 10 feet from electronic valve. 

5. Lavatory Valve: Hot and cold electronic valve system with Piezo pushbutton to be 

remotely located up to 10 feet from electronic valve. 

Stainless Steel Sink, Single Bowl, Wall Hung (OAKH-EC1-BZ017) 

1. Elkay Model CHSB17162, stainless steel sink. 

2. Sink: Wall Hung, 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, NSF approved, 

drilled for fittings as hereinafter specified. Unit shall have all heliarc welded construction 

and satin finish. 

3. Trim: Elkay LK940GN08T4H faucet or equal. 

4. Trap: 2” adjustable “P” trap with cleanout. 

5. Size 24” x 24” x 14”. 

Service Sink (OAKH-EC1-BZ018) 

1. Fiat TSB3013 Stockton Rectangular, or similar by Kohler or Eljer. 

2. Sink: Rectangular mop basin. Terrazzo and stainless steel drop front threshold and rim 

guard. 

3. Trim: American Standard 8344.112 faucet, or equal, with top brace, stops in shank, 

vacuum breaker, and bucket hook. 

4. Drain: American Standard 7721.038, or equal, with strainer and socket for 3” outlet. 

5. Size 36” x 24”. 

Waste Disposal (OAKH-EC1-BZ019) 

1. Waste Disposal, Insinkerator Model SS-500. 

2. Grind chamber, corrosion resistant stainless steel. 

3. Motor 5 HP, 1725 RPM totally enclosed to provide protection against outside moisture. 

4. Finish, all stainless steel and chrome plated. Paint-free for lasting sanitation. 

T. Electrical Water Cooler, Compact Wall Mounted, Bi-Level, (OAKH-EE1-BZ005) 

1. Halsey W. Taylor Model HAC8FSBL-Q, or similar by Oasis or Elkay. 

2. Unit: Compact wall hung water cooler, bi-level, stainless steel top, bubbler, pushbutton, 




motor-compressor 5-year warranty temperature control, flexible power cord with 3 

pronged grounded plug, 1-1/4" "P" trap with cleanout. 



4. Refrigerant: R-134A 

5. Size: 23" high, 36-1/4" wide, and 18-5/8" deep. 

6. Mounting Height: Mount 38" from upper basin to floor, 32 ½” from lower basin to floor. 

7. Compressor: 1/5 HP, 120/1/60. 

8. Support: Provide wall bracket. 

9. Cabinet Finish: Finish selected by Owner. 

U. Emergency Eye/Face Wash – (OAKH-ED1-BZ004, OAKH-EC1-BZ015) 

1. Speakman SE-420 Free-Standing Eyesaver, or similar by Haws. 

2. Free-standing emergency aerated eye/face wash fixture furnished complete with selfcleaning 

and non-clogging, stay-open valve, integral dust shrouds, adjustable volume 

control, supply line strainer, aerated eye/face wash with stainless steel bowl, stanchion, 

floor flange, all interconnecting fittings, and universal signage. 

3. Provide water mixing valve to tepid water control consisting of two independent 

thermostatic type with liquid filled sensors. A thermometer shall indicate the leaving 

water temperature. It shall have bronze body construction and non-corrosive parts. 

4. In the event of hot water failure, the unit will continue to supply cold water at the minimum 

required flow. In the event of a cold water failure, the hot water port shall close stopping 

all flow. 

5. Speakman SE-420 or equal. 

V. Emergency Eye/Face Wash-Countertop (OAKH-EC1-BZ020) 

1. Speakman SE-572 20 gpm countertop eyesaver, or similar by Haws. 

2. Countertop aerated eye/face wash fixture furnished complete with stay-open valve, pull rod, 

aerated eye/face wash with stainless steel bowl, hand and all interconnecting fittings. 

3. Provide water mixing valve to tepid water control consisting of two independent thermostatic 

type with liquid filled sensors. A thermometer shall indicate the leaving water temperature. It 

shall have bronze body construction and non-corrosive parts. 

4. In the event of a hot water failure, the unit will continue to supply cold water at the minimum 

required flow. In the event of a cold water failure, the hot water port shall close stopping all 

flow. 



5. The valve shall supply a minimum of 20 gpm of tepid water. Pressure drop through the valve 

at 20 gpm shall be 5 psi or less. 

6. Temperature adjustment shall be tamper resistant and have a range of 76 to 95 deg. F. The 

setpoint shall be 80 deg. F. 

7. Mixing valve shall be Speakman SE-352 or equal. 

W. Emergency Shower and Eye/Face Wash (OAKH-EC1-BZ021) 



1. Speakman SE-690 20 gpm free-standing Safe-T-Zone, or similar by Haws. 

2. Free-standing emergency deluge shower and aerated eye/face wash fixture furnished 

complete with self-cleaning and non-clogging deluge shower head, stay-open, valve, pull 

rod, aerated eye/face wash with stainless steel bowl, hand and foot operated, stanchion, 

floor flange, and all interconnecting fittings. 

3. Provide flow switch in supply and a visual indicator light and audible alarm when shower 

is activated. 

4. Provide water mixing valve to tepid water control consisting of two independent 

thermostatic type with liquid filled sensors. A thermometer shall indicate the leaving 

water temperature. It shall have bronze body construction and non-corrosive parts. 

5. In the event of a hot water failure, the unit will continue to supply cold water at the 

minimum required flow. In the event of a cold water failure, the hot water port shall close 

stopping all flow. 

6. The valve shall supply a minimum of 20 gpm of tepid water. Pressure drop through the 

valve at 20 gpm shall be 5 psi or less. 

7. Temperature adjustment shall be tamper resistant and have a range of 76-97°F. The 

setpoint shall be 80°F. 

8. Mixing valve shall be Speakman SE-352 or equal. 

A. Installation of fixtures shall include required supply, waste, soil and vent connections and required 

fittings, supports, fastening devices, cocks, valves, and traps for a complete installation. 

B. Fixtures and trim shall be installed and anchored to the structure of the building as recommended 

by the manufacturer. Fixtures to be attached to the wall shall be complete with special anchors, 

hangers, or supports. No attachments shall be made to masonry walls by means of screws in 

wood plugs. 



C. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A117 and local code 

requirements. 

D. Apply sealant around all fixtures and mounting surface. 

E. Each fixture shall be protected after installation until construction is completed and accepted by 

the Owner. When ready for use, the Contractor shall remove protection, including paper covering 

on china, and enameled ware. The Contractor shall be responsible for fixtures until acceptance by 

the Owner. 

F. Piping shall be stubbed out to the exact location of the fixtures. Stubs shall be set symmetrical 

with the fixtures. Hot and cold water supplies for faucets shall be set on centers as recommended 

by the manufacturer. Individual branches to fixtures shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. 

G. Headers serving water closets and urinals shall be the same size throughout their entire length. 

H. Where equipment or fixtures are furnished by Others, roughing-in shall be done as recommended 

by the fixture manufacturer. 

I. Fixtures shall be installed square, in line and level to give a workmanlike and uniform appearance. 

J. This Contractor shall rough-in and make final connection to equipment furnished by Others unless 

otherwise noted. Each hot water and cold water connection shall be valved. Each waste 

connection shall be capped 6 inches above finish floor or 3 inches out from the wall unless 

otherwise noted. Verify the exact location of rough-in work with the equipment supplier prior to 

beginning work. 




SECTION 15550 - FIRE PROTECTION 


1.1 GENERAL 

1.2 SCOPE 


A. This Section describes the installation of the Fire Protection Systems. 

B. The scope of work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 

- Design of fire protection systems. 

- Wet type sprinkler systems for all areas. 

- Piping systems. 

- All valves, controls, alarms, and accessories required to provide a complete and 

operating fire protection system. 

- Flushing of all piping installed under this Section. 

- Testing and approvals. 

C. Sort Building - Underground laterals extending from the underground yard mains and terminating 

in level blind flanges approximately 6" above finish floor shall be provided by the Division 2, for the 

Sort Building. Connect to this piping at the point of termination and extend the fire protection 

system throughout the building. 

1.3 Design of Fire Protection Systems 

A. Work required under this section shall be delivered via design/build performance specification 

methodology. This specification shall be the bid basis for the design/build package. As such the 

successful contractor shall become the Engineer of Record for the fire protection system for this 

project and shall meet all code, insurance company and authority having jurisdiction requirements 

in addition to the requirements stated herein and deliver a complete operating system to the 

Owner in accordance to all code requirements and the requirements of the local authority having 

jurisdiction and the Owner’s insuring agency. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for design and subsequent installation of the fire protection 

system. Requirements for the fire protection system arise from a variety of sources such as 

building codes, fire codes, insurance standards and Owner requirements. As these contract 

documents do not reiterate all of these requirements, it is necessary that the Contractor be 

thoroughly knowledgeable and experienced with these types of fire protection systems as the 

Contractor will be expected to comply with all stated contract requirements and all referenced 

codes, standards and guidelines. Further, the Contractor assumes responsibility for performance 

of the system design in accordance with all requirements. 

C. When the requirements of the contract documents are at variance with the referenced codes, 

standards and guidelines, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to bidding. If these 

variances result from agreements made with the applicable authority, the Contractor will be 

FIRE PROTECTION 15550-1


advised. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be held to the most stringent requirement at the 

discretion of the Engineer. 

D. When referenced codes, standards, or guidelines are in conflict, the most stringent shall govern. 

E. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of Division 2 such that the hydraulic calculations 

will integrate that work provided under Division 2. Extend hydraulic calculations to a point of 

known water test (pressure and flow). 


A. Underground fire water systems shall be provided under Division 2. 

B. Refer to section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods. 


A. Installation of the fire protection work under this Section shall be in accordance to the 

requirements of UL, NEC, NFPA Standards including but not limited to NFPA-13, FM Loss 

Prevention Data, the 2006 International codes, and other applicable state and local codes, 

ordinances, restrictions, state and local fire departments requirements, OSHA, public utilities 

having jurisdiction, and the Owner's insuring agency requirements and any interpretation and 

formal positions of the Owner’s insuring agency. Where specific editions are not identified, the 

edition adopted at the time bids are received shall prevail. 

B. Refer to Part 3 - Execution, "Installation Requirements and Approvals." 


A. Submittals and the Contractor's working Drawings shall be completed and forwarded to the 

Engineer for review prior to the Fire Protection Contractor's first application for payment. 

B. The Contractor shall secure the services of a licensed professional fire protection engineer 

registered in the State of California who shall prepare, sign, and seal all drawing and calculation 

submissions. The Contractor shall make complete calculations and engineering drawings, 

including hydraulic reference points, to a scale of 1/8" = 1'-0" for overall plan drawings. Details, 

etc. shall be at a larger scale, minimum 3/8" = 1'-0". The maximum drawing size shall be 30" x 

42". The drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to, and approved by, the following 

agencies: 

1. F.M. Global 

Mr. Ryan Nichols 

100 Pringle Avenue 

Suite 400 

Walnut Creek, CA 94596 

Ph – 925-849-5061 

C – 805-801-9306 

Email – ryan.nichols@fmglobal.com 

2. State and Local Governing Authorities 



C. Submitted plans and specifications must include all details and information required by NFPA13, 

other applicable NFPA Standards and applicable Insurance Company Interpretive Guides. Review 

information for accuracy before sending to Insurance Company. Incomplete submissions will not 

be reviewed. 

D. Submission of a proposal shall form as acknowledgement that the Contractor has contacted the 

aforementioned agencies and that the work provided under this Section shall be in full accordance 

to their requirements. Additional work required by the Contractor's failure to complete the above 

shall be completed at no additional compensation to the Contractor. 

E. Six sets of blue line prints of these approved drawings and six sets of hydraulic calculations each 

bearing the approval stamp of the aforementioned agencies (including the Owner's insuring 

agency) shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. Submittals not bearing the seal and 

signature of a licensed professional engineer, and the approval stamp of the aforementioned 

agencies shall be returned by the engineer without action. 

F. Provide submittals to the Engineer for review in accordance with the requirements established 

within Section 01300 for the following products: 


Drawings YES 

Hydraulic Calculations (submitted in the form outlined in NFPA-13) YES 

Alarm Check Valve YES 

OS&Y Valves YES 

Water Check Valves YES 

Pipe and Fittings YES 

Water Flow Switch YES 

Sprinkler Heads YES 

Fire Department Connection YES 

Tamper Switches YES 

Water Motor Alarm YES 

Pipe Hangers and Supports YES 

Pipe Tests and Reports YES 

System Trip Tests and Reports YES 

Nameplates and Identification Signs YES 

Operating and Maintenance Manuals YES 

Instructions YES 

Instruction Verification YES 

Record Drawings YES 

G. Samples 

1. Provide samples to the Engineer in accordance with the requirements established within 

Section 01300 for the following: 

Grooved Type Couplings and Gaskets 

Sprinkler Head 






2.1 GENERAL 

A. All equipment shall be UL listed and FM approved for its intended use. 

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. All fire protection piping, valves, fittings, installation, etc. shall conform to NFPA Chapter 13, 

Underwriters' Laboratories, and the Owner's insuring company requirements. Pipe and fittings 

shall be as follows: 

System Location Pipe 

Fittings 

Wet Ceiling ASTM A135 Sch. 40 Threaded Black Cast 

Or ASTM A135 Iron or Plain End, Hole Cut, 

Sch. 10 Black Steel Type Fittings or Grooved 

Type Victaulic Fittings 

B. All fire protection piping shall be UL listed and FM approved for its intended use. 

C. Galvanized pipe shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. 

D. Materials exposed to weathering shall be galvanized. 

E. Provide flushing connection at the end of each main consisting of capped nipple 4" long. 

2.3 WELD-O-LETS, THREAD-O-LETS 

A. "Weld-O-Let," "Thread-O-Let," and other similar type fittings shall be the rounded entry type fittings 

as manufactured by Bonney Forge. 

2.4 PLAIN END FITTINGS 

A. Fittings such as Victaulic "Hooker" and "FIT", products for hole cut pipe, plain end steel pipe 

products, snap-let outlets, strapless outlets and other non-grooved products, etc. may be used. 

2.5 GROOVED FITTINGS 

A. Use “Zero-Flex” Style 07 rigid couplings with EPDM gaskets on wet pipe systems. Pipe ends, 

fittings, and gaskets shall be prepared, cleaned, lubricated and installed in strict accordance to the 

manufacturer's recommendations. Fittings and housings installed on galvanized piping shall also 

be galvanized. Fittings shall be UL/FM approved for fire protection service. 

B. All products (fittings, housings, gaskets, etc.) shall be of the same manufacturer. 

C. Fittings, couplings, gaskets, etc. shall be as manufactured by the Victaulic Company of America. 

2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS 

A. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. 



B. All pipes shall be supported in accordance with NFPA and FM, UL standards, except no chain or 

perforated steel hangers shall be used. Hangers for main and cross main pipework 2-1/2" and 

larger shall be wrought clevis, or ring hangers. 

2.7 FIRE SYSTEM VALVES 

A. Alarm Check Valve 

1. Valve(s) shall be complete with necessary control valves, strainers, gauges, and 

accessories for a complete installation. A gate valve shall be installed directly upstream 

of each alarm check valve. Valves shall be FM, UL approved. 

2. Provide minimum 3/4" relief valve on the system side of the alarm check valve of gridded 

systems to prevent build-up of high system pressure. The device shall have adjustable 

relief setting, preset to discharge at 175 psig. Pipe discharge to outdoors. 

3. Maximum total area coverage of systems connected to a single valve shall be based on 

the system hydraulic design but in no case shall the area exceed 52,000 sq. ft. (40,000 

sq. ft. for warehouse areas). Should one riser area provide protection for more than 

52,000 sq. ft. (52,000 sq. ft. for warehouse areas), multiple valves and laterals shall be 

provided. 

4. Alarm check valve shall be Victaulic Series 751, or Viking Corporation Model J-1. 

B. OS&Y Valve 

1. Valve(s) shall be FM, UL approved with cast iron body conforming to ASTM A-126 class 

B with rising stem and solid wedge disc suitable for fire protection service. Each valve 

shall have an approved tamper switch. 

2. Valve shall be Figure G-634 as manufactured by Stockham. 

C. OS&Y Valve (For Wall Indicator Post) 

1. Valve(s) shall be FM, UL approved with cast iron body conforming to ASTM Spec. A-126 

Class B with non-rising stem suitable for installation with a wall indicator post. Each valve 

shall have an approved tamper switch. 

2. Valve shall be Figure G-632 as manufactured by Stockham. 

D. Check Valve 

2.8 SPRINKLER HEADS 

1. Check valve(s) shall be FM, UL approved wafer type valve rated for 250 psig water 

service pressure. 

2. Valve shall be Model C as manufactured by Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., or equal. 

A. Sprinkler heads shall be FM, UL approved. 



B. Sprinkler heads shall be Star Model E (Model M for dry pendent heads), or equal, with 

temperature ratings and discharge characteristics as scheduled on the drawings. 

C. In office areas, sprinkler heads shall be chrome plated with chrome plated escutcheons. 

Sprinkler heads in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be Model GFR/F2 recessed type 

escutcheons as manufactured by Reliable. 

D. Provide and install sprinkler emergency cabinets for the storage of spare sprinkler heads. The 

cabinets shall be located at each sprinkler riser. Provide necessary wrenches in the cabinet for 

use in removal and installation of the sprinklers. The extra sprinkler heads shall be of the same 

type and temperature ratings as those installed in the building. Installing of the cabinet and 

quantity of spare heads shall be in accordance with NFPA-13, Section 3-2.9. 

E. Temperature rating of sprinkler heads near unit heaters or other heat producing objects shall be 

in accordance with NFPA-13 Section 5-3.1.4. 

F. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in suspended acoustical tile ceiling. 

2.9 WATER MOTOR ALARM 

A. The water motor alarm(s) shall annunciate system water flow. 

B. Each riser shall be provided with a minimum of one water motor alarm Star Model "CD", Viking 

Model F-1 or equal. 

C. The water motor alarm may serve more than one system, but the piping shall be arranged so 

there will be no backflow to activate devices on systems where no flow is occurring. 

2.10 FLOW SWITCH 

A. Flow switch(es) for Wet Pipe Systems shall be Simplex WF-5, Series 2097 Type VSR-D or 

equal. Flow switch shall be UL listed and FM approved. 

2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (SIAMESE CONNECTION) 

A. Fire department connection(s) shall be constructed of cast iron body with brass seals and 

checks. Finish shall be polished chrome. Connection shall have two 2-1/2" brass inlet swivel 

hose connections with chains and caps and a 4" outlet connection arranged in the same plane 

(straightway) pattern, or as otherwise required by the contractor’s hydraulic design. Threaded 

connections shall be suitable to local fire department threads. Connection shall be FM, UL 

approved. Auto. Spkr., Fire Department Connection shall be cast in raised letters on the plate. 

Provide Stortz connection if required by local fire department. 

B. Interconnect all installed fire department connections so that fire department truck connection to 

any individual siamese connection will pressurize all riser assemblies. 

C. The fire department connection shall be Model B as manufactured by Reliable, Star, Viking or 

equal. 

2.12 TAMPER SWITCH (SUPERVISORY SWITCH) 



A. Tamper switch(es) shall be installed on each valve. Switch shall be mounted so as not to 

interfere with normal operation of the valve and shall be adjusted to operate within two 

revolutions of the valve control or when the valve is moved more than one-fifth of the distance 

from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast 

aluminum housing which shall be provided with a 3/4" tapped conduit connection, and 

incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to valve. Housing shall be finished in red 

baked enamel. Voltages and amp ratings shall be compatible with the alarm panel. The 

assembly shall be tamperproof and arranged to annunciate if housing is removed. 

B. Switch shall be FM, UL approved and shall be Model OSYS and PIVS as manufactured by 

Simplex, or equal. 

2.13 SPRINKLER SYSTEM WIRING 

A. Provide and install tamper and flow devices. 

B. All wiring shall be provided by Division 16. 

2.14 FIRE PUMP – The fire pump will be provided and installed under a previous phase of the project. 

2.15 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. The building and yard hydrants will be supplied with fire protection lines connected to a city 

water, yard fire main system. Verify hydraulic flow data with the Owner's insuring agency, the 

governing authorities and utility company. Confirm with the proposal if the city water supply is 

adequate to supply the demands of the fire protection system or if augmentation of the city water 

supply by means of a fire pump and/or water storage tank is required. If so required, include the 

costs of these improvements in this proposal. 

B. The Contractor shall allow a hydraulic design tolerance between the sprinkler demand points and 

the available water supply. Tolerance shall be 10 psig for systems with a static pressure below 

100 psig and 10% for systems with a static pressure above 100 psig. 

C. Automatic sprinkler protection system design criteria shall be provided as delineated on the 

Drawings and meet the requirements of the owner’s insuring company and the local governing 

authorities. 

D. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to design, receive approval as specified (including 

Owner's insuring agency and install the complete fire protection system for the project as 

required under these specifications. 

E. The maximum water flow velocity in the sprinkler system piping shall not exceed twenty (20) feet 

per second. 

F. The Contractor shall coordinate the exact location of all sprinkler heads, heat detectors, 

pipework, valves, equipment, etc., with the Engineer prior to installation. 

G. All hydraulic calculations shall include the concurrent use of hose streams. The combined 

capacity shall be 500 GPM in accordance with NFPA requirements. 



H. All systems, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, shall be hydraulically calculated by the 

area density method unless otherwise specifically noted. 

I. A wet pipe system shall be provided for all areas. 

2.16 PIPE AND CONDUIT PENETRATIONS 

A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL, and Section 15050, BASIC 

MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

B. Penetrations shall be completed in accordance with Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS - 

MECHANICAL. 

2.17 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 

A. All valves shall be tagged with securely attached permanent metal identification signs indicating 

the function of the valve and the normal position. 

B. Each sprinkler system shall have a securely attached permanent metal identification sign 

indicating the zone served, hydraulic design of the system and the available flow rates, 

pressures, etc. 

C. All information shall be permanently inscribed. 

D. Identification signs shall be as manufactured by Star Sprinkler Corporation (Chemetron), or 

equal. 


3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVALS 

A. Include all equipment, materials, installation, and testing in accordance with the recommendations 

and requirements of NFPA Standards, FM's Loss Prevention Data, 

including, but not limited to, 

8-1, 8-9 and 8-29,) the Owner's insuring agency state and local fire departments and utility 

company requirements. 

B. The Contractor shall temporarily provide personnel for a “fire watch” during shut down and 

modifications to any portion of the existing fire protection systems in accordance with the 

insurance company’s and local fire department’s requirements. 

C. The Contractor shall notify in writing the Owner, local fire marshal, construction manager, and 

Owner’s Insurance Company a minimum of five (5) days prior to commencing work on the existing 

fire protection system modifications. 

D. The drawings included with this bid package are for illustrative purposes only. The Contractor 

shall develop construction drawings for approval as specified. 

E. Coordinate sprinkler head installation with all other building components including, but not limited 

to, new and existing light fixtures, mechanical piping, refrigeration units, conduit, structural steel, 

rack components, walkways, ductwork, registers and diffusers, so that sprinkler heads are not 



obstructed. Provide supplemental heads beneath all obstructions if necessary to meet NFPA and 

Owner’s insuring company requirements. 

F. Beyond all other requirements, the Owner reserves the right to require relocation of all sprinkler 

components where the installation is, in his opinion, vulnerable to operational damage. Such 

relocation shall be performed by the Contractor and shall not be the basis for additional 

compensation. 

3.2 PIPE AND CONDUIT PENETRATIONS 

A. Masonry 

1. This Contractor shall locate and provide sleeves to the Division 4 masonry subcontractor 

for his inclusion prior to construction of the wall. If penetrations are within existing 

surfaces, or if this Contractor does not comply with these requirements, it shall be his 

responsibility to cut the opening, install and grout the sleeve in place, and provide a wall 

finish that matches the existing finish at no extra cost to the Contract. 

2. The length of the sleeve shall be full wall thickness and the diameter shall be determined 

by providing as small a space between the pipe O.D. and the sleeve I.D. as is possible. 

This space shall be packed with oakum or fiberglass insulation. Sealant shall be installed 

to close off this space on both sides of the wall by spanning the distance from the sleeve 

to the pipe. 

3.3 FLUSHING 

3.4 TESTS 

A. Pipework installed under this Contract shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 


A. Immediately before any hydrostatic testing or water fill, a preliminary pneumatic test of 10 psig for 

5 minutes shall be performed as a measure to indicate no piping has been left open. 

B. No water shall be introduced into the piping system until the piping has been pressure tested. 

Piping installed under this Section shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig for a 

minimum of two hours, or 50 psig above the static pressure where the static pressure exceeds 150 

psig for two hours. Leaks shall be repaired immediately and the entire test repeated until the joints 

are proven tight. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted. At the completion of the successful test, 

all pipework shall be flushed clean. 

C. Gauges, pumps, temporary strainers, other equipment necessary for protection of the system, and 

other equipment necessary for all tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. 

D. Tests of concealed piping must be made before piping is concealed. Pipes shall be proven tight in 

the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner. The Engineer shall be notified in 

writing a minimum of five days prior to the test. 

E. Install strainers, etc., as may be required to properly protect equipment from sediment, debris, etc. 

in the piping system. Where permanent strainers are not shown, temporary strainers may be 

required for use during start-up. 



F. Any service connected to the system which cannot assume test pressures shall be disconnected 

and protected from damage and individually tested. In no case shall any part of the systems be 

obscured from testing. 

G. A written report of all tests shall be forwarded to the Engineer after completion of the test. The 

report shall include the original signature of the witnessing authorized representative of the Owner 

acknowledging the completion of the test. A copy of the test report shall be included within the 

Operating and Maintenance Manuals. NFPA Test Report Form shall be utilized. 

H. All additional tests as required by NFPA, the Owner's insuring agency, local or state authorities, 

etc., shall be performed as required by the Contractor. A written report and formal acceptance 

certificates shall be included within the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 

I. All tests shall be performed under constant supervision with the authority to bleed off excess 

pressure that may develop. No test shall remain on work unless continuously attended. 

J. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall final test the entire system, including all electrical work 

and alarm panels, in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner's representative. It shall be the 

responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the testing and contact all parties involved. Testing 

shall be completed using a contractor prepared and prior approved list of Actions and 

Observations. This list shall be used as troubleshooting guide only and does not constitute the 

sole basis for system acceptance. The Contractor shall sequentially perform the items listed in the 

Action Column and record the results in the Observation Column. If any unusual observations are 

noted, troubleshooting will not be started until all items in the Action Column are investigated. All 

items shall be corrected and the entire testing procedure shall be repeated until no unusual 

observations are noted. A written report of this test shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review 

and included within the Operational and Maintenance Manuals. 

3.5 CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE 

A. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate to the Owner of final inspection and acceptance by the 

Owner's insuring agency and local governing authorities after the work covered by this Section is 

completed. 


A. Maintain two sets of Contract documents; i.e., drawings (including Owner's insuring agency 

approved drawings), specifications, addenda, modifications, and shop drawings at the site in good 

order, and annotated daily to show all changes made during the construction process. At the 

conclusion of the project, verify the accuracy of these drawings and stamp each drawing “record” 

with a stamp indicating the contractor’s name, date and the signature of a principal of the 

company. Deliver one set to the Owner and one set to the Engineer. Also provide one set of all 

drawings in electronic AutoCad 2010 format to the Engineer. 

B. One set of stamped "record" record drawings and calculations shall be placed in each operating 

and maintenance manual. 

3.7 KEY PLANS 

A. Key Plans of building zoning shall be furnished by the Contractor. These Key Plans shall indicate 

service utility entrances, riser locations, riser numbers, building areas served for sprinklered Fed 

Ex facilities at this site, types of systems, alarm panel locations, valve locations and control 




functions, valve identification numbers, system hydraulic design data, and other items of key fire 

protection importance. Copies shall be located in each operating manual. In addition, copies shall 

be mounted in a frame with plexiglass covering and shall be secured on the wall at the following 

locations: 

1. At each new and existing riser assembly 

2. At each alarm panel 

3. In the existing pump room 



SECTION 15700 - HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 


GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of Section 15010 shall apply to this Section except as modified. 

B. The work included in this Section shall consist of installation of the complete and operating Heat 

Transfer Equipment. This shall include equipment and associated specialties as shown on the 

Drawings and specified. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY ANOTHER SECTION OR DIVISION 

A. Roof Curbs (installed, set, and flashed) – Roofing Contractor. Provide roof openings and steel 

supports as required. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS. Roof curbs for standing 

seam metal roof shall be furnished and installed by Roofing Contractor. 









Ductless Split System Air Conditioning Unit/Heat Pump Units YES 


A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS. 

HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 15700-1



2.1 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITAND/OR HEAT PUMP UNITS 

A. Furnish and install a split system air conditioner utilizing outdoor condenser and indoor evaporator. 

Outdoor unit shall contain sufficient R-410A refrigerant to completely charge system. The 

condenser shall be equipped with a rotary compressor and external brass service valves and 

charging port. The outdoor condenser shall have a capillary tube metering device located 

internally. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be constructed with aluminum slit fins 

mechanically bonded to copper tubes. The system shall bear the ARI Certification symbol and 

shall be listed by ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. Indoor unit shall be wall mounted. 

B. Provide microprocessor control. 

C. System shall be complete and shall include an integral condensate pump, shut off valves, 

charging valve, filter-dryer, sight glass, and expansion valve, Outdoor units to have “Seacoast 

Protection” option, (i.e., a “Blygold-Houston” protective coating on the outdoor unit coils). 

D. The system shall be single zone as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be as manufactured by 

Mitsubishi Electric Corp. or similar by Sanyo Electric. 


3.1 ROOFTOP HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 

A. Install new filters after start-up. 

B. Perform miscellaneous wiring, including communication wiring, not specifically shown on the 

Division 16, Electrical Drawings in order that units and field installed accessories operate in 

accordance with the manufacturer's intentions. 

G. Prepare unit for start-up to produce intended operating results. Start-up unit in accordance with 

manufacturer's written instructions and local gas utility requirements. 


HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 15700-2


SECTION 15733 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 



Packaged rooftop unit. 

Heat exchanger. 

Refrigeration components. 

Unit operating controls. 

Roof curb. 

Electrical power connections. 

Operation and maintenance service. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION 

A. Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation: Installation and wiring of thermostats and 

other control components. 

B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical connection of equipment. 


Section 15010 - General Provisions 

Section 15020 - Mechanical Identification 

Section 15030 - Testing and Balancing 

Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation 

Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation. 

Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation. 

Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems. 


ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 

AHRI 360 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment. 

ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise 

Residential Buildings. 

California Administrative Code - Title 24 Establishes the minimum efficiency requirements for 

HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the State of California. 


PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15733-1


A. Installation of work under this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of the 

2010 California Mechanical code, all applicable state and local code requirements, OSHA, 

and the Owner’s insuring company requirements. 


A. Submit drawings indicating components, dimensions, weights and loadings, required 

clearances, and location and size of field connections. 

B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, service clearances 

and electrical requirements. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 

D. Provide submittals to the Engineer for review in accordance with requirements established 

within Section 01300, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for the following 

products: 

- Packaged Rooftop Unit 

- VAV Control Units 

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Submit operation and maintenance data. 

B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, start-up and operating instructions, 

installation instructions, and maintenance procedures. 

1.8 HANDLING 

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting 

units. 

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until 

installation. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, 

whichever occurs first (ALL EQUIPMENT). 

B. Provide 5-year extended warranty for compressors. 

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. All work on units shall be accomplished by OEM factory trained and authorized servicing 

technicians 



B. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. 

C. Submit copy of service call work order or report to the Owner, and include description of 

work performed. 


A. Unit shall conform to cULus for construction of packaged air conditioner and shall have 

cULus label affixed to rooftop package. 

B. In the event the unit is not cULus approved, the manufacturer shall, at his expense, 

provide for a field inspection by a cULus representative to verify conformance to cULus 

standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform required modifications to the unit to 

comply with cULus, as directed by the cULus representative, at no additional expense to 

the Owner. 


A. Provide 1 extra set of filters. 

B. Furnish 1 complete set per applicable motor of fan motor drive belts. 

1.13 SUMMARY 

A. The contractor shall furnish and install packaged rooftop air conditioning unit(s) as shown 

and as scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance 

with this specification and perform at the conditions specified, scheduled or as shown on 

the contract drawings. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a minimum of five years 

successful experience in the manufacture and service support of the rooftop packages 

specified herein. 

B. Manufacturers with less than five years experience in the production of rooftop units of the 

sizes and types specified shall not be acceptable. 

2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 

A. Trane (Basis of Design) 

B. Carrier Corp 



2.3 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION 

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be gas/electric packaged rooftops as specified on the 

contract documents and within these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be 

based upon AHRI Standard 360. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weathertight casing with 

compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, filters, supply 

and/or exhaust fan motors and drives, and unit controls. 

B. Unit(s) shall be single piece construction as manufactured at the factory. [Site assembled 

sub- assemblies will not be allowed.] Package units shall be constructed for installation on 

a roof curb providing full perimeter support under air handler section and pedestal support 

under condenser section. 

C. Unit(s) shall be factory run tested to include the operation of all fans, compressors, heat 

exchangers, and control sequences. 

D. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate 

caution areas. 

2.4 UNIT CASING 

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating 

durable enough to withstand a minimum of 500 consecutive-hour salt spray application in 

accordance with standard ASTM B 117. Structural members shall be heavy gauge with 

access doors and removable panels of heavy gauge steel. Roof panels shall be sloped to 

provide positive drainage of rain water / melting snow away from the cabinet. 

B. Access Doors: Fully gasketed hinged doors with fluted knob fasteners and chained "tiebacks" 

to provide access to filters, heating section, return/exhaust air fan section, supply 

air fan section and evaporator coil section. 

C. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass internal liner on all exterior panels in 

contact with the conditioned air stream. 

2.5 AIR FILTERS 

A. Filters shall mount integral within unit casing and be accessible via hinged access panels. 

Filters shall be by Dynamic Air Quality Solutions. 

B. Acceptable Alternates: NONE 

C. General: The air cleaner shall be a two-inch wide (nominal) electronically enhanced 

polarized media air cleaner. Installed as a Dynamic V-bank. Filter area to be sized for 

150-175fpm through the filter when air flow through the air handler is 500fpm. 

D. Non-Ionizing, polarized media electronic air cleaners: 



E. Certifications: The air cleaner shall be tested and meet CSA Standard C22.2 No. 187- 

M19986 and UL Standard 867 for electrostatic air cleaners. 

F. Operation: The air cleaner shall have an active electrostatic field that polarizes a dielectric 

media. It shall not ionize airborne particles or produce ozone. 

G. Performance: The air cleaner shall be able to remove particulates at the same rate as 

MERV 14 filters and have the ability remove gas phase contaminants at the rate required 

to meet the IAQ procedure of ASHRAE Standard 62 Ventilation Standard. Pressure drop 

across the air cleaner will be no more than 0.25"w.g. @ 500fpm through the air handler. 

The filter configuration must be sized to a maximum air speed across the filters of 150- 

175fpm. 

H. Construction: The construction of the air cleaner frame and screens shall be aluminum. 

Two miniaturized electronic power supplies (power head) shall be mounted in a channel 

on the frame of the air cleaner in a non-conductive housing. The glass fiber media pads 

shall be placed between the outside grounded frame/screens. The power head shall 

impart a high DC voltage to the center conductive mesh of the center screen. The air 

cleaner frames shall be hinged so as to allow easy access to the media pad for 

replacement. Further, each air cleaner shall be able to be connected both mechanically 

and electrically to the adjacent air cleaner. 

I. Electronics: The power heads shall be capable of converting 24VAC to 6.5 KVDC and 

draw no more than two watts of power. The power head shall be insulated from the air 

cleaner frame and it shall transmit the 6.5 KVDC to the center screen of the media pad 

through a titanium filament. The power head shall be encased in a block of resin (”potted” 

electronics) to protect against moisture. Each air cleaner shall have a “Power On” lamp 

and be equipped with a high-voltage resistor to de-energize the air cleaner when the 

power is shut off. Each power head shall have an input and an output so that the power 

head of each air cleaner may plug into the next. The power heads will be connected in 

parallel so that if one fails, it will have no effect on the other power heads in the row. 

K. Power Supply: The 24VAC power supply must be a UL or CSA certified transformer, class 

“2” type, which shall permit one side of the secondary output (24V) to be attached to 

electrical ground. 

L. Air Cleaner Media: Replaceable air cleaner media shall be individual, disposable glass 

fiber “pillows”, which shall consist of two-ply of fiber glass with a conductive center screen 

of activated carbon mesh. This center screen shall be permanently enclosed between the 

two pieces of fiberglass and shall be disposed of when the media pad is changed. The 

glass fiber media must be fabricated from a constant filament so that any shed fibers are 

non-respirable. The glass fiber must have a minimum of a class “2” fire rating. Each air 

cleaner will be equipped with two carbon mesh media. 

M. Configuration: Panel sizes and arrangements will be of sufficient quantity and area to 

allow a maximum of 150-175 fpm of airflow across the net free area of the filters. 



2.6 FANS – VARIABLE SPEED SUPPLY - AND EXHAUST 

A. Provide forward curved supply and exhaust fans with fixed-pitch sheave drive assemblies. 

Dynamically balance all fans and the unit's running fan assembly (fan mounted on actual 

shaft, bearings and in scroll housing) to assure smooth operation of the fan and it's 

associated assembly. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable. 

B. Provide forward curved supply and airfoil return fans with fixed-pitch sheave drive 

assemblies. Dynamically balance all fans and the unit's running fan assembly (fan 

mounted on actual shaft, bearings and in scroll housing) to assure smooth operation of the 

fan and it's associated assembly. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable. 

C. Mount fan motor(s) and fan on a common base assembly and isolated from unit with 2” 

spring isolators. Provide thrust restraint isolation on the fan housing/fan board to assure 

smooth fan startup transition and operation. 

D. Fan shaft shall be mounted on grease lubricated ball bearings. 

E. Motor shall be premium efficiency. Motor shall have a standard T-frame and a minimum 

service factor of 1.15. All drive components shall be accessible without the use of 

scaffolds or ladders, to facilitate periodic maintenance checks and for operator safety. 

2.7 EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION 

A. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator coil 

shall be inter- circuited to maintain active coil face area at part load conditions. Coil shall 

also utilize internally enhanced tubing for maximum efficiency. 

B. Provide a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit. Factory pressure 

and leak test coil. 

C. Provide pitched stainless steel drain pan to assure positive drainage of condensate from 

the unit casing. 

2.8 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SECTION 

A. Condenser coils shall have all Aluminum Microchannel coils. All coils shall be leak tested 

at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The condenser coil is pressure tested to 650 

psig. Subcooling circuit(s) shall be provided as standard. 

B. Provide a baked phenolic resin corrosion-protective coating on the condenser coils and 

fins. 

C. Provide subcooling circuit(s) integral with condenser coils to maximize efficiency and 

prevent premature flashing of liquid refrigerant, to a gaseous state, ahead of the 

expansion valve. 



D. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with steel blades, and three phase motors. 

Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, 

with built-in current and thermal overload protection and weathertight slinger over motor 

bearings. 

E. Provide factory-installed louvered steel coil guards around perimeter of condensing 

section to protect the condenser coils, refrigerant piping and control components. 

Louvered panels shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel and be rigid 

enough to provide permanent protection for shipping and pre-/post- installation. Course 

wire mesh is not an acceptable material for coil guards. 

F. Condenser coils shall be V-banked for cleaning ease. The coils shall not exceed 14 fins 

per inch density in order to permit routine cleaning, and prevent excessive air pressure 

drop across the condenser coil. 

2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 

A. Compressor: shall be industrial grade, energy efficient direct drive 3600 RPM maximum 

speed reciprocating or scroll type. The motor shall of a suction gas cooled hermetic 

design. Compressor shall have centrifugal oil pump with dirt separator, oil sight glass, and 

oil charging valve. 

B. If semi-hermetic reciprocating industrial grade compressors are utilized provide single 

piece crankshafts, connecting rods aluminum pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, high 

strength non-flexing ring type suction and discharge valves, spring loaded heads, 

replaceable cylinder liners, and sealing service immersed in oil. Provide removable 

discharge heads and hand hole covers, and discharge service valves. 

C. Provide with thermostatic motor winding temperature control to protect against excessive 

motor temperatures resulting from over-/under-voltage or loss of charge. Provide high and 

low pressure cutouts, and reset relay. 

D. Provide factory-installed compressor lockout thermostat to prevent compressor operation 

at low ambient conditions. 

E. Provide coil frost protection compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit suction 

temperature to prevent coil frosting with minimum energy usage. As an alternate, factoryinstalled 

hot gas bypass shall be required on all VAV units to prevent coil frosting. 

2.10 EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION 

A. 100 Percent Modulating Return Fan single width plenum fan with airfoil blade shall be 

mounted on a shaft with fixed sheave drive. The fan shall be dynamically balanced for the 

operating envelop and tested in factory before being installed in unit. The plenum fan shall 

be test run in unit as part of unit test. Fan operating envelope rpm shall be below first 

critical speed. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease lubricated ball or roller bearings 

designed for 200,000-hour average life. Extended grease lines shall be provided to allow 



greasing of bearings from section base rail. Fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on 

common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and 

motor shafts. The entire assembly shall be completely isolated from unit with 2-inch spring 

isolators. Discharge dampers at unit outlet shall modulate relief airflow in response to OA / 

return air damper position. The return fan VFD shall operate in conjunction with the supply 

fan. 

2.11 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION 

A. Provide 100% modulating dry bulb-based economizer system fully integrated with unit 

return and exhaust air dampers. Unit operation is through primary temperature controls 

that automatically modulate dampers to maintain desired space temperature conditions. 

B. Provide adjustable minimum position control through the unit control panel. 

C. Provide spring-return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or power 

interruption. 

2.12 DAMPERS 

A. Provide low-leak OA dampers with a leakage rate of no more than 2.5% of nominal airflow 

at one inch W.C. static pressure. 

B. Leakage rate shall be determined in accordance with AMCA Standard 575. 

2.13 DDC MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLS – See Section 15900 

A. General - Each unit shall be provided with a factory-installed, programmed and run-tested, 

stand-alone, microprocessor control system suitable for VAV control as required. This 

system shall consist of temperature and pressure (thermistor and transducer) sensors, 

printed circuit boards, and a unit-mounted Human Interface Panel. The microprocessor 

shall be equipped with on-board diagnostics to indicate that all hardware, software, and all 

interconnected wiring and sensors are in proper operating condition. The microprocessor's 

memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM type, thus requiring no battery or capacitive 

backup to maintain all data during a power loss. 

B. The Human Interface Panel shall be readily accessible for service diagnosis and 

programming without having to open the main control panel on the rooftop unit. 

Alphanumeric coded displays shall not be acceptable. 

C. Human Interface (HI) Panel - shall be a 16 key touch-sensitive membrane key switch 

panel, password protected to prevent use by unauthorized personnel. The Human 

Interface Panel display shall consist of a 2 line by 40 characters per line clear english 

display. The display shall be Supertwist Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with blue characters, 

5 X 7 dot matrix with cursor, on a gray-green background for high visibility and reading 

ease. 



D. Anti-recycle Protection - shall be provided to prevent excessive cycling, and premature 

wear, of the compressors, contactors and related components. 

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES 

A. Provide unit mounted non-fused disconnect. 

B. Provide unit mounted 115 volt convenience outlet. 

C. Provide Phase and Voltage Monitor. Protects 3-phase equipment from phase loss, phase 

reversal, and low voltage. Any fault condition will produce a Failure Indicator LED, and 

send the unit into an emergency stop condition. cULus approved. 

2.15 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 

A. Provide factory mounted control interface to operate with the building management 

system. 

B. Control Functions: Includes unit time scheduling, occupied/unoccupied mode, optimal 

start/stop, night-time free-cooling purge mode, two-step demand limiting, night setback, 

morning warmup, discharge air set point adjustment, universal smoke purge, building 

pressurization, timed override and alarm shutdown. 

C. Diagnostic Functions shall include: 

� RTM temp sensor fail 

� Heat failure 

� Supply air temp sensor fail 

� Unocc zone cool stpt fail 

� RTM auxiliary temp sensor fail 

� Unocc zone heat stpt fail 

� OA temp sensor failure 

� Supply sir press stpt fail 

� Mode input failure 

� Spc static press stpt fail 

� Occ zone cool setpoint fail 

� Space press sensor fail 

� Occ zone heat setpoint fail 

� Return air temp sensor fail 

� Supply air pressure sensor fail 

� RA humidity sensor fail 

� OA humidity sensor fail 

� Supply air static press limit 

� Emergency stop 

� SCM communications fail 

� Supply fan fail 

� MCM communications fail 



� Exhaust fan fail 

� Heat module comm fail 

� Evap temp sensor fail 

� ECEM communications fail 

� Evap temp sensor fail - Ckt 1 

� Evap temp sensor fail - Ckt 2 

� GBAS module comm fail 

� TCI module comm fail 

� Low press control open 

� Low press control open - Ckt 1 

� Low press control open - Ckt 2 

� Tracer communications fail 

� NSB panel communications 

� Remote HI communications fail 

� Cond temp sensor fail 

� Cond temp sensor fail - Ckt 1 

� Cond temp sensor fail - Ckt 2 

� Unit HI communications fail 

� VOM communications fail 

� Compressor contactor fail 

� Comp. contactor fail - Ckt 1 

� Comp. contactor fail - Ckt 2 

� Compressor trip 

� Compressor trip - Ckt 1 

� Compressor trip - Ckt 2 

� Supply air temp cool stpt fail 

� Supply air temp heat stpt fail 

� Morning warmup zone sensor fail 

� Freezestat trip 

� Dirty filter 

� NSB panel zone temp sensor fail 

D. Provide capabilities for Boolean Processing and trend logs as well as "templated" reports 

and logs. 

E. Building automation system (BAS) control shall provide the capability to "read" and sum air 

flows, in CFM, for user selected VAV terminal boxes. 

F. BAS control shall permit auto reset of latching diagnostics. 

2.16 ROOF CURB 

A. Provide adapter curb to existing rooftop unit(s) if required. Adapter curb height not to 

exceed 14”. 

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors 

Association guidelines for rooftop equipment support. 





A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are correct. 

B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect 

ductwork. Install roof mounting curb level. 

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

A. Package rooftop unitary manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than 50 

miles from the jobsite. 

B. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit as 

applicable for field maintenance and service. 




SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION 


GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. The requirements of Section 15010 shall apply to this Section except as modified. 

B. The work included in this Section shall consist of installation of the complete and operating Air 

Distribution Systems, fans, ductwork, diffusers, and associated specialties. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY ANOTHER SECTION OR DIVISION 

A. Roof Curbs (installed, set, and flashed) – Roofing Contractor. Provide roof opening and steel 

supports. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS. Roof curbs for standing seam metal 

roof shall be furnished and installed by Roofing Contractor. 









Roof Mounted Upblast Propeller Fan YES 

Ductwork NO 

Duct Insulation NO 

Flexible Ductwork NO 

Volume Damper NO 

Turning Vanes NO 

Duct Access Door NO 

Test Connections NO 

Flexible Connections NO 

Grilles, Registers, Diffusers YES 

Air Filters – Replaceable NO 


A. Refer to Section 15010, GENERAL PROVISIONS. 

AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-1



2.1 ROOF-MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL FANS 

A. Fans shall be belt-driven, with heavy gauge spun aluminum weatherproof housing, variable pitch 

motor pulley, aluminum base, and statically and dynamically balanced, non-overloading, aluminum 

centrifugal wheel. Provide permanently lubricated ball bearing type motor remote from air stream. 

Motor shall be inherently protected. Provide vibration isolation for fan and motor assembly. Fan 

shall be UL listed and bear the AMCA seal. Fans to be spark resistant construction, provided with 

explosion proof motors. Provide polyester resin coating to all interior metal surfaces where 

scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Accessories: Insect screen, factory wired integral disconnect switch, and roof curb. 

C. Sound data required. 

D. Provide permanently attached identification tag. 

E. Fan shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall be Penn Ventilator DOMEX, or similar by 

Greenheck or Loren Cook. 

2.2 ROOF-MOUNTED UPBLAST PROPELLER FAN 

A. Fan shall be belt driven, with vertical discharge, adjustable motor base and pulley, and spark 

resistant aluminum, galvanized steel propeller. Provide polyester resin coating to all interior metal 

surfaces. Fan shall be AMCA rated. 

B. Fan shall be spark resistant construction. 

C. Motor: Open drip-proof, explosion proof, inherently protected, ball bearing motor, located outside 

of air stream, with weather-proof motor cover, windband with weatherproof and spring-loaded, 

insect-proof butterfly damper equipped with plastic bearings and magnetic damper controls, roof 

curb, and factory wired, UL listed, weatherproof (NEMA 4) disconnect switch with wiring from 

disconnect switch to motor in weatherproof flexible conduit. 

D. Sound data required. 

E. Provide permanently attached identification tag. 

F. Fan shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall be Penn Ventilator Company Hi-Ex, or similar 

by Greenheck or Loren Cook. 

2.3 ROOF-MOUNTED POWERED VENTILATOR 

A. Fan shall be belt driven, with axial flow aluminum propeller, aluminum housing with hinged hood, 

bird screened openings, 2 inch thick washable filters in filter frames (supply fan only), adjustable 

motor base and pulley, explosion proof type ball bearing motor, vibration isolators, extended lube 

fittings, roof curb, and factory installed, UL listed, weatherproof (NEMA 4) disconnect switch with 

wiring from disconnect switch to motor in weatherproof flexible conduit. Fan shall be UL listed and 

AMCA rated. Fan to be spark resistant construction, provided with explosion proof motor, and 

provide polyester resin coating to all interior metal surfaces where scheduled on the drawings. 



B. Fan shall be arranged for supply air operation. 

C. Provide polyester resin coating to all interior metal surfaces. 

D. Sound data required. 

E. Provide permanently attached identification tag. 

2.4 DUCTWORK 

A. Ductwork and plenums shall be rated for 2 inch wg, fabricated of galvanized steel with 0.90 oz/sq 

ft (G90), zinc coating, ASTM A525. 

B. Joints and connections shall be sealed using mastic or mastic plus tape to minimize air leakage. 

Mastic and tape shall be specifically recommended by the manufacturer for the application 

intended. 

C. Ductwork shall be constructed with air-tight lock joints, seams, and braces in accordance with the 

latest issues of SMACNA Manuals and ASHRAE Guide. 

D. Reinforcing shall be either riveted, bolted, or welded securely to duct sheet to prevent vibration. 

E. Duct dimensions shown on the Drawings are free area and do not include duct liner. 

F. Throat radius of curved elbows shall be 1-1/2 (minimum) times duct width. Where not possible 

and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil type turning vanes. 

G. Duct size increase shall not exceed 15 degrees divergence where possible. Maximum divergence 

upstream of equipment shall be 30 degrees. Maximum convergence downstream of equipment 

shall be 45 degrees. 

2.5 DUCTWORK - ROUND 

A. Ductwork shall be fabricated of galvanized steel with welded longitudinal seam. Duct and fittings 

shall be provided with slip joint connections. Seal joints with mastic and tape per manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Provide ductwork in accordance with SMACNA and ASHRAE requirements. 

Throat radius of curved elbows shall be 1-1/2 (minimum) times duct diameter. 

2.6 DUCT JOINT SEALANT 

B. Fabricate ductwork as follows: 

Duct Dia Gauge 

Up to 50 inches 20 

52 thru 60 inches 18 

62 thru 84 inches 16 



A. All duct joints shall be sealed with EPA 181 approved materials to minimize air leakage. Duct 

joints shall be sealed with hardcast #1402 Rolled Duct sealant. Install in accordance with 

manufacturer’s recommendations. 

2.7 DUCT INSULATION 


2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK 

A. Provide round corrugated aluminum duct with exterior fiberglass insulation of 1 inch x 1 lb/cu.ft. 

and a vinyl film vapor barrier. Maximum working pressure 10 inches of water column positive or 

negative. Entire flexible duct assembly shall be UL listed. Flexible ductwork shall be Clevaflex 

Type SFV or similar by Flexmaster. 

B. Flexible ductwork shall be joined to the main trunk duct through sheet metal fittings. Fittings shall 

be constructed of galvanized steel and be equipped with a factory installed volume damper having 

positive locking regulator. Fittings installed in lined ductwork shall have insulation guard. 

C. Fittings shall be Clevaflex SPIN-COLLAR DSC, or similar by Acme Manufacturing Co. 

2.9 VOLUME DAMPER 

A. Provide damper with 16 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel frame and blades, 1/2 inch diameter 

plated steel axles and control shaft, nylon bushings, opposed blade action, and hand quadrant or 

adjustment rod and screw. 

B. Volume Damper shall be as indicated on the Drawings and shall be Greenheck MBD-15 or similar 

by Penn Ventilator or Ruskin. 

2.10 TURNING VANES 

A. Airfoil turning vanes shall consist of curved galvanized steel vanes and side rails arranged to 

assure that any point on one blade is equal distance from the same point on the adjacent blade. 

Install with screws or rivets. Duct shall be free of vibration and noise when system is in operation. 

B. Double thickness airfoil turning vanes shall be installed at square and abrupt turns in duct. 

C. Turning vanes shall be Aero/Dyne or equal. 

2.11 DUCT ACCESS DOOR 

A. Door shall be constructed of 24 ga. galvanized, sheet metal, with tight closing cam lock latches, 

gasketed lip, 1 inch neoprene coated fiberglass insulation, and hinged with removable hinge pins. 

Door size shall be 12 inch x 12 inch (minimum) to allow for adjusting, repairing or replacing 

equipment. 

B. Provide insulated access doors as shown on the Drawings and as required for duct cleaning and 

for access to automatic dampers, volume dampers, coils, thermostats, temperature controllers, 

valves, filters, and other concealed equipment requiring inspection and service in the duct system. 



C. Access doors shall be Duro Dyne, or similar by Ventfabrics. 

2.12 TEST CONNECTIONS 

A. Instrument test connections shall be installed in the return air, outside air and supply air ducts of 

each air unit. 

B. Test connections shall be Ventfabrics #699-2 or equal. 

2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 

A. Heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene, 30 oz/sq yd, air tight, water tight, and fire 

retardant, complete with all angles, bolts, and clips required to fasten fabric to sheetmetal. Install 

between duct and air unit. 

B. Flexible connections shall be Ventfabrics "Ventglas" or equal. 

2.14 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS 

A. Manufacturer shall submit a written guarantee that ceiling diffusers will distribute air 

uniformly through the conditioned space with a 20 degree F temperature differential 

between average room temperature and supply air temperature. 

B. The manufacturer’s representative shall review the drawings and system design prior to 

submission of the grille, register, and diffuser submittal. 

C. Manufacturer shall guarantee that all grilles, registers, and diffusers furnished will perform as 

required for the intended application. Exceptions shall be brought to Engineer's attention prior to 

bidding the project. 

D. Provide SCHEDULE for approval clearly indicating the room, CFM, size, static pressure drop, 

throw and NC level. 

NOTE: FAILURE TO PROVIDE TABULATED SCHEDULE WILL RESULT IN THE AUTOMATIC 

REJECTION OF SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE SHALL BE AS DELINEATED IN PART 3 - 

EXECUTION. 

E. Grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be square or rectangular shape unless otherwise noted. 

F. Finish shall be white baked enamel unless otherwise noted. 

G. Grilles, registers and diffusers in moist locations (lockers, toilet rooms, and janitor closets) shall 

have an approved moisture resistant finish, gasketed frames, and aluminum construction. 

H. (TYPE A) - Ceiling Diffusers: Fabricated of aluminum having square or rectangular discharge 

pattern. Units shall be supplied with overlap margins and square-to-round neck adapter. Center 

core shall be fixed pattern, multiple orifice, removable type. Provide with integral, gang-operated 

opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face. Finish shall be 

manufacturer's standard baked enamel. Anemostat DF or similar by Titus, or Tuttle and Bailey. 



I. (TYPE B) - Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers: Fabricated of aluminum with 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch 

x 1/2 inch grid cores. Margin shall be 1-1/4 inch with gasket. Mounting frame shall be provided for 

all applications except 24 inch or 48 inch registers located in lay-in tile ceilings. Provide integral 

gang-operated opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face. Finish 

shall be manufacturer's standard, etched with acrylic coat. Anemostat GC50/GC 50L or similar by 

Titus, or Tuttle and Bailey. 

J. (TYPE C) – Sidewall Supply Registers: Fabricated of aluminum with individually adjustable foil 

shaped blades, spaced 3/4 inch on center. Units shall have vertical face, double deflection bar 

style grilles. Margin shall be 1-1/4 inch with gasket. Provide gang-operated opposed blade 

damper with removable key operator, operable from face. Finish shall be manufacturer’s standard 

baked enamel. Anemostat Model X2V0 or similar by Titus or Tuttle and Bailey. 

K. (TYPE D) - Linear Diffuser: Plenum shall be constructed of galvanized steel complete with inlet 

collar. Adjustable air diffuser section shall be aluminum extrusions with factory applied baked 

enamel. Internal surfaces shall be insulated with 1/2 inch thick foil faced insulation. Diffuser shall 

be designed to mount in standard tee bar ceiling with tile angles to support adjacent tiles. 

Anemostat Slad 100 or equal. 

L. (TYPE M) – Ceiling Diffuser: For secure areas such as the CBP Wet Holding Room, provide a 

steel diffuser with a heavy-duty lattice face. Provide tamper-proof security screws. Diffusers shall 

be Model M by Tuttle and Bailey or equal by Titus or Price. 

M. (TYPE S) – Secure areas shall have perforated face plate exhaust/return grilles similar to the 

setup by Tuttle and Bailey or equal by Titus or Price. 

2.15 LOUVERS 

A. Louvers shall be furnished and installed under Division 10. 

2.16 ROOF CURBS 

A. Provide prefabricated, pre-insulated aluminum curb by pre-engineered metal building 

manufacturer with fully welded smooth corners and joints. Curb shall have an integral base flange 

with minimum width of 3 inches and minimum height of 12 inches from flange to top of curb. 

Flange shall be free of warpage and sharp edges. Where curbs are installed without connecting 

ductwork, a 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal liner shall be installed to cover exposed insulation. 


3.1 Fans shall be installed level and free of excessive vibration. 

3.2 Provide sheaves as required for final air balancing. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3.3 Ducts shall be true to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be straight and smooth on the 

inside. 

3.4 Ductwork shall be installed by qualified personnel. Ductwork shall be braced and securely anchored to the 

building structure so as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. 



3.5 Flexible ductwork shall be attached to take-off fittings by use of sheet metal screws a minimum of 6 inches 

on center with a minimum of 3 screws uniformly spaced and taped. 

3.6 No part of an insulated duct system shall be obscured from insulation. For rigid ductwork, insulation shall 

be field cut to desired length with approximately 1-foot overhang of insulation and vapor barrier. This 

portion of insulation and vapor barrier shall be slipped over the take-off fitting and the diffuser to prevent 

condensation. Volume dampers and control rods shall remain accessible. Flexible ductwork shall be 

installed in a similar manner. 

3.7 Ductwork penetrating wall surfaces shall be sleeved with 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet metal to permit 

the passage of ductwork and maintain 1/2 inch to 1 inch clearance around the outside of the duct. After 

installation of the duct, this clearance shall be tightly packed with 3 PCF fiberglass and sealed air-tight. 

Provide 1/8 inch galvanized steel angle collars on both sides of the penetration to cover wall openings and 

provide a neat finish. Support vertical duct risers with angle brackets and completely seal off the hole 

through the floor. Provide fire stop as required. 

3.8 Installation shall comply with ASHRAE, SMACNA, and NFPA. 



3.9 SCHEDULES 

A. Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers 

GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS 

ROOM CFM SIZE Δ P THROW NC REMARKS 




SECTION 15840 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 



A. Fan powered terminal units. 

B. Parallel flow (variable volume). 

C. Integral terminal unit controls. 

D. Direct digital. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION 

Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation: Thermostats and control components. 

Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Thermostats and control components. 

1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION 

None 


Section 15890 - Ductwork. 

Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories. 

Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation. 

Section 15936 - Air Outlets and Inlets. 

Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units. 


NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 

UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 

NFPA 70 - Electric Duct Heaters. 

UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment. 

AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 15840-1


CUL C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment. 

ARI 880 - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard Rating Conditions for Air Terminals 

ASTM A 527 (Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized). 


A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, general assembly, 

and materials used in fabrication. 

B. Submit product performance data indicating design airflow, minimum static pressure drop, 

fan-operating condition. 

C. Submit sound power and noise criteria (NC) values for radiated and discharge paths. 

Total radiated sound corrections shown below. (No additional transfer function reduction, 

or additional effects shall be used.) 

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS 

1. Single and dual duct terminal units – radiated correction to octave band sound 

power value. 

OCTAVE BAND 2 3 4 5 6 7 

ARI 885-98 Type2 ceiling -18 –19 -20 –26 –31 -36 

2. Fan powered terminal units – radiated correction to octave band sound power 

value. 

OCTAVE BAND 2 3 4 5 6 7 

ARI 885-98 Type2 ceiling -18 –19 -20 –26 –31 -36 

3. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation. 

A. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified in this section shall 

have a minimum of ten years experience producing products of this type. 

1.8 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY 

A. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with any and all 

changes resulting from the use of a supplier other than the listed acceptable 

manufacturers. 

B. The duct system is computer designed for air balance and noise control using the 

performance data of the listed manufacturer. Substituting another VAV terminal unit 

manufacturer may require changes in the system design. These changes may include, 

but are not limited to, changes in ductwork size or layout, fittings, controls, building 



structure and piping. The installing contractor, upon substituting an approved alternate, 

must submit a computerized duct design showing system pressure requirements and 

acoustic data for the complete duct layout. 

C. The VAV system, including terminal units, direct digital controls and ATC/Building 

Management System shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible 

for system performance. If the terminal unit supplier is different from the control system 

supplier, then one of the two suppliers must bear sole responsibility for proper system 

performance. The supplier bearing responsibility shall be identified at the time of bid. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up or eighteen months 

from unit shipment, whichever is shorter. 



A. Manufacturer shall participate in the ARI Certification program. Unit performance data 

shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 880. The manufacturer shall display the 

ARI Symbol on all units. 

B. Single and dual duct terminal units shall be listed by an independent 3rd party agency as 

an entire assembly. Separate Duct Heater agency listing is acceptable if heater is placed 

4 feet downstream of the terminal unit. UL and ETL are approved. 

C. Fan powered terminal units shall be listed by an independent 3rd party agency as an entire 

assembly. Separate Duct Heater agency listing is acceptable if heater is placed 4 feet 

downstream of the terminal unit. UL and ETL are approved. 

D. Acceptable Manufacturers 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

Trane (Basis of Design) 

Price 

Titus 

A. Fan powered terminal units. 

B. Ceiling mounted primary and recirculated air control terminal unit for connection to a single 

[medium - 1.5-3.0 in. wg.][high - 4.0-5.0 in. wg.] pressure duct of a central air distribution 

system. Controls and reheat coils to be factory installed and tested. 



C. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and airflow indicator. 

D. Label shall include unit nominal airflow, maximum factory-set airflow, minimum factory-set 

airflow, and coil type. 


A. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled, manufactured of corrosion 

protected steel, and fabricated with a minimum of 18-gauge metal on the high pressure 

(inlet) side of the terminal unit damper and 22-gauge metal on the low pressure (outlet) 

side and unit casing. 

B. Plenum air filters shall be provided on all fan powered units, and ship installed from the 

factory. 

2.4 INSULATION - Foil Faced - The interior surface of unit casing is acoustically and thermally lined 

with a minimum of [1/2 inch, 2.0 lb./cu. ft. density glass fiber with foil facing. The insulation 

R-Value shall be a minimum of 2.2][1 inch, 2.0 lb./cu. ft. density glass fiber with foil facing. 

The insulation R-Value shall be a minimum of 4.3]. The interior foil liner shall isolate the 

fiberglass insulation from the airstream and allow for cleaning of the terminal unit interior 

surfaces. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A, UL 181 and bacteriological standard ASTM C 

665. All insulation leaving edges shall be metal encapsulated. 

2.5 INSULATION EDGE TREATMENT - All cut edges of insulation shall be completely enclosed by 

metal to arrest cut fibers and prevent erosion into the airstream. 

A. Assembly: Primary air control damper, airflow sensor, fans, controls and optional heating 

coil shall be factory installed in single cabinet. 

B. Rectangular Supply Air Outlet Connections: Rectangular outlet connections for single 

duct units shall be slip and drive type. Rectangular outlet connections for dual duct and 

fan powered units shall be flanged type. 

C. Round Supply Air Outlet Connections: Single and dual duct terminal units shall be 

provided with a factory-constructed and field-installed supply air outlet plenum/attenuator, 

with round outlet(s), where required, per the drawings. 

D. Round outlet(s) shall be supplied with integral balancing damper(s). 

2.6 PRIMARY AIR CONTROL DAMPER ASSEMBLY 

A. Locate primary air control damper blade inside unit casing. Construct the damper blades 

of minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel disks. Valve assembly shall be high quality and 

allow a maximum damper leak rate of 1% of damper nominal CFM at 4-inch wg. 

differential. 

B. Provide damper assembly with integral flow sensor. Flow sensor shall be provided 



regardless of control type. Flow sensor shall be a multi-point, averaging, ring or cross 

type. Bar or single point sensing type is not acceptable. 

C. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide and factory install a damper actuator. Label shall 

be affixed to the unit indicating the actuator has been factory-tested. 

2.7 HEATING COILS 

A. Electric Resistance Heating Coil: Coil shall be factory installed and wired and shall be 

constructed of open-wire type resistance heat elements. Coils shall be provided with 

primary and secondary over-temperature protection. Coils shall be constructed for single 

point power connection. Controls shall consist of an integral control box which includes a 

24 VAC transformer and magnetic contactors. Electric heat coil shall be installed at the 

terminal unit supply air outlet connection. 

B. Capacity: Provide coils in capacities as scheduled on the drawings. 

2.8 FAN ASSEMBLY 

A. Fan assembly shall be forward curved centrifugal fan with direct drive permanently 

lubricated, [permanent split-capacitor] [electrically commutated-ECM] type, thermally 

protected motor. Motor must be capable of continuous operation under maximum fan load 

with no external static pressure. Provide unit with a factory-installed and wired motor 

speed adjustment that is to the fan motor for ease of balancing. 

B. Fan motor horsepower shall not exceed the horsepower scheduled for each unit. Fan 

motors shall be high efficiency and shall not exceed the amperage shown in the table 

below for each motor size. 

C. Electrically commutated motors (ECM): 

FAN FAN 115 Volt 277 Volt 

SIZE HP AMPS AMPS 

03SQ 1/3 4.5 2.4 

04SQ 1/2 6.5 3.5 

05SQ 1 10.1 5.4 

06SQ 1 9.5 5.1 

08SQ 1/2 1.3 0.7 

09SQ 1/2 5.0 2.7 

10SQ 1/2 x2 7.5 4.0 

D. Internally suspend and isolate fan motor assembly from unit casing by using rubber 

isolators or torsion flex mounting legs. 

E. Unit shall be equipped with a fan motor disconnect switch which breaks both legs of power 

entering the control box. Fan-powered units shall include fan disconnect, control power 

transformer and fan relay. 



2.9 WIRING 

A. Factory install and wire power line fusing, a disconnect switch and a 24 VAC transformer 

for control voltage on fan powered direct digital or electronic control units. Provide control 

box for field wiring of thermostat and power source. 

B. Factory install and wire all terminal unit fan controls, including fan relay. Install electrical 

components in control box with removable cover. Incorporate single point electrical 

connection to power source. 

C. Disconnect switch - Provide single and dual duct terminals with a factory installed and 

wired switch to disconnect power to the unit controls. 

D. Power Line Fuse - Provide single and dual duct terminal units with integral power line 

fusing installed in the control box to prevent overcurrent damage to the unit controls. 

E. Control Transformer - Provide single and dual duct terminal units with a factory installed 

and wired 24 VAC transformer in control enclosure to provide control voltage power to the 

unit. 

2.10 DIRECT DIGITAL VAV CONTROLS 

A. Direct Digital Controls 

B. General. Direct digital controls (DDC) and factory costs to mount, calibrate and test the 

system shall be the responsibility of Section 15900 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) 

/ Building Automation System (BAS) Contractor. 

C. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted by terminal 

unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Flow sensing 

device shall be capable of maintaining rated unit airflow to within +/- 5 percent when 

installed with 1.5 duct diameters straight duct, of the same size as the primary airflow inlet, 

upstream from the unit. 

2.11 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL 

A. A DDC VAV controller per VAV terminal unit shall individually control the VAV terminal 

units. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer and transformer shall be 

supplied by the BAS contractor and furnished to the terminal unit supplier. The cost to 

factory mount, calibrate and test the controller, transducer, transformer and actuator shall 

be coordinated prior to bid day and included in the BAS price. 

B. To assure proper operation and control, the BAS contractor as part of this bid shall 

recalibrate the transducers six (6) months after acceptance of the BAS system to correct 

any deviations as a result of transducer drift. 



C. Submit a copy of the calibration report to the Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, Test, 

Adjust and Balance Contractor and Owner. 

D. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies and provide the 

points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specified monitoring and diagnostics. 

E. Grouping - The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes. These groups shall make it 

possible for the operator to send a common command to all boxes in a group to operate in 

the same mode. A sample of this group report must be provided in the submittal package 

for approval by engineer and owner. BAS shall also compile on a group basis, the 

following: 

1. Minimum group temperature 

2. Maximum group temperature 

3. Average group temperature 

4. Group boxes total airflow 

F. Setpoint Control - The BAS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of each VAV 

box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual zone setpoint 

and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and not be dependent upon the BAS for 

control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to control to current 

setpoints. 

G. Cooling Valve Control - The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open, fully 

closed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM position based on operator commands. The 

operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum & minimum airflow limits of 

the air valve through the BAS. 

H. Operating Mode - The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupied mode 

based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating & cooling setpoints shall 

be editable for each mode through the BAS. Other modes available for special 

applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimum flow. 

I. Control Offset - The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating setpoints of 

one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This capability will allow 

for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system requirements, such as demand 

limiting. 

J. Automatic Calibration - The system shall automatically calibrate its airflow sensing & air 

valve position measurement system at system startup and on a scheduled basis. 

K. Remote Setpoint Adjustment - The BAS zone temperature setpoint shall have manual 

override capabilities via remote adjustment at the temperature sensor. This manual 

readjustment feature may be disabled through the BAS, if desired. 

L. Override Button - The VAV box shall be capable of being placed in the "occupied" mode 

by pressing an override button mounted on the zone temperature sensor. 



M. Service tool - The VAV box shall have a communications port on the space sensor for use 

with a portable service tool. This portable service tool allows the capability to view & edit 

DDC/VAV box parameters. 

N. Terminal unit status reports - For each terminal unit, the BAS shall provide an operating 

status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CFM, etc.), setpoints, and 

modes. 

O. Terminal unit group report - For each group of VAV terminal units, the BAS shall report the 

group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature, minimum zone 

temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also display for each 

terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints and the current zone 

temperature. 

P. Terminal box diagnostics. 

1. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control at its 

maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its low range, unit shall control to 

its minimum CFM setpoint. 

2. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. A diagnostic message shall be 

displayed upon operator inquiry. 

3. If flow-measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressure 

dependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall be displayed 

upon operator inquiry. 

4. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shall 

automatically control to programmed occupied setpoints. Diagnostic message shall 

be displayed upon operator inquiry. 

5. If communications are lost, controller shall continue to operate in the current mode of 

operation. All setpoints shall be retained in nonvolatile memory. If communications are 

not restored within 15 minutes, unit shall automatically initiate a reset and then 

calibrate the flow sensor and damper position. 

Q. Zone Sensors 

1. The zone sensor shall be capable of 0.5 F accuracy. The sensor shall be a 

product of the VAV box controls manufacturer and designed specifically for the 

installed controller. 

2. The zone sensor shall have the following features: 

a. Zone setpoint adjustment 

b. Night setback temperature override button to provide occupied conditions 

during unoccupied times. 

c. Night setback override cancel button to end the override condition. 

d. Maximum flow override for simplified balancing. 



2.12 TESTING / VERIFICATION 

A. Factory run-test all fan powered units. 

B. Factory set and check all analog electronic and pneumatic controllers to within 5% of 

scheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted in 

accordance with ARI 880. 

C. Maximum Casing Leakage: 1 percent of nominal airflow at 0.5 in wg inlet static pressure. 

D. Maximum Damper Leakage: 1 percent of design airflow at 4 in wg inlet static pressure. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation 

from 100 percent of design airflow to 25 percent nominal airflow for cooling only units and 

30 percent for units with heating coils. 




SECTION 15900 – DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 



A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the 

specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and operator 

workstation(s). The user interface shall be through any personal computer available on the 

network. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system though dynamic color graphics 

of building areas and systems. 

B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for 

control of systems defined for control on this project. 

C. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the 

control system data should be limited by operator ID and password. An operator shall be able to 

log onto any PC on the designated network and have access to all designated data. 

D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under standalone 

control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other 

controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment. 

E. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed 

network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or internet connectivity may be 

provided for remote access to the system. 

1.2 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS 

A. Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers: 


Manufacturer Name Product Line 

Trane Tracer SC (Basis of Design) 

Johnson Controls Metasys 

Siemens Apogee 

1. The above list of manufacturers applies to user interface, controller software, the custom 

application programming language, Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, 

and Application Specific Controllers. All other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, 

valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers. 

A. System Installer Qualifications 

1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System 

Manufacturer of not less than three years. 

2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes 

on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed 

training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. 

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900-1


3. The installer shall have an office within 50 miles of the project site and provide 24-hour 

response in the event of a customer call. 

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and 

ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with 

the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes: 

1. National Electric Code (NEC) 

2. International Building Code (IBC) 

3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 

4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. 

5. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet) 

6. ISO/IEC 14908-1 (LonTalk) 

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 

A. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following: 

1. Page Display. The system shall display a web page within 10 seconds of the request. 

2. Page Refresh. The system shall update all within 10 seconds. 

3. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within 30 

seconds. 

4. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the 

operator and the reaction by the device shall be 10 seconds. Analog objects shall start to 

adjust within 10 seconds.- 

5. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over 

the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or 

workstation will be current, within the prior 60 seconds. 

6. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when 

it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 30 seconds. 

7. Program Execution Frequency. Custom programs shall be capable of running as often as 

once every second. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times 

consistent with the mechanical process under control. 

8. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops 

at a selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan 

and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same 

frequency. 

9. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All users on the network shall receive alarms within 10 

seconds of each other. 

10. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values 

reported by the specified system. 

Table 1 

Reporting Accuracy 

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy 

Space Temperature ±1°F 

Ducted Air ±2°F 

Outside Air ±2°F 

Delta-T ±0.25°F 




Relative Humidity ±5% RH 

Air Flow (terminal) ±10% of reading *Note 1 

Air Flow (measuring stations) ±5% of reading 

Air Pressure (ducts) ±0.1 "W.G. 

Air Pressure (space) ±0.01 "W.G. 

Electrical Power ± 5% of reading *Note 2 

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ± 50 PPM 

Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%) 

Note 2: * not including utility supplied meters 

A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on 

all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until 

the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications. 

All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats. 

B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not 

relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion. 

C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to 

determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the 

system to be installed. 

D. Submit the following within a maximum of 60 days of contract award: 

1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and 

model number. 

2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern 

and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. 

3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, 

manufacturer and model number. 

4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's 

cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically 

applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each 

submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or 

drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include if applicable: 

a) Building Controllers 

b) Custom Application Controllers 

c) Application Specific Controllers 

d) Operator Interface Computer(s) 

e) Auxiliary Control Devices 

f) Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device 

locations, addresses, and cabling 

g) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. 

Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled 

h) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object 

names 

i) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be 

specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project 



j) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display 

E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (asbuilt) 

documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and 

include: 

1.7 WARRANTY 

1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. 

One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be 

provided. 

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. 

3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the 

submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual 

shall include: 

a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing 

equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. 

b) Provide on-line help for documenting operator instructions 

c) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming 

language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of 

the software and database shall also be provided. 

d) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for 

the project. 

e) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for 

all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. 

f) Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems. 

g) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components 

including a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions. 

A. Warrant all work as follows: 

1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a 

period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control 

System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no 

charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's 

request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. Include 

one (1) four hour on-site visit per quarter during the first year of warranty period to 

calibrate building automation system back to design. Review all new overrides and set 

point adjustments with end user. 

2. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource 

that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, 

upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules. 

1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL 

A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These 

items include but are not limited to: 

1. Project graphic images 

2. Record drawings 

3. Project database 




2.1 MATERIALS 

4. Project-specific application programming code 

5. All documentation 

A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be 

applied in similar installations for a minimum of 1 year. The installation shall not be used as a test 

site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing. 

Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. 

2.2 COMMUNICATION 

A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet/IP for communications 

between System Controllers. LonTalk or BACnet MSTP sub-networks shall be used for 

communications between System Controllers, Custom Application Controllers and Application 

Specific Controllers. 

B. The Owner will provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, network switches, and 

routers necessary for the internetwork. An active Ethernet jack will be provided adjacent to each 

System Control Panel and PC Workstation for connection to this network. 

All System Controllers shall have a Ethernet communications port for connections with the operator 

interfaces. 

C. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing 

that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows: 

1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one System controller on the 

internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other System controllers as if that 

interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, 

reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all System controllers shall be 

available for viewing and editing from any one System controller on the internetwork. 

2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one 

System controller shall be readable by any other System controller on the internetwork. 

This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a 

point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An 

operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform 

internetwork value passing. 

D. The time clocks in all System controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. 

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE 

A. Operator Interface. Furnish 1 PC based workstations as shown on the system drawings. Each of 

these workstations shall be able to access all information in the system. These workstations shall 

reside on the Enterprise wide network, which is same high-speed network as the 

Systemcontrollers. The Enterprise wide network will be provided by the owner and supports the 



Internet Protocol (IP). Workstations shall also be able to dial into the system. Fed Ex shall advise 

the appropriate language for communication with a main BMS (BACnet or Lon). 

Workstation information shall be provided through web pages. 

B. Hardware. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following: 

1. Personal Computer ,shall have internet explorer 7.0 or higher or Firefox 3.0 or higher 

2. Modems. Furnish auto-dial telephone modems and associated cables as required for 

communication to remote buildings, and workstations. The modem shall be capable of 

transmitting at up to 56K baud, and communicate over voice-grade telephone lines. 

C. User Interface 

1. Internet Browser. Furnish with either Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher, or Firefox 3.0 or 

higher. Java 5.0 or higher must also be installed on the PC. 

2. User interface. The system user interface shall be web based graphically orientated. 

Provide a method for the operator to easily move between web pages. Dynamic points 

shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. 

Graphics shall have the ability to show animation of equipment. Animation capabilities 

shall include the ability to show a sequence of images reflecting the position of analog 

outputs, such as valve or damper positions. Graphics shall be capable of launching other 

web pages. 

3. Custom background images. Custom background images shall be created with the use of 

commonly available graphics packages such as Adobe Photoshop. The graphics 

generation package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard 

formats such as GIF and JPEG. 

4. Graphics Library. Furnish a library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, air 

handlers, terminals, fan coils, unit ventilators, rooftop units, and VAV boxes, in 3dimensional 

graphic depictions.. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible 

with the graphics generation package program. 

5. Engineering Units. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or 

SI) in the system. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the 

desired units for each measurement. 

D. System Applications. Each system controller shall provide storage of system information. Provide 

the following applications at each system controller. 

1. Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance 

shall be able to archive the database on the designated operator interface PC. The 

operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of 

a specified database to any panel in the system. 

2. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the 

operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all 

system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional 

help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen. 

3. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and 

password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable 

for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for 



all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s access 

for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each 

operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity 

is detected. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 

4. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all, network 

connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device 

shall be annunciated to the operator. 

5. Alarm Notification. Operator shall be notified of new alarm as they occur while navigating 

through any part of the system with a alarm icon. Alarm messages shall use full 

language, easily recognized descriptors for alarm. System will have the capability to 

acknowledge Alarms and add and save comments for the alarm. 

6. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of 

normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, 

states, and reactions for each object in the system. 

7. Alarm Reactions. A user shall be able to determine what actions will occur if any, upon 

receipt of an alarm. Actions shall display on the screen, logging, start a custom control 

program, displaying messages, send a SMTP e-mail message that can be directly 

displayed on a smart phone, or forwarded to a cell phone via a text message. . Each of 

these actions shall be configurable by any PC and time of day. . 

8. Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from 

any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from 

events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 4 categories based on severity. An operator with 

the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been 

cleared by the operator shall be stored by the building controller. Provide a comment 

field in the event log that allows a user to add specific comments associated with any 

alarm. 

9. Trend Logs. The system shall automatically create trend logs for a minimum of 5 key 

measurements for each controlled HVAC device. The automatic trend logs shall monitor 

these parameters for a minimum of 24 hours at 15 minute intervals. The automatic trend 

logs shall be user adjustable. A user shall also be able to define a trend log for any data 

in the system. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend 

intervals shall be as frequently as 1minute up to yearly sampling and shall be selectable. 

Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and can be 

archived on a PC. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator 

interface software. Trends must be viewable in a text-based format or graphically. 

Trends shall also be storable in a CSV or PDF format for use by other industry standard 

word processing and spreadsheet packages. 

10. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected 

by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing 

capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 6 points on a chart, to include live 

and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color. Navigation 

and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and a trace 

display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the x-axis. 



11. Point Control. Provide a method for a user to view, override, and edit if applicable, the 

status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by 

menu, on graphics or through custom programs. 

12. Clock Synchronization. A designated building controller shall synchronize all other 

building controllers on the network. A building controller shall also be able to synchronize 

with a NTP server for automatic time synchronization. The system shall automatically 

adjust for daylight savings time if applicable. 

13. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select reports. 

A number of different reports shall be available to be selected by the user and provide 

current data. All reports can be set up to be run at specified intervals of time. Reports 

and logs shall be stored on the building controller in a format that is readily accessible by 

other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. 

Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator shall be able 

to designate reports that shall be stored to disk at selectable intervals. Provide a means 

to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user. 

i. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current 

alarms. 

ii. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides 

in effect. 

iii. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time report that lists all equipment with 

the unit configuration and present operation. 

iv. Points report: Provide a report that lists the current value of all points 

2.4 APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE 

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software 

applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at 

the operator workstation. 

B. System Security 

1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 

2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions 

as assigned by the system administrator 

3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. 

4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off 

following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. 

C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each 

of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night 

economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are 

scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each 

schedule shall consist of the following: 

1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. 

2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year 

as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule 

for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an 



exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard 

schedule for that day of the week. 

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or 

holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will 

be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday 

period. 

4. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start 

algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the 

equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified 

occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates 

for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide 

the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an 

early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator 

determined time limit. 

D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to multiple 

associated alarm receivers. Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, and cell 

phones. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that 

generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access 

and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet communications, or dial up communications 

via modem, in the same format and method used on site as described under the Operator 

Interface section of this specification. 

E. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and 

anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to 

position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, and set-point, shall be 

user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule. 

F. Point control. User shall have the option to set the update interval, minimum on/off time, event 

notification, custom programming on change of events 

G. Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control 

when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The 

amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the workstation. 

H. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. 

2.5 SYSTEM CONTROLLERS 

A. General. Provide System Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this 

division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 

1. The System Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, 

standalone, microprocessor based System Controllers to manage the global strategies 

described in System software section. 

2. The System Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, 

database, and programming requirements. 

3. The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC 

4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output 

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point 

information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock. 



6. Data shall be shared between networked System Controllers. 

7. The System Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for 

communication to unit controllers. 

8. The System Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory 

circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: 

a) Assume a predetermined failure mode. 

b) Generate an alarm notification. 

c) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the 

failure. 

d) Automatically reset the System Controller to return to a normal operating mode. 

B. Communications. Each System Controller shall reside on the Enterprise wide network, which is 

same high-speed network as the workstations. The Enterprise wide network will be provided by 

the owner and supports the Internet Protocol (IP). Local connections of the System Controller shall 

be on ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet). Each System Controller shall also perform routing to a network of 

Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers) [Optional – Each System Controller shall 

perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers 

using LonTalk FTT-10 and LonMark profiles and/or use BACnet MSTP as prescribed by the 

BACnet standard to perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application 

Specific Controllers. 

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The System 

Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the 

controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal connectors. 

The System controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for installation and 

replacement. 

D. Memory. The System Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information indefinitely 

without power to the System controller 

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS 

A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which 

through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They 

are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the 

equipment they are designed to serve. 

1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control 

functions without being connected to the network. 

2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. 

B. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections 

shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable. 

C. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information 

in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days. 

D. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power 

consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. 



E. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk or BACnet MSTP. 

2.7 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES 

A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows: 

1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with 

reinforced corner bracing. 

2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for 

medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge. 

3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application. 

4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible 

seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for 

a maximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" w.c. differential pressure. 

5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500. 

6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one 

damper actuator per section. 

B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings. 

C. Electric damper/valve actuators. 

1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent 

damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. 

2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return 

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 

3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise 

spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position. 

4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2- 

10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range. 

5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow 

manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return 

actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this 

purpose. 

6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and 

shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make 

electrical connections. 

7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed. 

8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's 

rated torque. 

E. Binary Temperature Devices 

1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, 

with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set point adjustment, 55°F- 

85°F set point range, 2°F maximum differential, and vented cover. 

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellowsactuated, 

enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, 

UL listing for electrical rating, concealed set point adjustment, 55°F-85°F set point range, 

2°F maximum differential, and vented cover. 



3. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be 

at least 20 ft. long. Element shall sense temperature in each 1 ft. section and shall 

respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only. 

F. Temperature Sensors 

1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor. 

2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a 

minimum of 5 feet in length. 

3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure 

rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed. 

4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, 

and/or communication port as shown on the drawings. 

5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. 

Differential accuracy shall be within 0.2 F. 

6. The space temperature, set point, and override confirmation will be annunciated by a 

digital display for each zone sensor. The set point will be selectable utilizing buttons. 

G. Humidity Sensors 

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5% 

R.H. 

2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. 

3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be 

suitable for ambient conditions of -40 F to 170 F. 

4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year. 

H. Static Pressure Sensors 

1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable. 

2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus 

50% greater than calibrated span without damage. 

3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure 

of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting 

brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service. 

4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, 

proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure 

shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting 

brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service. 

I. Low Limit Thermostats 

1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 20 ft. minimum 

length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section. 

2. Low limit shall be manual reset only. 

J. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors 

1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy 

shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or 

space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation. 



K. Relays 

1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, 

configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. 

2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. 

Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. 

Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide IP 20 Type 

enclosure when not installed in local control panel. 

L. Transformers and Power Supplies 

1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished 

with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service. 

2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current 

output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 70.0 mV maximum 

Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 5% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond 

response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection. 

3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C. 

4. Unit shall be UL recognized. 

M. Current Switches 

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. 

The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output 

requirements of the DDC system. 

N. Local Control Panels 



1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed IP 20 Type construction with hinged 

door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies. 

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with 

color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. 

Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually 

identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control 

terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings. 

3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each 

local panel. 

A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and 

any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution 

before rough-in work is started. 

B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, 

conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before 

rough-in work is started. 




A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and 

shall be liable for all damage thus caused. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, 

and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall 

carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The 

Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and 

construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 

3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP 

A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to System lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and 

parallel to walls) wherever possible. 

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. 

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the 

NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure 

specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access 

for service. 

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. 

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and 

standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to 

local codes and standard practices. 


3.5 WIRING 

A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, 

state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. 

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of 

workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to System lines and 

properly supported. 

C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction 

over the work. 

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and 

Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in 

Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence. 

B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air 

plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that: 



C. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 requirements. 

D. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed 

specifically for that purpose. 

E. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing 

high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two 

(e.g. relays and transformers). 

F. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular 

to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 10 ft. intervals. Such bundled cable 

shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 5 ft. intervals or more often to 

achieve a neat and workmanlike result. 

G. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire 

connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures 

shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and 

terminals. 

H. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, 

the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers. 

I. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be 

made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device. 

J. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all 

penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes. 

K. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System 

Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC. 

L. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also 

be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located 

within Class 1 starter enclosures. 

M. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. 

Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring. 

N. Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway. 

O. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated 

(as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. 

P. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and 

shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not 

be used 

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS 

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 



B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates. 

C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by 

the wall framing. 

D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air 

transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings. 

E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow. 

F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. 

Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend 

shall be supported with a capillary clip. 

G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature 

sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells. 

H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in System walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within 

mechanical and service rooms. 

I. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated 

location. 

3.7 ACTUATORS 

A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. 

1. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, 

power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then 

tighten the linkage. 

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates 

damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. 

3. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator 

manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's 


3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING 

A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end 

within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information. 

B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. 

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1/2” letters on nameplates. 

D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record 

documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not 

remove the label. 

3.9 TRAINING 



A. Provide eight (8) hours of on-site training for Owner personnel. 

B. Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently 

operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical 

points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures. 

C. Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three 

logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of 

knowledge required: 

1. Day-to-day Operators 

2. Advanced Operators 

3. System Managers/Administrators 

D. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material. 

3.10 ACCEPTANCE 

A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests 

described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and 

Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the 

Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the 

Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty. 

3.11 ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS 

CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to ensure 

compatibility with pipe design. 

B. All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from the vertical 

up position. 

C. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

D. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that actuators may 

be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or equipment. 

E. Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced without draining the 

supply/return side piping system. Unions shall be installed at all connections to screwed type control valves. 

F. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2" in diameter, 

with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification numbers as shown on 

approved controls shop drawings. 

CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION 

A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet metal 

design. 



B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage 

rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper dimensions and shall 

be square, straight, and level. 

C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and 

free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of 

each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8". 

D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for 

vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal. 

E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face 

shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.) 

F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper 

after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and 

close simultaneously. 

G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end. 

H. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight. 

I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to prevent 

leakage around perimeter of damper. 

DUCT SMOKE DETECTION 

A. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke detector 

interface to HVAC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as 

the HVAC equipment to be controlled. 

B. Smoke detector hardwire interlock wiring provided and installed by Division 16. 

PART 4 - SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS 

4.1 ROOFTOP/VAV SYSTEM CONTROL 

The AC-3 and AC-5 Building Automation System (BAS) shall perform the following VAV Air System (VAS) 

control strategies, appropriate to the given occupancy mode of the system, as determined by the useradjustable 

time-of-day schedule for the system. Panel(s) shall be located in Room 134, where approved by 

Fed Ex. 

A. Discharge Duct Static Pressure Setpoint Optimization (ASHRAE 90.1 COMPLIANT) 

1. The building automation system (BAS) shall continuously monitor the damper position of 

all VAV terminal units. The discharge duct static pressure shall be sensed directly at the 

discharge of each rooftop unit. The sensor must be mounted in a non-turbulent location. 



2. When any VAV damper is more than 75% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct 

static pressure setpoint shall be reset upward by 0.1 in W.C. (adj.), at a frequency of 15 

minutes (adj.), until no damper is more than 75% open or the static pressure setpoint has 

reset upward to the system maximum duct static pressure setpoint or the RTU variablefrequency 

drive is at the maximum speed setting. 

3. When all VAV dampers are less than 65% (adj.) open, the supply fan discharge duct 

static pressure setpoint shall be reset downward by 0.1 in W.C.(adj.), at a frequency of 15 

minutes (adj.), until at least one damper is more than 65% open or the static pressure 

setpoint has reset downward to the system minimum duct static pressure setpoint or the 

RTU variable-frequency drive is at the minimum speed setting. 

4. The control bands, setpoint increment values, setpoint decrement values and adjustment 

frequencies shall be adjusted to maintain maximum static pressure optimization with 

stable system control and maximum comfort control. 

5. The BAS shall have the capability to allow the operator to exclude “problem” zones that 

should not be considered when determining the optimized setpoint. 

6. The BAS shall also read the status of the supply air static pressure sensor and display 

the active duct static pressure reading on the status screen. 

7. The BAS shall have the ability to identify, and display to the user, the VAV box that 

serves the Critical Zone (that is, the zone with the most wide-open VAV damper). This 

information shall update dynamically as the location of the Critical Zone changes based 

on building load, and duct static pressure setpoint optimization control. 

B. Ventilation Optimization 

1. The AHU outdoor-air damper shall be controlled to deliver required outdoor airflow at all 

load conditions. The outdoor airflow setpoint shall be determined according to ASHRAE 

Standard 62.1-2004, Equation 6-8 and Appendix A. The actual outdoor airflow shall be 

sensed at the outdoor air intake. 

2. The BAS shall include a time-of-day schedule to indicate whether a zone is normally 

occupied or unoccupied. When the schedule indicates that the zone is normally 

unoccupied, the required outdoor airflow for the zone shall be zero. When the schedule 

indicates that the zone is normally occupied, the required outdoor airflow for the zone 

shall equal the design outdoor airflow. 

3. The required outdoor-air fraction shall be continuously calculated for each VAV terminal 

zone. Outdoor-air fraction is defined as the current required outdoor airflow for the zone 

divided by the current primary airflow to the zone. 

4. The BAS shall regularly determine the highest zone outdoor-air fraction, sum the outdoor 

airflow requirements for all VAV zones, and sum the current primary airflows for all VAV 

zones to determine the total system primary airflow. This information shall be used in 

Equation 6-8 and Appendix A of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004 to calculate the minimum 

required outdoor airflow for the system. This minimum outdoor airflow setpoint shall be 

recalculated every 15 minutes (adj). 



C. Optimal Start Mode 

1. The BAS shall initiate the Optimal Start mode such that the VAV air handler is started and 

VAV boxes serving the VAS are enabled prior to when the space being served by the 

VAS is scheduled to be occupied, to allow the zone temperature to reach the pending 

occupied heating or cooling setpoint. The system shall wait as long as possible before 

starting, so that the temperature in each zone reaches the occupied setpoint just in time 

for scheduled occupancy. Ventilation functions shall be disabled when the VAS is in 

Optimal Start mode. 

2. The BAS shall use a self-adjusting algorithm to calculate the actual time to initiate 

Optimal Start for the VAV Air System based on the occupied setpoint, space temperature, 

historical optimal start performance data and the associated heating or cooling optimal 

start rate. 

3. An early start limit shall be provided to prevent the VAS from starting prior to 120 minutes 

(adj.) before scheduled occupancy. 

4. The VAS shall transition from Optimal Start mode to Occupied mode when the current 

time is equal to the scheduled start time. 

5. Cooling 

a) The BAS shall initiate the Optimal Start – Cooling mode when Optimal Start 

mode for the VAS has been initiated and the temperature of the space is warmer 

than its occupied cooling setpoint. All ventilation functions are disabled while 

operating in Optimal Start mode. 

b) The BAS shall determine the length of time required to lower the space 

temperature to the occupied cooling setpoint when the mode of the VAS is 

cooling and the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint. 

c) Each VAV box in the VAV Air System shall control to its occupied cooling 

setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to maintain the space temperature 

setpoint for the zone being served by the VAV box. 

d) The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure 

setpoint. 

6. Heating: AHU central fan used, VAV box local reheat used 

a) The BAS shall initiate the Optimal Start – Heating mode, local reheat, when 

Optimal Start mode for the VAS has been initiated and the space temperature of 

the VAS is cooler than its occupied heating setpoint. All ventilation functions are 

disabled while operating in Optimal Start mode. 

b) The BAS shall determine the length of time required to raise the space 

temperature to the occupied heating setpoint when the mode of the VAS is 

heating and the space temperature is below the setpoint. 

c) Each VAV box in the VAV Air System shall control its local reheat source to the 

occupied heating setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to maintain the space 

temperature setpoint for the zone being served by the VAV box. 

d) The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure 

setpoint. 



D. Off/Standby Mode 

1. The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into Off/Standby mode as 

determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system. The VAV boxes 

shall control to their individual unoccupied temperature setpoints, and all ventilation 

functions shall be disabled. VAV box local reheat is allowed while the VAS is in 

Unoccupied mode. 

2. After the VAV boxes have been commanded to unoccupied, the VAS shall command the 

associated AHU to Unoccupied mode (reference the specific AHU sequence of operation, 

as appropriate). Supply fan shall be shut down, heating and cooling shall be disabled, 

outdoor air damper shall be closed, and all ventilation functions shall be disabled. 

E. Night Heat/Cool Mode [Night Setback Mode] 

1. During scheduled unoccupied hours, the VAV Air System shall be controlled by the BAS 

to maintain the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints, as appropriate. Ventilation 

functions are disabled, the outdoor air damper shall remain closed, unless outdoor air is 

used for economizing during unoccupied zone cooling. Unless otherwise stated, the AHU 

supply fan shall operate in the automatic control mode, cycling on only when heating or 

cooling is needed. 

a) Cooling: 

The BAS shall initiate the Night Cooling mode when the space temperature for 

the space being served by the VAS exceeds 85 deg F (adj). Night Cooling will 

terminate when the space temperature falls below the Unoccupied Cooling 

setpoint minus the unoccupied cooling differential(4 deg F, adj.). 

Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control to its occupied 

cooling setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to meet the airflow requirements 

to cool the space to the Unoccupied Cooling setpoint minus the unoccupied 

cooling differential. 

The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure 

setpoint. 

b) Heating: (AHU central fan not used, VAV box local fan and reheat used) 

The BAS shall initiate the Night Heating, with local reheat mode when the space 

temperature for the Space being served by the VAS is less than 60 deg F (adj.). 

Night Heating will terminate when the space temperature rises above the 

Unoccupied Heating setpoint plus the unoccupied heating differential (4 deg F 

(adj). 

Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control its local fan to on, 

and shall control its local reheat source to control to the unoccupied heating 

setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to maintain the space temperature 

setpoint for the zone being served by the VAV box. 



F. Night Economize Mode [Night Purge Mode] 

The AHU shall not be used for Night Heat mode. 

1. The BAS time-of-day scheduling application shall support Night Economize functionality. 

The Night Economize mode shall be scheduled during the daily block of time when the 

outdoor air enthalpy is typically the most effective for economizing. 

2. The BAS shall command the VAV Air System to Night economize when all three of the 

following conditions are met: temperature of the space is greater than the space’s 

occupied cooling setpoint, and the temperature of the space is greater than the Outdoor 

Air temperature plus the Minimum Indoor/Outdoor Temperature differential (15 deg F, 

adj.), and night economize mode is enabled by the time-of-day schedule. 

3. Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control to its occupied cooling 

setpoint, and shall modulate box airflow to meet the airflow requirements to cool the 

space to the Occupied Cooling setpoint minus the occupied cooling deadband (4 deg F, 

adj.). 

4. The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint. 

5. Mechanical cooling shall not be used during Night Economize mode. 

4.2 DX VAV ROOFTOP UNITS, COOLING ONLY, ECONOMIZER, DDC CONTROLLER (DIRECT DIGITAL 

CONTROL) 

A. Building Automation System Interface: 

1. The Building Automation System (BAS) will send the controller Occupied, Unoccupied, 

Optimal Start, Night Heat / Cool, and Timed Override commands. If a BAS is not present, 

or communication is lost with the BAS, the controller will operate using its local schedule 

and setpoints. 

B. Unoccupied Mode: 

1. In the unoccupied mode the rooftop unit (RTU) will cycle as required to maintain the 

adjustable (adj) unoccupied space heating and cooling setpoints. The variable frequency 

drive (VFD) will operate as necessary to maintain duct static pressure setpoint (adj) 

during morning warm up or cool down modes. The outside air damper will remain closed, 

and the return air damper will remain open during unoccupied mode. 

C. Cool-Down Mode: 

1. On a transition from the unoccupied mode to occupied mode, if the zone average 

temperature is 3°F above the occupied setpoint a morning cool-down mode will be 

activated. When morning cool-down is initiated the RTU will enable the fan and DX 

cooling or economizer. The outside air damper will remain closed. When the zone 

average temperature reaches setpoint (adj), the RTU will transition to the occupied mode. 

D. Occupied Mode: 



1. The RTU will enable cooling or heating to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint 

(adj). The RTU will control the supply fan VFD to maintain duct static pressure setpoint 

(adj). The outdoor air damper will open to the minimum setpoint. 

E. Discharge Air Temperature Reset Control: 

1. The discharge air temperature setpoint, adjustable (55°F-65°F), will be reset based on 

either the outside air temperature or zone average temperature. The minimum discharge 

air setpoint will be set at 55ºF (adj). The discharge temperature sensor will prevent the 

discharge air temperature from falling below the minimum discharge air setpoint (adj). If 

the discharge air temperature continues to fall, the discharge temperature sensor will act 

as a low discharge temperature limit, a low temperature alarm will be annunciated, and 

the unit will shut down. If the discharge temperature rises above the high limit setpoint 

the sensor will act as a high discharge temperature limit and will keep the unit running, a 

high temperature alarm will be annunciated. 

a) Outdoor Air Temperature Reset: 

The discharge air temperature setpoint will be adjusted based on the outside air 

temperature and the cooling load of the building. 

b) Zone Temperature Reset: 

The discharge air temperature setpoint will be adjusted based on the 

temperature of the critical zone(s). 

F. Discharge Duct Static Pressure Control: 

1. Reference Duct Static Pressure Optimization in section 4.01 “ROOFTOP/VAV SYSTEM 

CONTROL” 

G. Economizer Control: 

1. The mixed air sensor will measures the dry bulb temperature of the air leaving the 

evaporator coil while economizing. When economizing is enabled and the unit is 

operating in the cooling mode, the economizer damper is modulated between its 

minimum position and 100% to maintain the zone temperature at the economizer 

setpoint. The economizer setpoint is (ESP) derived from the cooling and heating setpoints 

(CSP and HSP) so that ESP is the higher of CSP – 1.5°f or HSP + 1.5°f. If the mixed air 

temperature starts to fall below 53°F, the economizer starts to close, at 50°F, the damper 

will be at minimum position. Compressors will be delayed from operating until the 

economizer has opened to 100% for 5 minutes. 

H. Supply Fan Operation: 

a) Reference Dry Bulb: 

Outside air (OA) temperature is compared with a reference dry bulb point. The 

economizer is enabled when OA temperature is less than reference dry bulb 

point. The economizer is disabled when OA temperature is greater than 

reference dry bulb point + 5.0°F. 

1. The supply fan will be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during the 

unoccupied mode. A differential pressure switch will monitor the differential pressure 

across the fan. If the switch does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan 



operation a fan failure alarm will be annunciated, the unit will stop, requiring a manual 

reset. 

I. Space Pressure Control (Statitrac): 

1. When the programmed exhaust enable setpoint is reached, the exhaust fan control is 

activated. If the space pressure is equal to the programmed space pressure setpoint the 

exhaust fan and dampers will be inactive. If the space pressure increases above the 

programmed space pressure setpoint the controller will turn on the exhaust fan and 

modulate the exhaust fan VFD/damper to relieve building pressure. When the space 

pressure decreases to within the programmed space pressure setpoint, the exhaust fan 

VFD/damper position will remain constant. When the space pressure equals the 

programmed space pressure setpoint, the controller will modulate the relief air dampers 

until building pressure returns to the programmed space pressure setpoint. If the space 

pressure falls below the programmed space pressure setpoint, the controller will 

deactivate the exhaust fan VFD/dampers. If the economizer damper closes to a point 

below the programmed exhaust enabled setpoint, the controller will assume an inactive 

state. 

J. Exhaust Fan Status: 

1. A differential pressure switch will monitor the differential pressure across the fan. If the 

switch does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation a fan failure 

alarm will be annunciated, the unit will stop, requiring a manual reset. 

K. Filter Status: 

1. A differential pressure switch will monitor the differential pressure across the filter when 

the fan is running. If the switch closes for 2 minutes after a request for fan operation a 

dirty filter alarm will be annunciated. 

4.3 VAV BOX WITH PARALLEL FAN, HOT WATER HEAT, AND DDC CONTROLLER (DIRECT DIGITAL 

CONTROL) 

A. Building Automation System Interface: 

1. The Building Automation System (BAS) will send the controller Occupied and Unoccupied 

commands. The BAS may also send a Heat/Cool mode, priority shutdown commands, 

space temperature and/or space temperature setpoint. If a BAS is not present, or 

communication is lost with the BAS, the controller will operate using its local setpoints. 

B. Heat/Cool Mode: 

1. The Heat/Cool mode will be set by a communicated value or automatically by the VAV. In 

standalone or auto mode the VAV will compare the primary air temperature with the 

configured auto changeover setpoint to determine if the air is "hot" or "cold". Heating 

mode will command the VAV to heat only; it implies the primary air temperature is hot. 

Cooling mode commands the VAV to cool only; it implies the primary air temperature is 

cold. 

C. Heat/Cool Setpoint: 



1. The space temperature setpoint will be determined either by a local hardwired setpoint, 

the VAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The VAV uses the locally stored 

default setpoints when neither a local hardwired setpoint nor communicated setpoint is 

present. If both a hardwired setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the VAV will use 

the communicated value. 

D. Occupancy Mode: 

1. The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the VAV via a binary input. 

Valid Occupancy modes for the VAV will be: 

E. Cooling Mode: 

a) Occupied: 

Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation. When the unit is in the 

occupied mode the VAV will maintain the space temperature at the active occupied 

heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable ventilation and airflow setpoints will be enforced. 

The occupied mode will be the default mode of the VAV. 

b) Unoccupied: 

Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime operation. When the unit is in 

unoccupied mode the VAV will maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied 

heating or cooling setpoint regardless of the presence of a hardwired or communicated 

setpoint. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the VAV 

will modulate fully closed. 

c) Occupied Bypass: 

Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied operation. Tenants will be able 

to override the unoccupied mode from the space sensor. The override will last for a 

maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The tenants will be able to cancel the override from 

the space sensor at any time. During the override the unit will run in occupied mode. 

1. When the unit is in cooling mode, the VAV will maintain the space temperature at the 

active cooling setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active cooling minimum 

airflow setpoint to the maximum cooling airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV occupancy 

mode, the active cooling setpoint will be one of the following: 

F. Heating Mode: 

Setpoint Default Value 

Occupied Cooling Setpoint 74°F 

Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 85°F 

Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint 78°F 

Occupied Min Cooling Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule 

Occupied Max Cooling Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule 

The VAV will use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to 

determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based 

on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity. 



1. When the unit is in heating mode, the CONTROLLER will maintain the space temperature 

at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active heating 

minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based on the 

CONTROLLER occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint will be one of the following: 

G. Intermittent Fan Control: 

Setpoint Default Value 

Occupied Heating Setpoint 71°F 

Unoccupied Heating Setpoint 60°F 

Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint 67°F 

Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule 

Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule 

The controller will use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to 

determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based 

on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. 

1. During all occupied modes, as the space temperature falls below the active cooling 

setpoint, the VAV will modulate to its minimum cooling airflow setpoint. Upon a continued 

drop in temperature and/or unit airflow, the parallel fan will be energized. During the 

unoccupied mode, the primary air valve will modulate fully closed. The terminal fan and 

heat will cycle as needed to maintain a reduced space temperature. 

H. Reheat Control: 

1. Reheat will only be allowed when the primary air temperature is 5°F below the configured 

reheat enable setpoint, (70°F adjustable). The reheat will be enabled when the space 

temperature drops below the active cooling setpoint and the airflow is in the minimum 

cooling airflow setpoint. During reheat the VAV will operate at its minimum heating airflow 

setpoint and energize the heat as follows: 

I. Space Sensor Failure: 

4.4 SAFETIES AND ALARMS 

a) Proportional Hot Water Reheat: 

If the space temperature is below the heating setpoint the hot water reheat valve will 

modulate as required to maintain the active heating setpoint. 

1. If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor, it will be feed back to the BAS. 

Zone sensor failure will cause the VAV to drive the damper to minimum air flow if the VAV 

is in the occupied mode, or drive it closed if the VAV is in the unoccupied mode. If a 

series fan is available, it will be enabled, and the reheat will be disabled. If a parallel fan 

is available, it will be disabled along with the reheat. 

A. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it shall be 

feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the VAV to close and disable heat and Fan 

if available. 

B. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service tool, BAS, 



or by cycling power to the unit. 

C. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following VAV diagnostics. The VAV shall 

initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition. 

4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING 

Diagnostic Manual Reset required 

Discharge Air Temperature Failure Yes 

Low Air Flow Yes 

Primary Air Temperature Failure No 

Space Temperature Failure Yes 

Local Setpoint Failure No 

Flow Sensor Failure No 

A. Manual Output Test - The VAV shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for troubleshooting. 

This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of additional tools. 

B. Unit Identification - The VAV shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a 

command from a service tool or BAS. The VAV shall also be able to send the unit address to a 

service tool or BAS for unit identification from the controller board or space sensor with no need of 

additional tools. 

4.6 COMMUNICATIONS 

A. Data Sharing - All VAVs shall be able to communicate in a peer-to-peer environment over a 

twisted pair of communications wire. 

B. Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single space sensor. 

The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool mode, occupancy, fan 

operation, and capacity control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure 

seamless cooperation between the units. 








SECTION 15990 - AIR TESTING AND BALANCING 


1.1 SCOPE 


B. This Section describes the testing and balancing of air handling systems, and heating and cooling 

water systems. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 


Balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air distribution, exhaust, and recirculation 

systems. Duct systems shall be adjusted for minimum static pressures. Pulley sheaves and 

quadrants shall be adjusted, locked, and marked, and replaced where required. 

Review building Drawings and Specifications for location of instrumentation, balancing devices 

and dampers. 

Periodic inspection of installation during the construction period. 

Submit to the Owner and Engineer a complete test and balance report upon completion of all 

testing and balancing. 

Balancing shall be within plus or minus 5% of design values. 



B. Work included in this Section shall conform to the National Standards for Field Measurements and 

Instrumentation as published by the Technical Information Division of Associated Air Balance 

Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Procedural Standards for 

Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting of Environmental Systems regarding testing, balancing 

procedures and instrumentation. 

C. Tester shall be certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or the 

Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). Tester shall NOT be the installer of the system being 

tested, and shall be independent of the project. 






Test and Balance Report YES 

AIR AND WATER TESTING AND BALANCING 15990-1



2.1 Furnish equipment necessary for the complete balance and testing of the systems. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Instrumentation used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within the last six 

months prior to beginning the work in this Section. 

3.2 REVIEW OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Upon reception of the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall note additional balancing 

dampers and fittings, required to completely balance the systems. These additional required 

devices shall be provided and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 

3.3 WARRANTY 

A. Include an extended warranty of one year, after final acceptance of the building by the Owner, 

during which time the Owner's representative, at his discretion, may request a recheck or resetting 

of items listed in the test report. The Contractor shall provide technicians to perform tests and 

adjustments the Owner's Representative may require during this period of time. 

B. Objectionable drafts shall be eliminated. Perform smoke tests if the Owner's Representative is not 

completely satisfied with the air distribution patterns. 

3.4 PERIODIC REPORT 

A. Conduct periodic inspections of the construction work and shall carefully note items which will 

affect the performance of balancing the systems. Noted items shall be delineated in a report to the 

Mechanical Contractor and Engineer. These reports shall be prepared for review monthly or at 

more frequent intervals as warranted by construction. 

3.5 TEST AND BALANCE DATA REPORT 

A. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, the Test and Balance Data Report containing the following 

minimum information. Listings shall include design and actual conditions for each item. A report 

is required for each air handling system (supply, exhaust, and recirculation for heating, cooling, 

and economizer modes). A copy of the test and balance report shall be included within the 

operation and maintenance manuals. Format for the report shall be as recommended by AABC or 

SMACNA. 

B. Delineate each operating flow condition where multiple conditions are specified. 

C. Air Heating / Cooling System 

1. Date 

2. System Number 



3. Fan RPM 

4. Manufacturer's Recommended Pressure Drop Across Filters 

5. Fan Suction Static Pressure 

6. Fan Discharge Static Pressure 

7. Supply Air CFM 

8. Return Air CFM 

9. Outside Air CFM 

10. Supply Air Conditions (DB and WB) 

11. Return Air Conditions (DB and WB) 

12. Outside Air Conditions (DB and WB) 

13. Mixed Entering Air Conditions (DB and WB) 

14. Fan Motor Amps 

15. Duct Connection Sizes - Free Area 

D. Ventilation System 

1. Date 

2. System Number 

3. Room or Area Served 

4. Fan RPM 

5. Total CFM 

6. Fan Suction Static Pressure 

7. Fan Discharge Static Pressure 

8. Motor Amps 

9. Duct Connection Sizes - Free Area 

E. Room Data 


1. Room Number 

2. Supply/Return/Exhaust System Number 

3. Supply/Return/Exhaust CFM at Each Diffuser, Register, or Grill (Identify) 

4. Supply/Return/Exhaust Diffuser, Register, or Grille Size 

5. Duct Connection Sizes - Free Area (Identify) 



SECTION 16010 – GENERAL PROVISIONS - ELECTRICAL 


The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 shall apply to this Section, 

except as herein modified. 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. The work required under this Division shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the 

furnishing, installing and connecting of the systems or items delineated in the following Sections: 

Section 16010 General Provisions - Electrical 

Section 16020 Electrical Demolition 

Section 16031 Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study 

Section 16032 Arc Flash Hazard Study 

Section 16041 Facility Wiring for Mechanical Equipment 

Section 16042 Facility Wiring for Miscellaneous Equipment 

Section 16120 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables 

Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes 

Section 16131 Facility Communications Infrastructure 

Section 16132 Security Systems Infrastructure 

Section 16160 Grounding and Bonding 

Section 16173 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 

Section 16175 Electrical Identification 

Section 16191 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Raceways and Cabling 

Section 16199 Low Voltage Fuses 

Section 16320 12KV Conductors 

Section 16371 12KV-480/277V Secondary Double-Ended Unit Substations 

Section 16405 Wiring Devices 

Section 16410 Enclosed Switches 

Section 16420 Panelboards 

Section 16430 Motor Control Centers 

Section 16440 Low Voltage Transformers 

Section 16450 Power Factor Correction Capacitor Systems 

Section 16460 Packaged Life Safety Engine Generator, 480/277V 

Section 16470 Automatic Transfer Switches, 480/277V 

Section 16501 Lighting Control Devices 

Section 16511 Interior Lighting 

Section 16521 Exterior Lighting 

Section 16600 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm and Detection System 

B. The Division 16 Contractor shall supply, install, test and place into initial operation all equipment 

as noted herein in compliance with the intent of these Specifications. The Division 16 Contractor 

shall supply all documentation and instruction as noted herein in compliance with the intent of 

these Specifications. 

C. The drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed but do not necessarily show all 

junction boxes, conduit fittings, connections, etc. as may be required to meet actual conditions. 

GENERAL PROVISIONS - ELECTRICAL 16010-1


D. In general, circuiting shall be as shown on the drawings. Exact locations of conduit, boxes and 

wiring devices must be determined by the Contractor in the field and coordinated with the other 

trades. The Owner, through the Engineer, reserves the right to move any conduit, box or wiring 

device up to 25 feet before roughing in with no added cost to the Owner. 


A. The Owner will secure and pay for the primary construction permit only. It shall be the 

responsibility of this Contractor to secure and pay for remaining permits, inspections, licenses and 

other service fees and charges for meters and associated devices, and charges for connection to 

outside services as required by governing authorities for work included in this specification, except 

as noted elsewhere here in paragraph 1.2 PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS. 

B. The Contractor shall obtain approval in writing from all applicable Authorities Having Jurisdiction 

over this work to ensure compliance with laws and ordinances in effect. A copy of all such 

approvals shall be included within each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 

1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES, SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Where it is necessary to connect to existing utilities, services, and/or equipment, they have been 

located as accurately as possible from inspection of the building and/or information taken from 

record drawings. Exact location is not guaranteed. The Contractor must inspect such conditions 

and determine exact locations as required. Variations from locations indicated will not be basis for 

additional compensation. 

B. The contractor shall advise the owner in writing not less than 72 hours prior to disturbing any 

existing system or disconnecting or removing any equipment from service. The contractor shall 

submit for the Owner’s approval his proposed progress schedule and procedures for the 

performance of this work, and no work shall be performed until the owner’s approval is secured. 

C. The contractor shall perform work that will interrupt service, or requires taking equipment out of 

service, at times and duration as directed by the owner so as to cause minimum disturbance to the 

system’s operation. 

D. Work shall proceed without interruption and shall be performed by as many workmen and 

equipment as can be efficiently utilized from the time the service is interrupted, or any equipment 

is removed from service, until the system is tested and back in service. All necessary or required 

equipment and materials shall be available at the site (and dedicated for the performance of this 

work) prior to disturbing or disconnecting any existing system. 

1.4 SITE INSPECTION 

A. The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiarized with the locations and conditions 

affecting the corresponding work. No allowance will be granted because of lack of knowledge of 

site conditions. 




1.6 CODES 

A. The Contractor shall guarantee, in writing, all materials and workmanship for a minimum period of 

one year (unless a longer warranty period is indicated in specific specification sections for specific 

types of equipment) from the date of written acceptance by the Owner. 

B. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed for their intended purpose, unless 

otherwise noted. 

C. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the particular trade and licensed as may be 

required. 

D. Shipping, storage and handling of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with 

the manufacturer's instructions regarding both loading, unloading, and storing in clean, dry areas. 

The Contractor shall protect the electrical equipment from damage. Damaged material, whether 

damaged in shipment, storage, handling, installation or testing, shall be repaired or replaced by 

the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. 

E. Any discoloration or damage to any part of the facility or any of its systems or furnishings, due to 

the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. 

A. Install work to comply with all applicable electrical Codes, and other applicable local and state 

Codes, ordinances, restrictions, and all Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 


A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standards referred to herein shall be a 

requirement of these specifications and shall be considered as binding as though herein 

reproduced in full. Unless otherwise stated, the reference standard shall be the current standard 

as of the date of issuance of these specifications. Reference may be made to standards either by 

full name or by abbreviation. The reference standards shall include, but are not necessarily limited 

to the following: 

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 


ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 

FM (FMRC) Factory Mutual 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 

UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

B. Where reference Codes, Standards or guidelines are in conflict, the most stringent shall govern. 



1.8 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS 

A. This facility is located in a seismic zone. All equipment shall be rated for application in a seismic 

zone in accordance with applicable codes and ASCE/SEI 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings 

and Other Structures” . Installation of all electrical equipment shall comply with the manufacturer’s 

recommended methods for seismic zone installation. All electrical equipment shall be seismically 

restrained in accordance with all applicable Codes. 


A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1. 

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions shall be in accordance with Division 1. 


A. Maintain two sets of Contract Documents; i.e., drawings (including the Owner insuring agency 

approved drawings), specifications, addenda, modifications, and submittals at the site in good 

order, and annotated daily to show changes made during the construction process. At the 

conclusion of the project, verify the accuracy of these record drawings and deliver one set to the 

Owner and one set to the Engineer. 

B. Record deviations from the Contract Documents and clearly show deviations on the record 

drawings. These deviations shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 

• Changing homerun designations 

• Modification of any component rating 

• Changing the location of any electrical component shown on the drawings 


A. Upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance by the Owner, provide four complete sets 

of operating and maintenance manuals for all equipment and systems furnished by the Contractor. 

Operating and maintenance manuals shall be in printed form, clearly marked with appropriate 

system or equipment identification, and shall include the following information: 

• List of all equipment installed including manufacturer and model number 

• Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment and systems 

• Test reports 

• Approved drawings and calculations 

• Certifications 

• Contact information for all applicable local servicing agencies 



B. Manuals shall be in loose-leaf form and bound in a heavy binder. The operating manuals shall be 

delivered to the Owner prior to any equipment or systems being placed into operation. 

1.13 INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Prior to acceptance, instruct the Owner's personnel so that they are completely familiar with 

operation and maintenance of equipment. Refer to equipment-specific sections for indications of 

additional instruction/training required. 

B. The Owner's personnel shall be thoroughly versed in the operation and maintenance of all 

equipment and systems prior to such equipment or systems being placed into operation. 

C. On completion of the instruction period, provide written verification to the Engineer as to when the 

instructions were given, the Owner's personnel who attended the instructions, and from whom the 

instructions were given. 

D. The Engineer shall reserve the right to be present during these instructions. 




SECTION 16020 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 


The requirements of 16010 shall apply to this Section, except as herein modified. 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes: Electrical Demolition Work 

1. The demolition scope is to remove or relocate those electrical items and circuits as 

indicated by the Contract Documents. 

2. The locations of existing equipment and circuits are approximated in the Contract 

Documents. Information on locations of, electrical requirements of, and circuits for 

existing equipment is based in whole or in part on record drawings and should not be 

assumed to be 100% accurate. The Division 16 Contractor shall verify all relevant 

electrical information and locations for equipment to be removed or relocated prior to 

initiating demolition and report any discrepancies to the Engineer. 

1.2 CODES AND REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. All demolition work performed shall comply with all Codes and reference Standards listed in 

Section 16010. 


2.1 PRODUCTS 

A. Modifications to relocated or reused equipment shall be made as directed by the Contract 

Documents. All relocated equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. All relocated lighting fixtures 

shall be relamped. 


3.1 All electrical materials that are to be removed shall be removed from the jobsite and be properly disposed 

of by the Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere to all applicable laws and regulations regarding the 

disposal of hazardous materials typically found in equipment such as transformers, fluorescent bulbs, 

batteries and ballasts. The Contractor shall pay any corresponding disposal fees. 

3.2 For electrical equipment or circuits that are to be removed, remove all associated wire and conduit back to 

the corresponding panelboard or other originating device. Label the panelboard breaker as “spare” if no 

circuits remain on it. Maintain the continuity of all remaining circuits. Seal all resulting holes through walls, 

ceilings, floors and electrical enclosures in a manner that upholds the functional integrity of the item being 

sealed. 

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 16020-1


3.3 For electrical equipment or circuits that are to be relocated, the corresponding hardware shall be removed, 

relocated, reinstalled, reconnected, and placed into service, unless otherwise noted. Circuits requiring 

extension shall be extended using material appropriate for the environmental and service conditions. Wire 

shall be upsized, if necessary, so that voltage drop remains within the limits imposed by the latest version 

of the National Electrical Code and any applicable Energy Codes. 


ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 16020-2


16031 – ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and over-current protective device 

coordination studies, and the setting of these devices. The studies shall demonstrate adequate 

short-circuit interrupting and withstand capability as well as proper coordination of protective 

devices in order to protect equipment and conductors against fault currents and sustained overload 

conditions. 

B. The study shall be comprehensive and shall include all protective devices starting with the 12KV 

portion of the new unit substation in the new Sort Building and continuing down through all 

components of the low voltage (less than 600V) distribution systems. 


A. The Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study for the Main 12KV Distribution Switchgear in 

the generator building is being supplied under the scope of work of the separate contract for the 

Security Screening Building / Electrical Infrastructure / Metroplex Renovations. That switchgear 

feeds the new unit substation in the new Sort Building. 


A. IEEE 242 - Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial 

Power Systems. 

B. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. 


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. 

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, 

certifying compliance with IEEE 399. 

C. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 

2. Coordination-study report. 

3. Equipment evaluation report. 

4. Device setting report. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 

ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 16031 - 1



1. Submit approved coordination study as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

Record and make note of any modifications made and submit. 

2. Submit completed device setting report. 

A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software 

algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. 

Manual calculations are not acceptable. 

B. Contractor shall perform the study prior to the installation of any equipment. Study shall be of the 

brand, type, and size of actual equipment, typical values are not acceptable. Qualified personnel 

with experience in preparing time current coordination studies shall perform the study. Study shall 

be sealed by a professional electrical engineer, licensed in the state of California. 

C. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. 

D. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals. 


2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE 

A. Computer Software Developers: Commercially available subject to compliance with requirements, 

companies offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include: 

1. CYME International, Inc. 

2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 

3. Electrical Systems Analysis, Inc. 

4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. 

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS 

A. Comply with IEEE 399. 

B. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic 

curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings 

and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices. 



A. Examine Project over-current protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution 

system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 



B. Conduct field survey to assess protective characteristics of existing protective devices included 

within the scope of this study. 

C. Proceed with coordination study only after all new equipment furnished by the contractor as been 

submitted. 

3.2 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY 

A. Source Impedance: The Port of Oakland has advised that 10,000A short circuit current potential is 

available at the 12KV level from substation SS8. Substation SS8 is immediately adjacent to the 

Security Screening Building at the intersection of Air Cargo Way and Sally Ride Way. Port 

substation SS8 feeds Fed Ex’s Main 12KV Distribution Switchgear in the generator building, which 

in turn feeds to the new unit substation in the new Sort Building. Refer to the Electrical 

Infrastructure electrical drawings for the single-line diagram of the 12KV distribution system. 

B. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current. 

Summarize results in report. 

3.3 COORDINATION STUDY 

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study: 

1. Product Data for over-current protective devices. Use equipment designation tags that 

are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, over-current protective device 

submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 

2. Electrical distribution system one-line diagrams. 

3. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with 

tag numbers on diagram: 

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent 

starting and stopping. 

b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers. 

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of 

start, and thermal-damage curve. 

d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's over-current protective devices. 

e. Special over-current protective device settings or types stipulated by utility 

company. 

f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. 

g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, 

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time 

adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers. 

h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment 

range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio 

for over-current relays. 

i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting 

rating in amperes rms symmetrical. 

B. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-current study and 

approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399. 



C. Comply with California Electrical Code for over-current protection of circuit elements and devices. 

D. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals. 

E. Transformer Primary Over-current Protective Devices: 

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: 

a. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is 

specified for that transformer. 

b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by 

unusual loading or emergency conditions. 

2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00 “Guide for Loading of Dry- 

Type Distribution and Power Transformers”, for fault currents. 

F. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32- 

382 “Short Circuit Characteristics of Insulated Cable” , ICEA P-45-482 “Short-Circuit Performance 

of Metallic Shields and Sheaths of Insulated Cable”, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. 

Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment 

grounding conductors, and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. 

G. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination 

study: 

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Over-current Protective Devices: 

a. Device tag. 

b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup 

values. 

c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous 

settings. 

d. Fuse-current rating and type. 

e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings. 

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of over-current protective devices to 

achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists 

between series devices, including power utility company's upstream devices. Show the 

following specific information: 

a. Device tag. 

b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. 

c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. 

d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. 

e. Cable damage curves. 

f. Transformer inrush points. 

g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point. 

h. Trip curves for circuit breakers. 

i. Motor overload curves. 

j. Motor starting curves. 

k. Protective relays. 



3. Completed data sheets for setting of over-current protective devices. 

3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING 

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of electrical 

distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to assist in setting of over-current protective devices 

within equipment. 

B. Perform the following device setting and prepare reports: 


1. After installing over-current protective devices and during energizing process of electrical 

distribution system, perform the following: 

a. Verify that over-current protective devices meet parameters used in studies. 

b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results. 

c. Prepare Device Setting Report, include as a minimum: Equipment/Panel Name, 

Device Name and Type, Device Model No., Device Setting Value(s), Fuse type 

and speed, Date and Time, Initials and signature of person setting each device, 

Initials and signature of Owners representative witnessing device setting. 



SECTION 16032 - ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. Provide an Arc Flash Hazard Study for the entire electrical distribution system in the new Sort 

Building. The intent of the Arc Flash Hazard Study is to determine the hazards that exist at each 

major piece of electrical equipment. This includes substation switchgear, switchboards, 

panelboards, motor control equipment, generators, automatic transfer switches, and transformers. 

The study shall include creation of Arc Flash Hazard Warning labels. These labels serve as a 

guide to assist technicians and others in the selection of proper Personal Protective Equipment 

when working around exposed and energized conductors. The electrical contractor shall install the 

labels. 

B. Perform the Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study specified under Section 16031 for the 

electrical distribution system before performing the Arc Flash Hazard Study. The Arc Flash Hazard 

Study shall consider operation during normal conditions, emergency power conditions, and any 

other operations which could result in maximum arc flash hazard. 


A. The Arc Flash Hazard Study for the Main 12KV Distribution Switchgear in the generator building is 

being supplied under the scope of work of the separate contract for the Security Screening Building 

/ Electrical Infrastructure / Metroplex Renovations. That switchgear feeds the new unit substation 

in the new Sort Building. 

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. The study shall be prepared under the supervision of and stamped and signed by a Professional 

Engineer licensed in the State of California. 


A. The contractor shall submit the Arc Flash Hazard Study and illustrations of the arc flash warning 

labels at least fifteen days prior to energizing the electrical equipment. 

B. Submit six (6) copies of the study. 

ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 16032 - 1



2.1 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 

A. Perform an Arc Flash Hazard Study after the Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study has 

been completed. 

B. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer software package. Pertinent data, rationale 

employed, and assumptions in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory 

remarks of the study. 

C. The study shall be in accordance with applicable NFPA 70E “Standard for Electrical Safety in the 

Workplace”, OSHA 29-CFR Part 1910 Sub Part S, and IEEE 1584 “Guide for Performing Arc Flash 

Hazard Calculations” standards. 

D. Determine the following: 

1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary 

2. Limited Approach Boundary 

3. Restricted Boundary 

4. Prohibited Boundary 

5. Incident Energy Level 

6. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class 

7. Type of Fire Rated Clothing 

E. Produce an Arc Flash Warning label listing items D1-D7 above. Also include the bus name and 

voltage. Labels shall be printed in color and be printed on adhesive backed labels. 

F. Produce Bus Detail sheets that list the items D1-D7 from the above and the following additional 

items: 

1. Bus Name 

2. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type, and Settings 

3. Bus Line to Line Voltage 

G. Produce Arc Flash Evaluation Summary Sheet listing the following additional items: 

1. Bus Name 

2. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type, and Settings 

3. Bus Line to Line Voltage 

4. Bus Bolted Fault 

5. Protective Device Bolted Fault Current 

6. Arcing Fault Current 

7. Protective Device Trip/Delay Time 

8. Breaker Opening Time 

9. Solidly Grounded Column 

10. Equipment Type 

11. Gap 

12. Arc Flash Boundary 

13. Working Distance 

14. Incident Energy 




3.1 ANALYSIS 

15. Required Protective Fire Rated Clothing Type and Class 

A. Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculations and highlight 

any equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes an abnormally high incident energy 

calculation. Propose approaches to reduce the energy levels. Proposed major corrective 

modifications will be taken under advisement by the Engineer, and the Contractor will be given 

further instructions. 

3.2 REPORT 

A. The results of the power study shall be summarized in a final report. The report shall include the 

following sections: 


1. Introduction, executive summary and recommendations, assumptions, reduced copy of 

the one line drawing. 

2. Arc Flash Evaluations Summary Spreadsheet 

3. Bus Detail Sheets 

4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels. 



SECTION 16041 - FACILITY WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 



1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section describes electrical work for the mechanical equipment furnished under 

Division 15. 


A. The mechanical equipment will be furnished and installed under Division 15, unless 

otherwise noted. Refer to the Division 15 Contract Documents for the exact locations of 

mechanical equipment. 

1.3 POWER WIRING 

A. Power wiring shall be supplied and installed to all mechanical equipment as shown and/or 

scheduled on the electrical drawings. This equipment may include, but is not necessarily 

limited to the following HVAC, plumbing and fire protection items: 

1. Air conditioner systems 

2. Make-up air units 

3. Rooftop units 

4. Exhaust fans 

5. Supply air fans 

6. Air circulation fans 

7. Enthalpy control panels 

8. Gas monitoring panels 

9. VVT control panels 

10. Motor operated dampers 

11. Unit heaters 

12. Wall insert heaters 

13. Packaged terminal heat pumps 

14. Infrared heaters 

15. Baseboard heaters 

16. Air compressors 

17. Air dryers 

18. Water coolers 

19. Water heaters 

20. Pumps 

21. Louvers 

FACILITY WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 16041.1


1.4 CONTROL WIRING 

A. Control wiring for the mechanical equipment is not in the scope of the Division 16 

Contractor, unless otherwise noted. 


FACILITY WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 16041.2


SECTION 16042 - FACILITY WIRING FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 



1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section describes electrical work for miscellaneous equipment furnished under 

Divisions 1 through 14 or furnished by the Owner. 


A. The miscellaneous equipment referenced herein will be furnished and installed under 

other Divisions or by the Owner, unless otherwise noted. 

1.3 POWER WIRING 

A. Power wiring shall be supplied and installed to all miscellaneous equipment as shown 

and/or scheduled on the electrical drawings. This equipment may include, but is not 

necessarily limited to the following items: 

1.4 CONTROL WIRING 

1. Overhead doors 

2. Door operators 

3. Material handling equipment 

4. Data processing equipment 

5. Maintenance equipment 

6. Communications equipment 

7. Security equipment 

8. Uninterruptible power supplies 

9. Gate operators 

A. Control wiring for powered door operators shall be supplied and installed by the Division 

16 Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the corresponding manufacturers. 

All other control wiring for the miscellaneous equipment is not in the scope of the Division 

16 Contractor, unless otherwise noted. 


FACILITY WIRING FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 16042.1


SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V AND LESS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70 “Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of 

Electrical Energy”. 

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 “Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the 

Distribution of Electrical Energy”. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS 

A. All conductors shall be copper. Solid for No. 8 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 6 AWG and larger. 

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION 

A. All conductors shall be THHN-THWN unless noted otherwise. All underground conductors shall have an 

“oil and gasoline resistant” listing. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not 

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling 

tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not 

damage cables or raceway. 

LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1


D. All wire and cable shall be installed in raceway unless specifically noted otherwise. 

E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A/B “Wire 

Connectors”. 

G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better 

mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 

H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. 

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with 

requirements in Division 16 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Raceways and Cabling." 

3.5 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fireresistance 

rating of assembly. 


LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2


SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 


2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit: ANSI C80.1 “American National Standard For Electrical Rigid 

Steel Conduit (ERSC)” 

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6 “American National Standard For Electrical Intermediate 

Metal Conduit (EIMC)” 

C. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3 “American National Standard For Steel Electrical Metal 

Tubing (EMT)” 

D. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Zinc-coated steel. 

E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight) and EMT: NEMA FB 1 “Fittings, Cast 

Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable” ; listed for type and 

size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. EMT shall utilize 

steel compression fittings. Rigid and intermediate steel conduit shall utilize threaded rigid steel conduit 

fittings. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING 

A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 “Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit” , Type EPC- 

40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC): UL 1660 “Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit” 

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3 “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and 

Tubing”, match to conduit or tubing type and material. 

D. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B “Conduit., Tubing and Cable Fittings” 

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1


2.3 METAL WIREWAYS 


Cooper B-Line, Inc., Hoffman, Square D; Schneider Electric, or equal. 

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down 

straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. 

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type in dry areas, flanged and gasketed type where exposed to moisture. 

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1 “ Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and 

Box Supports” 

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1 “ Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for 

Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable” , ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, rectangular. 

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1 “ Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, 

Covers and Box Supports” 

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1 “ Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit 

Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable” , galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. 

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Max)”, Type 1, 

with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. Metal Enclosures: Steel, 

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

G. Cabinets: 

1. NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Max)”, Type 1 unless otherwise noted, 

galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's 

standard enamel. 

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 

3. Key latch to match panelboards. 

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 


3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 



1. Exposed Aboveground Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel where less than 10’ above finished floor. 

10’ or higher above finished floor: rigid galvanized steel for conduit sizes 2” and smaller, 

intermediate metal conduit for sizes larger than 2”. EMT with compression fittings may be used in 

dry areas within the roof structure. 

2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, with PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel elbows. 

All conduit transitions from below-grade to above-grade shall be made with PVC-coated rigid 

galvanized steel conduit. 

3. Concealed Conduit Aboveground: Unless noted otherwise, EMT with compression fittings. 

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric 

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts 

Max)”, Type 12 in dry areas, Type 4 in wet areas. 

B. Minimum Raceway Size, above grade: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size, below grade: 1” (25mm) trade size. 


A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." 

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run. 

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect 

conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. 

H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 

200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. 

I. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed 

sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover 

plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings where 

required by California Electrical Code. 

J. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 36 inches (915 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment 

subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 

K. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install 

box flush with surface of wall. 

L. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 



3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT 

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as 

specified in Division 2 

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 

3. After installing conduit and encasement, backfill and compact. 

4. All underground conduit shall be concrete-encased. Concrete encasement shall have red dye. 

5. Place utility markers above all underground conduits in accordance with specification section 

02605. 

3.4 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fireresistance 

rating of assembly. 




SECTION 16131 - FACILITY COMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE 



1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section describes the electrical work for the facility communications infrastructure. 


A. All equipment and wiring for the telephone system, intercom system, computer networking, cable 

TV and any other types of facility communications systems will be supplied and installed by the 

Owner, unless noted otherwise. 


2.1 TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS 

A. Telephone equipment backboards shall be ¾” plywood, painted, sized and located as noted on the 

drawings. 

2.2 FACILITY COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT SYSTEM 

A. Outlet boxes for wall outlets shall be 2-1/2" deep, and ganged where located in close proximity to 

other communications outlet boxes or receptacles. 

B. Cover all communications wall outlets with blank wall plates. Wall plates shall be the same as 

specified for receptacles in Section 16130, only with a blank cover. 

C. For each communications outlet box shown or noted on the drawings, supply and install a ¾” 

conduit extended up to above the ceiling in finished areas or to the roof steel in unfinished non- 

Sort areas, or to a wall location at the perimeter of the Sort equipment area that is accessible by 

manlift equipment if outlet box is located in a Sort equipment area. Install an insulated bushing on 

each conduit. Install a pull cord into each conduit, as per Section 16130, to facilitate future cable 

installation. 


3.2 CLEANING 

A. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left free of dust, dirt, grease, fingerprints, and 

accumulated debris. Equipment shall be touched up where scratched with matching paint. 


FACILITY COMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE 16131.1


SECTION 16132 - SECURITY SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE 



1.1 SCOPE 

A. This Section describes the electrical work for the security systems infrastructure. 


A. All equipment and wiring for the security systems will be supplied and installed by the 

Owner or other Divisions, unless noted otherwise. 


2.1 SECURITY SYSTEM OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT SYSTEM 

A. Outlet boxes for security equipment shall be 2-1/2” deep and located as noted on the 

drawings. 

B. Cover all security system outlet boxes with blank cover plates. Cover plates shall be the 

same as specified for receptacles in Section 16130, only with a blank cover. 

C. For each security system outlet box shown or noted on the drawings, supply and install a 

¾” conduit extended up to above the ceiling in finished areas or to the roof steel in non- 

Sort unfinished areas, or to a wall location at the perimeter of the Sort equipment area that 

is accessible by man-lift equipment if the outlet box is located in a Sort equipment area. 

Install an insulated bushing on each conduit. Install a pull cord into each conduit, as per 

Section 16130, to facilitate future cable installation. 


3.2 CLEANING 

A. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left free of dust, dirt, grease, fingerprints, 

and accumulated debris. Equipment shall be touched up where scratched with matching 

paint. 


SECURITY SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE 16132.1


SECTION 16160 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. 


A. Comply with UL 467 “Grounding and Bonding Equipment” 


2.1 CONDUCTORS 

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable 

Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3 “Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire” 

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8 “Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper 

2.2 CONNECTORS 

A. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type. 

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials 

being joined and installation conditions. 

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. 


3.1 APPLICATIONS 

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG 

and larger unless otherwise indicated. 

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16160 - 1 

“


B. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with 

isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of 

green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors 

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all circuits and as required by all applicable code. 

B. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated 

equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit 

conductors. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or 

required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, 

impact, or damage. 

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless 


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise 

indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from 

each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to 

the service grounding electrode conductor. 

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where 

routed through short lengths of conduit. 

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any 

adjacent parts. 

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so 

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is 

required, use a bolted clamp. 

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from 

building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to 

building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp 

connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. 

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16160 - 2


Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of 

fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. 

Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test 

for compliance with requirements. 

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical 

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is 

specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Make tests 

at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 

B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds acceptable values, notify Engineer 

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 


GROUNDING AND BONDING 16160 - 3


SECTION 16173 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis 

by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and 

its contents. 

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and 

connected systems and components. 

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or 

imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 


2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 “Metal Framing”, factory-fabricated components for 

field assembly. 


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

g. Wesanco, Inc. 

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4 “Metal 

Framing”. 

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4 “Metal 

Framing”. 

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16173 - 1


B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, 

designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M “Standard Specification for 

Carbon Structural Steel” , steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports 

to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, 

steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and 

building materials where used. 

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened 

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported 

loads and building materials in which used. 

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; 

complying with MFMA-4 “Metal Framing” or MSS SP-58 “Pipe Hangars and Supports”. 

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 “Pipe Hangars and Supports”, 

type suitable for attached structural element. 

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325 “.Standard 

Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength” 

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of 

supported equipment. 


3.1 APPLICATION 

A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, 

and rigid galvanized steel conduit as required by California Electrical Code. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 

inch (6 mm) in diameter. 

B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, 

sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design 

load limits. 

C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38mm) 

and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings 

and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1 “Standard Practice of Good 

Workmanship”, conduit and tubing may be supported by openings through structure members, as 

permitted in California Electrical Code. 

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be 

adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design 

load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg) . 

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical 

items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise 

indicated by code: 

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners 

on solid masonry units. 

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers 

and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do 

not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) 

thick. 

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M “Structural Welding Code – 

Steel”, with lock washers and nuts or beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying 

with MSS SP-69 “Pipe Hangars and Supports”. 

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, 

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and 

other devices on slotted-channel racks or ¾” plywood sheets attached to substrate by means that 

meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support 

and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

3.4 PAINTING 

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after 

erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair 

paint to comply with ASTM A 780 “Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- 

Dip Galvanized Coatings” . 




SECTION 16175 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Identification of power and control cables. 

2. Identification for conductors. 

3. Underground-line warning tape. 

4. Warning labels and signs. 

5. Equipment identification labels in accordance with FedEx EPN (Equipment Piece Numbering) 

requirements. 

6. Miscellaneous identification products. 


A. Comply with FedEx EPN requirements. 

B. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label 

printers, shall comply with UL 969 “Marking and Labeling Systems”. 


2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter 

sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 

to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. 

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE 

A. Tape: 

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate 

underground electrical and communications utility lines. 

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to 

acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16175 - 1


2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 

A. Comply with California Electrical Code. 

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured 

for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required 

for application. 

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) 

galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Apply equipment identification labels in accordance with FedEx EPN requirements. Labels shall be 

stenciled or white vinyl nameplates or printed stickers as per the EPN guidelines. EPN identifications for 

major electrical equipment are shown on the electrical drawings. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws 

with nuts and flat and lock washers. 



A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without 

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods 

recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the 

location and substrate. 

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line 

warning tape directly above line, below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines 

installed in a common duct bank exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 



F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation 

and paint application. 

G. Install utility markers above all underground conduit in accordance with specification section 02605. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE 

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, 

manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for 

ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities 

having jurisdiction permit. 

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Black. 

2) Phase B: Red. 

3) Phase C: Blue. 

4) Neutral: White 

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Brown. 

2) Phase B: Orange. 

3) Phase C: Yellow. 

4) Neutral: White 

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum 

distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are 

made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate 

bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. 

B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal 

connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. 

Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by 

manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation 

and Maintenance Manual. 




SECTION 16191 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 

2. Grout. 

3. Silicone sealants. 


2.1 SLEEVES 

A. Wall Sleeves: 

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- 

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless” , Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain 

ends. 

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, 

with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 

0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for 

screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 

2.2 GROUT 

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 

2. Minimum Metal Thickness: 

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no 

side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) . 

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or 

more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) . 

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or 

floors. 

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout 

(Nonshrink)”, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 16191 - 1


C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa) , 28-day compressive strength. 

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 

2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS 

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade 

indicated below. 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that 

are not fire rated. 

2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of 

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various 

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in 

place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 


3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and 

Walls: 

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: 

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate 

for size, depth, and location of joint. 

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between 

sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while 

curing. 

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway 

unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install 

sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of 

walls. Deburr after cutting. 

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above 

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. 

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 

C. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type 

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 



D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical 

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve 

for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

E. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow 

for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal 

system. 




SECTION 16199 – LOW VOLTAGE FUSES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in power and control circuits. 


A. Comply with NEMA FU 1 “Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses” for cartridge fuses. 




1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 

2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 

4. Littelfuse, Inc. 

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES 

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1 “Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses”, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage 

ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 


3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS 

A. Transformer Primary Circuits: Time delay. 

B. Motor Branch Circuits: Dual element time delay. 

C. Other Circuits: Fast-acting, unless noted otherwise. 


A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. 

LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES 16199 - 1


B. Fuses shall be rated for the applied voltage. 

C. All power distribution circuit fuses shall be current-limiting and be rated for 200,000A, interrupting 

minimum. 

D. A minimum of three (3) spare fuses or 10%, whichever is greater, of each size and type fuse provided 

shall be supplied to the Owner. 


LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES 16199 - 2


SECTION 16320 – 12KV CONDUCTORS 


The requirements of Section 16010 shall apply to this section except as herein modified. 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section describes the electrical conductors for the 12KV system. 


A. Product data: For each type of product specified. 


A. All electrical equipment covered by this specification shall meet all applicable standards of ANSI, 

NEMA and IEEE. 

B. The service equipment shall meet applicable requirements of the electric service provider. The 

facility is located in an area served by the Port of Oakland. 

C. Each reel of 15KV cable shall be factory-tested in accordance with ICEA and UL standards. A 

certified copy of the factory test is required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cable used for the 12KV circuits shall be 15 KV power cable as defined on the drawings. All cable 

applied at >600V shall be manufactured by Kerite. 



A. 15KV Cable 

1. Where termination, connection or tap hardware is not defined on the drawings, 

utilize hardware by Cooper, Elastimold or approved equal that is rated and 

intended for the application. 

2. After installation, all 15KV cables shall be properly identified by a durable nonmetallic 

tag in each manhole. Each tag shall list the feeder identification number 

and be secured with plastic tie wraps. 

12KV CONDUCTORS 16320-1


3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. All installed 15KV circuits shall be fully tested and left in normal operating condition by the 

Division 16 contractor. 

B. 15KV Cable 

1. All 15KV cable installations, including splices and terminations, shall be tested by 

a non-destructive dielectric direct current test on the insulation of the cable 

system. All tests shall be made by qualified field technicians especially trained for 

dielectric testing and interpretation of results and regularly engaged in dielectric 

testing and shall be an independent organization having no affiliation with the 

construction contractor. 

2. The maximum cable dielectric test voltages (direct voltage) shall be in accordance 

with the following tabulation: 

15KV CABLES 

Type Of Cable Being Tested Maximum DC Test Voltage 

New cable 55KV 

Old cable 20KV 

New to new spliced cable 55KV 

New to old spliced cable 20KV 

3. The test procedure for new cables shall be as follows: 

a. Megger Test - to ensure basic cable integrity 

b. Step Voltage Tests: In the step voltage tests, voltage shall be applied in 

equal consecutive steps, minimum of ten steps. Voltage shall be held for 

one minute or longer as required to allow for stabilization of the 

capacitance and absorption currents. Current readings shall be taken 

and recorded at the end of each period for each voltage step. The 

voltage shall not be increased or decreased during the one minute 

specified. After the maximum voltage is reached and the initial readings 

are recorded, the maximum voltage shall be held for an additional ten 

minutes. Current readings shall then be taken and recorded each minute 

during this ten minute period. 

c. Cable test results: 

(1) All readings shall be recorded and plotted on Kilovoltmegohm 

paper. 




(2) Upon reviewing the results, the tester shall submit the findings 

and render a written summary as to the conditions of the 

installation. 

(3) Tester shall make a determination as soon as the testing is 

complete as to whether or not the system should be energized. 

(4) If at any time the test procedure is stopped due to excessive 

readings, the installation shall be checked to locate problems and 

recommend corrective measures before. 



SECTION 16371 – 12 KV – 480/277V SECONDARY DOUBLE-ENDED UNIT SUBSTATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes the 12KV-480/277 double-ended unit substation; and includes all labor, materials 

equipment and services necessary for and incidental to furnishing the newly manufactured substation and 

internal control systems as required for the substation to function as per the intent of these specifications. 

B. The substation shall be comprised of incoming 12KV primary sections, substation transformers, 480/277V 

secondary main-tie-main sections with distribution, and 480/277V circuit breaker connections for the fuel 

cell power generation and photovoltaic power generation systems. 

C. Substation shall include a control system to provide for automatic source transfer control on the 480/277V 

main-tie-main electrically-operated breaker system. 


A. Seismic performance: The substation will withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to ASCE/SEI 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”. 

1. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the 

device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the 

seismic event. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product within the substation, including but not necessarily limited to the 

following: 

1. 12KV fused switch sections 

2. Lightning arrestors 

3. Substation transformers 

4. Substation enclosure and bus assemblies, include all ratings 

5. 480/277V main breaker and tie breaker sections 

6. 480/277V distribution sections 

7. All short circuit current interrupting and withstand ratings 

8. All circuit breakers, including trip units and accessories 

9. All fuses 

10. Metering systems, including metering transformers 

11. Control system for automatic source transfer control, including sequences of operation 

12. Anti-condensation heater system 

13. Nameplate schedule 

14. One-line diagram 

15. Component list 

12 KV – 480/277V SECONDARY DOUBLE-ENDED UNIT SUBSTATIONS 16371-1


B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, wiring diagrams and location and size of each field 

connection. Include complete schematics for metering and control circuits. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that the substation will withstand 

seismic forces. Include the following: 

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled 

components or on calculation. 

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the 


seismic event." 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe 

mounting and anchorage provisions. 



D. Time-current coordination info and all associated info as needed for Electrical Protective Device 

Coordination Study and the Arc Flash Hazard Study 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 “National 

Electrical Code”, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked 

for intended use. 

B. Comply with IEEE C2 “National Electrical Safety Code” and California Electrical Code. 


A. Environmental Conditions: Substation shall withstand the following environmental conditions without 

mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 

3. Altitude: Sea level. 


A. Provide all equipment and component information as needed for the Electrical Protective Device 

Coordination Study (refer to Division 16 Section 16031 “Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study”) 

and the Arc Flash Hazard Study (refer to Division 16 Section 16032 “Arc Flash Hazard Study”). 

1.7 WARRANTY 



A. Provide warranty to Fed Ex. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace components of substation and 

associated auxiliary components that fail in materials, performance or workmanship within specified 

warranty period of no less than one year. Warranty shall cover all parts, software, labor, travel and living 

cost for manufacturer’s service personnel. Warranty period shall not begin until written acceptance by the 

Owner. Written acceptance by the Owner will not occur until the system demonstrates successful operation 

with actual Owner’s equipment. 


2.1 SUBSTATION MANUFACTURERS 


1. Eaton Electrical Inc 

2. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 

3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

B. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the 

specified ratings, features and functions or that otherwise do not comply with the intent of the contract 

documents. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these requirements in their entirety. 

C. Substation manufacturer shall provide all equipment with a practical layout, consistent with good 

engineering design practices. 

D. Available substation space in the Sort Building’s main electrical room is limited and constrained. Supply a 

substation that occupies a footprint no larger than that shown on the plans. 

2.2 SUBSTATION GENERAL PROVISIONS 

A. Indoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly. 

1. Rated NEMA 1 

2. Aisleless Construction: Full-height doors 

B. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color, including under surfaces treated 

with corrosion-resistant undercoating. 

C. Warning signage: Provide warning/hazard signage on all substation sections as required by all applicable 

Codes and in accordance with good industry practice. 

D. All labels and warning signage shall be firmly held in place by mechanical means and shall not rely solely 

on adhesive to be held in place. 

E. Provide suitable means near the top and bottom of each section to ensure adequate ventilation for all 

equipment within. 

F. Provide thermostatically-controlled anti-condensation heaters powered from an external 120V power source 

as indicated on the drawings. 



G. All doors shall have provisions for padlocking. 

2.3. 12KV SECTIONS 

A. Provide freestanding, floor-mounted, dead-front, dead-rear sections with ratings as follows: 

1. 12.0KV nominal voltage, 3-phase, 3-wire plus ground, 60Hz 

2. 600A minimum (continuous) copper bus 

3. 15KV maximum voltage 

4. 95KV BIL rating 

5. 18KA short circuit RMS current rating 

6. 500MVA nominal three-phase 

B. Enclosed air-interrupter primary switch: 

1. Three pole, single throw, dead front, metal enclosed, with quick-make, quick-break manual stored 

energy operator, with fuses mounted on a single frame complying with IEEE C37.20.3 “Standard for 

Metal Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. Operating handle shall be removable. 

2. Key interlocking system to prevent fuse access door from being opened unless switch is open. 

3. Phase Barriers: Located between blades of each phase, designed for easy removal, allows visual 

inspection of switch components when barrier is in place. 

4. Window: Permits viewing switch-blade positions when door is closed. 

5. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test, inspection, 

maintenance, and operation. Include fuse-handling tool as recommended by switchgear manufacturer. 

6. Fuses: Comply with the following: 

a. Current-limiting type, rated for not less than 50-kA RMS symmetrical current-interrupting capacity. 

b. Indicator integral with each fuse to show when it has blown. 

7. Switch incoming terminals shall be compression type, sized to accept medium voltage cable up to 500 

MCM. 

C. Sections shall be fitted with infrared viewing windows located to allow non-invasive, closed panel infrared 

inspection of all bus and bus connections. Provide infrared viewing windows as follows: 

1. Fluke CLKT C-Range Quadraband, or approved equal. 

2. Engineered and tested to withstand electric arcs up to 50KA for 30 cycles. 

3. UL-certified for type 3/12 environments 

4. Self-grounding 

5. Protected against moisture degradation 

6. Compatible with the following types of thermographers: 

a. Shortwave infrared 

b. Midwave infrared 

c. Longwave infrared 

d. Ultraviolet capable 



e. Visual capable 

f. Fusion capable 

2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER SECTIONS 

A. Description: Liquid-filled, two-winding, secondary unit substation transformer complying with 

IEEE C57.12.00 “Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating 

Transformers” and UL 1062 “Unit Substations”. 

B. KVA Rating: 3000 KVA. 

C. Voltage: Delta - wye configuration. Input – 12KV; Output – 480/277V, three phase, four wire. (Supplier to 

confirm primary voltage of incoming electrical service prior to release of order.) 

D. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, edible-seed-oil based, and listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing 

Laboratory acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as complying with California Electrical Code 

requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to ASTM D 92 “Standard Test 

Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Method”. Liquid shall be readily and completely 

biodegradable per EPA OPPTS 835.3100 “Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation” and nontoxic. The fluid shall be 

non-bioaccumulating. The fluid shall be Factory Mutual Approved and shall be a UL Classified Transformer 

Fluid, Envirotemp FR3 or approved equal. 

E. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg C ambient 

temperature. 

F. Basic Impulse Level: 95 kV. 

G. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5% taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage; with 

externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and padlock hasp. 

H. Cooling System: Liquid cooled 

I. Impedance: 5.75% percent. 

J. Copper bus connections for connection to incoming primary switch and secondary distribution section. 

K. Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers shall have 

a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated, low-voltage, neutral 

bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional accessories: 

1. Liquid-level gage. 

2. Pressure-vacuum gage. 

3. Liquid temperature indicator. 

4. Drain and filter valves. 

5. Pressure relief device. 

2.5 SECONDARY 480/277V SECTIONS 

A. Secondary Bus 



1. The secondary bus bars shall be tin-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all 

three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on ANSI standard 

temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). 

2. Provide a full capacity neutral bus. 

3. A copper ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall 

extend the entire length of the switchgear. The ground bus short-time withstand rating shall meet that 

of the largest circuit breaker within the assembly. 

B. Wiring/Terminations 

1. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchgear shall be furnished as 

required. Control components mounted within the assembly shall be suitably marked for identification 

corresponding to the appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. 

2. Provide a front accessible, isolated vertical wireway for routing of factory and field wiring. Factory 

provisions shall be made for securing field wiring without the need for adhesive wire anchors. 

3. Front access to all circuit breaker secondary connection points shall be provided for ease of 

troubleshooting and connection to external field connections without the need of removing the circuit 

breaker for access. 

4. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. 

Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the 

drawings. 

C. Main and Tie Circuit Breakers 

1. Main and tie circuit breakers shall be drawout type, electrically operated. All closing shall be 

electrically supervised. The main and tie circuit breakers shall NOT have any means to manually close 

that would bypass the electrical interlocks. Under no conditions shall both main breakers and the tie 

breaker be closed concurrently. Manual closing shall be possible only through a control switch that 

acts on the electrical operator. 

2. The case of the circuit breaker shall be a polyester thermoset material providing high dielectric 

strength. 

3. All circuit breaker operating mechanisms are to be two-step, fully-stored energy devices for quickmake, 

quick-break operation with a maximum of a five-cycle closing time. Open-close-open cycle shall 

be possible without recharging. Motor operator shall automatically charge when circuit breaker is 

closed. 

4. Current-carrying components shall be completely isolated from the accessory mounting area and 

double insulated from the operator with accessory cover in place. 

5. Padlocking provisions shall be furnished to receive up to three padlocks when circuit breaker is in the 

disconnected position, positively preventing unauthorized closing of the circuit breaker contacts. 



6. Located on the face of the circuit breaker shall be indicators to show the position of the circuit breaker 

contacts, status of the closing springs, and circuit breaker position in the cell. An indicator shall show 

“charged – not OK to close” if closing springs are charged but circuit breaker is not ready to close. 

Circuit breaker racking system must have positive stops at the connected, test, disconnected and 

withdrawn positions. 

7. Secondary wiring shall be front accessible. 

8. Circuit breakers shall provide long service life. The 4000 A frames must be certified to 5000 operations 

without maintenance. 

9. Circuit breaker trip system shall be an electronic trip unit with functions of adjustable long-time pickup 

and delay, short-time pickup and delay, instantaneous, and ground-fault pickup and delay. Trip unit 

shall be true RMS current sensing. 

10. Electronic trip unit shall be UL Listed and field replaceable. 

11. Electronic trip units shall have internal metering capability. 

12. Electronic trip units shall have network communications ability for remote monitoring and configuration 

13. The main and tie breakers shall be of the same type and rating and shall be interchangeable 

D. Secondary Feeder Circuit Breakers 

1. All protective secondary devices shall be molded case circuit breakers. 

2. All breakers shall be UL listed for application in their intended enclosures. 

3. Where indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker trip system shall be an electronic trip unit with 

functions of adjustable long-time pickup and delay, short-time pickup and delay, instantaneous, and 

ground-fault pickup and delay. Trip unit shall be true RMS current sensing. 

2.6 METERING 

A. Multifunction Digital Metering Monitor: Eaton Xpert 2270 series meter, or Square D Powerlogic PM820 series 

meter, or equivalent by General Electric. Supply with all accessories needed for a fully functional networkconnected 

installation. 

2.7 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 

A. Provide all potential (voltage) transformers and current transformers as needed for metering as indicated in 

the contract documents. 

1. All current transformers shall be wired through shorting-type terminal blocks. All current transformer 

current loop terminations shall be made with ring-type terminations. 

2. Burden and accuracy of all instrument transformers shall be consistent will all connected devices. 



3. Potential transformers shall be supplied through current-limiting fuses. 

2.8 CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. Control circuits: 120 volts, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control power transformer. 

B. Control power sources for electrically operated circuit breakers: Control power transformers, with interlocking 

relays, connected to the line side of each main circuit breaker. Provide 120 volt secondaries connected 

through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme that will prevent the two 

power sources from being concurrently connected to the control system and from being connected together. 

C. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer 

and fuses for protection of control circuits. 

D. Control Wiring: Factory-installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors 

for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between 

shipping units. 

E. For each electrically operated circuit breaker, provide circuit breaker electrical trip lockout with amber LED 

light indication. 

F. For each electrically operated circuit breaker, provide LED opened and closed indicators. 

G. Automatic Source Transfer Control System 

1. The substation shall be provided with an automatic/manual control system that shall provide for control of 

the two main circuit breakers and the tie circuit breaker in order to provide an open transition control 

sequence for providing power through the switchboard in the event of a loss of either of the main power 

sources. Interlocks shall be in place to ensure that under no circumstances can both main breakers and 

the tie breaker be closed concurrently. 

2. The automatic source transfer control system shall NOT require an uninterruptible power supply for proper 

operation. 

3. Provide an industrial grade type 27/47 relay to monitor each incoming power source on the line side of the 

main circuit breaker. 

a. 27/47 relay for undervoltage, phase reversal, single phase and phase voltage balance 

b. Undervoltage sensing (device 27) on both sources shall be set at 88% of nominal voltage 

(adjustable) with local LED indication. 

c. Phase loss (device 47) set at 68% of nominal voltage (adjustable) with local LED indication. 

d. Phase sequence (reverse phase) sensing (device 47) set at 2 cycles (adjustable) with local LED 

indication. 

e. Phase imbalance (device 47) set at 10% (adjustable) with local LED indication 

4. Provide a key-operated test switch (located behind the exterior door) for simulating loss of voltage of 

either source. 



5. Control Selector Switches (to be located behind the exterior door) 

a. Auto/Manual Main-Tie-Main Breaker Control two-position selector switch 

b. Open/Close two-position spring-return-to-center selector switch for each breaker (three total) 

1) “Close” control only enabled if Auto/Manual control selector is in the “Manual” position 

2) “Close” control is electrically interlocked to prevent both main breakers and tie breaker from 

being closed concurrently. 

6. Sequence of Operation – Automatic Control 

a. Upon obtaining a signal from the main “A” 27/47 monitoring relay (indicating a problem with the 

incoming power source), a time delay of 120 seconds (adjustable up to 600 seconds minimum) 

shall be activated. If the timer times out, a “loss of power source” condition shall be latched. 

b. When the signal from the main “A” 27/47 monitoring relay is no longer present (indicating that the 

incoming power source has returned to acceptable operating parameters), a stabilization time 

delay of 15 minutes (range adjustable from at least 1 to 60 minutes) shall be activated. If the timer 

times out, the “loss of power source” condition shall be unlatched. 

c. An LED indicator light shall indicate the presence of each main incoming power source. 

d. “Loss of power condition” monitoring for main “B” is similar to main “A”. 

e. If the control is in automatic and one main source is in a “loss of power source” condition and the 

other main source is not in a “loss of power source” condition, the following sequence shall take 

place: 

1) The main breaker on the failed side shall open, then 

2) After a 5 second delay (range adjustable from at least 1 to 30 seconds) the tie breaker shall 

close. 

f. While the tie breaker is closed, when the main source’s “loss of power source” condition is no 

longer present, the following sequence shall take place: 

3) The tie breaker shall open, then 

4) After a 5 second delay (range adjustable from at least 1 to 30 seconds) the main breaker shall 

close. 

7. Anti-race condition interlocks shall prevent initiation of transfer if both incoming main power sources fail 

concurrently. 

8. Automatic transfer to an incoming main power source shall be inhibited if its 27/47 relay detects a 

problem with that power source (regardless of whether or not its timers have time out). 

8. No transfers will be initiated if one of the main or tie breakers trips due to an overcurrent or ground-fault 

condition. All such trips must be reset before normal operations can commence. 



2.9 FACTORY TESTS 

A. Perform routine tests according to standards specified for components. 

B. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90 “Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed 

Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers” . Perform the following factory-certified tests on each 

secondary unit substation: 

1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme 

connections. 

2. Ratios on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 

3. Polarity and phase relation on the rated voltage connection. 

4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 

5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 

6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme 

connections. 

7. Applied potential. 

C. At a minimum, conduct the following factory tests on the 480/277V switchboard in accordance with ANSI 

standards: 

1. Overpotential test on each bus section 

2. Insulation resistance tests 

3. Control power wiring verification 

4. Instrumentation wiring verification 

5. Mechanical operation of all moving components 

6. Electrical operation and sequential testing of all control and metering components, to verify all control 

system component operation and configuration of all adjustable setpoints and parameters to default 

operating conditions 

2.10 SPARE PARTS 

A. Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Fuses: Minimum of three for each type of fuse used 

2. Indicator lamps: Minimum of ten for each type of lamp used 




3.1 SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide all equipment with provisions for lifting or rolling into final mounting location. 

B. Provide all equipment with a complete, tightly sealed, heavy duty plastic or other type of liquid-proof cover 

to provide protection from weather and other contaminants. 

C. Shipping sections shall be arranged to permit transport through limited access space. Detailed instructions 

shall be provided for the Division 16 Contractor to reassemble the switchgear on site and to make all 

required mechanical housing connections. Reconnection of internal wiring and bus connections across 

shipping splits will be the responsibility of the switchgear manufacturer as noted elsewhere. 


A. Install secondary unit substations on concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions for 

seismic installations. 

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written 

instructions, California Electrical Code and NFPA 70. 

C. Verify that ground connections are in place. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at secondary unit 

substation location. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

D. Comply with switchgear manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions. 

E. Electrical Wiring: Install all wiring external to switchgear as indicated by switchgear wiring diagrams. 

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

G. Identify system components with FedEx EPN-compliant labels as per Division 16 Section "Electrical 

Identification." 

H. Touch-up scratched or discolored surfaces to match original finishes. 

I. Vacuum clean the inside of the switchgear (all components and surfaces). 


A. Verify proper connection, phase rotation and torquing of all field wiring connections. Where manufacturer’s 

torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torque values 

defined in UL 486A “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors” . 

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Provide all necessary equipment, labor, accessories, test instruments, temporary facilities, etc required 

for testing at no additional cost to the Owner. 




1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Test all safeties. 

3. Test insulation resistance for each bus 

4. Test continuity of each circuit. 

5. Test all control system and sequences of operation 

6. Test all metering 

D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Replace damaged and/or malfunctioning equipment and retest to demonstrate proper operation. 

F. Following completion of tests, set and verify all adjustable settings of protective devices as directed by the 

Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study. 

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and 

that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and 

observations after remedial action. 

3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 

A. Demonstrate the successful operation of all substation functions and operating sequences to the Owner or 

the Owner’s designated representative. Substation will be accepted by Owner only when Owner is 

completely satisfied with all aspects of substation configuration and operation and after any deficiencies or 

malfunctions have been corrected. 

B. Following completion of tests, put switchgear into normal automatic operation mode. 

3.5 TRAINING 


operate, and maintain the substation. Training shall be for up to ten of the Owner’s personnel. The Owner 

reserves the right to videotape the training sessions. Provide a minimum of two eight-hour on-site training 

sessions on non-consecutive days. All training dates shall be scheduled with, coordinated with, and 

approved by the Owner. Training shall include, but not be limited to the following: 

1. Safety precautions 

2. Overall substation description and theory of operation 

3. Automatic operation 

4. Manual operation 

5. Safeties 

6. Interpretation of indicating and alarm devices 

7. Review of typical troubleshooting procedures 

8. Recommended system check lists and log sheets 

9. Routine inspection, test and maintenance procedures 

10. Recommended preventative maintenance 

11. Instruction on the operation of the gear, circuit breakers and major components 

12. Review of Operations & Maintenance manuals 



3.6 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE 

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: Perform the following voltage monitoring within six months after Final 

Acceptance: 

1. During a period of normal load cycles, perform seven days of continuous three-phase voltage recording 

at secondary terminals of each substation transformer. Voltage unbalance greater than 1% between 

phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent 

during test period, is unacceptable. 

2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective actions, as 

appropriate: 

a. Adjust transformer taps. 

b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment. 

3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until satisfactory results are 

obtained. 

4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed. 




SECTION 16405 - WIRING DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 

2. Snap switches 



A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' 

names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES 

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 “General Color Requirements for 

Wiring Devices”, NEMA WD 6 “Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications” configuration 5-20R, and 

UL 498 “Attachment Plugs and Receptacles”. 


a. Cooper 

b. Hubbell 

c. Leviton 

d. Pass & Seymour 

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES 

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1 “General Color 

Requirements for Wiring Devices”, NEMA WD 6 “Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications” 

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 “Attachment Plugs and Receptacles”, and UL 943 “Ground-Fault Circuit- 

Interrupters”, 

Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. 

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 

WIRING DEVICES 16405 - 1



2.4 SNAP SWITCHES 

a. Cooper 

b. Pass & Seymour 

c. Hubbell 

d. Leviton 

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 ““General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices””and UL 20 “Standard for 

Safety General-Use Snap Switches” . 

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated 



2.5 WALL PLATES 

a. Cooper 

b. Hubbell 

c. Leviton 

d. Pass & Seymour 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. Color to be ivory. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts 

Maximum) ”, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with weatherproof-while-in-use 

lockable cover. 

2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS 

A. Type: Modular, flush-type units suitable for wiring method used. 

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 

C. Service Plate: Solid brass with satin finish. 

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 “Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications” 

configuration 5-20R, gray 

finish, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening. 



2.7 FINISHES 

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 

3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 

4. Isolated Ground Circuits: Orange 



A. Coordination with Other Trades: 

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials 

over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against 

outside of the boxes. 

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, 

and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the 

joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 

B. Conductors: 

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or 

nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of California Electrical 

Code, without pigtails. 

4. Existing Conductors: 

C. Device Installation: 

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. 

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. 

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. 

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that 

they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible 

moment. 

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor 

tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 



7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG 

pigtails for device connections. 

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device 

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 

D. Receptacle Orientation: 

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles 

to the left. 

E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes 

when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 


A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served with clear labels with black 

lettering, and by handwriting in permanent black marker on the back of the cover plate. Contractor 

shall receive approval from FedEx on label materials and methods prior to installation. 


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436 “Standard for Electrical Measuring 

and Test Equipment”. 

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or 

illuminated LED indicators of measurement. 

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 

2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 

3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 “Standard for Electrical Measuring and 

Test Equipment” and UL 943 “Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters”. 

4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 

5. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit 

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. 

Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as 

specified above. 




SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fusible switches. 

2. Nonfusible switches. 

3. Enclosures. 


A. NC: Normally closed. 

B. NO: Normally open. 

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to ASCE/SEI 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”. 

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the 




A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches from manufacturer. 


2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 

following: 

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 “Enclosed and Dead-Front 

Switches” and NEMA KS 1 “Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V 

Maximum) ”, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle 

with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 

C. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for 

copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment, where indicated. 

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES 


following: 


2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 


B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 “Enclosed and Dead-Front 

Switches” and NEMA KS 1 “Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V 

Maximum) ”, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked 

with cover in closed position. 

C. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for 

copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 

2.3 ENCLOSURES 

A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA AB 1 “Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit 

Breaker Enclosures”, NEMA KS 1 “Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V 

Maximum)”, NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)”, and UL 50 

“Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment”, to comply with environmental conditions at 

installed location. 



1. Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 12 unless otherwise noted. 

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise noted. 



A. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary 

blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

C. Install fuses in fusible devices. 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 

2. Label each enclosure with laminated-plastic nameplate. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 



1. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests. 

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; 

otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

D. Enclosed switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 




SECTION 16420 - PANELBOARDS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes panelboards. 


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined 

according to SEI/ASCE 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”. 






B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed 

devices, equipment features, and ratings. 

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical 

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ”, Type 1. 

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective 

devices and auxiliary components. 

6. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device 

included in panelboards. 

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certification that panelboards, overcurrent 

protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. 

D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. 


A. Comply with NEMA PB 1 “Panelboards”. 

PANELBOARDS 16420 - 1



2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS 

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 “Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification 

of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations” 

to withstand seismic forces. 

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 

Volts Maximum) ”, Type 1. 

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250 “ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts 

Maximum) ”, Type 3R. 

c. Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250 “ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 

Volts Maximum) ”, Type 4. 

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box 

dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim 

cover. 

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. 

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Copper 

D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more 

main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required 

for future installation of devices. 

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available 

at terminals. 

G. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 

following: 

1. General Use Panelboards 

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

2. Lighting Control Panelboards 

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. – PowR Command 2000 

b. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric – Powerlink 2000 

c. Note: Branch breakers shall be able to be overridden manually at the breaker without use of 

programming. 

H. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 



I. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on 

circuit breakers. 

J. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on 

circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical 

release for removal. 



A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories. 

B. Comply with seismic mounting and anchoring requirements. 

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with 

fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 


A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs 

complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. 

Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories 

are not acceptable. 

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a FedEx EPN-compliant nameplate as per 

requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 











D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 




SECTION 16430 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less. 


A. CPT: Control power transformer. 

B. LED: Light-emitting diode. 

C. MCC: Motor-control center. 

D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. 

E. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. 

F. NC: Normally closed. 

G. NO: Normally open. 

H. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 

I. PT: Potential transformer. 


A. Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to 

ASCE/SEI 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”. 



seismic event. 


A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845 “Motor Control 

Centers”. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845 “Motor Control Centers”, include dimensioned 

plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and 

details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 16430 - 1


1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 

2. Schematic Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 

3. Nameplate legends. 

4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 

5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. 

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working 

clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC 

layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. 

Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. 

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For MCCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 “Recommended 

Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations” 

to 

withstand seismic forces. 


2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 


following: 


2. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems. 

3. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 


B. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 “Motor Control Centers” and UL 845 “Motor 

Control Centers”. 

2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES 

A. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of 

drawout units. 

B. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare." 

C. Bus Material: Copper. 

D. Ratings: As indicated on drawings. 



E. Motor Control Components: As indicated on drawings. 

2.3 ENCLOSURES 

A. Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical 

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ”, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental 

conditions at installed location. 

B. Anti-Condensation Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage with 

thermostatic control in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point. 

C. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer 

on treated metal surface. 

D. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. 

Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, 

except by operating a permissive release device. 

E. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent 

doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size 

compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three 

single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. 

F. Wiring Spaces: 

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to 

hold wiring in place. 

2. Horizontal wireways in each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; 

supports to hold wiring in place. 

2.4 CHARACTERISTICS 

A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18 “Motor Control Centers”, Class I. 

B. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible 

conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for 

interconnections between shipping units. 


A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs. 

B. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 





A. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified. 

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary 

blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

C. Install fuses in each fusible switch. 

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 

"Fuses." 

E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes 

after motors have been installed. 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for identification of MCC, MCC 

components, and control wiring. 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 

2. Label MCC and each cubicle with FedEx EPN-compliant label. 

3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 


A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." 

B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 






1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust 

controllers, components, and equipment. 


3. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 





5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning 

controls and equipment. 

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip 

ranges. 

B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip 

elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes. If tripping occurs on motor 

inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the 

motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). 

C. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. 




SECTION 16440 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type distribution transformers rated 600 V and less, with 

capacities up to 150 KVA. 



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and wiring diagrams. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and 

components will withstand seismic forces. 




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

2. General Electric Company. 

3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. 

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. 

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 “Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications”, and list and label as 

complying with UL 1561 “Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers”. 

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces. 

C. Cores: One leg per phase. 

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 16440 - 1


D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ”, Type 2, 


1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. 

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts 

Maximum) ”. 

1. Finish Color: Gray. 

F. Taps for Transformers – Minimum six 2% full capacity, two above and four below rated voltage. 

G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C 

rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. 

H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1 “Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution 

Transformers”, 

Class 1 efficiency levels. 

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2 “ Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of 

Distribution Transformers”. 

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 

A. Nameplates: FedEx EPN-compliant nameplate. Nameplates are specified in Division 16 Section 

"Electrical Identification." 



A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer 

manufacturer. 

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and 

Seismic Restraints." 



B. Tests and Inspections: 




3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is 

defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage 

minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. 




SECTION 16450 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction capacitor (PFCC) equipment rated 600 V and 

less. 

B. Refer to the Sort Building electrical drawings. The feeder provisions and conduit for the automatic power 

factor correction capacitor bank systems shall be installed as indicated during the initial phase of 

construction. Since the exact load, power factor and harmonic levels on which the PFCC requirements 

will be based cannot be known until the new sort automation system is operational, the design, supply and 

installation of the two automatic power factor correction systems shown in the electrical drawings will be 

on a delayed basis as defined herein. An allowance will be carried in the contract for work occurring under 

this section. 

C. Approximately one month after the new sort automation system in the Sort Building has been put into 

normal operation, the contractor shall measure and record load, power factor and harmonic levels during a 

typical 24-hour period covering both on-peak and off-peak business hours in order to quantify existing 

conditions. The contractor shall submit a report listing those existing conditions as measured along with 

recommended PFCC units capable of bringing the Sort Building distribution system to unity power factor, 

or as close to it as possible within the confines of 1200A feeder connections to the PFCC banks. The 

submittal for the recommended PFCC units shall include the current-sensing current transformer suitable 

for retrofit into operational switchboards. 

D. The recommended PFCC banks shall be selected as “anti-resonant” if more than 15% of the load is 

harmonic-generating, or “standard” if 15% or less of the load is harmonic generating. 

E. The recommended PFCC banks shall utilize multiple steps of no more than 150 kVAR per step. 

F. Under conditions where both sides of the Sort Building substation’s double-ended bus are being served 

from one main breaker (one main breaker and tie breaker closed with other main breaker open), the two 

PFCC banks must be capable of being online at the same time, or else one of them must be interlocked to 

prevent compatibility problems. 

G. Upon approval of the submitted PFCC system by the Owner, the contractor shall procure and install the 

PFCC system. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions, operating characteristics of 

multiple capacitor cells or elements, and data on features, ratings, and performance. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field 

assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and workspace 

requirements and required clearances. 

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR SYSTEMS 16450 - 1


1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that capacitor equipment will 

withstand seismic forces. 




4. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: 




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in California Electrical 

Code, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

B. Comply with IEEE 18 “Standard for Shunt Trip Capacitors” and NEMA CP 1 “Shunt Capacitors”.. 

C. Comply with California Electrical Code. 


A. Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring equipment for 

successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty to Fed Ex. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace components of the PFCC 

system that fail in materials, performance or workmanship within a specified warranty period of no less 

than one year and to test all replaced components. Warranty shall cover all parts, testing instruments, 

labor, travel and living costs for manufacturer’s service personnel. Warranty period shall not begin until 

written acceptance by the Owner. Written acceptance by the Owner will not occur until the system 

demonstrates successful operation with actual Owner’s system load. . 

1. Special Warranty Period for Capacitor Cells: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 




1. Eaton Electrical Inc. 

2. General Electric 

3. Square D; Division of Schneider Electric. 



2.2 CAPACITORS, GENERAL 

A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and mounted in 

metal enclosures. 

B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in 

thermosetting resin inside plastic container. 

C. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell. 

D. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current-limiting, noninterchangeable type; factory installed in each phase and 

located within the equipment enclosure unless otherwise indicated. Features include the following: 

1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum. 

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer. 

3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is still in 

place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure. 

E. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired. 

F. Enclosure: Arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting 

brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated. 

2.3 FIXED CAPACITORS 

A. Description: Integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of pressure 

terminals. 

2.4 EQUIPMENT SIZE/RATINGS 

A. Operating voltage shall be 480 volts (line-to-line), three phase, 60 hertz. 

B. Rated capacitor cell voltage shall be minimum of 570 volts for 480 volts network. 

2.5 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS 

A. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 “Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V” 

B. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in independent 

enclosures. Units include a separately mounted current transformer to sense current in the power circuit 

being corrected and to provide input to unit controls. 

C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any value 

between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits being corrected 

and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10 seconds, operate a contractor 

to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring 

the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting. Switch only one capacitor bank at a time. 



D. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following: 

1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for power supply 

interruptions longer than 15 minutes. 

2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled capacitorbank 

switching. 

E. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor application. 

F. Buses: Plated copper. 

G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and 

capacitors. 

H. Inductors: Air-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within contactor 

ratings. 

I. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault current to which 

they may be exposed. 

J. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel. 

K. Enclosure: NEMA 250 “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V Maximum)”, Type 12, steel or 

aluminum, with hinged door and hand-operated catch. Door shall be interlocked with controls or main 

circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened. 

L. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure, indicating the following: 

1. Target and actual power factors accurate to plus or minus 1 percent of reading. 

2. Steps energized. 

3. Step reconnection delay. 

4. Real and reactive currents. 

5. Voltage THD. 

6. Alarm codes. 

M. System Alarms: Alarm relay and local display indication of the following conditions: 

1. Low power factor. 

2. Leading power factor. 

3. Frequency not detected. 

4. Overcurrent. 

5. Overvoltage. 

6. Overtemperature. 

7. Excessive voltage THD. 

8. Capacitor overload. 

9. Loss of capacitance. 

N. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions. 

O. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit. 

1. Operating handle can be padlocked. 



P. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network interface 

units, matched to and compatible with electrical power monitoring and control network. Communication 

module shall have capability to transmit the following data to remote monitoring devices: 

1. System in alarm. 

2. Power factor set-point. 

3. Corrected power factor. 

4. Number of capacitor steps activated. 

2.6 FACTORY FINISH 

A. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. 


A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with NEMA CP 1 “Shunt 

Capacitors”. Include the following: 

1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and 

dissipation-factor tests. 

2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices. 



A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases 

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements. 

C. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. All current transformer current loops shall be connected through shorting-type terminal blocks. 

E. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each power factor correction capacitor element, bus, component, 

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 



1. Inspect capacitors, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust 

components, and equipment. 

2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of automatic power factor 

correction units. 

3. Assist in acceptance testing 

4. Report results in writing. 

C. Acceptance testing: Demonstrate operation of the PFCC banks to the Owner utilizing system load. 

D. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, 

replace with new units and retest. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust for optimum automatic power factor correction. Configure all adjustable parameters to the 

complete satisfaction of the Owner 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, 

dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 

B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 



operate, and maintain automatic power factor correction units. Demonstrate method of determine 

optimum settings for system controls. 




SECTION 16460 – PACKAGED LIFE SAFETY ENGINE GENERATORS, 480/277V 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency life safety power supply with the 

following features: 

1. Diesel engine. 

2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 

3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 

4. Outdoor enclosure. 

B. See Division 16 Section "Automatic Transfer Switches, 480/277V" for transfer switches including sensors 

and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets. 


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator and accessory indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, wiring diagrams and location and size of each field 

connection. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that engine-generator set, batteries, 

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following: 



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and 

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 



D. Permit information: Submit engine emissions data required to obtain emission permits from the Bay Area 

Air Quality Management District, California Air Resources Board, and all other applicable authorities 


PACKAGED LIFE SAFETY ENGINE GENERATORS 16460 - 1



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles (321 km) of Project site, 

a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 

B. Comply with ASME B15.1 “ Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus”. 

C. Comply with NFPA 37 “ Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas 

Turbines”. 

D. Comply with UL 2200 “Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies”. 

E. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. 

F. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise 

level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine 

exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 


A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental 

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 

3. Altitude: Sea level. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty to Fed Ex. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace components of engine 

generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials, performance or workmanship within 

a specified warranty period of no less than one year and to test all replaced components. Warranty shall 

cover all parts, testing instruments, load banks, labor, travel and living costs for manufacturer’s service 

personnel. Warranty period shall not begin until written acceptance by the Owner. Written acceptance by 

the Owner will not occur until the system demonstrates successful operation with actual Owner’s 

equipment. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor. 




1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 

2. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 

3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 



2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET 

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set. 

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; 

and have lifting attachments. 

C. Capacities and Characteristics: 

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and 

model and serial number of component. 

D. Generator-Set Performance: 

2.3 ENGINE 

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full 

load. 

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load 

increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band 

within three seconds. 

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full 

load. 

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated 

load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no 

hunting or surging of speed. 

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase 

or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 

five seconds. 

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not 

exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined 

according to NEMA MG 1 “Motors and Generators”, shall not exceed 50 percent. 

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, 

system shall supply a minimum of 300% of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and 

then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems”, 

Type 10, system requirements. 

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2. 

B. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while 

passing full flow. 

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall 

be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no 

disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. 



4. Lube oil heater, sized as recommended by manufacturer but not to exceed 1,500W maximum, 

thermostatically-controlled and arranged to be powered from an external power source at 120V 

C. Engine Fuel System: 

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting 

and load conditions. 

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to 

source. 

D. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. 

E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set 

mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with 

anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 

2. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow 

automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine 

manufacturer. 

F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust 

piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. 

G. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked 

filter" indicator. 

H. Starting System: 24-V electric. 

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient 

temperature at maximum. 

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel 

without binding. 

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and Standby Power 

Systems”. 

4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range to provide specified cranking cycle 

at least twice without recharging. 

5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 

35-A minimum continuous rating. 

6. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply 

with UL 1236 “Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries” . 

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE 

A. Comply with NFPA 30 “Flammable and Combustible Liquids”. 

B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, UL-compliant fuel oil tank. Features include 


1. Tank level indicator. 

2. Capacity: Fuel for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 



3. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 

4. Double-wall, secondary containment 

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING 

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and 

monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic 

transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to 

the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. 

When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut 

down generator set and initiate alarms. 

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine 

gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. 

Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. 

C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and 

Standby Power Systems” 

for Level 1 system, and the following: 

1. AC voltmeter. 

2. AC ammeter. 

3. AC frequency meter. 

4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 

5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 

6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 

7. Running-time meter, non-resettable 

8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 

9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 

10. Generator emergency stop pushbutton. 

D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring 

required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, 


2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION 

A. Generator Circuit Breakers: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with 

NEMA AB 1 “Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures” and 

UL 489 “Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures”. 

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 

2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 

3. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR 

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 “Motors and Generators”. 



B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with 

generator rotor. 

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F. 

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if 

required. 

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 

125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. 

F. Enclosure: Dripproof. 

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. 

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. 

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent 

adjustment of output-voltage operating band. 

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. 

2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE 

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph (160 km/h) . 

Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. 

Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within 

enclosure. 

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within 

required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top 

of range specified in system service conditions. 

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent 

entry of rain and snow. 

2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce 

enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. 

3. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable. 

C. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection. 

2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES 

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. 

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if 

weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate 

underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during 

installation. 



2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated 

load. 

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or 

failure. 

2.10 FINISHES 

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant 

pretreatment and compatible primer. 



A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and 

with NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems”. 

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for 

periodic maintenance. 

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch 

(25 mm) . Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. 

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be 

factory mounted. 

E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

G. Identify system components with FedEx EPN-compliant labels as per Division 16 Section "Electrical 



A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in 

testing. This service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner for the duration of all 

required testing. 

2. Provide all necessary equipment, labor, accessories, test instruments, temporary facilities, load 

banks, load bank cables and connections, diesel fuel, etc required for testing at no additional cost 

to the Owner. 




1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and 

Standby Power Systems” that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, 

single-step full-load pickup test. 

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Record individual cell voltages. 

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging 

and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both 

conditions. 

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity 

load test for the battery. 

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. 

d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging 

conditions. 

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each 

element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, 

and fluid leaks. 

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 

kPa) . Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at fullrated 

load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine. 

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 

8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage 

and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify 

that performance is as specified. 

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 

100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, 

including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property 

line, and compare measured levels with required values. 

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. 

D. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks 

exist. 

E. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation 

and unit operation. 

F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements 

are met. 



I. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured 

insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each 

tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. 

J. Following completion of tests, refill fuel tanks and top off all engine fluids. 



operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. 

3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at substantial completion, provide 12 months’ full maintenance by 

skilled employees of manufacturer’s designated service organization. Include routine preventative 

maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting for proper operation. Provide parts and 

supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 

3.5 SPARE PARTS 

A. Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Fuses: Minimum of three for each type of fuse used 

2. Indicator lamps: Minimum of ten for each type of lamp used 

3. Filters: One set of lubricating oil, fuel and combustion-air filters for each type of engine. 




SECTION 16470 – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES, 480/277V 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less. 


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and 

accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, 

conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch 

specified. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, 

and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following: 



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 


2. Dimensioned Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe 

mounting and anchorage provisions. 

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based. 


A. Comply with NEMA ICS 1 “Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements”. 

B. Comply with NFPA 110 “Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems”. 

C. Comply with UL 1008 “Transfer Switch Equipment” unless requirements of these Specifications are 

stricter. 

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES, 480/277V 16470 - 1




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the same manufacturer as 

the emergency life-safety generators. Alternatively, products by Asco, Zenith or Russelectric may be 

utilized. 

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 “Transfer Switch Equipment” for continuous 

loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of 

switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at 

installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008 

“Transfer Switch Equipment”. 

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an 

operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. 

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand 

capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41 “Recommended Practice for Surge 

Voltages in Low Voltage Power AC Power Circuits”. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse 

withstand test of NEMA ICS 1 “Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements”. 

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motoroperated 

mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. 

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between 

active power sources. 

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuitbreaker 

components are not acceptable. 

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 

3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic 

transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. 

G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)” 

Type 12, complying with NEMA ICS 6 “Enclosures” and UL 508 “Industrial Control Equipment”, unless 


2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 

A. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during 

normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. 



B. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features: 

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on 

each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout 

voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent 

and dropout at 85 percent. 

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and 

engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. 

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall 

be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup 

frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 

percent. 

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 

10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of 

emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored. 

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 

7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergencysource 

sensing circuits. 

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source 

Available." 

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source 

Available." 

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each 

switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. 

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will 

remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light 

indicates override status. 

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; 

rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum. 

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for 

five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer 

of load to normal source. 

12. Anti-condensation space heater: Electric space heater of sufficient wattage with thermostatic 

control to maintain enclosure temperature above dew point. Powered from external 120V source. 


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper 

operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with 

specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1 “Industrial Control 

and Systems: General Requirements”. 





A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to 

seismic-restraint details. 

B. Identify components with FedEx EPN-compliant labels according to Division 16 Section "Electrical 


C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock, to the complete satisfaction of 

the Owner. 


A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and 

adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in 

writing. 

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in 

testing. 

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with 

requirements. 


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance 

tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with 

manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. 

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. 

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, 

covers, and safety features. 

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. 

d. Perform manual transfer operation. 

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each 

switch at least three times. 

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency 

source with normal source available. 

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. 



c. Verify time-delay settings. 

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. 

e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 

microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. 

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, 

retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown. 

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. 

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured 

insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component 

indicating satisfactory completion of tests. 

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 



operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment. 

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. 




SECTION 16501 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Photoelectric switches. 

2. Occupancy sensors. 




2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES 

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product 

by one of the following: 

1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Intermatic, Inc. 

3. NSi Industries LLC; Tork Products. 

4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 

5. Other approved equals 

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on 

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 


3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 

4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

5. Lightolier Controls. 

6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 

8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 

9. Sensor Switch, Inc. 


11. Watt Stopper. 

12. Other approved equals. 

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16501 - 1


B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a 

separate power pack. 

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn 

them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range 

of 1 to 15 minutes. 

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A 

“Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control”. 

Sensor is powered from the power 

pack. 

3. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 

120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as 

defined by NFPA 70. 

4. Mounting: 

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. 

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard electrical 

enclosure. 

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 

5. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of 

sensor. 

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux) ; turn lights off when 

selected lighting level is present. 

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement. 

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion 

of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm) . 

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 

sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10foot- 

(3-m-) high ceiling. 

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of 

reflected ultrasonic energy. 

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches 

(305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 

mm/s) . 

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. 

(56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 

sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. 

ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted 

on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m) . 

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic 

detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions 

is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 



1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion 

of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person 

of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a 

vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s) . 

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 

sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on 

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 


3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 

4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

5. Lightolier Controls. 

6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 

8. NSi Industries LLC; Tork Products. 

9. RAB Lighting. 

10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 


12. Watt Stopper. 


B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a 

single gang switchbox. 

1. Comply with California Energy Code. 

2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C) . 

3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800- 

W incandescent. 

C. Wall-Switch Sensor: 

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view. 

2. Sensing Technology: PIR. 

3. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage. 



A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do 

not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 



B. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

C. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical 



A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been 

energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 




SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Exit signs. 

3. Lighting fixture supports. 


1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual switches. 

2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on 

features, accessories, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field 

assembly, components, features, and accessories. 


A. Comply with California Energy Code. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS 

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 “Recessed Luminaires - Ceiling Compatibility” 

for ceiling 

compatibility for recessed fixtures. 

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598 “Luminaires”. 

C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598 “Luminaries”. 

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1


D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and 

sagging. 

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating 

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, 

lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in 

operating position. 

G. Diffusers: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other 

changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 

1. Comply with UL 935 “Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts” and with ANSI C82.11 “High Frequency 

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts”. 

2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 

3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is 

indicated. 

4. Sound Rating: Class A 

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 “Guide on the Surge 

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits”, 

Category A or better. 

B. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1 “Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts”; energy 

saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Description: Comply with UL 935 “Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts” and with ANSI C 82.11 “High Frequency 

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts”, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed 

for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 

3. Sound Rating: Class A. 

4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, “Guide on the Surge 

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits”, 

Category A or better. 

5. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 



2.5 EXIT SIGNS 

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924 “Standard for Safety of Emergency Lighting 

and Power Equipment” ; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities 


2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angleiron 

supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as 

fixture. 

C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 



A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. 

B. Comply with California Electrical Code for minimum fixture supports. 

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm) , brace to limit swinging. 

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. 

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

F. Mark fixtures on the emergency life safety lighting circuits as follows: 

1. Office areas – Apply a red paint dot to each fixture in an area that is visible from the office space. 

The dot shall be applied with an applicator (not a brush) in order to produce a consistently sized, 

neat round dot. “Emergency life safety” lighting fixtures shall include all those that are connected 

ahead of all local switching to the life safety generator under normal power failure conditions, 

including those fixtures that are connected via a Bodine (or equal) emergency relay control device. 

2. Non-office areas – Use a red cover plate for the receptacle or junction box that supplies each 

individual fixture. Position the red cover plate so it is visible from the floor below. “Emergency life 

safety” lighting fixtures shall include all those that are connected ahead of all local switching to the 

life safety generator under normal power failure conditions, including those fixtures that are 

connected via a Bodine (or equal) emergency relay control device. 




SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 

2. Poles and accessories. 


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit 

designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 


A. Comply with California Energy Code. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES 

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 “Luminaires” and be listed and labeled for installation in wet 

locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

C. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to 

prevent warping and sagging. 

D. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. 

Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. 

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating 

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, 

lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in 

operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect 

ballast when door opens. 

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1


F. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. 

G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV 

radiation. 

H. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion 

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 “Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps” and 

UL 1029 “High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts” and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction 

of average lamp life. 

2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M “ Structural Supports for Highway Signs, 

Luminaires and Traffic Signals”. 

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use 

stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support 

components. 

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless 


D. Handhole: Minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm) , with cover secured by stainlesssteel 

captive screws. Provide on all poles. 

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. 


3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION 

A. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application 

and approved by manufacturer. 

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 



3.2 POLE INSTALLATION 

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their 

mounting provisions on the pole. 

B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole 

manufacturer. 

C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level 

recommended by pole manufacturer. 

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and 

approved by manufacturer. 

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly 

packed to fill space. 

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange 

to drain condensation from interior of pole. 

D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- (150mm-) 

wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill 

unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch (25 mm) below top of concrete slab. 

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES 

A. Install on concrete base. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. 

3.4 GROUNDING 

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 




SECTION 16600 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section describes electrical work for the Fire Alarm and Detection System. Design, provide and 

install a new digital addressable fire alarm and detection system for the new Sort Building. 

B. Work required under this Section is to be delivered via design/build methodology. This specification shall 

be the basis for the design/build package. As such the successful design/build contractor shall become 

the engineer of record for the Fire Alarm and Detection System and shall design, supply, install, test and 

certify the new, expanded and modified Fire Alarm and Detection System(s). The completed Fire Alarm 

and Detection System(s) shall comply with the minimum requirements of all applicable Codes and 

Authorities Having Jurisdiction. When applicable Codes, standards or guidelines are in conflict, the most 

stringent shall govern 

C. The Fire Alarm and Detection System Contractor shall design all necessary modifications to the existing 

Fed Ex airport hub’s Fire Alarm and Detection System in order to integrate communications and remote 

annunciation into one comprehensive system. The Fed Ex airport hub’s fire alarm remote annunciator is 

located in the Security Screening Building lobby. The Fire Alarm and Detection System Contractor shall 

obtain any available record drawings of existing Fire Alarm and Detection System equipment from the 

Owner (including the systems for the Security Screening Building, the Generator Building, and the 

Metroplex Renovations) and conduct a complete site survey to verify the extent and status of the existing 

system. Any Fire Alarm and Detection System equipment shown on the drawings in these Contract 

Documents is for reference only and is not intended to depict the full extent of the existing system nor are 

the drawings intended to depict the entirety of work required under this Section. 

D. The general contractor will obtain a conditional permit, conditional upon the timely submission of Fire 

Alarm and Detection System drawings and associated documentation. The Fire Alarm and Detection 

System Contractor shall prepare working drawings of the Fire Alarm and Detection System for the general 

contractor’s building permit application. The schedule for delivery of these drawings shall be coordinated 

with the general contractor so as to not delay the building permit process. 

E. The Fire Alarm and Detection System Contractor shall determine the requirements applicable to the 

submittal of drawings for building permit application from the local Fire Marshal and all other Authorities 

Having Jurisdiction and prepare the drawings accordingly. If the local Authorities require that the 

submitted drawings be signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, then the Fire Alarm and 

Detection System Contractor shall provide drawings that are signed and sealed by a licensed professional 

engineer in the state of California. If the local Authorities do not require that the submitted drawings be 

signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, then as a minimum the drawings shall be prepared 

by an individual who has attained NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) 

Level III or higher certification in Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. All corresponding submittals and 

drawings shall be approved, initialed and show the NICET certification number of the individual 

maintaining the certification and taking responsibility for the documentation. 

F. Construction documents shall include, but not be limited to, all of the following: 

1. A floor plan 

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16600- 1


2. Locations of alarm-initiating and notification appliances 

3. Alarm control and trouble signaling equipment 

4. Annunciation 

5. Power connection 

6. Battery calculations 

7. Conductor type and sizes 

8. Voltage drop calculations 

9. Manufacturers, model numbers and listing information for equipment, devices and materials 

10. Details of ceiling height and construction 

11. The interface of fire safety control functions 

G. The Fire Alarm and Detection System Contractor shall consider the locations of conveyors and equipment 

within sort areas when determining locations of Fire Alarm and Detection System equipment. Audio/visual 

alarms shall not be located behind obstructions. 

H. Supply and install all necessary equipment, connections and labor required to interface with sprinkler 

monitoring system equipment, automatic suppression system(s), elevator systems, and HVAC controls. 

Coordinate the locations of all required interconnections with the respective trade contractors. 

I. Additional facility expansions are planned in the future under separate contracts. This Fire Alarm and 

Detection System shall be designed now to be expanded at that future time to cover the entire property, to 

the extent required by all applicable Codes. The existing areas or function of the property will not change 

substantially. 

J. The Division 16 Contractor shall coordinate the Fire Alarm and Detection System with the Division 15 

Contractor’s Fire Suppression System. 

K. Connect the communications cables from main fire alarm panel in the new Sort Building to the Fed Ex 

airport hub’s existing fire alarm system with fiber optic cable routed through the conveyor bridge to the 

Metroplex Building. Actual connection point in the Metroplex Building is to be determined by the 

contractor. 

L. All new Fire Alarm and Detection System and related equipment shall be FM Approved. This includes but 

is not limited to control panels, all detectors, waterflow alarms and tamper switches. 


A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System for the Security Screening Building, Generator Building and 

Metroplex Renovations is being supplied under the scope of work of the separate contract for those 

buildings. 


A. Noncoded, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. 




A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake 

motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 “ Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other 

Structures”. 


device when subjected to the seismic forces specified, and the unit will be fully operational after the 



A. General Submittal Requirements: 

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: 

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. 

b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. 

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm 

Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”. 

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 

3. Include battery-size calculations. 

4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each 

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when airhandling 

system is operating. 

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to 

scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical 

dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote 

status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written 


6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. 

Show size and route of cable and conduits. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional 


1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation 

details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, 

complying with NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”. 



E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from 

manufacturer. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units 

required for this Project. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II 

technician. 

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source 

from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing 

system. 




following: 

1. Amseco - a Potter brand; Potter Electric Signal Company. 

2. Bosch Security Systems. 

3. Commercial Products Group/CPG Life Safety Signals. 

4. Faraday; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 

5. Federal Signal Corporation. 

6. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a Honeywell company. 

7. Fire Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company. 

8. Gamewell; a Honeywell company. 

9. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. 

10. Gentex Corporation. 

11. Harrington Signal, Inc. 

12. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 

13. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 

14. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. 

15. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company. 


2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by, but is not limited to, the following devices: 

1. Manual stations. 

2. Heat detectors. 

3. Smoke detectors. 

4. Duct smoke detectors. 



5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 

6. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 

1. Continuously operate alarm-notification appliances. 

2. Identify alarm at the fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 

6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 

7. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 

8. Activate emergency lighting control. 

9. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 

10. Record events in the system memory. 

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by, but is not limited to, one or more of the following devices and 

actions: 

1. Valve supervisory switch. 

2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 

3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by, but is not limited to, one or more of the following devices and 

actions: 

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 

4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 

5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 

6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 

7. Failure of battery charging. 

8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 

9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 

10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. 

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at firealarm 

control unit and remote annunciators. 

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT 

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic 

modules, complying with UL 864 “Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems” and listed 

and labeled by an NRTL. 



a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable 

read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and 

secondary power supplies. 

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. 

2. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment. 

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm 

control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, 

supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 lines of 80 characters, minimum. 

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. 

C. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble 

signals to a remote alarm station. 

D. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a 

stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays 

and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble 

conditions. 

2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR 

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and 

trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including 

acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match 

those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for 

alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 


3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Install the system in compliance with NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code” for installation of fire-alarm 

equipment. 

B. Install the system in compliance with FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-40 “Fire Alarm 

Systems”. 

C. Equipment Mounting: 

1. Install seismic bracing. 

D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making 

changes or connections. 



E. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. 


A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for FedEx EPNcompliant 

identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. 

3.3 GROUNDING 

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100 “Powering and Grounding 

Electronic Equipment”. 

Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. 


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. 


1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. 

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is 

required by NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code” in its "Completion Documents, 

Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm 

Systems" Chapter. 

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the 

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”; 

retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, 

Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”. 

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 

requirements in ANSI S1.4 “Sound Level Meters”. 

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of 

Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter 

in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code” and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" 

Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm 

Code”. 

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced 

devices and appliances. 



D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and 

semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 

G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system 

complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”. Use 

forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 

H. Five bound copies of complete Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided as part of the 

close out of the work. These manuals shall include the following as a minimum: 

1. Index of the enclosed materials 

2. Copies of approved drawings 

3. List of recommended spare parts 

4. Printout of the final copy of the system program 

5. Record drawings 

6. Operation, maintenance and repair procedures from the manufacturer 

7. Copy of the signed and completed “Record of Completion Form” as described in 

NFPA 72 



APPENDIX A

FEDERAL EXPRESS CORPORATION 

STANDARD FORM 

CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT 

FOR FULLY DESIGNED PROJECTS 

FOR USE IN FULLY DESIGNED NEW STRUCTURE PROJECTS 

12/44/10

TERMS & CONDITIONS 


Between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 

("Contractor") 

Table of Contents 

ARTICLE 

Scope of Services 1 

Contract Documents 2 

Order of Completion 3 

Payment 4 

Equipment and Materials 5 

"As-Built" Drawings and Data 6 

Subcontractors 7 

Payment to Subcontractors 8 

Changes 9 

Contractor's Understanding 10 

FedEx's Representative 11 

Supervision of the Work; Safety and Security 12 

Permits, Licenses, Laws and Regulations 13 

Taxes 14 

Shop Drawings and Samples; Material Testing 15 

FedEx's Right to Audit 16 

Separate Contracts 17 

Contractor's Warranties 18 

FedEx's Right To Do Work 19 

Insurance 20 

Bonds 21 

Indemnification 22 

FedEx's Right to Occupy 23 

Compliance With Laws 24 

Default; FedEx's Right to Terminate 25 

Alternate Dispute Resolution 26 

Intentionally Omitted 27 

Miscellaneous 28

Exhibits 

Page 

Description of Project A-1 

Form of Notice to Proceed B-1-1 through B-1-2 

Contractor’s Fee Payment Procedures C-1-1 through C-1-3 

Form of Application for Payment C-2-1 through C-2-3 

Form of Partial Waiver of Lien C-3-1 through C-3-3 

Form of Final Waiver of Lien C-4-1 through C-4-2 

Schedule of Values for Contractor’s Fee C-5-1 through C-5-__ 

Form of Transaction Tax Statement C-6-1 through C-6-2 

Form of Change Order D-1-1 through D-1-4 

Form of Construction Change Directive D-2-1 through D-2-4 

Insurance Requirements E-1 through E-2 

Security Requirements F-1 through F-5 

DBE Participation G-1 through G-5 

Leasehold Requirements H-1 through H- 

Project Staffing I-1


THIS CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT is made the 

Contract No. ________ 

day of ____________, _____ (the 

“Effective Date”), between FEDERAL EXPRESS CORPORATION ("FedEx") and 

_____________________________ (___________ License Number: ______) ("Contractor"). 

RECITALS 

1. FedEx intends to construct one (1) security screening building, one (1) back up 

generator building, install one truck dispatch/security booth and provide road improvements to 

Sally Ride Way (the "Project") at a site located at 1 Sally Ride Way in Alameda County, 

California. The site (the "Site") of the Project is described in the site plans included as part of the 

drawings and specifications described in Exhibit A-1. 

2. By Lease dated June 1, 2000, as supplemented by a First Supplemental Agreement 

dated April 1, 2007 and an Amended and Restated Lease dated April 1, 2009 (collectively, the 

"Lease") the City of Oakland, a municipal corporation ("Landlord"), leases the Site to FedEx and 

allows construction of certain improvements on the Site. 

3. FedEx desires the services of a contractor to organize, coordinate and direct the 

complete construction of the Project. 

4. Contractor desires to enter into this Agreement as an independent contractor and is 

ready, willing and able to provide the services and to perform the construction work required in 

connection with the Project in accordance with the terms and subject to the conditions of this 

Agreement. 

FOR AND IN CONSIDERATION of the mutual covenants contained in this Agreement, 

FedEx and Contractor (the "parties") agree as follows: 

ARTICLE 1 

SCOPE OF SERVICES 

Section 1.01. Scope of Services. Subject to and in accordance with the terms of this 

Agreement, Contractor shall construct, equip and furnish the Project for FedEx on the Site. The 

Project is described in general terms in the attached Exhibit A- and is described in more detail or 

is reasonably inferable from the drawings and specifications (the "Plans and Specifications") that 

are described in the attached Exhibit A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

Contractor shall provide and furnish all materials, supplies, apparatus, appliances, equipment, 

fixtures, tools, implements and other facilities (the "Materials") and all labor, management, 

supervision, construction scheduling, procurement scheduling, contract administration, 

accounting, project documentation and reporting, quality control and safety programming, 

financing, transportation, utilities, storage, testing, construction site security and other services 

(the "Services") as and when required in connection with the foregoing undertaking. When used 

in this Agreement, the term "Work" means the furnishing of the Materials and Services. 

Section 1.02. Nature of Relationship. 

Although the relationship of Contractor to FedEx is 

that of an independent contractor, the parties recognize the relationship of mutual trust and 

confidence established by this Agreement, and Contractor shall furnish its best skill and 

judgment and shall cooperate with FedEx’s other consultants and contractors in furthering 

FedEx’s interests. Subject to the express limitations contained in the Contract Documents, 

Contractor shall furnish efficient business administration and construction management and shall 

use every reasonable effort, and do all things necessary, to perform the Work in an expeditious 

and economical manner consistent with good workmanship and quality, sound business practice 

and FedEx’s best interests. 

ARTICLE 2 

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

Section 2.01. Definition. 

The Contract Documents include this Agreement, the Plans and 

Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, and all exhibits or 

modifications to any of them. As used in this Agreement, a "modification" is: 

(i) a written amendment to this Agreement that FedEx and Contractor 

sign; 

(ii) a Change Order, as defined in this Agreement; 

(iii) a Construction Change Directive, as defined in this Agreement; 

(iv) a written interpretation of this Agreement that FedEx issues; or 

(v) a written order for a change in the Work that FedEx issues. 

Section 2.02. Identification of Plans and Specifications. Contemporaneously with the 

execution of this Agreement, the parties have caused their respective representatives to initial 

four sets of the Plans and Specifications. FedEx has furnished to Contractor a reproducible set of 

the Plans and Specifications. Contractor must make any additional sets of the Plans and 

Specifications that it requires to perform the Work from that reproducible set at its expense. At 

Contractor’s request, FedEx shall furnish to Contractor one set of the Plans and Specifications on 

an electronic medium, if they are available in such a medium. Contractor shall make any 

additional electronic copies of the Plans and Specifications it requires to perform the Work at its 

expense. Upon Final Acceptance, as defined in Section 4.10, or any earlier termination of this 

2

Agreement, Contractor must return to FedEx the reproducible set of the Plans and Specifications 

and all modifications to them and all copies of the Plans and Specifications and all modifications 

to them that are in the possession of Contractor, any of its Subcontractors, as defined below, and 

any of the directors, officers, agents, employees, or principals of any of them. If FedEx has 

furnished an electronic copy of the Plans and Specifications to Contractor, Contractor must also 

return one electronic copy to FedEx at that time and must cause all other electronic copies that 

are in the possession of Contractor, any of its Subcontractors, and any of the directors, officers, 

agents, employees, or principals of any of them to be destroyed. 

Section 2.03. Intent of Contract Documents. 

The parties expect the Contract Documents 

to set forth all materials, appliances, labor and services of every kind necessary for the full and 

proper execution of the Work and the terms and conditions of payment for the Work. If, 

however, the Contract Documents do not describe in complete detail all items reasonably 

required to complete the Work, Contractor nevertheless has the obligation to furnish all items 

reasonably required to complete the Work with no increase in the Contractor’s Fee, as defined in 

Section 4.01 below. The parties consider the Contract Documents to be one document and, 

subject to the provisions of Section 2.05, whatever is called for by any one of the Contract 

Documents will be as binding as if called for by all. 

Section 2.04. Errors in Contract Documents. 

Contractor has closely reviewed the 

Contract Documents, is not aware of any material defect or error in the Contract Documents, and 

has determined the Contract Documents to be complete, accurate, consistent, coordinated, and 

adequate for bidding, costing, pricing and performing the Work. Accordingly, Contractor 

represents to FedEx that, to Contractor’s knowledge, Contractor will be able to construct the 

Project in accordance with the design reflected by the Contract Documents. If Contractor finds 

any error, discrepancy or variance in the Contract Documents, or if Contractor becomes aware 

that any portion of the Work violates, or will violate when performed, any law, ordinance, code, 

regulation, rule, or other legal requirement (singly, a “Legal Requirement” and collectively, 

“Legal Requirements”), it shall notify FedEx before beginning the affected portion of the Work 

and FedEx will make any correction, interpretation or clarification promptly, basing its decision 

on the intent of the Contract Documents. If, without having provided that notification, 

Contractor performs any part of the Work that Contractor knew or should have known an error, 

discrepancy or conflict in the Contract Documents affected, Contractor shall make at its expense 

any change in the Work that becomes necessary to make the Work consistent with the correction, 

interpretation or clarification that FedEx makes in accordance with the foregoing provisions of 

this Section 2.04. The parties will resolve any dispute that arises regarding any correction, 

interpretation or clarification that FedEx makes on the authority of this Section 2.04 in 

accordance with the procedures set forth in Article 26. 

Section 2.05. Conflicts 

. If a conflict occurs between this Agreement and any other 

Contract Document, this Agreement will prevail. The most recently issued and approved 

Contract Document will take precedence over previous issues of the same Contract Document. If 

any conflict or inconsistency occurs among the Contract Documents, the parties will interpret the 

Contract Documents in accordance with the following order of priority: 

3

(a) written modifications, addenda, amendments and qualifications 

and clarifications to this Agreement made after the Effective Date 

will prevail over 

(b) the remaining portions of this Agreement (exclusive of the Plans 

and Specifications), which will prevail over 

(c) the Plans, which will prevail over 

(d) the Specifications. 

In the case of the Plans, written dimensions will prevail over scaled dimensions and larger scale 

sections and details will prevail over smaller scale sections and details. FedEx will resolve any 

conflict between or among qualities of Materials. 

ARTICLE 3 

ORDER OF COMPLETION 

Section 3.01. Commencement. Contractor shall commence the Work as directed in 

FedEx's written Notice to Proceed in the form of the attached Exhibit B-1. 

Section 3.02. Substantial Completion Date. 

For purposes of this Agreement, the term 

“Substantial Completion Date” means May 1, 2012. 

Contractor shall substantially complete the Work not later than the Substantial Completion Date. 

Substantial completion of the Work occurs when FedEx occupies the Project for its intended use 

or when FedEx accepts in writing the Work as being substantially complete. Substantial 

completion will not occur unless and until the following specific conditions have been satisfied: 

(i) the Project (excluding improvements that a Separate Contractor 

undertakes to construct) has been substantially completed in 

accordance with the Contract Documents and is in good order and 

operating condition, except for minor details of construction, 

decoration or mechanical adjustments that do not interfere in any 

material respect with FedEx’s access to or use or enjoyment of the 

Project; 

(ii) all governmental or regulatory permits and approvals necessary to 

begin use of the Project have been obtained, including, without 

limitation, certificates of occupancy, and all governmental 

inspections and certifications have been made and posted (or if 

such certificates of occupancy or other certificates cannot be 

delivered for reasons not the fault or responsibility of Contractor, 

Contractor has fully performed all of its obligations related to the 

4

Work and necessary to the issuance of the certificates of occupancy 

or other certificates); and 

(iii) all construction materials have been removed except for minor 

amounts that will not materially affect the safety of FedEx’s 

employees or invitees.] 

Section 3.03. Extension of Substantial Completion Date. 

(a) Time is of the essence and 

extensions of the Substantial Completion Date will occur only as permitted in this Section 3.03. 

Contractor may receive an extension of the Substantial Completion Date equal to the duration of 

any delay (an “Excusable Delay”) that actually occurs with respect to the Work by reason of any 

of the following: 

(i) an Act of God (exclusive of inclement weather to the extent that 

the aggregate duration of delay caused by inclement weather does 

not exceed that number of days that is the five-year average of the 

number of days on which precipitation in the vicinity of the Site 

exceeded one inch per day during a 12-month period beginning on 

_________ 1, as reflected in the National Oceanographic and 

Atmospheric Administration’s Monthly Summaries of Local 

Climatological Data (the “Weather Average”)); 

(ii) a casualty (including, without limitation, earthquakes and 

tornadoes, but excluding other forms of inclement weather to the 

extent provided in division (i) above); 

(iii) war, national emergency or other similar occurrence; 

(iv) except as limited below, strikes, lock-outs, or unavailability public 

utility service; 

(v) sub-surface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ 

materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or 

unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ 

materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally 

recognized as inherent in construction activities similar to the 

Work; 

(vi) changes that FedEx orders in the Work; 

(vii) the failure of FedEx to accomplish any task for which it has 

responsibility within the time established for the completion of that 

task in the Construction Schedule; 

5

(viii) interference by a Separate Contractor (as defined in Article 17) 

with Contractor’s performance of the Work, a Separate 

Contractor’s failure to conform to Contractor’s reasonable 

directions with regard to the progress of the Work, or a Separate 

Contractor’s use of labor, material or equipment that disrupts 

Contractor’s performance of the Work; 

(ix) FedEx’s default in the performance of any of its obligations under 

this Agreement; or 

(x) FedEx’s suspension or interruption of the Work without cause. 

Local strikes, local lock-outs, non-availability of local labor, inclement weather that causes an 

aggregate delay equal to the Weather Average or less, and FedEx’s exercise of its rights either to 

suspend the Work if Contractor defaults in the performance of any of its obligations or to require 

the correction of any non-conforming Work will not constitute the basis for an Excusable Delay 

and justify an extension of the Substantial Completion Date. Any delay other than an Excusable 

Delay will constitute an “Unexcused Delay”. 

(b) In order to obtain an extension of the Substantial Completion Date necessitated by 

an Excusable Delay, Contractor must make a written claim to FedEx in each instance within five 

days after the beginning of the Excusable Delay and, if Contractor fails to make a timely claim 

for an extension in accordance with the foregoing, Contractor waives its right, if any, to such 

extension. In the case of a delay of the nature described in division (v) of Section 3.03(a), 

Contractor must make its written claim before it disturbs the conditions giving rise to that claim 

and must afford FedEx an opportunity to examine the conditions in their undisturbed state. 

Within the time reasonably required to assess the effect that the claimed delay will have on the 

Construction Schedule, Contractor must supplement its claim with a detailed estimate of that 

effect. Within 15 days after receipt of both Contractor's claim and its estimate of the claimed 

delay’s effect, FedEx shall render a good faith written decision granting, rejecting or modifying 

the Contractor's claim. FedEx may not act unreasonably in rendering its decision; FedEx will not 

be acting unreasonably, however, if it denies Contractor’s claim for an extension for an otherwise 

Excusable Delay that only affects portions of the Work not found on the critical path in the 

Construction Schedule. FedEx’s failure to render a decision on Contractor’s claim within the 

time set forth above will constitute a denial of the claim. Notwithstanding FedEx’s granting of 

Contractor’s claim for an extension, Contractor must take reasonable steps to limit the duration 

of the Excusable Delay that gave rise to its claim. FedEx’s granting of Contractor’s claim for an 

extension will not impair any right to terminate this Agreement, or to exercise any other remedy, 

that FedEx has elsewhere in this Agreement. The parties will resolve any dispute that arises 

regarding the action FedEx takes with respect to Contractor’s claim for any extension of the 

Substantial Completion Date in accordance with the procedures set forth in Article 26. If, within 

ten business days after the date on which FedEx’s denial of Contractor’s claim for an extension 

occurs, Contractor fails to both give FedEx written notice that it believes FedEx’s denial 

constitutes an acceleration of the time within which Contractor must complete the Work and 

challenge the reasonableness of FedEx’s denial by initiating the dispute resolution procedures set 

6

forth in Article 26, Contractor waives its right to any relief to which it may otherwise be entitled 

by virtue of such an alleged acceleration other than an extension of the Substantial Completion 

Date, including, without limitation, relief in the form of an increase in the Contractor’s Fee or 

damages. Moreover, except as specifically provided in Section 3.04, Contractor waives any 

claim to any relief to which it may otherwise be entitled by virtue of the occurrence of an 

Excusable Delay other than an extension of the Substantial Completion Date in accordance with 

the foregoing provisions of this Section 3.03, including, without limitation, any claim for an 

increase in the Contractor’s Fee or for damages. 

Section 3.04. Circumstances Permitting Increase in Contractor’s Fee. 

If an Excusable 

Delay of the nature described in division (v), (vii), (viii), (ix) or (x) of Section 3.03(a) occurs, 

Contractor may receive, in addition to an extension of the Substantial Completion Date, a 

reasonable adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee (as defined in Section 4.01 below) to reflect the 

additional costs, if any, that Contractor incurs by virtue of the occurrence of that Excusable 

Delay. In order to obtain the foregoing adjustment, Contractor must make a written claim to 

FedEx in each instance within ten days after the beginning of the Excusable Delay and, if 

Contractor fails to make a timely claim for an adjustment in accordance with the foregoing, 

Contractor waives its right, if any, to any adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee by virtue of the 

occurrence of the Excusable Delay. Within the time reasonably required to compile a detailed 

itemization of the additional costs that Contractor and its Subcontractors expect to incur by 

reason of the occurrence of the Excusable Delay and such additional documents as FedEx may 

reasonably request to corroborate that itemization, Contractor must supplement its claim with 

that itemization and those additional documents. Within 15 days after receipt of Contractor's 

claim and its supplemental materials, FedEx shall render a good faith written decision granting, 

rejecting or modifying Contractor's claim. FedEx may not act unreasonably in rendering its 

decision. FedEx’s failure to render a decision on Contractor’s claim within the time set forth 

above will constitute a denial of the claim. The parties will resolve any dispute that arises 

regarding the action FedEx takes with respect to Contractor’s claim for adjustments to the 

Contractor’s Fee in accordance with the procedures set forth in Article 26. 

Section 3.05. Construction Schedule. Within 14 days after the Effective Date, Contractor 

shall submit to FedEx a schedule that Contractor prepares based on the Contract Documents in 

accordance with the critical path method in a format acceptable to FedEx, that shows the order in 

which Contractor proposes to prosecute the Work and Contractor's estimates of the dates on 

which completion of each segment of the Work will occur, and that clearly defines reasonable 

unitary and total times for all portions of the Work. That schedule must show the time periods 

within which FedEx, and Separate Contractors must complete other tasks that will affect the time 

required for Contractor’s performance of the Work. Contractor must include with the schedule a 

list of the permits required for Contractor’s lawful performance of the Work and the schedule 

must show the outside date by which Contractor anticipates receiving each such permit. 

Contractor shall make any adjustments to that schedule that become necessary by reason of 

requests by FedEx to adjust the time periods relevant to its tasks and re-submit the revised 

schedule to FedEx for approval. After FedEx causes its representative to initial Contractor’s 

proposed schedule, that schedule will become the “Construction Schedule” for purposes of this 

Agreement. Promptly following FedEx’s granting of an extension of the Substantial Completion 

7

Date in accordance with the terms of Section 3.03, Contractor shall prepare and furnish to FedEx 

a revised Construction Schedule reflecting that extension. With each Application for Payment 

that Contractor submits to FedEx in accordance with the requirements of the attached Exhibit C- 

1, 

Contractor shall submit to FedEx a comparison that Contractor prepares in a format acceptable 

to FedEx and that shows the planned progress in the Work, as reflected in the approved 

Construction Schedule, the progress that Contractor has actually achieved through the end of the 

period covered by the Application for Payment, and, if delays have occurred in the performance 

of the Work, the effect that those delays will have on the dates on which substantial completion 

of the Work will occur in the absence of any change in Contractor’s plans for prosecuting the 

remainder of the Work. For Contractor’s sole convenience and without a request from FedEx to 

do so, Contractor may try to substantially complete the Work in advance of the Substantial 

Completion Date and may propose a Construction Schedule that reflects Contractor’s intent in 

that regard. Neither FedEx’s approval of such a Construction Schedule nor Contractor’s 

completion of the Work in accordance with that Construction Schedule will entitle Contractor to 

any adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee. Moreover, the occurrence of an Excusable Delay of the 

nature described in division (v), (vii), (viii), (ix) or (x) of Section 3.03(a) that causes Contractor 

to substantially complete the Work after the early completion date specified in the approved 

Construction Schedule, but on or before the Substantial Completion Date will also not entitle 

Contractor to any adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee. Contractor must make the schedule 

submissions required by virtue of this Section 3.05 in both electronic and paper format. 

Section 3.06. Acceleration of the Work. 

(a) With or without the occurrence of a delay in 

the performance of the Work, FedEx may direct that Contractor accelerate the progress of the 

Work by means of requiring its forces and those of its Subcontractors to work overtime, by 

adding, or causing its Subcontractors to add, additional crews or shifts, or by re-sequencing the 

Work. Promptly following its receipt of FedEx’s request in which FedEx specifies the portion of 

the Work that FedEx wishes to accelerate and the time within which FedEx wishes to achieve the 

completion of that portion of the Work, Contractor shall provide FedEx with its 

recommendations for an effective and economical acceleration of the Work. Contractor’s 

recommendation will include a comparison that Contractor prepares in a format acceptable to 

FedEx and that shows the planned progress in the Work that will occur if the acceleration does 

not occur and the planned progress in the Work that will occur if the acceleration does occur. If 

FedEx wishes to advance the Substantial Completion Date then applicable to the Work, 

Contractor’s recommendation will also include a statement that sets forth in detail, with a 

suitable breakdown by trades and work classifications, the adjustments in the Contractor’s Fee 

that must occur in order for Contractor to be able to achieve the degree of progress reflected in 

FedEx’s request. In formulating that statement, Contractor must take into account the impact of 

the labor inefficiency, if any, that will be associated with the acceleration that is under 

consideration. 

(b) If an Unexcused Delay has occurred and FedEx wishes Contractor to accelerate the 

progress of the Work in order to meet the approved Construction Schedule then applicable to the 

Work, FedEx may direct Contractor to implement its recommendations for the acceleration 

merely by delivering written notice to Contractor; under those circumstances, Contractor will not 

be entitled to any adjustment of the Contractor’s Fee by reason of the acceleration. FedEx’s 

8

failure to deliver that notice to Contractor will not release Contractor from liability for damages 

that FedEx sustains by virtue of Contractor’s failure to complete the Work in accordance with the 

approved Construction Schedule. 

(c) If any circumstances other than the occurrence of an Unexcused Delay exist in 

respect of FedEx’s request for Contractor’s recommendations regarding acceleration of the 

progress of the Work, FedEx may direct Contractor to implement its recommendations for 

acceleration only by means of its execution of a Change Order or a Construction Change 

Directive in accordance with the procedures set forth in Article 9. Until the parties execute a 

Change Order, or FedEx executes and delivers a Construction Change Directive, in connection 

with a proposed acceleration of the progress of the Work, Contractor has neither obligation nor 

authority to proceed with the implementation of its recommendations. 

(d) The parties do not intend this Section 3.06 to preclude Contractor from accelerating 

the progress of the Work on its own initiative when it does so without any expectation that it will 

be entitled to an adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee by virtue of having done so. 

Section 3.07. Punch List. 

Upon substantial completion of the Work, Contractor shall 

inspect the Work and present to FedEx a list (the "Punch List") of items to be accomplished by 

Contractor to fully complete the Work in accordance with this Agreement and the Contract 

Documents and a schedule for such work (the "Punch List Schedule"). If FedEx objects to the 

omission of any item from the Punch List or to the Punch List Schedule, FedEx may notify 

Contractor of their objections within ten business days following the date of its receipt of the 

Punch List and Punch List Schedule, and Contractor will make such corrections and adjustments 

to the Punch List and Punch List Schedule as are necessary to reflect and address the objections 

of FedEx. Moreover, based upon FedEx’s review of the “as-built” drawings and specifications 

that Contractor must deliver to Owner in accordance with the terms of Section 6.01 below, 

FedEx may make additions to the Punch List by delivering written notice to Contractor within 60 

days after the date of FedEx’s receipt of the last of those “as-built” drawings and Contractor will 

make such adjustments to the Punch List and the Punch List Schedule as are necessary to reflect 

and address FedEx’s required additions. Contractor shall perform the work required by the 

corrected Punch List in accordance with the adjusted Punch List Schedule. 

Section 3.08. Suspension of the Work. 

With or without cause, FedEx may order 

Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt any part of the Work for such period of time 

as FedEx elects. 

ARTICLE 4 

PAYMENT 

Section 4.01. Contractor’s Fee. (a) As full consideration for Contractor's performance of 

the Work in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the other Contract Documents, 

FedEx shall pay to Contractor a fee (the "Contractor's Fee") of 

______________________________________ Dollars ($____________). FedEx shall pay the 

Contractor’s Fee in accordance with the payment procedure described in Exhibit C-1. 

9

(b) The Contractor’s Fee, as adjusted by Change Orders executed in accordance with 

the terms of this Agreement and by the procedures set forth in Article 26 following FedEx’s 

execution and delivery of Construction Change Directives, is inclusive of all remuneration that 

FedEx must pay Contractor in connection with the Work and the performance of the obligations 

Contractor undertakes under the terms of this Agreement, including, without limitation, 

Contractor’s obligation to pay Transaction Taxes and Contractor Taxes in accordance with the 

terms of Article 14 below, and will not be increased by reason of losses, costs and expenses that 

are incurred by reason of the bad faith or willful misconduct of Contractor, including, without 

limitation, losses, costs and expenses to the extent attributable to: 

(i) Contractor's continued performance of the Work without prior 

notice to FedEx after Contractor discovers or becomes aware of 

any errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents 

or in the earlier performance of the Work or of any violations of 

Legal Requirements; 

(ii) Contractor’s performance of the Work without prior notice to 

FedEx after Contractor discovers or becomes aware of any 

unanticipated condition, or the occurrence of any event, that is 

likely to adversely affect performance of the Work; and 

(iii) Contractor's intentional or grossly negligent failure to adhere to 

particular methods or operating procedures or sequences or 

techniques specified in the Contract Documents or applicable 

Legal Requirements, unless FedEx expressly directs it to do so in 

writing. 

Section 4.02. Allowances. 

The Contractor’s Fee includes all allowances (individually, an 

“Allowance” and collectively, the “Allowances”) set forth in the Contract Documents. An 

Allowance will cover the cost of the Materials delivered and unloaded at the Site and all 

applicable Transaction Taxes. The costs Contractor incurs in connection with the handling of an 

Allowance item at the Site, including, without limitation, labor costs, installation costs, overhead 

and profit, are included in the Contractor’s Fee and not in the Allowance for that item. If the 

actual cost of performing that portion of the Work included within an Allowance is more or less 

than the Allowance amount, the parties will execute a Change Order to adjust the Contractor’s 

Fee to reflect the shortage or surplus in the Allowance. Contractor must cause that portion of the 

Work included within an Allowance to be performed for such amounts and by such persons as 

FedEx may direct; FedEx, however, may not require Contractor to use any person to whom 

Contractor has a reasonable objection. 

Section 4.03. Retainage. (a) In making any payment to Contractor (other than Final 

Payment), FedEx will retain ten percent (10%) of the amount FedEx approves for payment 

("Retainage"). The Retainage will become due and payable to Contractor only when Final 

Payment becomes due and payable as provided in this Agreement. If permitted by applicable law, 

10

FedEx may release out of the Retainage at Contractor’s request for remittance to a Subcontractor 

all or part of the retainage withheld under the terms of the Subcontractor’s Subcontract. As a 

condition to any early release of Retainage, Contractor must deliver to FedEx Waivers of 

Mechanics’ and Materialmen’s Lien in the form of the attached Exhibit C-4 

11 

that have been 

executed by the Subcontractors that will be receiving the early release of Retainage. FedEx's 

election to permit any early release of Retainage will not constitute a waiver of, or otherwise 

prejudice, FedEx's right to require retention of the full amount of the Retainage until the Final 

Payment becomes due if, in FedEx's sole judgment, circumstances warrant that action. 

(b) With FedEx’s consent, Contractor may elect to retain from a Subcontractor until 

Final Payment becomes due an amount in excess of ten percent (10%) of the amounts approved 

for payment under the terms of the Subcontractor’s Subcontract. If Contractor makes an election 

of the nature described above, FedEx will additionally retain from amounts approved for 

payment under the terms of this Agreement an amount equal to the amount of retainage that 

Contractor establishes in excess of ten percent (10%) of the amounts approved for payment under 

the terms of the Subcontract. FedEx and Contractor will jointly decide when circumstances 

warrant the release of the additional retainage to the affected Subcontractor. 

Section 4.04. Payment for Material Stored On-Site. If called for in Exhibit C-1, FedEx 

shall make payment to Contractor for the actual unit cost (excluding any transportation or 

handling charges) of Materials suitably stored and intended for incorporation in the Work upon 

storage at the Site or at a location off the Site that FedEx expressly authorizes by advance written 

notice to Contractor; payments by FedEx in accordance with the foregoing will be subject to the 

payment procedures set forth in Exhibit C-1 and the following conditions: 

(i) Contractor must furnish supporting evidence satisfactory to FedEx 

evidencing the cost of the Materials and the actual shipment of the 

Materials to the Site or the other authorized location; 

(ii) Contractor must store the Materials in accordance with applicable 

manufacturer's recommendations and FedEx's instructions and 

must take security measures to protect the Materials from theft, 

casualty or deterioration, including, without limitation, storage in a 

bonded warehouse at FedEx’s request; 

(iii) Payment for stored Materials will be subject to Retainage; 

(iv) Contractor must submit to FedEx bills of sale or such other 

documentation as establishes to FedEx's satisfaction that title to 

such Materials passes to FedEx immediately upon payment, free of 

all liens and security interests; 

(v) Contractor must submit to FedEx evidence that establishes to 

FedEx’s satisfaction that the stored Materials are marked or

segregated so as to give adequate notice to all third parties of 

FedEx’s title to the Materials; and 

(vii) The aggregate cost of Materials stored at any one time, whether at 

the Site or elsewhere, will not exceed One Hundred Thousand 

Dollars ($100,000) without FedEx’s express written consent. 

Section 4.05. Contractor's Representations Regarding Applications for Payment. 

Contractor must sign each Application for Payment. Each Application for Payment will 

constitute Contractor's representation that the Work has progressed to the level for which 

payment is requested, that Contractor has properly performed the Work in accordance with all 

requirements of this Agreement, and that Contractor knows of no reason why payment should not 

be made as requested. Contractor’s submission of an Application for Payment in connection 

with its performance of the Work will constitute an affirmative representation that all Work for 

which Contractor has received payments from FedEx is free and clear of liens, claims, security 

interests or other encumbrances in favor of Contractor or any other person or entity whatsoever. 

If FedEx learns that any of Contractor’s representations, as set forth in this Section 4.05, are 

wholly or partially inaccurate, FedEx may withhold payment of sums then or in the future 

otherwise due to Contractor until Contractor corrects the inaccuracy and the circumstances giving 

rise to the inaccuracy to FedEx's reasonable satisfaction. 

Section 4.06. FedEx's Review Of Applications for Payment. 

FedEx has the right to 

review all Applications for Payment and to examine the Work at the Site or elsewhere to 

determine whether the quantity and quality of the Work are as represented in the Application for 

Payment and satisfy all requirements of the Contract Documents. 

Section 4.07. Title Passes Upon Payment. 

Contractor warrants that, upon payment of 

each of its Application for Payment, title to all Work covered by the Application for Payment 

will immediately pass to FedEx. 

Section 4.08. Use of Payments. 

Contractor shall use all sums paid to it in accordance 

with the terms of this Agreement for the performance of the Work. Contractor shall apply each 

progress payment it receives from FedEx to the payment of Subcontractors in accordance with 

the Subcontractor Payment Schedule that Contractor included with the Application for Payment 

that formed the basis for FedEx making that progress payment. At FedEx's request, Contractor 

shall furnish satisfactory proof as to the disposition of any monies FedEx pays to Contractor, but 

FedEx has no obligation to see to the proper disposition or application of monies FedEx pays to 

Contractor. 

Section 4.09. Payment Not a Waiver 

. Neither the approval or making of any payment to 

Contractor nor the partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by FedEx constitutes an 

acceptance of any portion of the Work. 

12

Section 4.10. Final Acceptance and Payment. 

(a) FedEx's final acceptance of the Work 

("Final Acceptance") will occur only after (i) Contractor finally completes the Work in its 

entirety (including punch list items), (ii) FedEx accepts the Work in a written notice to 

Contractor, and (iii) Contractor provides FedEx with instruction and operating manuals, parts 

lists, "as-built" drawings and all other items that the terms of the Contract Documents require. 

(b) Within 30 business days after Final Acceptance of the Work or as soon after the 

expiration of that period as FedEx receives the last of the items Contractor must submit in 

accordance with the terms of Sections 4.10(c), 6.01 and 6.02, FedEx shall make the final 

payment ("Final Payment") of amounts properly due Contractor, including any Retainage. 

Subject to the application of any other provision of this Agreement that permits FedEx to deduct 

amounts from the Final Payment, the amount of the Final Payment will be the amount by which 

the Contractor’s Fee, as set forth in Section 4.01, exceeds the aggregate amount of progress 

payments that FedEx has previously paid to Contractor in accordance with the requirements of 

Exhibit C-1. 

(c) FedEx may withhold Final Payment until Contractor submits to FedEx the 

following: 

(i) An affidavit signed by an authorized officer of Contractor stating 

that all payrolls, bills for Materials and Services, and all other 

indebtedness connected with the Work, for which FedEx or any of 

its property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or 

otherwise satisfied; 

(ii) A consent of surety to Final Payment; 

(iii) Proof satisfactory to FedEx of the payment or satisfaction of all of 

Contractor's obligations arising from or connected with the Work, 

including, without limitation, releases and waivers of liens 

executed by Contractor and all of its Subcontractors in favor of 

FedEx and prepared in the form of Exhibit C-4 or such other form 

as FedEx may designate; 

(iv) Evidence of the filing by Contractor of a Notice of Completion of 

the Work conforming to the requirements of the jurisdiction in 

which the Work is performed; 

(v) Certification that all insurance that Contractor must maintain in 

force following Final Payment in accordance with the terms of this 

Agreement is in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to lapse 

without written notice to FedEx; 

(vi) A copy of each permit or license issued in connection with the 

Work and evidence satisfactory to FedEx that the governmental 

13

agency that issued that permit or license has approved that portion 

of the Work to which the permit or license pertains and has closed 

the permit or license; and 

(vii) All photo identification and access badges, if any, issued in 

accordance with the terms of Exhibit F below to workers engaged 

in the performance of the Work, except for lost or stolen badges, 

the loss or theft of which Contractor timely reported to FedEx in 

accordance with the terms of Exhibit F. 

(d) If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver of lien, Contractor may 

furnish a bond in form and amount satisfactory to FedEx to indemnify it against any lien arising 

in favor of that Subcontractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, FedEx reserves the right to make 

payment directly to any Subcontractor (or jointly to the Subcontractor and Contractor) in such 

amount as FedEx determines to be appropriate to protect FedEx's property from a lien to which 

that Subcontractor is entitled or alleges that it is entitled, and the amount owed Contractor will be 

reduced by the amount of any such payment by FedEx. 

Section 4.11. FedEx's Right to Withhold Payment. 

FedEx may withhold all or part of any 

payment (including Final Payment) and it may withhold Retainage to such extent as it deems 

necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: 

(i) defective Work; 

(ii) third-party claims arising from the Work and filed against FedEx, 

or reasonable evidence indicating the probable filing of any such 

claim; 

(iii) reasonable doubt that Contractor will substantially complete the 

Work by the Substantial Completion Date; 

(iv) failure of Contractor to make payments, when due, to its 

Subcontractors or other suppliers of equipment, material or labor 

required in connection with the Work; 

(v) evidence of fraud, over-billing or overpayment discovered upon 

audit; 

(vi) unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by Contractor; 

(vii) reasonable doubt that Contractor can complete the Work for the 

unpaid balance of the Contractor’s Fee; 

(viii) damage to another contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor 

that Contractor causes; or 

14

(ix) inability or failure to account for photo identification or access 

badges issued in accordance with Exhibit F below to workers 

engaged in the performance of the Work. 

If FedEx withholds any part of a payment on the authority of the foregoing, FedEx shall deliver 

written notice to Contractor that sets forth in reasonable detail the circumstance that caused 

FedEx to exercise that right. FedEx shall remit to Contractor any amount withheld on the 

authority of the foregoing promptly after the time at which Contractor rectifies the circumstance 

that caused FedEx to withhold that amount. 

Section 4.12. Acceptance Of Final Payment A Waiver. 

Acceptance by Contractor of 

Final Payment will constitute Contractor’s waiver and release of all claims against FedEx except 

for those claims that Contractor previously made in writing against FedEx, that were pending at 

the time Contractor submitted its Application for Final Payment, and that Contractor specifically 

identified on its Application for Final Payment as unsettled at that time. 

ARTICLE 5 

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 

Section 5.01. Materials Provided by Contractor. 

(a) All Materials incorporated in the 

Work must be new and unused and, when not specified in detail in the Contract Documents, all 

Materials incorporated in the Work must be of the most suitable grade and quality for the 

purpose intended. 

(b) Contractor must furnish, use, install, employ and protect each item of Materials in 

strict compliance with the specifications, recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer 

or supplier, unless those specifications, recommendations or instructions deviate from accepted 

construction practices or the Contract Documents, in which case Contractor shall inform FedEx 

and shall proceed as FedEx directs. Contractor must coordinate and interrelate all Subcontracts 

to ensure the compatibility of Materials and the validity of all warranties and guarantees that the 

Contract Documents require. 

Section 5.02. Type of Material Used. (a) Where the Contract Documents refer to any 

Material by trade name, make or catalog number followed by the words "or equal," that reference 

establishes the standard of quality and performance required and does not reflect an intent to 

limit competition. With FedEx’s prior written approval, Contractor may use other Materials that 

are equal in quality and performance to those named in the Contract Documents, but no such 

approval will constitute a waiver of FedEx's right to require use of Materials that conform to the 

standards of quality and performance established in the Contract Documents with respect to the 

item, for which FedEx approved the substitution. FedEx’s approval of a proposed substitution 

does not constitute final acceptance of the substitute Material if it proves defective or not as 

previously represented. Contractor must bear any additional expense resulting from the 

substitution, including, without limitation, the cost of any supplemental materials or installation 

15

procedures that differ from, or that must be performed in addition to, those required for the 

Material for which Contractor made the substitution. 

(b) Within sufficient time to avoid delays in the Work, Contractor must submit to 

FedEx the name of the manufacturer, model number and other identifying information relating to 

the performance, capacity, nature and rating of Materials proposed in substitution for those 

specified in the Contract Documents. Where the Contract Documents specify Materials by trade 

name, make or catalog number without using the words "or equal," Contractor may not substitute 

Materials and must furnish the items as specified. 

Section 5.03. Non-Conforming Materials. 

(a) If Contractor installs or uses Materials in the 

Work that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that FedEx has 

not previously approved, it does so at the risk of FedEx’s subsequent rejection. 

(b) Contractor is fully and solely responsible for quality control for all Materials used 

in the performance of the Work. 

(c) FedEx may elect to accept any portion of the Work that does not conform with the 

requirements of the Contract Documents instead of requiring Contractor to remove and correct it. 

If FedEx makes that election, the parties shall equitably reduce the Contractor’s Fee and, if that 

reduction occurs after FedEx has previously made Final Payment, Contractor shall promptly 

remit the amount of the reduction to FedEx. The parties will resolve any dispute that arises 

regarding the amount of any adjustment to the Contractor’s Fee required by virtue of the terms of 

this Section 5.03(c) in accordance with the procedures set forth in Article 26. 

Section 5.04. Millennium Compliance. 

Contractor warrants to FedEx that the advent of 

any date or year will not adversely affect the performance of any system, equipment or equipment 

component that Contractor incorporates as part of the Work. 

Section 5.05. FedEx-Furnished Materials. If the Contract Documents include a list of 

either Materials that FedEx intends to pre-purchase and furnish to Contractor for incorporation or 

installation in the Project or Materials, the procurement of which required long lead times, that 

FedEx previously elected to procure (the “FedEx-Furnished Materials”), Contractor shall 

designate the Subcontractors that will be responsible for receiving, off-loading, inventorying, 

storing, protecting and installing the FedEx-Furnished Materials. Each Subcontractor to which 

Contractor delegates that responsibility must furnish all Materials required to handle, install, and 

make operational the FedEx-Furnished Materials for which the Subcontractor is given 

responsibility. Contractor shall cause each Subcontractor having responsibility for FedEx- 

Furnished Materials to inventory all items of FedEx-Furnished Materials for which it has 

responsibility and to report shortages or visible damage to the exterior packaging of delivered 

FedEx-Furnished Materials to Contractor within 72 hours after the time at which delivery of 

those items to the Subcontractor occurs. Contractor shall provide to FedEx’s Representative a 

written daily field report that lists the FedEx-Furnished Materials received during the day to 

which the report applies and the extent of any damage or shortages existing with respect to those 

FedEx-Furnished Materials that the responsible Subcontractor has reported to Contractor that 

16

day. Contractor shall include with its daily field report the transmittals that Subcontractors 

executed to acknowledge the acceptance of possession of the FedEx-Furnished Materials listed 

on that report. Damages or shortages that exist with respect to FedEx-Furnished Materials at the 

time of delivery to the Subcontractor having responsibility for those FedEx-Furnished Materials 

and that Contractor fails to report to FedEx in its daily field report for the day on which the 72hour 

reporting period specified above expires will not entitle Contractor to any adjustment in the 

Contractor’s Fee. In fact, Contractor’s failure to timely report any such damages or shortages as 

above provided will entitle FedEx to reduce the amount of the Contractor’s Fee by the amount 

that FedEx incurs to replace the damaged items and to provide the missing items. 

Section 5.06. Acceptance of Delivery. 

Except to the extent that FedEx expressly permits 

otherwise, Contractor shall accept, and shall cause the Subcontractors to accept, delivery of, and 

title to, all Materials at the Site. 

ARTICLE 6 

"AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS AND DATA 

Section 6.01. "As-Built" Drawings. 

Contractor shall maintain a complete set of drawings 

at the Site for the purpose of showing "as-built" conditions. Contractor shall cause those 

drawings to be kept current and to be marked each day to show all changes and variations, with 

each entry being dated and verified as made. Contractor shall furnish to FedEx upon request 

reproducible tracings of "as-built" drawings. Upon completion of the Work and prior to Final 

Payment, Contractor shall provide to FedEx one complete reproducible set and one complete 

printed set of the "as-built" drawings for the Project, and a compact disk on which the “as-built” 

drawings for the Project are recorded in AutoCAD or compatible format (or such other format 

then in common use by commercial architects as FedEx may designate from time to time). 

Section 6.02. Operation and Maintenance Data. 

(a) Contractor shall furnish complete data 

for the operation, repair and maintenance of each operating component and system of the Project 

(the "Data"). The Data shall include prints of shop drawings showing "as-installed" conditions, 

sources of equipment and principal materials, specified tests and performance data, operating 

instructions for both Project components and systems, repair and maintenance data, lubrication 

instructions and recommendations, parts lists and other catalog data or information required to 

operate and maintain any part of the Work. Contractor shall take care to exclude inapplicable or 

duplicate information. 

(b) Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide to FedEx five complete sets of the 

Data arranged alphabetically by components grouped together and securely bound in a durable 

folder or binder labeled and indexed to show its contents. 

(c) Contractor shall also keep at the Site installation information for all machinery and 

equipment, but Contractor may not use used or marked prints or data sheets in assembling the 

Data. 

17

Section 6.03. Information From Suppliers. 

As a condition of its purchase of equipment, 

Contractor shall require its suppliers to (i) furnish complete and adequate operating and 

maintenance data pertaining to their equipment, (ii) assign to FedEx any warranty, express or 

implied, that the manufacturer of the equipment furnishes, and (iii) assign to FedEx any 

customary maintenance or repair service, spare parts supply service or personnel support service 

that the manufacturer of the equipment furnishes. If the terms and conditions of any warranty, 

maintenance or repair service, spare parts supply service or personnel support service that the 

manufacturer of the equipment furnishes are negotiable, FedEx may negotiate those terms and 

conditions with the manufacturer at FedEx's election. Contractor shall use its best efforts to 

advise FedEx in advance of placing any order for equipment, for which the warranty period 

commences upon purchase or shipment. 

ARTICLE 7 

SUBCONTRACTORS 

Section 7.01. Definition. 

As used in this Agreement and the other Contract Documents, a 

"Subcontractor" is any person or organization that has either a contract (a "Subcontract") with 

Contractor to perform any portion of the Work or to provide to Contractor Materials or Services 

required in connection with the Work or a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to 

perform any portion of the Work or to provide to a Subcontractor Materials or Services required 

in connection with the Work. 

Section 7.02. No Contractual Relationship With FedEx. 

The Contract Documents do not 

create any contractual relationship between FedEx and any Subcontractor, and no Subcontract 

shall relieve Contractor of its obligation to completely perform the Work for the Contractor’s Fee 

if any Subcontractor fails to perform its work in a satisfactory manner. Contractor is as fully 

responsible to FedEx for the acts and omissions of its Subcontractors and the persons the 

Subcontractors employ, directly or indirectly, as it is for the acts and omissions of persons 

Contractor directly employs. 

Section 7.03. Award of Subcontracts. (a) Contractor may award Subcontracts for 

principal portions of the Work only to persons and entities that appear on a list of pre-qualified 

Subcontractors jointly developed with, and approved by, FedEx or that FedEx approves by means 

of written notice that it delivers to Contractor. To the extent FedEx requires, Contractor shall 

solicit in accordance with FedEx’s written instructions bids for those portions of the Work that 

Contractor intends to furnish by means of Subcontracts. In the absence of such a requirement, 

Contractor shall furnish to FedEx written notice of the name of each Subcontractor that 

Contractor intends to hire and the amount of the contract sum for which that prospective 

Subcontractor is prepared to perform. Contractor may not execute a Subcontract with any 

prospective Subcontractor to whom FedEx objects promptly following its receipt of Contractor’s 

notice, even if FedEx had previously indicated its approval of that Subcontractor.[ Each 

Subcontractor bidder list must include at least four prospective Subcontractors. When preparing 

a bidder list for FedEx’s consideration, Contractor must source the prospective bidders appearing 

on that list in the market place and must select the prospective Subcontractors appearing on that 

list without prejudice and so as to avoid any conflict of interest. One of the factors the parties 

18

will consider when developing and approving bidder lists will be local and minority 

participation. FedEx’s goal is that the aggregate amount paid to Subcontractors who are 

disadvantaged business enterprises will not be less than fifteen percent (15%) of the Contractor’s 

Fee. To that end, Contractor shall observe the requirements set forth in the attached Exhibit G. 

(b) Contractor may contract, and may permit its Subcontractors to contract, only with 

Subcontractors skilled in the tasks assigned to them and capable of working harmoniously with 

all trades, crafts and other individuals on the Project. In that regard, Contractor must use its best 

efforts to minimize the likelihood of any strike, work stoppage or other labor disturbance. To 

that end, Contractor shall promptly resolve claims, complaints, labor disputes and disputes over 

assignment or work tasks among the Subcontractors engaged in the performance of the Work. 

(c) FedEx may require Contractor to dismiss any Subcontractor for misconduct or nonperformance 

and to substitute a Subcontractor acceptable to FedEx. If FedEx requires a 

substitute for any Subcontractor for any reason other than the Subcontractor’s misconduct or 

non-performance, the parties will adjust the Contractor’s Fee by means of a Change Order in 

order to reflect the difference in cost that the substitution occasions. 

(d) Contractor may replace a Subcontractor to whom Contractor has awarded a 

Subcontract in accordance with the terms of this Agreement only with FedEx's prior written 

approval, only with a Subcontractor that appears on the list of pre-qualified Subcontractors 

jointly developed with, and approved by, FedEx or that FedEx has otherwise expressly approved, 

and only for the following reasons: 

(i) Inability of the Subcontractor to provide bonds, if required; 

(ii) Failure of the Subcontractor to perform according to approved 

schedules or other provisions of the Contract Documents; or 

(iii) Other reasons that reasonably would render the Subcontractor 

unable to perform its work according to the Contract Documents, 

as Contractor certifies in writing. 

Section 7.04. Subcontract Terms. 

A Subcontractor must perform all portions of the Work 

that it undertakes in accordance with the terms of a written agreement between Contractor and 

the Subcontractor (and, where appropriate, between Subcontractors and their subcontractors), 

which agreement must provide for the payment of a fixed contract sum to the Subcontractor as 

consideration for the Materials or Services that the Subcontractor is furnishing. Each 

Subcontract (other than those by which Contractor procures the utility services that Contractor 

must provide in accordance with the terms of Section 10.06 below) must contain provisions that: 

(i) preserve and protect the rights of FedEx under the terms of the 

Contract Documents as they pertain to the portion of the Work 

performed by the Subcontractor; 

19

(ii) require that the Subcontractor's work be performed in accordance 

with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 

(iii) require submission to Contractor of applications for payment; 

(iv) require that the Subcontractor submit to Contractor all claims for 

additional monies, extensions of time, damages for delay or similar 

matters relating to the subcontracted portion of the Work in 

sufficient time to enable Contractor to comply in the manner 

provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by Contractor 

upon FedEx; 

(v) obligate the Subcontractor to consent specifically to the provisions 

of Sections 4.03, 7.02, 16.01 and 24.01 of this Agreement; 

(vi) incorporate into the Subcontract a waiver by the Subcontractor in 

favor of Contractor that is substantially the same as the waiver set 

forth in Section 3.03(b); 

(vii) require the Subcontractor (A) to be subject to, and to comply with, 

the requirements of Section 14.02 below to the same extent that 

would exist if the term “Contractor Taxes” meant taxes, excises, 

duties and assessments (I) that arise out of the Subcontractor’s 

performance of its portion of the Work and are levied, assessed or 

imposed by any governmental or quasi-governmental authority or 

any agency of any such authority having jurisdiction over the Site 

and the Work, including, without limitation, taxes and 

contributions that Legal Requirements require for employment 

insurance, pensions, old age retirement funds or similar purposes, 

(II) that are based upon the Subcontractor’s gross receipts or net 

income, or (III) that are imposed on the Subcontractor for the 

privilege of doing business or exercising a franchise, and (B) to be 

subject to, and to comply with, the requirements of Section 14.01 

to the extent that it applies to Transaction Taxes payable in respect 

of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work; 

(viii) include FedEx and Landlord as additional indemnitees in any 

indemnity the Subcontractor makes in favor of Contractor in the 

Subcontract; 

(ix) require the Subcontractor to include FedEx and Landlord as 

additional insureds under the terms of any policy of commercial 

general liability insurance that the Subcontractor must maintain in 

force under the terms of the Subcontract; 

20

(x) have the effect of waiving and releasing, to the extent of the 

proceeds that are or would be payable to it in respect of policies of 

property insurance that the Subcontractor maintains in force or that 

are generally available to insure personal property comparable to 

that of the Subcontractor in the metropolitan area in which the Site 

is located, all rights of recovery, claim, action or cause of action 

that it may now or later have against FedEx or Landlord or 

FedEx’s or Landlord’s agents, officers and employees, by virtue of 

any loss or damage to the Subcontractor’s personal property, 

regardless of cause or origin, including, without limitation, the 

negligence of FedEx or any of its representatives, agents, 

employees, contractors and invitees; 

(xi) set forth an adequately defined scope of performance and bind the 

Subcontractor to the requirements relating to contract sum 

adjustments for changes in the scope of its portion of the Work, as 

set forth in Section 9.03 below; 

(xii) when applicable, require the Subcontractor to provide drawings in 

AutoCAD or compatible format (or such other format then in 

common use by commercial architects as FedEx may designate 

from time to time); 

(xiii) require the Subcontractor to use test forms that FedEx provides 

when conducting tests that must be performed in respect of its 

portion of the Work; 

(xiv) accord to Contractor a right to terminate the Subcontract without 

cause that is comparable to the right set forth in Section 25.02 of 

this Agreement and obligate the Subcontractor to reserve a 

comparable right in its favor in any lower-tier Subcontract; 

(xv) include warranties in favor of Contractor and FedEx substantially 

the same as those set forth in Sections 18.01 and 18.04 of this 

Agreement; and 

(xvi) incorporate dispute resolution provisions that are substantially the 

same as, and consistent with, Article 26 of this Agreement. 

Section 7.05. Unit Prices. As required by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall 

solicit unit price bids from prospective Subcontractors for certain portions of the Work and, in 

the Subcontracts awarded with respect to those portions of the Work, shall obligate the 

Subcontractor (i) during the term of the Subcontract to adjust the contract sum set forth in the 

Subcontract based on the unit prices it bid (without the application of any multiplier) if changes 

in the Work that FedEx requests affects that Subcontractor’s portion of the Work, and (ii) to 

21

execute at Contractor’s request additional Subcontracts under the terms of which the 

Subcontractor will perform additional portions of the Work for contract sums based on the unit 

prices it bid (without the application of any multiplier). 

Section 7.06. Kick-backs and Self-Dealing. 

Contractor may not induce any person or 

entity engaged in performing the Work to give up any part of the compensation to which that 

person or entity is entitled. Moreover, without FedEx’s written consent, Contractor may not call 

for, or by exclusion require or recommend, the use of any Subcontractor, consultant, Material, 

system, process or procedure in which Contractor has a direct or indirect proprietary or other 

pecuniary interest. 

ARTICLE 8 

PAYMENT TO SUBCONTRACTORS 

Section 8.01. FedEx's Withholding of Payment. 

If FedEx withholds monies for any cause 

attributable to the fault of Contractor, but not to the fault of a Subcontractor, who would have 

received a payment out of the payment for which Contractor had made application to FedEx, 

Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor for its work, to the extent completed, upon demand made 

by the Subcontractor at any time after the payment by FedEx to Contractor otherwise would have 

become due. 

Section 8.02. Independent Obligation to Pay. 

Contractor's obligation to pay its 

Subcontractors is an independent obligation from FedEx's obligation to pay Contractor, and 

FedEx has no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor. 

Consequently, FedEx's withholding of payments in accordance with the terms of this Agreement 

will not be grounds for Contractor to withhold payments properly due its Subcontractors. FedEx 

reserves the right, however, to make payment jointly to Contractor and any Subcontractor if 

FedEx becomes aware that Contractor fails to pay, or unreasonably withholds payment from, that 

Subcontractor. FedEx’s use of that joint check procedure will create no rights in favor of any 

person or entity beyond the right of the check payees to payment of the check and will not 

commit FedEx to repeat the procedure in the future. 

Section 8.03. Discharge of Liens. Contractor must not permit any laborer's, materialman's, 

mechanic's or other similar liens to be filed or otherwise imposed on any part of the Work or the 

Site by any person claiming by, through or under Contractor unless the filing or imposition of the 

lien is attributable to FedEx’s failure to make a payment to Contractor when obligated to do so 

under the terms of this Agreement. If, under other circumstances, any laborer's, materialman's, 

mechanic's or other similar lien or claim is filed, Contractor shall cause the lien to be released or 

discharged by payment, bonding or otherwise within 25 days after Contractor receives notice of 

the filing or imposition of the lien. 

22

ARTICLE 9 

CHANGES 

Section 9.01. Changes in the Work. (a) Without invalidating this Agreement, FedEx may 

order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to or deducting from the Work by 

executing a Change Order in the form of the attached Exhibit D-1 or a Construction Change 

Directive in the form of the attached Exhibit D-2. 

Contractor shall perform all work required by 

virtue of a valid Change Order or a valid Construction Change Directive in accordance with the 

conditions of this Agreement and the other Contract Documents. 

(b) By written instructions to Contractor, FedEx may also make changes in the Work 

not involving extra cost and not inconsistent with the purposes of the Work without execution of 

a Change Order or a Construction Change Directive, but, except for such changes, Contractor 

may not undertake any extra Work or bring about a change in the Work unless either the parties 

execute a Change Order or FedEx executes and delivers a Construction Change Directive. No 

claim for an addition to the Contractor’s Fee or any extension of the Substantial Completion Date 

will be valid unless FedEx orders it in a written Change Order or FedEx issues a Construction 

Change Directive and the outcome of the application of the dispute resolution procedures set 

forth in Article 26 to FedEx’s requirement for the change in the Work is the claimed adjustment 

in the Contractor’s Fee or the Substantial Completion Date, as applicable. 

Section 9.02. Change Order Procedure. Upon receipt of a request from FedEx for extra 

work or changes in the Work that would increase or decrease the Contractor’s Fee or affect the 

Substantial Completion Date, Contractor shall furnish to FedEx a detailed statement of 

Contractor's proposal for performing the extra work or changes in the Work and the effect of the 

extra work or changes, if any, on the Contractor’s Fee, and the Substantial Completion Date. If 

FedEx approves in writing Contractor's proposal, the parties shall execute a Change Order after 

observing any special conditions set forth in Exhibit C-1, which Change Order will adjust the 

Contractor’s Fee, and the Substantial Completion Date, as appropriate. If required by FedEx, 

Contractor shall solicit bids with respect to any work called for in a proposed Change Order in 

accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and the other Contract Documents. If the 

parties fail to agree upon the terms of a Change Order, FedEx may issue a Construction Change 

Directive to Contractor that directs Contractor to proceed with the implementation of all or part 

of the proposed change that was the subject of that Change Order. If, at the time of FedEx’s 

issuance of a Construction Change Directive or at any subsequent time prior to the parties’ 

execution of a Change Order with respect to the extra work or change described in the 

Construction Change Directive, Contractor makes a good faith determination that the parties’ 

opinions as to the effect that the extra work or change should have on the Contractor’s Fee are 

more than ______________________ Dollars ($_________.00) apart, Contractor may elect not 

to proceed with the extra work or change until the parties execute a Change Order with respect to 

that extra work or change. Contractor will make that election, if at all, by delivering written 

notice to FedEx. If, after FedEx’s issuance of a Construction Change Directive, the parties fail to 

agree upon the terms of a Change Order covering the extra work or change described in the 

Construction Change Directive, the parties will use the procedures set forth in Article 26 to 

23

determine the adjustments in the Contractor’s Fee and the Substantial Completion Date to which 

Contractor is reasonably entitled by virtue of the change in the scope of the Work that FedEx has 

directed. Upon Contractor’s receipt of a Construction Change Directive that FedEx has 

executed, Contractor must promptly proceed with the implementation of the proposed change 

that was the subject of the Change Order upon which the parties failed to agree; Contractor’s 

failure to execute the Construction Change Directive will not justify any delay on Contractor’s 

part in proceeding with the implementation of the proposed change. 

Section 9.03. Limitations on Contractor’s Fee Adjustments. 

In making any proposal in 

accordance with Section 9.02 with respect to extra work or changes in the Work that will require 

Materials or Services covered by unit prices that Contractor obtains from its Subcontractors in 

accordance with Section 7.05, Contractor shall base its proposal on those unit prices without the 

application of any multiplier or mark-up. In making any proposal[in accordance with Section 

9.02 above, Contractor must observe, and must cause each Subcontractor that the extra work or 

changes in the Work will affect to observe, the following requirements: 

(i) In the case of changes that will enlarge the scope of the Work, the following 

restrictions with respect to the adjustments in contract sums payable to 

affected Subcontractors and to the adjustment of the Contractor’s Fee will 

apply: 

(a) No Subcontractor that will be performing any part of the extra work 

or implementing any part of the change in the Work through the use 

of its own forces may charge more than five percent (5%) of the 

Subcontractor’s good faith estimate of the Cost of the Change, as 

defined below, for overhead and profit associated with that part of 

the extra work or change in the Work; 

(b) No Subcontractor that will be performing any part of the extra work 

or implementing any part of the change in the Work through the use 

of one or more lower-tier Subcontractors may charge more than five 

percent (5%) of the Subcontractor’s good faith estimate of the Cost 

of the Change for overhead and profit associated with that part of the 

extra work or change in the Work; 

(c) Contractor may not charge more than five percent (5%) of 

Contractor’s good faith estimate of the Cost of the Change for 

overhead and profit associated with that part of the extra work or 

change in the Work that Contractor will be performing through the 

use of its own forces; and 

(d) Contractor may not charge more than five percent (5%) of 

Contractor’s good faith estimate of the Cost of the Change for 

overhead and profit associated with that part of the extra work or 

24

change in the Work that Contractor will be performing through the 

use of one or more Subcontractors; and 

(ii) In the case of changes that will reduce the scope of the Work, the following 

requirements with respect to the adjustments in contract sums payable to 

affected Subcontractors and to the adjustment of the Contractor’s Fee will 

apply: 

(a) Each Subcontractor that intended to perform any part of that portion 

of the Work eliminated from the scope of the Work through the use 

of its own forces must reduce the overhead and profit encompassed 

within the contract sum set forth in its Subcontract by five percent 

(5%) of the Subcontractor’s good faith estimate of the Cost of the 

Change, as defined below, for that part of the Work to be eliminated; 

(b) Each Subcontractor that intended to perform any part of that portion 

of the Work eliminated from the scope of the Work through the use 

of one or more lower-tier Subcontractors must reduce the overhead 

and profit encompassed within the contract sum set forth in its 

Subcontract by five percent (5%) of the Subcontractor’s good faith 

estimate of the Cost of the Change, as defined below, for that part of 

the Work to be eliminated; 

(c) Contractor must reduce the overhead and profit encompassed within 

the Contractor’s Fee by five percent (5%) of Contractor’s good faith 

estimate of the Cost of the Change associated with that part of the 

Work to be eliminated that Contractor planned to perform through 

the use of its own forces; and 

(d) Contractor must reduce the overhead and profit encompassed within 

the Contractor’s Fee by five percent (5%) of Contractor’s good faith 

estimate of the Cost of the Change associated with that part of the 

Work to be eliminated that Contractor planned to perform through 

the use of one or more Subcontractors. 

The parties will memorialize a change that enlarges the scope of the Work by means of an 

“Additive Change Order” and will memorialize a change that reduces the scope of the Work by 

means of a “Deductive Change Order”. In the context of an Additive Change Order: 

(i) a Subcontractor’s “Cost of the Change” will be the net increase in the cost 

categories identified below that the Subcontractor will realize by reason of 

the performance of the extra work or the implementation of the changes in 

the Work described in the Change Order, and 

25

(ii) the Contractor’s “Cost of the Change” will be the sum of (a) the net increase 

in the cost categories identified below that Contractor will realize by reason 

of the performance of the extra work or the implementation of the changes 

in the Work described in the Change Order and (b) the sum of the Costs of 

the Change that the Subcontractors that the extra work or changes in the 

Work will affect will respectively realize. 

In the context of a Deductive Change Order: 

(i) a Subcontractor’s “Cost of the Change” will be the net savings in the cost 

categories identified below that the Subcontractor will realize by reason of 

the implementation of the changes in the Work described in the Change 

Order, and 

(ii) the Contractor’s “Cost of the Change” will be the sum of (a) the net savings 

in the cost categories identified below that Contractor will realize by reason 

of the implementation of the change in the Work described in the Change 

Order and (b) the sum of the Costs of the Change that the Subcontractors 

that the changes in the Work will affect will respectively realize. 

The cost categories that Contractor and each affected Subcontractor may consider in calculating a 

“Cost of the Change” include: 

(i) Wages paid for labor in the direct employ of Contractor or the 

Subcontractor, as the case may be, in the performance of the Work; the 

cost of welfare or fringe benefits, if any, furnished to such wage earners; 

usual vacation pay that Contractor or the Subcontractor pays to its key 

wage-earning employees engaged in the performance of the Work at the 

Site and incentive bonuses paid to such key employees to the extent that 

FedEx approved the amount of the incentive in advance; 

(ii) Salaries of the Project Manager, Superintendent and other supervisory or 

administrative personnel that Contractor or the Subcontractor, as the case 

may be, engages in the performance of the Work at the field office or, 

with FedEx's prior approval, at the central office or at shops or on the 

road in expediting the inspection, production or transportation of the 

Materials; the cost of welfare or fringe benefits, if any, furnished to such 

personnel; usual vacation pay that Contractor or the Subcontractor, as the 

case may be, pays to its key salaried employees engaged in the 

performance of the Work at the Site and incentive bonuses paid to such 

key employees to the extent that FedEx approved the amount of the 

incentive in advance; 

(iii) Costs of contributions, assessments or taxes for such items as 

unemployment compensation insurance and Social Security associated 

26

with the wages, salaries or other remuneration paid to Contractor's or the 

Subcontractor’s employees described in divisions (i) and (ii) above; 

(iv) The cost (including transportation, storage, installation, operating, 

dismantling, removal and repair costs not of a capital nature) of all 

Materials, equipment, temporary structures, small tools not owned by 

workmen, and supplies purchased or used in connection with the Work. 

Such costs may include a fair rental for all tools and equipment furnished 

by Contractor or a Subcontractor from its own stock not to exceed 

seventy five percent (75%) (or such greater percentage as FedEx may 

approve) of the published rates based on the most recent edition of 

"Compilation of Nationally Averaged Rental Rates" published by the 

Associated Equipment Distributors; if the tools or equipment furnished 

by Contractor or a Subcontractor from its own stock do not appear on the 

rate schedule of the Associated Equipment Distributors, Contractor's or 

the Subcontractor’s costs may include a fair rental not to exceed seventy 

five percent (75%) (or such greater percentage as FedEx may approve) of 

the rental rate generally charged by third party distributors in the vicinity 

of the Site. Rental costs for any tool or equipment furnished by 

Contractor or a Subcontractor from its own stock may not exceed the 

market value of the tool or the equipment at the time Contractor or the 

Subcontractor commits it to the Work.; 

(v) Fees for permits, licenses, patents, royalties, inspections and surveys; 

(vi) Fees of laboratories for tests that the Contract Documents require 

Contractor or the Subcontractor to provide, except those related to 

defective or non-conforming work; 

(vii) The cost of crossing or protecting any public utility lines, mains or 

conduits, if required and as directed by FedEx; 

(viii) The cost of removal of all debris; 

(ix) Federal, State and municipal sales, use and other similar taxes payable 

with respect to Materials or Services; 

(x) Cost of, or rental charges for, temporary portable buildings, toilets, ice, 

water containers, cups, fire extinguishers, first aid supplies, safety 

equipment, street and sidewalk rental, and FedEx-approved off-site 

storage space or facilities; and 

(xi) Reasonable attorneys' fees, incurred with FedEx's approval in connection 

with the prosecution of the Work. 

27

In the calculation of a “Cost of the Change”, neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor may 

include any cost fairly characterized as follows: 

(i) A cost that would otherwise fit within any of the categories described 

above to the extent that it exceeds the standard costs paid in the locality 

of the Site; 

(ii) The costs associated with the services of any of Contractor's or the 

Subcontractor’s officers or general office supervisory and clerical 

personnel or any of Contractor's or the Subcontractor’s personnel in its 

personnel, legal, labor relations, insurance, accounting, tax, purchasing 

and estimating departments, and all other costs associated with the 

maintenance and operation of Contractor's or the Subcontractor’s general 

offices and established branch offices other than the field office 

established at the Site; 

(iii) Interest costs associated with capital Contractor or the Subcontractor, as 

the case may be, employs in connection with the Work; 

(iv) Federal, State or local income and franchise taxes for which Contractor 

or the Subcontractor is liable; 

(v) Premiums for the performance and payment bonds and the insurance 

required in connection with the Work; 

(vi) The cost of document reproductions, facsimile transmissions, telephone 

service, internet service, postage, parcel delivery charges, photographs, 

blueprints, stationery, office supplies, and related miscellaneous costs 

that Contractor or the Subcontractor will incur in connection with the 

Work, except as expressly enumerated in the preceding sentence; and 

(vii) The cost of furniture, fixtures, office equipment and utility services 

Contractor or the Subcontractor will incur in connection with the 

operation of its field office at the Site. 

ARTICLE 10 

CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING 

Section 10.01. Examination of Site. (a) Contractor acknowledges that, by careful 

examination, it has satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the Work, the surface and subsurface 

features of the Site and the surrounding area, the character, quality and quantity of 

Materials needed prior to and during the prosecution of the Work, general and local conditions 

affecting the availability of Materials and Services, the availability of utility services at the Site, 

and all other matters that may affect the Work. Contractor also acknowledges that it has 

reviewed all available as-built and record drawings, plans and specifications for existing 

28

structures and other man-made features on the Site and has thoroughly inspected those structures 

and other man-made features. 

(b) Contractor acknowledges that, by careful examination, it has obtained a complete and 

detailed understanding of the scope and nature of FedEx’s business operations, which will 

continue on or in the vicinity of the Site during the course of Contractor’s performance of the 

Work, and of the potentially catastrophic damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues) 

that FedEx may sustain if Contractor does not adhere strictly to the requirements of this 

Agreement and the other Contract Documents. 

Section 10.02. Sufficiency of Contract Documents. 

(a) Contractor acknowledges that the 

Contract Documents are sufficient to enable it to determine the cost of all the Materials and 

Services required for the Project and that, for the Contractor’s Fee, it can complete the Work in 

its entirety in accordance with the Contract Documents notwithstanding any foreseen or 

unforeseen risks, hazards or difficulties, such as the encountering of any concealed condition 

below the surface of the ground at the Site that is inconsistent with conditions indicated in the 


(b) Contractor acknowledges that, if discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts 

exist in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall seek clarifications and corrections in a timely 

manner in order to ensure substantial completion of the Work by the Substantial Completion 

Date. Contractor's failure to advise FedEx of the existence of any such discrepancies, omissions, 

ambiguities or conflicts within 30 calendar days after the Effective Date will constitute 

Contractor’s acknowledgment that none exist in the Contract Documents. In addition, Contractor 

acknowledges that FedEx has not made any warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind 

regarding the sufficiency of the Contract Documents (i.e., the extent to which the Contract 

Documents are complete, accurate, coordinated or adequate for bidding or the performance of the 

Work) or any other matter relating to the Work. FedEx has provided data or information to 

Contractor for Contractor’s information only and not as a representation or warranty. FedEx is 

not responsible for the accuracy of any such data or information or any deduction, interpretation 

or conclusion that Contractor draws from it. 

(c) FedEx will not be responsible for, and the Contractor’s Fee will not be adjusted by 

reason of, any damages resulting from any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in 

the Contract Documents that Contractor does not note in accordance with the terms of Section 

10.02(b). 

Section 10.03. No Oral Modification. 

No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, 

agent or employee of FedEx either before or after the execution of this Agreement will affect or 

modify any of the terms or obligations contained in this Agreement or the other Contract 

Documents. 

Section 10.04. Contractor’s Experience and Capabilities. Contractor has induced FedEx to 

execute this Agreement based upon Contractor’s representations that (i) it is experienced in the 

type of Work for which FedEx is engaging Contractor, (ii) it is authorized and licensed to 

29

perform the Work in the State and locality in which the Site is located, (iii) it is qualified, willing 

and able to perform the Work, and (iv) it has the expertise and ability to provide Services and 

Materials that will meet FedEx’s objectives and requirements and that will comply with all 

applicable Legal Requirements. 

Section 10.06. Utilities. 

As part of the Work, Contractor must provide and pay for all 

utility services required for the performance of the Work. FedEx will provide water, gas and 

electrical power for use in the Work only to the extent of the capacity of the utility system 

infrastructure in place as of the date on which Contractor commences the Work. As part of the 

Work, Contractor must provide and pay for connections to and extensions from that 

infrastructure and for the means of distributing those utility services within the Site during the 

performance of the Work. Contractor must, however, pay for all utility consumption charges that 

are attributable to water that is wasted or expended without proper regard for ecological and 

conservation considerations, the use of electric heating devices, and utility services used within 

Contractor’s field offices. 

Section 10.07. Cutting and Patching. 

Contractor shall do in accordance with the Contract 

Documents all necessary cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make 

the several parts come together properly and fit the Work to receive or to be received by work of 

Separate Contractors shown upon, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. In laying 

out the Work, Contractor shall examine the work installed by Separate Contractors and the shop 

drawings of work to be installed by Separate Contractors prior to beginning the installation of the 

Work. By beginning the installation of an element of the Work, Contractor conclusively accepts 

all preceding work as suitable and proper to receive that element of the Work unless it gives 

written notice to FedEx to the contrary before beginning that installation. If Contractor and a 

Separate Contractor fail to agree as to the extent of cooperation to be exhibited, or of work to be 

done by either, to ensure the carrying out of their respective agreements, FedEx’s Representative 

(as defined below in Section 11.01) will resolve the disagreement and his or her decision will be 

final and bind all parties. 

ARTICLE 11 

FEDEX'S REPRESENTATIVE 

Section 11.01. FedEx's Representative. In its Notice to Proceed, FedEx shall designate its 

representative for the Work ("FedEx's Representative"). FedEx's Representative will have full 

authority to stop the Work whenever, in his or her best judgment, the stoppage may be necessary 

to ensure the proper execution of the Work. FedEx's Representative will have authority to reject 

any Work that does not conform to the requirements of this Agreement or the other Contract 

Documents and to decide questions that arise during the performance of the Work. FedEx's 

Representative will also designate in writing all persons in FedEx's employ, who are authorized 

to have access to the Site. FedEx has the right to replace its Representative at any time and for 

any reason. Contractor may not accept direction, nor permit any of its Subcontractors to accept 

direction, from any FedEx employee other than FedEx’s Representative and the FedEx 

employees that FedEx’s Representative specifically designates by written notice to Contractor. 

30

Section 11.02. FedEx's Decisions. 

As soon as practicable after presentation to him, 

FedEx's Representative shall make decisions in writing on all matters relating to the prosecution 

of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents and, unless Contractor initiates the 

procedures set forth in Article 26 within 30 days after the date on which FedEx’s Representative 

renders his decision or within such earlier period of time as may be specified in another Section 

of this Agreement, any decision that FedEx's Representative makes will be conclusive. 

ARTICLE 12 

SUPERVISION OF THE WORK; 

SAFETY AND SECURITY 

Section 12.01. Contractor's Project Manager. 

Contractor shall designate in writing a 

competent superintendents (the “Superintendents”), who must be satisfactory to FedEx. FedEx’s 

approval of the Superintendent will not relieve Contractor of any of its responsibilities, 

obligations, warranties or duties. Contractor shall replace the Superintendent upon FedEx's 

written request, but Contractor may not replace the Superintendents without FedEx’s prior 

written consent unless the Superintendent ceases to be in Contractor's employ. The 

Superintendent will represent Contractor and all directions that FedEx gives to him or her will be 

as binding as if given directly to Contractor’s executive officers. The Superintendent must 

devote his or her full time to the Work until Final Acceptance occurs and must maintain his or 

her office at the Site until Final Acceptance occurs. The Superintendent will direct, coordinate 

and supervise all Work and the Superintendent will inspect all Materials delivered to the Site to 

ascertain whether or not they comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and 

reject all non-conforming Work. 

Section 12.02. Staffing. Contractor will furnish a staff (inclusive of the Superintendent) 

generally in accordance with the schedule attached as the attached Exhibit I. Contractor shall 

supplement that staff with whatever additional personnel are required to ensure that the Work 

will progress and be completed in accordance with the Construction Schedule. FedEx must 

approve in writing the replacement for any "key" employees designated on the attached Exhibit 

I. 

All personnel that Contractor uses in the performance of the Work must be qualified by 

training and experience to perform their assigned tasks and must have all licenses required by 

applicable Legal Requirements or the Contract Documents and, at FedEx’s request, Contractor 

will not use any personnel that FedEx determines to be incompetent, careless, unqualified to 

perform the work assigned to him or her, or otherwise unsatisfactory. Except for the foregoing 

rights that FedEx expressly reserves, all matters pertaining to Contractor's employees will be 

Contractor’s responsibility. 

Section 12.03. Order and Discipline. (a) Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and 

good order at all times among its employees and the employees of its Subcontractors. If any 

person at the Site appears to be incompetent, disorderly or intemperate, or disrupts or interferes 

with the Work in any way, or makes an inappropriate racial, sexual or ethnic comment, statement 

or gesture toward any other individual engaged in the performance of the Work or any FedEx 

employee working at or in the vicinity of the Site, or is in any other way disqualified for or 

unfaithful to the job entrusted to him or her, Contractor shall replace such person, or cause such 

31

person to be replaced, immediately and shall prohibit the further use of such person in connection 

with the Work unless FedEx grants written permission for such use. 

(b) Contractor may post signs restricting access to the Site or specific areas of the Site 

and, in its name, may remove, bar and prosecute trespassers and undertake legal and equitable 

actions against trespassers. Contractor may not exclude Landlord and its respective members, 

officers, directors, agents, contractors, employees and invitees from the Site on the authority of 

the foregoing provisions of this Section 12.03(b). 

(c) FedEx reserves the right to invoke after delivering specific written notice to 

Contractor of its intent to do so any security means FedEx considers appropriate to protect the 

Site and the Work under construction. Moreover, FedEx may designate one or more ways of 

ingress and egress over the Site for the purpose of showing the Project to potential purchasers, 

lenders or others. FedEx must, however, designate those ways of ingress and egress so that their 

use will not materially interfere with Contractor's performance of the Work or increase the 

insurance risk associated with Contractor’s performance of the Work. 

Section 12.04. Cleaning Up. 

(a) At the end of each working day, Contractor shall remove 

all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the Work as well as all surplus materials 

and will leave the Site clean in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

(b) Contractor must store all Materials delivered in connection with the Work in locations 

FedEx approves and must store and handle those Materials as appropriate to ensure safety, to 

preclude the inclusion of any foreign substances, and to prevent any discoloration or damage that 

might reduce the effectiveness of such Materials when incorporated into the Project. 

Section 12.05. Safety and Security. (a) Each week Contractor will provide FedEx a list of 

persons scheduled to work at the Site and Contractor, its Subcontractors and their respective 

employees shall comply with all security rules FedEx makes, including, without limitation, those 

set forth in the attached Exhibit F. 

(b) Upon request, Contractor shall provide to FedEx's Managing Director of Security or 

his designee a list of all of its employees that will perform any of the Work. In addition, 

Contractor shall provide to FedEx upon request copies of its employees' applications for 

employment and shall verify any employee's former employment history. At FedEx's request and 

to the extent permitted under applicable laws, Contractor shall perform criminal record checks of 

any employee that FedEx designates and shall cause a polygraph examination to be conducted 

with respect to any employee suspected of theft or other wrongdoing while at or about the Site. 

(c) In the performance of the Work, Contractor shall observe, and shall cause its 

Subcontractors to observe, i) all applicable requirements of the “FedEx Contractor Safety 

Manual” and (ii) all requirements of the “FedEx AGFS Contractor Ramp Rules”. FedEx has 

provided Contractor the information needed to access the “FedEx Contractor Safety Manual” and 

the “FedEx AGFS Contractor Ramp Rules” (collectively called the “Safety Manuals”). 

Contractor has read and understands all parts of the Safety Manuals. Contractor shall cause all 

32

workers performing the Work to read the Safety Manuals in their entirety and, at FedEx’s request 

from time to time made, shall acknowledge that all workers then performing the Work understand all 

parts of the Safety Manuals. 

(d) FedEx must be able to contact the Superintendent via telephone at all times during 

which work is not actually being performed on the Site, such as nights, weekends and legal 

holidays. To that end, Contractor shall regularly provide to FedEx’s Representative the names 

and telephone number of the Superintendent that will be on-call during an upcoming hiatus in the 

performance of the Work. 

Section 12.06. Inspection of the Work. 

(a) FedEx and its designees must have access to the 

Work at all times for the purpose of inspecting it, and Contractor shall provide proper facilities 

for such access and inspection. If any portion of the Work that FedEx wishes to inspect is 

covered or concealed, Contractor shall uncover it at FedEx’s direction for observation and, 

following FedEx’s inspection, shall restore the area affected by the uncovering. If the designated 

portion of the Work was covered before Contractor’s receipt of FedEx’s specific request that it 

remain uncovered and if the Contract Documents did not restrict the covering of that portion of 

the Work, Contractor will be entitled, to the extent provided in Sections 3.03 and 3.04, to an 

adjustment to the Substantial Completion Date and the Contractor’s Fee, except as provided to 

the contrary below. If, however, the designated portion of the Work was covered contrary to 

FedEx’s prior request that it remain uncovered or contrary to the express requirements of the 

Contract Documents or FedEx’s inspection reveals that the designated portion of the Work is 

defective, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Substantial Completion Date or 

the Contractor’s Fee by reason of the uncovering or restoration of the designated portion of the 

Work. If FedEx's designees discover any defective Work by reason of any such inspection, 

FedEx shall report it to Contractor. 

(b) If the Contract Documents, FedEx's written instructions or applicable Legal 

Requirements require that special tests or inspections be conducted with respect to any of the 

Work, Contractor shall notify FedEx of its readiness for inspection and testing and, if a public 

authority, rather than FedEx, will perform the test or inspection, the date set for such test or 

inspection. FedEx shall make its inspections promptly and, where practicable, at the source of 

supply. If Contractor or any Subcontractor covers any of the Work without the approval or 

consent of FedEx or any public authority having jurisdiction over the Work, Contractor shall 

cause it to be uncovered for examination, at Contractor's expense, if required by FedEx or the 

public authority. 

(c) If testing procedures or inspections reveal any defective Work, Contractor shall correct 

it promptly and shall pay all costs made necessary by the defect, including, without limitation, 

the cost of repeated testing procedures or inspections and any increase in compensation that 

FedEx must pay to any of FedEx’s architects, engineers and other consultants by reason of the 

defect or the additional testing or inspections. 

33

ARTICLE 13 

PERMITS, LICENSES, LAWS AND REGULATIONS 

Section 13.01. Contractor To Secure All Permits. 

Contractor shall secure and maintain in 

force throughout the performance of the Work all permits and licenses necessary for the lawful 

and proper performance of the Work. Contractor shall pay the fees required for all permits and 

licenses necessary for the lawful and proper performance of the Work. Contractor shall prepare, 

and update and submit to FedEx weekly, a report that details all permits and licenses necessary 

for the lawful and proper performance of the Work, the dates on which submission of 

applications for those permits and licenses occurred or will occur, the period of time typically 

required for the processing of those applications, the fees associated with the issuance of those 

permits and licenses, and other information that FedEx requires be included in that report. 

Contractor shall submit the updated report to FedEx by noon (Memphis, Tennessee local time) 

each Friday or on the next business day, if a Friday is a Legal Holiday. 

Section 13.02. Contractor's Responsibilities. 

Contractor shall give all notices required by 

virtue of, and shall familiarize itself with, and shall comply with, all Legal Requirements 

applicable to the Work. If Contractor believes that any of the Contract Documents are at 

variance with any Legal Requirement, it shall promptly notify FedEx in writing and seek 

appropriate changes to the Contract Documents. If Contractor fails to give such notice or 

performs, or permits any Subcontractor to perform, any of the Work in contravention of any 

Legal Requirement, Contractor shall correct the defective Work without any adjustment in the 

Contractor’s Fee and shall indemnify and hold FedEx harmless from and against any resulting 

liability, fines, penalties, judgments or damages, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense 

costs, imposed on or incurred by FedEx. In connection with the Work, Contractor may not 

confer, or promise to confer, on any governmental, public or quasi-public official having any 

authority or influence over the Work any payment, loan, subscription, advance, deposit of money, 

services or other item of value. In connection with the Work, Contractor may not accept from, or 

offer to, any person or entity, including, without limitation, any of its Subcontractors, 

consultants, or suppliers or manufacturers of Materials, any bribes or kick-backs. 

Section 13.03. Environmental Law Compliance. 

Without intending to limit the generality 

of Section 13.02, Contractor shall comply with, and shall cause each Subcontractor to comply 

with, all Environmental Laws (as defined in Section 13.10) in connection with the performance 

of the Work. Contractor shall not use any Material in connection with its performance of the 

Work, or incorporate into the Work any Material, that Contractor knows is then a Hazardous 

Material, except to the extent use of any Hazardous Material is normal and customary in the 

performance of construction work similar to the Work, and then only to the extent that the use of 

that Hazardous Material occurring in connection with the Work complies strictly with all 

applicable Environmental Laws. 

Section 13.04. Contractor’s Responsibility for Environmental Conditions. Except as 

expressly set forth in this Article 13, Contractors, its Subcontractors and the respective directors, 

34

officers, shareholders, employees and agents of Contractor and its Subcontractors will have no 

liability or responsibility for Environmental Conditions (as defined below), or for any 

remediation or mitigation of Environmental Conditions. The term “Environmental Conditions” 

means the presence on, in, or under, or migrations to or from, the Site of any Hazardous Material 

in concentrations that exceed any effective cleanup standards that Environmental Laws establish, 

whether occurring in ambient air, surface water, groundwater, land surface or subsurface strata. 

Section 13.05. Health and Safety Plan. 

Contractor shall formulate and implement a health 

and safety plan (the “Health and Safety Plan”) that is reasonable in light of any known 

Environmental Conditions and that complies with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and 

regulations, including, without limitation, the Occupational Health and Safety Act and the 

regulations promulgated on the authority of that Act. Contractor shall cause its workers and 

those of its Subcontractors engaged in the Work to comply with the Health and Safety Plan. 

Moreover, if, during the Work, Contractor or any of the Subcontractors discover an 

Environmental Condition, Contractor shall take reasonable measures to protect, and shall cause 

the Subcontractors to take reasonable measures to protect, their respective workers, FedEx's 

employees and other portions of the Site from exposure to the newly discovered Environmental 

Condition and shall give to FedEx’s Representative oral notice via telephone of the discovery of 

that Environmental Condition on the date of the discovery and shall confirm that notice in 

writing within one business day after the date of the discovery. Unless FedEx specifically 

concurs with another course of action by means of written notice delivered to Contractor, 

Contractor shall discontinue work in the vicinity of the area affected by the newly discovered 

Environmental Condition pending FedEx’s or Landlord’s investigation of the discovery and the 

completion of any remediation that Environmental Laws require FedEx or Landlord to undertake 

with respect to that Environmental Condition or that FedEx or Landlord elects to undertake. 

Moreover, if the potential risk to human health that a newly discovered Environmental Condition 

warrants, Contractor may discontinue in its reasonable discretion all work on the Site pending 

FedEx’s or Landlord’s investigation of the discovery and the completion of any remediation that 

Environmental Laws require FedEx or Landlord to undertake with respect to that Environmental 

Condition or that FedEx or Landlord elects to undertake. Delay in the performance of the Work 

attributable to that investigation or additional remediation will constitute Excusable Delays for 

purposes of this Agreement. Contractor must promptly make appropriate adjustments to the 

Health and Safety Plan to reflect the discovery of the additional Environmental Condition. 

Section 13.06. Additional Reports. 

Promptly following its receipt of any additional reports 

that pertain to Hazardous Material on the Site or any correspondence from the United States 

Environmental Protection Agency or any other governmental authority having jurisdiction over 

the environmental condition of the Site that pertain to the Site and that might affect the manner in 

which Contractor prosecutes the Work, FedEx shall furnish copies of those reports or 

correspondence to Contractor. 

Section 13.07. Testing of Fill. If the Work requires Contractor or any Subcontractor to 

import fill material to the Site, Contractor may not take, and may not permit any of its 

Subcontractors to take, any fill material from a source for use at the Site until Contractor causes 

samples from that source to be analyzed for the presence of Hazardous Material and furnishes to 

35

FedEx reports that the testing consultant prepares and that reflect that the samples are free of 

Hazardous Material. For purposes of this Section 13.07, “fill material” means dirt, soil, sand or 

other earth that is obtained from sources outside the Site and that is used to fill holes or 

depressions, create mounds or otherwise artificially change the grade or elevation of the Site. 

FedEx must approve the testing consultant and laboratory that Contractor engages to take and 

analyze the samples. FedEx must also approve the number of samples that Contractor's testing 

consultant takes at the borrow source and the locations at which those samples are taken. FedEx 

may not unreasonably withhold any approval required by virtue of this Section 13.07. If the 

source from which Contractor or its Subcontractor proposes to take fill required at the Site is a 

commercial aggregate borrow source, the delivery to FedEx of environmental certifications 

provided by the operator of that source will satisfy the foregoing requirement for the furnishing 

of testing reports to FedEx. Any report or certification furnished to FedEx in accordance with the 

terms of this Section 13.07 must reflect that the samples were tested for the presence of volatile 

organic compounds ("VOCs"), total metals, polynuclear aromatics ("PNAs"), polychlorinated 

biphenyls ("PCBs") and total petroleum hydrocarbons (“TPH”). 

Section 13.08. Contractor Indemnification. 

Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold 

FedEx and its directors, officers, shareholders, employees and agents harmless from and against 

all liability, damages, losses, expenses, demands, claims, suits or judgments, including 

reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses and defense costs, that may be asserted against, or 

sustained by, any of the indemnified parties by reason of (i) any Environmental Condition that 

Contractor, the Subcontractors, the respective agents and employees of Contractor and the 

Subcontractors, or any other person for whose acts or omissions any of the foregoing persons or 

entities may be responsible during the performance of the Work causes, or (ii) Contractor’s 

failure to perform the obligations it undertakes under the terms of this Article 13. 

Section 13.09. Survival of Indemnities. 

The indemnities set forth in this Article 13 will 

survive the completion of the Work and any termination of this Agreement. 

Section 13.10. Definition of Environmental Laws. The term "Environmental Laws" 

means all laws, statutes, regulations, rules, ordinances, codes, license and permit requirements, 

and orders of all governmental agencies, departments, commissions, boards, bureaus or 

instrumentalities of the United States, the several States and political subdivisions within the 

States, and all applicable judicial and administrative and regulatory decrees, judgments and 

orders, including, without limitation, common law rulings and determinations, (whether now 

existing or later enacted or promulgated) that relate to injury to, or the protection of, real or 

personal property or human health (except those requirements that, by definition, are solely the 

responsibility of employers) or the environment (defined to mean soil, surface waters, ground 

waters, land, stream sediments, surface or subsurface strata and ambient air), including, without 

limitation, all valid and lawful requirements of courts and governmental agencies that pertain to 

reporting, licensing, permitting, investigation, remediation and removal of emissions, discharges, 

releases or threatened releases of chemical substances, petroleum or petroleum products, 

pollutants, contaminants or hazardous or toxic substances, materials or wastes (whether solid, 

liquid or gaseous in nature) into the air, surface water, ground water or land, or that relate to the 

manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, disposal, transport or handling of 

36

pollutants, contaminants or hazardous or toxic substances, materials or wastes (whether solid, 

liquid or gaseous in nature). 

Section 13.11 Definition of Hazardous Material. 

The term "Hazardous Material" means 

any substance: 

(i) the presence of which requires or may later require notification, 

investigation or remediation under any Environmental Law; or 

(ii) that is or becomes defined as a "hazardous waste", "hazardous 

material", "hazardous substance", "pollutant" or “contaminant" 

under any Environmental Law, including, without limitation, the 

Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and 

Liability Act (42 U.S.C. §9601 et seq.), the Resource Conservation 

and Recovery Act (42 U.S.C. §6901 et seq.) and the associated 

regulations; or 

(iii) that is toxic, explosive, corrosive, flammable, infectious, 

radioactive, carcinogenic, mutagenic or otherwise hazardous and is 

or becomes regulated by any governmental authority, agency, 

department, commission, board, agency or instrumentality of the 

United States, any state of the United States, or any political 

subdivision within any state; or 

(iv) the presence of which on the Site causes or threatens to cause a 

nuisance on the Site or to adjacent properties or poses or threatens 

to pose a hazard to the Site or to the health or safety of persons on 

or about the Site; or 

(v) that contains gasoline, diesel fuel or other petroleum hydrocarbons 

or volatile organic compounds; or 

(vi) that contains polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), asbestos or urea 

formaldehyde foam insulation; or 

(vii) that contains or emits radioactive particles, waves or material, 

including, without limitation, radon gas. 

Section 13.12. Permits for Installation of Air Emission Sources. If the Project includes the 

furnishing or installation of (i) a boiler with a heat input rate equal to or greater than 1,000,000 

BTU per hour, (ii) a degreaser or parts washer with a capacity of two or more gallons (seven and 

six-tenths liters) that utilizes a solvent with a volatile organic compound (“VOC”) content equal 

to or greater than five percent (5%), (iii) an emergency generator of 250 or more horsepower (or, 

if the job site is located in California, any stationary, piston-type internal combustion engine over 

50 horsepower), (iv) a storage tank for organic fluids with a capacity equal to or greater than 

37

1,000 gallons (or, if the job site is located in California, a storage tank for organic fluids with a 

capacity equal to or greater than 250 gallons) (v) a paint booth or any equipment for paint and 

coating operations, (vi) a fueling station, (vii) refrigeration or cooling units with a maximum 

charge or 50 pounds or more or a capacity of one ton (12,000 BTU per hour) or more, or (viii) 

portable engines, such as mobile generators or trailer-mounted air conditioners, and applicable 

Environmental Laws require the issuance by a state or local air pollution control agency of a 

construction permit in connection with that installation, Contractor shall obtain that permit before 

beginning the installation of that air emission source. If applicable Environmental Laws do not 

require the issuance by a state or local air pollution control agency of a construction permit in 

connection with that installation, Contractor shall provide written confirmation of that fact to 

FedEx before beginning the installation of the air emission source. If, in accordance with the 

foregoing, Contractor obtains a construction permit, Contractor shall also timely convert that 

permit to an operating permit upon completion of the installation of the air emission source. If 

any permit that Contractor must seek in accordance with the foregoing will establish any 

conditions that will affect the manner in which FedEx conducts its business operations at the Site 

following the completion of the Work, Contractor must secure FedEx’s written consent to those 

conditions before accepting the issuance of the permit. Contractor shall furnish FedEx with a 

copy of each permit that Contractor obtains in accordance with the terms of this Section 13.12 

promptly following Contractor’s receipt of the permit. The parties do not intend the terms of this 

Section 13.12 to affect the generality of the foregoing provisions in this Article 13. 

ARTICLE 14 

TAXES 

Section 14.01. Transaction Taxes. (a) Unless otherwise provided in this Section 14.01, 

Contractor shall pay all taxes, excises, duties and assessments in the nature of sales, use or 

similar taxes ("Transaction Taxes") that arise out of, or are related to, the Work and that any 

government or agency having jurisdiction over the Work properly levies, assesses or imposes on 

Contractor. Contractor shall cooperate, and shall cause the Subcontractors to cooperate, with 

FedEx in determining which elements of the Work constitute the delivery of tangible personal 

property to FedEx, which elements constitute the improvement to real property, and which 

elements constitute non-taxable services. With each Application for Payment that Contractor 

submits in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, Contractor shall furnish to FedEx, in the 

form of the attached Exhibit C-6_ or such other form that FedEx prescribes, a description of the 

Materials purchased and that portion of the Work accomplished during the period covered by the 

Application and a statement of the corresponding amount of Transaction Taxes paid or payable 

in respect of those purchases and that portion of the Work (the “Transaction Tax Statement”) 

The Transaction Tax Statement must separately state which elements of the Work constitute the 

delivery of tangible personal property to FedEx, which elements constitute the improvement to 

real property, and which elements constitute non-taxable services. 

(b) With respect to any portion of the Work that FedEx has determined constitutes the 

delivery of tangible personal property or a taxable real property service, Contractor shall issue, at 

FedEx’s direction and if permitted by applicable Legal Requirements, a sale for resale or 

exemption certificate to its supplier or Subcontractor and may not pay any Transaction Taxes to 

38

its supplier or Subcontractor with respect to that portion of the Work. In that case, Contractor 

shall separately state on its Applications for Payment, and collect from FedEx, and remit to the 

proper taxing authority, the collected Transaction Taxes as and when applicable Legal 

Requirements require. Any amounts that Contractor collects from FedEx on the authority of the 

preceding sentence will constitute a payment on account of, and a concurrent reduction in the 

amount of, the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s Fee. Contractor and FedEx shall cooperate in 

the preparation and filing of any tax returns. 

(c) If applicable Legal Requirements require Transaction Taxes to be paid to a state other 

than a state in which the Site is located, Contractor shall cooperate with FedEx in determining 

the amount of any credit against the Transaction Taxes of the state in which the Site is located 

that may be available by reason of that payment. 

(d) In its sole discretion and at its expense, FedEx has the right, either before or after 

payment of any Transaction Taxes to the proper taxing authority, to contest the validity or 

application of those Transaction Taxes. Upon the written request and at the expense of FedEx, 

Contractor shall fully cooperate with FedEx in contesting or protesting the validity or application 

of those Transaction Taxes. That cooperation will include, but not be limited to, permitting 

FedEx to proceed in Contractor's name if required or permitted by law, as long as the contest 

does not involve, or can be separated from, the contest of any Transaction Taxes or issues 

unrelated to the transactions described in this Agreement. FedEx also has the right to participate 

in any contest Contractor conducts with respect to any Transaction Taxes or other charge 

included within the scope of the indemnity set forth in Section 14.01(e) below, including, 

without limitation, the right to attend conferences with the taxing authority and the right to 

review submissions to the taxing authority or any court to the extent the contest does not involve, 

or can be separated from, the contest of any tax or other issues unrelated to the transactions 

described in this Agreement. If, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, FedEx pays any 

Transaction Taxes that are not treated as a payment on account of, and a concurrent reduction in 

the amount of, the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s Fee and if Contractor receives a refund of 

any part of those Transaction Taxes, Contractor shall promptly remit the amount of the refund to 

FedEx, after deducting any reasonable expenses that Contractor reasonably incurred in 

connection with the contest of the validity or application of those Transaction Taxes and that 

FedEx has not previously reimbursed to Contractor. 

(e) Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold FedEx and its officers, directors and 

employees harmless from all Transaction Taxes for which Contractor assumes responsibility in 

this Section 14.01. The payment of any penalties or interest associated with Contractor's failure 

to timely pay any Transaction Taxes to the proper taxing authority in accordance with the terms 

of this Agreement and any applicable Legal Requirements will be Contractor's responsibility 

unless FedEx's direction to Contractor in accordance with this Section 14.01 or FedEx’s failure 

to timely make a progress payment in accordance with the terms of this Agreement causes that 

failure.] 

Section 14.02. Contractor Taxes. (a) In addition to Transaction Taxes, Contractor shall pay 

all taxes, excises, duties and assessments ("Contractor Taxes") (i) that arise out of Contractor's 

39

performance of the Work and that any governmental or quasi-governmental authority or any 

agency of any such authority having jurisdiction over the Site and the Work levies, assesses or 

imposes, including, without limitation, taxes and contributions that Legal Requirements require 

for employment insurance, pensions, old age retirement funds or similar purposes, (ii) that are 

based upon Contractor's gross receipts or net income, or (iii) that are imposed on Contractor for 

the privilege of doing business or exercising a franchise. 

(b) Unless Contractor is contesting in good faith the validity of any of Contractor Taxes 

or its application to the Work, Contractor shall promptly pay and discharge when due all 

Contractor Taxes that Contractor undertakes to pay in accordance with the terms of Section 

14.02(a), together with any interest and penalties. If the taxing authority levies, assesses or 

imposes any Contractor Taxes upon FedEx, FedEx will notify Contractor and Contractor shall 

promptly pay and discharge such Contractor Taxes, but, upon the written request and at the 

expense of Contractor, FedEx shall assist Contractor in contesting the validity or applicability to 

the Work of such Contractor Taxes. 

(c) Contractor shall indemnify and hold FedEx and its officers, directors and 

employees harmless from all Contractor Taxes that Contractor undertakes to pay in accordance 

with the terms of Section 14.02(a). 

ARTICLE 15 

SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES; 

MATERIAL TESTING 

Section 15.01. Definitions. 

(a) As used in this Agreement, the term "Shop Drawings" 

means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data 

that Contractor or any Subcontractor prepare and that illustrate a portion of the Work. 

(b) As used in this Agreement, the term "Samples" means physical examples that 

Contractor furnishes to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship. 

(c) Contractor shall provide Shop Drawings and Samples at FedEx's request. 

Section 15.02. Submission Schedule. 

Within one week after the Effective Date, Contractor 

shall provide FedEx with a schedule for submission of Shop Drawings and Samples. The 

sequence of submissions must permit an orderly review by FedEx, and the schedule must allow 

reasonable time for FedEx's review according to the number and complexity of Shop Drawings 

or Samples in each submission. The schedule must allow not less than seven business days for 

FedEx to review a Shop Drawing or Sample. 

Section 15.03. Submissions 

. (a) Contractor shall review, stamp with its approval and 

submit in accordance with the approved submission schedule properly identified Shop Drawings 

and Samples that the Contract Documents require or that FedEx otherwise requires. 

40

(b) By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples, Contractor represents that 

it has verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and 

other data and that it has checked and coordinated each Shop Drawing and Sample with the 

requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 

Section 15.04. FedEx's Review. 

(a) FedEx or its agent will review submitted Shop 

Drawings and Samples promptly so as to cause no unreasonable delay in the Work, but FedEx 

will conduct its review solely for the purpose of determining the extent of conformity with the 

design concept of the Work and the information in the Contract Documents. FedEx's review of a 

Shop Drawing or Sample will not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item depicted 

functions. 

(b) Review of Shop Drawings or Samples by FedEx will not relieve Contractor of 

responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless 

Contractor has informed FedEx in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and FedEx 

has acknowledged the specific deviation. Further, FedEx's review will not relieve Contractor 

from responsibility for subsequently discovered errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or 

Samples. 

Section 15.05. Corrections. 

Contractor shall make any corrections FedEx requires and 

shall resubmit the required number of corrected Shop Drawings or new Samples until FedEx 

advises Contractor that it has completed its review of the submission. 

Section 15.06. Prior Review Required. 

Contractor may not commence any portion of the 

Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing or Sample until FedEx has completed its review 

of the submission. Contractor shall perform all such portions of the Work in accordance with the 

reviewed Shop Drawings and Samples and the Contract Documents. 

Section 15.07. Material Testing. 

(a) At its option, FedEx may accept the manufacturer's 

certified mill or laboratory certificate in lieu of special testing of Materials, with respect to which 

the Contract Documents require testing, or it may require a certificate from a recognized 

commercial testing laboratory other than Smith Emery (“FedEx’s Testing Agent”) ]satisfactory to 

it certifying that the Materials have been tested within a period acceptable to FedEx and that they 

conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

(b) FedEx may require that Contractor make actual tests of any products or Materials and 

submit a report on the results of those tests. A recognized testing laboratory other than FedEx’s 

Testing Agent satisfactory to FedEx must make those tests. Unless FedEx agrees otherwise, 

Contractor may not seek an adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee for the cost of tests required to 

determine the suitability of items that Contractor proposes in substitution for items specified in 

the Contract Documents. 

(c) FedEx may elect at its expense to cause FedEx’s Testing Agent to test Materials that 

Contractor incorporates into the Work. If FedEx makes that election and the tests that FedEx’s 

Testing Agent conducts indicate that any Material does not conform to the requirements of the 

41

Contract Documents, Contractor shall replace the Material even if the tests conducted by 

Contractor’s recognized testing laboratory indicate that the Material does conform to the 

requirements of the Contract Documents. If, as a result of the application of the procedures set 

forth in Article 26 or otherwise, a determination is made that the test results of FedEx’s Testing 

Agent were not correct, FedEx shall execute a Change Order to adjust the Contractor’s Fee to 

compensate Contractor for the reasonable costs it incurred in connection with the replacement of 

the suspect Material. 

ARTICLE 16 

FEDEX'S RIGHT TO AUDIT 

Section 16.01. Right of Audit. 

Contractor shall keep in its records copies of all submittals, 

correspondence, minutes, memoranda, tape recordings, videotapes, accounting records, and other 

writings or things that document the Project, its design and its construction, including, without 

limitation, full and accurate records of all costs incurred and items billed in connection with the 

Work. Those records will be open to audit by FedEx or its authorized representatives during the 

period commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the date that is five years after the date 

of Final Payment or on such later date through which applicable Legal Requirements or good 

construction industry practice requires the retention of such records. Moreover, if Contractor 

receives notification of a dispute, or the commencement of litigation, regarding the Project prior 

to the expiration of the period during which its records are subject to FedEx audit in accordance 

with the foregoing, Contractor shall continue to keep its records regarding the Project beyond the 

period described above until final resolution of the dispute or litigation. In addition, Contractor 

shall include in each Subcontract a requirement to maintain records regarding the Project and 

make them available for FedEx’s audit that is the same as that set forth above. Contractor's 

failure to include such a requirement in any Subcontract will be an Event of Default and grounds 

for FedEx's immediate termination of this Agreement. 

Section 16.02. Review of Subcontracts. Upon request and as required by the attached 

Exhibit C-1, 

Contractor shall provide FedEx with an executed copy of all Subcontracts and 

purchase orders relating to the Work. 

Section 16.03. Confidentiality of Audit Information. FedEx acknowledges that certain of 

Contractor's valuable, confidential and proprietary information may come into FedEx’s 

possession during the course of an audit that FedEx undertakes on the authority of this Article 16. 

FedEx must hold all information that it obtains from or about Contractor in the course of an audit 

and that Contractor designates as “confidential” by delivering written notice to FedEx in strictest 

confidence and must not use that information other than in connection with the administration of 

this Agreement and the resolution of any dispute that may arise between FedEx and Contractor in 

connection with the Project. FedEx must also cause its employees and its authorized 

representatives to be bound by the same obligation of confidentiality as that which FedEx 

undertakes under the terms of this Section 16.03. Without Contractor's prior written consent, 

FedEx may not communicate any audit information that Contractor has designated as 

“confidential” in any form to any third party. If FedEx breaches its obligations under the terms 

of this Section 16.03, Contractor may seek preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and an 

42

equitable accounting of all profits or benefits FedEx derived by virtue of its breach in addition to 

any other remedy available to it at law or in equity. The foregoing obligations and restrictions do 

not apply to (i) information that, at the time of disclosure, was already known to FedEx and with 

respect to which Contractor had not previously imposed any restrictions on the disclosure or use 

of that information, (ii) information that is publicly known or is later made public through no 

fault of FedEx, (iii) information that FedEx independently develops from sources other than 

Contractor and its Subcontractors, (iv) information that FedEx receives free of restriction on 

disclosure from another source that has the right to furnish the information to FedEx, (v) 

information that Contractor approves for release, (vi) information that FedEx must disclose by 

virtue of the operation of any statute, regulation or order of any court, legislative body, or 

administrative agency, or (vii) information that FedEx must disclose in order to be able to 

exercise any right that it has under the terms of this Agreement or to enforce any obligation that 

Contractor has under the terms of this Agreement. FedEx must give Contractor advance notice 

of its intent to disclose any information of the nature described in division (vi) above at least 2 

business days in advance of that disclosure. 

ARTICLE 17 

SEPARATE CONTRACTS 

Section 17.01. FedEx's Right to Award Separate Contracts. 

FedEx reserves the right to 

award other contracts (“Separate Contracts”) in connection with work at or in the vicinity of the 

Site and Contractor shall cooperate fully, and may not unreasonably interfere, with the work of 

such other contractors (“Separate Contractors”). [FedEx must, however, require each Separate 

Contractor to agree in writing: 

(i) not to interfere with Contractor's performance of the Work; 

(ii) to conform to all reasonable directions of Contractor with regard to 

the progress of the Work and the Project; 

(iii) to employ no labor and use no material or equipment that will 

disrupt the performance of the Work by Contractor or its 

Subcontractors; 

(iv) to include Contractor as an additional named indemnitee in any 

indemnity that the Separate Contractor makes in favor of FedEx in 

the Separate Contract; 

(v) to include Contractor as an additional insured under any policy of 

commercial general liability insurance or automobile insurance that 

the Separate Contract obligates Separate Contractor to maintain in 

force (In that regard, FedEx shall provide to Contractor a copy of 

each certificate of insurance that FedEx receives from a Separate 

Contractor.); 

43

(vi) to waive and release, to the extent of the proceeds that are or would 

be payable to it in respect of policies of property insurance that the 

Separate Contractor maintains in force or that are generally 

available to insure personal property comparable to that of the 

Separate Contractor in the metropolitan area in which the Site is 

located, all rights of recovery, claim, action or cause of action that 

it may now or later have against Contractor or Contractor’s agents, 

officers and employees, by virtue of any loss or damage to the 

Separate Contractor’s personal property, regardless of cause or 

origin, including, without limitation, the negligence of Contractor 

or any of its representatives, agents, employees, Subcontractors and 

invitees; and 

(vii) to waive all claims of liability against FedEx and Contractor unless 

the liability arises solely by reason of the negligence or willful 

misconduct of FedEx or Contractor, as applicable.] 

Section 17.02. Cooperation. 

Contractor shall afford FedEx's Separate Contractors the 

opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution 

of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with their work. Contractor 

shall permit the use of temporary facilities (excluding hoisting equipment, personal trailers, 

scaffolding and trash hauling), sanitary facilities and temporary construction water supply (as 

distinguished from drinking water supplies) by Separate Contractors to the same extent as are 

available to Subcontractors, at no additional cost to FedEx or the Separate Contractors; 

Contractor will not be responsible, however, for supervision or management of any Separate 

Contractor's work or the safety of any Separate Contractor while performing its work. 

[Contractor shall also make its cranes and other material and personnel hoisting equipment 

available to Separate Contractors during normal working hours or on an overtime basis, subject 

to availability on the following conditions: 

(i) each Separate Contractor must give adequate advance notice of its 

needs and sign such indemnification agreement in favor of 

Contractor as Contractor may reasonably require; and 

(ii) if use of the equipment occurs on an overtime or specially 

scheduled basis, FedEx shall pay to Contractor the actual cost 

Contractor incurs by reason of that use in addition to the 

Contractor’s Fee.] 

Section 17.03. Inspection of Separate Contractor's Work. If any part of the Work depends 

for proper execution or results upon the work of any Separate Contractor, Contractor shall 

inspect and promptly report to FedEx any discrepancies or defects in that work that render it 

unsuitable for proper execution or results. Failure of Contractor to inspect and report as required 

above will constitute an acceptance of the Separate Contractor's work as fit and proper to receive 

the Work. 

44

Section 17.04. Responsibility For Damage and Interference. 

Contractor must not damage, 

and must not permit damage to, any part of the Project or the Site, including, without limitation, 

the work or property of Separate Contractors, monuments, stakes, bench marks and other survey 

points, utility features, and existing features or structures on the Site. If any such damage not 

involving the work or property of Separate Contractors occurs, Contractor shall promptly rectify 

it at Contractor’s expense. If (i) Contractor causes damage to the work or property of any 

Separate Contractor, (ii) Contractor interferes with the performance of any Separate Contractor's 

work, or (iii) Contractor employs labor or uses material or equipment that disrupts the 

performance of any Separate Contractor's work, Contractor shall indemnify and hold FedEx 

harmless from and against any claims, actions, liability, costs and expenses that the Separate 

Contractor may assert against FedEx, or that FedEx may sustain, as a consequence, including, 

without limitation, any adjustment in the contract sum to which the Separate Contractor is 

entitled under the terms of its Separate Contract and any attorneys' fees FedEx incurs in 

connection with its handling of the Separate Contractor's claim or action. Contractor shall settle 

with the Separate Contractor by agreement or arbitration if the Separate Contractor is amenable 

to settlement in that manner. If the Separate Contractor sues FedEx for any damages that it 

alleges it sustained by reason of Contractor's fault, FedEx shall notify Contractor, who shall 

defend such suits at its own expense and without any adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee. 

Contractor shall satisfy any resulting judgment and shall reimburse FedEx for all reasonable 

attorneys' fees and court costs that FedEx may incur as a result of such suit. 

Section 17.05. Effect of Separate Contractor Interference. 

If any Separate Contractor 

interferes with Contractor's performance of the Work or fails to conform to Contractor’s 

reasonable directions with regard to the progress of the Work and the Project, or employs labor 

or uses material or equipment that disrupts Contractor’s performance of the Work and, as a 

result, delay in the performance of the Work occurs or Contractor incurs additional cost the 

Substantial Completion Date and the Contractor’s Fee will be subject to adjustment in 

accordance with the terms of Sections 3.03 and 3.04. 

ARTICLE 18 

CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTIES 

Section 18.01. Warranty of Title. Contractor warrants to FedEx that (i) title to all Work, 

including Materials, covered by an Application for Payment (in the form of the attached Exhibit 

C-2), 

whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to FedEx upon Contractor's receipt of 

payment, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances ("Liens"), and (ii) 

neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor acquired any of the Work covered by an Application for 

Payment subject to an agreement, under the terms of which a Lien is retained by the seller or 

supplier. 

Section 18.02. Special Warranties 

. When the Contract Documents require special 

guaranties or warranties for specific parts of the Work, Contractor shall provide those guaranties 

or warranties to FedEx. 

45

Section 18.03. Assignment of Warranties. 

Contractor assigns to FedEx all assignable 

warranties of manufacturers and suppliers (other than Contractor) of Materials and Services used 

in the performance of the Work. At FedEx's request, Contractor shall assist in enforcing FedEx's 

rights arising under those warranties. 

Section 18.04. General Warranties. 

(a) In addition to any special guaranties or warranties 

that the Contract Documents require, Contractor warrants to FedEx that all Materials furnished in 

the performance of the Work will be new unless otherwise specified and that any Work 

(including any design work that Contractor or any Subcontractor performs) will be of good 

quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work 

not conforming to these standards will be defective. 

(b) If, within the period that expires one year after the Substantial Completion Date (or 

within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable 

special guarantee or warranty that the Contract Documents require), FedEx finds any of the Work 

to be defective, Contractor shall provide at its expense all labor and material necessary to correct 

it promptly after receipt of a written notice from FedEx. This Section 18.04(b) does not establish 

a limitations period with respect to Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement. The 

foregoing one-year time period relates only to Contractor’s specific obligation to correct the 

Work and has no relationship to the time within which FedEx may enforce Contractor’s 

contractual obligations under this Agreement, nor to the time within which FedEx must 

commence proceedings to establish Contractor’s liability with respect to any of its contractual 

obligations arising under the terms of this Agreement. 

(c) If Contractor fails or refuses to correct defective Work in accordance with the 

requirements of this Section 18.04, FedEx may correct it and hold Contractor liable for all 

expenses and damages FedEx incurs as a result. 

(d) In addition to the foregoing warranty, a fresh warranty period of one year will apply, 

under the same terms and conditions as the original warranty, to any work, materials or design 

supplied in the correction of defective Work undertaken in accordance with the terms of this 

Section 18.04. That fresh warranty period will commence on the date FedEx accepts 

Contractor's original warranty work. 

Section 18.05. Millennium Compliance. 

Contractor warrants to FedEx that the advent of 

any date or year will not adversely affect the performance of any system, equipment or equipment 

component that Contractor incorporates as part of the Work. 

ARTICLE 19 

FEDEX'S RIGHT TO DO WORK 

Section 19.01. FedEx's Right to Do Work. If Contractor neglects to prosecute the Work 

properly or fails to do anything required by the Contract Documents and FedEx does not receive 

satisfactory assurance of due performance from Contractor within seven business days after the 

date on which FedEx makes written demand for such assurance, FedEx may make good any 

46

deficiencies in the Work without prejudice to any other remedy it may have under the terms of 

this Agreement or at law or in equity and deduct all costs of doing so, including, without 

limitation, all additional compensation that FedEx must pay to its architects, engineers and other 

consultants in connection with its efforts to rectify the deficiency, from any payment then due or 

later becoming due to Contractor. If payments then due or later becoming due to Contractor are 

less than the costs FedEx incurs in making good any deficiencies in the Work, Contractor shall 

remit the difference to FedEx promptly following its receipt of FedEx’s invoice. 

Section 19.02. Correction of Work Before Final Payment. 

(a) Contractor shall promptly 

remove from the Site all Materials or other items that FedEx rejects as failing to conform to the 

Contract Documents, whether incorporated in the Project or not, and Contractor shall promptly 

replace and re-execute its original work to comply with the Contract Documents and may not 

seek an adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee for the costs incurred in connection with that 

replacement and re-execution. In addition, Contractor shall bear the expense of repairing all 

work of FedEx's Separate Contractors that that removal or replacement damages and may not 

seek an adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee for the costs incurred in connection with that repair. 

(b) If Contractor does not remove rejected Materials or other items within a time that 

FedEx determines to be reasonable, FedEx may do so and store them at Contractor's expense. If 

Contractor does not pay the expense of that removal and storage within ten business days after 

demand, FedEx may sell the items at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net 

proceeds of the sale after deducting all expenses of removal, storage and sale that FedEx incurs. 

ARTICLE 20 

INSURANCE 

Section 20.01. Contractor To Maintain Insurance. At all times during the performance of 

the Work, Contractor shall maintain in force the insurance described in the attached Exhibit E in 

the amounts and with the endorsements specified both in that Exhibit and elsewhere in this 

Article 20. None of the requirements as to types, limits or FedEx’s approval of the insurance 

coverages that Contractor must maintain in force during the performance of the Work will limit, 

qualify or quantify in any manner the liability and obligations Contractor assumes under the 

Contract Documents or that applicable law would otherwise impose on Contractor. 

Section 20.02. Contractor's Insurance Primary. 

Each insurance policy that Contractor 

maintains in accordance with the requirements of this Article 20 must be written as a primary 

policy and not contributing with, or in excess of, any insurance coverage that FedEx or Landlord 

maintains. 

Section 20.03. No Cancellation. Each insurance policy that Contractor maintains in 

accordance with the requirements of this Article 20 must be written by insurance companies 

authorized to do business in the state where the Site is located, must be in form and substance 

satisfactory to FedEx, and must contain an endorsement requiring the delivery of written notice 

to FedEx, Landlord, any Lender that FedEx has designated by the delivery of written notice to 

Contractor (a “Designated Lender”), and any other additional insured at least 30 days in advance 

47

of the date on which the insurer intends any cancellation, termination or change to become 

effective. 

Section 20.04. Additional Insureds. 

Each liability insurance policy that Contractor 

maintains in accordance with the requirements of this Article 20 must name FedEx, Landlord and 

any Designated Lender and their respective officers, directors and employees as additional 

insureds, and each property insurance policy that Contractor maintains in accordance with the 

requirements of this Article 20 must include an endorsement whereby the insurer acknowledges 

that any waiver or release of liability that an insured makes in favor of another party in advance 

of the occurrence of a loss giving rise to a claim under that policy will not adversely affect the 

coverage that the policy intends to afford or prejudice the right of the insured to receive proceeds 

in accordance with the terms of that policy. 

Section 20.05. Insurance Certificates. 

Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor 

shall furnish to FedEx, Landlord, each Designated Lender and each other additional insured 

certificates of insurance reflecting that each policy that the terms of this Article 20 requires is in 

force and that Contractor has paid the premium for the policy in full. At least 15 days in advance 

of the expiration of the term of each policy that Contractor maintains in accordance with the 

requirements of this Article 20, Contractor shall provide to FedEx, Landlord, each Designated 

Lender, and each other additional insured a certificate evidencing the renewal of the policy. 

Certificates issued with respect to contractual liability insurance must specifically acknowledge 

the provisions of Article 22. Each certificate that Contractor furnishes must be in the form of 

ACORD Form 25-S or such other form as FedEx may approve. 

Section 20.06. FedEx-Provided Builder’s Risk Insurance. Unless the attached Exhibit E 

provides to the contrary, FedEx shall maintain in force builder’s risk property insurance that a 

company or companies authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is 

located issues on a replacement cost basis. That insurance must insure the interests of FedEx, 

Contractor, the Subcontractors and Designated Lenders, as they respectively appear. FedEx must 

maintain that insurance in force until the earlier of the date on which Final Payment occurs or the 

date on which no person or entity other than FedEx has an insurable interest in the Project or 

until the insureds agree otherwise in writing. The initial amount of that insurance must be equal 

to the Contractor’s Fee and FedEx must adjust the amount of that insurance contemporaneously 

with the execution of any Change Order or the delivery of any Construction Change Directive 

that affects or may affect the amount of the Contractor’s Fee. FedEx must cause that insurance to 

be written on an “All Risk” policy form with no exclusion of coverage for theft, vandalism, 

malicious mischief, collapse, temporary buildings, debris removal or demolition occasioned by 

the enforcement of any applicable Legal Requirements. FedEx must cause that insurance to be 

written so that it provides coverage for damage to Materials stored at locations other than the Site 

and for damage to Materials that are in transit. If damage occurs to the Project by reason of a 

peril covered under the policy of property insurance that FedEx maintains in force in accordance 

with the terms of this Section 20.06, FedEx shall pay to Contractor as the restoration of the 

Project progresses all reasonable costs that Contractor reasonably incurs in connection with the 

restoration except to the extent that the negligence or willful misconduct of Contractor, any of its 

Subcontractors or any of their respective employees or agents is the cause of the damage, in 

48

which case Contractor will be responsible for the amount of the deductible established under the 

terms of that policy. Moreover, if either (i) FedEx does not have in force the builder’s risk 

insurance required by virtue of the terms of this Section 20.06 at the time that damage occurs to 

the Project or (ii) the damage occurs to the Project by reason of a peril identified as an excluded 

risk in the policy of property insurance that FedEx maintains in force in accordance with the 

terms of this Section 20.06, Contractor has no obligation to incur any costs in connection with 

the restoration of that damage unless FedEx makes a written commitment to pay to Contractor as 

the restoration of the Project progresses all reasonable costs that Contractor reasonably incurs in 

connection with the restoration of that damage. 

Section 20.07. Waiver of Claims. 

Each party waives and releases, to the extent of the 

proceeds that are or would be payable to it in respect of the policies of property insurance that it 

maintains in force with respect to its property, all rights of recovery, claim, action or cause of 

action that it may now or later have against the other or the other's agents, officers and employees 

by virtue of any loss or damage that may occur to its property, including, without limitation, the 

Project and equipment used in the performance of the Work, as applicable, regardless of cause or 

origin, including, without limitation, the negligence of the other party or any of its respective 

representatives, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors and invitees. 

ARTICLE 21 

BONDS 

Section 21.01. Contractor's Bonds. 

Contractor shall furnish and keep in force throughout 

the performance of the Work a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond in the 

amount of the Contractor’s Fee, as it may be modified from time to time. Each bond must name 

FedEx, Landlord and each Designated Lender as obligees and must be in such form as FedEx 

approves. Each bond must be executed by a surety that is authorized to do business and licensed 

to execute bonds as surety in the state in which the Project is located, that is listed in the Federal 

Register as a surety the United States Department of the Treasury has approved, and that FedEx 

approves. The Contractor’s Fee includes the cost of those bonds. 

ARTICLE 22 

INDEMNIFICATION 

Section 22.01. General Indemnification. 

Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold 

FedEx, and its respective officers, directors and employees harmless from and against all 

liabilities, damages, losses, expenses, demands, claims, suits or judgments, including reasonable 

attorneys' fees and expenses, that may be asserted against, or sustained by, any of them by reason 

of: 

(i) the death of or bodily injury to any person or the loss of, damage to 

or destruction of any property in any manner arising out of the 

willful misconduct or negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, 

the Subcontractors, the respective agents and employees of 

Contractor and the Subcontractors or any other person for whose 

49

acts or omissions any of the foregoing persons or entities may be 

responsible; 

(ii) Contractor’s failure to perform fully and punctually any of the 

obligations it undertakes under the terms of this Agreement; 

(iii) the breach of any warranty or representation Contractor makes in 

this Agreement or any document Contractor delivers in accordance 

with the terms of this Agreement; or 

(iv) the failure or alleged failure of Contractor or any Subcontractor to 

make payments, when due, to its Subcontractors or other suppliers 

of equipment, labor or material required in connection with the 

Work, or the assertion by a Subcontractor or other supplier of a 

lien claim against FedEx’s interest in the Site or the Work, or the 

exercise by the Subcontractor or other supplier of any other remedy 

on the basis of the alleged failure by Contractor or any 

Subcontractor to make those payments when due. 

Contractor shall promptly give written notice to FedEx of the initiation of any action, 

administrative or legal proceeding, or investigation to which the foregoing indemnity may apply. 

In the case of matters falling within the scope of division (i) above, the foregoing indemnity will 

not be limited to damages, compensation or other benefits payable under the terms of insurance 

policies, workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts and, to 

the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor waives, insofar as its foregoing obligation to 

FedEx and its officers, directors and employees is concerned, any immunity or damage limitation 

that would otherwise be available to it by virtue of such workers compensation acts, disability 

benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 

Section 22.02. Labor Indemnity. 

Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold FedEx 

harmless from and against (i) all administrative and judicial actions and judgments initiated or 

entered against FedEx in connection with any labor related activity arising from Contractor's 

performance of the Work and (ii) all losses and expenses that FedEx sustains or incurs by reason 

of any such action or judgment, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys' fees. As used 

in this Agreement, "labor related activity" includes, without limitation, strikes, walk-outs, 

informational or organizational picketing, use of placards, distribution of hand-outs, leaflets or 

other similar acts at or in the vicinity of the Site or in the vicinity of any other facility where 

FedEx conducts business. FedEx shall advise Contractor if any labor related activity occurs and 

Contractor shall arrange for the legal representation necessary to protect FedEx's interest. 

FedEx's General Counsel must, however, approve the representation Contractor arranges. 

Section 22.03. Royalties and Patents. Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees in 

any way relating to the Work, shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any proprietary 

rights arising from performance of the Work and shall indemnify, defend and hold FedEx 

harmless from loss on account of any such suit or claim, except to the extent that the patent 

50

infringement and the costs of defending claims and suits initiated because of such infringement 

arise because FedEx specifies a particular process or product of a particular manufacturer in the 

Contract Documents and the infringement was unknown to Contractor. 

Section 22.04. Survival of Indemnities. 

The indemnities set forth in this Article 22 will 

survive the making of Final Payment or any earlier termination of this Agreement. 

ARTICLE 23 

FEDEX'S RIGHT TO OCCUPY 

Section 23.01. Early Occupancy by FedEx. 

FedEx reserves the right to occupy or use 

ahead of schedule any substantially completed or partially completed portion of the Work when 

such occupancy and use are in its best interest. If FedEx's occupancy or use increases the costs 

Contractor and its Subcontractors reasonably incur in the performance of the Work (other than 

for corrections that are Contractor's responsibility) or delays the Work’s completion, the parties 

will adjust the Contractor’s Fee, and the Substantial Completion Date, as appropriate, by means 

of Change Orders. Contractor must make written claims for adjustment of the Contractor’s Fee, 

and the Substantial Completion Date within seven calendar days after the date of FedEx's written 

notification to Contractor of its intent to occupy or use portions of the Work. 

Section 23.02. Corrections After Occupancy. 

After FedEx occupies any substantially 

completed portion of the Work, Contractor may not disrupt FedEx's occupancy to make 

corrections in the Work, for which Contractor is responsible, but must make such corrections at 

Contractor's expense after FedEx's normal working hours, if FedEx requires such scheduling. 

ARTICLE 24 

COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS 

Section 24.01. Compliance with Laws. 

(a) To the extent applicable to it, Contractor shall 

comply with the affirmative action requirements applicable to contracts with government 

contractors as set forth in Title 41 of the Code of Federal Regulations and the Immigration and 

Reform Act of 1986. 

(b) Contractor shall employ, and shall permit its Subcontractors to employ, only persons 

who are legally authorized to work in the United States and to have, and to cause its 

Subcontractors to have, an I-9 employment authorization form, if required, for each person they 

respectively employ. 

(c) Contractor shall give all notices, and timely provide all reports, required by, and shall 

comply with, all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders that any public authority having 

jurisdiction over Contractor, the Work or the Site (including, without limitation, Landlord) may 

enact, promulgate or issue and with respect to which compliance is necessary in order for 

performance of the Work to be lawful. Contractor shall also fully and punctually perform the 

obligations, or observe the restrictions, set forth in the attached Exhibit H. 

51

(d) Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold FedEx and its officers, directors and 

employees harmless from and against all claims, demands, actions, administrative proceedings, 

liabilities, and judgments arising from the failure of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors to 

comply with the provisions of this Section 24.01 and all losses and expenses FedEx sustains or 

incurs by reason of those claims, demands, actions, administrative proceedings, liabilities and 

judgments, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys' fees. 

ARTICLE 25 

DEFAULT; FEDEX'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE 

Section 25.01. Events of Default. 

(a) If any of the following events of default (the "Events 

of Default") occur, the aggrieved party may terminate this Agreement in whole or in part at its 

option: 

(i) If either party fails in the full and punctual payment of any sum due to the 

other and that failure continues for more than 15 business days after the 

defaulting party's receipt of notice that the payment is late; 

(ii) If either party fails in the performance of any obligation that it undertakes 

under the terms of this Agreement and that involves more than the 

payment of money to the other party and that failure continues for more 

than ten business days after the defaulting party's receipt of notice from the 

other party; 

(iii) If either party makes a misrepresentation to the other in this Agreement or 

in any document that it must deliver to the other in accordance with the 

terms of this Agreement and fails to rectify the misrepresentation for more 

than ten business days after the misrepresenting party’s receipt of notice 

from the other party; 

(iv) If either party files a voluntary petition in bankruptcy; files any petition or 

answer seeking organization, composition, readjustment, liquidation or 

similar relief for itself under any present or future statute, law or regulation 

of the United States; seeks, consents to, or acquiesces in, the appointment 

of any trustee for a substantial portion of its assets; makes any general 

assignment for the benefit of creditors; or admits in writing its inability to 

pay its debts generally as they become due; 

(v) If creditors of either party file a petition against that party seeking any 

reorganization, composition, readjustment, liquidation or similar relief 

under any present or future statute, law or regulation of the United States 

and, notwithstanding efforts of the affected party to cause the petition to be 

dismissed or stayed, the petition remains effective for an aggregate period 

of 60 days (whether or not consecutive); or, if any trustee, receiver or 

52

liquidator of the affected party is appointed in connection with the petition, 

that appointment remains effective for an aggregate period of 60 days 

(whether or not consecutive), notwithstanding efforts of the affected party 

to cause the appointment to be vacated or stayed; 

(vi) If a court of competent jurisdiction enters an order for relief in any 

proceeding initiated by or against either party in accordance with any 

present or future statute, law or regulation of the United States pertaining 

to bankruptcy or the reorganization, composition, adjustment or 

liquidation of the debts and obligations of debtors; or 

(vii) If Contractor or any officer or principal owner of Contractor is indicted for 

a felony. 

No termination accomplished in accordance with the foregoing will constitute an election of 

remedies. 

(b) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default by Contractor, FedEx may terminate 

this Agreement without prejudice to any other remedy available to FedEx by giving Contractor 

written notice at least seven days in advance of the effective date of the termination. Upon that 

termination, FedEx may take possession of all or some of Contractor's materials, tools, 

equipment and appliances and complete the Work by such means as FedEx determines to be 

appropriate. Upon the termination, FedEx may withhold all further payment from Contractor 

until the Work is fully completed. If the aggregate amount of the Contractor’s Fee not previously 

disbursed to Contractor exceeds the aggregate of (i) the expense to FedEx of completing the 

Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, and (ii) 

FedEx's losses and damages arising from Contractor's default, FedEx shall pay the amount of that 

excess to Contractor. If the total of (i) the expense to FedEx of completing the Work and (ii) 

FedEx's losses and damages arising from Contractor's default exceeds the aggregate amount of 

the Contractor’s Fee not previously disbursed to Contractor, Contractor shall pay the deficiency 

to FedEx on demand, but FedEx’s receipt of those monies will not constitute an election of 

remedies by FedEx. 

(c) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default by FedEx, Contractor may retain all 

sums that FedEx previously paid, but Contractor's retention of those sums will neither limit or 

impair rights Contractor may have as a result of FedEx's default nor constitute an election of 

remedies. Also, if an Event of Default by FedEx occurs and if FedEx fails to rectify the Event of 

Default within five business days after the date on which Contractor delivers a second written 

notice in which it advises FedEx of its intent to stop the Work, Contractor may stop the Work 

until FedEx rectifies the Event of Default, subject to the limitation set forth below. Any stoppage 

of the Work that occurs on the authority of this Section 25.01(c) will constitute an Excused 

Delay. If, however, FedEx denies in good faith that an Event of Default on its part has occurred 

and initiates the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Article 26, Contractor’s right to stop 

the Work will be suspended until the use of those procedures result in either FedEx’s 

53

acknowledgement or an arbitrator’s determination that an Event of Default on FedEx’s part had 

occurred. 

Section 25.02. FedEx’s Right to Terminate without Cause. 

(a) FedEx may terminate this 

Agreement without cause at any time by giving Contractor written notice at least 15 days in 

advance of the date of termination specified in the notice. Upon receipt of that notice, Contractor 

must cease performance of the Work as soon as reasonably possible and must make every 

reasonable effort to mitigate its losses and damages. In that regard, Contractor must perform 

such acts as may be necessary to preserve and protect that part of the Work already performed. 

Upon a termination occurring in accordance with the terms of this Section 25.02, Contractor may 

retain all sums of money that FedEx has previously paid to it, and FedEx shall pay to Contractor: 

(i) all Retainage that is then being held in accordance with the terms 

of Section 4.03 and that Contractor would not have an obligation to 

remit to Subcontractors who are performing under the terms of 

Subcontracts, the assignment of which FedEx is accepting in 

connection with the termination of this Agreement; 

(ii) the amounts that have become due under the terms of Subcontracts, 

the assignment of which FedEx is accepting, and that FedEx has 

not previously remitted to Contractor; 

(iii) a final payment on account of the Contractor’s Fee equal to the 

amount by which that portion of the Contractor’s Fee allocable to 

that portion of the Work completed as of the effective date of the 

termination, as determined on the basis of the Schedule of Values 

attached as Exhibit C-5, 

exceeds the sum of the amounts described 

in divisions (i) and (ii) above, the amount of the Retainage that 

FedEx does not have an obligation to remit by virtue of division (i) 

above, and the aggregate amount of the remittances that FedEx has 

previously made to Contractor on account of the Contractor’s Fee; 

(iv) the aggregate amount that Contractor must pay to Subcontractors in 

connection with the termination of Subcontracts, the assignment of 

which FedEx is not accepting in connection with the termination of 

this Agreement; and 

(v) the aggregate amount of the costs that Contractor incurs in the demobilization 

of its personnel and equipment assigned to the 

Project. 

FedEx need not remit that portion of the Retainage included among the amounts that it must pay 

to Contractor in accordance with the foregoing terms of this Section 25.02 until the date that is 

30 days after the date on which Contractor’s performance of the Work ceases. FedEx shall 

assume Contractor’s obligations under all Subcontracts, the assignment of which FedEx accepts 

54

in connection with the termination of this Agreement, and shall indemnify Contractor from all 

liabilities arising under the terms of those Subcontracts following FedEx’s acceptance of the 

assignment. In that regard, FedEx, without Contractor’s joinder, may direct the remittance of 

that portion of the Retainage that remains following the remittance to Contractor required by 

virtue of the foregoing terms of this Section 25.02 to the Subcontractors that will continue to 

perform portions of the Work, as and when retained amounts become due under the terms of 

their respective Subcontracts. 

(b) Following the effective date of the termination, Contractor will have no further 

liability under the terms of this Agreement other than with respect to matters that occurred prior 

to the effective date of the termination or obligations that the parties agreed would expressly 

survive the termination of this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 25.02(b) will survive 

the termination. 

(c) If FedEx attempts to terminate this Agreement in accordance with the terms of 

Section 25.01(b) and FedEx later acknowledges, or a panel of arbitrators or a court having 

jurisdiction over the parties finds in a final order that is not subject to appeal, that FedEx was not 

entitled to terminate this Agreement in accordance with the terms of that Section, the parties will 

treat that unauthorized attempt to terminate this Agreement as an election to terminate this 

Agreement in accordance with the terms of this Section 25.02. 

Section 25.03. Assignment of Subcontracts. 

Contractor assigns to FedEx all of its interest 

in each Subcontract that now exists or that Contractor later executes in connection with the 

performance of any part of the Work. That assignment will be effective, however, only upon 

FedEx’s acceptance in writing and only as to those Subcontracts that FedEx designates in 

writing. FedEx may accept that assignment at any time during the course of construction prior to 

Final Acceptance. Each Subcontract must provide that it is freely assignable by Contractor to 

FedEx and its assigns. Each such assignment by Contractor is part of the consideration to FedEx 

for entering into this Agreement with Contractor and may not be withdrawn prior to Final 

Acceptance. 

Section 25.04. Assurance of Performance. 

If an Event of Default of the nature described in 

division (iii), (iv) or (v) of Section 25.01(a) occurs with respect to Contractor, FedEx may 

request of Contractor or its successor in interest adequate assurance of future performance in 

accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Failure to comply with 

that request within ten days after the delivery of that request will entitle FedEx to terminate this 

Agreement and to pursue the remedies set forth in Section 25.01(b). Pending receipt of the 

requested adequate assurance and actual performance, FedEx may proceed with the Work with 

its own forces or with other contractors on a time and material or other appropriate basis and 

back-charge the cost it incurs against that portion of the Contractor’s Fee that remains to be paid 

under the terms of this Agreement. 

Section 25.05. Contractor’s Responsibility upon Termination. If termination of this 

Agreement occurs in accordance with the terms of this Article 25, without regard to which party 

55

exercises the termination right, Contractor shall promptly do the following unless FedEx directs 

it to do otherwise by written notice: 

(i) immediately stop the Work; 

(ii) reduce its staff, services and outstanding commitments in order to 

minimize the cost of termination; 

(iii) terminate outstanding orders and Subcontracts other than those the 

assignment of which FedEx is accepting in connection with the 

termination; 

(iv) settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of 

Subcontracts and orders; 

(v) transfer title to, and deliver to, FedEx that part of the Work that 

had been completed as of the effective date of the termination and, 

if paid for by FedEx, all Materials and contract rights that 

Contractor has acquired in the performance of the Work. 

Moreover, if FedEx terminates this Agreement on the authority of this Article 25, Contractor 

shall also deliver to FedEx all records, including, without limitation, computer records and “asbuilt” 

drawings, that are in its possession and that of its agents and Subcontractors and that relate 

to the Work and all information that FedEx will need in order to be able to access and use those 

records. 

Section 25.06. No Duty to Terminate. 

The right of either party to terminate this Agreement 

or to suspend the Work does not give rise to a duty to exercise that right for the benefit of the 

other party or any other person or entity. 

ARTICLE 26 

ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION 

Section 26.01. Alternative Dispute Resolution. 

(a) The parties shall attempt in good faith 

to resolve any dispute arising out of or relating to the breach, termination or validity of this 

Agreement in the following manner: 

(i) Either party may give the other party written notice of any dispute 

not resolved in the normal course of business. That notice must set 

forth the basis for the initiating party’s claim and the 

documentation that the initiating party believes supports its claim. 

Project managers of both parties, at levels at least one step above 

the project personnel who have previously been involved in the 

dispute, will meet at a mutually acceptable time and place within 

ten days after the date of the delivery of that notice and as often 

56

after that time as they reasonably deem necessary for the purpose 

of exchanging relevant information and attempting to resolve the 

dispute. 

(ii) If the project managers fail to resolve the dispute within 30 days 

after the date of the dispute notice, or if the project managers fail to 

meet within the ten-day period specified above, both parties will 

refer the dispute to senior executives, who have authority to settle 

the dispute. In connection with that referral, the project managers 

will promptly prepare and exchange memoranda, which state the 

issues in dispute and each party's position in the dispute, which 

summarize the negotiations that have taken place, and to which 

they attach all relevant documentation. Following the exchange, 

each party's project manager will furnish copies of both parties' 

position memoranda to the senior executive within that party's 

organization to whom the dispute has been referred. The senior 

executives will meet for negotiations at a mutually agreed time and 

place within 45 days after the date of the delivery of the dispute 

notice. 

(b) If, following the referral of the matter to their senior executives, the parties fail to 

resolve the dispute within 60 days after the date of the dispute notice, the parties will attempt in 

good faith to resolve the controversy or claim in accordance with the Center for Public Resources 

Model ADR Procedures for the Mediation of Business Disputes. Notwithstanding any 

provisions in those procedures, the parties may not litigate any claim or dispute except as 

otherwise provided in this Agreement. 

(c) The parties shall finally settle any dispute not resolved by means of the mediation 

procedures within 60 days after the initiation of those procedures by arbitration conducted 

expeditiously in accordance with the Center for Public Resources Rules for Non-Administered 

Arbitration of Business Disputes by three (3) arbitrators, with each party selecting one (1) 

arbitrator and the two (2) chosen arbitrators selecting the third. The United States Arbitration 

Act, 9 U.S.C. § 1-16, will govern the arbitration and any court having jurisdiction of the dispute 

may enter judgment upon the award the arbitrators render. The place of arbitration will be 

Memphis, Tennessee. If the dispute involves the payment of compensation by one party to the 

other, the parties will empower the arbitrators to award only compensatory damages within the 

upper and lower limits that the parties impose by mutual agreement. The parties each irrevocably 

waive in any dispute to which this Article 26 is applicable any right it may have to any damages 

in excess of compensatory damages, including, without limitation, punitive and treble damages. 

The following additional procedures will apply to any arbitration conducted in accordance with 

the foregoing: 

(i) The arbitrators will schedule a pre-hearing conference to resolve 

procedural matters, arrange for the exchange of information, obtain 

stipulations, and narrow the issues. The parties will submit 

57

proposed discovery schedules to the arbitrators at the pre-hearing 

conference. The scope and duration of discovery will be within the 

arbitrators' sole discretion. The arbitrators may order a pre-hearing 

exchange of information by the parties, including, without 

limitation, production of requested documents, exchange of 

summaries of testimony of proposed witnesses, and examination 

by deposition of parties and third-party witnesses. The arbitrators 

will exercise their discretion in favor of discovery that is 

reasonable under the circumstances. 

(ii) Any party may be represented by counsel or other authorized 

representative. In rendering their decision, the arbitrators will 

determine the parties' rights and obligations according to the 

substantive and procedural laws of the state in which the Project is 

located and the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrators must base 

their decision on the evidence introduced at the hearing, including 

all logical and reasonable inferences from that evidence. The 

arbitrators may make any determination and grant any remedy or 

relief that is just and equitable. The arbitrators must accompany 

their decision with a written statement of decision explaining the 

factual and legal basis for the decision as to each of the principal 

disputed issues. The arbitrators may award costs, including, 

without limitation attorneys' fees and expert and witness costs, to 

the prevailing party, if any, as designated by the arbitrators. The 

party that does not prevail in the arbitration, as designated by the 

arbitrators, as part of their decision, must pay the arbitrators' fees 

and costs. The arbitrators will designate a party as the prevailing 

party if that party's proposal for the resolution of dispute is the 

closer to that adopted by the arbitrators. 

(d) If any person involved in the meetings contemplated in Section 26.01(a) above 

wishes an attorney to accompany him or her to any of those meetings, that person will give 

written notice of that intention to the other party at least three business days in advance of any 

meeting that the attorney will attend and the other party may also cause an attorney representing 

its interests to be present at each such meeting. 

(e) The parties may extend any deadline specified in this Article 26 by mutual agreement. 

(f) The parties will treat all negotiations conducted in accordance with the requirements 

of this Article 26, including, without limitation, the exchange of position memoranda, as 

confidential and as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of the Federal Rules of 

Evidence and the rules of evidence of any court having jurisdiction over the dispute. 

(g) If multiple disputes between the parties are pending concurrently, the parties may 

consolidate those disputes for purposes of the mediation and arbitration stages described above. 

58

If a dispute between FedEx and any of its architects, engineers or other consultants engaged in 

the design and construction of the Project or a Separate Contractor is pending concurrently with a 

dispute between the parties and each dispute involves substantially the same facts, the parties will 

consolidate at the request of either of them the proceedings pending under the terms of this 

Article 26 with the dispute resolution proceedings pending between FedEx and its architect, 

engineer or other consultants or the Separate Contractor. If a dispute between Contractor and a 

Subcontractor is pending concurrently with a dispute between the parties and each dispute 

involves substantially the same facts, the parties will consolidate at the request of either of them 

the proceedings pending under the terms of this Article 26 with the dispute resolution 

proceedings pending between Contractor and the Subcontractor. If a dispute between FedEx and 

Landlord is pending concurrently with a dispute between the parties and each dispute involves 

substantially the same facts, the parties will consolidate at the request of either of them the 

proceedings pending under the terms of this Article 26 with the dispute resolution proceedings 

pending between FedEx and Landlord if Landlord will consolidate its claim. Neither party may 

enter into a contract relating to the Project that directly or indirectly gives any other person or 

entity a right to resolve any dispute with, involving, or affecting the other party to this Agreement 

in a manner inconsistent with the procedures set forth in this Article 26. 

(h) The procedures specified in this Article 26 are the sole and exclusive procedures for 

the resolution of disputes to which this Article is intended to apply. Either party may seek a 

preliminary injunction or other preliminary judicial relief, however, if, in that party's judgment, 

that action is necessary for the sole purpose of avoiding irreparable harm. Despite that action, the 

parties will continue to participate in good faith in the procedures set forth above. All applicable 

limitations periods will be tolled while the procedures specified above are pending. The parties 

will take all action appropriate to accomplish that tolling. 

(i) Pending the resolution of a dispute in accordance with the procedures set forth in this 

Article 26, Contractor shall continue to perform the Work and FedEx shall continue to remit to 

Contractor any progress payment to which Contractor is entitled under the terms of this 

Agreement and that is not the subject of the dispute. 

(j) The provisions of this Article 26 will survive any termination of this Agreement. 

ARTICLE 27 

INTENTIONALLY OMITTED 

ARTICLE 28 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Section 28.01. Assignment. This Agreement inures to the benefit of and binds each of 

the parties and their respective successors and assigns, but, except as provided below, neither 

party may voluntarily assign or delegate the rights or duties arising under the terms of this 

Agreement without the prior written consent of the other party; FedEx, however, may assign all 

or any part of its rights and delegate all or any of its duties without Contractor’s consent to (i) a 

corporation controlled by, controlling, or under common control with, FedEx, (ii) the surviving 

59

corporation in any merger or other corporate reorganization involving FedEx, or (iii) the 

purchaser of all or substantially all of FedEx’s assets. Without limiting the generality of the 

foregoing, Contractor may not assign its rights to any payments that become due to it under the 

terms of this Agreement without FedEx’s prior written consent. 

Section 28.02. Time Calculations. 

If the final day of any period within which a party 

must perform an obligation or within which an event must occur is a Saturday, Sunday or Legal 

Holiday, that period will be automatically extended to the next calendar day that is not a 

Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday. The term “Legal Holiday” means any holiday generally 

observed by financial institutions in Memphis, Tennessee. The term “days,” as used in this 

Agreement, will mean calendar days unless the parties specified “business days” in the applicable 

provision. 

Section 28.03. Section Headings and Captions. 

All section headings and captions used 

in this Agreement are purely for convenience and will not affect the interpretation of this 

Agreement. 

Section 28.04. Exhibits. 

All Exhibits described in this Agreement are incorporated in 

and made a part of this Agreement, except that, if any inconsistency between this Agreement and 

the provisions of any Exhibit exists, the provisions of this Agreement will control. Terms used 

in an Exhibit and also used in this Agreement have the meanings established in this Agreement. 

Section 28.05. Applicable Law. 

The laws of the state where the Site is located will 

govern the interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement and, in those instances where 

Article 26 does not apply, the parties submit to the jurisdiction of any appropriate court within 

that state for adjudication of disputes arising from this Agreement. The foregoing choice of 

jurisdiction is mandatory and not permissive in nature and precludes the possibility of litigation 

or trial in any jurisdiction other than as specified above. 

Section 28.06. Amendments. 

Except as otherwise provided to the contrary, the parties 

may modify this Agreement solely by means of written agreements signed on behalf of FedEx 

and Contractor by their respective authorized representatives. 

Section 28.07. Entire Agreement. 

This Agreement supersedes all prior understandings, 

representations, negotiations and correspondence between the parties and constitutes the entire 

agreement between them with respect to the matters described in this Agreement, and no course 

of dealing, course of performance or usage of trade will modify or affect the terms of this 

Agreement. 

Section 28.08. Legality of Provisions. 

The invalidity, illegality or unenforceability of 

any provision of this Agreement will not affect or impair the validity, legality and enforceability 

of the remaining provisions of this Agreement. 

Section 28.09. No Waiver. The failure or delay of either party to insist in any one or 

more cases upon the strict performance of, or adherence to, any of the terms, covenants and 

60

conditions of this Agreement or to exercise any right or remedy contained in this Agreement will 

not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment by either for the future of such term, covenant or 

condition or such right or remedy. One or more waivers of the breach of any covenant, 

agreement or condition by either party will not be construed as a waiver of a future breach of the 

same covenant, agreement or condition or of any other covenant, agreement or condition. 

Neither FedEx’s inspection of the Work nor FedEx’s failure to inspect the Work will release 

Contractor from any obligation it undertakes under the terms of this Agreement. 

Section 28.10. Survival of Terms. 

The rights and obligations of the parties and, 

specifically, Contractor's obligations to indemnify FedEx will survive the completion of the 

Work, Final Acceptance, the making of Final Payment and any termination of this Agreement. 

Section 28.11. Public Release of Information. 

Contractor shall treat all information 

relating to the Project, including, without limitation, all information, documents and electronic 

media that FedEx supplies to Contractor and all information, documents and electronic media 

that Contractor prepares or causes to be prepared for the Project, as confidential and proprietary 

information of FedEx. Contractor shall obtain in each instance FedEx’s prior written approval 

concerning the exact text and timing of news releases, articles, brochures, advertisements, 

prepared speeches and other information releases concerning this Agreement or the Work. 

Contractor shall also require all Subcontractors to observe the foregoing restrictions. FedEx has 

an unconditional right to use, for any purpose whatsoever, any information, documents or 

electronic media that Contractor prepares or causes to be prepared for the Project, free of any 

copyright claims, trade secrets or other proprietary rights. 

Section 28.12. Counterparts. 

The parties may execute this Agreement in any number of 

counterparts and all the counterparts, taken together, will constitute a single agreement. 

Section 28.13. Change Of Control. 

In addition to such other rights as FedEx may have, 

FedEx may immediately terminate this Agreement upon any change (i) in the ownership or 

voting control of fifty-one percent (51%) or more of the capital stock or assets of Contractor, if a 

corporation, or (ii) in the ownership of Contractor or its assets, if not a corporation. Contractor 

shall notify FedEx in writing at least 30 days before any such change in control of Contractor’s 

capital stock, business, or assets becomes effective. 

Section 28.14. Financial Information. 

Within 120 days after the end of each fiscal year 

of Contractor, Contractor shall provide to FedEx a financial statement prepared with respect to 

its financial affairs in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and audited by 

an independent, certified public accountant. In addition, Contractor shall provide to FedEx any 

other financial information FedEx may reasonably request from time to time. 

Section 28.15. Further Assurances 

. Each party will take such actions, provide such 

documents, do such things and provide such further assurances as the other party may reasonably 

request during the term of this Agreement for the purpose of further memorializing and achieving 

the intent reflected in this Agreement. 

61

Section 28.16. Notices. 

All notices, approvals, requests, consents and other 

communications given in accordance with the terms of this Agreement must be in writing and 

must be hand-delivered, sent by telex, sent by Federal Express service or sent by United States 

certified or registered mail, addressed as follows: 

If to Contractor: ________________________ 

Attn: __________________ 

________________________ 

________________________ 

If to FedEx: Federal Express Corporation 

Attn: Project Manager, Project No. 8634515 


Building H, 3rd Floor 

Memphis, Tennessee 38125 

with a copy to: 

Federal Express Corporation 

Legal Department 

Attention: Managing Director, 

Business Transactions (#__-____) 


Building B, 3 rd 

Floor 


Any notice, approval, request, consent or other communication given and sent in a manner 

specified above will be deemed to have been given when received or when the addressee refuses 

delivery. Either party may change its address for the delivery of notices by giving written notice 

of that change to the other party in the manner specified above. 

Section 28.17. Signage. 

FedEx may place on the Site whatever signs it wishes. 

Contractor shall place on the Site all signs that Legal Requirements applicable to the Work 

require and such additional signs as may be necessary to promote the safe conduct of the Work. 

With FedEx’s prior written consent, Contractor may also place marketing signage on the Site; 

FedEx may not unreasonably withhold that consent. Contractor shall comply with all Legal 

Requirements applicable to the placement of signs on the Site. Upon Final Acceptance of the 

Work or any earlier termination of this Agreement, Contractor shall remove all signs that it has 

placed on the Site and that the Contract Documents do not specifically require as part of the 

Project. 

Section 28.18 Validity of Agreement 

. This Agreement is not valid or binding upon 

FedEx unless an officer of FedEx has executed it and FedEx's counsel has manifested his or her 

approval by signing or initialing this Agreement in the space provided. 

62

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the date first 

above written. 

By: By: 

Name: Name: 

Title: Title: 


Date: Date: 

("Contractor") ("FedEx") 

#869797v2 JPD/TLB 8/22/2011 

63

A-1 

Exhibit A-1 

to that certain 

Construction Agreement 

between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT 

The Project is to construct one (1) security screening building, one (1) back up generator 

building, install one truck dispatch/security booth and provide road improvements to Sally Ride 

Way at a site located at 1 Sally Ride Way in Alameda County, California all in accordance with 

the plans and specifications entitled “Federal Express Oakland Sort Expansion: Security 

Screening Bldg. Construction” prepared by Transystems, dated January 7, 2011, FedEx Project 

No.: 8634515

B-1-1 

Exhibit B-1 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF NOTICE TO PROCEED

Gentlemen: 

B-1-2 

NOTICE TO PROCEED 

In accordance with Section 3.01 of the Construction Agreement (the "Agreement") dated 

___________, 

2011, between Federal Express Corporation and ________________________, 

you are hereby given Notice to Proceed with the Work to be performed under the terms of the 

Agreement. 

You are directed to commence the Work not later than 

FedEx's Representative for the Work is Michael Baker. 

Very truly yours, 

,____. 


By: 

Agreed: Title: 

______________________________ 


By: 

Title:

C-1-1 

Exhibit C-1 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


CONTRACTOR’S FEE PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

FedEx shall make progress payments to Contractor in accordance with the following procedure: 

(i) On or before the 7 th day of each calendar month during the performance of the 

Work, or the next working day if the 7 th day is a Saturday, Sunday or Legal 

Holiday, Contractor shall submit to FedEx an Application for Payment in the form 

of Exhibit C-2, 

based on portions of the Work completed during the preceding 

month. 

(ii) Contractor shall accompany each Application for Payment with: 

(A) a Partial Waiver of Mechanics' and Materialmen's Lien in the form of 

Exhibit C-3, in the case of all applications for payment other than the 

Final Payment, and a Waiver of Mechanics' and Materialmen's Lien in the 

form of Exhibit C-4, 

in the case of the application for the Final Payment; 

(B) the schedule comparison required by virtue of Section 3.05 of the 

Agreement; 

(C) a schedule ("Subcontractor Payment Schedule") itemizing the amounts 

that Contractor intends to pay to Subcontractors out of the progress 

payment for which it has submitted the Application for Payment; 

(D) a list of all Subcontracts Contractor executed during the previous month, 

together with a copy of each of those Subcontracts;

C-1-2 

(E) a Partial Waiver of Mechanics' and Materialmen's Lien in the form of 

Exhibit C-3 from each Subcontractor that Contractor listed on the 

Subcontractor Payment Schedule that it submitted with the Application for 

Payment for the month prior to the month in which Contractor submits the 

current Application for Payment, which instrument the Subcontractor has 

executed to evidence payment of the amounts shown to be payable to it in 

that Subcontractor Payment Schedule; 

(F) a report reflecting the next month’s anticipated activities and current 

Project photographs; 

(G) an updated schedule (“Projected Cash Flow Analysis”) setting forth 

Contractor’s good faith estimate of the amount of the monthly progress 

payment to which it believes it will become entitled in the ensuing month 

and each subsequent month through FedEx’s Final Acceptance; 

(H) the Transaction Tax Statement, as described in Section 14.01 of the 

Agreement; 

(I) the DBE Compliance Report required by virtue of Exhibit G below; and 

(J) any other documentation that FedEx requests for its proper review of the 

Application for Payment. 

(iii) FedEx shall promptly review each Application for Payment and approve for 

payment such amounts as FedEx reasonably determines to be properly due under 

the terms of the Agreement. FedEx shall state in writing its reason for 

withholding any or all of the monies that Contractor requests in an Application for 

Payment. 

(iv) FedEx shall make payment: (check one) 

X (1) on the last business day of the month succeeding the month 

in which the timely submission of an Application for Payment occurs. 

(2) on the last business day of the month in which the timely 

submission of an Application for Payment occurs. 

Subject to the application of the retainage requirement set forth in Section 4.03 of the Agreement, 

the amount of the progress payment to which Contractor is entitled in response to each submittal 

of an Application for Payment is equal to the amount by which (I) that portion of the 

Contractor’s Fee allocable to that portion of the Work performed through the end of the 

preceding month, as determined on the basis of the Schedule of Values attached as Exhibit C-5, 

exceeds (II) the aggregate amount of all progress payments that FedEx has previously approved

(as determined prior to the application of the retainage requirement set forth in Section 4.03 of 

the Agreement). 

Upon satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 4.04 of the Agreement, FedEx shall make 

payments for Material stored on Site or at other locations approved by FedEx in accordance with 

the progress payment procedures set forth above. 

For Change Orders affecting the Contractor’s Fee, the Contractor’s Fee will be adjusted as set 

forth on the applicable Change Order. 

C-1-3

C-2-1 

Exhibit C-2 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

C-2-2 

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 

Project: FedEx Central File No. 

Finance Project No. 8634515 

Location: FedEx Contract No. 

Application No. 

CONTRACTOR'S Invoice No. Date 

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Period From To 

Page 1 of _____ 

The undersigned Contractor certifies that, to the The present status of the Agreement, inclusive of Change Orders, is as 

best of Contractor's knowledge, information and follows: 

belief, the Work covered by this Application for FEE AMOUNT....................$ 

Payment has been completed in accordance with 

the Contract Documents, that all amounts have REIMBURSABLES.............$ 

been paid by Contractor for Work which previous 

Applications for Payment were issued TOTAL COMMITMENT AMOUNT.....$ 

and payments received from the Owner, and that 

current payment shown herein is now due and 

there is no reason why payment should not be made 

as requested. Work Completed This Period To Date 

FINAL PAYMENT YES � NO � Fee Earned _________________ ___________ 

Contractor: Reimbursables _________________ ___________ 

Address: Total Earned _________________ ___________ 

Retainage _________% _________________ ___________ 

Signature: Total earned less retainage _________________ ___________ 

CURRENT PAYMENT DUE________________ 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

FOR FEDEX USE ONLY 

Gross Invoiced Amount $ 

Contractor/Architect/Engineer Cost Center/Acct. No. 

Retainage $ 

Contract Number Cost Center/Acct. No. 

Net Payment $ 

Project Number 

Coordinator Date 

Project Manager Date 

Manager Date 

Senior Manager Date 

Managing Director Date 

Transmitted to Vendor Accounting Date 

(Signature) 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

FEDERAL EXPRESS CORPORATION ® 

BOX 727 

DEPT. 

MEMPHIS, TN 38194 MAIL CODE _____ PHONE

C-2-3 

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 

FedEx Central File No. Project No. Application No. 

FedEx Contract No. Period From _________ to 

Page ____ of _____ 

A B C D E F G 

WORK COMPLETED (Gross Invoice Amt.) 

ITEM DESCRIPTION OF SCHEDULED Previous This Application for Payment Total % 

NO. WORK 

VALUE Application 

Completed (G/C) 

For 

& Stored 

Payment Work In 

Place 

Stored 

Materials 

(Not in D 

or E) 

To Date 

(D+E+F)

C-3-1 

Exhibit C-3 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN: MATERIAL AND LABOR

C-3-2 

PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN: MATERIAL AND LABOR 

Project: Date: 

Project No. 

STATE OF COUNTY OF 

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: 

1. The undersigned, ___________________________________________, has 

(Contractor/Subcontractor) 

been employed by ___________________________________ to furnish labor 

(Owner/Contractor) 

or materials for _____________________________________________________ 

(Description of the work) 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

for the Building and Premises known as _______________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

at________________________________in__________________________________ 

(Address) City, County, State 

2. The undersigned acknowledges the receipt of the sum of $____________; that sum 

represents part payment of the contract price for the work the undersigned has undertaken with 

respect to the Building and the Premises described above and represents payment in full of all 

sums that have become due to the undersigned on account of that contract price prior to the date 

of the undersigned's execution of this Release. Accordingly, the undersigned waives and 

releases all liens, or any claims of right to liens, on the Building and Premises on account of 

labor or materials that the undersigned has furnished through the end of the period for which 

the undersigned made application for the payment set forth above in this paragraph. 

3. The undersigned warrants that: 

(i) all laborers that the undersigned has employed in connection with its 

work on the Building and Premises have been fully paid and none of 

those laborers has any claim of right to lien on the Building and Premises 

on account of labor he or she has performed in connection with the work 

the undersigned has undertaken with respect to the Building and 

Premises;

C-3-3 

(ii) it has not granted any security interest in connection with any material 

the undersigned has installed in the Building and Premises; and 

(iii) it has not assigned, and will not assign, any claim for payment or any 

right to perfect a lien against the Building and Premises and it has full 

right and power to execute this Release. 

______________________ Subscribed and sworn to before me on 

, 20 . 

By: 

Title: NOTARY PUBLIC 

Date: 

(Seal, if Corporation) (Seal of Notary Public)

Exhibit C-4 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN: MATERIAL AND LABOR

FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN: MATERIAL AND LABOR 

Project: Date: 

Project No. 

STATE OF 

COUNTY OF 

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: 

1. The undersigned, , has 

(Contractor/Subcontractor) 

been employed by to furnish labor 

(Owner/Contractor) 

or materials for 

(Description of the work) 

for the Building and Premises known as 

in 

(Address) City, County, State 

2. The undersigned, subject only to the receipt of the sum of $ , which is 

acknowledged to be the full amount payable to the undersigned for the work described, hereby 

waives and releases all liens, or any claims of right to liens on the described Building and 

Premises, on account of labor or materials furnished, or which may be furnished, by the 

undersigned to or for said Building or Premises. 

______________________ Subscribed and sworn to before me on 

, 20 . 

By: 

Title: NOTARY PUBLIC 

Date: 

(Seal, if Corporation) (Seal of Notary Public)

Exhibit C-5 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


SCHEDULE OF VALUES FOR CONTRACTOR’S FEE

C-6-1 

Exhibit C-6 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 


FORM OF TRANSACTION TAX STATEMENT

C-6-2 

CONTRACTOR’S TRANSACTION TAX STATEMENT 

[All terms used below have the meanings established for those terms in the Construction 

Agreement dated ______________, 201_, between Federal Express Corporation (“FedEx’) and 

______________________ (“Contractor”).] 

Contractor must check the appropriate box and list any amounts requested: 

Contractor has paid Transaction Taxes as appropriate in connection with the acquisition 

of Materials and Services required in the performance of the Work because the taxing 

authorities in the jurisdiction where the Work is being performed impose those 

Transaction Taxes directly on Contractor. 

The applicable law of the jurisdiction where the Work is being performed requires that 

Transaction Taxes be charged on Contractor’s invoice and billed to FedEx. Transaction 

Taxes in the aggregate amount of $___________________ are separately stated as part 

of Contractor’s Application for Payment. Contractor will collect these Transaction Taxes 

from FedEx and remit them to the proper taxing authorities. 

Transaction Taxes are not due in respect of the Materials and Services that the 

Application for Payment to which this Transaction Tax Statement is appended covers. 

That Application for Payment covers contractor and subcontractor labor only. Contractor 

and subcontractor labor services are not taxable in the jurisdiction where the Work is 

being performed.

D-1-1 

Exhibit D-1 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF CHANGE ORDER

D-1-2 

CHANGE ORDER 

Agreement No. Change Order Date: 

Change Order No. FedEx Project No. 

To Contractor: 

Address: 

City/State: 

As provided in your Construction Agreement with Federal Express Corporation dated 

______, ____, the following changes in the Work are made: 

This Change Order when signed by the parties will have the following effect: 

_______________ the Contractor’s Fee by $_________________, which amount includes all 

applicable Transaction Taxes. 

Original Contractor’s Fee $ 

Change Orders to Date $ 

Amount of This Change Order $ 

Net Change Order Effect $ 

New Contractor’s Fee $ 

The Substantial Completion Date will now be . 

This Change Order in no other way alters the terms and conditions of the Construction 

Agreement, which are ratified and confirmed other than as amended by this Change Order. By 

executing this Change Order, you acknowledge that: 

(i) you can achieve the planned progress in the Work reflected in the 

Construction Schedule (as established in accordance with the terms of 

your Construction Agreement and as adjusted to reflect both any change in 

the scope of the Work and any adjustment in the Substantial Completion 

Date upon which we have agreed in this Change Order) without the need 

for any change in your planned manning or sequencing of the Work that 

you have not already considered in connection with the negotiation of this 

Change Order; 

(ii) the Contractor’s Fee (as defined in your Construction Agreement and, if 

applicable, as adjusted in this Change Order) will fully compensate you for 

all costs that you anticipate incurring in the achievement of that planned 

progress;



D-1-3 

(iii) you waive any claim you may have as of the date of your execution of this 

Change Order for any extension of the Substantial Completion Date or for 

an adjustment in the Contractor’s Fee that is not reflected in this Change 

Order; and 

(iv) you have caused the penalty amount established under the terms of the 

bonds that you furnished to FedEx in accordance with the terms of Section 

21.01 of the Agreement to be adjusted to reflect the adjustment in the 

Contractor’s Fee brought about by the parties’ execution of this Change 

Order. 

The terms used in this Change Order will have the meanings given to those terms in your 

Construction Agreement. 

This Change Order will become effective between FedEx and Contractor upon FedEx’s 

and Contractor’s execution and delivery of this Change Order without regard to whether 

Contractor’s surety has yet joined in the execution of this Change Order. Contractor must, 

however, cause that surety to join in the execution of this Change Order as reflected on the next 

page within 30 days after this Change Order becomes effective between FedEx and Contractor 

and Contractor’s failure to do so will entitle FedEx to withhold all payments on account of the 

Contractor’s Fee to which Contractor would otherwise become entitled until the surety executes 

this Change Order and delivers it to FedEx. 

The parties may execute this Change Order in any number of counterparts and all the 

counterparts, taken together, will constitute a single agreement. A party to this Change Order 

may deliver it to another party by causing an original executed counterpart to be delivered to that 

party or by causing a facsimile transmission of an original executed counterpart to be sent to that 

party. 

_______________________________ FEDERAL EXPRESS CORPORATION 

By: By: 

Title: Title: 

Date: Date:



__________________________, the surety that executed the bonds furnished to FedEx in 

accordance with the terms of Section 21.01 of the Agreement, joins in the execution of the 

captioned Change Order for the sole purpose of confirming the accuracy of the acknowledgement 

set forth in division (iv) of that Change Order and confirming that those bonds, as so modified, 

remain in full force and effect. 

SURETY: 

_______________________________ 

By: 

Title: 

{Attach Power of Attorney for Surety’s Signatory.} 

D-1-4

D-2-1 

Exhibit D-2 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


FORM OF CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

D-2-2 

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

Agreement No. Construction Change 

Directive Date: 

Construction Change 

Directive No. FedEx Project No. 

To Contractor: 

Address: 

City/State: 

As provided in your Construction Agreement with Federal Express Corporation (“FedEx”) 

dated ______, ____, you are instructed to make the following changes in the Work: 

When FedEx signs this Construction Change Directive, you shall make the above-described 

changes in the Work even though you and FedEx either do not agree on all of the terms 

applicable to the changes in the Work or have not yet secured information you and FedEx 

respectively require in order to form opinions as to the terms that should be applicable to the 

changes in the Work. You and FedEx shall resolve any conflict regarding the terms that should 

be applicable to the changes in the Work in accordance with the procedures prescribed in Article 

26, Dispute Resolution, of the Construction Agreement. 

If, as of the date of FedEx’s execution and delivery of this Construction Change Directive, the 

parties have formed opinions as to the terms that should be applicable to the changes in the Work 

described above, complete the following bold-faced portion of this Construction Change 

Directive: 

FedEx asserts that the changes in the Work required by virtue of this Construction Change 

Directive should have the following effect: 


applicable Transaction Taxes.

Original Contractor’s Fee $_____________________ 

Change Orders to Date $_____________________ 

Amount of the Proposed Change $_____________________ 

Net Change Order Effect $_____________________ 

New Contractor’s Fee $_____________________ 

The Substantial Completion Date should now be . 

Other: 

You assert that the changes in the Work required by virtue of this Construction Change 

Directive should have the following effect: 


applicable Transaction Taxes. 

Original Contractor’s Fee $_____________________ 

Change Orders to Date $_____________________ 

Amount of the Proposed Change $_____________________ 

Net Change Order Effect $_____________________ 

New Contractor’s Fee $_____________________ 

The Substantial Completion Date should now be . 

Other: 

D-2-3

If the bold-faced portion of this Construction Change Directive relating to FedEx’s 

assertion as to the effect that the changes in the Work should have has been completed, FedEx 

shall remit payment to you in accordance with the terms of the Construction Agreement until the 

parties resolve any conflict relating to the changes in accordance with Article 26 of the 

Construction Agreement as though the change in the Contractor’s Fee reflected in FedEx’s 

assertion set forth above, if any, is the change that becomes binding upon the parties as the result 

of the use of the procedures set forth in Article 26. If the bold-faced portion of this Construction 

Change Directive relating to your assertion as to the effect that the changes in the Work should 

have has been completed, but not that portion relating to FedEx’s assertion, FedEx shall remit 

payment to you in accordance with the terms of the Construction Agreement until the parties 

resolve any conflict relating to the changes in accordance with Article 26 of the Construction 

Agreement as though the change in the Contractor’s Fee reflected in your assertion set forth 

above, if any, is the change that becomes binding upon the parties as the result of the use of the 

procedures set forth in Article 26. 

In order to memorialize any agreement that the parties make regarding the terms that 

should be applicable to the changes in the Work described above or as part of the conclusion of 

the proceedings described in Article 26, whichever is applicable, the parties shall execute a 

Change Order setting out the applicable terms in the form of Exhibit D-1 to the Construction 

Agreement. 

The terms used in this Construction Change Directive will have the meanings given to 

those terms in the Construction Agreement. 

_______________________________ FEDERAL EXPRESS CORPORATION 

By: By: 

Title: Title: 

Date: Date: 

D-2-4

E-1 

Exhibit E 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 

1. Workers' Compensation 

(a) State Statutory 

(b) Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoremen's) Statutory 

(c) Employer's Liability $1,000,000.00 

2. Commercial General Liability 

(Including Premises Operations, Independent Contractor's Protective, Products and 

Completed Operations, and Explosion, Collapse and Underground coverages) 

(a) Bodily Injury $ 

(b) Property Damage $ 

or 

(c) Combined Single Limit $1,000,000.00 

3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability 

(a) Bodily Injury $ 

(b) Property Damage $ 

or 

(c) Combined Single Limit $1,000,000.00 

4. Completed Operations and Products Liability shall be maintained for four years after Final 

Payment.

5. If an exposure exists, Contractor shall provide Aircraft Liability (owned and non-owned) and 

Watercraft Liability (owned and non-owned), with limits that FedEx approves. 

7. Contractor shall carry insurance in addition to that specifically named above as follows: 

E-2 

Coverage: Umbrella liability coverage $5,000,000 

Coverage: A policy of multiple peril (all-risk) property insurance that has been written 

in respect of the equipment and personal property that Contractor uses in the 

performance of the Work and that is not covered by the builder’s risk policy in force 

with respect to the Project in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of that 

equipment and personal property.

F-1 

Exhibit F 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 

Each week Contractor shall furnish to FedEx’s Representative a list of the names and Social 

Security numbers of all persons that will be present at the Facility for purposes of performing any 

of the Work and shall advise FedEx’s Representative of changes and additions to that list that 

become necessary because of employee resignations or new hires, personnel reassignments or 

employment terminations by Contractor or any of its Subcontractors within 24 hours of the 

occurrence of each such event. 

As and to the extent that FedEx, the Transportation Security Administration (“TSA”) or the 

airport authority having jurisdiction over the Site requires, Contractor shall perform the following 

screening activities with respect to persons that will perform any of the Work at the Site: 

At Contractor’s expense (unless provided to the contrary below and then only to 

the extent expressly set forth below), conduct verifiable criminal background 

checks with respect to each person that will perform any of the Work at the Site 

for all locations where that person has lived during the previous ten years or such 

other period of time as applicable Legal Requirements may prescribe, including 

his or her present addresses. If any part of the Site lies within a Security 

Identification Display Area (“SIDA”), as defined in TSA regulations, the criminal 

background check will take the form of a fingerprint-based Criminal History 

Records Check (“CHRC”). FedEx’s Managing Director, Aviation Security, 

whose contact information is set forth below, will advise Contractor as to whether 

CHRCs are necessary and, if they are, Contractor shall submit CHRC requests to 

FedEx’s Managing Director, Aviation Security. In making those requests, 

Contractor shall use FedEx’s UID/Submission Office Number, which FedEx’s 

Managing Director, Aviation Security will provide to Contractor. FedEx shall pay

F-2 

the costs associated with submissions of requests for CHRCs to the Federal 

Bureau of Investigation through the appropriate clearinghouse. To the extent that 

Contractor must cause a criminal background check other than a CHRC to be 

conducted by virtue of the foregoing, Contractor shall either perform the 

background check itself, if the applicable Legal Requirements of the TSA or the 

airport authority having jurisdiction over the Site permit it to do so, or cause the 

background check to be performed by a service provider reasonably acceptable to 

FedEx. Contractor shall keep all CHRC documentation and other criminal 

background checks that it conducts by virtue of the foregoing on file until Final 

Acceptance and provide FedEx with copies from time to time at FedEx’s request. 

At Contractor’s expense, conduct a Social Security number and date of birth 

verification with respect to all persons that will perform any of the Work. 

Contractor must verify that the Social Security number and date of birth submitted 

to Contractor on the employment application of each person that will perform any 

of the Work at the Site is the actual Social Security number and date of birth for 

that person. Contractor must retain an independent third party service provider to 

perform the foregoing verification. Contractor shall keep the Social Security 

number and date of birth verification for each person engaged to perform any of 

the Work at the Site on file until Final Acceptance and provide FedEx with copies 

from time to time at FedEx’s request. 

Cause persons that will perform any of the Work at the Site to submit to a Drug 

Screen Test that meets the Protocol Standards of the TSA or the airport authority, 

as applicable, or that FedEx establishes and that Contractor causes to be 

administered at Contractor’s expense. The Drug Screen Tests that Contractor 

causes to be administered by virtue of the foregoing must test for evidence of the 

use of marijuana, cocaine, opiates, phencyclidines (“pcp”) and amphetamines. 

The testing laboratory that analyzes the blood or urine samples taken in 

connection with a required Drug Screen Test must be a laboratory approved by the 

National Institute of Drug Abuse. Contractor may not permit any person to enter 

the Site for the purpose of performing any of the Work if the results of a Drug 

Screen Test administered to that person exceed the minimum allowable levels that 

the Department of Transportation (“DOT”) establishes from time to time. 

Contractor shall ensure that a condition of the continued employment of each 

person engaged to perform any of the Work at the Site is that that person must 

submit to Drug Screen Tests during the performance of the Work if FedEx, 

Contractor, the TSA, or the airport authority having jurisdiction over the Site 

believes that there is probable cause that the person is using DOT-proscribed 

drugs. Contractor may not permit any person to enter the Site for the purpose of 

performing any of the Work if that person refuses to submit to a Drug Screen Test 

under circumstances where FedEx, Contractor, the TSA or the airport authority 

believes that there is probable cause that the person is using DOT-proscribed 

drugs or if the results of that person’s Drug Screen Test exceed the minimum

F-3 

allowable levels that the Department of Transportation establishes from time to 

time. 

Cause persons that will perform any of the Work at the Site to provide a ten-year 

employment history and cause employer reference verifications meeting FedEx, 

TSA and airport authority standards to be prepared with respect to those persons 

at Contractor’s expense. If the employment of a person who is expected to 

perform any of the Work at the Site during the most recent five years cannot be 

verified because one or more employers included in his or her employment history 

no longer exist or because of other reasons, or if the person does not have an 

employment history sufficient to meet TSA requirements, Contractor must cause 

the person to furnish to FedEx’s Representative and FedEx’s Managing Director, 

Aviation Security an explanation for any gap or lapse appearing in that person’s 

employment history that is sufficient in FedEx’s sole discretion. Contractor may 

not permit any person to enter the Site for the purpose of performing any of the 

Work if the employer reference verification required by virtue of the foregoing 

reveals either any adverse information that would preclude the person’s entry on 

to airport property under TSA requirements or job-related criminal convictions 

entered against the person during the preceding ten years or such other period of 

time as applicable Legal Requirements may prescribe. Contractor shall keep the 

employer reference verifications that it causes to be prepared by virtue of the 

foregoing on file until Final Acceptance and provide FedEx with copies from time 

to time at FedEx’s request. 

Before permitting any person that has a criminal history to enter the Site for the purpose of 

performing any part of the Work, Contractor must give both FedEx’s Representative and 

FedEx’s Managing Director, Aviation Security written notice of the identity of that person and 

his or her history and must secure the written concurrence of FedEx’s Representative to the use 

of that person. 

Contractor shall make available for FedEx’s inspection upon FedEx’s request the employment 

applications of all persons that perform any of the Work at the Site. 

Contractor shall cause all persons that perform any of the Work at the Site to be instructed not to 

bring on to the Site radios (other than two-way radios used in the performance of the Work), 

personal tape and CD players, and other items that FedEx prohibits in its security screening 

process. 

Contractor shall ensure that a condition of the continued employment of each person engaged to 

perform any of the Work at the Site is that that person must submit to searches when entering or 

leaving the Site, if a FedEx Security Specialist or other authorized security representative 

requests that such a search be conducted. Contractor may not permit any person to re-enter the 

Site for the purpose of performing any of the Work if that person has refused to submit to a 

search when entering or leaving the Site on a prior occasion.

To the extent FedEx, the TSA or the airport authority having jurisdiction over the Site requires, 

Contractor shall cause photo identification badges and access badges that satisfy all requirements 

of FedEx, the TSA and the airport authority that has jurisdiction over the Site to be issued and 

timely re-issued at Contractor’s expense to persons engaged in performing the Work at the Site 

and shall cause the persons to whom those photo identification badges are issued to wear their 

badges on their outermost clothing, at or above waist level, at all times that they are present at the 

Site. If the TSA and the airport authority permit any persons engaged in performing the Work to 

be present at the Site without wearing photo identification badges, Contractor shall ensure that all 

conditions that the TSA or the airport authority establishes with respect to the presence of those 

persons at the Site are observed at all times that those persons are performing the Work at the 

Site, including, without limitation, maintaining the degree of supervision the TSA and the airport 

authority require. If any part of the Site lies within a SIDA, that supervision will include, without 

limitation, ensuring that a person that has escort authority for that SIDA under applicable TSA 

regulations accompanies or monitors those persons without photo identification badges who 

enter the SIDA for the purpose of performing any of the Work at all times that they are present in 

the SIDA. Upon the completion of the Work, Contractor shall return to FedEx all photo 

identification badges and access badges issued in connection with the performance of the Work 

at the Site. Within one business day following the time at which any person engaged in 

performing the Work at the Site leaves the employ of Contractor or a Subcontractor or the time at 

which Contractor or a Subcontractor permanently re-assigns any person previously engaged in 

performing the Work at the Site to tasks not involving the performance of the Work, Contractor 

must notify FedEx that such person will not be returning to the Site. Simultaneously with each 

such notification, Contractor shall also cause any photo identification badge and access badge 

issued in accordance with the foregoing to the person who will not be returning to the Site to be 

returned to FedEx or the authority that issued the badge. Within one business day following the 

time at which any person engaged in performing the Work at the Site notifies Contractor that any 

photo identification badge or access badge issued to that person in accordance with the foregoing 

has been lost or stolen, Contractor must notify FedEx of such loss or theft and shall reimburse 

FedEx upon demand for any cost FedEx incurs to replace the lost or stolen badge and for any 

other cost that FedEx incurs by reason of the loss or theft, including, without limitation, the cost 

of issuing new photo identification badges or access badges to all persons working at the Site, 

whether employed by FedEx, Contractor or other service providers that FedEx engages, to the 

extent that the TSA or the airport authority having jurisdiction over the Site requires the issuance 

of those new badges. 

Contractor shall notify FedEx’s Managing Director, Aviation Security of any person engaged in 

performing the Work that is suspected of theft or other wrongdoing while at or about the Site 

and, at FedEx’s request and to the extent permitted by applicable Legal Requirements, Contractor 

shall cooperate in any investigation of any such suspected theft or other wrongdoing. 

Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless FedEx and its parent, subsidiaries and 

other affiliated corporations and their respective directors, officers, employees, agents, successors 

and assigns from and against all claims, actions, demands, damages, liability, losses, fees, fines, 

penalties (whether civil or criminal), government or other administrative proceedings and costs 

and expenses, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of suit that may 

F-4

e asserted against, or sustained by, any of them by reason of, or in connection with, any failure 

by Contractor or any of its Subcontractors or any of their respective employees and agents to 

comply with the provisions set forth in this Exhibit. 

The contact information for FedEx’s current Managing Director, Aviation Security is: 

F-5 

Robert W. Leger 

Managing Director, Aviation, Regulatory & LAC Security 



Building B, 3rd Floor 


(901) 434-8454]

G-1 

I. DBE PARTICIPATION 

Exhibit G 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


DBE PARTICIPATION 

FedEx encourages the participation of disadvantaged business enterprises 

as defined in Section II below (“DBEs”). Contractor must take reasonable 

steps to ensure that DBEs have a full and fair opportunity to compete for 

Subcontracts and to perform portions of the Work without discrimination 

on the basis of age, race, color, national origin or sex or disability. 

At a minimum, Contractor must take the following steps to seek out and 

obtain DBE participation in the Project: 

a. Contact two or more DBEs for each category of work being 

Subcontracted; 

b. Affirmatively solicit their interest, capability and price quotes; 

c. Provide equal time for all prospective Subcontractors to prepare 

proposals; 

d. Provide at least as much time to DBE prospective Subcontractors in 

assisting them in preparing their bids/proposals for Subcontracted 

work as it does to non-DBE prospective Subcontractors; 

e. Contact the President or Executive Director of the minority 

contractors association whose members do business in the vicinity

G-2 

of the Site in order to obtain suggestions regarding DBEs that may 

have the capability to participate in, and an interest in participating 

in, the Project; 

f. Advertise in general circulation, trade association and minorityfocused 

media concerning subcontracting opportunities; 

g. Provide adequate information to DBEs about the Contract 

Documents and contract requirements; 

h. Negotiate in good faith with interested DBEs by not rejecting them 

as unqualified without sound reasons based upon thorough 

investigations of their capabilities; and 

i. Fairly represent DBE quotations in the formulation of the 

Subcontractors’ bids as shown on the bid tabulation or other work 

documents supporting the award of the Subcontract. 

The above requirements are the minimum efforts that FedEx expects of 

Contractor; the foregoing is not, however, exclusive or exhaustive of the 

kinds of efforts that can be made. 

II. DBE DEFINITION/REQUIREMENTS 

For purposes of this Agreement, a DBE is defined as any of the following: 

1. A Minority Business Enterprise (MBE), which means any business 

enterprise that is at least fifty-one-percent-owned by, or in the case 

of a publicly owned business, at least fifty-one percent of the stock 

of which is owned by, citizens or lawful permanent residents of the 

United States who are minorities and such ownership is real, 

substantial and continuing. 

The term “Minority” includes: (i) Black (all persons having origins 

in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin); 

(ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Dominican, 

Cuban, Central or South American culture or origin, regardless or 

race); (iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in 

any of the original people of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the 

Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and (iv) American 

Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the 

original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable 

tribal affiliations through membership and participation of 

community identification).

G-3 

2. A Women-owned Business Enterprise (WBE), which means any 

business enterprise that is at least fifty-onepercent-owned by, or in 

the case of a publicly owned business, at least fifty-one percent of 

the stock of which is owned by, women and such ownership is real, 

substantial and continuing. 

3. A Service Disabled Veteran Owned Business Enterprise, which 

means any business enterprise that is at least fifty-one-percentowned 

by, or in the case of a publicly owned business, at least fiftyone 

percent of the stock of which is owned by, veterans who served 

in the U.S. Armed Forces and were discharged or released under 

conditions other than dishonorable and who either was discharged 

for disability or sustained during his or her service a minimum 

compensable disability of thirty percent (30%) and such ownership 

is real, substantial and continuing. 

4. A Vietnam Era Veteran Owned Business Enterprise, which means 

any business enterprise that is at least fifty-one-percent-owned by, 

or in the case of a publicly owned business, at least fifty-one 

percent of the stock of which is owned by, veterans who served in 

the U.S. Armed Forces and were discharged or released under 

conditions other than dishonorable and who served for a period of 

more than 180 days, any part of which was between August 5, 

1964, and May 7, 1975, and such ownership is real, substantial and 

continuing. 

5. A for-profit, small business concern that is at least fifty-onepercent-owned 

by one or more socially and economically 

disadvantaged individuals, or, in the case of any publicly owned 

business, at least fifty-one percent of the stock of which is owned 

by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged 

individuals; and whose management and daily business operations 

are controlled by one or more of the socially and economically 

disadvantaged owners of the small business concern with the net 

worth of none of the socially and economically disadvantaged 

owners not exceeding $750,000.00. 

Individuals in the groups listed below who are citizens of the 

United States (or lawfully admitted permanent residents) are 

presumed socially and economically disadvantaged. The 

presumption is a rebuttable one since other parties may challenge 

whether any particular person in one of these groups is actually 

disadvantaged. The groups are: 

a. Women;

G-4 

b. Black American, which includes persons having origins in any 

of the Black racial groups of Africa; 

c. Hispanic Americans, which includes persons of Mexican, 

Puerto Rican, Cuban, Dominican, Central or South American, 

or other Spanish or Portuguese culture or origin, regardless of 

race; 

d. Native Americans, which includes persons who are American 

Indians, Eskimos, Aleuts or Native Hawaiians; 

e. Asian-Pacific Americans, which includes persons whose 

origins are from Japan, China, Taiwan, Korea, Burma 

(Myanmar), Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia (Kampuchea), Thailand, 

Malaysia, Indonesia, the Philippines, Brunei, Samoa, Guam, the 

U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific Islands, Macao, Fiji, Tonga, 

Kirbati, Juvalu, Nauru, Federated States of Micronesia, or Hong 

Kong; 

f. Subcontinent Asian Americans, which includes persons whose 

origins are from India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, the 

Maldives Islands, Nepal or Sri Lanka; 

g. Any additional groups whose members are designated as 

socially and economically disadvantaged by the Small Business 

Administration, at such time as the Small Business 

Administration designation becomes effective. 

III. DBE COMPLIANCE REPORT 

Contractor shall submit a DBE Compliance Report with each Application for 

Payment in the following format on Contractor’s company letterhead.

G-5 

MONTHLY DBE COMPLIANCE REPORT 

PROJECT TITLE: PROJECT FORTRESS ENTERPRISE DATA CENTER 

PROJECT NUMBER: 

DATE: 

From: 

To: 

For the month ending , 200_, I certify that DBE participation requirements 

for this Project were satisfied by the means shown below: 

Contract Current Month Cum. Total 

DBE COMPANY NAME/ADDRESS $ Amount $ Amount $ Amount 

Signed: 

Title: ]

H-1 

Exhibit H 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 

________________________ 


LEASEHOLD REQUIREMENTS 

The terms and conditions of this Exhibit are incorporated into and made a part of the agreement 

to which this Exhibit is attached (the “Agreement”). The terms and conditions of this Exhibit 

shall govern any conflict or inconsistency with the terms and conditions of the Agreement. Any 

capitalized term used but not defined in this Exhibit shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the 

Agreement. 

Contractor acknowledges that FedEx occupies the Site upon which the Work is to be performed 

pursuant to a leasehold estate as granted by FedEx’ landlord for such Site (the “Landlord” or 

“Port” or “City”). The written instrument by which FedEx was granted the leasehold estate 

imposes certain obligations on FedEx’ contractors that perform services or Work at the Site. 

Contractor hereby represents, warrants and covenants that it, and any of its employees, agents or 

Subcontractors, shall comply with the following terms and conditions in connection with the 

performance of the Work on or about the subject Site pursuant to the Agreement: 

1. Contractor assures that it will undertake an affirmative action program as required by 

14 CFR, Part 152, Subpart E, to ensure that no person shall on the grounds of race, 

creed, color, religion, national origin, age or sex be excluded from participating in any 

employment activities covered in 14 CFR, Part 152, Subpart E. Contractor assures 

that no person shall be excluded on these grounds from participating in or receiving 

the services or benefits of any program or activity covered by that subpart. Contractor 

assures that it will require that its covered suborganizations provide assurances to 

Contractor that they similarly will undertake affirmative action programs and that they 

will require assurances from their suborganizations, as required by 14 CFR, Part 152, 

Subpart E, to the same effect.

H-2 

2. Contractor agrees that no person shall be excluded from participation in, denied the 

benefit of, or otherwise subjected to discrimination in connection with, the furnishing 

of the Work on the grounds of race, creed, color, age, sex or national origin. To the 

extent that the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of 

Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Non-Discrimination in 

Federally-Assisted Programs of the Department of Transportation – Effectuation of 

Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as those Regulations may be amended from 

time to time, or the requirements of any other present or future laws, rules, 

regulations, orders or directions of the United States of America that relate to the 

requirements of those Regulations apply to the furnishing of the Work at any facility, 

Contractor shall comply, and shall cause each Subcontractor to comply, with those 

requirements. Contractor shall provide, and shall cause each Subcontractor to 

provide, all information and reports required by those Regulations or by directives 

issued on the authority of those Regulations. Contractor shall permit, and shall cause 

each Subcontractor to permit, access to its books, records, accounts and other sources 

of information and to its facilities as Landlord or the Federal Aviation Administration 

may determine to be pertinent to ascertain whether there has been compliance with 

those Regulations and the directives issued on the authority of those Regulations. 

Where any information required of Contractor or a Subcontractor by virtue of the 

foregoing is in the exclusive possession of another person who fails or refuses to 

furnish the information, Contractor or the Subcontractor, as the case may be, must so 

certify to Landlord or the Federal Aviation Administration, as appropriate, and set 

forth the efforts it made to obtain the information. 

3. In connection with the performance of the Work, Contractor may not discriminate, 

and shall ensure that no Subcontractor discriminates, against any employee or 

applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, 

ancestry, age (over 40), physical or mental disability, or disability as set forth in the 

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, veteran status, or education or perceived 

sexual orientation. Contractor shall take, and shall cause each Subcontractor to take 

affirmative action to ensure that applicants and employees are treated fairly. That 

action will apply, without limitation, to hiring, upgrading, recruitment, recruitment 

advertising, selection for training, including apprenticeship, demotion, transfer, 

compensation, lay-off or termination, or any other term or condition of employment. 

4. Contractor shall state, and shall cause each Subcontractor to state, in all solicitations 

or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of Contractor or the 

Subcontractor that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment 

without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, ancestry, age (over 40), 

physical or mental disability, cancer-related medical condition, a known genetic 

predisposition to a disease or disorder, veteran status, marital status, or sexual 

orientation. 

5. Contractor shall send, and shall cause each Subcontractor to send, to each labor union 

or representative of workers with which Contractor or the Subcontractor has a

H-3 

collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice prescribed 

by Landlord advising the labor union or workers’ representative of Contractor’s and 

the Subcontractor’s obligations arising by reason of this Exhibit. Contractor shall 

post, and shall cause each Subcontractor to post, copies of that notice in conspicuous 

places available to employees and applicants for employment. 

6. Contractor shall maintain, and shall cause each Subcontractor to maintain, workforce 

records showing all employees by job category and similar information with respect 

to new hires and shall permit, and shall cause each Subcontractor to permit, Landlord 

to inspect such records at all reasonable times and not less than annually. Contractor 

shall submit, and shall cause each Subcontractor to submit, a summary of such 

information annually on an EEO-1 form that Landlord provides. 

7. If the total number of Contractor’s employees working at the Site exceeds 15, 

Contractor shall comply with the Non-Discrimination Plan for Employment attached 

to this Addendum as Attachment A. If the total number of any Subcontractor’s 

employees working at the Site exceeds 15, Contractor shall cause that Subcontractor 

to comply with the Non-Discrimination Plan for Employment attached to this Exhibit 

as Attachment A. 

8. Contractor shall comply, and shall cause each Subcontractor to comply, with pertinent 

statutes, Executive Orders and such rules as are promulgated to assure that no person 

will be excluded from participating in any activity conducted in furtherance of the 

performance of the Work at the Site on the grounds of race, creed, color, national 

origin, sex, age (over 40) or handicap. 

9. The United States Government or one or more of its agencies may require Landlord 

from time to time to adopt additional or amended provisions, including nondiscrimination 

provisions, concerning the use and operation of the Oakland 

International Airport. If, upon the advise of the Landlord’s attorney, Landlord 

unilaterally modifies the Lease in order to conform to Federal Aviation 

Administration, Department of Transportation or Federal Trade Commission rulings 

or opinions or opinions or judicial rulings or opinions with respect to the matters 

covered by this Exhibit, FedEx may likewise unilaterally modify this Agreement in 

order to conform to those rulings or opinions. If FedEx unilaterally modifies this 

Agreement on the authority of the foregoing, Contractor shall unilaterally modify each 

Subcontract then in force to conform with this Agreement, as so modified. While the 

foregoing does not preclude Contractor or a Subcontractor from contesting any such 

ruling or opinion or its application to it, Contractor and the Subcontractors must 

nevertheless abide by the unilateral change. 

10. In connection with the performance of the Work, Contractor may not discriminate, 

and shall ensure that no Subcontractor discriminates, against any professional service, 

Subcontractor, prospective Subcontractor or vendor because of race, color, religion, 

sex, national origin, ancestry, age (over 40), physical or mental disability, cancer-

H-4 

related medical condition, a known genetic predisposition to a disease or disorder, 

veteran status, marital status, or sexual orientation. Contractor shall state, and shall 

cause each Subcontractor to state, in all solicitations or advertisements for vendors, 

prospective Subcontractors or professional services placed by or on behalf of 

Contractor or the Subcontractor that all qualified applicants will receive consideration 

for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, ancestry, 

age (over 40), physical or mental disability, cancer-related medical condition, a 

known genetic predisposition to a disease or disorder, veteran status, marital status, or 

sexual orientation. 

11. Contractor shall cooperate, and shall cause each Subcontractor to cooperate, with the 

Employment Resources Development Program of the Port of Oakland. 

12. Contractor shall provide, and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide, to the Port’s 

Employment Resources Development Program Coordinator copies of all 

advertisements or solicitations that Contractor or the Subcontractor places, so that that 

Port office may assist Contractor or the Subcontractor by providing pre-screened, 

qualified residents of Oakland seeking employment through the Port’s Employment 

Resources Development Program. 

13. Contractor shall consider, and shall cause each Subcontractor to consider, referrals for 

employment from the Port’s Employment Resources Development Program. 

Contractor and each Subcontractor retains the right consistent with its obligations 

arising under the terms of this Exhibit to determine the qualifications of all applicants 

for employment and to select the applicant it considers in its sole judgment to be best 

qualified. 

14. Contractor shall give all notices required by, and shall comply with, all laws, 

ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority having jurisdiction 

over Contractor, the Work or the Site, including without limitation, to the extent 

applicable to Contractor, or any Subcontractor, Section 728 of the Charter of the City 

and Port Ordinance No. 3666, commonly known as the Living Wage and Labor 

Standards at Port-Assisted Businesses, as may be modified, supplemented or amended 

from time to time. 

15. Environmental. Contractor, and any Subcontractor, shall comply with all 

Environmental Laws in connection with the performance of the Work or otherwise 

while present on the Site. 

“Environmental Laws”: All federal, state and local laws, statutes, ordinances, codes 

including the Uniform Fire Code as adopted by the City of Oakland, regulations and 

orders, as such may be modified, amended or reissued, in any way relating to or 

regulating (1) human health, safety, industrial hygiene, the environment, pollution or 

contamination of the air, soil, surface water or groundwater; or (2) Toxic Materials (as 

defined below), including the handling, use, storage, accumulation, transportation,

H-5 

generation, spillage, migration, discharge, release, treatment, and disposal of any 

Toxic Materials. 

“Toxic Materials”: (1) Substances that are toxic, corrosive, reactive, or ignitable; 

(ii) petroleum products, crude oil (or any fraction thereof) and their derivatives; 

(iii) explosives, asbestos, radioactive materials, hazardous wastes, toxic substances or 

related hazardous materials; (iv) noxious fumes, vapors, soot or smoke; and 

(v) substances which now or in the future are defined by applicable local, State or 

federal law as “hazardous substances,” “hazardous materials,” “hazardous wastes,” 

“reproductive toxins,” or “toxic substances,” or regulated under applicable local, state 

or federal law, including those so defined in or regulated under any of the following: 

15 U.S. Code Section 2601, et seq. (the Toxic Substances Control Act); 33 U.S. Code 

Section 1251, et seq. (the Federal Water Pollution Control Act); 42 U.S. Code Section 

6901, et seq. (the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act); 42 U.S. Code Section 

7401, et seq. (the Clean Air Act); 42 U.S. Code Section 9601, et seq. (the 

Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act; 49 U.S. 

Code Section 1801, et seq. (the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act); California 

Health & Safety Code (“H&S Code”) Section 25100, et seq. (Hazardous Waste 

Control); H&S Code Section 25300, et seq. (the Hazardous Substance Control Act); 

H&S Code Section 25404 et seq. (Unified Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Materials 

Management Regulatory Program); H&S Code Section 25531 et seq. (Hazardous 

Materials Management); H&S Code Section 18901 et seq. (California Building 

Standards); California Water Code Section 13000, et seq. (the Porter-Cologne Water 

Quality Control Act); local fire codes; the regulations adopted and promulgated 

pursuant to such statutes, and any regulations adopted pursuant to such statutes after 

the effective date of the Lease, as well as any subsequently enacted federal or 

California statute relating to the use, release or disposal of toxic or hazardous 

substances, or to the remediation of air, surface waters, groundwater, soil or other 

media contaminated with such substances; and any other substance designated by 

Landlord as a Toxic Material, upon a reasonable finding by the Landlord’s Executive 

Director or Deputy Executive Director and notice to the Lessee, that the substance 

poses a hazard to human health, safety, or the environment. 

“Exempted Toxic Materials”: Ordinary office and janitorial supplies in amounts 

reasonably necessary for their intended purpose, substances in cooling systems (e.g., 

refrigerators and air conditions units), or automobiles, used in the ordinary course of 

permitted uses and the standard contents of those systems and automobiles, so long as 

said items are stored, used, handled, transported and disposed of in accordance with 

all Environmental Laws and the provisions of this Agreement are complied with. 

Prohibited Substances. The following substances are prohibited from being brought 

onto the Site, except to the extent they are Exempted Toxic Materials: 

Arsines 

Etching solutions

H-6 

Asbestos 

Fluorocarbons 

Freon 

Chlorinated Hydrocarbons 

Dioxins, including dioxin precursors and intermediates 

Anything contained in the California List of Extremely Hazardous 

Chemicals 

Toxic Materials. If bringing Toxic Materials onto the Site is required in connection 

with performance of the Work or performance of the Work will otherwise result in the 

presence Toxic Materials on or about the Site, Contractor certifies that it is qualified 

and licensed to undertake work concerning Toxic Materials on the Site, and Contractor 

shall notify Landlord and FedEx at least ten (10) business days prior to the 

commencement of any Work (except in an emergency, in which case Contractor shall 

notify Landlord and FedEx within one (1) business day). All Work shall be performed 

in a good, safe and workmanlike manner and, with regard to Work performed at or 

near the end of the term, in a manner that will not interfere with Landlord’s or FedEx’s 

use, operation, leasing or sale of the Site. 

Disposal of Toxic Materials. Contractor shall not dispose of any Toxic Materials, 

regardless of quantity or concentration, within the storm and/or sanitary sewer drains 

and plumbing facilities within the airport property, or other property of the Port unless 

such disposal is in accordance with Environmental Laws, a properly issued federal, 

state or local permit or such disposal has been approved by the Port’s Executive 

Director or Deputy Executive Director in the exercise of his or her discretion. All 

disposal of Toxic Materials not made by Contractor in the storm or sanitary sewer 

drains and plumbing facilities within the airport property in accordance with the above 

provisions shall be in approved and labeled containers and removed, at Contractor’s 

expense, from the airport property in compliance with all Environmental Laws and 

only by duly licensed and insured carriers in compliance with all Environmental Laws. 

Asbestos Notification. Contractor shall comply with all asbestos notification 

requirements, asbestos management plans, aid asbestos handling requirements required 

by the Environmental Laws and as set forth in (but not limited to) Health and Safety 

Code Section Chapter 10.4 Asbestos Notification, section 25915, et seq. Contractor is 

required to provide written notice to its employees of known asbestos containing 

materials. Contractor is also required to enact asbestos management plans and post 

warnings with respect to any construction, maintenance or remodeling conducted in 

the building area where there is a potential for employees to come into contact with, or 

release, or disturb asbestos or asbestos containing construction materials. Contractor 

shall comply with asbestos survey and monitoring requirements as required by the 

Environmental Laws. 

(a) Water Quality. Contractor shall comply with all Environmental Laws (as defined 

below) regarding discharges to air, water and land, including without limitation

H-7 

obtaining and complying with an individual National Pollutant Discharge 

Elimination System (“NPDES”) permit or Waste Discharge Requirements, and/or 

requesting coverage under and complying with any applicable General Permit 

with respect to the Site. 

(b) Control of Storm Water During Construction. Contractor shall fully comply with 

all of the conditions and requirements of State Water Resource Control Board 

(“SWRCB”) Order No/99-08-DWQ, NPDES General Permit No. CAS000002, 

Waste Discharge Requirements for Storm Water Discharges Associated with 

Construction Activity (“Construction General Permit”), as said permit has been or 

may be amended, modified or superseded, subject to the conditions, requirements 

and qualifications below. 

(i) As required by the Construction General Permit, the Landlord shall 

file with the SWRCB a notice of intent (“NOI”) to initiate permit 

coverage, and a Notice of Termination (“NOT”) to terminate 

permit coverage. Contractor shall provide FedEx with information 

required to file the NOI and NOT, and provide FedEx and 

Landlord with the required certification of such information. 

(ii) Contractor shall prepare, maintain, update and implement a sitespecific 

Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (“SWPPP”) in 

compliance with all the requirements and conditions of the 

Construction General Permit and any existing Port Storm Water 

Ordinance while Work is ongoing. The SWPPP shall include a 

Storm Water Sampling and Analysis Plan (“SWSAP”) in full 

compliance with the Construction General Permit. At least 25 

business days before commencement of construction activities, the 

SWPPP shall be submitted to Landlord for comment and/or 

approval. Construction shall not commence until Landlord has 

approved the SWPPP. Contractor shall keep and maintain an 

updated copy of the SWPPP at the Site available for inspection 

during the course of the construction activities. Contractor shall 

deliver revised or updated SWPPPs whenever substantive 

modifications are made, and at least annually by September 15. 

(iii) Contractor shall undertake all monitoring, sampling and reporting 

required by the Construction General Permit and applicable to the 

Project, and to provide the results of such inspections, monitoring, 

sampling and reporting to Landlord within three (3) days after the 

completion of such activity, or as otherwise directed by Landlord. 

(iv) Contractor shall provide Landlord a certification of compliance in 

accordance with the Construction General Permit at lease 15 days 

prior to the submittal date of each annual certification of

H-8 

compliance, and at such times as Landlord may reasonably request, 

while construction is ongoing. 

(v) Construction activities shall be considered ongoing until a NOT 

and post-construction Best Management Practices plan (if 

required) are filed with and approved by the California Regional 

Water Quality Control Board (“RWQCB”) as provided by the 

Construction General Permit. 

(vi) If the Site is not in compliance with this Section as a result of the 

actions of Contractor, FedEx shall, at Contractor’s cost, promptly 

take all action necessary to bring the Site into compliance. Upon 

receipt of any enforcement action against Landlord for alleged 

violation of the Construction General Permit, whether by a 60-day 

notice letter from a citizen pursuant to 42 U.S.C. Section 1365(a), 

or by a notice of violation, a notice to comply, cease and desist 

order, cleanup and abatement order or other formal or informal 

enforcement action from the RWQCB, Landlord or FedEx may, at 

their election, take all action reasonably necessary, for a period up 

to six months, to bring the Site into compliance with the 

Construction General Permit and applicable Environmental Laws, 

and recover all costs from Contractor. 

(vii) Maintain Records. Contractor shall retain for a period of five years 

after their creation, all documents and records prepared in 

association with the Construction General Permit. Contractor shall 

make all such non-privileged documents and records available to 

Landlord and FedEx upon reasonable terms and conditions. 

(c) Documents: Contractor shall promptly deliver to FedEx and Landlord, upon 

preparation or receipt, a copy of each and every report, document required by the 

Clean Water Act, any correspondence received from or transmitted to any 

governmental agency by Contractor concerning storm water matters and 

compliance with applicable Environmental Laws, and any notice or claim alleging 

noncompliance with applicable Environmental Laws concerning the premises. 

16. Prevailing Wage Requirements. To the extent applicable to Contractor, a 

Subcontractor or the performance of the Work, Contractor, and any Subcontractor, 

shall comply with the Prevailing Wage Requirements set forth in Attachment B. 

17. Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement. Any construction project for which 

the Landlord approves a permit for construction (the “subject permit”), that exceeds 

$50,000 when considered together with the value of all construction projects on the 

premises or on any site leased by Lessee for which the Landlord had approved a 

permit within a 12 month period before the date of the subject permit, is subject to

H-9 

coverage under the terms of the Landlord’s Maritime and Aviation Project Labor 

Agreement (“MAPLA”) as it applies to Landlord’s tenants. Failure to utilize 

MAPLA could lead to grievance and arbitration and the potential for damages, 

attorney’s fees and costs should the Building & Construction Trades Council of 

Alameda County, AFL CIO (“Unions”) prevail in arbitration. With respect to any 

construction project which is subject to coverage of the terms of the MAPLA in 

accordance with the following: 

(a) Contractor shall, before beginning the Work, sign a Letter of Assent to the 

MAPLA; 

(b) Contractor shall require its Subcontractors on the Work, regardless of tier, to sign 

a Letter of Assent to the MAPLA; 

(c) The Unions which are signatory to be MAPLA are third party beneficiaries of 

Contractor’s obligations under this Addendum and are entitled to proceed with 

grievances and arbitration against Contractor under the MAPLA for Contractor’s 

breach of such obligations; and 

(d) Contractor may not assert that the Unions do not have standing to proceed with 

any such grievance or arbitration proceeding described above or to recover from 

Contractor damages, attorneys’ fees and costs if Contractor breaches any such 

obligations. 

In the event Landlord agrees to any revisions to MAPLA, or enters into a new 

MAPLA, Landlord or FedEx shall notify Contractor in writing of such revised or new 

MAPLA requirements and after such written notice, such revised or new MAPLA 

requirements shall become part of this Exhibit and shall supersede any conflicting 

requirements of this Exhibit, and Contractor shall be obligated to comply with such 

revised or new MAPLA requirements as fully as if they were set forth herein.

H-10 

ATTACHMENT A 

Non-Discrimination Plan for Employment 

It is the policy of Contractor and its Subcontractors to afford equal employment opportunity to all 

individuals, regardless of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, citizenship, disability, status 

as a Vietnam Era or special disable veteran or age. Contractor and its Subcontractors each 

adheres to the equal employment opportunity requirements of the federal government and all 

states and localities in which it does business. Contractor and its Subcontractors are each 

strongly bound to this policy because adherence to equal employment principles is the only 

acceptable American way of life. Contractor and its Subcontractors are each committed to 

ensure that it (1) recruits, hires, trains, and promotes persons into all jobs in accordance with the 

principles of equal employment opportunity; (2) bases decisions on employment so as to further 

the principle of equal employment opportunity; (3) makes promotional decisions in accordance 

with the principles of imposing only valid job requirement; and (4) administers personnel actions 

such as compensation, benefits, transfers, company-sponsored training, education, tuition 

assistance, social and recreation programs in accordance with principles of equal employment 

opportunity.

H-11 

ATTACHMENT B 

Prevailing Wage Requirements 

To the extent applicable to Contractor, a Subcontractor or the performance of the Work, 

Contractor, and any Subcontractor, shall comply with the following: 

(i) The Public Work Prevailing Wage Requirements, which are the applicable prevailing 

wage requirements of California Labor Code Sections 1720 et seq. and Port Ordinance No. 1606, 

as amended, and which generally apply to construction, costing more than $1,000.00, which is 

made on or to Port property and the cost of which is paid for in whole or in part by the Port’s 

advance or reimbursement to Lessee or by credit against rent or other sums due the Port; and 

(ii) The Private Work Prevailing Wage Requirements which generally apply to all 

construction, other than construction to which the Public Work Prevailing Wage requirements 

apply, which is made on or to Port property, costing more than $50,000.00; 

“Construction” as used herein shall apply to construction, alteration, demolition or repair 

work, and the laying of carpet and maintenance work, provided, that Private Work Prevailing 

Wage Requirements shall not apply to maintenance work. “Construction” includes all 

construction of building core and shell, tenant improvements and public works that are within the 

customary jurisdiction of the construction trades and crafts, whether performed on-or-off-site. 

Off-site work, performed by Materialmen, as defined under California Law, is not included in the 

term “Construction”. 

The Private Work Prevailing Wage Requirements shall not apply to tenant improvements 

costing less than $50,000.00, nor to tenant improvements for which the initial building permit for 

such work is issued more than one year after the certificate of occupancy is approved on the core 

and shell. The $50,000.00 cost shall be adjusted annually pursuant to the CPI. 

The following provisions of this subsection apply only if, and to the extent that, the 

prevailing wage requirements are applicable. 

The prevailing wage requirements shall apply to the employees of any employer including 

FedEx, any tenant of FedEx, any general contractor or subcontractor or other contractor engaged 

in construction on the premises, including their successors and assigns, but shall not apply to 

supervisory or managerial personnel or to persons employed in the rental, operation or (in the 

case of Private Work Prevailing Wage Requirements only) maintenance of the premises. 

Contractor shall cause the provisions of this subsection to be incorporated into each 

contract and subcontract, which would be subject to this subsection. In the event the provisions 

are not so incorporated, Contractor shall be liable to the worker in any action or proceeding for 

the difference between the prevailing wage rate required to be paid and the amount actually paid

to the worker, including costs and reasonable attorney fees, as if Contractor were the actual 

employer. 

The prevailing wage requirements of this subsection will be monitored and enforced by 

the Port. In addition to any other rights provided by California law to recover compensation, a 

worker that has been paid less than the prevailing wage rates shall have a right to commence an 

action or proceeding against the employer of the worker for the difference between the prevailing 

wage rates and the amount paid to such worker for each calendar day or portion thereof for which 

the worker was paid less than the compensation required to be paid under the provisions of this 

subsection. No issue other than that of the liability of the employer for the amount of unpaid 

wages allegedly due shall be determined in such action or proceeding, and the burden shall be on 

the employer to establish that the amounts demanded are not due. A worker recovering any or all 

of the wages claimed to be due shall recover his costs and reasonable attorney fees in securing 

such recovery. Nothing in this section shall preclude its enforcement by the California Division 

of Labor Standards Enforcement. 

Nothing in this Attachment B shall prevent the employment of any number of properly 

registered apprentices, as defined in Chapter 4, Division 3 of the Labor Code. Every such 

apprentice shall be paid not less than the standard wage paid to apprentices under the regulations 

of the crafts or trade at which the apprentice is employed, and shall be employed only at the work 

of the craft or trade to which the apprentice is registered. The employment and training of each 

apprentice shall be in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship standards and 

apprentice agreements under which the apprentice is in training. Good faith efforts shall be made 

to maintain a ratio of apprentices to journeymen of not less than 20%, if the employer is 

signatory to an agreement to train, or otherwise bound to train, apprentices. When submitting the 

certified payroll records required hereunder, Contractor shall submit documentary proof of the 

valid apprentice status of any worker listed as an apprentice. 

Contractor agrees that to the extent that Contractor is required to comply with the 

prevailing wage requirements, Contractor shall assure that all workers are paid the prevailing rate 

of per diem wages, and travel and subsistence payments (defined in applicable collective 

bargaining agreements filed in accordance with Section 1773.8 of the California Labor Code), in 

effect on the date of the Port’s first approval of a building permit or other approval of the Work. 

Copies of the applicable prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file at the Port’s principal 

office and will be made available to any interested party on request. Contractor agrees to post a 

copy of the prevailing rate of per diem wages at each job site. 

Contractor, as a penalty to the Port, shall forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25) for each 

calendar day, or portion thereof (or such other sum as specified from time to time by Section 

1775 of the California Labor Code), for each worker paid less than the applicable prevailing rates 

for such work or craft in which such worker is employed. The difference between such 

prevailing wage rates and the amount paid to each worker for each calendar day or portion 

thereof for which each worker was paid less than the prevailing wage rate shall be paid to each 

worker by Contractor. 

H-12

Except in cases where enforcement authority is vested in the State pursuant to Section 

1775 of the California Labor Code, the Port not later than ninety (90) days after the filing of a 

valid notice of completion in the office of the Alameda County Recorder or not later than ninety 

(90) days after the Port’s acceptance of the Work, whichever last occurs, may maintain an action 

in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover the penalties and the amounts due provided for 

herein. Contractor agrees that no issue other than that of the liability of Contractor for the 

penalties allegedly forfeited and amounts due shall be determined in such action, and the burden 

shall be upon Contractor to establish that the penalties and amounts demanded in such action are 

not due. Out of any money withheld or recovered or both there shall first be paid the amount due 

each worker and if insufficient funds are withheld or recovered or both to pay each worker in full 

the money shall be prorated among all such workers. 

At least two weeks before the last date Contractor accepts initial bids for subcontracting, 

Contractor shall file with the Port a written list of the name of all subcontractors to whom 

Contractor has submitted a request for bids. In addition, Contractor shall file with the Port the 

name of each subcontractor with whom it proposes to subcontract, together with the name of the 

subcontractors of all tiers, at least five (5) working days before entering into the subcontract. 

Contractor agrees to keep or cause to be kept by each subcontractor an accurate payroll 

record for each worker employed on work covered by this Attachment B showing all of the 

information specified in subsection (a) of Section 1776 of the California Labor Code. All such 

payroll records shall be certified, available for inspection and filed in accordance with the 

procedures specified in subsections (b)-(e) inclusive of Section 1776 of the California Labor 

Code. In addition, copies of such certified payrolls records shall be filed with the Port within a 

reasonable time not to exceed fifteen (15) days from close of payroll by the respective employer. 

It is understood and agreed that all documents that Contractor is required to submit to or 

file with the Port under this subsection shall constitute public records that shall be available to 

any member of the public for review or copying in accordance with the California Public Records 

Act. 

In the event of repetitive breach of the requirements of this subsection by Contractor, the 

Port shall be entitled, in addition to all other remedies, to appoint at Contractor’s expense a 

special monitor to oversee Contractor’s compliance. Fees for said special monitor shall be billed 

to Contractor, which fees Contractor agrees to pay within 10 days after Contractor’s receipt of 

such bill. In the event of noncompliance with the foregoing requirements concerning payroll 

records which continues for more than ten (10) days after the Port gives to Contractor written 

notice specifying in what respects Contractor must comply, Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty 

to the Port for each worker twenty-five dollars ($25) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, 

until strict compliance is effectuated. 

Contractor shall be responsible for complying with Section 1777.5 of the California 

Labor Code concerning apprenticeable occupations, with respect to all work covered by that 

section. 

H-13

Except where the context otherwise requires, the definitions of terms and phrases 

contained in the State prevailing wage law, Sections 1720 et seq. of the California Labor Code, 

and in the implementing administrative regulations, shall apply to the same terms and phrases 

which are used in the prevailing wage requirements of this Section. 

H-14

I-1 

Exhibit I 



between 


("FedEx") 

and 


PROJECT STAFFING 

Contractor shall provide security staffing for the construction gate(s) during all hours that the 

gate(s) is (are) open

APPENDIX B

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

FOR THE 

FEDERAL EXPRESS HUB 

OAKLAND SORT EXPANSION 

ELECTRICAL INFRASTRUCTURE 

DESIGN PACKAGE 

AT 

OAKLAND INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 

1 SALLY RIDE WAY 

OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA 

June 21, 2011 

TRANSYSTEMS CORPORATION 

505 14 TH 

STREET, SUITE 1000 

OAKLAND, CA 94612 

T: (510) 835-2761 

F: (510) 835-9839

June 13, 2008 

File No.: 94240 

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 

FEDERAL EXPRESS OAKLAND 

NEW SECURITY SCREENING BUILDING 



Copyright 2008 Kleinfelder 

All Rights Reserved. 

Use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited 

by anyone other than the client for the specific project.

1.0 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 1 

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................ 1 

1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES .......................................................... 1 

2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION ........................................................................................ 3 

2.1 GENERAL......................................................................................................... 3 

2.2 DRILLING AND SAMPLING METHODS ........................................................... 3 

2.3 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER MEASUREMENTS............................................ 4 

2.4 EXPLORATION, COMPLETION & ABANDONMENT ....................................... 4 

3.0 LABORATORY TESTING.................................................................................... 5 

4.0 GEOLOGIC AND SEISMIC SETTING ................................................................. 6 

4.1 REGIONAL GEOLOGY..................................................................................... 6 

4.2 LOCAL AND SITE GEOLOGY .......................................................................... 6 

4.3 REGIONAL GROUNDWATER.......................................................................... 7 

4.4 SEISMICITY...................................................................................................... 7 

5.0 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS............................................................................ 9 

5.1 SITE DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 9 

5.1.1 Location and Topography.............................................................................. 9 

5.1.2 Existing Asphalt Pavement............................................................................ 9 

5.2 STRATIGRAPHY .............................................................................................. 9 

5.2.1 Clayey Gravel Fill ........................................................................................ 10 

5.2.2 Poorly Graded Hydraulically Placed Sand Fill ............................................. 10 

5.2.3 San Antonio Formation Alluvium ................................................................. 10 

5.3 GROUNDWATER ........................................................................................... 10 

5.4 VARIATIONS IN SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.............................................. 11 

6.0 GEOLOGIC HAZARDS...................................................................................... 12 

6.1 SEISMIC GROUND SHAKING........................................................................ 12 

6.2 FAULT GROUND RUPTURE.......................................................................... 12 

6.3 LIQUEFACTION ............................................................................................. 12 

6.4 CYCLIC DENSIFICATION .............................................................................. 13 

6.5 LATERAL SPREADING .................................................................................. 13 

7.0 DISCUSSIONS AND CONCLUSIONS............................................................... 15 

7.1 FOUNDATION TYPE ...................................................................................... 15 

7.2 CORROSIVITY ............................................................................................... 16 

8.0 RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................................................... 17 

8.1 EARTHWORK................................................................................................. 17 

8.1.1 General........................................................................................................ 17 

8.1.2 Site Preparation and Grading ...................................................................... 17 

8.1.3 Excavation and Backfill................................................................................ 19 

94240/1(OAK8R061)/es Page i of ii June 13, 2008 

© 2008 Kleinfelder

8.1.4 Site Drainage............................................................................................... 20 

8.1.5 Wet Weather Construction .......................................................................... 20 

8.2 FOUNDATIONS.............................................................................................. 20 

8.2.1 Mat Foundation ........................................................................................... 20 

8.2.2 Lateral Resistance....................................................................................... 21 

8.2.3 Settlement ................................................................................................... 21 

8.2.4 Construction Considerations ....................................................................... 22 

8.3 2007 CBC SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS ................................................ 22 

8.3.1 Site Classification for Seismic Design Purposes ......................................... 22 

8.3.2 2007 CBC Code Values .............................................................................. 23 

9.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES AND LIMITATIONS.................................................. 25 

9.1 ADDITIONAL SERVICES................................................................................ 25 

9.2 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................. 25 

10.0 REFERENCES ................................................................................................... 27 

PLATES 

Plate 1 Site Vicinity Map 

Plate 2 Site Plan 

APPENDICES 

Appendix A Boring Logs 

Appendix B Laboratory Test Data 

Appendix C Corrosion Testing 

94240/1(OAK8R061)/es Page ii of ii June 13, 2008 

© 2008 Kleinfelder

1.0 INTRODUCTION 

This report presents the results of our geotechnical investigation for the proposed 

Federal Express Security Screening Building to be located within the Federal Express 

facility at Oakland International Airport in Oakland, California. The following sections 

describe our understanding of the project and our scope of services. 

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 

We understand that the proposed development, located on Sally Ride Way (Plate 1), 

will consist of the construction of a new security screening building to be located within 

the existing Parking Lot A, as shown on the Site Plan, Plate 2. The building will be a 

single story, pre-engineered, metal building, with plan dimensions of approximately 43 

feet by 94 feet (4,042 square feet). Our services for the proposed development include 

providing geotechnical recommendations for the proposed foundations and building 

slab. 

The information described above is our understanding of the project. If this information 

is to be modified, we may need to review our conclusions and recommendations for 

applicability. 

1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES 

The purpose of this study was to explore subsurface conditions at the site and provide 

geotechnical recommendations for design and construction for the proposed new 

security screening building. Our scope of services consisted of: 

1. Reviewing existing, readily-accessible geologic and geotechnical information in 

the general site vicinity; 

2. Drilling of two geotechnical soil borings to explore subsurface conditions and 

obtain soil samples for laboratory testing; 

3. Performing geotechnical laboratory tests to assess pertinent engineering 

properties of the soils encountered; 

94240/1(OAK8R061)/es Page 1 of 29 June 13, 2008 

© 2008 Kleinfelder

4. Analyzing the field and laboratory data and performing engineering analyses to 

develop conclusions and recommendations; and 

5. Preparing this report. 

Environmental evaluations, assessments and analytical testing are outside the scope of 

this study. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

2.1 GENERAL 

2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION 

The purpose of the field exploration program was to provide geotechnical information 

within the vicinity of the proposed improvements. During the field exploration we 

gathered information on 1) soil type, 2) soil shear strength, 3) groundwater levels and 4) 

stratigraphy. The field exploration program included drilling and logging two exploratory 

borings, designated KB-1 and KB-2. The approximate exploration locations are shown 

on the Site Plan, Plate 2. The borings were both drilled to 50.5 feet below existing 

ground surface (bgs). Kleinfelder selected the number, locations and depths of the 

borings. 

Prior to drilling, we obtained a drilling permit from Alameda County Public Works 

Agency. Boring locations were cleared through Underground Service Alert. The 

locations of the borings were not surveyed. We estimated ground surface elevations 

based on a site topographic map, dated April 15, 2008, provided by TranSystems. Logs 

of the borings are presented in Appendix A. Plate A-1 in Appendix A contains a key to 

the terms and symbols used on the boring logs. 

2.2 DRILLING AND SAMPLING METHODS 

The borings were drilled on May 16, 2008 by V & W Drilling, Inc., of Rio Vista, 

California. The borings were performed using a truck-mounted ‘CME 75’ drill rig 

equipped with 7-inch-diameter augers, utilizing the rotary-wash drilling technique. 

We sampled the borings with close sampling intervals in the upper 10 feet and at 

approximate 5-foot intervals thereafter. Soils were sampled by driving a 2.5-inch outer 

diameter (OD), 2.0-inch inner diameter (ID) split-barrel (Modified California) sampler into 

the soil. The samplers were driven 18 inches into the soil using a 140-pound hammer 

falling 30-inches. The number of blows required to drive the samplers the last 12 inches 

is noted on the boring logs. Note that the blow counts shown on the logs are 

uncorrected values that have not been adjusted for such factors as overburden stress, 

sampling equipment energy variation, or fines content. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

Our field engineer removed the samples from the sampling tools and visually classified 

them. The undrained shear strength of representative cohesive samples was estimated 

using either a hand-held pocket penetrometer or a Torvane shear device. Penetrometer 

and Torvane readings are noted on the boring logs. Note that the pocket penetrometer 

readings shown on the boring logs show unconfined compressive strength in units of 

tons per square foot (tsf). This value is equivalent to undrained shear strength (Su) in 

units of kips per square foot (ksf). The Torvane readings shown on the logs are 

undrained shear strength readings converted to units of ksf. Soil samples retrieved 

during our subsurface exploration were packaged and transported to our laboratory for 

further evaluation and testing. 

2.3 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER MEASUREMENTS 

As both borings were drilled using the rotary wash drilling method, which employs 

constantly circulating drilling fluid, ground water levels could not be measured, so we 

advanced a third boring to 12 feet bgs, immediately adjacent to boring KB-2. 

First encountered free groundwater was at observed 12 feet bgs, immediately following 

drilling, and then at 10 feet bgs after approximately 10 minutes. Depth-to-water 

measurements are noted on the boring logs. Because groundwater levels had to be 

measured soon after completion of the borehole, the levels recorded likely do not 

represent stabilized groundwater. Stabilized groundwater levels are discussed in 

subsequent sections of this report. 

2.4 EXPLORATION COMPLETION AND ABANDONMENT 

In accordance with the conditions of our drilling permit, we backfilled the open boreholes 

with cement grout, and patched the asphalt pavement with temporary cold-patch 

asphalt. We placed drill cuttings and fluid into 55-gallon steel drums for pickup and 

disposal by a specialized disposal subcontractor. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

3.0 LABORATORY TESTING 

Geotechnical laboratory testing was performed in our Pleasanton laboratory on selected 

soil samples collected from the test borings to evaluate their natural water content, inplace 

density, grain-size, shear strength, plasticity (Atterberg limits), and corrosion 

potential. Our laboratory testing was performed in our Pleasanton laboratory in general 

accordance with applicable American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

procedures. The laboratory test results are included on the test boring logs in Appendix 

A. Graphic presentation of grain-size, shear, and plasticity test results are presented in 

Appendix B. 

A corrosivity test was performed on a representative near surface sample by JDH 

Corrosion Consultants of Walnut Creek, California. Corrosion testing results are 

included in Appendix C. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

4.0 GEOLOGIC AND SEISMIC SETTING 

The following sections describe regional geologic setting of the site, site geology and 

site seismicity. 

4.1 REGIONAL GEOLOGY 

The site vicinity is located within the Coast Ranges Geomorphic Province, which 

geologically consists of a series of north-northwest trending mountains and valleys that 

have been largely oriented by, and lie approximately parallel to, the highly active San 

Andreas Fault system. The regional area has undergone a complex geologic history of 

sedimentation, volcanism, folding, faulting, uplift and erosion, which continues to the 

present day, and has resulted in fractured and discontinuous stratigraphic sequences. 

4.2 LOCAL AND SITE GEOLOGY 

The site is located approximately one mile northeast of San Francisco Bay. Marshland 

is located approximately 1,000 feet northeast of the site. A recent quaternary geologic 

map of the area by Graymer (2000) 1 places the entire site area in artificial (man-placed) 

fill. Artificial fill may be engineered and/or non-engineered material. The artificial fill in 

the project area is often underlain by Young Bay Mud strata, described by Graymer 

(2000) as unconsolidated, water-saturated, dark, plastic clay and silty clay, rich in 

organic material. It may contain lenses and stringers of well-sorted silt and sand as well 

as beds of peat. The soils to the west and east of the artificial fill are Holocene Basin 

Deposits; these are described by Graymer (2000) as sediments deposited in 

topographic lows at the distal end of alluvial fans, adjacent to flood plains, consisting of 

organic rich, dark colored clays. The soils underlying the Young Bay Mud are alluvial 

and estuarine sediments collectively known as the San Antonio formation (sometimes 

called the Posey-Merritt San Antonio formation). Rogers and Figuers (1991) 2 describe 

the San Antonio formation as predominantly sands and silts, frequently interlayered with 

1 Graymer, R.W. (2000), "Geologic Map and Map Database of the Oakland Metropolitan Area, Alameda, Contra 

Costa, and San Francisco Counties, California," United States Geological Survey, MF-2342, Version 1.0. 2000. 

2 Rogers, J.D. and S.H. Figuers (1991), "Engineering Geologic Site Characterization of the Greater Oakland- 

Alameda Area, Alameda and San Francisco Counties, California," Report to National Science Foundation, Grant 

No. BCS-9003785, December 30, 1991. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

sandy clay. As described in Section 5 of this report, the stratigraphy encountered in our 

borings is generally consistent with the published near-surface geology. 

4.3 REGIONAL GROUNDWATER 

California Geological Survey (CGS) mapping (2003) shows that the historical highest 

groundwater level expected in the site vicinity is less than 5 feet bgs. The CGS 

assessment of groundwater depth is based on the review of the area’s domestic and 

commercial water wells, environmental monitoring wells, geotechnical borings and other 

available data sources. 

4.4 SEISMICITY 

The site is seismically dominated by the active San Andreas Fault system. This rightlateral, 

strike-slip fault extends from the Gulf of California to Cape Mendocino, off the 

coast of Humboldt County in northern California, and forms a portion of the boundary 

between two global tectonic plates (the Pacific and North American Plates). In this 

portion of the Coast Ranges Province, the Pacific plate moves north relative to the 

North American plate, which is located east of the transform boundary. Deformation 

along this plate boundary in the San Francisco area is distributed across a wide fault 

zone, which includes the San Andreas, Hayward, Calaveras, and San Gregorio faults. 

Together, these and other faults are referred to as the San Andreas Fault system. The 

general northwest trend (about N30-40W) of the faults within this system is responsible 

for the strong northwest-southeast structural orientation of most major geologic and 

geomorphic features in the Coast Ranges Province. 

The Working Group on California Earthquake Probabilities (2003), prepared by the U.S. 

Geological Survey regarding earthquake probabilities in the Bay Area, concluded that 

there is a 62 percent chance that one of the major faults within the Bay Area will 

experience a major (Mw 6.7+) 3 earthquake between the period of 2003-2032. As has 

been demonstrated by the 1989 Mw 6.9 Loma Prieta earthquake and the 1994 Mw 6.7 

Northridge earthquake, earthquakes of this magnitude range can cause severe ground 

shaking and significant damage to modern urban developments. 

3 Moment magnitude (Mw) is an energy-based scale and provides a physically meaningful measure of the 

size of a faulting event. Moment magnitude is directly related to average slip and fault rupture areas. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

A generalized summary of site-specific geologic hazards associated with earthquakes 

are discussed in Section 6. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

5.0 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS 

The following sections describe general site conditions, subsurface stratigraphy and 

groundwater depth. Our descriptions and conclusions are based on information from 

the field exploration conducted for this study. 

5.1 SITE DESCRIPTION 

5.1.1 Location and Topography 

The project site is located within a Federal Express employee parking lot, approximately 

200-feet north of the main Federal Express building at 1 Sally Ride Way at the Oakland 

International Airport. The site area is relatively flat and is covered with asphalt concrete 

pavement. The surrounding area is currently occupied by paved aircraft, maintenance 

and delivery areas. 

According to an as-built topographic map of the Federal Express Facility provided by 

TranSystems Corporation (TranSystems), the ground surface elevation at the project 

site lies at approximately Elevation +9 feet, mean sea level (msl). The ground surface 

within the existing FedEx facility, including the project site area, is gently sloped to allow 

for drainage. 

5.1.2 Existing Asphalt Pavement 

As noted above, the existing site area is paved with asphalt. At the locations of test 

borings KB-1 & KB-2, the existing pavement section consisted of approximately 6 

inches of asphalt over 8 inches of aggregate base. 

5.2 STRATIGRAPHY 

Based on the available geologic information and on the results of our field exploration, 

the site soils can be divided into three general categories: 1) clayey gravel fill soils, 2) 

hydraulically placed loose to dense, poorly graded sand fill, and 3) interlayered alluvium 

of the San Antonio formation. The general material types, as encountered in our 

borings, are described below. Refer to the boring logs for detailed soil descriptions. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

5.2.1 Clayey Gravel Fill 

Based on the results of our exploratory boring program, the site is underlain by 11 to 14 

feet of heterogeneous artificial fill materials. Both test borings encountered fill material, 

which is consistent with the geologic map produced by Graymer (2000). The fill soils 

consist of medium dense clayey gravels with sand. 

5.2.2 Poorly Graded Hydraulically Placed Sand Fill 

Beneath the clayey gravel fill materials, hydraulically placed, very loose to medium 

dense, poorly graded liquefiable sand and clayey sand fill was encountered in both 

borings. In boring KB-1, the sand was encountered between 13 feet and 34 feet bgs. 

In boring KB-2, the sand interbedded with medium stiff to stiff lean clay was between 

13.5 and 26.5 feet bgs. 

Based on the loose to medium dense strength of some of the fill sand encountered, we 

consider these fill sands to be potentially liquefiable under the effects of a strong 

earthquake. 

The hydraulically placed gray sand fill soils noted above were likely placed at some time 

during the 1950’s to late 1960’s. 

5.2.3 San Antonio Formation Alluvium 

Underlying the hydraulically placed sand fill, we encountered alluvial basin soils to the 

depths explored, which consisted of interbedded gravel, sand, sandy clay, and lean clay 

of the San Antonio formation. The alluvial sand and gravel are generally medium dense 

to dense, with occasional thin layers of clay and silt. Silt and clay layers are generally 

medium to very stiff with varying amounts of sand and fine gravel. 

5.3 GROUNDWATER 

As noted in Section 2.4, we advanced a third boring to 12 feet bgs, immediately 

adjacent to boring KB-2; no logs were produced for this boring as the stratigraphy was 

the same as boring KB-2. We first encountered free groundwater at 12 feet bgs, 

immediately following drilling, and then at 10 feet bgs, after approximately 10 minutes. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

Depth-to-water measurements are noted on boring log KB-2. Because groundwater 

levels were measured soon after completion of the borehole, the levels recorded likely 

do not represent stabilized groundwater. 

We have assumed a groundwater level of Elevation +3 feet, msl for our engineering 

analyses. This assumed groundwater elevation is within the range reported by CGS 

(2003) for the site vicinity. 

Because the project site lies close to the Oakland Estuary, San Leandro Bay and other 

tidally-influenced water bodies, we expect groundwater levels may fluctuate in response 

to tidal movement. It is also possible that the groundwater level could temporarily rise 

to the ground surface during periods of extensive rainfall and heavy surface runoff. We 

note that our groundwater level observations were made in mid-May 2008, following an 

unusually dry winter. 

5.4 VARIATIONS IN SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 

Our interpretations of soil and groundwater conditions, as described above, are based 

on data obtained from our borings, our geologic research and laboratory data collected 

for this study. The conclusions and recommendations that follow are based on those 

interpretations. It is likely that undisclosed variations in subsurface conditions exist at 

the site, particularly with respect to fill thickness and composition, and that seasonal 

variations in groundwater levels will occur. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

6.0 GEOLOGIC HAZARDS 

Geologic hazards reviewed for this project include seismic ground shaking, fault ground 

rupture, liquefaction, cyclic densification, and lateral spreading. 

6.1 SEISMIC GROUND SHAKING 

It is important to note that the site is in a region of high seismic activity. Historically, the 

site has been subjected to intense seismic activity. We expect the site to be subjected 

to substantial ground shaking due to a major seismic event on the surrounding faults, 

especially the active Hayward Fault during the life of the project (assumed at 50 years). 

Some degree of structural damage due to strong seismic shaking should be expected. 

Periodic slight to moderate earthquakes should also be expected. 

6.2 FAULT GROUND RUPTURE 

Based on our review of the referenced geologic maps, the project area is not underlain 

by known active faults (i.e., faults that exhibit evidence of ground displacement in the 

last 11,000 years), nor does the site lie within an Alquist-Priolo Earthquake Fault Zone. 

Therefore, the potential for ground rupture due to faulting through the building is 

considered low. However, the site does fall within 7.2 km of the Active Hayward Fault, 

and thus all structures should be designed, at a minimum, per the 2007 California 

Building Code (CBC). 

6.3 LIQUEFACTION 

Soil liquefaction is a condition in which saturated, granular and low-plasticity cohesive 

soils undergo a substantial loss of strength and deformation due to pore pressure 

increase resulting from cyclic stress application induced by earthquakes. In the 

process, the soil acquires mobility sufficient to permit both horizontal and vertical 

movements if the soil mass is not confined. Structures founded on or above potentially 

liquefiable soils may experience bearing capacity failures due to the temporary loss of 

foundation support, vertical settlements, and undergo lateral spreading. Soils most 

susceptible to liquefaction are saturated, loose, clean, uniformly graded, and finegrained 

sand deposits. However, based on recent observations and study, under 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

certain conditions liquefaction can also occur in low-plasticity silts and clays (Seed et al., 

2003). Possible consequences of liquefaction at the site include sand boils, pavement 

damage, disruption of buried utilities, and ground settlement. 

The site is mapped as being susceptible to earthquake induced liquefaction per the 

referenced State of California Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the San Leandro 

Quadrangle (CGS, 2003). Groundwater is shallow at the site (5 to 10 feet deep). The 

peak horizontal ground surface acceleration (PGA) with a 10 percent probability of 

exceedance in 50 years for alluvial conditions is approximately 0.55g (CGS, 2003). The 

modal earthquake for both the liquefaction susceptibility and lateral spread calculations 

is the Mw = 7.1 seismic event on the Hayward Fault. 

We evaluated liquefaction triggering potential using procedures presented by Youd et 

al. (2001) and guidelines presented by California Division of Mines and Geology (1997) 

and Martin and Lew (1999). Based on our analyses, very loose to loose sands of about 

6 ft in thickness underlying the medium dense to dense clayey gravel fill are susceptible 

to liquefaction in the event of the design earthquake. Depending on the liquefiable layer 

thickness and composition, we estimated that up to 2.5 inches of liquefaction-induced 

settlement can be expected at the site. We estimate up to one inch of differential 

settlement across the site due to liquefaction settlement. 

6.4 CYCLIC DENSIFICATION 

Seismically induced compaction or densification of non-saturated sand (sand above the 

groundwater table) due to earthquake vibrations may cause settlement. Most of the soil 

above the groundwater table at the site consists of medium dense clayey gravel with 

sand. We judge settlement of these soils due to cyclic densification will be low (less 

than 1/4 inch). 

6.5 LATERAL SPREADING 

Lateral spread is defined as mostly horizontal movement of gently sloping ground (less 

than five percent surface slope) due to elevated pore pressures or liquefaction in 

underlying, saturated soils. Structures at the head of the slide are sometimes pulled 

apart while those at the toe are subjected to buckling or compression of the foundation 

soil. Linear infrastructure, such as utility lines and roadways, is particularly susceptible 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

to damage in earthquake from lateral spreading at multiple locations (A. F. Rauch, 

1997). Lateral spreading movements typically are greatest near a free-face (such as 

the bay waterfront dikes) and diminish with distance from the free-face. 

Because the project site is relatively level and is not adjacent to an open slope face, we 

do not anticipate lateral spreading at the site. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

7.0 DISCUSSIONS AND CONCLUSIONS 

Based on our review of the field exploration, laboratory data collected to date, and 

engineering analyses, we believe that the project as currently proposed is feasible from 

a geotechnical standpoint, provided that the recommendations presented in this report 

are incorporated into the design. The discussions and conclusions that follow are 

based on design information provided by the project Structural Engineer (TranSystems), 

the results of our field investigations, our engineering analyses, and our professional 

judgment. Recommendations regarding site grading and foundation design are 

presented in the “Recommendations” section of this report. 

7.1 FOUNDATION TYPE 

Beneath the existing asphalt concrete pavement section, the site is underlain by 

medium dense clayey gravel fill. Based on the relatively light loads of the proposed 

structure, we believe the building can be supported on a shallow spread footing 

foundation. However, because of the potential of 2.5 inches of liquefaction derived 

settlement (see Section 6.3), we judge a shallow mat foundation would be able to span 

the anticipated differential settlement. 

We anticipate total and differential static settlements due to foundation pressures for a 

mat foundation to be less than ½ inch and ¼ inch over a horizontal distance of about 

100 feet, respectively, provided that the design recommendations contained in the 

“Recommendations” section of this report are followed. Foundation settlements should 

be primarily elastic in nature, with a majority of the estimated settlement occurring upon 

the application of the load during the construction. 

In addition to the elastic settlements, maximum liquefaction-induced settlement of up to 

2.5 inches is likely to occur at the site during a seismic event as discussed in the 

“Seismic Hazards” section of this report. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

7.2 CORROSIVITY 

Based on the corrosivity testing performed by JDH Corrosion Consultants, Inc. of 

Walnut Creek, moderately high levels of water-soluble sulfates were found that 

suggests a good quality dense concrete be used for the concrete slabs at this site. 

The soils are also considered to be “moderately corrosive” to ductile/cast iron, steel, and 

dielectric coated steel based on the resistivity measurements. All buried iron, steel, cast 

iron, ductile iron, galvanized steel and dielectric coated steel or iron should be properly 

protected against corrosion depending on the critical nature of the structure. All buried 

metallic pressure piping such as ductile iron firewater pipelines should also be protected 

against corrosion. Appendix C presents a laboratory soil corrosivity test summary and 

recommended mitigation measures provided by JDH Corrosion Consultants. 

The above corrosion related laboratory test results and recommendations were based 

on one soil sample from boring KB-1 at 2 feet bgs. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

8.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 

The recommendations presented in this section are based on design information 

provided to us by TranSystems, the results of our field investigation and laboratory 

testing, our engineering evaluations and analyses, and our professional judgment. 

8.1 EARTHWORK 

8.1.1 General 

Based on preliminary drawings, we anticipate that grading will consist of cuts and fills 

less than 4 feet to create subgrade for the new development and to achieve proper site 

drainage. Final grading plans should be reviewed by Kleinfelder for conformance to our 

design recommendations prior to construction bidding. In addition, it is important that a 

representative of Kleinfelder observe and evaluate the competency of existing soils or 

new fills underlying structures, slabs-on-grade, and pavements. In general, if soft or 

unsuitable materials are encountered, these should be over-excavated, removed and 

replaced with compacted engineered fill material. 

8.1.2 Site Preparation and Grading 

Prior to grading, existing pavements, any abandoned shallow foundations, abandoned 

utilities, roots and other organic matter and debris should be removed. Site grading 

should extend a minimum of 5 feet laterally outside the proposed building. Depressions 

left from removal of below-grade obstructions should be excavated to unyielding soil 

and backfilled with properly-compacted fill. Site drainage should also be provided. 

Any organic matter and debris should not be re-used as engineered fill and should be 

removed from the site, or used in landscaped areas, as appropriate. However, asphalt 

and concrete can be reused as engineered fill as long as the gradation of this recycled 

material meets our recommended fill criteria and is approved by us prior to use. 

All active or inactive utilities within the construction area should be protected, relocated, 

or abandoned. Active utilities to be reused should be carefully located and protected 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

during construction. Abandoned utility lines should be removed and the area properly 

backfilled and compacted in the engineered fill. 

Prior to placement of engineered fill or following excavation to reach desired subgrade 

levels in proposed buildings, the exposed subgrade should be scarified to a minimum 

depth of 12 inches. Scarification should extend laterally a minimum of 5 feet beyond 

proposed building and any improvement limits. Scarified areas should be moisture 

conditioned to above-optimum and re-compacted as specified in Table 2. Fills should 

be placed in lifts no greater than 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Laboratory 

maximum density and optimum moisture relationships should be determined by the 

current ASTM Test Designation D 1557. 

The on-site soils, if free of organic matter or other deleterious materials, are suitable for 

use as general engineered fill. Maximum particle size for fill material should be limited 

to 3 inches, with at least 90 percent by weight passing the 1 inch sieve. 

If imported material is needed, it is recommended that it be granular in nature, adhere to 

the above gradation recommendations and conform to the following minimum criteria: 

Plasticity Index 15 or less 

Liquid Limit 30 or less 

Highly pervious materials such as pea gravel or clean sands are not recommended 

because these permit transmission of water to the underlying soils. 

All on-site or import fill material should be compacted to the general recommendations 

provided for engineered fill (Table 2). Onsite and import material should be compacted 

at or slightly above the optimum moisture content. Grading operations during the wet 

season, or in areas where the soils are saturated, may require provisions for drying of 

soil prior to compaction. If the project necessitates fill placement and compaction in wet 

conditions, we could provide alternatives for drying the soil. Conversely, additional 

moisture may be required during the dry months. Water and/or water trucks should be 

available to provide adequate water during compaction. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

All site preparation including fill placement and compaction should be observed by 

Kleinfelder. It is important that during the site preparation and scarification process, a 

representative of Kleinfelder be present to observe whether any undesirable material is 

encountered in the construction area and whether exposed soils are similar to those 

encountered during the geotechnical site exploration. 

8.1.3 Excavation and Backfill 

Excavations for footings, utility trenches, or other excavations are anticipated to be 

made with either a backhoe or trencher. We expect the walls of trenches less than 5 

feet deep to be able to stand temporarily near vertical without support. We do not 

anticipate excavations greater than 5 feet. If excavations greater than 5 feet are 

anticipated, please contact us. 

Where trenches or other excavations are extended deeper than 5 feet, the excavation 

may become unstable and should be evaluated to monitor stability prior to personnel 

entering the trenches. Shoring or sloping of any deep trench wall may be necessary to 

protect personnel and to provide stability. All trenches should conform to the current 

OSHA requirements for work safety. Excavations should be located so that no 

structures, foundations, or slabs are located above a plane projected 45 degrees 

upward from any point in an excavation, regardless of whether it is shored or unshored. 

Backfills for trenches or other small excavations beneath slabs should be compacted as 

noted in Table 2. Special care should be taken in the control of utility trench backfilling 

under structural, pavement, and slab areas. Poor compaction may cause excessive 

settlements resulting in damage to overlying structures and slabs. 

Where utility trenches extend from the exterior to the interior limits of the building, 

clayey soils or lean concrete should be used as backfill material for a distance of 

approximately 2 feet laterally on each side of the exterior building line to reduce the 

potential for the trench acting as a conduit for the exterior surface water. Utility trenches 

located in landscaped areas should also be capped with a minimum of 12 inches 

compacted clayey soils. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

8.1.4 Site Drainage 

Proper site drainage is important for the long-term performance of the planned 

structure. The site should be graded so as to carry surface water away from the 

building foundations, at a minimum slope of 2 percent at least 5 feet laterally from the 

building. In addition, all roof gutters should be connected directly into a storm drainage 

system, or drain onto impervious surfaces that drain away from the buildings, provided 

that a safety hazard is not created. 

8.1.5 Wet Weather Construction 

If site grading and construction is to be performed during the winter rainy months, the 

owner and contractors should be aware of the potential impact of wet weather. 

Rainstorms can cause delay to construction and damage to previously completed work 

by saturating compacted pads or subgrades, or flooding excavations. 

The grading contractor should be responsible to protect his work to avoid damage by 

rainwater. Standing pools of water should be pumped out immediately. Construction 

during wet weather conditions should be addressed in the project construction bid 

documents and/or specifications. We recommend the grading contractor submit a wet 

weather construction plan outlining procedures they will employ to protect their work 

and to reduce damage to their work by rainstorms. 

8.2 FOUNDATIONS 

8.2.1 Mat Foundation 

The proposed building can be supported on a mat foundation bearing on the existing fill. 

The allowable bearing pressure beneath the mat should not exceed 2,000 psf for dead 

plus live loads. This bearing pressure may be increased by 1/3 for supporting total 

loads, including wind and seismic loads. These values include a factor of safety of at 

least 3.0. Excavations for the mat slab should be free of loose soils, debris and 

standing water prior to placing concrete. 

For elastic analysis of the mat and determination of deflections we recommend a 

modulus of vertical subgrade reaction of 50 kips per cubic foot (kcf) be used. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

The subgrade for the mat should be waterproofed and a moisture barrier should be 

installed. A typical moisture-prevention barrier includes a capillary moisture break 

consisting of at least a four-inch-thick layer of clean, free-draining gravel or crushed 

rock (1/2- to 3/4-inch gradation) overlain by a moisture proof membrane at least 10 mils 

thick. The membrane should be covered with two inches of sand for protection during 

construction and to aid in curing the concrete. If added protection is desired beneath the 

mat slab, Paraseal (or an equivalent waterproofing system) can be placed above the 

drain rock in lieu of the membrane. Water should not be allowed to accumulate in the 

capillary break gravel or sand prior to casting the mat. 

8.2.2 Lateral Resistance 

Lateral loads on foundations resulting from earth pressures and seismic and/or wind 

forces should be resisted by a combination of: 1) friction between the base of the 

foundation and the supporting subgrade and 2) passive resistance acting against the 

vertical faces of the foundation perpendicular to the direction of load. An allowable 

friction coefficient of 0.35 is considered applicable for friction between the foundation 

and supporting subgrade, and a passive resistance equal to an equivalent fluid pressure 

(unit weight) of 350 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) acting against the foundation. These 

values can be used concurrently. These values may be increased by one-third for short 

term wind and/or seismic loading. It should be noted that the lateral load resistance 

values discussed above assume that the concrete for footings are either placed directly 

against undisturbed soils or that the voids created from the use of forms are properly 

backfilled and compacted with soil or other approved material (e.g. lean concrete). 

8.2.3 Settlement 

Under static loading conditions, total post-construction foundation settlement is 

expected to be less than about 1/2 inch, and post-construction differential settlement is 

expected to be less than ¼ inch across the entire site. These settlement values are 

based on the assumption that the building areas are properly graded and compacted, 

and the foundations are designed and constructed in accordance with our 



© 2008 Kleinfelder

8.2.4 Construction Considerations 

Where footings are located adjacent to below-grade structures, other new footings, or 

underground utilities, they should bottom below an imaginary 45 degree plane projected 

upward from the bottom of adjacent footings or underground utilities, in order to reduce 

imposing a surcharge pressure on them. 

Where underground utilities cross through or below perimeter footings, the trench 

backfill should consist of lean concrete, as discussed in the “Earthwork” Section of this 

report, in order to help reduce migration of water beneath the building. 

Concrete for footings should be placed neat against soil. It is important that exposed 

material in footing excavations be maintained in a moist condition until concrete is 

placed. If shrinkage cracks appear in the footing excavations, the excavations should 

be thoroughly moistened to close all cracks prior to concrete placement. If excessive 

shrinkage cracks develop, other mitigation measures may be required. Soft or loose 

materials, if encountered at the bottom of the footing excavations, should be removed 

and replaced with lean concrete or engineered fill. 

A Kleinfelder representative should check footing excavations for adequate bearing soil, 

adequate moisture of exposed soil, and proper cleanout of footing excavations before 

reinforcing steel is placed. Kleinfelder should also be present during any overexcavation 

performed for footings. 

8.3 2007 CBC SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS 

8.3.1 Site Classification for Seismic Design Purposes 

For developing seismic design criteria recommendations, the characteristics of the soils 

underlying the site are important input to evaluate the site response. Based on our 

investigation, the site is generally underlain by a layer of very loose to loose sand 

ranging from about 13 to 19 feet bgs. Groundwater was encountered in our borings 

within the upper 10 feet bgs, although general regional groundwater in the site vicinity is 

less than 5 feet bgs. Based on the presence of shallow groundwater and some very 

loose to loose sand layers, the site has liquefiable soils that would generally indicate 

Site Class ‘F’ which typically needs a site-specific response analysis. However, the 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

ASCE 7-05 chapter 20.3.1.1 guidelines indicate that a “Stiff Soil Profile” Site Class ‘D’ is 

appropriate for use for liquefiable sites with short period structures ( ≤ 0.5 seconds). We 

expect the period of vibration for the proposed development is less than 0.5 seconds. If 

this period is larger than 0.5 seconds, we should be contacted to review our 

recommendations presented herein and recommend adjustments as necessary. 

Based on the above, we recommend that the site be classified as a Site Class ‘D’ for 

seismic response purposes and development of ground motion parameters according to 

ASCE 7-05 and CBC 2007 as presented in Table 1613A.5.2 and Section 1613A.5.5 of 

the 2007 CBC. Site Class D is defined as Stiff Soil profile with average properties (in 

the top 100 feet) of shear wave velocities between 600 and 1200 feet/sec, SPT-N 

between 15 and 50 blows/foot, or Su (undrained shear strength) between 1,000 and 

2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). 

1. SPT-N refers to the standard penetration test blows 

2. Su refers to undrained shear strength 

8.3.2 2007 CBC Code Values 

For seismic design purposes, the 2007 CBC code enforced as of January 2008 is based 

on 2006 IBC and ASCE 7-05. The seismic design parameters provided are for the 

Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE). The MCE mapped spectral accelerations 

values for 0.2 second and 1 second periods (SS and S1) were calculated using the 

online Java calculator at the USGS website 

(http://earthquake.usgs.gov/research/hazmaps/design/) for Site Class D. The mapped 

acceleration values and associated soil amplification factors (Fa and Fv) based on 2007 

CBC are presented in Table 1 below. The SDS and SD1 values were computed as 

follows. 

SDS = 2/3 SMS 

SD1 = 2/3 SM1 

SMS = Fa SS 

SM1 = Fv S1 

SS = mapped acceleration value at 0.2 sec 

S1 = mapped acceleration value at 1.0 sec 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

Fa and Fv are estimated from Tables 11.4-1 and 11.4-2 of 2007 

CBC 

Corresponding design spectral accelerations (SMS and SDS) are also presented in 

Table 1: 

TABLE 1 

Ground Motion Parameters Based on 2007 CBC 

Parameter Value 2007 CBC Reference 

SS 1.500g Section 1613.5.1 

S1 0.600g Section 1613.5.1 

Site Class D Table 1613.5.2 

Fa 1.0 Table 1613.5.3(1) 

Fv 1.50 Table 1613.5.3(2) 

SMS 1.50g Section 1613.5.3 

SM1 0.90g Section 1613.5.3 

SDS 1.00g Section 1613.5.4 

SD1 0.60g Section 1613.5.4 

The approximate site coordinates used for this analysis are as follows: 

Latitude: 37.7205° N 

Longitude: 122.2192° W 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

9.1 ADDITIONAL SERVICES 

9.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES AND LIMITATIONS 

Variations in soil types and conditions are possible and may be encountered during 

construction. To permit correlation between the soil data obtained during this 

investigation and the actual soil conditions encountered during construction, we 

recommend that Kleinfelder be retained to provide observation and testing services 

during site earthwork and foundation. This will allow us the opportunity to compare 

actual conditions exposed during construction with those encountered in our 

investigation and to provide supplemental recommendations if warranted by the 

exposed conditions. Earthwork should be performed in accordance with the 

recommendations presented in this report, or as recommended by Kleinfelder during 

construction. 

Kleinfelder should review geotechnical portions of the final plans and specifications to 

evaluate how the recommendations presented in this report were implemented into the 

designs. If Kleinfelder is not retained for these services, the client will assume our 

responsibility for any potential claims that may arise. 

9.2 LIMITATIONS 

We have prepared this report for TranSystems Corporation for use in the design of the 

proposed new Federal Express Security Screening Building project at 1 Sally Ride Way 

in Oakland, California. We prepared this report in substantial accordance with the 

generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice, as it exists in the project area at 

the time of our study. No warranty, express or implied, is made or intended. It is likely 

that soil conditions vary between or beyond the locations that we have explored to date. 

Land use, site conditions (both on-site and off-site) or other factors may change over 

time, and additional geotechnical exploration may be required if the construction plan or 

schedule changes. 

This report may be used only by TranSystems Corporation and their project consultants, 

only for the purposes stated, and within a reasonable time from its issuance. Any party 

other than TranSystems Corporation who wishes to use this report shall notify 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

Kleinfelder of such intended use. Based on the intended use of the report, Kleinfelder 

may require that additional work be conducted and that an updated report be issued. 

Non-compliance with any of these requirements by the client or anyone else will release 

Kleinfelder from any liability resulting from the use of this report by any unauthorized 

party. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder


The following references are cited in this report: 

2006 Edition International Building Code (IBC) with 2007 California amendments. 

2006. 

2007 California Building Code (CBC), Volume 1. 2007. 

ASCE 7-05 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE/SEI 

2005. 

California Division of Mines and Geology (1997), "Special Publication 117 – Guidelines 

for Evaluating and Mitigating Seismic Hazards in California," Adopted March 13, 

1997. 

California Geological Survey (2003), "Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the San Leandro 

7.5-Minute Quadrangle, Alameda County, California," Seismic Hazard Zone 

Report 078. 

Graymer, R.W. (2000), "Geologic Map and Map Database of the Oakland Metropolitan 

Area, Alameda, Contra Costa, and San Francisco Counties, California," United 

States Geological Survey, MF-2342, Version 1.0. 2000. 

Martin, G.R. and M. Lew (eds.) (1999). "Recommended Procedures for Implementation 

of DMG Special Publication 117 Guidelines for Analyzing and Mitigating 

Liquefaction Hazards in California," Southern California Earthquake Center, 

University of Southern California, March 1999. 

Rogers, J.D. and S.H. Figuers (1991), "Engineering Geologic Site Characterization of 

the Greater Oakland-Alameda Area, Alameda and San Francisco Counties, 

California," Report to National Science Foundation, Grant No. BCS-9003785, 

December 30, 1991. 

Seed, R.B., K.O. Cetin, R.E.S. Moss, A.M. Kammerer, J. Wu, J.M. Pestana, M.F. 

Riemer, R.B. Sancio, J.D. Bray, R.E. Kayen, and A. Faris (2003), "Recent 

Advances in Soil Liquefaction Engineering: A Unified and Consistent 

Framework," 26th Annual ASCE Los Angeles Geotechnical Spring Seminar, 

Keynote Presentation, H.M.S. Queen Mary, Long Beach, California, April 30, 

2003. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

Tokimatsu, K. and H.B. Seed (1987), "Evaluation of Settlements in Sand Due to 

Earthquake Shaking," Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 113, No. 8, pp. 

861-878. 

Working Group on California Earthquake Probabilities (2003), "Earthquake Probabilities 

in the San Francisco Bay Region: 2002-2031," U.S. Geological Survey, Open 

File Report 03-214. 

Youd, T.L., I.M. Idriss, R.D. Andrus, I. Arango, G. Castro, .T. Christian, R. Dobry, 

W.D.L. Finn, L.F. Harder Jr., M.E. Hynes, K. Ishihara, J.P. Koester, S.S.C. Liao, 

W.F. Marcuson III, G.R. Martin, J.K. Mitchell, Y. Moriwaki, M.S. Power, P.K. 

Robertson, R.B. Seed, K.H. Stokoe II (2001). "Liquefaction Resistance of Soils: 

Summary Report from the 1996 NCEER and 1998 NCEER/NSF Workshops on 

Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils," Journal of Geotechnical and 

Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 127, No. 10, October 2001, pp. 817-829. 

Youd, T.L., C.M. Hansen and S.F. Bartlett (2002), "Revised Multilinear Regression 

Equations for Prediction of Lateral Spread Displacement," Journal of 

Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 128, No. 12, December 

2002, pp. 1007-1017. 

Youd, T.L. and B.L. Carter (2005), "Influence of Soil Softening and Liquefaction on 

Spectral Acceleration," Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental 

Engineering, Vol. 131, No. 7, July 2005, pp. 811-825. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

TABLE 2 

SUMMARY OF COMPACTION RECOMMENDATIONS 

Area Compaction Recommendation (1),(2),(3),(4),(5) 

General Engineered Fill Compact to at least 90 percent compaction at 

above optimum moisture content for native 

clayey and silty soils and at near optimum 

moisture content for imported granular soils. 

Imported Fill Compact to at least 90 percent compaction at 

near or above optimum moisture content. 

Trenches (6) Compact to at least 90 percent compaction at 

above optimum moisture content for native 

clayey or silty soils and at near optimum moisture 

content for imported granular soils. 

Concrete Floor Slabs Compact upper 12 inches of subgrade to a 

minimum of 90 percent at above optimum 

moisture content in clayey or silty soils 

Exterior Flatwork Compact upper 12 inches of subgrade to a 

minimum of 90 percent at above optimum 

moisture content in clayey or silty soils or upper 

12 inches of subgrade to a minimum of 90 

percent at near optimum for sandy or gravelly 

soils. 

Parking and Access Driveways Compact upper 8 inches of subgrade to a 

minimum of 90 percent compaction at above 

optimum moisture content. Compact baserock to 

a minimum of 95 percent compaction near 

optimum moisture content. 

Notes: 

(1) All compaction requirements refer to relative compaction as a percentage of the 

laboratory standard described by ASTM D1557. 

(2) Depths are below finished subgrade elevation. 

(3) Fill material should be compacted in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. 

(4) All subgrades should be firm and unyielding. 

(5) Fills greater than 7 feet in depth should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent below 7 

feet. 

(6) In landscaping areas only, percent compaction in trenches may be reduced to 85 

percent. 


© 2008 Kleinfelder

PLATES

ATTACHED IMAGES: Images: SITE-VIC.jpg 

ATTACHED XREFS: XRef: Eng-A_8x11_P_StyleA: XRef: 0099-C-PL01-E 

PLEASANTON, CA CAD FILE: D:\_PROJECTS\94240-1\1\ LAYOUT: SITE-VIC PLOTTED: 11 Jun 2008, 6:19pm, jsala 

The information included on this graphic representation has been compiled from a variety of 

sources and is subject to change without notice. Kleinfelder makes no representations or 

warranties, express or implied, as to accuracy, completeness, timeliness, or rights to the use of 

such information. This document is not intended for use as a land survey product nor is it 

designed or intended as a construction design document. The use or misuse of the information 

contained on this graphic representation is at the sole risk of the party using or misusing the 

information. 

www.kleinfelder.com 

SITE 

PROJECT NO. 

DRAWN: 

DRAWN BY: 

CHECKED BY: 

FILE NAME: 

VIC-PLAN.dwg 

94240 

JUNE 2008 

JDS 

AJ 

2000 1000 

2000 

APPROXIMATE SCALE (feet) 

REFERENCE: 

www.mapquest.com, 2008 

SITE VICINITY MAP 

FEDEX SECURITY SCREENING BUILDING 

SALLY WAY AT AIR CARGO WAY 



PLATE 

1

ATTACHED IMAGES: Images: SITE-VIC.jpg 

ATTACHED XREFS: XRef: Eng-A_8x11_P_StyleA: XRef: 0099-C-PL01-E 

PLEASANTON, CA CAD FILE: D:\_PROJECTS\94240-1\1\ LAYOUT: SITEPLAN PLOTTED: 11 Jun 2008, 6:19pm, jsala 

LEGEND 

94'-0" 

NOTE: Locations are approximate. 

The information included on this graphic representation has been compiled from a variety of 

sources and is subject to change without notice. Kleinfelder makes no representations or 

warranties, express or implied, as to accuracy, completeness, timeliness, or rights to the use of 

such information. This document is not intended for use as a land survey product nor is it 

designed or intended as a construction design document. The use or misuse of the information 

contained on this graphic representation is at the sole risk of the party using or misusing the 

information. 

KB-2 

42'-9" 

KB-1 

PROPOSED BUILDING LOCATION 

SOIL BORING (By Kleinfelder, 2008) 

www.kleinfelder.com 

PROJECT NO. 

DRAWN: 

DRAWN BY: 

CHECKED BY: 

FILE NAME: 

VIC-PLAN.dwg 

94240 

JUNE 2008 

JDS 

AJ 

40 20 

40 

APPROXIMATE SCALE (feet) 

REFERENCE: 

Location of Proposed building provided by 

Transystems, dated April 15, 2008 

SITE PLAN 


SALLY WAY AT AIR CARGO WAY 



PLATE 

2

APPENDIX A

MAJOR DIVISIONS LTR ID 

DESCRIPTION 

MAJOR DIVISIONS LTR 

COARSE 

GRAINED 

SOILS 

Notes: 

0800, 

5/31 

PROJECT NO. 

GRAVEL 

AND 

GRAVELLY 

SAND 

AND 

SANDY 

0745, 

5/31 

PEN 

TV:Su 

GW 

GP 

GM 

GC 

SW 

SP 

SM 

SC 

Bulk Sample 

UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM 

Well-graded sands or gravelly sands, little or 

no fines. 

Poorly-graded sands or gravelly sands, little 

or no fines. 

Silty sand. 

Clayey sand. 

Modified California Sampler 2.5 inch O.D., 2.0 inch I.D. 

California Sampler, 3.0 inch O.D., 2.5 inch I.D. 

Shelby Tube 3.0 inch O.D. 

Approximate water level observed in boring following drilling 

Pocket Penetrometer reading, in tsf 

Torvane shear strength, in ksf 

Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour or clayey 

silts with slight plasticity. 

Inorganic lean clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly 

clays, sandy clays, silty clays. 

The lines separating strata on the logs represent approximate boundaries only. The actual transition may be gradual. 

No warranty is provided as to the continuity of soil strata between borings. Logs represent the soil section observed at 

the boring location on the date of drilling only. 

94240 

Well-graded gravels or gravel with sand, 

little or no fines. 

Silty gravels, silty gravel with sand mixture. 

FINE 

GRAINED 

Clayey gravels, clayey gravel with sand mixture. SOILS 

Standard Penetration Split Spoon Sampler 2.0 inch O.D., 1.4 inch I.D. 

ML 

MH 

CH 

BORING LOG LEGEND 


SALLY RIDE WAY AT AIR CARGO WAY 



CL 

OL 

ID 

Inorganic elastic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous 

or silty soils. 

Inorganic fat clays (high plasticity). 

Approximate water level first observed in boring. Time recorded in reference to a 24 hour clock. 

NR 

LL 

PI 

%-#200 

DS 

C 

PHI 

Poorly-graded gravels or gravel with sand, 

little or no fines. 

NO RECOVERY 

LIQUID LIMIT 

PLASTICITY INDEX 

SIEVE ANALYSIS (#200 SCREEN) 

DIRECT SHEAR 

COHESION (PSF) 

FRICTION ANGLE 

SILTS 

AND 

CLAYS 

SILTS 

AND 

CLAYS 

HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS 

TX 

CONSOL 

R-Value 

SE 

EI 

FS 

TRIAXIAL SHEAR 

CONSOLIDATION 

RESISTANCE VALUE 

SAND EQUIVALENT 

EXPANSION INDEX 

FREE SWELL (U.S.B.R.) 

Blow counts represent the number of blows a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches required to drive a sampler through 

the last 12 inches of an 18 inch penetration, unless otherwise noted. 

OH 

Pt 

DESCRIPTION 

Organic silts and organic silt-clays of low plasticity. 

Organic clays of medium high to high plasticity. 

Peat and other highly organic soils. 

PLATE 

A-1 

6/11/2008 5:30:58 PM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

Date Completed: 

Logged By: 

Total Depth: 

Depth,ft 

5 

10 

15 

20 

25 

FIELD 

Sample 

Blows/ft 

32 

18 

11 

18 

19 

4 

NR 

34 

45 

5/16/08 

C. Varela 

Approximately 51.5 ft 

Dry 

Density 

pcf 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Compress. 

119 

113 

121 

114 

16.1 

17.6 

15.7 

18.9 

PROJECT NO. 94240 

LABORATORY 

Strength 

tsf 

1.30 @ 

12.4% 

Other Tests 

Corrosion Test 

LL=42; PI=28 

-#200=20% 

-#200=15% 

Pen, tsf 

Drilling method: 

Hammer Wt: 

Notes: 

Surface Elevation: 

ASPHALT CONCRETE - 6 inches thick over 

AGGREGATE BASEROCK - 8 inches thick 

CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND (GC) - brown, moist, medium 

dense, fine-grained gravel (FILL) 

CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND (GC) - gray, moist, medium 

dense, fine to medium-grained gravel (FILL) 

- loose 

- wet, medium dense 

CLAYEY SAND (SC) - dark gray, wet, very loose, fine to 

medium-grained sand 

- medium dense 

- dense 

Mud Rotary 

CME 75 Drill Rig 

140 lbs., 30" drop 

Asphaltic-Concrete pavement 

LOG OF BORING NO. KB-1 

DESCRIPTION 

Estimated 9 feet (MSL) 





PLATE 

A-2 

6/13/2008 11:54:28 AM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

Depth,ft 

30 

35 

40 

45 

50 

55 

60 

Sample 

FIELD 

17 

15 

41 

67 

NR 

Blows/ft 

70/5" 

PROJECT NO. 

Dry 

Density 

pcf 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Compress. 

94240 

14.9 

15.7 

LABORATORY 

Strength 

tsf 

Other Tests 

-#200=33% 

Su = 0.4 ksf 

(Torvane) 

Su = 0.8 ksf 

(Torvane) 

-#200=10% 

Pen, tsf 

2.0 

(Continued from previous plate) 

CLAYEY SAND (SC) - continued 

- medium dense 

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) - olive brown, moist, medium stiff 

POORLY GRADED SAND with CLAY (SP-SC) - brown, moist, 

dense, medium to coarse-grained sand, trace fine gravel 

POORLY GRADED GRAVEL (GP) - gray-brown, wet, dense, 

fine-grained gravel 

- refusal, no recovery, fine to coarse gravel slough (1 inch 

maximum) 

Boring terminated at approximately 51.5 feet. 

Boring backfilled with cement grout. 

Blow counts shown are raw, uncorrected values. 

Terms & symbols used on the logs are defined on plate A-1. 


DESCRIPTION 





PLATE 

A-2 

(cont'd) 

6/13/2008 11:54:28 AM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

Date Completed: 

Logged By: 

Total Depth: 

Depth,ft 

5 

10 

15 

20 

25 

Sample 

FIELD 

31 

32 

NR 

20 

NR 

10 

4 

9 

6 

42 

42 

14 

Blows/ft 

PROJECT NO. 

5/16/08 

C. Varela 

Approximately 50.5 ft 

Dry 

Density 

pcf 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Compress. 

Strength 

17:25 

86 

81 

12.3 

10.2 

17:35 

49.8 

16.4 

94240 

LABORATORY 

tsf 

Other Tests 

LL=29; PI=13 

-#200=56% 

Su = 0.8 ksf 

(Torvane) 

-#200=19% 

Pen, tsf 

1.5 

Drilling method: 

Hammer Wt: 

Notes: 

Surface Elevation: 

ASPHALT CONCRETE - 6 inches thick over 

AGGREGATE BASEROCK - 8 inches thick 

POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SAND (GP) - brown, wet, 

medium dense, fine-grained gravel (FILL) 

CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND (GC) - brown, moist, medium 

dense, fine-grained gravel (FILL) 

- loose 

Mud Rotary 

CME 75 Drill Rig 

140 lbs., 30" drop 

Asphaltic-Concrete Parking Lot 

DESCRIPTION 

Estimated 9 feet (MSL) 

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) - gray, wet, medium stiff 

POORLY GRADED SAND with GRAVEL (SP) - dark gray, 

wet, loose, fine to medium-grained sand 

SILTY SAND (SM) - dark gray, wet, very loose, fine to 

medium-grained sand 

POORLY GRADED SAND (SP) - olive-gray, moist, dense, 

coarse-grained sand 

LEAN CLAY (CL) - dark gray, moist, stiff 






PLATE 

A-3 

6/13/2008 11:54:28 AM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

Depth,ft 

30 

35 

40 

45 

50 

55 

60 

Sample 

23 

29 

50 

Blows/ft 

21 

NR 

24 

PROJECT NO. 

FIELD LABORATORY 

Dry 

Density 

pcf 

Moisture 

Content 

% 

Compress. 

94240 

Strength 

tsf 

Other Tests 

Su = 1.6 ksf 

(Torvane) 

Su = 1.8 ksf 

(Torvane) 

Pen, tsf 

3.0 

2.5 

3.0 

(Continued from previous plate) 

LEAN CLAY (CL) - continued 

POORLY GRADED SAND (SP) - gray, moist, medium dense, 

fine-grained sand 

- trace gravel 

- dense 

LEAN CLAY (CL) - brown, moist, stiff to very stiff 

Boring terminated at approximately 50.5 feet. 

Boring backfilled with cement grout. 

Blow counts shown are raw, uncorrected values. 

Terms & symbols used on the logs are defined on plate A-1. 


DESCRIPTION 





PLATE 

A-3 

(cont'd) 

6/13/2008 11:54:28 AM

APPENDIX B

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

BORING NO. DEPTH (ft) 

LIQUID 

LIMIT 

PLASTIC 

LIMIT 

PLASTICITY % PASSING 

INDEX #200 SIEVE 

WATER 

CONTENT 

(%) 

DRY 

DENSITY 

(pcf) 

MAXIMUM 

DEVIATOR 

STRESS 

(ksf) 

AXIAL 

STRAIN 

(%) 

CONFINING 

STRESS 

(ksf) 

KB-1 2.0 16.1 119.3 

KB-1 3.5 42 14 28 

KB-1 7.0 

20 

KB-1 8.5 

17.6 112.8 2.59 12.4 1.0 

KB-1 14.5 

KB-1 16.0 

15.7 120.9 

KB-1 26.0 15 18.9 113.7 

KB-1 31.5 33 14.9 

KB-1 41.5 

10 15.7 

KB-2 4.0 12.3 

KB-2 5.5 29 16 13 10.2 85.7 

KB-2 11.5 

56 49.8 81.0 

KB-2 15.0 16.4 

KB-2 18.0 19 

PROJECT NO. 

94240 

SUMMARY OF LABORATORY RESULTS 





PLATE 

B-1 

6/11/2008 5:51:41 PM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

BORING NO. 

DEPTH - ft 

SAMPLE 

DESCRIPTION 

CONFINING 

STRESS - ksf 

PROJECT NO. 

DEVIATOR STRESS - ksf 

2.6 

2.4 

2.2 

2.0 

1.8 

1.6 

1.4 

1.2 

1.0 

0.8 

0.6 

0.4 

0.2 

0.0 

0 2 

94240 

KB-1 

8.5 

1.0 

4 

Gray Clayey Gravel with Sand (GC) 

AXIAL STRAIN - % 

MAXIMUM DEVIATOR STRESS= 2.59 ksf at 

6 

8 10 12 

DRY DENSITY - pcf 

WATER CONTENT - % 

12.4 % STRAIN 

*PERFORMED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D 2850 

UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED TRIAXIAL 

COMPRESSION* 





14 

16 

113 

17.6 

PLATE 

B-2 

6/11/2008 5:58:47 PM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

PERCENT PASSING 

3" 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

1.5" 

10 

0.1 

SYMBOL BORING DEPTH, ft SAMPLE DESCRIPTION 

PROJECT NO. 94240 

3/4" 

GRAVEL 

coarse fine 

KB-1 

S I E V E A N A L Y S I S 

3/8" 

#4 

7.0 

#8 

coarse 

#16 

1 

#30 

medium 

#50 #100 #200 

PARTICLE SIZE - mm 

SAND 

fine 


0.01 

*PERFORMED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D 422 

PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS* 





H Y D R O M E T E R 

SILT 

CLAY 

0.001 

PLATE 

B-3 

6/11/2008 5:59:39 PM

L:\2008\08PROJECTS\94240\94240.GPJ 

PLASTICITY INDEX (PI) 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

PROJECT NO. 

CL - ML 

0 

0 25 

50 

SYMBOL 

BORING 

LL PL PI SAMPLE DESCRIPTION 

14 

16 

Symbol LL < 50 

Fine Grained Soil Groups 

Symbol 

LL > 50 

ML 

Inorganic clayey silts to very fine sands 

of slight plasticity 

MH 

Inorganic silts and clayey silts 

of high plasticity 

CL 

Inorganic clays of low to 

medium plasticity 

CH 

Inorganic clays of high plasticity 

OL 

Organic silts and organic silty clays of 

low plasticity 

OH 

Organic clays of medium to 

high plasticity, organic silts 

94240 

KB-1 

KB-2 

CL 

DEPTH, ft 

3.5 

5.5 

ML 

or 

OL 

42 

29 

LIQUID LIMIT (LL) 

28 

13 

CH 

Unified Soil Classification 

75 

ATTERBERG LIMITS* 

MH 

or 

OH 



*PERFORMED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D 4318 (WET PREP) 

PLATE 





100 

B-4 

6/11/2008 5:58:03 PM

APPENDIX C

Corrosivity Test Summary 

CTL # 336-097 Date: 5/30/2008 Tested By: PJ Checked: PJ 

Client: 

Remarks: 

Kleinfelder Project: TS Fedex Security Bldg. Proj. No: 94240/1 

Resistivity @ 15.5 Chloride pH ORP Sulfide Moisture 

Boring Sample, No. Depth, ft. As Rec. Minimum Saturated mg/kg mg/kg % (Redox) Qualitative % Soil Visual Description 

Dry Wt. Dry Wt. Dry Wt. mv by Lead At Test 

ASTM G57 Cal 643 ASTM G57 Cal 422-mod. Cal 417-mod. Cal 417-mod. ASTM G51 SM 2580B Acetate Paper ASTM D2216 

o Sample Location or ID C (Ohm-cm) 

Sulfate-(water soluble) 

KB-1 1C 2.5 - - 2,328

June 2, 2008 

Cooper Testing Laboratory 

937 Commercial Street 

Palo Alto, CA 94303 

Attention: Mr. Peter Jacke 

Subject: Site Corrosivity Evaluation 

TS Fedex Security Building 

Project No. 94240/1 

Dear Mr. Jacke, 

In accordance with your request, we have reviewed the laboratory soils data for the above 

referenced project site. Our evaluation of these results and our corresponding 

recommendations for corrosion control for reinforced concrete in contact with these soils 

and buried site utilities are presented herein for your consideration. 

Soil Chemical Analysis 

SOIL TESTING & ANALYSIS 

One (1) soil sample from the project site was chemically analyzed for corrosivity by your 

laboratory. The sample was analyzed for chloride and sulfate concentration, pH, saturated 

resistivity REDOX potential and moisture percentage in accordance with Caltrans 

Standards. The test results are presented in Cooper Testing Laboratories Corrosivity Test 

Summary dated 5/30/2008. A summary of the results of the chemical analysis is as follows: 

Soil Laboratory Analysis 

Chemical Analysis Range of Results Corrosion Classification* 

Chlorides

Site Corrosivity Evaluation 

TS Fedex Security Building 

Project No. 94240/1 

Reinforced Concrete 

JDH Corrosion Consultants, Inc. 2 

DISCUSSION 

Due to moderately high levels of water-soluble sulfates found in these soils, a good 

quality dense concrete should be used for the concrete slabs at this location. Type II 

concrete mix with a maximum water-to-cement ratio of 0.50 should be utilized at this 

site. Adhering to the minimum depth of cover for the reinforcing steel in the foundations 

as specified in the Uniform Building Code is recommended for the subject structures. 

Underground Metallic Pipelines 

The soils at the project site are considered to be “moderately corrosive” to ductile/cast iron, 

steel and dielectric coated steel based on the resistivity measurements. Therefore, 

corrosion control in the form of coatings and cathodic protection is warranted for all buried 

metallic pressure pipelines, such as domestic and fire water pipelines, planned for use at 

this site depending upon the critical nature of the structures. All underground pipelines 

should also be electrically isolated from above grade structures, reinforced concrete 

structures and copper lines in order to avoid potential galvanic corrosion problems. 

The extremely low value of REDOX potential indicates anaerobic conditions, suitable for 

sulfate reducing bacteria and is considered to be corrosive to ductile/cast iron, steel and 

dielectric coated steel. 

LIMITATIONS 

The conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on the 

information and assumptions referenced herein. All services provided herein were 

performed by persons who are experienced and skilled in providing these types of 

services and in accordance with the standards of workmanship in this profession. 

No other warrantees or guarantees, expressed or implied, are provided. 

We thank you for the opportunity to be of service to Cooper Testing Laboratory on this 

project and trust that you find the enclosed information satisfactory. 

If you have any questions or if we can be of any additional assistance, please feel free to 

contact us at (925) 927-6630. 

Respectfully submitted, 

Mohammed Ali 

Mohammed Ali, P.E. 

JDH Corrosion Consultants, Inc. 

Principal 

cc: File 28071

Corrosivity Test Summary 

CTL # 336-097 Date: 5/30/2008 Tested By: PJ Checked: PJ 

Client: 

Remarks: 

Kleinfelder Project: TS Fedex Security Bldg. Proj. No: 94240/1 

Resistivity @ 15.5 Chloride pH ORP Sulfide Moisture 

Boring Sample, No. Depth, ft. As Rec. Minimum Saturated mg/kg mg/kg % (Redox) Qualitative % Soil Visual Description 

Dry Wt. Dry Wt. Dry Wt. mv by Lead At Test 

ASTM G57 Cal 643 ASTM G57 Cal 422-mod. Cal 417-mod. Cal 417-mod. ASTM G51 SM 2580B Acetate Paper ASTM D2216 

o Sample Location or ID C (Ohm-cm) 

Sulfate-(water soluble) 

KB-1 1C 2.5 - - 2,328

APPENDIX C2

BIDDING UNDER THE PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT 

The Port of Oakland entered into an historic Project Labor Agreement (MAPLA) in 1999. The agreement covers a 

significant capital improvement program that will expand facilities both at the airport and the maritime port. Bidders 

on MAPLA projects should attend to the following items: 

• California Prevailing Wages 

All workers covered by the Project Labor Agreement will be paid prevailing wages as determined by the 

California State Davis-Bacon Wage Determination. If a wage increase negotiated in a local collective 

bargaining agreement becomes the prevailing wage, the Contractor will pay that rate retroactive to the 

effective date of the locally negotiated wage increase. 

• Letter of Assent 

All general contractors and all sub-contractors, regardless of tier, must sign a letter of assent to the PLA. 

This letter binds the contractor to the terms of the PLA for the awarded project only. It does not bind any 

contractor to a union agreement. 

• Local Workforce Hiring Goals 

Residents of the Local impact Area (Oakland, Alameda, San Leandro, and Emeryville) should work 50% of 

all craft hours. Apprentices must work 20% of the project hours. These apprentices should all be Local 

Impact Area residents. Contractors can get credit for using Local Impact Area Apprentices on non-Project 

Labor Agreement Projects. Apprentice hours on the project should still total 20% of the craft hours worked, 

but the contractor can use Local Impact Area apprentices elsewhere while using non-local apprentices on Port 

jobs and still get credit. 

Contractors should contact Davillier-Sloan, Inc. to set up a local resident utilization plan for their workforce 

• Social Justice Trust Fund 

All prime and subcontractors must make a contribution of 15 cents per craft hour worked on a monthly basis 

to the Social Justice Trust Fund as provided for in the bid specifications. The prime contractor is responsible 

for submitting a copy of the transmittal as proof of payment by the 20 th 

of the following month. This money 

will go to programs that assist Local Impact Area residents to eliminate employment barriers and gain entry 

into the construction trades 

• Using Non-Union Workers 

A non-signatory contractor may use up to ten of its own “core” employees provided that the first 

worker hired comes from the union, second worker is “core”, third worker from the union, fourth 

worker is “core”, and so forth. 

All “core” employees are required to pay union initiation fees and representation fees. 

• Fringe Benefit Payments 

Non-signatory contractors should note that you are required to make payment on behalf of your 

“core” employees into the established labor-management vacation, pension or other form of 

deferred compensation plan, apprenticeship, and health benefit funds for each hour worked. 

1

• Trucking 

Any trucking at and on the site of construction is covered by the PLA and Owner-Operators are 

also covered. An Owner-Operator may elect to have the employing contractor pay into the labormanagement 

fringe benefit funds or the Owner-Operator may elect to take those payments as 

wages. Certified payrolls are required. 

• Soils and Material Testing / Inspection 

Such work performed at the site of construction and is a classification on which a California 

prevailing wage determination has been published is covered by the PLA. 

• Substance Abuse Testing 

Include in your bid the price of Substance abuse testing. MAPLA has a uniform substance abuse policy. All 

craft employees, including your core employees, must be tested for controlled substances before they start 

work at the job site. Testing is done through DISA, Inc. Contact Loreili Babilon: 707-643-2032. 

• Pre-Job Conference 

The successful general contractor and all subcontractors shall attend a pre-job conference with the 

County of Alameda Building & Construction Trades Council prior to start of construction. 

• PLA Administrators 

Ed Manning Gene Johnson 

E.F.Manning Consultants Inc. Davillier-Sloan, Inc. 

1100 Airport Dr., Floor 2 1630 12 th 

St. 

Oakland, CA 94621 Oakland, CA 94607 

510-466-7820 (o) 510-835-7603 (o) 

510-466-7822 FAX 510-835-7613 FAX 

efmanningconsult@gmail.com gene@davilliersloan.com 

2

APPENDIX C3

PORT OF OAKLAND MARITIME AND AVIATION 

PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT 

ENTERED INTO BETWEEN 

DAVILLIER-SLOAN, INC./PARSONS CONSTRUCTORS, INC. 

AND THE 

BUILDING & CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL 

OF ALAMEDA COUNTY, AFL-CIO

INDEX 

PREAMBLE 3 

ARTICLE I PURPOSE 5 

ARTICLE II SCOPE OF AGREEMENT 6 

ARTICLE III PORT OF OAKLAND/COMMUNITY 

SOCIAL JUSTICE COMMITTEE 10 

ARTICLE IV LABOR/MANAGEMENT COOPERATION 

JOINT ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE 12 

ARTICLE V UNION RECOGNITION AND EMPLOYMENT 14 

ARTICLE VI UNION REPRESENTATION AND STEWARDS 18 

ARTICLE VII MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS 19 

ARTICLE VIII WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS 19 

ARTICLE IX DISPUTES AND GRIEVANCES 23 

ARTICLE X JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES 25 

ARTICLE XI WAGES AND BENEFITS 26 

ARTICLE XII HOURS OF WORK, OVERTIME, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS 27 

ARTICLE XIII APPRENTICES 30 

ARTICLE XIV SAFETY, PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY, 

JOINT LABOR/MANAGEMENT SAFETY COMMITTEE 31 

ARTICLE XV NON-DISCRIMINATION 33 

ARTICLE XVI TRAVEL AND SUBSISTENCE 34 

ARTICLE XVII WORKING CONDITIONS 35 

ARTICLE XVIII SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY 35 

ARTICLE XIX DURATION OF THE AGREEMENT 36 

PORT OF OAKLAND MARITIME AND AVIATION PLA 

1

SIDE LETTERS AND OTHER AGREEMENTS 

Appendix A. Agreed to Letter of Assent 

Appendix B. Letter of Understanding to Sloan from Luboviski regarding Union 

Initiation Fees dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix C. Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from Sloan regarding 

Superintendents' Contributions dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix D. Letter of Understanding to Doser from Sloan regarding Inspectors dated 

February 28, 2000 

Appendix E. Letter of Understanding to Word from Sloan regarding Prefabrication 

dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix F. Letter of Understanding to Blevins from Sloan regarding Prefabrication 

dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix G. Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from Sloan regarding Small 

Business Utilization Program dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix H. Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from Sloan regarding Workers’ 

Compensation dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix I. Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from Sloan regarding Tenant 

Improvements dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix J. Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from Sloan regarding Hiring Hall 

Procedures dated February 28, 2000 

Appendix K. Draft Letter of Understanding to Luboviski from the Port of Oakland 

regarding Fringe Benefit Contribution Delinquencies 

Appendix L. Uniform Substance Abuse Prevention Policy 

Appendix M. Plan for the Settlement of Jurisdictional Disputes in the Construction 

Industry Including Procedural Rules and Regulations (on file with 

Davillier-Sloan, Inc./Parson Constructors, Inc.) 

Schedule A Agreements (on file with Davillier-Sloan, Inc./Parson Constructors, Inc.) 


2

PORT OF OAKLAND MARITIME AND AVIATION 

PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT 

Davillier-Sloan Inc./Parsons Constructors, Inc., their successors or assigns (hereinafter 

"DSI/PCI" or "Project Contractor"), for and on behalf of themselves and the Port of Oakland, 

enter into this Project Labor Agreement (hereinafter the "Agreement") with the Building and 

Construction Trades Department, AFL-CIO (hereinafter the "Department"), its affiliated National 

and International Unions that become signatory to the Agreement, the Building and Construction 

Trades Council of Alameda County and the Local Unions or Councils that become signatory to 

the Agreement (collectively referred to as "Unions") The Agreement, once adopted by the Parties 

and the Board of Port Commissioners of the Port of Oakland, will cover all construction, 

demolition, modification, alteration and repair work covered by the Scope of the Agreement that 

is owned and contracted by the Port of Oakland (hereinafter the "Port" or the "Owner"). 

The Port seeks project stability and the economic savings that flow from the provisions of 

the Agreement. And the Port places high priority upon the development of comprehensive 

programs for the recruitment, training and employment of historically disadvantaged residents of 

the Port's Local Impact Area (LIA, defined as the cities of Alameda, Emeryville, Oakland and 

San Leandro), especially from Oakland on the Project. It also seeks to create business 

opportunities on the Project for small and disadvantaged companies and contractors in the LIA 

business community, especially for those located in Oakland. The Port sought terms and 

conditions that advanced those goals and removed obstacles that may have historically limited 

the full employment of such local residents or the access of such businesses to the opportunities 

available on projects of this kind. The Agreement contains provisions to achieve these important 

objectives, and recognizes that when those objectives cannot be met that the Parties will work to 

include workers and businesses from the Port's Local Business Area (LBA, defined as Alameda 

and Contra Costa counties) as a priority. 

For the purposes of the Port’s programs under the Agreement, residency for individuals 

shall mean residency for a period of not less than thirty (30) days prior to the date of 

dispatch/referral at a place not established or subsidized by a Contractor covered by the 

Agreement. Residency for businesses will be established as of the date the Port advertised or 

otherwise offered a contract for bid. 

The parties to the Agreement understand that if the Port finds the Agreement acceptable, 

the Port will include the Agreement in the bid documents, contract specifications and other 

contract documents for work covered under the Agreement. Upon award, the prime contractor 

and its various subcontractors will become parties to the Agreement. For purposes of covering 

such work, the Unions agree that other Contractors may execute the Agreement through 

execution of a Letter of Assent binding them and their subcontractors to the Agreement. And, 

the Agreement will supersede the Port of Oakland Vision 2000 (1999 Facilities) Project Labor 

Agreement for work covered by that agreement that has not been advertised for bid as of the 

effective date of this Agreement. 


3

DSI/PCI shall monitor and administer the compliance with the Agreement by all 

Contractors. 

This Agreement uses the term "Contractor" and specifies the rights and obligations of 

each such Contractor as if already parties to this Agreement. The term "Contractor" (or 

"Contractors") includes all construction contractors and subcontractors of whatever tier that are 

engaged in work on the construction site within the scope of this Agreement, including DSI/PCI 

when it performs construction work within the scope of this Agreement. 

The Unions, DSI/PCI and all Contractors agree to abide by the terms and conditions 

contained in the Agreement, including the listed Appendices and the referenced Schedule A 

agreements. Taken together they constitute the complete understanding of the Parties. No 

Contractor is required to sign any other agreement with a signatory union as a condition of 

performing work within the scope of the Agreement. No practice, understanding or agreement 

between a Contractor and a Union party which is not specifically set forth in this Agreement will 

be binding on any other party unless endorsed in writing by DSI/PCI. 

The Unions agree that any Contractor successfully bidding for covered work has a right to 

and must become a signatory to the Agreement without regard to whether that successful bidder 

performs work at other sites on either a union or a non-union basis, and without regard to 

whether employees of such bidder are or are not members of a union. A signatory Contractor 

will only be subject to the Agreement for work defined in this Agreement. The Unions hereby 

pledge to work cooperatively with any Contractor awarded work covered by this Agreement, 

despite any other dispute the Unions may have with that Contractor over, for example, trust or 

benefit payments that arose on non-covered work. In consideration of the Unions' waiver of their 

right to withhold labor from a Contractor delinquent in the payment of Trust Fund contributions, 

should a Contractor performing work on this Project be delinquent in the payment of Trust Fund 

contributions required under this Agreement with respect to employees represented by the Union, 

the Union may request, pursuant to the conditions and prerequisites contained in the attached 

letter of understanding between the Port and the Unions, that the Owner issue joint checks 

payable to the Contractor and the appropriate employee benefit Trust Fund(s) until such 

delinquencies are satisfied. It is agreed, however, with respect to contractors delinquent in trust 

or benefit contribution payments, that nothing in this Agreement shall affect normal contract 

remedies available under the local collective bargaining agreements against general contractors 

or upper-tier subcontractors signatory to those agreements for recovery of subcontractor 

delinquencies. 

The Unions recognize that the Port, at its sole discretion, has the right to contract for 

work through its Non-Discrimination and Small Local Business Utilization Program as set out in 

the letter of understanding re: the small business utilization program attached hereto. The Unions 

pledge to work cooperatively with the Contractors awarded work under that program in order to 

aid the Port in its effort to increase capacity among historically disadvantaged businesses within 

its Local Impact Area. 


4

ARTICLE I 

PURPOSE 

The Port of Oakland’s Maritime Division Capital Improvement Program, including its 

urgent Vision 2000 Project, is a multi-year program, currently estimated at in excess of 

$640,000,000. The timely and successful completion of the Vision 2000 Project, and 

complementary elements of its total Maritime Capital Improvement Program is critical to the 

Port. Otherwise, the Port cannot meet the shipping requirements of its shipping company 

tenants, the Oakland and San Francisco Bay Area community, the region's industries and 

businesses and the Nation's international commerce. The Vision 2000 Project Maritime program 

will significantly expand the capacity of the Port's maritime facilities through the development of 

new berths and yards and the construction of a highly efficient Joint Intermodal Terminal for 

increasing the efficiency of ship-to-rail transfer of international container traffic. This physical 

expansion will more than double the size of the Port's maritime facilities and will require a highly 

integrated, efficient, cost-effective and time-sensitive construction endeavor to succeed on the 

critical time path that has been identified for the needs of the industry and the Nation's growing 

international commerce. Timely and efficient execution of the Project is necessary to avoid 

severe disruption to the Port's maritime operations. In addition, bringing the other Maritime 

modernization and realignment programs on line promptly is a highly complementary element of 

the Port’s strategy to provide a state of the art intermodal container facility to its maritime tenants 

and partners. Failure to execute this overall program in an efficient and timely manner will cause 

severe disruption to the Port's operations would dramatically reduce the competitiveness of the 

Port's maritime operations. The consequences of such an outcome would send profound adverse 

reverberations throughout the local, state and national economies and be very detrimental to the 

Port. 

The Aviation Development Program (ADP) is a multi-year program, currently estimated 

at in excess of $665,000,000, to expand the Port’s international airport and general aviation 

facilities. The timely and successful completion of the ADP is critical to the Port. Otherwise, it 

cannot meet the operational requirements of its tenants or furnish the necessary capacity for air 

service to the Oakland and San Francisco Bay Area community and the region’s airlines, 

industries, businesses and the general aviation community. Completion of the ADP will enhance 

regional aviation efficiency and public safety, reduce traffic congestion and improve 

environmental quality of life for the region. The ADP will expand the capacity of the Port’s 

aviation facilities through the development of new terminal, runway, apron, parking, roadway 

and other facilities. The physical expansion will significantly increase the capacity of the airport 

and will require a highly integrated, efficient, cost effective and time sensitive construction 

endeavor to succeed on the critical time path that has been identified for the needs of the industry 

and to minimize disruption to on-going operations. Timely and efficient execution of the ADP is 

necessary to avoid severe disruption to the Port’s aviation operations and reductions in their 

competitiveness, both of which would be very detrimental to the Port. 

For purposes of this Agreement, these elements of work, and major maintenance work of 

the Port’s Maritime and Aviation Divisions, will be collectively known as the Project. 


5

In order to accomplish the Project successfully, the Port must ensure that the Contractors 

that execute the construction projects have available to them a highly trained, skilled and 

effective workforce and that the work performed will not be subject to major disruption. In 

addition, the Port seeks to ensure that the construction is undertaken with the greatest efficiencies 

in integrating the work of various crafts and trades. And it seeks to establish a mechanism that 

will quickly resolve, without disruption in work, disputes between Contractors and Unions or 

among Unions. 

In recognition of the special needs of the Project and to maintain a spirit of harmony, 

labor-management peace and stability during the term of the Agreement, the Parties agree to 

establish effective and binding methods for the settlement of all labor misunderstandings, 

disputes or grievances that may arise. And in recognition of such methods and procedures, the 

Unions agree not to engage in any strikes, picketing, slow downs or interruption of work and the 

Contractor agrees not to engage in any lockout. And the parties agree to cooperate throughout the 

term of the Agreement to develop methods to reduce Port construction and project administrative 

costs. 

The Parties commit to provide open access to bidding opportunities for all contractors 

and to assure that an adequate supply of craft workers possessing the requisite skills and training 

to perform the construction in order to provide the Port a project of the highest quality. 

ARTICLE II 

SCOPE OF AGREEMENT 

This Agreement, hereinafter designated as “The Project Labor Agreement” or “Agreement” shall 

apply to all on-site construction, modifications, alterations, repair and demolition performed by 

those contractors of whatever tier that are awarded contracts by the Port for such work, which 

may include DSI/PCI, as is described in Section 1 (a) of this Article. 

It is understood by the parties that the Owner may at any time and at its sole discretion 

determine to build segments of the Project under this Agreement not currently proposed, or to 

modify or not to build any one or more of the particular segments proposed to be covered. If 

segments are added to the Project scope, they would be automatically covered by this Agreement. 

Section 1. (a) The projects covered by the Agreement include the following elements 

contained in the current “PORT OF OAKLAND 5-YEAR CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT 

PROGRAM” for the Aviation and Maritime Divisions, including major maintenance: 

Maritime Division Program: 

Vision 2000 (1999 Facilities) Project Labor Agreement: For those projects set out in 

the Vision 2000 (1999) Facilities Project Labor Agreement that have not yet been 

advertised for bid prior to the effective date of this Agreement, those projects shall 

be included in coverage of this Agreement. 


6

Vision 2000 additional facilities: 

Construction of channel for Berths 57/58 Wharf, 

fill, demolition, gates and yard; construction of Berth 59 channel, bank, berth and 

yard behind “Berth 59”; expansion of Knight RR yard; wharf and channel 

modifications, embankment; related work including mitigation for historic 

structures, traffic and water quality associated with Vision 2000 projects; 

construction of new road; Joint Intermodal Terminal Phase 2; and construction of 

Middle Harbor Park. 

Other Maritime Division expansion and modernization: 

Those projects, known or 

currently unknown, for which the estimated cost exceeds $50,000 that appear on the 

Capital Improvement Program list for the Maritime Division and have been 

advertised for bid, invitations to bid have been made, or solicitation for proposals 

from contractors or sub-contractors have been issued on or before December 31, 

2004. 

The Aviation Development Program: 

Terminal expansion: 

Expansion of both existing air passenger terminals by up to 

750,000 gross square feet. Terminal expansion will provide 12 additional aircraft 

parking and loading gates, as well as new concourse, circulation and waiting areas, 

and new passenger service facilities (e.g., ticketing, baggage claim). 

Landside Access: 

Construction of the Airport Roadway Project; a six-story parking 

garage; realignment, widening, and double-decking of the Airport Drive terminal 

loop; and relocation of existing parking and rental car facilities displaced by 

construction of other project components, as well as construction of additional 

permanent parking and rental car facilities. 

Airline and Airport Support: Construction of a building of up to 15,000 gross square 

feet to expand existing MOIA in-flight provisioning capabilities; consolidation of 

existing ground vehicle equipment service facilities (fueling, service, and storage) at 

a single site; relocation of the existing MOIA jet-fuel dispensing facility; and 

expansion of the existing United Airlines maintenance base. 

Other Aviation Division expansion and modernization: 

Those projects, known or 

currently unknown, for which the estimated cost exceeds $50,000 that appear on the 

Capital Improvement Program list for the Aviation Division and that have been 

advertised for bid, invitations to bid have been made, or solicitation for proposals 

from contractors or sub-contractors have been issued on or before December 31, 

2004. 

(b) Port Work (Notice): Immediately upon determining which company is the 

apparent low bidder for any work on the Project, and not later than 48 hours after 

such determination, the Port shall notify the Building Trades Council of the 


7

identity of the apparent low bidder and the next two apparent low bidders for all 

such work. The Port shall notify the Building Trades council no later than 48 hours 

after awarding contracts for work to be performed on the Project of the identity of 

the work in question and the Contractor to whom such contract was awarded. The 

Port shall notify the Building Trades Council no later than 24 hours after issuing a 

notice to proceed to any contractor that such notice has issued and shall provide the 

Buildings Trades Council with a copy of such notice to proceed. 

(c) Tenant Work (Notice): The Port shall notify the Building Trades Council of the 

details of all construction work to be performed by tenants on leased property of the 

Port within 48 hours of the tenant’s notification to the Port of the contemplated 

work, unless the work is to be performed in less than 48 hours, in which case the 

Port shall immediately notify the Building Trades council that the tenant is 

commencing work. 

Section 2. Items specifically excluded from the scope of this Agreement include the following: 

(a) Work of non-manual employees, including but not limited to, superintendents, 

supervisors above the level of General Foreman, staff engineers, quality control and 

quality assurance personnel, timekeepers, mail carriers, clerks, office workers, 

including messengers, safety personnel, emergency medical and first aid 

technicians, and other professional, engineering, administrative, community 

relations or public affairs, environmental compliance, supervisory and management 

employees. 

(b) Equipment and machinery owned or controlled and operated by the Port or 

railroad, shipping lines, airlines, concessionaires or stevedoring companies, except 

where such equipment is being operated to perform work on the Project and covered 

by this Agreement. 

(c) All employees of design teams or any other consultant of the Port for, 

architectural/engineering design services and other professional services not 

expressly covered by the Agreement. 

(d) Any work performed on or near or leading to or onto the site of work covered by 

this Agreement and undertaken by state, county, city or other governmental bodies, 

or their contractors; or by public utilities or their contractors; and/or by the Owner 

(for work which is not part of the Scope of this Agreement as defined in Section 

1(a) of this Article). 

(e) Non-construction support services contracted by the Owner or DSI/PCI in 

connection with this Project . 

(f) All work by employees of the Port or by railroad or shipping lines, airlines, 

concessionaires or stevedoring companies doing business at the Port. 


8

(g) Construction work ancillary to the Project but contracted by others. When 

DSI/PCI is informed of such construction work, it will notify the Building Trades 

Council as soon as possible thereafter, but not later than twenty-four (24) hours 

prior to the commencement of such work. 

Section 3. (a) The Owner, DSI/PCI, and/or Contractors, as appropriate, have the absolute right 

to award contracts or subcontracts on this Project notwithstanding the existence or 

non-existence of any collective bargaining agreements between the prospective 

Contractor and any Union party, and provided that such Contractor is willing, ready 

and able to comply with this Project Labor Agreement and shall execute a Letter of 

Assent (in the form attached as Appendix A), should such Contractor be awarded 

work covered by this Agreement. 

(b) It is agreed that all subcontractors of a Contractor, of whatever tier, who have 

been awarded contracts for work covered by this Agreement on or after the effective 

date of this Agreement shall be required to accept and to be bound by the terms and 

conditions of this Project Labor Agreement, and shall evidence their acceptance by 

the execution of a Letter of Assent provided to the Contractor by DSI/PCI, prior to 

the commencement of work. A copy of the Letter of Assent executed by the 

Contractor shall be immediately transmitted to the Union(s) prior to the dispatch of 

employees to the job site. 

Section 4. (a) The provisions of this Project Labor Agreement (including the Schedule As, 

which are the local Collective Bargaining Agreements between bona fide contractor 

groups or representatives and the signatory Unions) shall apply to the work covered 

by this Agreement, notwithstanding the provisions of any other local, area and/or 

National Agreements which may conflict with or differ from the terms of this 

Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Elevator Constructors' National 

Agreement shall be applied to Qualifying Work falling within the jurisdiction of the 

Elevator Constructors, except that Articles VIII, IX and X of this Agreement shall 

prevail and be applied to such work. DSI/PCI and each local union shall agree upon 

the local collective bargaining agreement to be designated as the applicable 

Schedule A for work covered by this Agreement. Where a subject covered by the 

provisions of this Agreement is also covered by a Schedule A, the provisions of this 

Agreement shall prevail. Where a subject is covered by the provisions of a Schedule 

A and is not covered by this Agreement, the provisions of the Schedule A shall 

prevail. 

(b) Any dispute as to the applicable source between this Agreement and any 

Schedule A for determining the wages, hours and working conditions of employees 

on the Project shall be resolved by Gerald McKay, under the procedures established 

in Article IX. It is understood that this Agreement, together with the referenced 

Schedule As, constitutes a self-contained, stand-alone agreement and that, by virtue 

of having become bound to this Project Labor Agreement, the Contractor will not be 


9

obligated to sign any other local, area or national agreement as a condition of 

performing work within the scope of this Agreement. 

Section 5. This Agreement shall only be binding upon the signatory parties hereto and shall not 

apply to the parents, affiliates, subsidiaries, or other ventures of any such party. 

Nothing in this Section shall be construed to limit or prevent the Unions or fringe 

benefit trust funds from asserting or enforcing legal rights to collect delinquent 

contributions from Contractors signatory to this Agreement or their related entities. 

Section 6. This Agreement shall be limited to the on-site construction work within the scope of 

this Agreement, as set forth in Section 1 of this Article, for which bids have been 

advertised, invitations to bid have been made, or solicitations for proposals from 

contractors or subcontractors have been issued on and after the effective date of this 

Agreement, including, specifically, site preparation and related demolition and 

deconstruction work. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to prohibit, 

restrict, or interfere with the performance of any other operation, work or function 

awarded to any contractor before the effective date of this Agreement or which may 

be performed by the Owner for its own account on the property or in and around the 

construction site. 

Section 7. It is understood that the liability of the Contractor and the liability of the separate 

Unions under this Agreement shall be several and not joint. The Unions agree that 

this Agreement does not have the effect of creating any joint employment status 

between or among the Owner or DSI/PCI and/or any Contractor, except in a case 

when DSI/PCI terminates or directs the termination of the employee of a Contractor. 

Section 8. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be construed to prohibit or restrict 

the Port or its employees from performing work not covered by this Agreement on 

or around the construction site. As areas of covered work are accepted by the 

Owner, the Agreement shall have no further force or effect on such items or areas 

except where the Contractor is directed by the Owner to engage in repairs or punch 

list modifications. 

Section 9. It is understood that the Owner, at its sole option, may terminate, delay or suspend 

any and all portions of the covered work at any time. 

ARTICLE III 

SOCIAL JUSTICE COMMITTEE 

The Parties have agreed to various provisions of the Agreement to achieve the inclusion 

of historically disadvantaged businesses and individuals in the contracting and employment 

opportunities created by the covered work. In order to implement and monitor the progress of 

these social justice provisions, the Port and the Unions, in recognition of their mutual 

commitment to and the partnership they have established to achieve those goals, shall form a 

Social Justice Committee. The Social Justice Committee will serve as the central forum for 


10

epresentatives of all interested or affected parties to exchange information and ideas and to 

advise the Port staff and DSI/PCI concerning the operation and results of the Port Social Justice 

Program and the ongoing role of this Project Labor Agreement as an integral component of the 

Port's program. As part of these responsibilities, the Committee will assess the obstacles to 

success of achieving inclusion of disadvantaged workers in the construction opportunities and 

shall make recommendations for a program to overcome some of those obstacles. 

Section 1. Membership and organization 

(a) The Port shall appoint representatives of all interested segments of the 

community to a Social Justice Committee, which will include local, minority and 

female business organizations, community-based organizations, the Unions 

signatory hereto, DSI/PCI and Contractors participating under this Agreement. The 

Port shall seek the advice of the Social Justice Committee in considering the 

appointment of subsequent members. 

(b) The Committee will establish its rules of procedure. 

(c) DSI/PCI, or some other person or entity selected by the Port will chair the 

Committee. 

Section 2. Meetings 

(a) The Committee will meet monthly or, more frequently at the call of the Chair. 

(b) DSI/PCI will establish agenda topics with input from the Committee and send 

notices of meetings with the agenda in advance of the meetings. 

(c) The meetings will receive reports and consider work progress and practices, 

disadvantaged business utilization, pre-apprentice recruitment, training and referral, 

apprentice development and utilization, and other issues of concern to the 

Committee. 

(d) DSI/PCI and the Contractors shall report on monthly progress on these issues 

and provide ongoing workforce projections for their work. 

Section 3. Relation to the Social Justice Subcommittee 

(a) The Committee has the right to refer to the Social Justice Subcommittee of the 

Joint Administrative Committee concerns about a Party's compliance with the 

Agreement's provisions relating to the utilization of LIA residents and businesses on 

the Project. 

Section 4. Funding 

(b) The Committee shall make recommendations to the Social Justice 

Subcommittee established in Article IV on elements of a Social Justice 

Program. 


11

(a) Reasonable costs of the Social Justice Program shall be borne in partnership 

between the Port and industry (labor/management). 

(b) Industry shall pay its share from existing industry contract administration or 

similar trust funds as referenced in Article XI, Section 3. 

(c) Any expenditure in behalf of the Social Justice Program from funds received 

for those purposes under this Agreement shall be made only upon a vote of the 

Social Justice Subcommittee, with the concurrence of the Joint Administrative 

Committee, both of which are established in Article IV of this Agreement. 

Section 5. Actions by the Committee 

Any action taken by the Committee will not be deemed official until it has been 

ratified by the Social Justice Subcommittee. 

ARTICLE IV 

LABOR/MANAGEMENT COOPERATION 

JOINT ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE 

Section 1. The parties to this Agreement recognize the necessity for cooperation and 

communication between Labor and Management, the elimination of disputes and 

misunderstandings between the parties. To this end, a representative of DSI/PCI 

will meet monthly with the representatives of the signatory Building Trades Unions 

to promote harmonious and stable labor/management relations on this Project, and 

to insure effective and constructive communications between the labor and 

management parties. The date and time of this meeting will be determined by the 

parties and will be open to all representatives of Contractors signatory to this 

agreement. The meetings will be held at the offices of the Alameda County 

Building & Construction Trades Council. 

At this meeting, the DSI/PCI representative will give a report on the safety and 

progress of on-going contracts and any outstanding issues pertaining to this Project, 

and will entertain questions and discuss labor relations matters of mutual interest 

affecting the work and administration of the Agreement. 

Section 2. A Project Labor Agreement Joint Administrative Committee will be formed 

consisting of five (5) Union representatives selected by the Unions and five (5) 

Contractor representatives selected by DSI/PCI. The Committee shall be jointly 

chaired by a representative of DSI/PCI and a representative of the Unions appointed 

by the Building and Construction Trades Council of Alameda County. The purpose 

of the Committee will be to resolve disputes or misunderstandings and to review, 

and, if it agrees, to concur in the disposition of funds allocated to the Social Justice 

Program. 


12

The Committee shall meet at the call of the Joint Chairs of the monthly 

Labor/Management meeting to discuss any labor/management problems that may 

arise or any other matters consistent with this Agreement. DSI/PCI shall be 

responsible for the scheduling of the meetings, the preparation of the agenda topics 

for the meeting with input from the Unions and Contractors. Notice of the date, 

time and place of the meeting shall be given to the Committee members at least 

three (3) days prior to the meeting. In an emergency, a meeting of the Committee 

may be held within forty-eight (48) hours at the request of any member, Union or 

Contractor. 

The Unions and the Contractors each agree to notify the other party upon discovery 

of any potential violation of this Agreement or practices that might lead to a 

misunderstanding or dispute between the parties. Any agreement or resolution 

reached pursuant to this paragraph shall not supersede, alter, modify, amend, add to 

or subtract from this Agreement. 

All parties signatory to this Agreement acknowledge the importance of attendance 

and active support of the Joint Administrative Committee and agree to participate in 

the meetings as their responsibility that may be required on the Project. 

Section 3 (a) The Parties to this Agreement shall establish a standing Subcommittee on Social 

Justice to this Joint Administrative Committee which shall be comprised of 

representatives of the Unions, DSI/PCI, Contractors and Community-based 

organizations located in the LIA and selected by the Port, in consultation with the 

Social Justice Committee, and mutually accepted by DSI/PCI and the Unions. The 

Subcommittee on Social Justice will be comprised of four (4) representatives of the 

community one of which will be primarily involved in preparatory training for 

prospective construction applicants, three (3) representatives from the Unions, three 

(3) contractor representatives, one (1) representative from DSI/PCI and one (1) 

representative from the Building Trades Council. Except for DSI/PCI and the 

representative for the Building Trades Council, the other members of the 

Subcommittee will serve for two years, except that half of them will serve initial 

terms of only one year, which terms shall be established by lot, and the terms will 

be two Community terms of two years and two of one year each, one Contractor 

term of two years and two of one year each, and one Union term of two years and 

two terms of one year each. The subcommittee's purpose shall be to promote and 

support on an ongoing basis the utilization on this Project, to the maximum extent 

possible, of Oakland-based small and historically disadvantaged businesses and the 

training, placement and retention of LIA residents, especially applicants who reside 

in Oakland and who are members of groups that have been historically 

disadvantaged in construction industry employment opportunities. To that end, it 

will administer, with the concurrence of the Joint Administrative Committee, funds 

received under Article XI, Section 3, to fund a Social Justice Program. 


13

(b) The Subcommittee shall meet on a regularly scheduled monthly basis or at the 

call of DSI/PCI to discuss business, training and job opportunities, disposition of 

funds for the Social Justice Program, and any issues concerning alleged noncompliance 

with the Agreement’s “social justice provisions” referred to it by the 

Social Justice Committee. DSI/PCI shall chair and be responsible for the scheduling 

of the meetings and the preparation of the agenda topics with input from the other 

Subcommittee members. Timely notice of the location and time of the meetings 

shall be given to all Subcommittee members, and the meetings shall be open to 

attendance by Social Justice Committee members, except that when the 

Subcommittee meets to consider matters involving an individual or a contractor that 

may involve personal or proprietary information, such meetings will be closed. 

ARTICLE V 

UNION RECOGNITION AND EMPLOYMENT 

Section 1. The Contractor recognizes the Unions as the sole and exclusive bargaining 

representatives of all craft employees within their respective jurisdictions working 

on the Project within the scope of this Agreement. 

Section 2. The Contractor has the right to determine the competency of all employees, the 

number of employees required, subject to the lawful manning provisions of 

applicable local collective bargaining agreements (provided that such provisions 

will not be recognized if they unduly restrict the productivity or efficiency of the 

work and the full utilization of the workforce), and shall have the sole responsibility 

for selecting employees to be laid off, consistent with Article VI, Section 3 below. 

Section 3. (a) For Local Unions now having a job referral system as contained in Schedule A, 

the Contractor agrees to comply with such system and it shall be used exclusively 

by such Contractor, except as it may be modified by this Article. Such job referral 

system will be operated in a non-discriminatory manner and in full compliance with 

federal, state, and local laws and regulations which require equal employment 

opportunities and non-discrimination, and referrals shall not be affected by 

obligations of union membership or the lack thereof, except that nothing in this 

section shall preclude the lawful exercise of rights under the union security clause 

as to employees delinquent in their proper dues payments. All of the foregoing 

hiring procedures, including related practices affecting apprenticeship and training, 

will be operated so as to facilitate the ability of the contractors to meet any and all 

equal employment opportunity/affirmative action obligations, and to permit and 

facilitate compliance with the Port's Social Justice Program. The Contractor may 

reject any referral for any lawful reason, provided the Contractor complies with 

Article XII, Section 6(a). 

(b) To the extent permitted by law, the Unions will give credit for bona fide, 

provable past experience to applicants, including work for non-union contractors 

who become signatory to the PLA. The experience and practical knowledge of 


14

applicants will be reviewed and tested by the applicable Joint Apprenticeship 

Training Committee. Applicants will be placed at the appropriate stage of 

apprenticeship or at the journey level, as the case may be. Final decisions will be the 

responsibility of the applicable Joint Apprenticeship Training Committee, subject to 

final review by the California Division of Apprenticeship Standards. 

(c) From time to time or as requested, the appropriate Joint Apprenticeship 

Coordinator(s) will make progress reports on the number and disposition of 

applicants to the Social Justice Committee. 

(d) The Port and the unions agree to establish one or more centers to facilitate the 

entry into and retention of Local Impact Area residents interested in careers in the 

building and construction trades. The center(s) will be known as "Community 

Resource Centers". The center(s) will serve as a resource for preliminary 

orientation; assessment of construction aptitude; referral to pre-apprenticeship and 

apprenticeship programs or hiring halls; needs assessment; counseling and 

mentoring; support network for women; employment opportunities and other needs 

as identified for prospective workers. 

(e) The Unions agree to coordinate with the "Community Resource Centers" 

established in subsection (d) above to create and maintain an integrated database of 

hiring list members from the LIA and LBA, and agree that such local union out-ofwork-list 

registrants may use the Community Resource Center(s) as a facility from 

which they may be referred for work covered under this Agreement, consistent with 

normal union hiring hall procedures. Further, the Parties agree, that a Contractor 

may use the Community Resource Center(s) as a resource for identifying LIA/LBA 

local union out-of-work-list registrants who could be made subject to name call for 

the purpose of meeting the LIA/LBA hiring goals. A Contractor will contact the 

applicable Union dispatcher to request a name-call worker, and the Union will agree 

to dispatch such a worker from the Union hall consistent with normal union hiring 

hall procedures. The Community Resource Center(s) will provide the necessary 

confirmation to the Union dispatcher that the worker has received and accepted the 

dispatch and will also provide confirmation to the Contractor. Unions that maintain 

dispatch facilities within the Port LIA, or which dispatch by telephone to the job, 

will not be required to utilize this provision for dispatch of workers. 

Section 4. In the event that Local Unions are unable to fill any request for employees within 

forty-eight (48) hours after such request is made by the Contractor (Saturdays, 

Sundays, and holidays excepted), the Contractor may employ applicants from any 

other available source, including community-based organizations in the LIA. The 

Contractor shall inform the Union and DSI/PCI of the name and social security 

number of any applicants hired from other sources and shall refer the applicant to 

the Local Union for dispatch to the Project. 


15

Section 5. Except as required by law, the Local Unions shall not knowingly refer an employee 

currently employed by any Contractor working under this Agreement to any other 

Contractor. 

Section 6. The parties agree to a goal that residents of the Port's Local Impact Area defined as 

Alameda, Emeryville, Oakland and San Leandro) will perform fifty percent (50%) 

of all hours worked, on a craft-by-craft basis but, that if sufficient and qualified 

workers from the Local Impact Area are not available to achieve this goal, then 

residents of the Port's Local Business Area (defined as Alameda County and Contra 

Costa County) may be utilized. The Contractor shall make good faith efforts to 

reach this goal through the utilization of normal hiring hall procedures listed in the 

Schedule A agreements and the resources of the "Community Resource Centers" set 

out in Section 3 of this Article. Sanctions may be imposed for failure to meet the 

goals or demonstrate "good faith" effort to do so. In cases of alleged 

noncompliance, the issue may be referred by the Social Justice Committee to the 

Social Justice Subcommittee of the Labor/Management Cooperation Joint 

Administrative Committee for resolution. If a majority of the Subcommittee can 

make no resolution, the issue may then be referred by the Social Justice 

Subcommittee to Step 3 of the grievance procedure of Article IX for submission to 

an arbitrator for a final and binding determination. For purposes of resolution of 

any dispute arising under this Section, the Port shall be considered a party-ininterest 

with full right of participation in the arbitration proceeding. 

Section 7. In the event that a signatory Local Union does not have a job referral system as set 

forth in Section 3 above, the Contractor shall give the Union equal opportunity to 

refer applicants. The Contractor shall notify the Union of employees hired from any 

source other than referral by the Union. 

Section 8. The Unions will cooperate with the Port, the City of Oakland and other LIA 

communities, the Contractors and DSI/PCI in conducting outreach activities to 

recruit and refer local resident applicants to apprenticeship programs or on-the-job 

employment positions for which they are qualified or qualifiable. Working with the 

Joint Administrative Committee's Subcommittee on Social Justice, the Unions will, 

after their out-of-work lists are exhausted, use Community-based organizations (to 

be identified by the Port of Oakland/Community Social Justice Committee) or 

State-approved apprenticeship or training programs as a "First Source" for hiring 

qualified or qualifiable local residents, especially applicants from groups that have 

been historically disadvantaged in construction industry employment opportunities, 

before recruiting from other union locals not signatory to this Agreement. 

Section 9. No employee covered by this Agreement can be required to join any Union as a 

condition of being first employed on the Project; provided, however, that an 

employee who is a member of the referring union at the time of the referral shall 

maintain that membership while employed under the Agreement. All employees 

shall, however, comply with the union security provision of the applicable Schedule 


16

A Agreement for the period during which they are performing on-site Project work, 

except as modified by this Agreement including the attached letter of understanding. 

The Contractor agrees to deduct initiation fees, union dues or representation fees 

from the pay of any employee who executes a voluntary authorization for such 

deductions and to remit the dues and fees to the applicable Union or Council. 

Section 10. The Parties recognize the Owner’s commitment to provide opportunities to 

participate on the Project to emerging business enterprises as well as other 

enterprises that may not have previously had a relationship with the Unions 

signatory to this Agreement. To ensure that such enterprises will have an 

opportunity to employ their “core” employees on this Project, the parties agree that 

in those situations where a Contractor not a party to a current collective bargaining 

agreement with the signatory Union having jurisdiction over the affected work is a 

successful bidder, the Contractor may request by name, and the local will honor, 

referral of persons who have applied to the local union for Project work and who 

demonstrate the following qualifications: 

(1) possess any license required by state or federal law for the Project work to 

be performed; 

(2) have worked a total of at least one thousand (1,000) hours in the 

construction craft during the prior three (3) years; 

(3) were on the Contractor’s active payroll for at least sixty (60) out of the onehundred 

eighty (180) calendar days prior to the contract award; and 

(4) have the ability to perform safely the basic functions of the applicable trade. 

The Union will refer to such Contractor one journeyman employee from the hiring 

hall out-of-work list for the affected trade or craft, and will then refer one of such 

Contractor’s “core” employees as a journeyman and shall repeat the process, one 

and one, until such Contractor’s crew requirements are met or until such Contractor 

has hired ten (10) “core” employees, whichever occurs first. Thereafter, all 

additional employees in the affected trade or craft shall be hired exclusively from 

the hiring hall out-of-work list(s). For the duration of the Contractor’s work the 

ratio shall be maintained and when the Contractor’s workforce is reduced, 

employees shall be reduced in the same ratio of core employees to hiring hall 

referrals as was applied in the initial hiring. 

Section 11. Except as provided in Article VI, Section 3, individual seniority will not be 

recognized or applied to employees working on the Project. 

Section 12. The selection of craft foremen and/or general foremen and the number of foremen 

required shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. 


17

ARTICLE VI 

UNION REPRESENTATION AND STEWARDS 

Section 1. Authorized representatives of the Union shall have access to the Project, provided 

that such representatives fully comply with posted visitor, security and safety rules 

and the environmental compliance requirements of the Project. It is understood that 

because of the geographical scope of the Project, and the type of work being 

undertaken on the Project site, visitors may be limited to certain times, or areas, or 

to being accompanied at all times while on the Project site; with this in mind, 

however, the Contractor recognizes the right of access set forth in this Section and 

such access will not be unreasonably withheld from an authorized representative of 

the Union. 

Section 2. (a) Each signatory Local Union shall have the right to designate a working 

journeyman as a steward for each shift, and shall notify the Contractor in writing of 

the identity of the designated steward or stewards prior to the assumption of such 

person's duties as steward. Such designated steward or stewards shall not exercise 

any supervisory functions. There will be no non-working stewards. Stewards will 

receive the regular rate of pay for their respective crafts. 

(b) In addition to his work as an employee, the steward shall have the right to 

receive, but not solicit, complaints or grievances and to discuss and assist in the 

adjustment of the same with the employee's appropriate supervisor. Each steward 

shall be concerned with the employees of the steward's Contractor and if applicable, 

subcontractors, and not with the employees of any other Contractor. The Contractor 

will not discriminate against the steward in the proper performance of his union 

duties. 

(c) When a Contractor has multiple, non-contiguous work locations on the site, the 

Contractor may request, and the Union shall appoint additional working stewards to 

provide independent coverage of one or more such locations. In such cases a 

steward may not service more than one work location without the approval of the 

Contractor and the Union. 

(d) The stewards shall not have the right to determine when overtime shall be 

worked or who shall work overtime. 

Section 3. The Contractor agrees to notify the appropriate Union forty-eight (48) hours prior to 

the layoff of a steward, except in the case of disciplinary discharge for just cause. If 

a steward is protected against such layoff by the provisions of any Schedule A, such 

provisions shall be recognized to the extent that the steward possesses the necessary 

qualifications to perform the work remaining. In any case in which a steward is 

discharged or disciplined for just cause, the appropriate Union shall be notified 

immediately prior to dismissal or discipline by the Contractor. 


18

Section 4. On work where the personnel of the Port may be working in close proximity to the 

construction activities, the Union agrees that the Union representatives, stewards 

and individual workers will not interfere with the Port personnel. 

ARTICLE VII 

MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS 

Section 1. The Contractor retains the full and exclusive authority for the management of its 

operations. Except as expressly limited by other provisions of this Agreement, the 

Contractor retains the right to direct the workforce, including the hiring, promotion, 

transfer, layoff, discipline or discharge for just cause of employees; the selection of 

foremen; the assignment and schedule of work; the promulgation of reasonable 

work rules; and, the requirement of overtime work, the determination of when it 

will be worked and the number and identity of employees engaged in such work. No 

rules, customs, or practices that limit or restrict productivity, efficiency or the 

individual and/or joint working efforts of employees shall be permitted or observed. 

The Contractor may utilize any methods or techniques of construction. 

Section 2. There shall be no limitation or restriction by a signatory Union upon a Contractor’s 

choice of materials, design or manufacture, nor, upon the full use and utilization of 

equipment, machinery, tools, or other labor saving devices. The on-site installation 

or application of all items shall be performed by the craft having jurisdiction over 

such work; provided, however, it is recognized that installation of specialty items 

which may be furnished by the Owner may be performed by employees employed 

under this Agreement who may be directed by other personnel in a supervisory role, 

or, in limited circumstances requiring special knowledge of the particular item(s), 

may be performed by employees of the vendor or other companies where necessary 

to protect a manufacturer’s warranty or where the employees working under this 

Agreement lack the required skills to perform the work. 

Section 3. The use of new technology, equipment, machinery, tools and/or laborsaving devices 

and methods of performing work may be initiated by the Contractor from time-totime 

during the Project. Consistent with law and safe practices, the Union agrees 

that it will not in any way restrict the implementation of such new devices or work 

methods. If there is any disagreement between the Contractor and the Union 

concerning the manner or implementation of such device or method of work, the 

implementation shall proceed as directed by the Contractor, and the Union shall 

have the right to grieve and/or arbitrate the dispute as set forth in Article IX of this 

Agreement. 

ARTICLE VIII 

WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS 

Section 1. There shall be no strikes, sympathy strikes, picketing, work stoppages, slowdowns 

or other disruptive activity for any reason (including disputes relating to the 


19

negotiation or renegotiation of the local collective bargaining agreements which 

serve as the basis for the Schedule As or disputes directed at non-construction 

services companies at the Project site) by the Union(s) or employees at or affecting 

the Project site or against any Contractor covered under this Agreement at this 

Project site and there shall be no lockout by the Contractor. Failure of any Union or 

employee to cross any picket line established by any Union, signatory or nonsignatory 

to the Agreement, or by any other organization or individual at the Project 

construction site is a violation of this Article. 

Section 2. The Contractor may discharge any employee violating Section 1, above, and any 

such employee will not be eligible for rehire under this Agreement for a period of 

up to 120 days. The Union shall take all steps necessary to obtain immediate 

compliance with this Article but shall not be held liable for conduct for which it is 

not responsible. 

Section 3. (a) If the Contractor contends that any Union has violated this Article, Article X, 

Section 4 or Article XIX, Section 3, it will notify in writing the International 

President(s) of the Union(s) involved, advising him of the fact, with copies of such 

notice to the Local Union(s) involved, to the Building Trades Council and to the 

Building and Construction Trades Department, and to DSI/PCI. The International 

President or Presidents will immediately instruct, order and use the best efforts of 

his office to cause the Local Union(s) to cease any violation of this Article. An 

International Union complying with this obligation shall not be liable for 

unauthorized acts of its Local Union. 

(b) If the Union contends that any Contractor has violated this Article, it will notify 

the Contractor and DSI/PCI setting forth the facts which the Union contends violate 

the Agreement, at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to invoking the procedures of 

Section 5. It is agreed by the parties that the term "lockout" for purposes of this 

Agreement does not include discharge, termination or layoff of employees by the 

Contractor, nor does it include the contractor's decision to terminate or suspend 

work on the Project or any portion thereof for any reason, provided the Union is 

given thirty (30) days notice. This provision will not affect the contractor's right to 

suspend or terminate work on any portion of the Project for operational or special 

circumstances. 

Section 4. There shall be no strikes, picketing, work stoppages, slowdowns or other disruptive 

activity affecting the project site during the term of this Agreement. Any Union or 

Local Union which initiates or participates in a work stoppage in violation of this 

Article, or which recognizes or supports the work stoppage of another Union or 

Local Union which is in violation of this Article, agrees as a remedy for said 

violation, to pay liquidated damages in accordance with Section 5(h). 

Section 5. Any party, including the Owner, whom the parties agree is a party in interest for 

purposes of this Article, or DSI/PCI, may institute the following procedure, in lieu 


20

of or in addition to any other contractual procedure or any action at law or equity, 

when a breach of Section 1, above, Section 4 of Article X, or Section 3 of Article 

XIX is alleged: 

(a) A party invoking this procedure shall notify Gerald McKay, Esq., who the 

parties agree shall be the permanent arbitrator under this procedure. In the event that 

the permanent arbitrator is unavailable at any time, he/she shall appoint an alternate. 

Invocation of this procedure and notification of the arbitrator on behalf of 

Contractor parties shall be made by DSI/PCI. Notice to the arbitrator shall be by the 

most expeditious means available, with notices to the party alleged to be in 

violation and to the Council if it is a Union alleged to be in violation. For purposes 

of this Article, written notice may be given by, facsimile, hand delivery or overnight 

mail but will be deemed effective upon receipt. 

(b) Upon receipt of said notice, the arbitrator named above or his/her alternate shall 

sit and hold a hearing within twenty-four (24) hours if it is contended that the 

violation still exists, but not sooner than twenty-four (24) hours after the notice to 

the International President(s) required by Section 3, above. 

(c) The arbitrator shall notify the parties of the place and time chosen for the 

hearing. Said hearing shall be completed in one session, which, with appropriate 

recesses at the arbitrator's discretion, shall not exceed twenty-four (24) hours unless 

otherwise agreed upon by all parties. A failure of any party or parties to attend said 

hearings shall not delay the hearing of evidence or the issuance of any award by the 

arbitrator. 

(d) The sole issue at the hearing shall be whether or not a violation of Section 1, 

above, Section 4 of Article X, or Section 3 of Article XIX, has in fact occurred. The 

arbitrator shall have no authority to consider any matter in justification, explanation 

or mitigation of such violation or, except as expressly provided by Section 5(h) of 

this Article, to award damages, which issue is reserved for court proceedings, if any. 

The award shall be issued in writing within three (3) hours after the close of the 

hearing, and may be issued without an opinion. If any party desires an opinion, one 

shall be issued within fifteen (15) days, but its issuance shall not delay compliance 

with, or enforcement of, the Award. The arbitrator may order cessation of the 

violation of the Article and other appropriate relief, and such Award shall be served 

on all parties by hand or registered mail upon issuance. 

(e) Such award shall be final and binding on all parties and may be enforced by any 

court of competent jurisdiction upon the filing of this Agreement and all other 

relevant documents referred to hereinabove in the following manner. Written notice 

of the filing of such enforcement proceedings shall be given to the other party. In 

the proceeding to obtain a temporary order enforcing the arbitrator's Award as 

issued under Section 5(d) of this Article, all parties waive the right to a hearing and 

agree that such proceedings may be ex parte. Such agreement does not waive any 


21

party's right to participate in a hearing for a final order of enforcement. The court's 

order or orders enforcing the arbitrator's award shall be served on all parties by hand 

or by delivery to their last known address by registered mail. 

(f) Any rights created by statute or law governing arbitration proceedings 

inconsistent with the above procedure or which interfere with compliance hereto are 

hereby waived by the parties to whom they accrue. 

(g) The fees and expenses of the arbitrator shall be equally divided between the 

moving party or parties and the party or parties respondent. 

(h) If the Arbitrator determines that a violation of Section 1, above, Section 4 of 

Article X, or Section 3 of Article XIX, has occurred in accordance with Section 5(d) 

above, the Union(s) shall, within eight (8) hours of receipt of the Award, direct all 

of the employees they represent on the Project to immediately return to work. If the 

trade involved does not return to work by the beginning of the next regularly 

scheduled shift following receipt of the Arbitrator’s Award, and the Union(s) has 

not complied with Section 2 of this Article, then the Union(s) shall be required to 

pay liquidated damages to the Owner in an amount not less than $10,000, or more 

than $25,000, at the discretion of the arbitrator, and will be assessed an additional 

amount of not less than $10,000 and up to $25,000, at the discretion of the 

arbitrator, for each subsequent shift thereafter on which the trade has not returned to 

work. If the Arbitrator determines that a lockout has occurred in violation of 

Section 1, and the Contractor does not return the locked-out employees to work 

within eight (8) hours of the Contractor’s receipt of the Award, then the Contractor 

shall be required to pay liquidated damages to the Owner in an amount not less than 

$10,000, or more than $25,000, at the discretion of the Arbitrator, and will be 

assessed an additional amount of not less than $10,000 and up to $25,000, at the 

discretion of the Arbitrator, for each subsequent shift thereafter on which the 

employees have not been returned to work. The Arbitrator is empowered to award 

back pay to the employees who were locked out. The Arbitrator shall retain 

jurisdiction to determine compliance with this section and Section 2 of this Article. 

Section 6. Procedures contained in Article IX shall not be applicable to any alleged violation 

of this Article, with the single exception that any employee discharged for violation 

of Section 1, above, may resort to the procedures of Article IX to determine whether 

or not he was engaged in that violation and what remedy should be assessed. 

Section 7. DSI/PCI is a party in interest in all proceedings arising under this Article and 

Articles IX and X and shall be sent contemporaneous copies of all notifications 

required under these articles, and, at its option, may initiate or participate as a full 

party in any proceeding initiated under these articles. 


22

ARTICLE IX 

DISPUTES AND GRIEVANCES 

Section 1. (a) This Agreement is intended to provide close cooperation between management 

and labor. DSI/PCI and the Alameda County Building and Construction Trades 

Council, AFL-CIO, shall each assign a representative to this Project for the purpose 

of assisting the Department, the International and Local Unions, together with the 

Contractor, to complete the construction of the Project economically, efficiently, 

continuously and without interruption, delays or work stoppages. 

(b) DSI/PCI, Contractors, Unions, and employees collectively and individually, 

realize the importance to all parties of assuring continuous and uninterrupted 

performance of the work on the Project, and agree to resolve disputes in accordance 

with the arbitration provisions set forth in this Article. 

(c) DSI/PCI shall administer the processing of the grievance, including the 

scheduling and arrangement of facilities for meetings at Step 2 and above, the 

selection of the arbitrator to hear the case and any other administrative matters 

necessary to facilitate the timely disposition of the case. 

Section 2. Any question arising out of and during the term of this Agreement involving its 

interpretation and application (other than trade jurisdictional disputes or alleged 

violations of Article VIII, Section 1, or Article X, Section 4) shall be considered a 

grievance and subject to resolution under the following procedures: 

Step 1. (a) When any employee subject to the provisions of this Agreement feels 

aggrieved by a violation of this Agreement, the employee shall, if intending 

to grieve the Employee's complaint, give notice of the Employee's grievance 

through the Employee's Local Union business representative or job steward 

to the work site representative of the involved Contractor. Such notice, to be 

timely, shall be given within five (5) working days after the occurrence of 

the alleged violation, stating the provision(s) alleged to have been violated. 

The business representative of the Local Union or the job steward and the 

work site representative of the involved Contractor shall meet and endeavor 

to adjust the matter within three (3) working days after timely notice has 

been given. If they fail to resolve the matter within the prescribed period, the 

grieving party may, within forty-eight (48) hours thereafter, pursue Step 2 of 

the grievance procedure provided the grievance is reduced to writing, setting 

forth the relevant information concerning the alleged grievance, including a 

short description thereof, the date on which the grievance occurred, and the 

provision(s) of the Agreement alleged to have been violated. Grievances 

and disputes settled at Step 1 shall be non-precedental, except as to the 

parties directly involved, unless endorsed in writing by DSI/PCI within five 

(5) days after resolution has been reached. 


23

(b) Should the Local Union(s) or DSI/PCI or any other Contractor have a 

dispute with the other party and, if after conferring within ten (10) working 

days after the disputing party knew or should have known of the facts or 

occurrence giving rise to the dispute, a settlement is not reached within three 

(3) working days, the dispute shall be reduced to writing and proceed to Step 

2 as outlined herein for the adjustment of an employee complaint. 

Step 2. The Business Manager of the involved Local Union or the Business 

Manager's designee, together with the International Union representative or 

the International Union representative's designee of that Union, the site 

representative of the involved Contractor, and the labor relations 

representative of DSI/PCI shall meet within seven (7) working days of the 

referral of the dispute to this second step to arrive at a satisfactory settlement 

thereof. If the parties fail to reach an agreement, the dispute may be 

appealed in writing in accordance with the provisions of Step 3 within seven 

(7) calendar days after the initial meeting at Step 2. 

Step 3. (a) If the grievance has been submitted but not resolved under Step 2, either 

party may request in writing within seven (7) calendar days after the initial 

Step 2 meeting, that the grievance be submitted to an arbitrator designated 

from a permanent panel of five (5) arbitrators to this Agreement. 

Designation of the arbitrator from the panel to hear any grievance will, 

consistent with arbitrator availability by rotation among the panel members 

and will be made jointly by DSI/PCI, in consultation with the involved 

Contractor, and the representative of the Alameda County Building Trades 

Council on behalf of the parties. If the panel has not been agreed upon by 

the parties, arbitrator selection shall be made pursuant to the rules of the 

American Arbitration Association, which shall also govern the conduct of 

the arbitration hearing. The decision of the arbitrator shall be final and 

binding on all parties and the fee and expenses of such arbitration shall be 

borne equally by the involved Contractor and the involved Union(s). 

(b) Failure of the grieving party to adhere to the time limits established 

herein shall render the grievance null and void. The time limits established 

herein may be extended by oral or written consent of the parties involved at 

the particular step where the extension is agreed upon. An oral consent shall 

be confirmed in writing by the party to whom it accrues. The arbitrator shall 

have the authority to make decisions only on issues presented and shall not 

have the authority to change, amend, add to or detract from any of the 

provisions of this Agreement. 

Section 3. No adjustment or decision may provide retroactivity exceeding sixty (60) days prior 

to the date of the filing of a written grievance. 


24

Section 4. Any grievance involving a safety issue shall proceed under an expedited arbitration 

procedure and shall not be subject to the step requirements set forth above. 

Section 5. DSI/PCI is a party in interest in all proceedings under this Article, and must be 

notified by the involved Contractor of all actions at Steps 2 and 3 and shall, upon its 

request, be permitted to participate fully in all proceedings at these steps. 

ARTICLE X 

JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES 

Section 1. Work shall be assigned by the Contractor in accordance with the Plan for the 

Settlement of Jurisdictional Disputes in the Construction Industry Including 

Procedural Rules and Regulations (hereinafter the "Plan" or “The Green Book”, a 

copy of which is on file with DSI/PCI), effective June 1, 1984, or any successor 

plan, and will be based upon the appropriate agreements of record, decisions of 

record and previously provided local written agreements between or among the 

Unions. Such assignments will be disclosed by the Contractor at a pre-job 

conference called by the Contractor and held in accordance with industry practice, 

which pre-job conference will include a representative of DSI/PCI. 

Section 2. (a) The parties agree that all jurisdictional disputes over assignment of work will be 

settled in accordance with the procedural rules and regulations of the Plan. All 

Contractors on this project agree to assign work and be bound to the terms and 

conditions of the Plan for the Settlement of Jurisdictional Disputes in the 

Construction Industry, and all signatory Unions agree that the assignments of the 

Contractors shall be followed until the dispute is resolved in accordance with this 

section. 

(b) Any award or resolution made pursuant to this procedure, shall be final and 

binding on the disputing Unions and the involved Contractor under this Agreement 

only, and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction in accordance with 

the Plan. Such award or resolution shall not establish a precedent on any 

construction work not covered by this Agreement. In all disputes under this Article, 

the Project Contractor shall be considered a party in interest, with a full right of 

participation. 

Section 3. In making any determination hereunder, there shall be no authority to assign work to 

a double or composite crew, that is, to more employees than the minimum required 

to perform the work involved; nor to assign the work to employees who are not 

qualified to perform the work involved. The aforesaid determination shall decide 

only to whom the disputed work belongs. 

Section 4. There will be no strikes, work stoppages, slowdowns, or other disruptive activity 

arising out of any jurisdictional dispute. Pending the resolution of the dispute, the 

work shall proceed as assigned by the Contractor. The award or resolution shall be 


25

confirmed in writing to the involved parties. There shall be no strike, work 

stoppage or interruption in protest of any such award or any resolution. 

ARTICLE XI 

WAGES AND BENEFITS 

Section 1. All employees covered by this Agreement shall be classified in accordance with 

work performed and paid the hourly wage rates for those classifications in 

compliance with the applicable prevailing rate determination. If a wage increase 

negotiated in a local agreement becomes the prevailing wage under state law, the 

Contractor will pay that rate retroactive to the effective date of the locally 

negotiated wage increase. If the prevailing wage laws are repealed during the term 

of this Agreement, the Contractor shall pay the wage rates established under the 

Schedule As, except as otherwise provided in this Agreement. 

Section 2. All employees covered by this Agreement shall be paid by check or at the 

employee’s option by direct deposit and shall be paid no later than the end of the 

work shift on Friday. No more than three (3) day’s wages may be withheld. Any 

employee who is discharged or laid off shall be entitled to receive all accrued wages 

immediately upon discharge or layoff. Notification of layoff shall be at the 

contractor's discretion but shall not be given later than the end of the work shift on 

the date that the layoff is to be effective. Such notification may be verbal. 

Section 3. The Contractor will pay contributions to the established employee benefits funds in 

the amounts designated in the appropriate prevailing wage determination for fringe 

benefit contributions and will make all employee-authorized deductions in the 

amounts designated; provided, however, that the Contractor and the Union agree 

that only such bona fide employee benefits as accrue to the direct benefit of the 

employees (such as pension and annuity, health and welfare, vacation, 

apprenticeship, training funds, etc.) shall be included in this requirement and be 

paid by the Contractor on this Project. With respect to other Fund contributions, 

such as, but not limited to, contract administration funds, contractors who are 

signatory to Schedule A agreements are not excused from making such 

contributions by virtue of this Project Labor Agreement. The Contractor shall make 

contributions only to those Funds that have submitted a written letter of 

commitment to contribute financial support to the Social Justice Program of this 

Agreement to help defray the costs of the Program, in an account of the Social 

Justice Subcommittee’s designation, an account that will be established with the 

concurrence of the Joint Administrative Committee. Such level of commitment 

must be acceptable to the Port. The parties agree to use their best effort to secure 

such commitments of the Funds. Contractors who are not signatory to Schedule A 

agreements may voluntarily make payments to such Funds or, in lieu thereof, shall 

pay an equivalent amount monthly to the account established by the Project Labor 

Agreement Social Justice Subcommittee mentioned above. Bona fide jointlytrusteed 

benefit plans or authorized employee deduction programs established or 


26

negotiated under the applicable Schedule A or by the parties to this Agreement 

during the life of this Agreement may be added, subject to the limitations upon such 

negotiated changes contained in Article XIX, Section 2 of this Agreement. Such 

contributions shall be made in compliance with the applicable prevailing wage 

determination and shall be due and payable on the due date contained in the 

applicable Schedule A. 

The Contractor adopts and agrees to be bound by the written terms of the legally 

established trust agreements specifying the detailed basis on which payments are to 

be made into, and benefits paid out of, such Trust Funds. The Contractor authorizes 

the parties to such Trust Funds to appoint Trustees and successor Trustees to 

administer the Trust Funds and hereby ratifies and accepts the Trustees so appointed 

as if made by the Contractor. 

Section 4. Contractors of whatever tier shall make regular and timely contributions required by 

Section 3 of this Article in amounts required by this Agreement and on the time 

schedule set forth in the appropriate Schedule A. 

ARTICLE XII 

HOURS OF WORK, OVERTIME, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS 

Section 1. Work Day and Work Week. Eight (8) hours per day between the hours of 6:00 A.M. 

and 5:30 P.M., plus one-half (1/2) hour unpaid for lunch, approximately mid-way 

through the shift, shall constitute the standard workday. Forty (40) hours per week 

shall constitute a regular week's work. The workweek will start on Monday and 

conclude on Friday. A uniform starting time will be established for all crafts on 

each project or segment of the work. Nothing herein shall be construed as 

guaranteeing any employee eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. The 

Union(s) shall be informed of the work starting time set by the Contractor at the 

pre-job conference, which may be changed thereafter upon three (3) working days' 

notice to the Union(s) and the workers and DSI/PCI. 

Section 2. Paid Times. 

(a) Employees shall be at their place of work at the starting time (as designated by 

the Contractor) performing their assigned functions. The parties reaffirm their 

policy of a fair day's work for a fair day's wage. 

(b) A worker is entitled to pickup time at the end of each work day, the particular 

amount of such pickup time depending upon accessability to the area to which the 

employee is assigned. The amount of pickup time will be determined by mutual 

agreement at a jobsite conference between representatives of the Unions, DSI/PCI 

and representatives of the Contractors. 

Section 3. Overtime. Overtime will be paid in accordance with the requirements of the 

applicable General Prevailing Wage Determination. There will be no restriction on 


27

the contractor's scheduling of overtime or the non-discriminatory designation of 

employees who will work the available overtime. Steward overtime shall be as 

provided in the applicable Schedule A, provided the steward is qualified to perform 

the work available. There shall be no pyramiding of overtime pay under any 


Section 4. (a) Shifts. Shift work may be performed at the option of the Contractor(s) upon 

three (3) days' prior notice to the Union, unless a shorter notice period is provided in 

the applicable Schedule A, and shall continue for a period of not less than five (5) 

working days. Saturdays and Sundays, if worked, may be used for establishing the 

five (5) day minimum work shift. If two shifts are worked, the first shift shall 

consist of eight (8) hours of continuous work exclusive of a one-half (1/2) hour nonpaid 

lunch period and the second shift shall consist of seven and one-half (7-1/2) 

hours of continuous work exclusive of a one-half (1/2) hour non-paid lunch period. 

Any third shift shall consist of seven (7) hours of continuous work exclusive of onehalf 

(1/2) hour non-paid lunch period. All shifts shall be paid eight (8) hours 

straight time pay with any premium or differential paid at the applicable Schedule A 

rate of pay. Multiple shifts, if worked, will not be required on the entire project. 

When multiple shifts are worked, the number of employees on each shift of the 

operation may vary according to the conditions applicable to each shift and nothing 

will require that there be a "man-for-man" relief in successive shifts. 

The last shift starting on or before 6:00 P.M. Friday shall be considered Friday work 

time; while the first shift ending at or after 6:00 A.M. on Monday shall be 

considered Sunday work time. The shift starting at or after 6:00 A.M. is designated 

as the first shift, with the second shift following. Pay for the second shift shall be at 

the employee's base wage rate for first shift, plus the second shift differential, if any, 

established in the applicable Schedule A. 

(b) Special shifts. The hours of work per work week day, including start times and 

end times, shall not apply with respect to work for which special hours of work have 

been established in contract specifications by the Owner where (1) necessary to 

accommodate Maritime or Airport operating requirements; (2) special construction 

requirements necessary to comply with regulations of state agencies having 

regulatory jurisdiction or permit authority over the work, or (3) mitigation measures 

specified in the final environmental impact report for the work. Any Contractor that 

performs work covered by a Schedule A that provides for a work week of less than 

forty (40) hours shall follow the provisions of that Schedule A regarding the work 

week and may stagger the crews so that it has a sufficient number of workers at the 

site for forty (40) hours per week, provided that the use of such work schedule may 

not interfere with the scheduling of other contractors or the full use of any other 

craft or crew. 

(c) Tide Work. All work requiring a Contractor to establish a starting time or other 

special conditions which will vary from the regularly scheduled starting time set 


28

forth in this Agreement and which is established due to the tide schedule shall 

perform such work under the applicable Schedule A "Tide Work" provisions of the 

Craft performing the work. 

(d) Alternate Work Week. The Contractor may, upon five (5) days notice to the 

appropriate union(s), establish a work week of four (4) consecutive ten (10) hour 

work days (exclusive of one-half hour unpaid lunch, approximately midway through 

the shift). Such work week shall consist of the same four days each week, with a 

fifth day available as a make-up day if needed and if permitted by the applicable 

Schedule A. Compensation for such shifts will be at the straight-time rate of pay for 

the first ten (10) hours of work with the addition of shift premium, and overtime 

levels, if any required by the applicable prevailing wage determination. 

(e) Uninterrupted Work. The parties acknowledge that certain construction activities 

may pose unique work scheduling issues, including a requirement for continuous 

work 24 hours per day, seven days a week, particularly during the placement of 

concrete. The parties agree to establish, in good faith, hours of work provisions to 

assure uninterrupted work on concrete placement in accordance with contract 

specifications for Qualifying Work. 

Section 5. Holidays. Recognized holidays on this Project shall be New Year's Day, Martin 

Luther King's Birthday, Presidents Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor 

Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day After Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. Holidays 

that fall on a Saturday shall be observed on the preceding Friday and holidays that 

fall on a Sunday shall be observed on the following Monday 

Section 6. (a) Reporting Pay. Employees reporting for work and for whom no work is 

provided, except when given notification pursuant to an applicable Schedule A not 

to report to work, will receive two (2) hours pay at the regular straight time hourly 

rate. Employees who work beyond two (2) hours but not more than four (4) hours 

will receive four (4) hours pay. Employees who work more than four hours but not 

more than eight hours will receive eight (8) hours pay. Employees who work 

beyond eight hours will be paid for actual hours worked. Whenever reporting pay is 

provided for employees, they will be required to remain at the Project site available 

for work for such time as they receive pay, unless released earlier by the principal 

supervisor of the Contractor(s) or their designated representative. Each employee 

shall furnish his Contractor with his current address and telephone number, and 

shall promptly report any changes in each to the Contractor. 

(b) One-day Reporting Pay. When an employee is sent to the job site from the 

union referral facility in response to a request from the Contractor for an employee 

for one (1) day and starts work at the designated starting time for the shift, or when 

called out on the same day for one (1) day’s work and appears within a reasonable 

time from the time of dispatch from the union referral facility, the employee will be 

paid eight (8) hours. 


29

(c) Make Up Day. Make up day provisions contained in a local collective 

bargaining agreement that serve as a basis for a Schedule A shall be applied to work 

on this project. 

(d) Call Out Pay. Any employee called out to work outside of his shift shall receive 

a minimum of four hours pay at the appropriate rate, including any applicable 

premium. This does not apply to time worked as an extension (before or after) of the 

employee’s normal shift. 

(e) Pay Under Discharge or Voluntary Departure from Job Site. When an employee 

leaves the job or work location of his own volition or is discharged for cause or is 

not working as a result of the Contractor's invocation of Article XIV, Section 3, the 

employee shall be paid only for the actual time worked. 

(f) Premium Rate Calculated. In all cases, if the employee is reporting on a day on 

which a premium rate is paid, reporting pay shall be calculated at that rate. 

Section 7. Time Keeping. The Contractor may utilize brassing systems to check employees in 

and out. Each employee must check himself in and out. The Contractor will 

provide adequate facilities for checking in and out in an expeditious manner. 

Section 8. Meal Period. The Contractor will schedule a meal period not more than one-half 

(1/2) hour duration at the work location at approximately the mid-point of the 

scheduled work shift (five hours), consistent with Section 1; provided, however, 

that the Contractor may, for efficiency of the operation, establish a schedule which 

coordinates the meal periods of two or more crafts. If an employee is required to 

work through his meal period, he shall be compensated in a manner established in 

the applicable Schedule A. 

ARTICLE XIII 

APPRENTICES 

Section 1. The parties recognize the need to maintain continuing support of programs designed 

to develop adequate numbers of competent workers in the constriction industry. The 

Port and the unions agree to provide financial and other assistance to enhance and 

sustain such programs through appropriate sources. The Contractor(s) will employ 

apprentices in the respective crafts, which are performing work on the project, and 

within the jurisdiction of the craft in which those apprentices are working. 

Section 2 (a). Subject to any restrictions contained in law, the Parties agree to a goal that 

apprentices will perform up to twenty percent (20%) of the total craft work hours 

unless an applicable Schedule A provides for a greater percentage. The Union 

agrees to cooperate with the Contractor in furnishing apprentices as requested and 


30

they shall be properly supervised and paid in accordance with provisions contained 

within the Schedule A. 

(b). The parties agree to a goal that only residents of the Port's Local Impact Area 

(LIA, defined as Alameda, Emeryville, Oakland and San Leandro) shall be utilized 

as apprentices but, that if sufficient and qualified apprentices from the LIA are not 

available to achieve this goal, then residents of the Port's Local Business Area 

(defined as Alameda County and Contra Costa County) may be utilized. The 

Contractor shall make good faith efforts to reach this goal through the utilization of 

normal hiring hall and apprentice procedures and, when appropriate, the 

identification of potentially qualified apprentices through community-based 

organizations working in collaboration with the apprentice programs. 

(c) For the purposes of meeting the goal established in (b) above, a Contractor may 

qualify for up to one-half (1/2) of the goal by employing LIA-based apprentices on 

other work the Contractor is performing during the time it is working on Qualifying 

Work under this Agreement. 

(d) Sanctions may be imposed for failure to meet the goals or demonstrate "good 

faith" effort to do so. In cases of alleged noncompliance, the issue may be referred 

to the Social Justice Subcommittee of the Labor/Management Cooperation Joint 

Administrative Committee for resolution. If a majority of the Subcommittee can 

make no resolution, the issue may then be referred by the Social Justice 

Subcommittee to Step 3 of the grievance procedure of Article IX for submission to 

an arbitrator for a final and binding determination. For purposes of resolution of 

any dispute arising under this Section, the Port and DSI/PCI shall be considered a 

party-in-interest with full right of participation in the arbitration proceeding. 

ARTICLE XIV 

SAFETY 

PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY 

JOINT LABOR/MANAGEMENT SAFETY COMMITTEE 

Section 1. Safety. (a) Safe working conditions. It shall be the responsibility of each contractor 

to ensure safe working conditions and employee compliance with any safety rules 

contained herein or established by the Owner, DSI/PCI or the Contractor. It is 

understood that the employees have an individual obligation to use diligent care to 

perform their work in a safe manner and to protect themselves and the property of 

the Contractor and the Owner. 

(b) Rules. Employees shall be bound by the safety, security and visitor rules and 

environmental compliance requirements established by the Contractor, DSI/PCI or 

the Owner. These rules will be published and posted in conspicuous places 

throughout the work site. An Employee's failure to satisfy his obligations under this 

Section may subject him to discipline, including discharge. 


31

(c) Prohibited Items. The use, sale, transfer, purchase and/or possession of a 

controlled substance, alcohol and/or firearms at any time before or during the work 

day is prohibited. Accordingly, the parties agree to adopt appropriate procedures 

and safeguards for the testing of employees for prohibited or controlled substances. 

It is agreed, with respect to such testing procedures, that: 

(i) no person referred from the Union hiring hall shall be allowed on-site as 

an employee until such person has completed and passed any test(s) required 

under the program; 

(ii) a person who is put to work immediately after having passed the tests shall 

be paid starting at the time the person reported for the test(s); and 

(iii) where a contractor requests a person to report for purposes of a pre-hire 

substance abuse test, and does not intend to place the person in an active work 

position on that day, the person shall receive four (4) hours of pay at the regular 

straight-time hourly rate if the test is negative. 

(iv) Once mutually agreed to, this uniform substance abuse prevention policy 

will become an Appendix to this Agreement. 

(d) Smoking. The parties acknowledge that the environmental and safety 

restrictions governing conduct at the Project site may prohibit smoking at any time 

in any location or facility. Violation of this restriction by any person may constitute 

grounds for removal from the site and may result in termination. 

(e) Security. The parties acknowledge that some work within the scope of this 

Agreement will occur in restricted security areas of an operating airport and that 

employees who will be required to work in such areas will, as a condition of 

employment on this Project, be subjected to a personal background check and 

security clearance pursuant to Federal Aviation Authority regulations governing the 

Oakland Airport. The Unions acknowledge that Union representatives will undergo 

the same clearance procedures as a condition to their access to these areas and 

therefore agree that such conditions will be imposed. Application and enforcement 

of such requirements may be grounds to terminate or deny an employee work on the 

Project or to deny access of their representatives to these Project areas. 

Section 2. Inspections. The inspection of incoming shipments of equipment, machinery and 

construction materials of every kind shall be performed at the discretion of the 

Contractor by individuals of its choice. All employees shall comply with the 

security procedures established by the Owner, DSI/PCI and/or Contractor. 

Section 3. Suspension of Work for Safety. A Contractor may suspend all or a portion of the 

job to protect the life and safety of an employee. In such cases, employees will be 

compensated only for the actual time worked; provided, however, that where the 


32

contractor requests employees to remain at the site and be available for work, the 

employees will be compensated for the standby time at their basic hourly rate of 

pay. 

Section 4. Water and Sanitary Facilities. The Contractor is responsible to provide adequate 

supplies of drinking water and sanitary facilities for all employees. Proper 

notification of this requirement shall be provided to the Contractor at the pre-bid 

and pre-job conference mark-up to insure compliance with this Section. 

Section 5. Joint Labor/Management Safety Committee. The parties to this Agreement will 

form a Joint Labor/management Safety Committee consisting of Contractor and 

Union representatives, which shall be jointly chaired by the site representative of 

DSI/PCI (or designee) and an official of the signatory Building and Construction 

Trades Council of Alameda County (or designee) 


appointed by the Union). The 

Committee shall meet at least monthly, or more often at the call of the Joint Chairs, 

to receive reports on safety programs instituted by the Port, DSI/PCI and the 

individual contractors on the Project site and to discuss and advise such parties to 

the Agreement with regard to recommended safety programs and procedures to 

maintain the highest level of occupational safety on the Project site. The Joint 

Chairs shall rotate the position of Meeting Chair on a monthly basis. 

Section 6. Workers' Compensation. All employees working under this Agreement shall be 

covered as required by the provisions of the California Labor Code affecting 

workers' compensation benefits (hereinafter "the Code"). The parties agree to 

develop a program, consistent with the California Labor Code, for efficient and 

economical handling of worker injuries and compensation claims pursuant to the 

commitments set forth in Appendix H – Letter of Understanding: Workers’ 

Compensation. 

ARTICLE XV 

NON-DISCRIMINATION 

Section 1. The Contractor and Union agree that they will not discriminate against any 

employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex (including pregnancy, 

childbirth, or related medical condition), creed, national origin, color, disability as 

defined by law, disabled veteran status, Vietnam veteran status, religion, age (40 

and above), medical condition (cancer-related), marital status, ancestry, or sexual 

orientation in any manner prohibited by law or regulation. The Union shall 

cooperate with the Contractors' obligations to take affirmative action to ensure that 

applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment 

without regard to race, sex (including pregnancy, childbirth, or related medical 

condition), creed, national origin, color, disability as defined by law, disabled 

veteran status, Vietnam veteran status, religion, age (40 and above), medical 

condition (cancer-related), marital status, ancestry, or sexual orientation. Such 

action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, 

33

demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; 

rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including 

apprenticeship. Any complaints regarding the application of this provision shall be 

brought to the immediate attention of the involved Contractor for consideration and 

resolution, with notice of such complaint brought to DSI/PCI and the Unions. 

Section 2. It is recognized that special procedures may be established by joint agreement of 

the parties to this Agreement and governmental agencies for the training and 

employment of persons who have not previously qualified to be employed on 

construction projects of the type covered by this Agreement. The parties agree that 

they will make all good faith efforts to assist in the proper implementation of such 

orders, regulations or agreements for the general benefit of the residents of the 

Local Impact Area. 

Section 3. It is recognized that the Port has certain policies and commitments for the 

utilization of emerging business enterprises. The parties shall jointly endeavor to 

assure that these commitments are fully met, consistent with commitments and all 

applicable federal and state laws and regulations relating to public contracting and 

employment and utilization of minorities and minority- and/or women-owned 

businesses. Copies of such policies and commitments shall be furnished to the 

Union. 

ARTICLE XVI 

TRAVEL AND SUBSISTENCE 

Travel expenses, travel time, subsistence allowance and/or zone rates and parking 

reimbursements will not be applicable to work under this Agreement except as expressly 

provided and to the extent provided for in any applicable prevailing wage determination. 

The Contractor shall provide workers with safe and secure parking at the Project site. If 

such parking is not reasonably available, the Contractor shall provide a safe and secure remote 

parking site and transportation for workers between those remote parking area(s) and the 

employee's point of entry to the Project. Transportation for workers between such remote parking 

area(s) and the employee’s point of entry shall be provided. Where employees are required to be 

transported to the Project site, time shall begin in accordance with the provisions of Article XII, 

Section 2 and shall end at the remote parking area. Compensated time between the project site 

and the parking area will be paid at the rate of pay (i.e., straight-time or overtime) at which the 

employee was working when the employee left the work site. Where an employee boards the lastscheduled 

vehicle for Contractor-provided transportation from the remote parking area before the 

scheduled starting time, the employee will be compensated from the starting time 

notwithstanding any unforeseen delay in arrival by the transport at the site. 


34

ARTICLE XVII 

WORKING CONDITIONS 

Section 1. There will be no organized breaks or other non-working time established during 

working hours unless provided for in a prevailing wage determination and/or 

Industrial Wage Order issued by the State of California. Individual nonalcoholic 

beverage containers will be permitted at the employee’s work location. 

Section 2. The Owner and/or DSI/PCI shall establish such reasonable Project rules as the 

Owner or DSI/PCI deems appropriate and not inconsistent with this Agreement. 

These rules will be explained at the pre-job conference and posted at the Project site 

by the Contractor and may be amended thereafter as necessary. Failure to observe 

these rules and regulations by any employee may be grounds for discipline, 

including discharge. In any dispute over the application of a rule, the grieving party 

may contest the reasonableness of the rule, the fact of the alleged violation, and the 

appropriateness of any discipline imposed. 

Section 3. There shall be no restrictions on the emergency use of any tools by any qualified 

employee; or on the use of any tools or equipment for the performance of work 

within the jurisdiction, provided the employee can safely use the tools and/or the 

equipment involved. 

Section 4. Recognizing the nature of the work being conducted on the site, employee access by 

a private automobile may be limited to certain roads and/or parking areas. 

ARTICLE XVIII 

SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY 

Section 1. It is not the intention of either the Contractor or the Union parties to violate any 

laws governing the subject matter of this Agreement. The parties hereto agree that 

in the event any provisions of the Agreement are finally held or determined to be 

illegal or void as being in contravention of any applicable law, the remainder of the 

Agreement shall remain in full force and effect unless the part or parts so found to 

be void are wholly inseparable from the remaining portions of this Agreement. 

Further, the Contractor and Union agree that if and when any provisions of this 

Agreement are finally held or determined to be illegal or void by a court of 

competent jurisdiction, the parties will promptly enter into negotiations concerning 

the substance affected by such decision for the purpose of achieving conformity 

with the requirements of any applicable law and the intent of the parties hereto. 

Section 2. Should a court of competent jurisdiction issue any order which results, temporarily 

or permanently enjoining the use of the Agreement in the bidding, awarding, and/or 

construction work on the Project, the Owner may withdraw, at its absolute 

discretion, the inclusion of this Agreement as part of any bid specification affected 

by such court order for contract packages to be advertised. In the event of such court 


35

order, the Parties agree to enter into negotiations in an effort to conform the 

Agreement to the terms of the court order and otherwise to keep the Agreement in 

full force and effect on the Project, to the maximum extent legally possible for work 

in progress and for inclusion in bid specifications for future work. 

Section 3. If a court order invalidates only a part of the Agreement but permits the balance of 

the Agreement to remain in effect and operative on the Project, the provisions of 

Article VIII shall not be waived. If the effect of the court order is to invalidate or 

bar the use of the entire Agreement, during the negotiations between the parties to 

achieve conformity with the requirements of the court order or applicable law, the 

Unions agree to continue to work without interruption for a period of at least thirty 

(30) days before exercising any right to engage in any strike, picketing or other 

disruption of the Project. 

ARTICLE XIX 

DURATION OF THE AGREEMENT 

This Project Labor Agreement shall be effective on the date approved by the Port, and shall 

continue in effect for the duration of the Project Construction work described in Article II hereof. 

Section 1. Duration. 

(a) Turnover. Construction of any phase, portion, section or segment of the Project 

shall be deemed complete when such phase, portion, section or segments has been 

turned over to the Owner by the Contractor and the Owner has accepted such phase, 

portion, section or segment. As areas and systems of the Project are inspected and 

construction tested and/or approved by the Construction Manager and accepted by 

the Owner or third parties with the approval of the Owner, the Agreement shall have 

no further force or effect on such items or areas, except when the Contractor is 

directed by the Construction Manager or Owner to engage in repairs or 

modifications required by its contract(s) with the Owner or the Construction 

Manager. 

(b) Notice. Notice of each final acceptance received by the Contractor will be 

provided to the union with a description of what portion, segment, etc. has been 

accepted. Final acceptance may be subject to a "punch" list, and in such case, the 

Agreement will continue to apply to each such item on the list until it is completed 

to the satisfaction of the Owner and Notice of Acceptance is given by the Owner to 

the Contractor. 

(c) Termination. (1) Final termination of all obligations, rights and liabilities and 

disagreements shall occur upon receipt by the Union of a notice from 

DSI/PCI or the Owner saying that no work remains within the scope of 

the Agreement for DSI/PCI or its successor. 


36

(2) Any claim for non-payment of wages or fringe benefits shall be 

governed by the applicable statutes of limitation, i.e., the Labor Code, 

ERISA, etc. and shall not be affected by the provisions of this Section. 

Section 2. Changes to Schedule As. (a) Incorporation. Schedule As incorporated as part of this 

Project Agreement shall continue in full force and effect until the contractor and/or 

union parties to the Collective Bargaining Agreements which are the basis for such 

Schedule As notify DSI/PCI of mutually agreed upon changes in such Agreements 

and their effective date(s). 

(b) Limits to Incorporation. The parties agree to recognize and implement such 

changes on their effective dates, provided, however, that any provisions negotiated 

in said collective bargaining agreements will not apply to work covered by this 

Agreement if such provisions are less favorable to the Contractor for work covered 

by this Agreement than those uniformly required of contractors for construction 

work normally covered by those Agreements; nor shall any provision be recognized 

or applied if it may be construed to apply exclusively or predominantly to work 

covered by this Agreement. 

(c) Retroactivity. As part of this understanding, the Contractor agrees and consents 

to pay the increased contributions to the relevant jointly administered trust funds 

pursuant to the provisions of any collective bargaining agreements negotiated by the 

unions during the work performed on the Project retroactively to the expiration date 

of the applicable Schedule A, provided, however, if the provisions of any such new 

collective bargaining agreement provide that said increases shall not become 

effective until a later date after the date following the expiration date, then that later 

date shall prevail, and provided, further, that such increased contribution does not 

exceed the corresponding fringe benefit component of the applicable prevailing 

wage rate then existing or as thereafter amended. In the event that the increased 

contribution exceeds the then-current prevailing wage fringe benefit component and 

the prevailing wage is subsequently adjusted upward, the fringe benefit contribution 

shall also be adjusted upward by an equal level to the applicable level of the 

Schedule A or the maximum prevailing wage determination level, whichever is less, 

and shall be paid retroactive to the effective date of the locally negotiated increase. 

(d) Resolution of Disputes Concerning Incorporation. Any disagreement between 

the parties over the incorporation into a Schedule A of any such provision agreed 

upon in the negotiation of the local Collective Bargaining Agreement which serves 

as the basis for the Schedule A shall be referred to Gerald McKay, for resolution 

under the procedures established in Article IX. 

Section 3. No Strike/Lockout During Negotiations. The Union agrees that there will be no 

strikes, work stoppages, sympathy strikes, picketing, slowdowns, or any other 

disruptive activity affecting the Project by any Union involved in the negotiation of 

such local Collective Bargaining Agreements and the resulting Schedule As, nor 


37

shall there be any lockout on this Project affecting the Union during the course of 

such negotiations. 

In witness whereof, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed and effective as of the 

day and year first above written: 

For the Project Contractor: For the Unions: 

______________________ _________________________ 

Jake Sloan, President Robert A. Georgine, President 

Davillier-Sloan, Inc. Building and Construction Trades 

Department, AFL-CIO 

______________________ _________________________ 

Michael W. D'Antuono, President Tom DeLuca, President 

Parsons Constructors, Inc. Building and Construction Trades 

Council of Alameda County 


___________________________ 

Barry Luboviski, Secretary-Treasurer 

Building and Construction Trades 

Council of Alameda County 

38

Its Affiliated International Unions 

International Association of Heat and Frost Insulators and Asbestos Workers 

By:________________________ 

William G. Bernard 

International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers 

By:_________________________ 

John T. Joyce 

International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers 

By:__________________________ 

J.J. Barry 

International Association of Bridge, Structural and Ornamental Iron Workers 

By:___________________________ 

Jake West 

International Union of Operating Engineers 

By:____________________________ 

Frank Hanley 

United Union of Roofers, Waterproofers and Allied Workers 

By:_____________________________ 

Earl J. Kruse 

International Brotherhood of Boilermakers, Iron Ship Builders, Blacksmiths, Forgers and Helpers 

By:____________________________ 

Charles W. Jones 


39

United Brotherhood of Carpenters and Joiners of America 

By:_____________________________ 

Douglas J. McCarron 

Operative Plasterers’ and Cement Masons’ International Association of the United States of 

America 

By:_______________________________ 

John J. Dougherty 

International Brotherhood of Teamsters 

By:_________________________ 

James P. Hoffa 

International Union of Painters and Allied Trades 

By:________________________________ 

Michael E. Monroe 

Sheet Metal Workers’ International Association 

By:_________________________________ 

Michael J. Sullivan 

United Association of Journeymen and Apprentices of the Plumbing and Pipe Fitting Industry of 

the United States and Canada 

By:___________________________ 

Martin J. Maddaloni 

Laborers’ International Union of North America 

By:_____________________________ 

Terrence O’Sullivan 


40

International Union of Elevator Constructors 

By:______________________________ 

Edward C. Sullivan 

And Their Affiliated Local Unions: 

International Association of Heat and Frost Insulators and Asbestos Workers, Local No. 16 

By: _________________________ 

International Brotherhood of Boilermakers, Iron Ship Builders, Blacksmiths, Forgers and 

Helpers, Local No. 549 

By: _____________________________ 

International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers, Local. No. 3, Northern California 

By: ________________________________ 

Northern California Carpenters’ Regional Council 

By: ___________________________________ 

Carpenters 46 Northern California Counties Conference Board 

By: ____________________________________ 

District Council of Plasterers and Cement Masons of Northern California 

By: _____________________________ 

Plasterers’ and Shophands’ Local Union No. 66 

By: ____________________________________ 


41

Plasterers’ and Cement Masons’ Local Union No. 300 

By: __________________________________ 

International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers, Local No. 595 

By: ___________________________________ 

District Council of Iron Workers of the State of California and Vicinity 

By:_________________________________ 

International Association of Bridge, Structural, Ornamental and Reinforcing Iron Workers, Local 

No. 378 

By: _____________________________________ 

Northern California District Council of Laborers’ 

By: _____________________________________ 

Construction and General Laborers’ Union Local No. 304 

By: ___________________________________ 

Laborers’ International Union of North America Local Union No. 67 

By: _________________________________________ 

Hod Carriers Local Union No. 166 

By:___________________________________ 


42

International Union of Operating Engineers, Local Union No. 3 

By: ______________________________ 

District Council No. 16, International Union of Painters and Allied Trades 

By: _________________________________ 

Local Union No. 342 of the United Association of Journeyman and Apprentices of the Plumbing 

and Pipefitting Industry of the United States and Canada, AFL-CIO 

By: ___________________________________ 

Sprinkler Fitters and Apprentices, U.A. Local 483 

By: ___________________________________ 

Sheet Metal Workers’ International Association, Local Union No. 104 

By: ________________________________________ 

United Union of Roofers, Waterproofers & Allied Workers, Local No. 81 

By: _____________________________________ 

Teamsters Local 853 

By: _____________________________________ 

International Union of Elevator Constructors Local Union No. 8 

By:______________________________________ 


43

Sign Display and Allied Crafts, Local 510 

By: _____________________________________ 


44

[Date] 

[Addressee] 

[Address] 

[Address] 

Agreed to Letter of Assent 

Subject: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement - Letter of Assent 

Dear Ms./Mr. ____________: 

The undersigned party confirms that it agrees to be a party to and bound by the Port of Oakland 

Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement (the “Labor Agreement”) as entered into by and 

between Davillier-Sloan, Inc./ Parsons Constructors Inc. (“DSI/PCI”) on behalf of the Port of Oakland, 

its successors or assigns, and the Building and Construction Trades Department, AFL-CIO, the Building 

and Construction Trades Council of Alameda County, AFL-CIO, and their affiliated unions, executed 

____________ , 2000, as such Labor Agreement may, from time to time, be amended by the parties or 

interpreted pursuant to its terms. 

By executing this Letter of Assent, the undersigned party subscribes to, adopts and agrees to be 

bound by the written terms of the legally established trust agreements specifying the detailed basis upon 

which contributions are to be made into, and benefits made out of, such trust funds and ratifies and 

accepts the trustees appointed by the parties to such trust funds. 

Such obligation to be a party to and bound by this Labor Agreement shall extend to all work 

covered by said Labor Agreement undertaken by the undersigned party on the Maritime and Aviation 

Project. The undersigned party shall require all of its subcontractors, of whatever tier, to become 

similarly bound for all their work within the scope of this Labor Agreement by signing an identical letter 

of Assent. 

This letter shall constitute a subscription agreement, to the extent of the terms of the letter. 

CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR: ___________________________________ 

California State License Number: _________________________________________ 

Name and Signature of 

Authorized Person: ______________________________ 

(Printed Name) 

______________________________ 

(Title) 

______________________________ 

(Signature) 

______________________________ 

(Telephone Number) 


45


Mr. Jake Sloan, President 

Davillier-Sloan, Inc. 

1630 12 th 

Street 


Letter of Understanding re: Union Initiation Fees 

Re: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: Union Initiation Fees 

Dear Mr. Sloan: 

In our negotiations of the captioned Project Labor Agreement, the participating unions 

objected to any provision that would exempt employees from payment of legal uniformly 

required fees and, to the extent allowed by law, dues imposed upon members. This will, 

therefore, confirm the understanding we reached in negotiations that local unions and 

intermediate bodies will afford new member applicants the most liberal time payment and 

organizing entry fees otherwise available for new member applicants with respect to such local 

union or intermediate body. 

Sincerely, 

Barry Luboviski, Secretary-Treasurer, 

Alameda County Building and Construction Trades Council 

on behalf of the signatory Unions and Councils to the Project Labor Agreement 

Acknowledged and agreed to this ___ day of ____________ 2000: 

__________________________________ 

Jake Sloan, President, Davillier-Sloan, Inc. 

on behalf of the Project Contractor 


46


Letter of Understanding re: Superintendents’ Contributions 

Mr. Barry Luboviski, Secretary-Treasurer 


8400 Enterprise Way, Room 101 


RE: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: 

Benefit Plan Contributions for Superintendents 

Dear Mr. Luboviski: 

In our negotiations for the captioned Project Labor Agreement a questions was raised concerning 

the exclusion from the scope of the Agreement’s coverage of “superintendents” contained in Article II, 

Section 2(a) of the Agreement. Specifically, your negotiating committee informed us that some of the 

local union collective bargaining agreements and applicable multiemployer plan documents provide for 

payment of contributions to such benefit plans for plan participants even when they are working as 

superintendents for the employer. We agreed that the exclusion from coverage of this classification 

would not preclude or supersede the provision of any current local collective bargaining agreement 

allowing for such contributions to be made on behalf of any plan participants who work as 

superintendents on this project, as and to the extent permitted under such plans. 

It is, however, further understood that this agreement does not affect the exclusion of the 

superintendent classification from the coverage of the Agreement, nor does it require contributions on 

behalf of any superintendents who are not at the time of their work on the project current participants in 

the relevant plans. 

I trust that this clarification is consistent with our discussion. If you agree that this letter 

accurately states the terms of our understanding, please indicate your agreement and acceptance on 

behalf of the Unions in the space provided below. 

Sincerely, 



AGREED AND ACCEPTED on behalf of the Alameda County Building and Construction Trades 

Council and the local unions signatory to the Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor 

Agreement this _____ day of ____________ 2000. 

___________________ 




47


Letter of Understanding re: Inspectors and Testers 

Mr. Don Doser, Business Manager 

International Union of Operating Engineers, Local 3 

1620 S. Loop Road 

Alameda, CA 94502 

Re: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: 

Coverage of Inspectors and Testers 

Dear Mr. Doser: 

This letter will confirm the understanding we reached in negotiations concerning the treatment of 

workers classified as “Inspectors” or “Testers” under the terms of the captioned project labor agreement. 

Specifically, Article II, Section 2(a) states that among the categories of employees who are excluded 

from the scope of the Agreement are “inspectors” and “testers.” You have informed us that the 

Operating Engineers’ local collective bargaining agreement covers inspectors and testers, whether the 

Contractor hires them directly or engages the services of an inspection or testing firm. Our review of the 

applicable language leaves that question open to interpretation based upon past industry practice under 

the Schedule A. However, we are agreed that the referenced exclusion applies only to the inspectors and 

testers that may be independently employed by the Port, but shall not apply to inspectors or testers 

directly employed by the execution Contractors in the classifications set out in the Schedule A. 

Moreover, we are agreed that a Contractor’s or firm’s obligations with regard to subcontracting inspector 

or tester personnel will be governed by the historic interpretation of this issue under the Schedule A 

agreement made part of this project labor agreement by reference and by any applicable provisions of law 

governing work away from the job site. 

I trust that this clarification is consistent with our discussion. If you agree that this letter 

accurately states the terms of our understanding, please indicate your agreement and acceptance on 

behalf of the Union in the space provided below. 

Sincerely, 



AGREED AND ACCEPTED 

on behalf of Operating Engineers Local 3 

this ____ day of ______________ 2000 

___________________________ 

Don Doser, Business Manager 


48


Letter of Understanding re: Prefabrication 

Mr. Bruce Word, Business Manager 

Sheet Metal Workers’ International Association, Local Union No. 104 

1939 Market Street 

San Francisco, CA 94103 

Re: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement, Article VII, 

Management’s Rights: Prefabrication 

Dear Mr. Word: 

This letter will confirm the discussions we had during the negotiation of the captioned 

Project Labor Agreement and the clarifications we made concerning the application of Article 

VII, Section 2, of the Agreement. Consistent with the provisions of that Article, the on-site 

fabrication and installation of prefabricated duct and components which are customarily the work 

of the Sheet Metal Workers will continue to be recognized as such. 

As you know from the discussions in negotiations, if fabrication work recognized by this 

letter as customarily the work of SMWIA members is to be done off-site, this work will be 

performed in the San Francisco Bay Area and in shops or at off-site assembly yards employing 

workers whose terms and conditions of employment equal or exceed those established in the area 

under the prevailing wage laws for employees represented by the Sheet Metal Workers 

International Association, unless such work is performed otherwise pursuant to the provisions of 

this letter. 

The Sheet Metal Workers union recognizes that the timely completion of this project is 

vital to the Port and the Community it is intended to serve. Therefore, if the nature of the work 

or the project schedule make it necessary to obtain fabrication outside the region, the Sheet Metal 

Workers International Association agrees to make reasonable efforts to address timely 

requirements accommodating the reasonable needs of the Project. The Project Contractor and 

the Union agree to discuss such circumstances affecting off-site fabrication contracting purchases 

where an accommodation is sought and any reasons making it necessary to depart from the 

conditions set forth above. The Sheet Metal Workers International Association and Local 104 

will not unreasonably withhold consent to such accommodations and Local 104 agrees to install 

on-site any components fabricated pursuant to the terms of this letter without limitation. The 

parties will make every effort to keep an open channel of communication to insure that both 

parties are fully informed of the facts affecting the substance of this letter. 

If you agree that this letter accurately sets forth the substance of our understanding and 

provides the basis for resolving any questions concerning the interpretation and application of 

Article VII, Section 2, of the Project Labor Agreement, please indicate your acceptance in the 

space provided below. 

Signed on behalf of the Project Contractor: 

__________________________________________ 



49


Page two of two 

Agreed and accepted this ____ day of _______________ 2000 

on behalf of Sheet Metal Workers International Association 

Local Union No. 104 

__________________________________________ 

Bruce Word 


50


Mr. Larry Blevins, Business Manager 

United Association, Local 342 

935 Detroit Avenue 

Concord, CA 


Re: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement 

Article VII, Management’s Rights: Prefabrication 

Dear Mr. Blevins: 

This letter will confirm the discussions we had during the negotiation of the captioned 

Project Labor Agreement and the clarifications we made concerning the application of Article 

VII, Section 2, of the Agreement. Consistent with the provisions of that Article, the on-site 

fabrication and installation of pipe and pipe formations between manufactured components 

which are customarily the work of UA members will continue to be recognized as such. 

As you know from the discussions in negotiations, if fabrication work recognized by this 

letter as customarily the work of U.A. members is to be done off-site, this work will be 

performed in the Port’s Local Business Area and in shops or at off-site assembly yards 

employing workers whose terms and conditions of employment equal or exceed those established 

in the area under the prevailing wage laws for employees represented by the United Association, 

unless such work is performed otherwise pursuant to the provisions of this letter. 

The United Association recognizes that the timely completion of this project is vital to the 

Port and the Community it is intended to serve. Therefore, if the nature of the work, the project 

schedule, or contracting circumstances make it necessary to obtain fabrication outside the region 

or under conditions different than those described above, the United Association agrees to 

cooperate in accommodating the reasonable needs of the Project. The Project Contractor and the 

Union agree to discuss such circumstances affecting off-site fabrication contracting purchases 

where an accommodation is sought and any reasons making it necessary to depart from the 

conditions set forth above. The United Association will not unreasonably withhold its consent to 

such accommodations and Local 342 agrees to install on-site any components fabricated pursuant 

to the terms of this letter without limitation. The parties will make every effort to keep an open 

channel of communication to insure that both parties are fully informed of the facts affecting the 

substance of this letter. 

If you agree that this letter accurately sets forth the substance of our understanding and 

provides the basis for resolving any questions concerning the interpretation and application of 

Article VII, Section 2, of the Project Labor Agreement, please indicate your acceptance in the 





Agreed and accepted this ____ day of ______________ 2000. 

United Association Local 342 

By: ________________________________ 

Larry Blevins, Business Manager 


51


Letter of Understanding re: Small Business Utilization Program 


Building and Construction Trades Council of Alameda County 



RE: Port of Oakland Non-Discrimination and Small Local Business Utilization Program 

Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement 


In our negotiations for the Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement, we discussed the 

Port’s desire to continue to utilize its Non-Discrimination and Small/ Local Business Utilization 

Program (hereafter Program) to assist qualifying small historically disadvantaged businesses to 

become capable of bidding and completing construction work. The parties understand that the 

Unions believe that such a program can operate completely within the framework of the 

Agreement, and that they have pledged to cooperate with the Port for the purpose of growing 

such local business capacity and overcoming the disadvantages that have resulted from the 

operation of various economic, social and cultural forces. The parties reach the following 

understanding concerning the utilization of Local Impact Area businesses that qualify as small 

businesses under the Program. 

The parties agreed that for the purposes of this agreement, the term “advertised” in Article II, 

Section 1(a) does not include bid packages managed under the Program for work otherwise 

covered by the scope of this Agreement that have an estimated value before bidding at or below 

$300,000 where in the sole discretion of the Owner such exclusion will further the goal of 

increasing the participation of small and historically disadvantaged Oakland-based construction 

businesses. The aggregate value of all bid packages chosen by the Owner for exclusion from the 

coverage of this Agreement will not exceed nine million dollars ($9,000,000) over the duration 

of this Project Labor Agreement, except subject to the procedure outlined in this Letter of 

Understanding. However, if work awarded under the Port of Oakland Vision 2000 (1999 

Facilities) Project Labor Agreement has not resulted in the utilization of the $1,000,000 

contained for such a program, the balance of such funds shall be available for use under this 

program in order to reach the $10,000,000 original conceived for such efforts. All other contracts 

awarded under the Program will be covered by the terms of the Project Labor Agreement. 

It was further agreed that where a contractor qualifying for this Small Business exclusion has 

received aggregate awards of $150,000 or a single award that exceeds $150,000 under the 

Program excluded from coverage of this Project Labor Agreement, that such contractor will 

thereafter be required to agree to comply with the PLA for all future contract awards within the 

Scope of this Agreement whether or not the bid package is reserved for bidding under the 

Program. 


52

Letter of Understanding re: 

Small Local Business Utilization Program 


If, in the sole judgment of the Social Justice Subcommittee established under this agreement, the 

Subcommittee determines that the objectives outlined in this Letter of Understanding will be 

furthered by the addition of $5,000,000 to the program’s $10,000,000 limit. It shall make such a 

decision, by majority vote. DSI/PCI shall give notice to all Subcommittee members when it 

determines that the $10,000,000 program limit is being neared, and schedule the matter for 

inclusion on the Subcommittee’s agenda. 

It is further agreed that the Port, in managing this Program, will work with the signatory parties 

to this agreement to ensure that the operation of this understanding does not have significant 

disproportionate impact on any particular craft or upon small disadvantaged contractors signatory 

to Schedule As. Further, the Port pledges that in any event no more than 20% of the value of 

contracts awarded effecting any particular craft shall be issued under this understanding. 

There shall be no strikes, sympathy strikes, picketing, work stoppages, slowdowns or other 

disruptive activity at the Project site for any reason (including disputes relating to the negotiation 

or renegotiation of the local collective bargaining agreements which serve as the basis for the 

Schedule As) or disputes directed at contractors exempt from coverage pursuant to the terms of 

this letter. This agreement in no way limits the rights of signatory Unions to seek to organize and 

utilize legal and administrative remedies not precluded by this letter, according to applicable 

federal and state law, to secure adherence to any such successful effort. 

I trust that the foregoing accurately describes the understanding we reached on this Small 

Business Utilization Program treatment of successful bidders under the terms of this Project 

Labor Agreement. 




Acknowledged and agreed to on behalf of the signatory Union parties this ____ day of 

___________ 2000 




53


Letter of Understanding: Workers’ Compensation 





RE: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: Workers’ 

Compensation 


During our negotiations on the above captioned Agreement the Union side objected 

strenuously to our proposals for an alternative dispute resolution mechanism that would 

substitute for the provisions of the California Labor Code governing the processing of workers’ 

compensation claims. 

This will confirm, therefore, our agreement that the Unions and DSI/PCI (with input from the 

Owner’s workers’ compensation insurance carrier) will agree to a workers’ compensation 

program within the constraints of the State Labor Code, which preserves the substantive and 

procedural rights of the employees under the Code, and which is designed to insure a safe work 

environment on the Project, prompt and effective treatment of worker injuries, and efficient and 

effective claims handling. An integral component of the program will be the effective 

communication to employees of information about their rights and obligations under the State 

workers compensation structure. 

If you agree that this accurately reflects the understanding reached during our negotiations, please 

acknowledge by signing this letter in the space provided below. 

Sincerely, 

Jake Sloan, President 


On behalf of the Project Contractor 

Acknowledged and agreed to on behalf off the signatory Union parties this ___ day of 

_________ 2000. 

_________________________ 

Barry Luboviski, Secretary-Treasurer, Alameda County Building and Construction Trades 

Council 


54


Letter of Understanding: Tenant Improvements 





RE: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: Tenant Improvements 


During our negotiations of the above-captioned Agreement, the Unions sought commitments 

from the Port to cover construction improvements that may be done by Port and Airport tenants 

during the life of the Project Labor Agreement. You and we acknowledged that we could not 

impose such a commitment on the tenants for both legal and practical reasons. At the same time, 

we recognize that without the unique protections that a project labor agreement offers, there is no 

way to insulate tenant contractors from the kinds of disruptions that come about in circumstances 

where local bargaining results in a strike against the contractors in the area or when union 

workers work alongside nonunion workers. 

The Unions have advised us that the PLA protections will not be extended to any work that is not 

expressly covered by the Agreement. That is, you have specifically reserved the Unions’ normal 

rights to conduct lawful concerted and protected activities at the Project site directed at any 

entities not covered by the Agreement. We have, in turn, expressed our position that the Unions 

have the ability (and the obligation) to manage any disputes that may arise in a manner calculated 

not to disrupt covered work under the Agreement. You have agreed that it is not the Unions’ 

intent to disrupt the Project work in any way. 

We therefore share a mutual desire for the Project site to be free from such potential labor 

tensions and disruption. In the interest of promoting labor harmony and recognizing that the Port 

is not legally or practically empowered to compel its tenants to adopt and adhere to the terms of a 

PLA, the Port will notify each of its tenants when they undertake construction work on their 

leased premises of the importance of maintaining labor stability in the performance of their work. 

This notification will specifically include a description of the PLA and its benefits as one means 

for achieving stability. The Unions agree that this PLA or one of comparable terms (including 

specifically the commitments not to engage in strikes, picketing or other economic pressure) will 

be made available to the tenants for their work if they should choose to have such an agreement 

for their work. 


55

Letter of Understanding: Tenant Improvements 


Attached to this letter is the notice the Port will give to its tenants when it is advised that a tenant 

is contemplating construction work during the term of this PLA. I trust that this letter accurately 

states the positions of the parties and the understanding we have reached to resolve this difficult 

issue. 

Please indicate your acceptance and agreement to this letter in the space provided below. 

Sincerely, 




Acknowledged and agreed to on behalf off the signatory Union parties this ___ day of 

_________ 2000. 

_________________________ 




56

“Notice to Tenant” 

“It has come to our attention that you are contemplating construction activities on Port property. 

That work is proposed to be conducted in proximity with and during the time that work is being 

performed by the Port under the terms of a Project Labor Agreement (“PLA”) with the Building 

and Construction Trades Council of Alameda County (“the Council”). 

“As you know, the Council and its affiliated unions have a strong interest in the work that is done 

on Port property and the contractors that are engaged to do the work. This is particularly true if 

nonunion contractors are brought to the site. Disputes that one or more unions may have with 

those contractors could be brought to the site and result in strikes, picketing or other forms of 

disruption. Similarly, any strikes or economic action directed at union contractors during the 

renegotiation of local collective bargaining agreements can also affect the labor stability for 

union work on the project. The PLA immunizes us from the occurrence of such disputes directed 

at our work. It cannot, however, insure that the occurrence of disputes directed at contiguous or 

proximate work will not adversely affect Port work. 

“Therefore, we ask that you give careful consideration to this potential for disruption on Port 

property that may be caused by the work you undertake and urge that you further consider how 

you will schedule work and select contractors to minimize this risk. You should know that the 

PLA (or one like it) and the unique protections it affords can be extended to your work should 

you choose to adopt it. Your choices in this regard are, of course, yours to make, but the 

consequences can be significant for you and the Port. 

“We would be pleased to discuss with you the concerns that we have raised here and the options 

for addressing these concerns based upon our dealings with the interested unions. Regardless of 

your conclusion, we would ask that you advise Ms. Cheryl Perry-League, the director of our 

Office of Equal Opportunity, as to your decision. She may be reached at our headquarters: 530 

Water Street, Oakland, CA 94607 or by telephoning 510-627-1417.” 


57


Letter of Understanding: Union Hiring Hall Procedures 





RE: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement: 

Union Hiring Hall Procedures 


During our negotiations, the local unions raised concerns that their agreement to the provisions of 

the Project Labor Agreement sought by the Owner to enhance employment and contracting 

opportunities for local workers and businesses could give rise to potential fair representation 

claims by members. There were concerns that the local hire goals contained in Article V, Section 

6, whereby 50% of all craft hours would be performed by Local Impact Area residents, could 

expose the local unions to claims by workers on the local unions’ out-of–work lists. 

During our discussions with the Union negotiating committee and in explanatory conversations 

with concerned Locals, we confirmed the intent and effect of that Article to be that the identified 

social justice goals are to be pursued and achieved only in the context of the established hiring 

hall procedures and their normal operation. No Local Union is being asked to alter or dispense 

with their hiring hall procedures. Article V, Section 6 makes it plain that: “The Contractor shall 

make good faith efforts to reach this goal through the utilization of normal hiring hall procedures 

listed in the Schedule A agreements and the resources of the “Community Resource Centers” set 

out in Section 3 of this Article.” (See also, Section 3(e), “…to request a name call consistent 

with normal union hiring hall procedures. (Emphasis added.)) Additionally, Section 8 of that 

Article states the Unions will use the Community-based organizations as a source for hiring 

qualified local residents only, “after their out-of-work lists are exhausted”. 

The Unions have agreed to partner with the Owner and the Project Contractor in many valuable 

areas of cooperation to achieve these mutual and agreed upon goals. They have been asked only 

to respond to dispatch requests, consistent with their hiring hall procedures, in a manner that will 

enhance the Contractors’ ability to meet these goals. 

I trust that this accurately describes our agreement on this issue. If you and the Union 

Negotiating Committee agree that these comments are consistent with your understanding of our 


58

Letter of Understanding: Union Hiring Hall Procedures 


agreement, please indicate your concurrence and acceptance on behalf of the Committee in the 


Sincerely, 




Letter acknowledged and agreed to on behalf off the signatory Union parties this ___ day of 

_________ 2000. 

_________________________ 




59

Letter of Understanding: Contractor Fringe Benefit Contribution Delinquencies 

Draft 

Mr. Barry Luboviski 

Secretary-Treasurer 

Building and Construction Trades Council of Alameda, AFL-CIO 



RE: Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation Project Labor Agreement 

Contractor Fringe Benefit Fund Contribution Delinquencies 


In our negotiations for the captioned Project Labor Agreement, the Unions expressed concerns 

about their ability to recover unpaid fringe benefit contributions from delinquent contractors if 

they agreed, as part of the general commitment not to strike or otherwise disrupt the project or 

the work of a Contractor, to waive the right reserved in some local collective bargaining 

agreements to withdraw labor from a delinquent contractor. We emphasized the importance of 

an unqualified no-strike clause and the removal of any basis for economic action against any 

Contractor or the Project generally. 

In consideration of the Unions’ agreement to the commitments contained in Article X of the 

Project Labor Agreement and their waiver of the right to withhold labor in delinquency 

circumstances on this Project, the Port of Oakland will agree to a procedure to assist in the 

recovery of delinquent payments. The Port agrees, consistent with the General Conditions of its 

contract with the Contractor, to hold retainage monies owed to a delinquent Contractor and to 

issue joint checks to the applicable trust funds to cover demonstrated delinquencies under the 

following conditions. This commitment is independent of and does not interfere with the 

contractual remedies that may otherwise be available to the Unions against such Contractors or 

the general contractor of a delinquent subcontractor under the applicable Schedule As. 

Any trust fund claiming that a Contractor is delinquent in its fringe benefit contributions to the 

fund, will provide written notice of the alleged delinquency to the affected Contractor, with 

copies to DSI/PCI and the Port. The notice will indicate the amount of delinquency asserted and 

the period that the delinquency covers. 

Upon request by the Port, the trust fund or the involved Union will provide documentation of the 

delinquency sufficient to establish the fact and amount of the delinquency. If the Contractor 

acknowledges the delinquency and agrees that the payment may be made from retained funds, or 


60

Letter of Understanding: Contractor Fringe Benefit Contribution Delinquencies 


if the delinquency is disputed but has not been satisfactorily resolved by the parties within thirty 

days following the notice required above, a joint check (or checks) payable to the Contractor and 

the applicable trust fund(s) will be issued. The checks to be issued by the Port will not exceed 

the value of any retainage held by the Port for the delinquent contractor. 

I trust that this procedure is consistent with the understanding reached by the parties in the 

negotiations. If the terms of this letter and the procedure it contains are agreeable to the 

signatory Unions, please indicate your acceptance in the space provided below. 

Sincerely, 

__________________________ 

On behalf of the Port of Oakland 

AGREED and ACCEPTED on behalf of the Building and Construction Trades Council of 

Alameda, AFL-CIO and the local unions signatory to the Port of Oakland Maritime and Aviation 

Project Labor Agreement this _________ day of _______________, 2000 

_____________________________ 



61

APPENDIX C4

SECTION 00550 

EXHIBIT A 

PORT OF OAKLAND MARITIME AND AVIATION PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT (MAPLA) 

SUBSTANCE ABUSE PREVENTION POLICY 

DRUG TESTING 

CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION PACKET 

♦ Contractor Q&A’s 

♦ Program Management Pricing 

♦ Enrollment Instructions 

♦ Registration Form 

♦ Who Should Your Communicator Be? 

♦ Communicator Authorization and 

Setup Forms (2) 

♦ DCC Service Agreement 

♦ Drug & Alcohol Addendum

CONTRACTOR QUESTIONS 

1. Q. What is the DCC (Drugtest.com Contractors Consortium)? 

A. The DCC is an association for participating contractor (subcontractor) companies and their employee 

members who agree to comply with the standardized contractor’s consortium substance abuse policy to 

meet participating owner requirements. DCC is the data management company charged with providing 

the administration of the owner rules. 

2. Q. What is the objective of the DCC? 

A. The primary objective of the DCC is to assist the contractor members and owners in obtaining a drug 

free workplace by providing consistent, objective, fair, and manageable procedures for drug and alcohol 

testing which comply with applicable owner requirements. 

3. Q. Who is a participating contractor? 

A. A participating contractor is a contractor company who works on participating owner job sites and has 

contracted with Drugtest.com to comply with the owner’s substance abuse policy requirements. 

4. Q. Who can work on the participating owner job sites? 

A. Only employees who can demonstrate an (eligible) status in the DCC database. The entire DCC 

system is based on reporting status only (eligible/in eligible) to participating owners. 

5. Q. How do participating contractor employees get into the database? 

A. They are entered into the fully automated DCC database by utilizing what are called, fax forms. The 

form is filled out by an appointed contact person at a participating contractor office, signed by the 

employee, faxed to the dedicated database fax line and uploaded into the database. 

6. Q. What about my Department of Transportation (DOT) people? 

A. Your DOT people can be included under the same account number with a separate random pool to 

meet all DOT requirements. 

7. Q. What about the drug policy I now have in place? 

A. The DCC in no way limits your own company policy and procedures. Drugtest.com can also administer 

your company policy separate from the DCC and DOT programs. 

8. Q. How will billing be handled? 

A. One single bill from Drugtest.com covering drug and alcohol tests, MRO, administration, record storage, 

training etc. is sent to each participating contractor. 

9. Q. How will the owners audit my drug testing program? 

A. Owners can audit contractor programs through computer access to the DCC reporting system.

10. Q. Can our company link into Drugtest.com’s computer system? 

A. Yes, with full internet access 

11. Q. Why doesn’t the DOT program satisfy the owner requirements? 

A. The owners require more stringent testing provisions than the DOT. 

12. Q. Who should be the contact person in our company responsible for receiving information from 

Drugtest.com? 

A. The contact person (communicator) should be assigned to someone who has the authority to receive 

any and all confidential information. We recommend that a minimum of two persons be assigned as 

communicators. 

13. Q. What are the communicator’s responsibilities? 

A. To verify the applicant, receive and disburse random selection list and communicate with the Medical 

Review Officer (MRO) and Drugtest.com. 

14. Q. Who can get actual test results? 

A. Only the communicator(s) at the company who paid for the test and the person who submitted the 

specimen. 

15. Q. How will the contractors be trained to operate the program? 

A. Drugtest.com’s (Quickstart) communicator certification program consists of a two hour session that is 

designed to prepare the designated company communicator to administer the drug testing program. 

They are certified by completing the session and correctly answering the test questions. There is no 

additional charge for this. 

16. Q. How does the communicator handle a positive drug/alcohol test result on a DCC test? 

A. They would handle it in accordance with the policy and procedure. The employee is given a letter 

explaining the policy rules for rehabilitation opportunities/procedures. 

17. Q. Will this program keep me in compliance with all owner requirements? 

A. The DCC program is designed to meet all owner requirements. Client compliance is dependent upon 

meeting responsibilities outlined by the DCC with regard to each program. 

18. Q. Can my entire company operate within the DCC? 

A. Yes, variations are available for multiple testing requirements (tests, random pools, etc.) in addition to 

full DCC compliance. Drugtest.com can also run your corporate and/or DOT program(s) separate from 

the DCC program.

Annual Corporate Member Enrollment Fee 

Maintenance of Total Program per Reporting Location 

Additional $100 Annual Fee per Additional Program (FHWA, RSPA,…) 

Record Set-up Fee Per Person 

Initial One-time Employee Record Set-up and Maintenance Fee 

Administrative Transaction Fee ( C.O.C. Processing ) 

Collection Site Selection & Administration 

Chain of Custody (C.O.C.. Processing) 

Necessary Collection Supplies 

Specimen Collection 

Transportation of Specimen 

Specimen Adulteration Testing 

Specimen Analysis 

DHHS Certified Laboratory GC/MS Confirmations 

Medical Review of Test Results (MRO) 

MRO Return to Duty Program Set-up 

Storage and Documentation of Positive Specimens 

Automated Test Reporting “Negative/Reject” Reporting by Fax/Mail 

Random Selection Pool Management 

Annual Statistical Report 

Drug Program compliance Verification ID Cards 

Employee Status Verification (Active - Inactive) 

$300.00 

Included 

$64.50 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Client Expense 

Included 

Included 

Included 

$37.00 

Included 

Client Expense 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Alcohol Program Management/Record Keeping 

Alcohol Evidential Breath Testing (EBT) at DISA/BTARS Sites 

$10.00 

Alcohol Evidential Breath Testing (EBT) Third Party Sites Actual Cost + $5.00

ENROLLMENT INSTRUCTIONS 

As 

Easy 

as... 

In order to enroll in Drugtest.com, please review the enclosed materials and take 

the following actions. (Enrollment materials must be submitted at least 7-10 days 

before initial testing request.) 

1. Complete Required Forms 

A. Drugtest Inc. Service Agreement 

B. Registration Form : Please complete the highlighted areas 

(Companies wishing to utilize Drugtest.com for DOT compliance should 

indicate so under the DOT Program section.) 

C. Communicator Authorization and Setup: Please complete the 

highlighted areas (One each for primary and backup communicators, see 

“Who Should Your Communicator Be?) 

2. Mail Completed Forms A, B, and C: 10750 Hammerly Blvd. 

Houston, Texas 77043 

Attn: Account Implementation 

3. Annual Corporate Fee Payment must be included (each additional program 

and/or emergency setup add $100.00) 

Should you have any questions regarding these procedures, please contact 

Loreili Babilon, Area Manager, at 510-412-0295 

or 

1-800-DRUGTEST.

Drugtest.com 

10750 Hammerly Blvd, Houston, TX 77043 (713)972-3472 Fax: (713)972-3421 

REGISTRATION FORM 

All information must be completed and a check or purchase order received before account will be activated. 

Client Name: Phone: Fax: 

Physical Address: Physical Suite: 

Phys City, State Zip: , Mailing Address: 

Mailing Suite: Mail City, State, Zip: , 

Invoice To Attn: Billing Address: 

Billing Suite: City, State Zip: , 

Billing Phone: Billing Fax: 

Drugtest.com Consortium Program # Employees: Region: Genentech? Exxon? Drugtest.com Card? Yes 

Consortium Drug Panel, Medical Review Officer (MRO) Services, and Consortium Policy Included 

Random Selection: Rate: Start Date Frequency: monthly Included 

Per Drug Specimen Analyzed 

Employee Record Setup Fee (Per employee, one-time fee) 

Drugtest.com PLA / Port of Oakland Program # Employees: Drugtest.com Card? 

Check all desired panels: Drugtest.com 10 with 20ng THC cutoff Drugtest.com 5 (DHHS levels) Drugtest.com 9 Panel Included 

Medical Review Officer (MRO) Services: Yes Review: Positives Only Review pre-employments? Yes Included 

Random Selection: NO Rate: Start Date: Frequency: Included 

Drugtest.com Policy: Do you require a policy?NO Included 

Per Drug Specimen Analyzed 64.50 

Employee Record Setup Fee (Per employee, one-time fee) 0.00 

DOT Program School Bus? # Employees: Drugtest.com Card? Drug? Alcohol? 

Governing Agencies (check all that apply): DOE FAA FHWA FRA FTA RSPA USCG Included 

Split Specimen Options: RSPA: USCG: All Others: split mandated Included 

Medical Review Officer (MRO) Services: Included 

Random Selection: Rate: 50% or 25%, as required by agency Start Date: Frequency: Included 

DOT Policy: Do you require a policy? Policy should include language Included 

Per Drug Specimen Analyzed 

Employee Record Setup Fee (Per employee, one-time fee) 

Collection Services 

Drug Collection Client Expense 

Breath Alcohol Screen, Confirm, and Record-Keeping at Drugtest.com site 10.00 

Alcohol Screen or Confirm at non-BTARS site Client Expense 

Alcohol Record-Keeping at non-BTARS site: yes 5.00 

Biosite Triage Drug Screening Kits: no 

Saliva Swabs: no 

Blood Alcohol: no 

Training 

Communicator Training (required) No Charge 

Supervisor Training Information (required by DOT and DCC): yes 

Employee Education Information:(required by DOT): yes 

Administrative 

Emergency Setup: no 

Annual Corporate Fee (per reporting location) 300.00 

Overnight, Shipping & Handling Charges Client Expense 

For Office Use Only: 

Account #: Sales: MRO: 600 Lab: Affil.: Special: Subsidiary: 

________________________________________________ _______________________________________________ 

Company Representative Date Drugtest.com Representative Date

WHO SHOULD YOUR COMMUNICATOR BE? 

The confidential link between drugtest.com and your 

company: 

• The only authorized person to receive confidential information 

• Contact between your company and employees 

Duties include: 

• Enrolling employees into program 

• Making sure employees test according to policy 

• Ordering supplies 

• Updating Operations Manual 

Your company will designate: 

• Primary Communicator 

• Backup Communicator

Drugtest.com 

10750 Hammerly Blvd., Houston, TX 77043-2304 Ph: (713) 972-3472 Fax (713) 972-3449 

COMMUNICATOR AUTHORIZATION AND SETUP FORM 

THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED FOR ALL AUTHORIZED COMMUNICATORS TO BE SET UP IN OUR SYSTEM. PLEASE 

MAKE A COPY FOR EACH COMMUNICATOR YOU WISH TO SET UP AND FAX EACH COMPLETED FORM BACK TO 

Drugtest.com. Drugtest.com can provide sophisticated routing of communications based on content. Unless otherwise specified, all 

communications are sent to the Primary communicator by default. If you would like to have additional communicators, please contact 

your Drugtest.com sales representative for information on our additional communications capabilities. 

Client Name: 

Please circle one type of communicator: 

(Primary Backup Positives Positive Backup Randoms Master Random Forms 

Bulletins) 

Communicator Name (first, middle initial, last) ___________________________________ 

Phone (______)___________ Fax (______)______________ E-Mail ___________________ 

Mailing Address _________ _City____________ 

State _____ Zip ________ 

Physical Address ______________________ City ___________ State ______ Zip ________ 

ease circle one method for receiving randoms: 

(E-mail Fax Immediate Voice Response Fax On Demand Mail Overnight/Client Expense) 

Please circle one method for receiving negative test results: 

(E-mail Fax Mail Regular) 

Drugtest.com allows you to search for nearby collection sites, submit forms, and print employee rosters over the internet. 

If you would like to sign up for this service, please fill out the following User ID and Password Information: 

Note: Both User ID and Password MUST BE a minimum of 6 characters long, including at least 2 numbers and 2 letters. For 

example, 

User ID: John25 Password: Blue32. 

User ID: _______________Password: _______________ 

If you would like to restrict times during which Drugtest.com will attempt to send you communications, 

please complete the table below. 

Call After 

Call Before 

Mon-Thur Fri Sat Sun 

Please provide the answers to these three security questions in the table below. 

Questions Answers 

1) What is your Social Security Number? 

2) What Month were you born? 

3) What numeric day were you born?

Drugtest.com 

10750 Hammerly Blvd., Houston, TX 77043-2304 Ph: (713) 972-3472 Fax (713) 972-3449 

COMMUNICATOR AUTHORIZATION AND SETUP FORM 

THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED FOR ALL AUTHORIZED COMMUNICATORS TO BE SET UP IN OUR SYSTEM. PLEASE 

MAKE A COPY FOR EACH COMMUNICATOR YOU WISH TO SET UP AND FAX EACH COMPLETED FORM BACK TO 

Drugtest.com. Drugtest.com can provide sophisticated routing of communications based on content. Unless otherwise specified, all 

communications are sent to the Primary communicator by default. If you would like to have additional communicators, please contact 

your Drugtest.com sales representative for information on our additional communications capabilities. 

Client Name: 

Please circle one type of communicator: 

(Primary Backup Positives Positive Backup Randoms Master Random Forms 

Bulletins) 

Communicator Name (first, middle initial, last) ___________________________________ 

Phone (______)___________ Fax (______)______________ E-Mail ___________________ 

Mailing Address _________ _City____________ 

State ____ Zip _________ 

Physical Address _______________________ City ___________ State ____ Zip _________ 

ease circle one method for receiving randoms: 

(E-mail Fax Immediate Voice Response Fax On Demand Mail Overnight/Client Expense) 

Please circle one method for receiving negative test results: 

(E-mail Fax Mail Regular) 

Drugtest.com allows you to search for nearby collection sites, submit forms, and print employee rosters over the internet. 

If you would like to sign up for this service, please fill out the following User ID and Password Information: 

Note: Both User ID and Password MUST BE a minimum of 6 characters long, including at least 2 numbers and 2 letters. For 

example, 

User ID: John25 Password: Blue32. 

User ID: _______________Password: _______________ 

If you would like to restrict times during which Drugtest.com will attempt to send you communications, 

please complete the table below. 

Call After 

Call Before 

Mon-Thur Fri Sat Sun 

Please provide the answers to these three security questions in the table below. 

Questions Answers 

1) What is your Social Security Number? 

2) What Month were you born? 

3) What numeric day were you born?

This Page is Blank.

APPENDIX D

FedEx Contractor Safety Requirements 

FedEx Contractor Safety Requirements .................................................... 1 

Section 1. Introduction ................................................................................. 3 

1.1. Safety Manual Purpose and Scope................................................................... 3 

1.2. Safety Policy.................................................................................................... 3 

1.3. Goals and Objectives ....................................................................................... 3 

Section 2. Definitions and Acronyms .......................................................... 4 

2.1. General Information......................................................................................... 4 

2.2. Definitions ....................................................................................................... 4 

2.3. Acronyms......................................................................................................... 6 

Section 3. Safety Program Administration................................................. 7 


Section 4. Reporting an Emergency............................................................ 7 


4.2. Definitions ....................................................................................................... 7 

4.3. Emergency Reporting Procedures ................................................................... 8 

4.4. Accidents Involving Serious Injury or Death .................................................. 8 

4.5. Fire or Smoke................................................................................................... 8 

4.6. Chemical or Hazardous Material Spill............................................................. 9 

4.7. Fuel Spill........................................................................................................ 10 

4.8. Property Damage ........................................................................................... 10 

4.9. Severe Weather .............................................................................................. 10 

4.10. Bomb Threat ................................................................................................ 11 

4.11. Evacuation ................................................................................................... 11 

4.12. Transportation.............................................................................................. 12 

4.13. Reporting of Non-Referred Medical Treatment .......................................... 12 

Section 5. Hazard Communication Program........................................... 12 

5.1. General Information....................................................................................... 12 

5.2. Hazardous Materials List............................................................................... 12 

5.3. Material Safety Data Sheets........................................................................... 13 

5.4. Container Labels............................................................................................ 14 

5.5. Hazard Communications................................................................................ 14 

Section 6. Housekeeping............................................................................. 16 


6.2. Definitions ..................................................................................................... 16 

6.3. Housekeeping Procedures.............................................................................. 16 

1 

May 31, 2011

Section 7. Lockout and Tagging ................................................................ 17 


7.2. Lockout and Tagging Procedures .................................................................. 18 

7.3. Construction Equipment Facilities................................................................. 19 

7.4. Existing Operating Facilities and Equipment ................................................ 20 

7.5. Shop Equipment............................................................................................. 21 

7.6. Locks and Multi-Lock Devices...................................................................... 21 

Section 8. Welding, Cutting, and Burning…………...………………….22 

8.1. General Information….…………………………………………22 

8.2. Permit…………………….……………………………………..22 

8.3. Additional Requirements for the MEM Hub……………….…..23 

2 

May 31, 2011

Section 1. Introduction 

1.1. Safety Manual Purpose and Scope 

1.1.1. The FedEx Contractor Safety Requirements identifies the 

specific safety requirements for working within a FedEx 

property. 

1.2. Safety Policy 

1.2.1. Contractor’s managers and supervisors are responsible for 

preventing incidents or conditions that could lead to 

incidents, injuries, illness, or fatalities. The ultimate success 

of the safety program depends on the cooperation of every 

employee. The contractor’s management must ensure that 

safety rules and procedures are enforced and that effective 

training and education programs are employed. 

1.3. Goals and Objectives 

1.3.1. The goals of the safety program are listed below: 

a. eliminate accidents and work related illnesses at FedEx facilities 

b. achieve zero fatalities, zero permanent disabling injuries, and zero lost 

work day cases 

c. eliminate Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 

recordable injuries 

d. eliminate releases to the environment and prevent environmental harm 

1.3.2. The main objective of the safety program is to support and 

assist contractors with their responsibility to control the 

exposures and prevent the incidents that may cause injuries, 

illness, fatalities, equipment damage, fire, and damage or 

destruction of property at FedEx. 

3 

May 31, 2011

Section 2. Definitions and Acronyms 

2.1. General Information 

2.1.1. The definitions listed in paragraph 2 are terms used 

throughout this manual. Definitions that apply only to a 

specific section of the manual are provided in that section. 

2.1.2. The acronyms in paragraph 3 are used throughout the 

manual and listed here for reference. 

2.2. Definitions 

Assembly Area A pre-determined location in which to assemble and conduct a roll 

call in case of an emergency evacuation. 

Competent Person As defined by OSHA, an individual who is capable of identifying 

existing and predictable hazards in the work area that are unsanitary 

or dangerous to employees and who has the authority to correct or 

eliminate the hazards. 

Contract 

Employee 

An employee of a contractor, the employees of subcontractors, 

consultants, vendors, and suppliers. 

Contractor A firm contracted to FedEx Express to perform specified work on 

FedEx premises. For this manual, references to “contractor” mean the 

contractor’s company, and the companies of their subcontractors, 


Contractor’s 

Management 

Contractor’s 

Safety Manager 

Personnel employed by a contractor who are responsible for 

managing, supervising, or directing contract activities and non-FedEx 

employees on site. 

An approved, competent safety professional employed by and 

assigned by the contractor to manage the safety program for a specific 

contract. 

Employee An employee of a contractor, the employees of subcontractors, 


Environmental 

Organization 

(FedEx) 

One of the local FedEx environmental organizations, such as FedEx 

Corporate Safety or FedEx designee. 

FedEx Approval Where possible, a specific approval source (FedEx Representative, the 

site FedEx Corporate Safety, etc.) is required. The term FedEx 

approval is used when the approval source may vary depending upon 

the situation or when approval is obtained through normal FedEx 

business practices. For projects, the project manager must be the final 

and/or confirming authority. 

FedEx 

Representative 

An authorized FedEx employee responsible for work performed by a 

specific contractor. In some cases authority may be formally 

delegated to a responsible representative that is not a FedEx 

employee. 

4 

May 31, 2011

Hazard 

Communication 

Program 

Hazardous 

Material 

A comprehensive program to ensure that hazards from chemicals, 

biological, or radiation are evaluated and that information pertaining 

to these hazards are communicated to contractors and their employees. 

A substance or mixture of substances that may produce adverse 

effects on the health or safety of a human being, due to characteristics 

such as being explosive, flammable, poisonous, irritating, or 

corrosive. 

Hazardous Waste A biological, chemical, or radioactive waste which may pose a hazard 

to people or the environment. 

Maintenance 

Organizations 

Medical Review 

Officer 

FedEx Facility Maintenance 

A licensed physician responsible for receiving laboratory results 

generated by a drug testing program, who has knowledge of substance 

abuse disorders and has been trained to interpret and evaluate an 

individual’s positive test result with his or her medical history and 

other biomedical information. 

Non-Public Area An area with posted requirements for personal protective equipment 

or other safety precautions necessary for entry, such as construction 

sites, mechanical rooms, above-ceiling areas, laboratories and 

confined spaces. 

Premises All FedEx sites, facilities, and property (owned and leased). 

Public Area An area where the general public operates. Public areas include 

offices, assembly areas, cafeterias, and conference rooms. 

Qualified Person An individual who has a recognized degree, certificate, or 

professional standing or extensive knowledge, training, and 

experience and who has successfully demonstrated the ability to 

resolve problems related to the work. 

Recordable Occupational injuries or illnesses as defined in OSHA 1904.12. 

Safety 

Organization 

(FedEx) 

FedEx Corporate Safety 

Security FedEx Corporate Security 

Site “Site” refers to any location on FedEx premises (owned or leased) 

where contractor employees may perform work and includes both 

interior (within buildings) and exterior (grounds, undeveloped 

property, etc.) spaces. 

Site Safety 

Representative 

A member of FedEx Corporate Safety. In cases of emergency, this 

term refers to the designated FedEx safety representative in charge or 

the ranking emergency response officer on the scene. 

Work Activities necessary to provide service, labor, materials, and 

equipment required by the contract. 

Work Area Specific site or location where work is performed. 

5 

May 31, 2011

2.3. Acronyms 


CFR Code of Federal Regulations 

DOT Department Of Transportation 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency 

FM Factory Mutual Property Insurer 

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet 

MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration 

NFPA National Fire Prevention Association 

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

6 

May 31, 2011

Section 3. Safety Program Administration 


3.1.1. The provisions of this manual apply to all FedEx sites; 

however, each site may have specific safety rules and 

regulations that apply when a contractor performs work on 

that site. Contractors are responsible for following the rules 

and regulations applicable to the site. 

3.1.2. Visitors must be escorted by a FedEx employee or SIDA 

approved photo ID contract employee and must follow the 

safety directives of the employee. 

Section 4. Reporting an Emergency 


4.1.1. This section establishes the requirements, responsibilities, 

and methods of notification and response to emergency 

situations. 

4.1.2. Where a specific procedure has not been established, use 

good judgment in determining what actions to take. 

4.1.3. In addition to the reporting requirements of this manual, 

various policies and procedures require that all reports of 

accidents, incidents, or near misses be submitted to the 

FedEx site safety representatives. 

4.1.4. The contractor must identify evacuation routes, assembly 

areas, and tornado safe areas to all contract personnel before 

they begin work on the site. 


4.2.1. All Clear - When an emergency situation is over, the site 

safety representative in charge notifies security to authorize 

employees to return to normal work activities. Security then 

dispatches officers to affected assembly areas to 

communicate the end of the emergency. 

4.2.2. Call List - This is an approved list of individuals appointed 

to be the designated coordinators of emergency response for 

each contractor. 

4.2.3. Emergency - Any unplanned event that adversely affects 

personnel, the environment, or FedEx business is considered 

an emergency. In case of an emergency, refer to the 

following text. 

7 

May 31, 2011

4.3. Emergency Reporting Procedures 

4.3.1. Immediately report an emergency on FedEx property to 

Control or a member of FedEx management by telephone, 

radio, or messenger. 

4.3.2. Contact local FedEx operations management for lists of 

emergency numbers. 

4.3.3. Place emergency phone numbers in conspicuous places 

throughout the work area and on telephones. 

4.3.4. Photographs of emergency situations are prohibited unless 

security gives written approval. 

4.3.5. Do not make comments regarding emergencies to a media 

representative. Refer media inquiries to FedEx Corporate 

Communications 

4.3.6. If there is an evacuation, immediately report to the 

appropriate assembly area. See your supervisor or one of 

the emergency information maps posted in various locations 

in each building to confirm the location of the appropriate 

assembly area. 

4.3.7. Any event from a near miss to a serious injury or fatality 

must be reported to the FedEx project manager as well as to 

FedEx Corporate Safety within 24 hours of the occurrence. 

4.4. Accidents Involving Serious Injury or Death 

4.4.1. In the case of a serious accident, call the emergency 

telephone numbers provided by management for site 

specific numbers for immediate assistance and to obtain 

necessary first aid. 

4.4.2. Qualified FedEx Express personnel will assist in a lifethreatening 

emergency. 

4.4.3. Outside medical assistance should be requested by calling 

the provided emergency numbers when needed. 

4.4.4. Clear the area and keep away non-essential personnel. 

4.4.5. Provide assistance to rescue personnel if requested. 

4.4.6. After proper evacuation of the injured employee, do not 

disturb or remove anything in the immediate area of an 

accident scene without FedEx permission. 

4.4.7. The responsible contractor must make a full investigation 

and submit a report within 24 hours of the event and present 

it to the appropriate FedEx representative. 

4.5. Fire or Smoke 

8 

May 31, 2011

4.5.1. In the event of a fire, use the nearest fire alarm pull station, 

if available, and evacuate the area immediately. If the pull 

station does not activate (fire alarm is NOT sounding) or if 

no pull station is available, call the emergency telephone 

numbers from the nearest phone located in a safe area. 

NOTE: A FEDEX REPRESENTATIVE WILL CONTACT THE FIRE 

DEPARTMENT AND ESCORT THEM TO THE SCENE. 

4.5.2. Contract employees are not required to fight a fire, but may 

attempt to extinguish the fire after activating the fire alarm 

system if they are trained and can do so safely. 

4.5.3. Any contractors attempting to extinguish a fire should have 

been trained within the past 12 months in the safe use of fire 

extinguishers. 

4.5.4. Keep non-essential personnel away from the fire. 

4.5.5. If explosive materials, compressed gases, or Hazard class 

materials are involved or other hazards may exist, ensure 

that affected personnel are immediately evacuated to a safe 

distance. 

NOTE: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO EXTINGUISH THIS TYPE OF FIRE. 

4.5.6. Contractor personnel are to evacuate to assigned FedEx 

assembly areas. Once evacuation is complete, contractors 

must account for everyone for whom they are responsible. 

If an employee is missing, notify local security or fire 

department personnel immediately. 

4.5.7. Responsible or affected contractors must make a full 

investigation of the incident and submit a written report to 

the FedEx representative as well as to FedEx Corporate 

Safety within 24 hours of the occurrence. 

4.6. Chemical or Hazardous Material Spill 

4.6.1. In case of a spill, call the provided emergency telephone 

numbers immediately. Isolate and contain the spill if it is 

safe to do so, as determined by a competent person. 

4.6.2. Comply with the requirements of Section 14, Environmental 

Issues. 





9 

May 31, 2011

4.7. Fuel Spill 

4.7.1. Discharged fuel creates a major threat to personnel, 

equipment, facilities, and cargo. Personnel must regard a 

fuel discharge as a hazard to be eliminated as soon as 

possible. 

4.7.2. If any hazardous or petroleum-based material is spilled or 

released into the environment, report the spill immediately 

to local management and the Maintenance Control 

Information Center (MCIC) at 797-5700. Local 

management must notify the EMD regional/facility 

environmental specialist IMMEDIATELY (toll-free EMD 

Spill Hotline: 1 877- FXSPILL) (Environmental Policy and 

Procedure Manual, ODS-12234). 

4.7.3. A fuel discharge presents a serious fire hazard that extends 

far beyond the area of discharge itself. The highly 

flammable vapors are heavier than air. Under certain wind 

conditions, they may settle and travel along the ground. All 

that is required to start a fire is a source of ignition 

somewhere along the path of travel. 

4.7.4. Personnel should never be permitted to walk or drive 

through the liquid area of a fuel discharge because of the 

extreme hazard in case of ignition (Ramp Ops R2-65-10). 

4.7.5. Driving/walking through the immediate area of a fuel spill 

could result in severe disciplinary action up to and including 

termination (Ramp Ops 2-85-10). 

4.8. Property Damage 

4.8.1. If property under FedEx control is damaged, notify the 

FedEx representative immediately. 

4.8.2. Protect against further damage where possible. 

4.8.3. Keep non-essential personnel away from the area. 





4.9. Severe Weather 

4.9.1. Upon notification of a tornado warning affecting a FedEx 

site, operations will immediately issue a tornado alert (e.g., 

by public address announcement and/or a building sweep.) 

In case of other severe weather, notification may come from 

management or one of the local safety organizations. 

10 

May 31, 2011

4.9.2. Operations management will immediately make appropriate 

public address and public media announcements instructing 

personnel to take appropriate actions. 

4.9.3. Take the following actions during warning conditions. 

• Secure loose materials that can become displaced. 

• Seek shelter in designated tornado safe areas if possible. If not, seek 

shelter in the center of a building or near the strongest supported 

section of the lower levels of a building. 

4.10. Bomb Threat 

4.10.1. Contact a member of FedEx management immediately. If 

possible transfer the call to a local FedEx representative or 

Control room manager. 

4.10.2. When a bomb threat is received, operations will determine 

if an evacuation of the site or buildings is required. Once 

evacuation is complete, each contractor will account for 

their employees. 

4.10.3. If a contractor receives a bomb threat, the responsible or 

affected contractors must make a full investigation of the 

incident and submit a written report to the FedEx 

representative as well as to FedEx Corporate Safety within 

24 hours of the occurrence. 

4.11. Evacuation 

4.11.1. Security and/or operations management will determine if 

evacuation of buildings and site structures is required. 

4.11.2. Security and/or operations management personnel will 

determine the evacuation route and assembly area. 

4.11.3. Leave the affected location by the designated route and 

proceed calmly to the designated assembly location. 

4.11.4. Security and/or management personnel will stay in the 

affected area as long as it is safe to ensure that all personnel 

have evacuated. 

4.11.5. After arriving at the assembly area, contractors and the 

FedEx representative must report to operations management 

any problems relating to the emergency. 

4.11.6. When evacuation is complete, contractors must account for 

their personnel. 

4.11.7. A FedEx evacuation also requires that contract employees 

evacuate. This includes members of management and staff 

personnel. 

11 

May 31, 2011

4.12. Transportation 

4.12.1. It is the policy of FedEx that first aid, medical, and 

emergency transportation is to be provided by the contractor 

for employees who sustain occupational injuries or illness. 

FedEx Express personnel will assist when injuries are 

serious or life threatening. 

4.12.2. Contact operation to request and escort an emergency 

vehicle onto the site. 

4.12.3. Contractors must provide non-emergency transportation for 

their employees from the job site to the specified doctor’s 

office or clinic. 

4.13. Reporting of Non-Referred Medical Treatment 

4.13.1. Contractors must notify FedEx of employees who have 

obtained outside medical treatment for an alleged FedExsite 

related injury or illness. The responsible contractor 

must submit a report to the FedEx project manager or 

representative as well as to FedEx corporate Safety within 

24 hours of the occurrence. 

Section 5. Hazard Communication Program 


5.1.1. Contractors must establish and maintain a written, 

comprehensive hazard communication program that 

complies with applicable state law and includes: 

a. A list of hazardous materials in the workplace 

b. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) 

c. Provisions for container labeling 

d. An employee training program 

5.1.2. Hazard communication programs may differ between sites, 

areas, and departments at FedEx facilities. Contact the 

FedEx representative or the site safety organization for 

specific hazard communication concerns relevant to the 

location and department. 

5.1.3. Refer to the DOT Emergency Response Guidebook for 

information about hazardous material spills. 

5.2. Hazardous Materials List 

5.2.1. Contractors must prepare a hazardous materials list before 

the materials arrive on site. 

12 

May 31, 2011

5.2.2. The hazardous materials list must contain: 

a. The chemical name or the common name used on the MSDS or 

container label 

b. The quantity usually stored on site in the following ranges: 

• Class A for quantities of less than 55 gallons or 500 pounds 

• Class B for quantities between 55 and 550 gallons or 500 and 5,000 

pounds 

• Class C for quantities between 550 and 5,500 gallons or 5,000 and 

50,000 pounds 

• Class D for quantities greater than 5,500 gallons or 50,000 pounds 

c. The area where the hazardous material is stored and to what extent it 

may be stored at altered temperature or pressure 

5.2.3. The hazardous materials list must be prepared for each work 

area and updated within 30 days of the addition or removal 

of a hazardous material, or when the quantity stored changes 

enough for it to be listed in a different class. The entire 

hazardous materials list must be updated at least annually. 

5.2.4. Contractors may be requested to submit electronic or hard 

copies of the hazardous materials list and material safety 

data sheets to the FedEx representative before the hazardous 

materials are brought on site. 

5.2.5. The FedEx representative will forward a copy of the list to 

the site safety organization, which will retain one copy for 

their files and hold the second copy for the local fire 

department. 

5.2.6. Upon receiving and forwarding this information, FedEx does 

not imply acceptance of responsibility or guarantee 

completeness or accuracy of contractor submittals. 

5.2.7. The use of hazardous materials in a FedEx facility requires 

consultation with the site safety organization and operations 

management. 

5.2.8. Hazardous materials may not be stored on site without 

written consent from the site safety organization and 

operations management. 

5.3. Material Safety Data Sheets 

5.3.1. Contractors must maintain the most current material safety 

data sheets provided by manufacturers and distributors of 

the material. If the contractor does not receive an MSDS 

from the manufacturer or distributor, the contractor should 

submit a written request for one. As a general guideline, an 

13 

May 31, 2011

MSDS dated three years earlier than the submission date 

should not be submitted to FedEx without verification that it 

is the latest version of the document. 

5.3.2. Beyond the identity information, the MSDS must provide 

information in the areas required by OSHA in 1910.1200(g) 

(2). 

5.3.3. A copy of each MSDS must be maintained at the work site. 

The copy must be easily accessible to contractors, 

employees, and FedEx personnel. 

5.4. Container Labels 

5.4.1. Contractors must ensure that labels on incoming containers 

are not removed or defaced, and that containers are clearly 

marked. 

5.4.2. Each container must be labeled, logged, or marked with the 

identity of the hazardous chemical it contains, and it must 

show appropriate hazard warnings for employee protection. 

The hazard warning can be messages, words, pictures, or 

symbols used to convey the hazard. Labels must be legible, 

in English (plus any other language required), prominently 

displayed, and meet OSHA and DOT requirements. 

5.5. Hazard Communications 

5.5.1. Contractors must have a means of informing employees of 

the hazardous materials associated with the work they 

perform, and communicating information on hazards in the 

FedEx facilities at which they are working. 

5.5.2. Contractors must train employees to recognize and avoid 

hazards and train them in the use of personal protective 

equipment to be used when working with hazardous 

materials. 

5.5.3. Employee Information and Training 

a. Contractors must establish a training and information program for 

employees potentially exposed to hazardous materials in their work area 

at the time of initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is 

introduced to their work area. The discussion topics must include at a 

minimum: 

• Existence of the hazard communication standard and its requirements 

• Operations in the work area where hazardous materials are present 

• Where the contractor will keep the written hazard evaluation 

procedures, communications program, hazardous materials list, and the 

required MSDS. 

14 

May 31, 2011

. Training must comply with OSHA standards and, at a minimum, focus 

on the following: 

• How the hazard communication program is implemented on site, how 

to read and interpret information on labels and an MSDS, and how 

employees can obtain and use the available hazard information 

• Hazards of the materials in the workplace 

• Measures employees can take to protect themselves from hazards 

• Specific procedures put into effect by the contractor to provide 

protection, such as work practices and using personal protective 

equipment 

• Methods and observations, such as appearance or smell, workers can 

use to detect the presence of a hazardous material to which they may 

be exposed 

c. Where necessary, FedEx will provide training on the unique hazards 

that contractors may encounter in FedEx facilities. 

d. For further information, contractors not familiar with the applicable 

State’s hazard communication program are encouraged to contact the 

Department of Labor in the State where the site is located. 

e. Contractors must report to the FedEx representative any illness or injury 

known or suspected to be associated with hazardous material use or 

potential exposure while on FedEx premises. 

• Hazardous Materials 

f. Contractors are responsible for the safe use, storage, transportation, and 

disposal, in accordance with applicable laws, of chemicals or hazardous 

materials used in the performance of their work. 

g. Contractors must have available for FedEx a list of chemicals or 

materials used in the performance of their work and a copy of the 

MSDS for each material. The receipt of the list or MSDS by FedEx 

does not relieve the contractor from requiring employees and other 

persons performing work to assume responsibility for the safe use, 

storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. 

h. Contractors must require their suppliers, agents, and employees of other 

persons performing work to use an approved substitute chemical or 

material in the place of a chemical or material that FedEx requests not 

be used for the work. 

i. Chemicals or materials brought on site by employees and other persons 

performing work must bear a label stating the identity of the chemical or 

material, hazards associated with it, and the name of responsible party 

bringing the chemical or material onto the site. 

15 

May 31, 2011

j. Waste resulting from the work must be properly disposed of by the 

responsible contractor in accordance with local, State and Federal 

regulations. If uncertain about proper waste disposal, contact the FedEx 

environmental organization. Do not dispose of waste in site dumpsters. 

k. Hazardous materials, pollutants, and contaminants encountered or 

generated from soils or facilities in place prior to commencement of 

work, or from portions of the contract already completed by other 

contractors, are the responsibility of FedEx. These will be disposed of 

as directed by FedEx Corporate Safety in accordance with applicable 

laws. The contractor must immediately notify FedEx if hazardous 

substances, pollutants, and contaminants are encountered at the work 

site. 

l. Contractors are required to keep accurate records of the types and 

quantities of waste, including hazardous waste, and the facilities in 

which the wastes are treated, incinerated, or disposed. The contractor 

must provide FedEx with copies of these records. Liquids (including 

muddy water) or chemicals should not be pumped or allowed to flow 

into a sewer. Do not clean equipment or change lubrication or 

pneumatic fluids in areas that are not equipped with spill contaminant 

and control facilities. 

Section 6. Housekeeping 


6.1.1. Good housekeeping is mandatory. Contractors must keep 

their work area neat, clean, and orderly. 

6.1.2. If a contractor’s work area is not kept clean, FedEx may 

have the area cleaned and charge the cost to the contractor. 

FedEx may also stop work until the area has been cleaned. 


6.2.1. A barricade is a device used to direct and protect pedestrians 

and vehicles from a work area. 

6.2.2. A trash chute is a controlled means of conveying debris from 

an elevated location to the ground. 

6.3. Housekeeping Procedures 

6.3.1. Keep work areas, passageways, fire exits, fire lanes, and 

stairs in and around the buildings and structures clear of 

debris at all times. 

6.3.2. Store materials, equipment, and tools in an orderly manner. 

6.3.3. Keep storage areas and walkways free of dangerous 

depressions, obstructions, and debris. 

16 

May 31, 2011

6.3.4. Clean the work area daily and dispose of debris in 

dumpsters, or off site in accordance with the environmental 

requirements of FedEx, the EPA, and other regulatory 

agencies. 

6.3.5. Dumpsters 

a. Do not allow dumpsters to block fire exits, fire lanes, fire hydrants, or 

traffic areas (personnel or vehicular). 

b. Keep dumpsters that are not part of a trash chute a minimum of 50 feet 

from structures. 

c. Barricade the areas around dumpsters that are part of a trash chute. 

d. If dumpsters are used in combination with trash chutes, employees are 

not allowed inside the barricaded area or dumpster unless trash chute 

loading locations have a door and lock, which ensures that no material 

can be placed in the chute while work is being performed inside the 

barricaded area or dumpster. 

Section 7. Lockout and Tagging 


7.1.1. The Lockout/Tagout Program is required to provide a safe, 

healthy, and productive work environment for personnel 

performing work activities where inadvertent energizing of 

equipment could present personal injury or equipment 

damage. 

7.1.2. Federal Express Maintenance Management is responsible for 

ensuring that all contractors and maintenance personnel (in 

their respective areas) involved in procedures outlined in the 

following sections, are trained and equipped to meet 

program objectives. 

7.1.3. Each time a piece of equipment is shutdown for servicing 

and/or maintenance, it is important to protect employees in 

the area from the hazards associated with the inadvertent 

energizing of such equipment. Both maintenance and 

operations are affected by the hazards of shutdown 

equipment. 

7.1.4. The Lockout/Tagout Program will let operations know that 

the equipment is out of service, why, and when maintenance 

is completed. In return, maintenance needs to understand the 

hazards associated with the inadvertent energizing of such 

equipment during shutdown and that the program protects 

them during such work activity. 

17 

May 31, 2011

7.1.5. This procedure, when used in combination with other safety 

procedures, is designed to provide the necessary 

communication between operations and maintenance to 

assure the safety of all employees. 

7.1.6. Equipment, piping, machinery, and electrical circuits will be 

isolated, de-energized, or otherwise shut down when work 

that could result in personal injury or equipment damage is 

to be performed. 

7.1.7. Each individual working on a piece of equipment or exposed 

to hazards must be protected from injury by individual 

lockout or group lockout. 

7.1.8. In all cases, each individual must verify that equipment is 

Safe to work on before proceeding with the work. 

7.2. Lockout and Tagging Procedures 

7.2.1. Do not work on equipment until it is de-energized and tested 

using this procedure. 

7.2.2. Approved, site-specific procedures for lockout and tagging 

must be followed. Lockout and tagging must include the 

following elements: 

a. Use only standard construction danger tags and single-key locks. 

b. When tags are used, fill in only the spaces provided to indicate a 

description of the equipment, circuit number involved, date, signature, 

company name and contact number. Attach tags securely. Do not use 

tags without locks 

c. Never alter tags. Destroy dedicated tags immediately upon removal. 

d. Do not operate equipment with a tag or lock attached regardless of the 


e. Operating a valve or switch to which danger tags are attached, or 

removing a lock without authorization may result in removal from 

FedEx premises. 

f. If the tag originator is off the site, the originator’s supervisor and a 

FedEx representative or designee may remove the lock and tag, or 

authorize removal after verifying the system or device is safe and 

clearing it with the appropriate trade‘(s). The authorization to remove 

the lock must be in writing. For existing FedEx facilities, authorization 

must involve the site facility operations representative. 

g. A minimum two-tier lockout and tagging system is required for existing 

FedEx facilities. 

• Personnel responsible for facility operations at the site must place the 

first lock on any circuit that is being locked-out. After ensuring that 

18 

May 31, 2011

all parties have completed their work and removed their locks, the 

party who placed the first lock will remove the lock. 

• Each company working in the area affected by the lock-out must place 

an additional lock. A supervisor may place one lock for multiple 

individuals, but only if all of the individuals are under his/her direct 

supervision. When each company/person completes work in the area, 

the person who placed the lock will remove it. (Every individual 

working in the affected area has the right to place a lock.) 

h. FedEx Express or the FedEx designated representative is responsible for 

breaking flanges, placing blanks, draining, and decontaminating certain 

equipment or systems prior to release for work. No work requiring 

lockout or tagging should be conducted without the approved work 

permit. 

i. Tags required beyond one shift will be replaced by the oncoming shift, 

or by the FedEx representative if no work is scheduled and the system 

remains shut down. Engineers or superintendents may be designated by 

FedEx to act in this capacity. Long term lockouts may not require shift 

replacement, if so determined by FedEx’s representative. 

7.3. Construction Equipment Facilities 

7.3.1. Electrically Operated Systems 

a. The FedEx representative places multi-lock devices when other crafts 

are involved in the shutdown. 

b. The FedEx representative opens the switch, pulls power and control 

fuses, places the lock and tag, and tests the equipment to verify it is 

inactive. 

c. Personnel from other crafts performing work place their locks and tags 

on the representative’s multi-lock device. Where several craftspersons 

of one craft are involved, the foreman may place one lock on the multilock 

device, and then the craftspersons may place their locks and tags on 

the multi-lock device after witnessing a proper test. 

d. Upon completion of work, personnel from other crafts remove their 

locks and tags. 

e. The FedEx representative’s lock and tag is the last to be removed. After 

ensuring that everyone is clear, the representative removes the lock and 

tag. 

f. New work is inspected and tested. 

7.3.2. Piping Systems 

a. The piping contractor places multi-lock devices when other crafts are 

involved in the shutdown. 

b. The piping contractor de-energizes, locks, tags, and tests the system. 

19 

May 31, 2011

c. Personnel from other crafts performing work place their locks and tags 

on the piping contractor’s multi-lock device. Where several 

craftspersons of one craft are involved, the foreman may place one lock 

on the multi-lock device, and then the craftspersons may place their 

locks and tags on the multi-lock device. 

d. Upon completion of work, personnel from other crafts remove their 

locks and tags. 

e. The piping contractor’s lock and tag is the last to be removed. After 

ensuring everyone is clear, the piping contractor removes the lock and 

tag and notifies FedEx. 

7.4. Existing Operating Facilities and Equipment 

7.4.1. Electrically Operated Systems 

a. The FedEx representative de-energizes the system, demonstrates that 

the power is off to the electrician and other contractors, and locks and 

tags the system. 

b. A qualified person ensures that fuses are removed and locks, tags, and 

verifies that the system is inactive. 

c. Other personnel may place locks and tags as described in paragraph 

3.1.C. 

d. Upon completion of work, the FedEx representative removes their lock 

and tag and replaces fuses where required. 

e. The FedEx representative checks the system and re-energizes the 

circuits. 

f. New work is inspected and tested. 

7.4.2. Other Systems 

a. The FedEx representative de-energizes the system and places a lock and 

tag. 

b. The FedEx representative directs the contractor as to where to make 

first break of flanges and where to place blanks. The FedEx 

representative then verifies the system is empty and decontaminated. 

c. The piping contractor verifies the system is de-energized, makes the 

first break in the flange, places blanks as directed by the FedEx 

representative, and places the piping contractor’s tag and lock. The 

FedEx representative then places the manager’s lock and tag. 

d. Personnel of other crafts may then place locks and tags, perform work, 

and remove them upon completion of their work. 

e. The appropriate contractor ensures the system is clear and removes their 

lock and tag. When completed, the contractor notifies FedEx that the 

system is acceptable, and the contractor’s lock and tag is removed. 

20 

May 31, 2011

f. The FedEx representative removes the lock and tag and re-energizes the 

system. 

g. New systems are inspected and tested. 

7.5. Shop Equipment 

7.5.1. Authorized operators of shop equipment must lock out their 

equipment to change tools, chucks, blades, and perform 

similar tasks. A power disconnect switch will be provided 

for this purpose at or near the equipment unless the 

equipment can be unplugged. 

7.5.2. Do not use pushbutton controls or butterfly valves for 

lockout. 

7.5.3. Do not use a tag without a lock without coordinating with 

FedEx. 

7.6. Locks and Multi-Lock Devices 

7.6.1. Use only single-key locks. The key must remain in the 

possession of the person placing the lock. 

7.6.2. The prime craft directly related to the item to be locked out 

will provide and install multi-lock devices. 

21 

May 31, 2011

Section 8. Welding, Cutting, and Burning 


8.1.1. The Hot Work Procedure is required to provide a safe, 

healthy, and productive work environment for personnel 

performing hot work activities. 

8.1.2. FedEx management is responsible for ensuring that all 

contractors and maintenance personnel involved in hot work 

activities are trained and equipped as required by Federal 

Express Policy and OSHA title 29, CRF part 1910, subpart 

Q, and part 1926, subparts E & J. This procedure shall be 

required at all FedEx leased or owned facilities. 

8.2. Permits 

8.2.1. Welding, cutting, or spark-producing work (Hot Work) is 

prohibited until the appropriate percautions are complete per 

FM Global “Hot Work Training 

8.2.2. Anyone involved in “Hot Work” must complete FM 

Global’s “Hot Work Training”. The training is available at 

the following website: 

a. http://fmglobaltraining.skillport.com 

8.2.3. Prior to any “Hot Work”, the contractor will designate a 

“Fire Safety Supervisor” for all work. The Fire Safety 

Supervisor will be responsible for ensuring all “Hot Work” 

is completed following FM Global’s “Hot Work Training”. 

8.2.4. Within areas with sprinkler protection, the sprinkler system 

shall be operational at all times during the performance of 

open flame work — unless the site safety organization has 

issued special permission. Under no circumstance are hotwork 

permits to be issued for areas in which the sprinkler 

system is impaired or malfunctions. 

8.2.5. For the Memphis Hub, the contractor will contact the 

Maintenance Control and Information Center at (901-224- 

6800) to ensure the sprinkler system in the area where 

welding, cutting, or spark-producing work is to be 

preformed is operational. 

22 

May 31, 2011

8.2.6. FM Global approved welding curtains, blankets and pads 

must be used to contain the sparks, slag, etc. that may be 

produced during “Hot Work”. 

8.2.7. Failure to follow the Hot Work permit procedure will result 

in immediate suspension of the work and removal of all 

people associated with the unauthorized work. 

8.2.8. Repeated failure to follow the Hot Work permit procedure 

will result in termination of all work and removal of the 

contractor/sub contractor from FedEx property. 

8.3. Additional Requirements for the MEM Hub 

8.3.1. The contractor will provide FedEx Hot Work plan showing 

location of where the work is to be done a minimal of one 

week prior to performing the work. 

8.3.2. Contractor will pre-inspect the Hot Work area a minimal of 

three days before the Hot Work is scheduled to be 

performed and contract the Maintenance Control and 

Information Center (901-224-6800) if additional cleaning is 

necessary. 

8.3.3. A construction notification must be sent out prior to Hot 

Work being performed. The construction notification 

should be sent to the FedEx Representative as identified in 

the contract documents at least two days before the work is 

to be preformed. 

8.3.4. The contractor will contact the Maintenance Control and 

Information Center at (901-224-6800) to ensure the 

sprinkler system in the area where Hot Work is to be 

preformed is operational. 

23 

May 31, 2011

TranSystems Corporation - LGM Construction

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?